all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photo | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.62 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual Part 3 | Users Manual | 1.68 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
External Photo | External Photos | 1.67 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Label Detail | ID Label/Location Info | 77.19 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Agency Form | Cover Letter(s) | 77.34 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 114.75 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos |
1 2 3 | User Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.62 MiB |
FOMA P906i 08.4 ISSUE DATE:
NAME:
PHONE NUMBER:
MAIL ADDRESS:
INSTRUCTION MANUAL Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Before Using the Handset Voice/Videophone Calls PushTalk Phonebook Sound/Screen/Light Settings Security Settings Camera i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Mail i-ppli Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa GPS Function 1Seg Full Browser/PC Movie Data Display/Edit/Management Music&Video Channel/Music Playback Convenient Functions Character Entry Network Services PC Connection Overseas Use Appendix/External Devices Troubleshooting Index/Quick Manual DoCoMo W-CDMAGSM/GPRS system Thank you for selecting the FOMA P906i. Before or during use of the FOMA P906i , make sure that you read this manual and the separate manuals for other optional devices thoroughly so that you can use the FOMA P906i correctly. If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the DoCoMo Information Center listed on the back page of this manual. The FOMA P906i is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to ensure long-term performance. It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information (such as Phonebook entries, schedule events, text memos, record messages, voice memos, movie memos) stored in the FOMA phone and keep them in a safe place. Note that we cannot be held responsible for the unlikely event of loss of the stored contents due to a malfunction, repair, change of your model, or other mishandling of the FOMA phone. You are advised to save your important data files to the microSD card. If you have a personal computer, you can transfer and save the information such as Phonebook entries, mail messages, schedule events, and others to the personal computer by using DoCoMo keitai datalink. Before using your FOMA phone Because the FOMA phones use radio waves, they cannot be used in places where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels, underground, or in buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA service area. They may not be used in the high-rise buildings even when the antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls even when using without moving while the radio waves are strong enough for the three antennas to appear on the display. Use the FOMA phone carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in public, or in crowded or quiet places. Since the FOMA phones use radio waves as the medium of telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party. However, the W-CDMAGSM/GPRS system automatically supports tapping prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party. The FOMA phones change your voice into digital signals and send them to the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the digital signals may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice may sound different from the actual original voice. The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL. Neither DoCoMo nor the certifiers as listed herein make any representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL, neither DoCoMo nor the certifiers shall be responsible for any such damage or loss. Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust, Inc., GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Inc., and SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd. This FOMA phone supports FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA High-Speed Area. The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by DoCoMo and in DoCoMos roaming area. For Using This Manual This FOMA phone supports Kisekae Tool (page 121). If you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply. In that case, you cannot operate as described in this manual, so you are advised to switch to the basic structure menu
(page 121), or reset menu settings (page 121). You can download the latest information about this manual from the following DoCoMo web site:
Users Manual (PDF file) Download
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html) The URL and the content of the web site might be modified without notice. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions How to Read/Refer to This Manual In this manual, illustrations and symbols are used in the explanations so that you can correctly and easily use the FOMA phone. pThe operating procedures and displays in this manual are described with the default settings of the White handset mainly. However, the following settings are changed. Display setting Stand-by display: OFF Display setting Standby disp. Wide: OFF Display setting Clock Position: Pattern 2 Menu icon setting: Metal pUnless otherwise specified, the descriptions of the operating procedures in this manual start from the Stand-by display. pOperations are described in the method of Scroll Selection (see page 33). pDisplays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones might differ. pIn this manual, Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli which supports the IC card function is described as Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli. pNote that FOMA P906i is referred to as FOMA phone in this manual. pIn the operating procedures of this manual, key operations are described with simplified key icons. pThe functions which use a microSD card are described in this manual; however, you need to obtain a microSD card separately to make these functions available. See page 355 for the microSD card. How to Refer to This Manual By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired functions and services are described:
From the Index Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services. From Easy Search Search from keywords for the functions you frequently use or the functions that are convenient if you can know any. See the next page for details. From the Tabs on the Cover Search from the tabs printed on the cover. From the Contents Search from the contents that categorize functions.
P.6 From the Main Functions P.8 Search from here to use the main functions. From the Function List P.482 Search from the function list. From Quick Manual Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief description about basic functions. You can take it when you go out. Further, Quick Manual For Overseas Use is attached, so refer to it when you use the FOMA phone overseas.
P.550 It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission. The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice. 1
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
How to search for Alarm is explained here as an example of search method. From the Index
P.542 Search for a function or a service name as shown on the right. p
) Additional service . 462 Additional guidance . 463 Address link function. 188 Alarm. 408 Alarm setting . 416 Answer setting . 66 Antenna. 27 From Easy Search
P.4 Search for the function you frequently use or that is convenient if you can know any as shown on the right. Other things you can do To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 118 To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 165 To check the location where you are,or the surroundings .....<GPS Function> 278 To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 355 To exchange information using infrared rays......... <Infrared Data Exchange> 367 To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 392 To use the FOMA phone as an alarm clock .......................................<Alarm> 408 To use the FOMA phone as a calculator .....................................<Calculator> 421 To use the FOMA phone overseas...........................<International Roaming> 472 To bring software programs up to date............................. <Software Update> 528 To bring security up to date ........................................... <Scanning Function> 534 Go to page 408 where Alarm is explained. From the Tabs on the Cover
Cover page Search for the function you want to set in the order of Cover First page of Chapter Description page as shown on the right. Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa GPS Function 1Seg Full Browser/PC Movie Data Display/Edit/Management Music&Video Channel/Music Playback Convenient Functions Character Entry Network Services PC Connection Overseas Use Appendix/External Devices Troubleshooting Index/Quick Manual 2 Multitask . <Multitask> 405 Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail Message by Voice
. <Reading Aloud> 406 Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a Specified Time
. <Auto Power ON/OFF> 408 Using Alarm. <Alarm> 408 Using Calendar to Manage Schedule . <Schedule> 411 Using ToDo to Manage Schedule . <ToDo> 415 Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm . <Alarm Setting> 416 Function name You can find this in Index. Menu number
(See page 35)
<Alarm>
Using Alarm You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone, animation and illumination. You can store up to twelve alarms.
+m-4-4 Operating procedure
(See page 33) 1 mStationeryAlarm
Highlight an alarm and press l(
Do the following operations.
) Operation/Explanation You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Enter the time for sounding the alarm.
You cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored alarm.
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
If you set Step, the alarm tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6. You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF ON. Sounds at the same volume as set for Alarm volume. OFF. Sounds at the volume set for this function. Reference display
(Characters and settings are for reference.) Item Alarm Time Tone Volume Prefer manner mode s n o i t c n u F t n e i n e v n o C Chapter title You can search by chapter. Options and their explanations 2 Press l(
). 408 Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Go to step 1 of Using Alarm on page 408. You can display the stored alarm contents. You can validate the stored alarm.
YES
You can validate also by pressing Oo(
You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES
Delete thisYES
Enter you Terminal Security CodeYES Edit Detail Set this Set all Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete all) Information
During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Volume (earpiece volume).
When you set the power to automatically turn on and an alarm to sound, the default alarm tone sounds if the alarm which is set with the UIM restrictions has been selected.
Turn off the FOMA phone after setting Auto power ON to OFF when you are near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals. When you set an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, and ToDo The icon appears on the desktop.
If you set Alarm of the stored schedule event/ToDo item to OFF, the icons are not
. Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time). Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only. displayed. Items shown on the display
(Some items cannot be executed.) Operation and supplementary explanation for each item Lower sub-menu item of the Function menu Cautions or references for using each function Operations related to the function and explanations for supplementary operations
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Note: The page above is a sample. 3
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Easy Search To retrieve the operation for the desired function with simple words, refer to the following:
To know convenient functions for making calls To change/know display settings To/Not to notify your phone number to the other party
....................................................................................<Caller ID Notification> 47 To switch to a videophone call during a voice call
...........................................................................<Switch to Videophone Call> 53 To change a volume level of the other partys voice ....................... <Volume> 67 To put a call on hold during a call.................................................... <Holding> 68 To know the meaning of marks (icons) on the display .....................<Display> 30 To change the menu display .................................................. <Simple Menu> 38 To change the Stand-by display (Wallpaper) ...................... <Display Setting> 115 To display a calendar on the Stand-by display..............................<Calendar> 115 To change the character size ...............................................<Character Size> 129 To make full use of mail To send Deco-mail ...................................................................... <Deco-mail> 202 To send images ....................................................................... <Attachments> 210 To sort and save mail automatically ..............................................<Auto-sort> 231 To make full use of camera To change the shooting size...................................................... <Image Size> 160 To save to the microSD card ...............................<Storage Setting (Store In)> 162 To display shot images......................................................... <Picture Viewer> 330 To do the following when you cannot answer calls To put an incoming call on hold before answering ......................... <On Hold> 68 To convey the message that you need to refrain from talking on the phone
........................................................................... <Public Mode (Drive Mode)> 69
............................................................................. <Public Mode (Power Off)> 70 To record voice/video messages.......................... <Record Message Setting> 71 To change melody or illumination To adjust the ring volume ........................................................ <Ring Volume> 68 To change ring tones according to callers...................... <Add to Phonebook> 92 To change ring tones........................................................ <Select Ring Tone> 108 To know incoming calls by vibrator .................................................<Vibrator> 110 To silence the keypad sound................................................ <Keypad Sound> 111 To activate Manner Mode...................................................... <Manner Mode> 112 To change colors/lighting patterns of Call indicator for incoming calls
.................................................................................................. <Illumination> 122 4
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
To use the FOMA phone with a sense of security Other things you can do To lock the FOMA phone from away when it gets lost .... <Omakase Lock>1 135 To keep Phonebook entries from prying eyes .........................<Secret Mode> 141 To reject calls without a caller ID..............................<Call Setting without ID> 144 To reject calls from the phone numbers not in the Phonebook ............................................................ <Reject Unknown> 145 To separately store Phonebook and other data files in preparation for their erasure.................... <Data Security Service>2 145 1 This is a pay service. 2 This is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. To make full use of 1Seg To watch 1Seg programs ...................................................... <Activate 1Seg> 295 To record 1Seg programs.................. <Record Video> <Record Still Images> 303 To book/To set timer recording for 1Seg programs
...............................................................<Book Program> <Timer Recording> 304 To change settings of video and audio...................................<User Settings> 309 To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 118 To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 165 To check the location where you are,or the surroundings .....<GPS Function> 278 To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 355 To exchange information using infrared rays......... <Infrared Data Exchange> 367 To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 392 To use the FOMA phone as an alarm clock .......................................<Alarm> 408 To use the FOMA phone as a calculator .....................................<Calculator> 421 To use the FOMA phone overseas...........................<International Roaming> 472 To bring software programs up to date............................. <Software Update> 528 To bring security up to date ........................................... <Scanning Function> 534 pThe operating procedures for frequently used functions are summarized in Quick Manual. (See page 550) 5 Contents How to Read/Refer to This Manual ... 1 Easy Search........................................4 Contents .............................................6 Main Functions of FOMA P906i ........8 Making Full Use of FOMA P906i! ....10 Safety Precautions .......................... 12 Notes on Handling........................... 18 Intellectual Property Rights............ 22 Accessories and Main Options ...... 24 Security Settings 131
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Before Using the Handset 25 Voice/Videophone Calls 49 Phone Parts and Functions, Style, Display, Method for Selecting Menu, Simple Menu, Guide, UIM (FOMA Card), Battery, Charging, Power ON/OFF, Initial Setting, Set Time, Select Language, Caller ID Notification, Own Number, etc. Making a Call/Videophone Call, Call Records, Chaku-moji, WORLD CALL, Hands-free, Receiving a Call/Videophone Call, Volume, Ring Volume, Public Mode (Drive Mode), Public Mode (Power Off), Record Message Setting, Chara-den, etc. PushTalk 81 What is PushTalk?, Making a PushTalk Call, Add Member, Receiving a PushTalk Call, PushTalk Phonebook, Setting PushTalk Calling/Receiving, etc. Phonebook 91 Sound/Screen/
Light Settings 107 Available Phonebooks, Add to Phonebook (FOMA phone/UIM), Group Setting, Search Phonebook, No. of Phonebook, Two-touch Dial, Voice Dial, Data Security Service, etc. Select Ring Tone, Vibrator, Manner Mode, Display Setting, Backlight, Menu Icon Setting, Kisekae Tool, Horizontal Open Menu, FeelMail, Illumination, Desktop Icon, Font, etc. 6 Passwords, Change Security Code, Releasing PIN Lock, Lock All, Omakase Lock, Self Mode, Personal Data Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, Secret Mode, Mail Security, Call Setting without ID, Reject Unknown, etc. Before Using Cameras, Still Image Shoot, Moving Image Shoot, Settings for Shooting Images, Setting Image Size/Image Quality, Bar Code Reader, Text Reader What is i-mode?, iMenu, My Menu, Change i-mode Password, Enter URL, Bookmark, Screen Memo, Download, Upload, SSL Certificate, Client Certificate, What is i-motion?, What is i-Channel?, etc. i-mode Mail, Deco-mail, Decome-Anime, Template, Attachments, Mail Auto-receive, Receive Option, Check New Message, Message R/F, What is Emergency Alert Area Mail?, Chat Mail, SMS, Web Mail, etc. What is i-ppli?, i-ppli Download, i-ppli Run, ippli Settings, Starting i-ppli Automatically, i-ppli Stand-by Display, ippli(microSD) Camera 147 i-mode/i-motion/
i-Channel 171 Mail 197 i-ppli 249 Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa 265 What is Osaifu-Keitai?, What is iC Transfer Service?, IC Card Content, Check IC Owner, What is ToruCa?, Obtain ToruCa Files, ToruCa Viewer, ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display, ToruCa Settings, IC Card Lock GPS Function 277 About Using GPS Function, Position Location, GPS compatible i-ppli, Provide Location, Notify of Location, Location History, Service Settings, GPS Settings Character Entry 435 Character Entry, Mode 1 (5-touch), Common Phrases, Cut/Copy/Paste, Own Dictionary, Learned Words, Download Dictionary, Mode 2 (2-touch), Mode 3 (NIKO-touch) 1Seg 291 Full Browser/
PC Movie 313 What is 1Seg?, Before Using 1Seg, Channel Setting, Activate 1Seg, Program Guide i-ppli, Data Broadcasting, TVlink, Recording 1Seg, Book Program/Timer Recording, User Settings Full Browser, Full Browser Settings, What is PC Movie?, Downloading PC Movies, PC Movie Player Network Services 445 Check New Messages, Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call Forwarding, Nuisance Call Blocking, Caller ID Request, Dual Network, Service Numbers, Remote Control, Multi Number, 2in1, OFFICEED, etc. PC Connection 465 Available Data Communication, Before Using, Preparation Flow for Data Transfer (OBEX Communication), Preparation Flow for Data Communication, AT Command, CD-ROM, DoCoMo Keitai Datalink Data Display/Edit/
Management 327 Data Box, Picture Viewer, i-motion Player, Video Player, Chara-den, Melody Player, Kisekae Tool, microSD Card, Voice Recorder, PDF Viewer, Document Viewer, etc. Overseas Use 471 Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING), Available Services, Confirmation for Using, Making a Call from the Country You Stay, Receiving a Call, Switch 3G/GSM, Set Roaming Guidance, Network Services, etc.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Music&Video Channel/
Music Playback 383 Convenient Functions 403 What is Music&Video Channel?, Setting Programs, Playing Back/Operating Programs, Playing Back Music, Saving Music Files, MUSIC Player, Playlist Appendix/
External Devices/
Troubleshooting 481 Function List, Options and Related Equipment, Troubleshooting, Error Messages, Warranty and Maintenance Services, i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site, Software Update, Scanning Function, Specifications, SAR, Export Administration Regulations, etc. Multiaccess, Multitask, Reading Aloud, Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Own Number, Voice Memo, Movie Memo, Call Data, Calculator, Text Memo, UIM Operation, Bluetooth Function, Reset Settings, Initialize, etc. Index/
Quick Manual 541 Index, Quick Manual, Quick Manual For Overseas Use 7 Main Functions of FOMA P906i
DoCoMo service based on the W-CDMA format, authorized as one of the worlds standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000). Remarkable i-mode!
i-mode is an online service that enables you to get useful information from i-mode menu sites (programs) or i-mode web pages. This service also enables you to send or receive mail messages with ease. s FOMA (Freedom Of Mobile multimedia Access) is the name of the n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictogramP.198, P.202, P.328 Besides mail text, you can attach photo or movie file, etc. The FOMA phone supports Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictograms, so you can change the character color, character size, and background color of mail text, and insert images and moving pictographs. Further, Decome-Anime enables you to compose joyful mail messages with animations contained just by inserting messages into the Decome-Anime template. International RoamingP.472 You can use your FOMA phone, phone number, and mail address overseas as they are. (Supported in GSM/3G area) Voice calls, videophone calls, i-mode, i-mode mail, SMS, and network services are available. for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P), which translates spoken Japanese into English or Chinese and spoken English or Chinese into Japanese, is pre-installed. High-Speed Area SupportedP.466 FOMA High-Speed Area is supported so that high speed communication is available with download speed of up to 3.6 Mbps and upload speed of up to 384 kbps. The maximum speeds of 3.6 Mbps and 384 kbps denote the maximum speeds specified by the technical standards. The actual speeds differ depending on the extent how networks are congested or communication environment. Your communication is enabled at the maximum 384 kbps of both upload and download speeds when you are out of FOMA High-Speed area, or are connecting to an access point that does not support HIGH-SPEED such as mopera. 8 GPSP.278 You can use the location information obtained by GPS to search for a map of your location and information of the surrounding area and navigate yourself to your destination. The pre-installed (Map Application) enables you to easily use the highly accurate map. Mega i-ppli/Intuitive GamesP.250 You can enjoy playing games or have stock price information or weather forecasts updated automatically. In addition, the intuitive games are supported, which you can play by inclining, swinging, or talking your FOMA phone as you sense. Chaku-uta Full/Uta-hodai/Music&Video Channel/Video Clips
P.193, P.384, P.390, P.392 This FOMA phone supports Chaku-uta Full that enables you to download a whole music file and Uta-hodai that enables you to enjoy listening music as much as you like at a flat rate. This FOMA phone also supports Music&Video Channel that, just by setting up beforehand, automatically downloads music programs and programs containing moving images in the night. Further, this FOMA phone supports up to 10 Mbytes of i-
motion movies, so it also supports Video Clip that enables you to enjoy a whole music clip file. pChaku-uta Full is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. This is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaP.266, P.268 By downloading Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli, you can replenish electronic money from a site into the IC card in the FOMA phone and check your account for the balance and usage details. In addition, the DCMX i-ppli program that provides the DoCoMo credit service is pre-installed. Further, iC transfer service is supported so that you can easily move data from the existing IC card to a new one when you replace your FOMA phone such as at the time of phone model change. ToruCa is an electronic card that you can obtain from scanning devices or sites and can easily exchange using mail or infrared data exchange. Kisekae ToolP.121, P.354 You can change the Stand-by display or Menu display of your favorite at a time. You can change the order of displayed menus on P906i according to the frequency of use to customize the Menu display as you like.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Bluetooth FunctionP.425 The wirelessly-connected FOMA phone and a Bluetooth device enable you to talk or listen to music while you are carrying the FOMA phone in your bag. Voice RecorderP.373 You can record your voice as a substitute for taking notes. You can repeatedly play it back, so it is convenient to record the proceedings at a meeting, etc. FeelMailP.122 Animation of 45 characters and illumination reproduce the atmosphere of mail messages. Pleasant animation appears or illumination lights according to the contents of mail message. Wide VGA Display You can display still or moving images in the Wide VGA (480 dots x 854 dots) display of approx. 3.1 inches, and you can enjoy watching 1Seg programs on the impressive display. Also, the light sensor automatically adjusts the backlight in accordance with the ambient brightness, and the LCD AI compensates the image quality in accordance with the brightness. Horizontal Open StyleP.28 You can watch 1Seg programs and videos on the horizontal full display in Horizontal Open Style. Further, you can see the Internet web pages with Full Browser without scrolling sideways. One-push OpenP.28 One-push AnswerP.66 When a call comes in, just press the one-push open button, and you can open the FOMA phone to answer the call. Recv. Mail/Call at OpenP.118 When a missed call or new mail message is found, just press the one-push open button, and you can open the FOMA phone to display the detailed Missed Call display or the Inbox list. View BlindP.119 You can make the display hard to see from an angle. You can use the FOMA phone without being gazed at by others. Face DetectionP.160 You can shoot still images adjusting the camera focus on persons face automatically. Document ViewerP.378 On your FOMA phone, you can display Microsoft Word files, Microsoft Excel files, and Microsoft PowerPoint files created by personal computers. Security SettingsP.131 Various settings such as the lock functions and security settings for safety are available. Omakase LockP.135 When you have lost the FOMA phone, you can lock the FOMA phone and release it by contacting DoCoMo. For inquiries, see the back page of this manual. Omakase Lock is a pay service. You are not charged if you apply for this service at the same time as applying for the suspension of the use or during the suspension. pNote that Omakase Lock might be activated by an offer from the contractor of the FOMA phone when the contractor and the user of the FOMA phone differ. Data Security ServiceP.145 This service enables you to save Phonebook entries, images, and mail messages from your FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center, and restore the saved data, when you lost your FOMA phone or in other cases, to your FOMA phone from the Data Storage Center. Further, you can edit or manage data held at the Data Storage Center using your personal computer and can reflect the edited data to your FOMA phone. For details on Data Security Service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version. For inquiries, see the back page of this manual. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis. Network ServicesP.445 pVoice Mail Service (Charged) A separate subscription is required. pCall Forwarding Service (Free) A separate subscription is required. pDual Network Service (Charged) A separate subscription is required. p2in1 (Charged) A separate subscription is required. pCall Waiting Service (Charged) A separate subscription is required. pNuisance Call Blocking Service (Free) No subscription is required. pMulti Number (Charged) A separate subscription is required. pSMS (Free) No subscription is required. 9
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Making Full Use of FOMA P906i!
VideophoneP.50 You can talk with a person who is away from you, seeing each other. By the default setting, the voice of the other party is set to be output from the speakers, so you can start talking immediately. You can switch, without disconnecting, from an ordinary voice call to a videophone call. 1SegP.292 You can watch 1Seg (terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for mobile objects) programs in smooth picture by the function of Mobile W-Speed. You can display captions and data broadcasting, and record a program while watching it. Use Book Program or Timer Recording not to miss an opportunity to watch or record programs. When an i-mode mail message comes in while you are watching a program, you can check the mail message in the multiwindow or by tickers. You can use the multiwindow to compose i-mode mail messages as well while watching a 1Seg program. i-ChannelP.195 i-Channel distributes graphical information such as news or weather forecast. By selecting a channel you want to see from the Channel list, you can obtain detailed expressive information created by Flash (see page 174). pThis is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. pThe service is provided only in Japanese. Before contract After contract Zo Connected Chaku-mojiP.57 While calling up the other party, you can have your message displayed on his/her Call Receiving display. The receiving end can know your subject/feeling by reading the message before answering the call. 10
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
2in1P.456 This service enables you to have two numbers/two mail addresses on your single FOMA phone and to use your FOMA phone as if you were using two sets, by using the dedicated mode function. You can sort Phonebook entries, mail boxes, dialed/
received call records, and Stand-by displays into A mode and B mode to manage them separately. You can also use Dual mode to simultaneously manage both A and B modes. pThis is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. MUSIC PlayerP.392 On a single player, you can play back and enjoy Chaku-uta Full music files, Windows Media Audio (WMA) files, and SD-Audio files. You can download Chaku-uta Full music files from sites and may be able to display their images and lyrics while playing them back. In the case of SD-Audio or WMA files, you can obtain your favorite music files from music CDs or Internet web pages and save them on the microSD card by using your personal computer. You can save music files also by using the Napster application program. A Mode Phone number: 090-AAAA-AAAA Mail address: XXA@docomo.ne.jp Phonebook: For A Mode A Mode B Mode Phone number: 090-BBBB-BBBB Mail address: XXB@docomo.ne.jp Phonebook: For B Mode Call/Mail in A Mode Dual Mode Phonebook A Inbox A Dialed/Received Calls A Voice Mail A Phonebooks A, B Inboxes A, B Dialed/Received Calls A, B Voice Mail A, B Phonebook B Inbox B Dialed/Received Calls B Voice Mail B B Mode Call/Mail in B Mode 11 Safety Precautions Always follow the safety precautions.
if the particular precautions are not observed. Be sure to observe these safety precautions because they are designed to The symbols below indicate the levels of danger or damage that can be caused you can use it correctly. After reading the precautions, keep them in a safe place. protect you or those around you from causing injury and to avoid unnecessary damage to the property. s Before using the FOMA phone, read these safety precautions carefully so that n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E This symbol indicates that incorrect handling will almost certainly cause death or serious injury. This symbol indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing death or serious injury. Danger Warning Caution This symbol indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing injury or damage to the product or property.
The following symbols show specific directions:
Denotes things not to do. (Prohibition) Dont Denotes not to disassemble. Do not disassemble Denotes not to touch with wet hands. Not wet hands Avoid Water Denotes not to use where it could get wet or not to wet it. Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied with). Do Denotes to pull the power plug out of the outlet. Pull the power plug out Safety Precautions are divided into the following six sections:
General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries, adapters/chargers, and UIM ............................................................................................................. P.13 Precautions for FOMA phone .................................................................... P.14 Precautions for batteries ............................................................................ P.16 Precautions for adapters/chargers............................................................. P.17 Precautions for UIM.................................................................................... P.18 Notes on using near electronic medical equipment.................................. P.18 12 General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries, adapters/chargers, and UIM Do Danger Dont Do not disassemble Avoid Water Do not use, store or leave the FOMA phone and its accessories in places with a high temperature such as near fire or places exposed to direct sunlight, or in cars under the blazing sun. The devices could be deformed or malfunction, or the battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire, thus resulting in the deterioration of performance and shortening of the life of devices. Also, part of the case could get heated, causing bare skin burns. Do not disassemble, modify or solder the FOMA phone or accessories. Accidents such as fire, injury, or electric shock, or malfunction may result. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not wet the FOMA phone or accessories. If liquids such as water or pet urine get onto them, overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injury or others may result. Pay attention to the place of use and the way of handling. Dont Dont Dont Do Do Use only the batteries and adapters/chargers approved by DoCoMo for your FOMA phone. If you use any type of battery, adapter or charger other than the specified one, your FOMA phone, battery or other accessories may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire or malfunction. Battery Pack P16 FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 Desktop Holder P27 FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01 FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01 FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 For other compatible products, contact a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. Warning Do not place the batteries, the FOMA phone, adapters/chargers, or UIM in cooking appliances such as microwave ovens or high-pressure containers. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire. The FOMA phone or the adapter/charger may overheat, smoke, or catch fire, or its circuit parts may become damaged. Do not throw the FOMA phone or accessories, or subject them to severe shocks. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may result. Be careful not to let electroconductive materials
(metal pieces, pencil leads etc.) contact with the charging terminal or connector terminal. Also, make sure that those are not entered into the inside of the FOMA phone. Short-circuit could cause fire or malfunction of the FOMA phone. When you are in a place such as a gas station where flammable gas is generated, turn off the FOMA phone, and never do charging. Otherwise, catching fire may result. Ensure that you use Osaifu-Keitai with the FOMA phone turned off when you are in the vicinity of the gas station.
(When IC Card Lock is set, turn off the power with the lock released.) If odor, overheat, discoloration, or deformation is detected during use, battery charge, or storage, immediately observe the following:
1. Pull the power plug out of the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. 2. Turn off the power to the FOMA phone. 3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA phone. If you use the FOMA phone and its accessories as they are, overheat, burst, or catching fire could result or the battery could leak. 13
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Caution Precautions for FOMA phone Do not place the FOMA phone or accessories on unstable locations such as wobbly tables or slanted locations. The FOMA phone or accessories may fall, resulting in injury or malfunction. Do not store in humid or dusty places, or in high temperature environments. Malfunction may result. If children use the FOMA phone or accessories, a guardian should explain the safety precautions and correct operations. The guardian should also make sure that the instructions are followed during use. Otherwise, injury may result. Keep out of the reach of babies and infants. Accidental swallowing or injury may result. Be especially careful when you use the FOMA phone for a long time with the adapter/charger connected. If you use i-ppli programs, talk on the videophone, watch 1Seg programs and so on for a long time during charging, the temperature of the FOMA phone, battery pack, or adapter/charger might rise. If you directly touch the part of high temperature continuously, redness, itching, rash, or low-temperature bare skin burns may result depending on your physical conditions or predisposition. Dont Dont Do Do Do 14 Warning Do Dont Dont Dont Dont Do not directly point the infrared data port at someones eyes during transmission. His/her eyes may possibly be affected. Other infrared devices may operate erroneously if the infrared data port is pointed at them during transmission. Do not put the FOMA phone in the place where it could be affected by an expanded airbag, e.g., on the dashboard. If the airbag expands, the FOMA phone could hit you and others, causing accidents such as injury and the FOMA phone could malfunction and become damaged. If you have any implanted electronic medical equipment, do not place your FOMA phone in a chest pocket or inner pocket. If the FOMA phone is positioned close to electronic medical equipment, it may cause that equipment to malfunction. Do not allow liquids such as water, or foreign materials such as metal pieces or flammable materials to get into the UIM or microSD card slot of the FOMA phone. Fire, electric shock or malfunction may result. Do Do Do Turn off the FOMA phone in places where use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals. Otherwise, electronic devices and electronic medical appliances may be adversely affected. If the Auto Power ON function is set, deactivate the setting, then turn the power off. For use inside medical facilities, make sure that you comply with their regulations. You may be punished for using the FOMA phone in airplanes, which is prohibited by law. When talking with the FOMA phone set to Hands-free, be sure to keep the FOMA phone away from your ear. Further, when you play games or play back music with the earphone/microphone connected, adjust the sound volume to moderate volume. The excessive sound volume impairs your hearing. Further, accidents may result due to the hardness of hearing of surrounding sound. For those with weak heart conditions, the vibrator and ring volume must be adjusted carefully. Those functions may cause an effect on the heart. If thunder starts to rumble while you are using the FOMA phone outdoors, turn off the power and move to a safe place. Otherwise, you could be struck by lightning or suffer an electric shock. Do Do Turn off the FOMA phone when near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals. The FOMA phone may possibly cause these devices to malfunction. Electronic devices that may be affected:
Hearing aids, implanted cardiac pacemakers, implanted defibrillators, other medical electronic devices, fire alarms, automatic doors and other automatically controlled devices. If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or any other electronic medical device, consult the manufacturer or retailer of the device for advice regarding possible effects from the radio waves. If the display part or camera lens is broken, be careful about broken glasses or the exposed interior of the FOMA phone. Plastic panels are used for the surfaces of the display part and camera lens so that glasses do not easily get scattered, however, pay attention not to erroneously touch the broken part or interior. Otherwise, injury may result. Caution Dont Do not swing the FOMA phone by its strap. The FOMA phone may hit you or persons around you, and accidents such as injury or malfunction and damage may result. When using the motion tracking, ensure that you check around you for safety, securely take hold of your FOMA phone, and do not swing to an extent more than necessitated. The motion tracking is the function to incline or swing the FOMA phone for operation. If you excessively swing your FOMA phone, it might happen that it hits against persons or objects, resulting in critical accidents or damage. When a metallic strap is attached to your FOMA phone, be careful that it does not hit against persons or objects when using the motion tracking. Accidents such as injury or malfunction and damage may result. Do not place magnetic cards or similar objects near the FOMA phone or between phone parts. Magnetic data on cash cards, credit cards, telephone cards and floppy disks, etc. may be deleted. Do not bring magnetic substances close to your FOMA phone. Strong magnetic items might cause in erroneous operation. Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Do If you erroneously break the display part and then crystal liquid gets leaked, never take or suck the liquid to or into your mouth, or apply to skin. If the crystal liquid gets into the eyes or mouth, immediately rinse it out with clean water and then seek medical attention. When it adheres to your skin or clothes, immediately wipe it away with alcohol etc., and then rinse it out with water and soap. Otherwise, the loss of eyesight or injury to your skin may result. Do not bring your ears close to the speakers while a ring tone sounds or a melody is played back from the FOMA phone. Otherwise, your hearing could be impaired. Do not open the FOMA phone by pressing the one-push open button near persons around you or your face. The FOMA phone may hit you or persons around you, causing accidents and injuries. Do not use the FOMA phone with the hook for Horizontal Open Style protruded. Otherwise, injury may result. Electronic devices in some types of cars can be affected by use of the FOMA phone. For safetys sake, make sure not to use the FOMA phone inside such cars. 15
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Do Itching, rash or eczema may be caused depending on your physical conditions or predisposition. If an abnormality occurs, stop using the FOMA phone immediately, and then seek medical attention. Metals are used for the following parts:
Where it is used Material Charging terminal Phosphor bronze Hook for Horizontal Open Style Stainless steel Metal part of command Navigation key Metal part of the one-push open button Polycarbonat e Aluminum Finishing Gold-plated finish with nickel-plated ground Chrome-plated finish with nickel-plated ground Steam pressed aluminum, Hard coat Alumite coating Do Do Be careful not to get your finger or a strap caught between the FOMA phone when you close or open it. Accidents such as injury or damage may result. When you watch a 1Seg program, watch in a place bright enough taking a certain distance from the display. Otherwise, your visual acuity could be reduced. Precautions for batteries Check the description on the label of the battery pack for the type of battery. Description Li-ion Type Lithium-ion battery Danger Do not let any metal object such as a wire come in contact the battery terminals. Also do not carry or store the battery together with any metal objects like a necklace. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not use excessive force to attach the battery to the FOMA phone even when you cannot attach it successfully. Also, check that the battery is the right way round when you attach it. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not throw the battery into fire. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not pierce it with nails, hit it with a hammer, or step on it. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Dont Dont Dont Dont If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, do not rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention immediately. Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may result. Warning When any abnormality due to external shock such as the deformation or scratches by dropping is found on the battery pack, immediately stop using it. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may result. If charging is not completed at the end of the specified charging time, stop charging. Otherwise, the battery may leak, overheat, become damaged or catch fire. Immediately stop using the FOMA phone and keep it away from fire if the battery leaks or emits an odor. The leaked battery fluid may ignite, causing fire or burst. Be careful that your pets do not bite into the battery pack. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may result. Do Dont Do Do Do 16 Caution An exhausted battery should not be disposed of with other waste. The battery may catch fire or damage the environment. After insulating the battery terminals with tape, take the unneeded battery to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop or dispose of it in accordance with local waste disposal regulations. Do not charge the wet battery. The battery pack may overheat, catch fire, or burst. If the battery fluid comes in contact with skin or clothes, immediately stop using, then rinse it out thoroughly with clean water. Skin injury may result. Dont Dont Do Precautions for adapters/chargers Warning Do not use a damaged adapter/
charger cord or power cord. Electric shock, overheating or fire may result. Do not use the AC adapter and desktop holder in steamy places such as a bathroom. Electric shock may occur. Dont Dont The DC adapter is for use only in a negative (-) grounded vehicle. Do not use it in a positive (+) grounded vehicle. Fire may result. If it starts to thunder, do not touch the FOMA phone and adapter/charger. You might be struck by lighting or suffer an electric shock. Never short-circuit the charging terminal when the adapter is plugged into the power outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Also, never touch the charging terminal with fingers or other bare skin. Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury may result. Place the charger and desktop holder on a stable location during charging. Do not cover or wrap the charger and desktop holder in cloth or bedding. The FOMA phone may drop off, or the charger and desktop holder may overheat, causing fire or malfunction. Do not place something heavy on the adapter/charger cord and power cord. Electric shock or fire may result. Do not touch the power cord of the adapter/charger, or power outlet with wet hands. Electric shock may result. Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Not wet hands Do Do Do Do Use the adapter/charger at the specified V AC. If you use it at a wrong voltage, fire or malfunction may result. When using the FOMA phone overseas, use FOMA AC adapter available overseas. AC adapter: 100 V AC DC adapter: 12/24 V DC
[For negative (-) grounded vehicles only]
AC adapter available overseas: 100 V to 240 V AC
[Connect only to household AC outlet]
If a fuse of the DC adapter has blown, replace it with a specified fuse. If you use an unspecified fuse, fire or malfunction may result. For the specified fuse, refer to each instruction manual. Keep the power plugs dust-free. Otherwise, fire may result. When pulling the AC adapter into the power outlet, firmly plug it in, taking care not to contact with metal straps or the like. Otherwise, electric shock, short-circuit or fire may result. 17
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
When removing the adapter/
charger out of the outlet or cigarette lighter socket, do not forcibly pull the adapter/charger cord or power cord, instead take hold of the power plug and then pull. If you pull the plug out by the cord, the cord may be damaged, which could result in electric shock or fire. When the adapter/charger is not to be used for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the outlet. Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or malfunction may result. If liquids such as water get in the charger, unplug the power cord immediately from the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Otherwise, electric shock, smoke or fire may result. Before cleaning, pull the power plug out of the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Otherwise, electric shock may result. Do Pull the power plug out Pull the power plug out Pull the power plug out Precautions for UIM 0 Caution Be careful not to touch the cut surface of the UIM (IC portion) when removing it. You may hurt your hand or fingers. Do 18 Notes on using near electronic medical equipment The description below meets Guidelines on the Use of Radio-communication Equipment such as Cellular Telephones Safeguards for Electronic Medical Equipment by the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference Japan. Warning Do Do Comply with the following in hospitals or health care facilities:
Do not carry the FOMA phone into operating rooms, intensive care units
(ICU) or coronary care units (CCU). Turn off the FOMA phone in hospital wards. If there is any electronic medical equipment near you, turn off the FOMA phone even when in a location such as a lobby. Comply with any regulations of hospital and health care facilities instructing you not to use or carry in a mobile phone. If the Auto Power ON function is set, deactivate the setting, then turn the power off. Turn off the FOMA phone in crowded areas such as inside trains during rush hour, as someone with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be near you. Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves. Do Do If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator, use the mobile phone 22 cm or more away from an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator. Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves. Patients using electronic medical equipment other than implanted cardiac pacemakers or implanted defibrillators (outside medical establishments for treatment at home, etc.) should check the influence of radio waves upon the equipment by consulting its manufacturer. Operation of electronic medical equipment can be affected by radio waves. Notes on Handling General notes Do not wet the equipment. The FOMA phone, battery, adapter/charger, and UIM are not waterproofed. Do not use them in environments, which are high in humidity such as in bathrooms, and do not allow them to get wet from rain. Furthermore, if carrying them against your body, they become moist due to perspiration and the internal parts may become corroded, causing malfunction. If the parts are found to have been damaged due to exposure to the liquids, any repairs will not be covered by warranty, or repairs may not be possible. This may be repaired at a cost if repairs are possible. Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses to clean the equipment. pThe screen of the FOMA phone sometimes has a special coating so that they are easier to see. If you rub it roughly with a dry cloth, it might be scratched. Take care of the way of handling, and use only a dry, soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses. If the screen is left with water drop or stain adhered, smear may be generated or the coating might peel off. pDo not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing may be removed or discoloration may result. Occasionally clean the terminals of the equipment using a dry cotton swab. If the terminals become soiled, the connection might deteriorate so that the power turns off or the battery does not charge fully. Wipe the terminals with a dry cloth or cotton swab. Do not place the FOMA phone near an air conditioner outlets. Condensation may form due to rapid changes in temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and cause malfunction. Do not apply excessive force onto the FOMA phone and battery pack. If you put the FOMA phone in a bag along with many other articles or sit with the FOMA phone in a clothes pocket, the display, internal circuitry and the battery pack could be damaged or malfunction. Also, if your FOMA phone is left with an external device connected to the connector terminal or Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal, the connector could be damaged, or malfunction. Carefully read each instruction manual attached to the FOMA phone, adapter/
charger, or desktop holder. Do not rub or scratch the display part with metals. Doing so might cause damage to the part, resulting in trouble or malfunction. Notes on handling the FOMA phone Avoid using in extremely high or low temperatures. The FOMA phone should be used within a temperature range of 5C to 35C and a humidity range of 45% to 85%. The FOMA phone, if operated near landline phones, television sets, radios or other devices that are in use, may affect them. You should operate your FOMA phone as far away from such equipment as possible. It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored in the FOMA phone and keep such notes in a safe place. We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data items. Do not insert an external device to the connector terminal or Earphone/Microphone/
AV output terminal at a slant when connecting, and do not pull it out when it is inserted. Malfunction or damage may result. Make sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets caught between the parts of the FOMA phone when you close it. Otherwise, malfunction or damage may result. The FOMA phone becomes warm during use or charging but this is not an abnormality. Use the FOMA phone as it is. Do not leave the camera in places exposed to direct sunlight. Pixels may be discolored or burns may result. Usually, use the FOMA phone with the cover of the Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal, connector terminal, and that of microSD card slot mounted. Dust or water might enter into the FOMA phone, causing malfunction. Do not use the FOMA phone with the back cover left removed. The battery pack might come out, or malfunction or damage may result. Do not apply an excessively thick sticker onto the surfaces of the display, keys, or buttons. Malfunction may result. While you are using the microSD card, never take it off or turn off the power to the FOMA phone. Data may be erased or malfunction may result. Notes on handling batteries Batteries have a limited life. Though it varies depending on the usage state, you are advised to replace the battery if its usable time is extremely short even when you fully charge it. Make sure that you buy the specified battery. Charge the battery in a place with an appropriate ambient temperature of 5C to 35C. Make sure that the battery is charged when you use the FOMA phone for the first time or have not used it for a long period of time. The usable time of the battery differs depending on the usage environment or its remaining life. Depending on how the battery pack is used, it might swell as its operating life becomes short, but this is not a problem. Do not store or leave the empty battery pack. The performance and operating life of the battery pack might be lowered or shortened. 19
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored on the UIM and keep such notes in a safe place. We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data items. For the environmental protection, bring any unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. Avoid using in extremely high or low temperatures. Do not damage, carelessly touch, or short-
circuit the IC. Data might be lost or malfunction may result. Do not drop the UIM or subject it to strong impacts. Malfunction may result. Do not bend the UIM or place something heavy on it. Malfunction may result. Into the FOMA phone, do not insert the UIM with a label or sticker pasted. Malfunction may result. Notes on using Bluetooth function FOMA phone supports the security function that meets the Bluetooth Specification for the security during connection using the Bluetooth function. However, the security may not be sufficient depending on the configuration. Take care of the security while making connection using the Bluetooth function. Note that even if any leak of data or information occurs while making connection using the Bluetooth function, we take no responsibility. With the FOMA phone, you can use the following: Headset, Hands-Free, Audio, Dial-
up Communication, Object Push, and Serial Port. With Audio, you might be able to use Audio Video Remote Control. (Only with the compatible Bluetooth devices) Supported version Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.0+EDR compliant1 Supported profiles2 (Supported services) HSP Headset Profile HFP Hands-Free Profile A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile AVRCP Audio/Video Remote Control Profile DUNP Dial-up Networking Profile OPP Object Push Profile SPP Serial Port Profile Notes on handling chargers/adapters Charge the battery in a place with an appropriate ambient temperature of 5C to 35C. Charge the battery where:
There is very little humidity, vibration, and dust. There are no landline phones, television sets or radios nearby. During charging, the adapter/charger may become warm. This is not an abnormality, so continue charging. Do not use the DC adapter for charging the battery when the car engine is not running. The car battery could go flat. When using the power outlet having the disengaging prevention mechanism, observe the instructions given in that instruction manual. Do not give a strong shock. Also, do not deform the charging terminal. Malfunction may result. Notes on handling the UIM Never use more force than necessary when inserting/removing the UIM. The UIM may become warm during use, but this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue using it as it is. The warranty does not cover damage caused by inserting the UIM into some other types of IC card reader/writer. Always keep the IC portion clean. Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses to clean the equipment. 20 1 The FOMA phone and all Bluetooth function-installed devices have ensured that they conform to the Bluetooth Specification according to the rules the Bluetooth SIG defines, and are all authenticated. However, operating methods might differ, or data might not be exchanged even when they are connected wirelessly, depending on the features or specifications of connecting devices. 2 Standardizes the connecting procedures of Bluetooth function per feature of a device. Radio frequencies The radio frequencies the Bluetooth function of the FOMA phone uses are as follows:
2.4 FH 1 2.4 FH 1
: Indicates radio facilities that use 2400 MHz frequencies.
: Indicates the modulation system is the FH-SS system.
: Indicates that a supposed coverage distance is 10 meters or less.
: Indicates that all radio frequencies 2400 MHz through 2483.5 MHz are used, and that the frequencies for mobile object identifiers shall not be avoided. Cautions on Using Bluetooth Devices Bluetooth operates at radio frequencies assigned to the in-house radio stations for mobile object identifiers that have to be licensed and are used in production lines of a factory, specific unlicensed low power radio stations, and amateur radio stations
(hereafter, referred to another radio station) in addition to scientific, medical, or industrial devices such as microwave ovens. 1. Before using this product, make sure that another radio station is not operating nearby. 2. If radio interference between this product and another radio station occurs, move immediately to another place or stop radio transmission to avoid interference. 3. For further details, contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual. Notes on handling the FeliCa reader/
writer The FeliCa reader/writer function on the FOMA phone uses very weak radio waves which do not require to be licensed as radio stations. The FeliCa reader/writer is operated on the 13.56 MHz frequencies. When you use another reader/writer nearby, take enough distance between your FOMA phone and the reader/writer. Further, ensure that there are no radio stations that use the same frequencies. Caution Do not use the modified FOMA phone. Using a modified FOMA phone infringes the Radio Law. The FOMA phones are granted technical regulations conformity certification as the specified radio equipment under the Radio Law and bear a technical conformity mark on the nameplate as evidence of conformity. Unscrewing the FOMA phone and modifying internal components void the technical regulations conformity certification. Do not use the FOMA phone in this state, which infringes the Radio Law. Be especially careful not to operate the FOMA phone while driving. You will be imposed punishment if you use the mobile phone in your hand while driving. If you answer a call out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you will call him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe, and then dial. Use the Bluetooth functions in Japan only. The Bluetooth functions on the FOMA phone have been authorized in compliance with the radio transmission standards in Japan. You might be imposed punishment if you use them overseas. Use the FeliCa reader/writer functions in Japan only. The FeliCa reader/writer functions on the FOMA phone have been authorized in compliance with the radio transmission standards in Japan. You might be imposed punishment if you use them overseas. 21
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Intellectual Property Rights Copyrights and Portrait Rights You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents such as text, images, music, or software programs downloaded from web pages on the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of this product without permission from the copyright holder except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the copyright law. Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you refrain from shooting portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this violates portrait rights. Trademarks pFOMA, mova, PushTalk, PushTalkPlus, i-mode, i-ppli, i-ppliDX, i-motion, Deco-mail, Chaku-motion, Chara-den, ToruCa, mopera, mopera U, WORLD CALL, Dual Network, FirstPass, visualnet, V-live, i-Channel, DCMX, iD, Security Scan, i-motion mail, i-area, Short Mail, WORLD WING, Public mode, DoPa, sigmarion, musea, IMCS, OFFICEED, 2in1, Chokkan Game, and the logos of FOMA, i-mode, i-ppli, DCMX, iC, iD, Music&Video Channel, and HIGH-SPEED are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DoCoMo, Inc. pCatch Phone (Call waiting service) is a registered trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation. pFree Dial logo mark is a registered trademark of NTT Communications Corporation. pMcAfee is registered trademarks or trademarks of McAfee, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. pG-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE and their logos are registered trademarks in Japan of U.S. Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its affiliates. pQuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., in the US and other countries. pNAVIDIAL and NAVIDIAL logo mark are trademarks of NTT Communications Corporation. pMicrosoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. pWindows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 22 pPowered by JBlend Copyright 2002-2008 Aplix Corporation. All rights reserved. JBlend and JBlend-related trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries. is a registered trademark of FeliCa Networks, Inc. p pThe microSD logo is a trademark. pThe microSDHC logo is a trademark. pMultitask is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. pQR code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Inc. p is a registered trademark of CANNAC, Inc. pVIERA is a registered trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. pJava and Java related trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. pThe Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by NTT DoCoMo, Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. pPowered by Mascot Capsule/Micro3D Edition Mascot Capsule is a trademark of HI CORPORATION. pOKAO Vision is used for multiple face detection to improve camera AF. OKAO is a registered trademark or trademark of OMRON Corporation in JAPAN and other countries. pThe image stabilization technology utilized is PhotoSolid, a product of Morpho, Inc. PhotoSolid is the registered trademark of Morpho, Inc. in Japan and other countries. pNapster is a registered trademark of Napster, LLC. and/or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. pOther company names and product names described in the text are trademarks or registered trademarks of those companies. Others pThis product contains NetFront Sync Client of ACCESS CO., LTD. Copyright 2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved. ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and other countries. pIrFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and other countries. The IrDA Feature Trademark is owned by the Infrared Data Association and used under license therefrom. pContains Adobe Flash Lite and Adobe Reader LE technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated Adobe Flash Lite Copyright 2003-2007 Adobe System Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe Reader LE Copyright 1993-2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, Adobe Reader, Flash, and Flash Lite are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. pFeliCa is a contactless IC card technology developed by Sony Corporation. pFeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. pLicensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,416,797 5,414,796 5,337,338 5,109,390 5,101,501 5,056,109 5,710,784 5,535,239 5,511,073 5,506,865 5,778,338 5,504,773 5,490,165 5,659,569 5,657,420 5,267,262 5,267,261 5,228,054 5,600,754 5,568,483 5,544,196 pThis product contains software licensed complying with GNU General Public License
(GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. For more details, see readme.txt in the GPLLGPL folder on the bundled CD-ROM. (readme.txt is only available in Japanese version.) pAdvanced Wnn V2 of OMRON SOFTWARE Co., Ltd. is used for conversion methods for Japanese language. Advanced Wnn V2 OMRON SOFTWARE Co., LTD. 1999-2008 All Right Reserved. pThis product is loaded with Bluetooth Stack for Embedded Systems Spec 2.0 by Toshiba Corp. pThis product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio license, AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to
(i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard, AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video) and/or
(ii) decode MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider licensed to provide MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com. pCopyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved. PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. pThis product is manufactured or sold under license from InterDigital Technology Corporation. pThis product uses GestureTeks technology. Copyright 2008, GestureTek, Inc. All Rights Reserved. pThe abbreviations used for respective operating systems (Japanese version) in this manual are as shown below:
Windows Vista is the abbreviation of Windows Vista (Home Basic, Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, and Ultimate). Windows XP is the abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system or Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system. Windows 2000 is the abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system. pThis product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties. pThis product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. pContent providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content
(Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM Software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Softwares right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Softwares ability to play unprotected content. A list of Revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation lists onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners. 23
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
s n o i t u a c e r P s t n e t n o C h c r a e S y s a E
Accessories and Main Options
<Accessories>
pFOMA P906i Handset
(With Warranty and Back Cover P26) pFOMA P906i CD-ROM The PDF versions of Manual for PC Connection and Kuten Code List are included.
<Main Options>
pFOMA AC Adapter 01/02
(With Warranty and Instruction Manual) pInstruction Manual Quick Manual included (See page 550) pBattery Pack P16 pDesktop Holder P27
(With Instruction Manual) Other Options See page 514 24 Before Using the Handset Phone Parts and Functions . Styles . Navigation Displays and Key Operations . Display . Displaying Description of Icons . <Icons>
Private Window . Method for Selecting Menu . Using Simple Menu . When You do not Remember Key Operation . <Guide>
Using UIM (FOMA Card) . Attaching/Removing Batteries . Charging . Checking Battery Level . <Battery Level>
Turning Power On/Off . <Power ON/OFF>
Switching to English . <Select Language>
Executing Initial Settings . <Initial Setting>
Setting Date and Time . <Set Time>
Displaying World Time . <World Time Watch>
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number
. <Caller ID Notification>
Checking Your Own Number . <Own Number>
26 28 29 30 32 32 33 38 39 39 41 42 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 25 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i Phone Parts and Functions
pDesign of keys is different by the handset body color. Illustrations above are for White handset.
For inserting or pulling the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) Take hold of the plug and insert or pull it straight into or out. Be careful not to take hold of the cover and plug together when you pull it out. Plug 26
Earpiece For listening to the other partys voice
Display
(See page 30)
l Mail key For showing the Mail menu (See page 220) For operating the function corresponding to the navigation displays (See page 29)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For checking new mail messages (See page 215) m Menu key/IC Card Lock key For showing Main Menu (See page 33) For showing horizontal open menu (See page 36) For operating the function corresponding to the navigation displays (See page 29)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For locking the IC card (See page 275) r Clear key For returning to the previous operation For clearing entered text or a phone number
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For resetting Main Menu (See page 121) d Send/Answer key, Hands-free key For making/receiving calls (See page 50 and page 64) For talking with Hands-free (See page 63)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For accessing a voice dial entry (See page 104) Microphone For speaking to the other party Infrared data port Used for infrared data exchange and the infrared remote-controller. (See page 367 and page 371)
Light sensor For sensing brightness (See page 118) i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
Inside camera For shooting photos of yourself (See page 148) For catching sight of yourself during a videophone call
o Command Navigation key For operating functions and menus (See page 29)
i i-mode key/i-ppli key For showing the i-mode menu (See page 172) For operating the function corresponding to the navigation displays (See page 29)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For showing the i-ppli Software list (See page 251)
c Camera key/1Seg key For activating the camera in Photo mode
(See page 155) For switching the camera mode while the camera is activated (See page 160) For operating the function corresponding to the navigation displays (See page 29)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For starting 1Seg (See page 295)
h Power/End key For ending calls For ending respective functions For turning on the power (for at least one second)/
For turning off the power (for at least two seconds)
(See page 45)
Numeric keys For entering phone numbers and text ps(for at least one second) For activating Manner Mode (See page 112) pa(for at least one second) For activating Public Mode (Drive Mode)
(See page 69) p1(for at least one second) For measuring your current location and executing the GPS function (See page 278) p5(for at least one second) For switching the backlight on/off (See page 118) p8(for at least one second) For switching View Blind on/off (See page 119)
x Multi key For showing the Multitask menu (See page 406)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For showing the display for setting Switch 3G/GSM
(See page 477) For switching functions when multiple functions are running (See page 406)
Hook for Horizontal Open Style
Connector terminal For connecting the AC adapter (option), DC adapter
(option), or FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Call/Charging indicator Flickers for incoming calls/mail and during a call.
(See page 122) Lights in red during charging. Three lamps are mounted on the FOMA phone. They do not light/flicker for some functions. Flickers when you shoot with the camera.
Private window
(See page 32)
Outside camera For shooting portraits and/or landscapes
(See page 148) For catching sight of persons and/or landscapes during a videophone call
Speakers For sounding ring tones For listening to the other partys voice when Hands-free is activated (See page 63)
FeliCa mark The IC card is mounted. pUse the IC card function placing this mark over the scanning device. You cannot dismount the IC card.
(See page 267)
FOMA antenna/1Seg antenna pThe antenna is embedded in the FOMA phone. Do not cover the antenna with your hand for better communication/receiving.
microSD card slot For inserting microSD card (See page 355)
Back cover Remove this when attaching/removing the battery pack and UIM. (See page 39 and page 41) pDo not peel off the black sticker on the back of the back cover. If you peel it off, you might not be able to read and write the IC card. Charging terminal
!Strap hole
"Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal
(See page 380 and page 423)
#< Side key For scrolling up page by page
<Press and hold for at least one second with the FOMA phone opened>
For activating 2in1 (See page 456)
$> Side key For scrolling down page by page For using Record Message (See page 72) For checking for missed calls and new mail
(See page 124)
<Press and hold for at least one second with the FOMA phone closed>
For activating Manner Mode (See page 112)
%One-push open button
(See page 28)
&p PushTalk key For making/receiving PushTalk calls
(See page 82 and page 84) For showing the PushTalk Phonebook (See page 85)
<Press and hold for at least one second>
For activating MUSIC Player (See page 392)
'Horizontal open lever
(See page 28) 27 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i Styles The P906i comes with two styles. Normal Style You can open the FOMA phone easily by one-push key operation.
(One-push Open) pYou can open it also manually without using the button. pYou need to close the FOMA phone manually. If it does not close, open it fully and then Information pWhen you press the one-push open button in Horizontal Open Style, the FOMA phone will open in Normal Style after it is closed. pBefore switching the styles, be sure to completely close the FOMA phone. If you operate the horizontal open lever in Normal Style or with the display part unlatched, malfunction or damage may result. pWhen the confirmation display to select YES/NO is shown and you switch the style, the confirmation display may be disappeared. Work with Style You can set an operation for when you switch to Horizontal Open Style while displaying the Stand-by display. 1 mSettingsOther settingsWork with style
Select an item Horizontal open menu . You can display Horizontal open menu. (See page 36) 1Seg . You can activate 1Seg. (See page 295) OFF . You can display Standby disp. Wide. (See page 115) Information pWhen you switch to Horizontal Open Style while displaying Main Menu, the Standby disp. Wide appears regardless of the setting of this function. close it. One-push open button Horizontal Open Style Hold down the part A and open the display part with the horizontal open lever slid into the direction B. You can watch 1Seg programs and use Full Browser in a horizontal display. pIf the FOMA phone is not in state of C when you open the display, re-open the FOMA phone after closing it once. Horizontal open lever Information pWhen you open the FOMA phone by pressing the one-push open button, it might not open fully depending on its direction. pWhen you open the FOMA phone by pressing the one-push open button, be careful not to drop it by its rebound. 28 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Navigation Displays and Key Operations Key Operations in Normal Style When you want to execute the operation shown display, press the corresponding key as below. Basic display examples and key assignments
Indicates the operation you can perform with the l key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with the m key. Indicates the operation you can perform with the Oo key. Indicates the direction in which you can scroll and select items with the Mo key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with the c key. Indicates the operation you can perform with the i key. Operating Command Navigation key Up Zo Moves the cursor or highlighted display up. (Press and hold to scroll continuously.) Scrolls the display while a site or mail text is displayed. Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Channel list. (See page 195) Converts entered characters to katakana, kanji or other characters.
(See page 437) Left/Received Calls Co Moves the cursor to the left. Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Received Call list. Press and hold for at least one second to bring up the Received Address list.
(See page 55 and page 229) Scrolls back page by page. (Press and hold to scroll continuously.) Returns to the previous page while displaying a site. OK key Oo Fixes the operation. Right/Redial Vo Moves the cursor to the right. Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Redial list. Press and hold for at least one second to bring up the Sent Address list.
(See page 54 and page 229) Scrolls forward page by page. (Press and hold to scroll continuously.) Moves to the next page while displaying a site. Down Xo Moves the cursor or highlighted display down. (Press and hold to scroll continuously.) Scrolls the display while a site or mail text is displayed. Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Search Phonebook display. Press and hold for at least one second to store a Phonebook entry. (See page 92 and page 98) Converts entered characters to kanji, katakana or other characters.
(See page 437) Adjusts the camera focus for shooting. (See page 160) Key Operations in Horizontal Open Style You can operate the keys in the same way as in Normal Style while the vertical display is shown. While the horizontal display is shown, press the corresponding key as below. 29 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i Display
<Private window>
Battery level (estimate) (See page 44) Radio waves reception level (estimate) Weak Strong You are out of the FOMA service area or radio waves do not reach. During Self Mode (See page 135)
(yellow)
(dark blue)
(pink) During i-mode (See page 172)
(dark blue) Unread Messages R/F exist.
(See page 235) The area for Messages R/F in the FOMA phone is full. (See page 236) i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center.
(See page 215) The box for i-mode mail at the i-mode Center is full. (See page 214) During i-mode communication (See page 172) During packet communication (The icon differs depending on the communication status.) During PushTalk communication (See page 82) You get out of the service area while Network Search Mode is set to Manual.
(See page 477) During SSL communication (See page 172) Unread i-mode mail or an SMS message exists. (See page 213 and page 245) The area for i-mode mail and SMS messages in the FOMA phone is full.
(See page 214 and page 245) The area for SMS messages on the UIM
(FOMA card) is full. Unread mail exists, and the area for SMS messages on the UIM (FOMA card) is full. Both the FOMA phone and UIM (FOMA card) are full. Area Mail exists. (See page 238)
(pink)
(dark blue)
(pink)
(dark blue)
(yellow) Messages R/F are held at the i-mode Center. (See page 236)
(dark blue) The box for Messages R/F at the i-mode Center is full. (See page 236)
i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center while Receive Option Setting is set to ON.
(See page 214) During a voice call During a videophone call During 64K data communication During measuring the current location
(See page 278) Location Request Menu is set to ON or Permission schedule, and it is within the validity period. (See page 288) Location Request Menu is set to Permission schedule and it is out of the validity period. (See page 288) 30 A microSD card is inserted.(See page 356) Data is being read to/written from the microSD card. A write-protected microSD card is inserted.
(See page 356) The inserted microSD card cannot be used.
(See page 356) A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in microSD Mode.
(See page 363) A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in MTP Mode.
(See page 363) A Bluetooth device is connected.
(See page 427 and page 429)
(blue)
(black) A Bluetooth device is connected and power consumption is low. (See page 427) During Lock All (See page 134) During Personal Data Lock (See page 136) During Keypad Dial Lock (See page 140) During Secret Mode or Secret Data Only
(See page 141)
i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t During IC Card Lock (See page 275) Both Keypad Dial Lock and Personal Data Lock are set. Both Keypad Dial Lock and Secret Mode/
Secret Data Only are set. Both IC Card Lock and Lock All are set. Both IC Card Lock and Personal Data Lock are set. Both IC Card Lock and Keypad Dial Lock are set. Both IC Card Lock and Secret Mode/Secret Data Only are set. IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and Personal Data Lock are simultaneously set. IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and Secret Mode/Secret Data Only are simultaneously set. Type of in-use network (See page 473) You are in the OFFICEED area.
(See page 462) Timer Lock ON At Close is set. (See page 137) During Multitask (See page 405) Multiple functions are activated.
(See page 405) During watching a 1Seg program
(See page 295) During recording a 1Seg program
(See page 303) During recording a 1Seg program by Timer Recording (See page 307) During pause of recording a 1Seg program
(See page 303) During music playback (See page 393) During music pause (See page 393)
Voice mail messages for Number B are held at the Voice Mail Center in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 461)
" Voice mail messages are held at the Voice Mail Center. (See page 446)
The number of record messages
(See page 71) The number of videophone record messages (See page 71) pFor the horizontal display, icons appear at the lower right of the display. pThe clock at the upper right of the display (at the lower right of the horizontal display) does not appear when icon or is displayed. pWhen the Stand-by display is shown, the notification icon or desktop icon appears. (See page 125) Information pSome characters and symbols on the display and Private window might be modified or abbreviated. In addition, the Private window is displayed in monochrome. pThe color liquid crystal display uses high-precision production technology. The slightest change in the environment or other factors may result in unlit or permanently lit pixels, but this is not a manufacturing defect. pThe color display is shown in black and white in this manual, so the color tone of the actual display looks different. During infrared data exchange
(See page 367 and page 371) The FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) is connected in Communication Mode. The FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) is connected in microSD Mode. (See page 363) During talk or communication through a USB Hands-free compatible device
(See page 63) A USB Hands-free compatible device is connected. (See page 63) A USB Hands-free compatible device is connected in microSD Mode. (See page 63) Vibrator is set. (See page 110) Ring Volume is set to Silent or Mail/Msg. Ring Time is set to OFF.
(See page 68 and page 111) During Manner Mode (See page 112) Remote Monitoring is set to ON.
(See page 79) During Public Mode (Drive Mode)
(See page 69) The call cost has exceeded the specified limit. (See page 420) An alarm is set.
(See page 307 and page 409) A Music&Video Channel program is booked.
(See page 384) Backlight is set to OFF. (See page 118) Side Keys Guard is set to ON.
(See page 141) USB Mode Setting is set to microSD mode. (See page 363) USB Mode Setting is set to MTP mode.
(See page 363) 31
<Icons>
Displaying Description of Icons
+m-3-6
) are called icons. You
, and can check the meanings of them on the display. t The symbols on the display (such as e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B 1 mSettingsDisplayIcons
Use Mo to highlight an icon. Private Window Various information is displayed on the Private window like the following examples:
Press </> or p with the FOMA phone closed, etc. to display information for about 15 seconds. i Clock Dialing Receiving a call During a voice call When a missed call is found When the FOMA phone is closed, Missed call appears. Press < to display the missed call record. The name is displayed for the missed call coming from the party stored in the Phonebook. When there are multiple missed calls, up to three missed call records are displayed each time you press <. pIf you have received 30 or more incoming calls after a missed call, the missed call record disappears. pMissed call records might not be displayed while another function is activated. pAfter you display a missed call record, Missed call disappears. 32 When a new mail message or Message R/F is received When the FOMA phone is closed, a FeelMail image is played back, and then New mail appears. When you press <, the latest FeelMail image is played back.
(For Messages R/F, the FeelMail image is not played back.) When Mail on page 117 is set to ON, the received date/time, senders address (name), and subject of the mail or the received date/time and subject of the Message R/F are displayed. The senders name is displayed for the mail coming from the party stored in the Phonebook. When multiple mail messages or Messages R/F are received, up to three mail messages or Messages R/F appear each time you press < with New mail displayed. pPress < to end the playback of the FeelMail image or to clear the received date/
time, and others. pFor the mail messages and Messages R/F sorted to the box or folder with security set, the FeelMail images, received date/time, and others are not played back/displayed. pWhen a mail message or Message R/F comes in while Receiving display is set to Operation preferred and a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, New mail appears without showing any information. pDepending on the setting of Auto-display, New mail appears without showing any information when a Message R/F comes in. pAfter you display the received date/time and others of the received mail or Message R/
F, New mail disappears. pWhen a mail message or Message R/F comes in during a voice call or a videophone call, information is not displayed even when Receiving display is set to Alarm preferred. pWhen you set Secret mail display to OFF and you receive a secret mail message in Normal Mode, a FeelMail image is not played back. When i-Channel is received When i-Channel ticker on page 117 is set to ON and the FOMA phone is closed, tickers flow on the Private window. pPress </> or p to end the tickers flow. i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Change Clock Display You can change displayed contents by pressing < while clock is shown. Time only Method for Selecting Menu Press m of the FOMA phone to bring up Main Menu so that you can execute, set, or check respective functions. pSome functions can be selected also by the operation other than pressing m. In this manual, the operation by the easier way is described. Icons and Date/time pYou can also switch to Simple Menu focusing on only basic functions for easy operation. (See page 38) pThis FOMA phone supports Kisekae Tool (see page 121). If you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply. In that case, you cannot operate as described in this manual, so you are advised to switch to the basic structure menu (see page 121), or reset menu settings (see page 121). When you set Menu icon setting by P906i of Kisekae Tool, you can temporarily restore to the normal menu structure by selecting
(Display basic menu) from the main menu items. When you set P906i of Kisekae Tool for Main Menu, the main menu items and sub-menu items are displayed in Japanese even if Select language is set to English. Scroll Selection Main Menu is composed of 12 main menu icons indicating each function. pIf you select a main menu icon, the Sub-menu Item Selection display appears. If you further select a sub-menu item, the Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display appears. pBy repeating selecting, you can set and check the function. Menu Number Selection You can display some functions by pressing m + the menu number (see page 482). Multitask is Supported pYou can simultaneously use some functions in Main Menu. (See page 405) Scroll Selection In this manual, the description of the command navigation key operation
(selection of top/bottom/left/right, and press of Oo after selecting/
entering a function item) is omitted. Scroll selection is explained below using the example of selecting the function Quality alarm:
Description Example of Steps 1 Sub-menu item Main menu icon mSettingsTalkQuality alarmSelect an alarm. Function name of lower sub-menu item No tone . Does not sound. High tone . High alarm sounds. Low tone . Low alarm sounds. Items which appear on the display 33 1 Select a main menu icon from the menu function 2 Select a sub-menu item from the menu function Select Talk from Settings. Bo Oo pThe highlighted item is the currently selected one. pPress +
pPress and hold +
Bo to scroll the items continuously. pPress +
Xo to highlight the item below, and +
No to scroll page by page. Zo to highlight the item above. body color. (See page 486) t Select Settings from Main Menu. Main Menu at purchase differs depending on the e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B Mo
+m i Main Menu Oo Mo to highlight the icon. Press and hold +
Mo to scroll pPress +
the icons continuously. pIf you have not touched any keys for at least 15 seconds, the Stand-by display returns. 34
3 Select a desired lower sub-menu item (function) Select Quality alarm from Talk. 4 Set or check the function Some menu items have even more detailed menus. The example below shows how to set Low tone for Quality alarm. Bo Oo Bo Oo Xo to highlight the item below, and +
pPress +
pPress and hold +
pWhen the items are listed over multiple pages, the total number of pages and the Bo to scroll the items continuously. Zo to highlight the item above. current page number are shown at the upper right of the display. pThe highlighted item is the currently selected one. pPress +
pPress and hold +
Bo to scroll the items continuously. Xo to highlight the item below, and +
Zo to highlight the item above. Menu Number Selection Menu Number Selection is explained below using the following example:
Description Example of Menu Number i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be Disconnedted Menu number
+m-7-5 35
Function Menu If you press i when the Function menu including selectable items such as Save, Edit, and Delete appears in each operation. The contents of the Function menu depend on the display from which you bring up the Function menu. pWhen the items are listed appears at the lower right of the display, over multiple pages, the total number of pages and the current page number are shown at the upper right of the Function Menu display.
+i Description Example for Function Menu In this manual, the operation of the Function menu is described as follows:
Item displayed in the Function menu Operating procedures after selecting an item in the Function menu Function menu Delete all Operation/Explanation You can delete all files. Enter your Terminal Security Code YES 1 Bring up the function using the menu number t From the Stand-by display, press m75. e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i
+m
-7-5 Horizontal Open Menu The Horizontal Open Menu enables you to quickly access functions that are available for the horizontal display. To show the Horizontal Open Menu, press m from the Stand-by display for the horizontal display. pHorizontal open menu at purchase differs depending on the body color. (See page 486) pOwing to Work with style, the Horizontal Open Menu automatically appears at purchase just by switching to Horizontal Open Style. pBy Hor. open menu set of Software setting, you can set the i-ppli program which starts when you select i-ppli. pIf you have not touched any keys for at least 15 seconds, the Stand-by display returns.
+m 36 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t An actual operation is done as follows:
Press +i(
). Use +
Mo to highlight Delete all and press Oo(
). Enter your Terminal Security Code and press Oo(
). Bo to highlight Use +
YES and press Oo(
). Check box With the functions you can select multiple items, put a check mark for check boxes to select them. Each time you press Oo(
With some functions, you can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing i(
m(
). p is placed to the selected item depending on the function.
), you can switch and
) and selecting Select all/Release all or by pressing After finishing the operation The Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display is shown. When you press h, the Stand-by display returns (except during Multitask). The Stand-by display or the former display automatically returns depending on the function. To cancel the operation midway Press h. The contents of the setting are abandoned and the Stand-by display or the former display returns. The confirmation display appears asking whether to abandon the setting contents depending on the function. You can press r to return to the previous operation. When the YES/NO selection display appears Press Bo to highlight YES or NO, then press Oo(
). To select items quickly <Direct selection>
Press the numeric key corresponding to the displayed item number. Item number Item scroll When menu items are listed over multiple pages, you can show the previous/next page by pressing Bo with the uppermost/lowermost item highlighted. You can press No to scroll through page by page. When is displayed on the display, you can scroll through page by page also by pressing m(
pDepending on the display being shown, such as lower sub-menu items, you might be able to scroll through page by page also by pressing </> instead of No.
)/c(
For Reset Settings 37
t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i Using Simple Menu Simple Menu is a menu focusing on only basic functions for easy operation. pThis manual describes the operating procedures in Normal Main Menu only. For how to operate in Simple Menu, see the respective pages of each function. pYou cannot use the Multitask function. (See page 405) Switch to Simple Menu You can switch between Normal Main Menu and Simple Menu. From the Stand-by display, press m. Configuration of Simple Menu Phone Mail i-mode Camera 1Seg Tools Settings
+l Normal Main Menu
+l Select YES to set Set at one time on page 129 to Large. Even when you release Simple Menu, the setting does not return. When Large has already been set, the confirmation display does not appear. Simple Menu 38
<Guide>
When You do not Remember Key Operation You can search for the functions you want to know and use, and then check the operating methods. You can execute some functions from
(Guide). This function is available in Japanese Mode only. 1 m (Stationery)
(Guide)Select an item.
(Recommendable functions)
. Displays the recommendable functions. Go to step 3.
(From keywords)
. Enter keywords and retrieve. Go to step 2
(From Function list)
. Retrieves from the function list. Go to step 3.
(Search history)
. Displays up to 30 search histories. Go to step 3. pHighlight each item and press l(
detailed operating methods are displayed. If you highlight
(From keywords) and press l(
keywords) or (How to input words).
), select (From
); then the pThe (Guide) display appears also by selecting the
(Guide) icon pasted on the desktop at purchase. Up to 50 search results are displayed. pYou can enter up to 24 full-pitch/48 half-pitch characters. 2 Enter a keyword. 3 Select a functionSelect an item.
(Description) . Displays explanations for the function.
(How to operate) . Displays the operating method.
(Operate function)
. Executes the function. Operate each function.
(Relevant function) . Displays up to 10 relevant functions. Repeat pFor some functions, press Oo(
pYou can display explanations about the function also by pressing l(
while highlighting the function. pTo delete search history, press i(
(Delete all), then select YES.
) and select 1 (Delete this) or
) several times for selection. step 3.
) Using UIM (FOMA Card) The UIM is an IC card that holds your information such as phone numbers. It can hold data such as Phonebook entries and SMS messages as well. By sharing a UIM, you can operate multiple FOMA phones for multiple purposes. You cannot use the FOMA phone for communication such as voice and videophone calls, i-mode, sending/receiving mail, or packet communication unless the UIM is inserted. For details on how to use the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual. When inserting or removing the UIM, take care not to accidentally touch or scratch the IC. Insert/Remove You need to turn off the power and then remove the battery before you insert the UIM. (See page 41) Inserting i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t 1 With the golden IC surface downward, push the UIM slowly to the bottom while pressing the surface of it. Removing 1 While sliding the UIM, pull it slowly. Cut 39 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i Information pMake sure that you insert/remove the UIM with the FOMA phone closed and held in your hand. pTake care not to force the UIM into place because this can break it. pTake care not to lose the UIM once you remove it. pWhen you replace your UIM (except during Omakase Lock), you need to enter the four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When you enter the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter the incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.) Password You can set two passwords, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM. (See page 132) Your UIM If the UIM used for obtaining the data or mail messages is inserted, you can browse or play back UIM-restricted data. Another persons UIM Replacing UIMs Unless the UIM used for obtaining the data or mail messages is inserted, you cannot browse or play back UIM-restricted data. pWhen the UIM is not inserted or when another persons UIM is inserted, the following
types of data and files are displayed with the restrictions symbol, Videophone record messages Movie memos Templates i-motion movies Kisekae Tool files Chaku-uta/Chaku-uta Full music files Downloaded dictionaries Files attached or pasted to i-mode mail in the Inbox Files attached to i-mode mail in the Outbox/Draft (except the data shot or edited with i-ppli programs Chara-den images PDF files Screen memos Images Melodies the FOMA phone) Messages R/F with files (melodies or images) attached or pasted Images inserted into Deco-mail text This function applies to the pre-installed i-ppli programs, Chara-den images, Deco-mail pictograms, etc. if they are reinstalled (upgraded) from a site. Chaku-uta is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. pThe data set with the UIM restrictions appear on the preview display as shown on the right. Security Function of UIM The FOMA phone has the UIM restriction function as a security function to protect your data and files. If you obtain data and files by the method below with the UIM inserted, UIM restrictions are automatically set to them. When downloading images or melodies and so on, from sites or Internet web pages When receiving i-mode mail with file attachments The data or files with the UIM restrictions can be browsed, played back, started, edited, attached to mail, or transferred via infrared rays only when the UIM used for obtaining is inserted. When the UIM used for obtaining the data or files is not inserted, or when another UIM is inserted, these functions are not operable. pIn the explanation hereafter, the UIM used to obtain data and files is referred to as your UIM and other UIMs as another persons UIM. 40 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Information pWhen the UIM restrictions are set for data and files, you cannot set those data and files for the functions such as Display setting and Select ring tone when another persons UIM is inserted instead. pIf you have set the data and files with the UIM restrictions for the functions such as Display setting and Select ring tone, these will work with their default settings if you remove your UIM or insert another persons UIM. If you insert your UIM again, then your settings will be enabled again. pUIM restrictions are not set for the data received using the infrared data exchange function or data transmission (OBEX communication) function or the still images/
moving images shot or edited with the FOMA phone. pEven when another persons UIM is inserted, data and files set with the UIM restrictions can be moved or deleted. pThe settings of the following functions are stored on the UIM:
SMS validity period PLMN setting Validating/Invalidating DoCoMo Certificate 1 and user certificate SMS center selection PIN1 code, PIN2 code PIN1 code entry set Select language Types of UIM (FOMA Card) If you use the blue UIM with your FOMA phone, note that following specifications differ from those of the green/white UIM:
Functions Number of digits of the phone number that can be stored in the UIM Phonebook Operation of user certificate to use FirstPass Use of WORLD WING Use of Service Numbers for DoCoMo repair counter and General inquiries
<DoCoMo Information Center>
UIM
(blue)
(green/white) 20 max. 26 max. Cannot be used Can be used Cannot be used Can be used Reference 93 190 472 Cannot be used Can be used 453 WORLD WING WORLD WING is the DoCoMo FOMA international roaming service that enables you to use the current phone number overseas for making and receiving calls using the UIM (green/white) and service compatible mobile phone. pYou do not need to subscribe to WORLD WING if you have subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005. If you offered that you did not need WORLD WING at the time you signed up for the FOMA service, or when you have midway canceled WORLD WING, you are required to take the procedures to newly subscribe to WORLD WING. pIf you have signed up for the FOMA service before August 31, 2005, and have not yet subscribed to WORLD WING, you are required to subscribe to it. pThis service is not available with some billing plans. pIf you lose your UIM (green/white) or have it stolen overseas, immediately contact DoCoMo to take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the UIM. For inquiries, see DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual. Note that you are still charged the call and communication fees incurred after you lose it or have it stolen. Attaching/Removing Batteries Use the FOMA phones dedicated Battery Pack P16. Attaching 1 While pressing the part of the back cover in the direction A, slide the back cover (2 mm or more) in the direction B to unlock. 2 With the arrow mark facing up, fit the tab side of the battery pack to the FOMA phone securely, and then push the battery pack into the direction B while pressing it against the direction A. Arrow mark 41 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i 3 Slide the back cover in the direction of the arrow and attach it in place. Removing 1 While pressing the part of the back cover in the direction of A, slide the back cover (2 mm or more) in the direction of B to unlock. 2 Take hold of the projection of the battery pack to lift it up. Projection Information pMake sure that you attach/remove the battery with the FOMA phone closed and held in your hand after you turn off the power. Also, make sure not to press the one-push open button when you attach/remove the battery. pIf you try to force the battery into place, you could damage the UIM or the charging terminal of the FOMA phone. 42 Charging Use the FOMA phones dedicated Battery Pack P16. Life of battery pack pBattery packs are consumables. The usable time shortens slightly each time they are charged. pWhen the usable time of the battery pack becomes half the time it was purchased, replacing is recommended because the battery pack is nearing the end of its life. Depending on the use conditions, the battery pack may swell as it nears the end of its life, but this is not a problem. pThe life of the battery pack may shorten if you use i-ppli programs, talk on the videophone, watch 1Seg programs and so on for a long time during charging. For environmental protection, bring the unneeded battery pack to an NTT DoCoMo, dealer, or recycle shop. Li-ion 00 Charging pFor details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (option), FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use (option), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (option). pThe FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports 100 V AC only. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use support from 100 V AC through 240 V AC. pThe shape of the plug for the AC adapter is for 100 V AC (for domestic use). To use the AC adapter that supports from 100 V AC through 240 V AC overseas, you need to have a conversion plug adapter that is compatible with the voltage of the country you stay. Do not use a transformer for overseas travel to charge the battery pack. pEven during charging, you can still answer calls if the FOMA phone is turned on. This will consume the charged amount so that charging will take longer. Also, the standby time or talk time might be shorter if you charge the battery pack with your FOMA phone open. pIf you have a long time videophone call during charging, the temperature in the FOMA phone may rise and charging may be suspended. In such a case, wait for a while and try charging again. pRemove and insert the connector slowly and carefully, without using unnecessary force. pDo not remove the battery pack during charging. Do not charge for long periods of time (several days) with the FOMA phone turned on. pIf you leave the FOMA phone powered on for long periods of time during charging, you may not be able to use the FOMA phone for long duration as expected and the low battery alarm may sound soon, because the FOMA phone receives the power from the battery pack after charging is completed. If this happens, charge the battery pack correctly. When charging the battery pack again, first remove the FOMA phone from the AC adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter and then set it again. Estimated usable time for battery pack (The usable time for the battery pack varies with the charging time and the remaining life of the battery pack.) Network Switch 3G/GSM Continuous standby time FOMA/3G 3G Continuous talk time In motion: Approx. 000 hours Voice call: Approx. 000 minutes In motion: Approx. 000 hours Standstill: Approx. 000 hours Standstill: Approx. 000 hours Voice call: Approx. 000 minutes Videophone call: Approx. 000 minutes Auto Auto GSM 1Seg watching time Approx. 000 minutes
(In ECO Mode: Approx. 000 minutes) The continuous talk time is the estimated time that the FOMA phone can be used for calls when radio waves can be sent and received normally. The continuous standby time is the estimated time when radio waves can be received normally. The standby time could be about half of this estimate depending on the charge level of the battery pack, function settings, other ambient conditions such as temperature, and the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for instance). When you use i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or not execute i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter if you watch 1Seg programs, compose i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-ppli program or the i-ppli Stand-by display, execute data communication or Multiaccess, use the camera, play back music, or use Bluetooth connections. The continuous talk time and the continuous standby time may be shortened depending on the network environment in the country you stay. The continuous standby time for standstill is the average number of hours you can use the FOMA phone in standstill status when it is closed and can receive radio waves normally. The continuous standby time for in motion is the average number of hours you can use the FOMA phone in the combined status of standstill moving and out of the service area when it is closed, in an area where it can receive radio waves normally. The 1Seg watching time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be received normally with the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 (option) connected. The watching time might be shortened depending on the charge level of the battery pack, function settings, other ambient conditions such as temperature, and the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for instance). i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Approx. 000 minutes Estimated time for charging battery pack AC adapter The charging time is an estimate of time for when empty battery pack is charged with the FOMA phone turned off. The charging time will be longer if you charge the battery pack with the power of the FOMA phone turned on. Approx. 000 minutes DC adapter Charge with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder
(option) to the desktop holder (option). 1 Connect the AC adapter 2 Insert the AC adapters 3 Put the bottom of the FOMA plug into a power socket. Call/Charging indicator Lock claw Connector Stopper Power socket Desktop Holder P27 AC Adapters plug Plug in horizontally with engraved side facing down phone into the stopper of the desktop holder (A) to fit the head to the lock claw, and then depress the FOMA phone until it clicks (B). Check that the Call/Charging indicator lights in red. When the Call/Charging indicator flickers, dismount the AC adapter and battery pack from the FOMA phone and then re-mount them for charging. If the symptom persists, troubles with the AC adapter, desktop holder or battery pack may be involved, so consult a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. pThe charging confirmation tone (see page 111) sounds when charging starts and ends. However, it does not sound when the power is off or during Manner Mode or Public Mode (Drive Mode). FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 100 V AC pBe sure to set the FOMA phone firmly onto the desktop holder. Also, be careful that the connector cover or a commercial strap is not caught between the FOMA phone and desktop holder. pCharging can be done even when the FOMA phone is open. 43 t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i 4 When charging is completed, hold the desktop holder and lift up the head of FOMA phone to remove. pUnplug the AC adapter from the power socket when you are not going to use it for a long time. Indicator and display during charging and when charging is completed Call/Charging indicator display Charging Charging completed Lights in red Off Blinks Lights pWhen the FOMA phone is turned off, does not appear. If you start charging with the battery flat, the Call/Charging indicator might not light immediately; however, charging itself has started. When charging only with the AC adapter Insert the connector with the engraved surface facing up until it clicks. Pull straight the connector out while pressing the release buttons. Check the facing direction (front or rear) of the AC adapter plug and then insert or pull it horizontally into or out of the FOMA phone. Malfunction could result if you try to pull it forcibly. Release buttons
<Battery Level>
Checking Battery Level When the FOMA phone is turned on, an estimate of the battery level is indicated by the icon. Almost full . Getting low. Almost empty . pCharge the battery when it is almost empty. Check by Display and Tone You can check an estimate of the battery level by the display and sound. 1 mSettingsOther settingsBatteryBattery level Almost full Three beeps Getting low Two beeps Almost empty One beep Engraved surface Almost empty. Charge the battery. DC adapter (option) With the DC adapter, you can use a cigarette lighter socket (12 V/24 V) of cars to charge the FOMA phone with the battery pack attached. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02. Information pIf the fuse blows off when charging with the DC adapter, be sure to use a 2A fuse. The 2A fuse is consumables, so purchase at auto parts stores in your neighborhood. pThe pictograph disappears in about three seconds. When the battery is running out The display on the right appears and the low battery alarm sounds for about 10 seconds. To stop this alarm, press any key other than < and >. About one minute later, the FOMA phone will be turned off. pDuring a call, a beeping tone from the earpiece notifies you of the low battery. About 20 seconds later your call will be cut and then one minute later the FOMA phone will be turned off. Recharge Battery display 44
<Power ON/OFF>
Turning Power On/Off Turn Power On 1 Press and hold h for at least one second. After the Wake-up display (see page 116) is displayed, the Stand-by display appears. pIf you have stored many Phonebook entries or mail messages, it may take a while for the display to appear. pIf Set Time is set, the current date and time are shown. pWhen is displayed, the FOMA phone is out of the service area or in the place where the radio waves do not reach. Move to a location where disappears. pIf Starting System Wait a minute is displayed when you turn on the power, wait for a while and then proceed. Stand-by display When your UIM is replaced (except during Omakase Lock) Enter the four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When you enter the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter the incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.) When PIN1 code entry set of UIM setting is set to ON Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN1 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the correct PIN1 code, the Stand-by display appears. See page 132 for PIN1 code. When Auto reset setting of Notice call cost is set to ON
(except during Omakase Lock) Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN2 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the correct PIN2 code, the Stand-by display appears. If you press r or h without entering the correct PIN2 code, Auto reset setting is set to OFF and the Stand-by display appears. See page 132 for PIN2 code. i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Information pEach entry display appears in the order of PIN1 code Terminal Security Code PIN2 code. pThe mail message has been saved by default. Press +
Display Mail from Inbox on page 218, you can display the mail. Oo twice or operate Turn Power Off 1 Press and hold h for at least two seconds. The exit display appears and the power turns off. pYou cannot turn on the power immediately after turning off the power. Wait a few seconds.
+m-1-5
<Select Language>
Switching to English 1 m (Settings) (Display)
(Select language)
Japanese () or English () pThe following functions are different between Japanese display and English display:
Functions Info Notice Setting Japanese
(Electrical tone)
(Voice) OFF Clock of Display Setting Day of week
(Guide) Voice Guidance Available Available Available English ON Not available OFF Not available Not available Not available Information pWhen you insert the UIM, the (Select language) setting is stored on the UIM. 45
<Initial Setting>
Executing Initial Settings 1 Turn on the powerYES t If the date and time, Terminal Security Code, Keypad Sound, Location Request Menu, or Character Size is not set, the Initial Setting display e s appears when you turn on the power. You can set the initial settings also d n from each menu function separately. a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security Code, PIN1 code, or PIN2 code appears, follow the operation on page 45. i You can select Auto time adjust ON or Auto time adjust OFF for setting the time.
(See page 46) 2 Set the date and time. 3 Set your Terminal Security Code. You can set your Terminal Security Code required for setting functions.
(See page 132) 1. Enter 0000Enter your new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits) You can set the keypad whether to make a sound. (See page 111)
YES 4 Set Keypad Sound. 5 Set Location Request Menu. 6 Set the size of characters. You can set whether to notify your current location for when a GPS location provision request arrives. (See page 288) You can set the size of characters on the display at a time. (See page 129) Information pWhen an unset function is found, the Initial Setting display for the unset function appears each time you turn on the power. 46 Information pThe completed settings are valid even when total setting is interrupted by an incoming call or canceled by pressing -h or -r midway. pWhen the power is automatically turned on by alarm notification, the Initial Setting display does not appear even if there is any unset function. pWhen you finish the initial settings, the confirmation display appears telling that updating software is executed automatically. This display appears only at the first time, and after that, does not appear until you execute Reset Settings or Initialize.
+m-3-1
<Set Time>
Setting Date and Time You can select whether to correct the time automatically or set it manually. The time is set/displayed on the 24-hour basis. 1 mSettingsClockSet timeAuto time adjust ON or Auto time adjust OFF Auto time adjust ON
. Corrects the date/time automatically. The setting is completed. When the time cannot be corrected automatically such as when displayed and the date/time has not been set, the Manual Time Setting display appears. Follow step 2 to set the date/time. is Auto time adjust OFF
. Sets the date/time manually. pWhen Notice call cost is set to ON, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code. 2 Enter year, month, date and time. Use Mo to move the cursor and enter numbers by the numeric keys. pTo enter one-digit numeral for the date and time, enter two digits beginning with 0 as in 01 through 09. pHighlight time zone and press l(
) to set the time zone. Use Mo to select a region and press Oo(
). About date/time correction function The time displayed on the FOMA phone is corrected according to the clock information obtained from the network. The time is corrected when you show the Stand-by display with Auto time adjust ON set. If you want to set the time with a lag, set the time manually. pSome few second errors might occur. You might not be able to correct the time depending on the radio wave conditions, or the i-ppli program set for the i-ppli Stand-by display. pWhen you receive the clock information overseas and the time difference correction information differs from the previously received one, Time is adjusted is displayed and the time difference is corrected automatically. Press OK to update the time and show Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, sent/received mail messages and others in local time. pWhen the time difference is corrected overseas, the sub clock (Japanese date/time, etc.) is displayed below the clock on the Stand-by display. pDepending on the networks overseas, the time difference might not be corrected. Information pUnless Set Time is set, the functions which use the clock such as Schedule do not work correctly. Further, the date/time for redial items and received call records are not stored. pThe set time is retained even when the battery pack is replaced, however, it might be reset if the battery pack is left removed for a long time. In that case, charge the FOMA phone and then perform the clock setting. pThe sub clock is not displayed while Set time is set to Auto time adjust OFF or in Japan. Summer Time You can advance the time displayed for the overseas country you stay and for a region of World Time Watch by one hour. 1 mSettingsClockSummer timeON or OFF
<Caller ID Notification>
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number You can set the FOMA phone to send your phone number to the called partys phone when dialing. Your phone number is important information, so take utmost care when notifying your phone number. This function is available only when the other partys phone supports Caller ID. i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Set Caller ID Notification to Network You can set whether to notify your caller ID on the network. 1 mServiceCaller ID notification
Do the following operations.
+m-1-7 pThis function supports clock settings from 00:00 on January 1, 2008 through 23:59 on Item Operation/Explanation December 31, 2037.
<World Time Watch>
Displaying World Time You can display the time of the specified area under the Stand-by display clock. 1 mSettingsClockWorld time watchON or OFF
Use Mo to select an area and press Oo(
). Information pWorld Time Watch does not appear when Display setting Clock Clock display is set to OFF, or when you use the FOMA phone overseas. Activate
ON or OFF Check setting You can check the setting contents of Activate. Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call Each time you dial out, you can set whether to notify your caller ID. 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 47
<Own Number>
Checking Your Own Number pYour phone number (own number) is stored on the UIM. 1 mPhonebookOwn number You can press No to switch the tabs. pSee page 417 for storing/displaying personal data.
+m-0 List tab Phone number tab Own Number display Information pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can switch between Number A and Number B by pressing Oo(
appears for Number B.
) from the Own Number display. appears for Number A, and pWhen you replace a UIM with another one (2in1 contractor 2in1 contractor) while using 2in1, perform 2in1 function OFF (see page 457) and then set 2in1 setting to YES, or perform Auto acquire No. B (see page 418), to acquire the correct Number B. When you replace a UIM with another one (2in1 contractor 2in1 non-contractor), perform 2in1 function OFF as well to update the owners information to the correct one. 2 i(
)Notify caller ID
Dont notify or Notify caller (OFF or ON) pTo release Notify caller ID, select Cancel prefix. Whether to notify or not t e s d n a H e h t g n s U e r o f e B i follows the setting for Activate of Caller ID notification. Set Notify/Not Notify by Entering 186/184 You can select whether to notify the other party of your phone number also by entering 186/184 before the other partys phone number. To notify your caller ID pPress l(
) to make a videophone call. 1 186Destination phone numberd or Oo(
1 184Destination phone numberd or Oo(
Not to notify your caller ID
) to make a videophone call. pPress l(
) Information pWhen you make a call and hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see page 452), follow the steps of To notify your caller ID to enter 186 and redial. pWhen you make a PushTalk call, Activate of Caller ID notification or Notify caller ID is valid, but notify/not notify by adding 186/ 184 is invalid. pYou cannot set Caller ID notification while is displayed. 48
Voice/Videophone Calls Making Calls/Videophone Calls About Videophone . Making a Call/Videophone Call . Switching between a Voice Call and Videophone Call . Using Call Records. <Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls>
Using Chaku-moji . <Chaku-moji>
Sending Touch-tone Signals . <Pause Dial>
International Calls. <WORLD CALL>
Setting for International Calls . <International Dial Assist>
Storing Numbers to be Added to the Beginning of a Phone Number
. <Prefix Setting>
Making a Call with Specified Sub-address
. <Sub-address Setting>
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting . <Reconnect Signal>
Adjusting Voice According to Surrounding Noise
. <Voice Clear Setting>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear
. <Noise Reduction>
Switching to Hands-free. <Hands-free>
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices. <In-Car Hands-free>
50 50 53 54 57 59 60 61 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls 64 Receiving a Call/Videophone Call . Switched between a Voice Call and Videophone Call by the Other Party
. 65 Setting Response of Key Operation for Answering Incoming Calls
. <Answer Setting>
Setting Response for when Opening FOMA Phone during Ringing
. <Setting when Opened>
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA Phone during a Call
. <Setting when Closed>
Adjusting Earpiece Volume . <Volume>
Adjusting Ring Volume . <Ring Volume>
67 67 68 66 66 When You Cannot or Could not Answer the Call Putting an Incoming Call on Hold when You cannot Answer at Once
. <On Hold>
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call. <Holding>
Setting Hold Tone . <Set Hold Tone>
Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) . <Public Mode (Drive Mode)>
Using Public Mode (Power Off) . <Public Mode (Power Off)>
If You could not Answer an Incoming Call . <Missed Calls>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer the Call
. <Record Message Setting>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer the Call during Ringing . <Quick Record Message>
Playing Back/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice Memo/Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos
. <Play/Erase Messages> <Play/Erase Videophone Messages>
68 68 69 69 70 71 71 72 73 Making Full Use of Videophone Calls 74 Using Chara-den . 75 Useful Functions for Videophone Calls. 77 Setting Videophone Hands-free . <Hands-free with Videophone>
77 Setting Image Quality for Videophone Calls . <Visual Preference>
Changing Image Displays for Videophone Calls . <Select Image>
77 Redialing as a Voice Call when a Videophone Call cannot be Connected
. <Voice Call Auto Redial>
78 Setting for Switching between a Voice Call and a Videophone Call
. <Notify Switchable Mode>
Selecting Response to Incoming Videophone Calls during i-mode
. <Videophone while Packet>
Connecting FOMA Phone to External Devices to Use Videophone Function
. Checking inside the Room when You are Out
. <Remote Monitoring>
78 78 79 79 49 About Videophone You and the other party can talk viewing each others images. DoCoMo videophones conform to 3G-324M, standardized by the international standard 3GPP. You cannot connect to the videophone that uses a different format. p3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project):
This is the regional standards organization for developing common technical specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000). p3G-324M:
This is the international standard for the third generation of mobile videophones. pP906i supports only 64 kbps communication speed of the videophone. You cannot talk on the videophone at 32 kbps communication speed. Display during videophone calls
Receiving image (The other partys image through the camera or substitute image)
Sending image (Your image through the camera or substitute image)
Call duration Status Making a Call/Videophone Call 1 Enter the other partys phone number, starting with the city code. pWhen 27 or more digits are entered, the lower 26 digits only are displayed. pTo store an entered phone number in the Phonebook, press m(
). Go to step 2 of Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook on page 96. pEven when you are dialing within the same area, you need to enter the city code before the phone number. 2 Press d or Oo(
When Making a Voice Call
). p blinks during dialing, and lights during a call. s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i
: Voice sending/receiving
(gray): Voice sending/
receiving failed1
: Image sending/receiving
(gray): Image sending/
receiving failed2
: Camera image sending
: Substitute image sending
: Chara-den talking
: Hands-free activated
: AV output
: Bluetooth communicating
: Portrait
: Close-up
: Landscape
: Night Mode
: Chara-den Whole Action Mode
: Chara-den Parts Action Mode
: DTMF Transmission Mode
1 When voice sending fails, the other party cannot hear your voice. When voice receiving fails, you cannot hear the other partys voice. 2 When image sending fails, the sending image is not displayed at the other end. When image receiving fails, the receiving image is not displayed. When voice or image sending/receiving fails, it does not recover automatically. You need to make a videophone call again. 50 When Making a Videophone Call Press l(
). blinks during dialing and lights during the call. p pDuring a videophone call, you can press m(
display the substitute image at the other party. To resume the image through your camera, press m(
) again.
) to 3 Press h to end the call after talking. Information The digital communication charging starts from this display. pIf you hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see page 452), follow the steps of To notify your caller ID on page 48 to enter 186 and redial. Information
<For Voice Calls>
pYou can make a voice call also by pressing -d and then entering the partys phone number. If you enter a wrong number, press -h to clear the display and then redial.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by Hands-free w/ V. phone (see page 77). However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of Hands-free w/ V. phone. pWhen you make a videophone call with substitute image, note that you will still be charged for the digital communication, not the voice calls. pIf you make a videophone call at 110/119/118 from the FOMA phone, it is automatically dialed out as a voice call. pDuring a videophone call, you can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead of the image through your camera. (See page 74) pThe international videophone call is available using the DoCoMo international call service WORLD CALL. (See page 60) Display during dialing The other partys name and icon are displayed if the partys phone number and name are stored in the Phonebook. However, the image is not displayed even if it is stored in the Phonebook. pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name that comes first in the search order (see page 98) is displayed. pWhen the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can pThe phone number instead of the name is displayed if the Phonebook entry is stored hear the other partys voice from the earphone. (See page 423) as secret data or if Personal Data Lock is activated. pIf you close the FOMA phone during a call, the FOMA phone works in accordance with the setting of Setting when closed. (See page 67) pIf you switch to Horizontal Open Style during a call, the FOMA phone is set to No tone. (See page 67) pYou can press numeric keys to send touch-tone signals during a call. During a Chara-den call, you need to switch to DTMF Transmission Mode. (See page 76) pYou cannot make a call in Horizontal Open Style. However, when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can make a voice call in Horizontal Open Style. pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can make a call after selecting Number A or Number B.
(See page 458) If you entered a wrong phone number Each time you press r, the digit on the far right is cleared. If you press and hold r for at least one second, all the digits are cleared and the Stand-by display returns. pPress No to move the cursor to the digit you want to clear, and then press r to clear it. To clear all the digits on and to the right of the cursor, press and hold r for at least one second. 51 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i If a videophone call could not be connected The reason why it could not be connected is displayed. (The displayed reason might not be the same as the actual reason depending on the type of the other partys phone and contract for network services.) Auto-redialing If Voice call auto redial is set to ON, and a videophone call is not connected, a voice call is automatically made. pVideophone calls cannot be connected to the phones that do not support the Messages Check number, then redial Busy Busy with packet transmission Out of service area/power off Set caller ID to ON Your call is being forwarded Redial using voice call Upper limit has been exceeded Connection failed Please make your call from the i-mode web page Connection failed You have dialed a non-existent phone number. Reasons The other party is busy. (Depending on the receivers phone, this message might be displayed during packet communication as well.) The packet communication is progress at the other end. The other partys phone is out of the service area or turned off. Your caller ID is not notified. (when dialing visualnet, etc.) During forwarding The other party activates Call Forwarding Service but the forwarding destination phone does not support videophone calls. The upper limit for the plan with the limit function (Type Limit, Family Wide Limit) is exceeded. You did not make a videophone call from the IP (Information Provider) site among i-mode official sites (at dialing to V-live). Redial after setting Activate of Caller ID notification to ON. pThis may appear in the case other than above. videophone function, or to the phones that are out of the service area or turned off even if they are videophones. If you have set Voice call auto redial to ON and attempt to dial a phone that does not have the videophone function, the number will be redialed as a voice call. However, this operation might not work if you call the phone connected with ISDN-synchronous 64K or the ISDN videophone that does not support 3G-324M
(as of March 2008), or if you dial the wrong number. Note that you could be charged for the communication. pOnce the videophone call has started communications, redialing as a voice call will not be made. Function Menu while Entering Phone Number Function menu Operation/Explanation Notify caller ID See page 47. Prefix numbers See page 62. Intl dial assist See page 61. Select image Multi number See page 78. You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party.
(See page 456.) Add to phonebook See page 96. Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 198. Chaku-moji See page 57. 52 Switching between a Voice Call and Videophone Call You (caller) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call. This function is available for the mobile phones that can switch between a voice call and a videophone call. Switch from a Voice Call to Videophone Call When the other partys phone has a function to switch between the calls, call to videophone call. is displayed on your phone and you can switch from the voice 1 During a voice callc(
pWhen you select an image
)Change to be sent to the other party, select Select image. Go to step 2 on page 78. pWhen Cancel is selected, the FOMA phone cancels switching and returns to the voice call. pWhile switching, the voice guidance is played back. Switch from a Videophone Call to Voice Call When the other partys phone has a function to switch between calls, you can switch from a videophone call to a voice call by selecting CHG to voice call from the Function menu. 1 During a videophone calli(
CHG to voice callYES pSelect NO on the confirmation display to stop switching and to resume the videophone call. pWhile switching, the voice guidance is played back.
) i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Information pYou can switch between a voice call and a videophone call repeatedly. pWhen i-mode or packet communication is in progress, the communication is disconnected and then the voice call is switched to the videophone call. pWhen packet communication is in progress at the other end, the message to the effect that the communication cannot be switched is displayed and the voice call continues without switching to the videophone call. pYou cannot switch from a voice call to a videophone call while Multi calling is displayed during a call if you have signed up for Call Waiting Service. pIt takes about five seconds to switch. Switching may take a longer time depending on the radio wave conditions. pDepending on how the callers phone is working or on the radio wave conditions, switching between a voice call and a videophone call may fail and the connection may be cut off. pIf you switch between a voice call and a videophone call during a call, the call duration and call cost are counted respectively for each call. You are not charged while Changing is displayed. pYou cannot switch between a videophone call and a voice call unless Notify switchable mode on page 78 is set to Indication ON at the other end. pWhen you switch from a videophone call to a voice call, Hands-free is deactivated. 53 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i
<Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls>
Using Call Records The FOMA phone can store the other partys phone number and date/
time you have dialed or received. You can call back to the other party. Redial Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in total, and the older record of dialing to the same phone number is deleted. However, the dialing by PushTalk is retained in Redial separately from that of the voice call or videophone call even if you dial to the same phone number. Dialed Calls Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as well. The older records of dialing to the same phone number are also retained. Received Calls Up to 30 records of incoming voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as well. The older records coming from the same phone number are also retained. pWhen a call is switched between a voice call and a videophone call, the call that is dialed/received first is stored. pWhen more than 30 calls are dialed, the older records are automatically deleted. Even if you turn off the FOMA phone, call records are not deleted. pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 redial items, 90 dialed call records, and 120 received call records for Number A and Number B are stored in total. Icons for Redial, Dialed Calls, and Received Calls
Dialed and received calls/missed calls of voice call Dialed and received calls/missed calls of videophone call Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk Dialed and received group calls/missed group calls of PushTalk Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk via servers phonebook Voice/Video messages are recorded on Record Message Incoming calls of Remote Monitoring Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international call 54
Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international videophone call Dialed calls of 64K data communication Received calls/missed calls of 64K data communication Dialed calls of packet communication Received calls/missed calls of packet communication Received calls of 64K data communication and packet communication when no external device is connected Received Chaku-moji message Records with time difference corrected Records for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1) The unchecked missed call icons are highlighted. Use Redial/Dialed Calls 1 Press Vo. When Using Redial When Using Dialed Calls mPhonebookDialed/recv. calls
Dialed calls The list for call records is displayed. pFor redial items of PushTalk, press Oo(
show the Redial list of the group. Highlight a party and press p to make a PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p, you can make a group call. pPress m(
) to display the Sent Address list. pYou cannot display the Redial list even when you press Vo when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. For Redial
) to 2 Select a call record. The detailed display for the call record is displayed. pWhen the other party is stored in the Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are displayed. If the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in the search order (see page 98) are displayed. Use Received Calls 1 Press Co. For Redial
+m-2-4 pYou can display the Received Call list also by mPhonebookDialed/recv. calls
Received callsAll calls or Missed calls. All calls . All the records including missed calls Missed calls. The records of missed calls only In Dual Mode of 2in1, the number of missed calls for Number A and Number B is displayed respectively.
(If unchecked missed calls are found, the number of them is displayed.) pFor received call records of PushTalk, press Oo(
) to show the Received Call list of the group with mark added to the caller. Highlight a party and press p to make a PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p, you can make a group call. pPress m(
pYou cannot display the Received Call list even when you press Co when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display.
) to display the Received Address list. Received Call list i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 2 Select a received call record. pThe other partys phone number is displayed if it is provided. If this caller is stored in the Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are displayed. If the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in search order (see page 98) are displayed. If there is a call for packet communication, the senders access point name (APN) is displayed. When the other partys phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is displayed. Detailed Received Call display pFor missed calls, the ring time is displayed on the right of the received date/time. pWhen a Chaku-moji message is received, it is displayed. To make a call to a displayed redial item, dialed call record, or received call record Press d to make a voice call. You can make a voice call also by pressing Oo(
press p to make a PushTalk call.
) from the detailed display. Press l(
) to make a videophone call and Information pYou can make a voice call to the most recently dialed or received number by pressing
-d from the Stand-by display and then +
pWhen you make/receive a call with an additional number of Multi Number, the stored name for the additional number is displayed below the phone number on the detailed display. If you store a phone number for Number setting of Multi number, the phone number is displayed as well. No. pDialed call records of 64K data communication are not stored when you use a Bluetooth device. pEven if you make a voice call (or videophone call) to the phone number in a received call record with a Chaku-moji message displayed, the received message is not sent. pWhen a call comes in from a party who uses a dial-in phone number, a different phone number might be displayed. 55 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Function Menu while Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Delete this
YES Delete selected Delete all
Put a check mark for redial items, dialed call records, or received call records to be deletedl(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Select image See page 78. Store in P-Talk PB YES Store P-Talk group Select a group. pWhen members who are not stored in the PushTalk Phonebook are found, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store them.
Enter a group name. pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. Information
<Delete this> <Delete selected> <Delete all>
pIf you execute Delete all from the Function menu of Redial/Dialed Calls, all records in both Redial and Dialed Calls are deleted. Even if you execute Delete this or Delete selected of Redial, the records are not deleted from Dialed Calls and they are retained. To delete the dialed call records, delete them from the Function menu while Dialed calls is displayed.
<Store in P-Talk PB>
pYou cannot store from the call record for the party who is not stored in the Phonebook.
<Store P-Talk group>
pYou cannot store in a PushTalk group unless all the members are stored in the FOMA phones Phonebook. Function menu Operation/Explanation Notify caller ID See page 47. Prefix numbers See page 62. Intl dial assist See page 61. 2in1 dial Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 458) You can select a phone number to notify the other party. (See page 456) Chaku-moji See page 57. Character size You can switch the character size for the list. (See Dialed/recv. calls on page 129) Add to phonebook See page 96. pYou can store the phone number in the Phonebook also by pressing m(
) from the detailed display. Go to step 2 of Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook on page 96. Ring time
[Received Call list only]
You can display the ring time for missed calls. Even if you have set Missed calls display of Ring time to Not display, the missed calls which stopped ringing within the ring start time and their ring times are displayed. Add desktop icon See page 127. Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 198. Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 244. Sent address
[Redial/Dialed Calls only]
Received address
[Received Calls only]
See page 229. See page 229. 56
<Chaku-moji>
Using Chaku-moji When making a voice call or videophone call, you can send your text message to tell the subject during calling. pFor details on Chaku-moji or compatible models, refer to DoCoMo web page or Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. pThe sending end is charged, but the receiving end is not charged. When a Chaku-moji message is received A Chaku-moji message is displayed below a caller. The Chaku-moji message is stored in Received Calls as well. pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed only during ringing. It is not displayed during a call. pEven when a Chaku-moji message comes in within the ring start time set by Ring time, it is received and recorded in Received Calls. pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed on the Private window when Chaku-moji of Called on page 117 is set to ON. pThe Chaku-moji message is not displayed during Lock All, Omakase Lock, or Personal Data Lock. However, you can check the Chaku-moji message from Received Calls after the lock is released. Store Messages You can store up to 10 Chaku-moji messages in the Message list. 1 mServiceChaku-mojiCreate message
Highlight <Not stored> and press l(
Enter a message. pTo edit a stored message, highlight it and press l(
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they are pictographs,
). symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters. Make a Call with a Message 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 2 i(
Function menu Create message Select message Sent messages
)Chaku-mojiDo the following operations. Operation/Explanation You can create a Chaku-moji message just before dialing.
Enter a message. pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they are pictographs, symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters. pThe Chaku-moji message created using this function is not stored in the Message list. From the Message list, you can select a stored message.
Select a message. From the Sent Message list, you can select a Chaku-moji message to be sent. Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages only are stored in the Sent Message list. If you send the same Chaku-
moji message, the older one is deleted. When the number of sent Chaku-moji messages exceeds 10, the messages are deleted from the oldest one.
Select a sent message. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 3 Press d or Oo(
). pPress l(
pThe Chaku-moji message being sent is displayed during dialing.
) to make a videophone call. Information pWhen a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other partys phone, Transmission completed is displayed, and you are charged a transmission fee. pWhen a Chaku-moji message does not arrive at the other partys phone such as when the other partys phone is not a Chaku-moji compatible mobile phone or the call is not allowed by Message disp. settings at the receiving end, Transmission failed is displayed. In this case, you are not charged a transmission fee. pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result may not be displayed at the sending end even if a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other partys phone. In this case, you are charged a transmission fee. pEven if you make a call sending a Chaku-moji message, the Chaku-moji message is not displayed and you are not charged a transmission fee (the call is not recorded in Received Calls at the receiving end) when the other partys phone is out of the service area, turned off, during Public Mode (Drive Mode), or the ring time for Record Message Setting is set to zero seconds. Also, the transmission result is not displayed at the sending end. 57 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Information pWhen a videophone call is not connected and automatically dialed as a voice call, the Chaku-moji message is resent as well. pChaku-moji does not support PushTalk. pYou cannot send/receive Chaku-moji messages overseas. Detailed Sent Message Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages are stored in Sent Messages, and you can check for the other partys phone number and the date/time the Chaku-moji messages were sent. Older messages sent to the same phone number are also retained. pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 10 records for Number A and Number B can be displayed in total. 1 mServiceChaku-moji
Sent messages
. Chaku-moji message successfully sent
. Chaku-moji message unsuccessfully sent
. Chaku-moji message for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1) is not pWhen the transmission result is not displayed, or displayed. pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result might not be displayed correctly. 2 Select a sent message. pWhen the other partys phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are displayed. 58 Function Menu while Detailed Sent Message is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Store Delete this Delete all You can store a sent Chaku-moji message in the Message list.
<Not stored>
pYou can store also by pressing l(
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Message Display Settings You can set how incoming Chaku-moji messages are displayed. 1 mServiceChaku-mojiMessage disp. settings
Select an item. Display all messages . Displays Chaku-moji messages from all callers. Numbers stored in PB . Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the callers stored in the Phonebook. Calls with callerID . Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the caller Hide all messages. Does not display Chaku-moji messages. notifying his/her phone number. Information pWhen you set to Numbers stored in PB, you cannot receive Chaku-moji messages from the callers stored in the Phonebook B in A Mode of 2in1 (and vice versa). Prefer Chaku-moji You can set how your FOMA phone works for incoming Chaku-moji messages for when Setting when opened is set to Answer. 1 mServiceChaku-mojiPrefer Chaku-moji
ON or OFF ON . Does not answer by opening the FOMA phone during ringing, so you can check a Chaku-moji message. OFF . Answers by opening the FOMA phone during ringing.
<Pause Dial>
Sending Touch-tone Signals You can send touch-tone signals from your FOMA phone to use services such as reserving tickets, checking bank balance, etc.
+m-8-4 Store Pause Dial You need to store a number string to be sent as a touch-tone signal in the Pause Dial list. If you have inserted a pause (p), you can send a number string breaking at the point where the pause is inserted. pWhen a number string is already stored, it is displayed. pTo delete a stored pause dial, press i(
YES. 1 mSettingsOther settingsPause diall(
2 Enter a number string. pEnter the pause (p) by pressing and holding a for at least one second. pYou can use only 0 through 9, s, a to enter a number string and the pause (p).
) and select Delete, then select
) pYou can enter up to 128 digits. pYou cannot enter a pause (p) at the beginning and end of a number string, or enter it consecutively. Send Pause Dial 1 mSettingsOther settingsPause dialOo(
Enter a phone numberd or Oo(
) A voice call is made. Once the line is connected, a number string stored in Pause Dial is displayed up to the first pause (p). pWhen the other partys phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo. pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co or from Redial by pressing Vo. 2 Check that the line is connectedd or Oo(
A number string up to the first pause (p) is sent, and a number string up to the next pause (p) is displayed. A number string up to the pause (p) is sent each time you press d or Oo(
When you have finished sending the last number, the Talking display appears. pTo send multiple pieces of a number string at a time, press and hold Vo for at least one second, and select Send at one time.
). Information pDuring a call, you can send a number string also by displaying the Function menu of the Pause Dial display. pSome devices on the receiving end cannot receive signals. pYou cannot send a number string with pauses during a videophone call. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 59 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call 1 Enter numbers in order of 009130010country code area code (city code)destination phone number
d or Oo(
) pWhen the area code (city code) begins with 0, enter it except for the 0. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy. pPress l(
) to make an international videophone call. Use + to Make an International Call When you enter a phone number for dialing or storing it in the Phonebook, press and hold 0 for at least one second to enter +. You can use + to make international calls without entering an international call access code such as 009130-010. pIf you set Auto assist setting of Intl dial assist to ON, an international call access code of IDD prefix setting is automatically entered. 1 0(for at least one second)
Enter numbers in order of country code area code (city code)destination phone number
d or Oo(
)Dial pWhen the area code (city code) begins with 0, enter it except for the 0. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy. pPress l(
pWhen you select Dial with orig. No., you can make a call without adding an
) to make an international videophone call. international call access code.
<WORLD CALL>
International Calls WORLD CALL is the international call service available from DoCoMo mobile phones. When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have contracted to use WORLD CALL (except those who have applied not to use it). pYou can call about 240 countries and regions. pThe WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly FOMA bill. pThe application/monthly fee is free of charge. pChanges in procedures for international call My Line service is not available for mobile communications such as mobile phones, so cannot be used with WORLD CALL. However, in conjunction with the launch of My Line service, the dialing procedure for international calls from mobile phones has changed. Note that the old way of dialing (the way without 010 from the operation of Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call) no longer works. pThe service is not available with some billing plans. pContact DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual for inquiries about WORLD CALL. pWhen using international carriers other than DoCoMo, contact them. About international videophone calls You can make international videophone calls to the other party who uses a specific 3G mobile phone overseas. Press l(
) in the steps of Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call. (See page 60) pFor the information about connectable countries and telecommunications carriers, refer
) instead of d or Oo(
to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. pImages sent from the other party may blur on your FOMA phone or you may not be able to connect, depending on the other partys phone used for the international videophone call. 60 International Dial Assist You can make a call adding a country code or international call access code to a phone number. (Except for some countries and regions, if the phone number starts with 0, the 0 at the beginning is automatically deleted.) 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record.
)Intl dial assistSelect a country name
Select a named or Oo(
pPress l(
pWhen the beginning of the phone number is +, you can select only an
) to make an international videophone call.
) 2 i(
international call access code. pWhen Japan is selected as a country name, the display for selecting a name is not displayed.
<International Dial Assist>
Setting for International Calls Auto Assist Setting You can set whether to replace + at the beginning of a phone number with an international call access code for when you make an international call from Japan. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl dial assist
Auto assist settingON or OFF
Select a country nameSelect a name. pWhen no country code or international call access code is stored, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select YES and go to step 2 of Country Code Setting on page 61 for a country code, and go to step 2 of IDD Prefix Setting on page 61 for an international call access code. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Country Code Setting You can store up to 27 country codes to be added for making international calls from overseas. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl dial assist
). pIf you select a stored country name, you can check the stored contents.
Country Code set.
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l(
2 Enter a country name Enter a country code. pYou can enter a country name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters. pYou can enter a country code of up to 5 digits. But you cannot use #, :, and +. IDD Prefix Setting You can store up to three international call access codes to be added to the beginning of a phone number for making an international call. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl dial assist
IDD prefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l(
). pIf you select the stored item, you can check the stored contents. 2 Enter a nameEnter an international call access code. pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters. pYou can enter an international call access code of up to 16 digits. Function Menu while Country Code Setting/IDD Prefix Setting is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Go to step 2 of Country Code Setting on page 61 for Country Code Setting, and go to step 2 of IDD Prefix Setting on page 61 for IDD Prefix Setting. pYou can edit the item also by pressing l(
). 61 Function menu Operation/Explanation Delete this Delete all Information
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pYou cannot delete the country code or international call access code set by Auto assist setting.
<Prefix Setting>
Storing Numbers to be Added to the Beginning of a Phone Number You can store prefix numbers such as international call access codes or 186/184 and add them to the phone number for dialing. You can store up to seven prefix numbers. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingPrefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l(
). s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i pIf you select a stored prefix, you can check the stored contents. pTo delete a stored prefix, press i(
then select YES. If you select Delete all, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
) and select Delete this or Delete all 2 Enter a nameEnter a prefix number. pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters. pYou can enter a prefix number of up to 16 digits. The keys for entry are limited to 0 through 9, s and a. Prefix Numbers You can add a prefix number to the beginning of phone number when you make a call. 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 62 2 i(
d or Oo(
pPress l(
call.
)Prefix numbersSelect a name
) to make a videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk pFor making a PushTalk call, adding a prefix number such as 186 or 184 to the beginning of the phone number is disabled.
<Sub-address Setting>
Making a Call with Specified Sub-address You can set whether to regard the numbers after : of a phone number as a sub-address to access the specified phones or data terminals. pThe sub-address is a number assigned to identify each ISDN terminal connected to an ISDN line. It is also used for selecting contents on V-live. 1 mSettingsOther settingsSub-address setting
ON or OFF Information pEven if you set Sub-address setting to ON, : at the top of phone numbers and
: immediately after the prefix number or 186/184 are not regarded as sub-address mark-off symbols.
<Reconnect Signal>
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting You can set an alarm that sounds until a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk communication is reconnected after disconnected owing to bad radio wave conditions.
+m-7-7 1 mSettingsTalkReconnect signal
Select an alarm. Information Information pThe reconnectable time differs depending on the usage status and radio wave conditions. pWhile the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you An estimate is about 10 seconds and the call charge is applied also for that duration. cannot hear voice through the speaker even if you switch to Hands-free. pWhile you are disconnected, no sound is transmitted to the other party. pKeep the FOMA phone well away from your ear during a Hands-free call. Otherwise
<Voice Clear Setting>
Adjusting Voice According to Surrounding Noise The volume of the other partys voice is turned up according to the surrounding noise during a call. During the other partys voice is hearing from the earpiece, this setting is effective. 1 mSettingsTalkVoice clear settingON or OFF
<Noise Reduction>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear The noise sending to the other party is reduced according to the surrounding noise during a call.
+m-7-6 1 mSettingsTalkNoise reductionON or OFF
<Hands-free>
Switching to Hands-free When you switch to Hands-free, sound such as the other partys voice is audible over the speaker. 1 During a call, dialing, or connectingd When Hands-free is activated, pPress d again to deactivate Hands-free. pThe sound volume during a Hands-free call follows the setting specified by is displayed. Volume (earpiece volume). pYou can switch to Hands-free even during Manner Mode. Also, you will still hear voice through the speaker even when you activate Manner Mode during a Hands-free call. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s you could affect or damage your hearing. pTalk into the FOMA phone within a distance of about 50 cm.
<In-Car Hands-free>
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices You can make or receive voice calls from a Hands-free compatible device such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option) or a car navigation system by connecting with your FOMA phone. You can connect your FOMA phone to a Hands-free compatible device using two ways of connections as follows:
pConnect using a cable (USB connection):
To use/charge via the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option), you need to have the FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (option). pConnect using Bluetooth (wireless):
To connect to a Bluetooth communication compatible Hands-free device, you need to register and connect it to the FOMA phone. For how to operate Hands-free compatible devices, refer to the respective instruction manuals. Information pTo connect using a cable (USB connection), set USB mode setting to Communication mode. p appears while you are talking or communicating using a USB Hands-free compatible device. p might appear while the FOMA phone is connected to a USB Hands-free compatible device, and depending on the Hands-free device connected. while USB mode setting is set to microSD mode, pThe display or ring tone for incoming calls follows the settings of the FOMA phone. pWhen the sound is set to output from a Hands-free compatible device, the ring tone sounds from that device even when Manner Mode is activated or Ring volume of the FOMA phone is set to Silent. pThe receiving operation in Public Mode (Drive Mode) works in accordance with the Public (Drive) mode setting. 63 Information pThe receiving operation while Record Message is activated works in accordance with the Record message setting setting. pWhen the sound is set to output from the FOMA phone, the FOMA phone works in accordance with Setting when closed if it is closed during a call. When the sound is set to output from a Hands-free device, the communication state does not change regardless of Setting when closed even if you close the FOMA phone. Receiving a Call/Videophone Call 1 When you receive a call, the ring tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator flickers. pTo vibrate the FOMA phone for incoming calls, set Phone or Videophone of Vibrator to other than OFF. pWhen receiving a videophone call, Incoming V.phone is displayed. p is displayed at the upper left of the phone number for incoming international calls. s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i 2 Press d or Oo(
For Answering a Voice Call
) to answer Chaku-moji message
(See page 57) the call. 64
) to answer For Answering a Videophone Call Press d or Oo(
the videophone call. You can send the image through your camera to the other party. Press m(
and the substitute image is sent to the other party.
(Substitute image answering) pPress m during a call to switch between the image through your camera and substitute image for sending to the other party.
) to take a videophone call, 3 Press h to end the call after talking. Information pIf you close the FOMA phone during a call, the FOMA phone works in accordance with the setting of Setting when closed. (See page 67) pYou might hear beeps (in-call ring tone) during a call. If you have signed up for any of Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, or Call Forwarding Service and set Arrival call act to Answer, the beeps (in-call ring tone) will sound for another incoming call, enabling you to do the following operations:
Voice Mail Service
. Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Service Center. (See page 447) Call Waiting Service
. Put your current call on hold and answer the incoming call. (See page 448) Call Forwarding Service
. Transfer the call to the registered forwarding destination. (See page 451) pYou can set Reject unknown not to accept calls from the phone numbers not stored in the Phonebook. pYou cannot answer a call in Horizontal Open Style. However, when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can answer a call in Horizontal Open Style. Information
<For Voice Calls>
pWhen Answer setting is set to Any key answer, the call is placed on hold if you answer the call by pressing .< with the FOMA phone closed. If you have set Setting when closed to No tone or End the call, the other party hears nothing, and if you have set Setting when closed to Tone on, the call hold tone is played back. You can start talking by opening the FOMA phone.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated during a videophone call as Hands-free w/ V. phone has been set to ON. (See page 77) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of Hands-free w/ V. phone. pEven if Call Forwarding Service is set to Activate, the call is not forwarded unless the forwarding destination is a phone compatible with the videophone conforming to 3G-324M (see page 50). Check the phone you are forwarding the call to and then activate the service. The videophone caller does not hear the guidance to the effect that the call is forwarded. (The message to the effect that the call is to be forwarded appears, depending on the receivers FOMA phone.) pIf a videophone call comes in from the phone number to be rejected by Nuisance Call Blocking Service, the video guidance for Call Rejection is played back and the call is disconnected. pYou can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead of the image through your camera. (See page 74) Display for incoming calls When a callers phone number is provided If you store the callers name, phone number, and image in the Phonebook, the name, phone number, and icon (or image) are displayed. pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name that comes first in the search order (see page 98) is displayed. pThe phone number but not the name is displayed during Personal Data Lock. pFor a forwarded call, the forwarders phone number is displayed below the caller. (It might not be displayed in the case of some forwarders.) pWhen you receive a call to an additional number of Multi Number, the stored name for the additional number is displayed below the caller. (With a forwarded call, you can press c(
When a callers phone number is not provided The reason for no caller ID is displayed. (See page 144)
) to switch to display of the forwarder.) Function Menu while a Call is Ringing Function menu Operation/Explanation Call rejection You can disconnect the call without answering. Call forwarding See page 451. Voice mail See page 447. Switched between a Voice Call and Videophone Call by the Other Party When you have set Notify switchable mode to Indication ON, the caller (the other party) can switch between a voice call and videophone call. pYou (receiving end) cannot switch between a voice call and videophone call. Switched from a Voice Call to Videophone Call by the Other Party 1 The display for switching to a videophone call appears during a voice call. YES . Sends the image through your camera to the caller. NO . Sends a pre-installed substitute image to the caller. pWhile switching, the message to that effect is displayed and the voice guidance is played back. Switched from a Videophone Call to Voice Call by the Other Party When the caller (the other party) switches a videophone call to a voice call, the message telling that the call is being switched appears, the voice guidance is played back, and then the call is switched to a voice call. 65 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s OFF You can start talking by pressing a key shown below:
Voice call d, Oo Videophone d, Oo, m call PushTalk call d, Oo, p 1 You can activate the any key answer or quick silent also by pressing l when five record messages have already been recorded. 2 While is displayed, you cannot start talking or stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance. Information pWhile the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can press the switch to start talking, regardless of Answer setting. (See page 424)
<Setting when Opened>
Setting Response for when Opening FOMA Phone during Ringing 1 mSettingsIncoming callSetting when opened
Select an incoming typeKeep ringing or Answer Information pIf you receive a videophone call with Answer set, the still image set for Substitute image of Select image is sent to the other party. pYou cannot answer calls by opening the FOMA phone in Horizontal Open Style even when Answer is set. s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i
<Answer Setting>
Setting Response of Key Operation for Answering Incoming Calls You can set to start talking (Any key answer) or to stop the ring tone
(Quick silent) by pressing a key besides d, Oo, m (for videophone call), or p (for PushTalk call) for when a call or PushTalk call comes in.
+m-5-8 1 mSettingsIncoming callAnswer setting
Select a key operation. Any key answer You can start talking by pressing any key shown below:
Voice call1 PushTalk call d, Oo, 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c2, No, <
d, Oo, p, 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo,
pWhen receiving a videophone call, you can start talking by pressing d, Oo or m. Quick silent The following are the keys you can press to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance:
When Setting when opened is set to Keep ringing, you can open the FOMA phone in Normal Style to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance. Even if you stop it, the other party hears a calling tone. Voice call1 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c2, No, <
Videophone call PushTalk call 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo, <
pAfter you stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance, you can start talking by pressing d, Oo, m (for videophone call), or p (for PushTalk call). 0 through 9, a, s, r, c2, No, <
66
+m-1-8
<Setting when Closed>
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA Phone during a Call Set Response for when Closing FOMA Phone during a Voice Call/Videophone Call 1 mSettingsTalkSetting when closed
Phone/VideophoneSelect an item. No tone . The voice is muted. The hold tone does not sound. The setting is completed. Tone on. The other party hears the hold tone set for Holding tone of Set End the call. The call is finished. This is the same operation as pressing h hold tone while the FOMA phone is closed. during a call. The setting is completed. 2 Speaker ON or Speaker OFF Speaker ON . The hold tone sounds from the speaker. Speaker OFF . The hold tone does not sound from the speaker. Set Response for when Closing FOMA Phone during PushTalk 1 mSettingsTalkSetting when closedPushTalk
Speaker call or End the call Information pThis function is disabled when you set Headset mic. setting to Headset microphone and the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected. The communication state does not change even if you close the FOMA phone during a voice call or PushTalk communication. If you close the FOMA phone during a videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party with the line connected. pIf you close the FOMA phone during a videophone call with No tone activated, a substitute image is sent to the other party. When Tone on is set, the still image set for Holding of Select image is sent. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Information pIf you set to No tone or Tone on, Holding is displayed on the Private window when the FOMA phone is closed. pEven when End the call has been set, the call does not end if you close your FOMA phone from Horizontal Open Style. No tone works for a voice call/videophone call, and Speaker call works for a PushTalk call.
<Volume>
Adjusting Earpiece Volume 1 mSettingsTalkVolumeUse Bo or </> to adjust the earpiece volume. Adjust the earpiece volume to Level 1 (minimum) through Level 6 (maximum). pDuring a call, PushTalk call, or calling, you can press Bo or </> to adjust the volume, and while entering phone number, you can press and hold Bo(for at least one second) to adjust it. Press Bo or </> within two seconds to adjust it. Information pThe earpiece volume adjusted during a call is retained even after the call ends. pWhen you adjust the earpiece volume, the sound volume during a Hands-free call or speaker call for PushTalk is also adjusted. 67 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i
+m-5-0
<Ring Volume>
Adjusting Ring Volume You can adjust the ring volume for incoming calls and mail. 1 mSettingsSoundRing volume
Select an incoming type
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pFollowing icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while the ring volume is set to Silent:
: The ring volume for voice calls, PushTalk calls or videophone calls is Silent.
: The ring volume for mail, chat mail or Messages R/F is Silent.
: The ring volume for voice calls, PushTalk calls, or videophone calls is Silent and the ring volume for mail, chat mail, or Messages R/F is Silent. pIf you have set Step, the ring tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the volume steps up every three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6. pDuring ringing of a voice call or videophone call, you can adjust the ring volume also by pressing Bo or by pressing and holding </> for at least one second. However, you cannot adjust the ring volume in the following cases:
When Ring Volume is set to Step When Answer setting is set to Quick silent and you stop the ring tone or voice guidance During Manner Mode When a call is cut off within the ring start time specified by Ring time
<On Hold>
Putting an Incoming Call on Hold when You cannot Answer at Once 1 During ringingh The FOMA phone makes three rapid beeps for confirmation and the call is put on answer-hold (On Hold). pThe confirmation tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when Ring volume is Silent. pThe other party hears the hold tone set for On hold tone of Set hold tone. For videophone calls, the still image set for On hold of Select image is displayed. 2 Press d or Oo(
) to release hold and answer the call. pIf Answer setting is set to Any key answer, you can release hold of voice calls by pressing any key of 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c, Mo,
<, >, l, or i. pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other party by pressing d or Oo(
) to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
) to release hold. If you press m(
Information pThe caller is charged for the call even during answer-hold (On Hold). pIf you press -h during answer-hold (On Hold), the call will be disconnected.
<Holding>
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call 1 During a callOo (
) pThe other party hears the hold tone set for Holding tone of Set hold tone. For videophone calls, the still image set for Holding of Select image is displayed. pYou can put the call on hold by closing the FOMA phone during the call if you have set Setting when closed to Tone on. 68 2 Press d or Oo(
) to release hold and answer the call. pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other party by pressing d or Oo(
) to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
) to release hold. If you press m(
pIf you have set Setting when closed to Tone on and put the call on hold by closing the FOMA phone, open the FOMA phone or connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) to answer the call. If you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch to answer the videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party. Information pThe caller is charged for the call even while the call is on hold. pIf a new call comes in while the current call is put on hold, the hold (Holding) is released.
<Set Hold Tone>
Setting Hold Tone You can set the guidance the other party hears during on hold. 1 mSettingsTalkSet hold tone
On hold tone or Holding toneSelect a hold tone. Tone 1/2 . The caller hears the pre-installed guidance in Japanese. JESU JOY OF MANS
. The caller hears the melody. You can set this for Holding tone only. Voice announce
. The caller hears the sound recorded by Voice announce. If it has pPress l(
playback.
) to play back a hold tone. Press r to end the demo not been recorded, this is not displayed. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
<Public Mode (Drive Mode)>
Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) Public Mode is an auto-answer service that puts importance on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public Mode, the guidance is played back telling that you cannot answer the call as you are currently driving or in a place (a train, bus, movie theater, etc.) where you should refrain from answering the call. Then the call is disconnected. 1 Press and hold a for at least one second. is displayed. Public Mode is activated and When a call comes in, the guidance The person you are calling is currently driving or in an area where cell phone should not be used. Please try again later. is played back for incoming calls. pTo deactivate Public Mode, perform the same operation. Then, Public Mode is deactivated and disappears. Information pYou can activate/deactivate Public Mode only from the Stand-by display. You can activate/deactivate Public Mode even when is displayed. pYou can make calls as usual even during Public Mode. pIf you make an emergency call at 110/119/118, Public Mode is released. pWhen Public Mode and Manner Mode are activated simultaneously, Public Mode has priority. pIf a User unset call comes in while Caller ID request is set to Activate, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back. (The Public Mode guidance is not played back.) pYou cannot use this function during data communication. 69 When Public Mode (Drive Mode) is activated Even when a call comes in, the ring tone does not sound. The Missed call icon appears on the display and the call is stored in Received calls. The guidance is played back to the caller to the effect that you are currently driving or in an area where mobile phones should not be used. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk call comes in, no answer is made and the message Connection failed appears on the callers display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect that you are driving is conveyed to them. However, when the power is off or out-of-service area guidance instead of the Public Mode guidance. is displayed, the caller hears the The ring tone does not sound and the Call/Charging indicator does not flicker even when mail or a message comes in. In addition, the set vibrator does not work. The ring tone for 64K data communication, alarm tone, and charging confirmation tone do not sound, and a melody while an i-ppli program is running is not played back. The tickers of i-Channel are not displayed. See page 70 for how Public Mode (Drive Mode) and each network service work for incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated. s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i
<Public Mode (Power Off)>
Using Public Mode (Power Off) Public Mode (Power Off) is an auto-answer service that puts importance on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public Mode (Power Off), the guidance is played back telling that you cannot answer the call as you are currently in a place (hospital, airplane, around priority seat in a train, etc.) where use is prohibited. Then the call is disconnected. 1 Enter :25251d Public Mode (Power Off) is set. (Nothing is changed on the Stand-by display.) After setting Public Mode (Power Off) and turning off the power, the guidance The person you are calling is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please try again later. is played back for incoming calls. pTo release Public Mode (Power Off), dial :25250. pTo check the setting for Public Mode (Power Off), dial :25259. When Public Mode (Power Off) is activated The setting stays activated until you dial :25250 to deactivate Public Mode (Power Off). You cannot deactivate the setting just by turning on the power. The guidance is played back to the caller telling that you are currently in a place where you should turn off the power. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk call comes in, no answer is made and the message Connection failed appears on the callers display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect that you do not participate is conveyed to them. The Public Mode (Power Off) guidance is played back even when you are out of the service area or out of reach of radio waves. See page 70 for how Public Mode (Power Off) and each network service work for incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated. The receiving operation during Public Mode (Drive Mode/Power Off) Service Responses to Incoming Voice Calls Voice Mail Service Plays back the Public Mode guidance, and then the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Plays back the Public Mode guidance, and then the call is forwarded to the forwarding destination. Whether the guidance is played back or not depends on the guidance setting of Call Forwarding Service. If Plays guidance is set, plays back the Public Mode guidance. If Does not play guidance is set, does not play back the guidance. For the call from the phone number registered to be rejected, plays back the Call Rejection guidance, and then the call is disconnected. Responses to Incoming Videophone Calls Does not play back the video guidance for Public Mode, and the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. Does not play back the video guidance for Public Mode, and the call is forwarded to the forwarding destination. If the destination does not support videophone calls, the call is disconnected. For the call from the phone number registered to be rejected, plays back the video guidance for Call Rejection, and then the call is disconnected. 70 Service Responses to Incoming Voice Calls Caller ID Display Request Service For the caller without a caller ID, plays back the Caller ID Request guidance, and then the call is disconnected. For the caller with a caller ID, plays back the Public Mode guidance, and then the call is disconnected. Responses to Incoming Videophone Calls For the caller without a caller ID, plays back the video guidance for Caller ID Request, and then the call is disconnected. For the caller with a caller ID, plays back the video guidance for Public Mode, and then the call is disconnected. When the ring time is set to 0 seconds, the FOMA phone is out of the service area, or the power is off, the Public Mode guidance is not played back, but Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service works. Note that in this case the call is not notified by the Missed call icon and not stored in Received calls.
<Missed Calls>
If You could not Answer an Incoming Call When you could not answer calls (Missed calls), the Notification icon appears on the Stand-by display. You can check Received Calls by selecting the icon. 1 OoOo(
) pPress h or r to return to the former displazy. pWhen multiple icons are found, use Mo to highlight an icon and press Oo(
pYou cannot select the icon even when you press Oo when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. Notification icon
). pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
+m-5-5
<Record Message Setting>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer the Call By activating Record Message, you can play back an answer message to incoming calls and record callers voice/video messages when you cannot answer them even if you have not signed up for Voice Mail Service. You can record up to five messages for voice calls and up to two messages for videophone calls. Each message can be recorded for up to 20 seconds. Activate Record Message 1 mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Record message settingON or OFF
Select an answer message. pPress l(
demo playback.
) to play back the answer message. Press r to end the pWhen Japanese 1, Japanese 2, or English is set, a beep sounds after i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s playing back the answer message to the other party. If Voice announce is set, the beep does not sound. 2 Enter a ring time (seconds). pEnter from 000 through 120 in three digits. pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each. pWhile Record Message is activated, messages for voice calls) and for videophone calls) are displayed.
(the number of recorded
(the number of recorded messages 71 Information pWhen Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service is set at the same time as Record Message, the priority depends on the ring time set for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. To give Record Message priority, set the ring time for Record Message Setting shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. Even when you do this, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service works if there are already five record messages for voice calls and two record messages for videophone calls. pYou cannot receive a call from a third party while a voice/video message is being recorded. The third party will hear the busy tone.
<Quick Record Message>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer the Call during Ringing Even if a call comes in while Record Message is not activated, you can record the callers voice/video message just for that incoming call. 1 During ringingl(
) or >
Manner Mode is also activated. The caller will hear the answer message and then can leave you a voice/video message. pRecord Message does not work when five messages for voice calls and two messages for videophone calls have already been recorded or when a PushTalk call comes in. Only Manner Mode is set when you operate by pressing >. pWhen Side keys guard is set to ON, you cannot activate Record Message or Manner Mode by pressing > with the FOMA phone closed. s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Incoming calls when Record Message Setting is set to ON The ring time elapses Incoming Call Playing back the answer message Recording a voice/
video message For videophone calls, the still image set for Preparing of Select image is displayed on the other partys display while playing back the answer message, and the still image set for Record message of Select image is displayed while recording. pTo answer a call while the answer message is played back or a voice/video message is recorded, press d or Oo(
For videophone calls, press d or Oo(
the image through your camera, or press m(
send a substitute image. You can answer a call also by pressing the switch on the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option). For videophone calls, the image through your camera is sent to the other party. Displaying an icon on the desktop (See page 125)
) to send
) to
). Information pRecord Message does not work when pWhen Public Mode (Drive Mode) and Record Message are simultaneously activated, is displayed. the former has priority and the latter does not work. pThe priority order of answer messages is as follows: Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Record message setting. pIf Voice announce selected as an answer message is deleted, the answer message will be set to Japanese 1. 72
+m-5-5
<Play/Erase Messages>
<Play/Erase Videophone Messages>
Playing Back/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice Memo/Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos Play Back/Erase Record Messages/a Voice Memo 1 mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase msg.
Select a record message or voice memo. A beep sounds and playback starts. pOn the Record Message list, recorded items are indicated by . pIt is played back at the volume set for Volume (earpiece volume). pWhen playback ends, a double-beep sounds and the message Playing is Record Message list cleared from the display. pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during playback. When a callers phone number is provided, it is displayed. If the caller is stored in the Phonebook, his/her name is also displayed. However, the name is not displayed and the phone number only is displayed in the following cases:
When you play back a record message from the caller stored as secret data in Normal Mode When you play back a record message for Number A in B Mode (or vice versa) while using 2in1 pIf the callers phone number is displayed during playback, you can make a voice call to that phone number by pressing d. Press l(
videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk call.
) to make a To play back using .>
From the Stand-by display on the vertical display, press > to play back the latest record message. When record messages are not recorded, a voice memo is played back. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s To skip to next message Each time you press > during playback, messages are played back in the following order: the next new record message the oldest record message a voice memo. To cancel playback midway Press Oo(
) or r. Play Back/Erase Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos 1 mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase VP msg.
Select a videophone record message or movie memo. pOn the Videophone Record Message list, recorded items are indicated by . pIt is played back at the same volume of the playback sound of i-motion movies. Videophone Record Message list pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during playback. To play back using .>
From the Stand-by display on the vertical display, press and hold > for at least one second to play back the latest videophone record message. When videophone record messages are not recorded, the latest movie memo is played back. To cancel playback midway Press Oo(
) or r. Function Menu of the Record Message List/Videophone Record Message List Function menu Operation/Explanation Play Erase this You can play back a message.
YES pYou can erase a message/memo also by pressing i(
during playback.
) 73 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Function menu Erase rec. msg. Operation/Explanation You can erase all record messages from the Record Message list, and can erase all videophone record messages from the Videophone Record Message list.
YES Erase movie memo
[Videophone Record Message list only]
Erase all You can erase all movie memos.
YES You can erase all record messages and a voice memo from the Record Message list, and can erase all videophone record messages and movie memos from the Videophone Record Message list.
YES Substitute Image You can set a Chara-den image for Substitute image of Select image. 1 Chara-den display/Chara-den list/Chara-den Recording displayi(
pFrom the Chara-den list, you can set it also by pressing m(
)Substitute image
). Chara-den Setup You can perform settings for a Chara-den call. These settings are effective only for during a videophone call. 1 During a Chara-den calli(
Chara-den setupDo the following operations.
) Using Chara-den You can perform the setting for sending a Chara-den image to the other party. pSee page 349 for Chara-den images. Item Operation/Explanation Switch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image. pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to Whole Action Mode. Set by Call You can set a Chara-den image to be sent to the other party for making a videophone call. 1 Chara-den display/Chara-den listl(
Enter the destination phone number and press l(
call. pWhen the other partys phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo. pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co or from Redial by pressing Vo.
) to make a videophone
) Information pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
Setting by call Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Select image. 74 Action list Change action At videophone start-up Whole Action Mode You can display the list for actions that you can operate. pHighlight an action and press Oo(
Press l(
) to check the details of the action. pYou can display the Action list also by pressing a. You can switch the action mode between Whole Action Mode
pYou can switch modes also by pressing l.
) and Parts Action Mode (
) to execute the action. SW substitute img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to the still image set for Pre-installed of Select image. SW org. subst. img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to the still image set for Original of Select image. Useful Functions for Videophone Calls Switching Cameras At videophone start-up Inside camera You can switch images to be sent to the other party from through the inside camera to through the outside camera. 1 During a videophone calll(
pPress l(
pThe setting here is effective only for the current videophone call.
) again to switch to the image through the inside camera.
) Send Substitute Images You can switch images to be sent to the other party from the image through your camera to the still image or Chara-den image set as the substitute image. See page 349 for Chara-den. 1 During a videophone callm(
) is displayed while the still substitute image is being sent, and The substitute image is sent to the other party. displayed if you have set a Chara-den image as a substitute image (during a Chara-den call). pPress m(
your camera.
) again to switch from the substitute image to the image through is Information pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
Setting by call Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Select image. Note that Setting for Phonebook entry and Group setting are disabled when a videophone call comes in without notifying the caller ID. pEven when you make a videophone call sending a substitute image, you are charged for the digital communication. Switch Image Display Positions You can switch the display locations of the receiving image and the sending image. 1 During a videophone call, pressc(
pEach time you press c(
switch.
), the displays c
). c
+c i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
+c 75 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Zoom At videophone start-up Wide You can adjust the magnification for the camera image to be sent to the other party. During a videophone call, the maximum magnification is about 3.3 times for the inside camera and about 5.5 times for the outside camera. 1 During a videophone call
Use No to adjust the magnification. pThe former zoom setting returns when the videophone call ends. Function Menu during Videophone Call Function menu Operation/Explanation CHG to voice call See page 53. Talk on BT/Phone You can set whether to communicate through the FOMA phone or a Bluetooth device. (See page 430) Send DTMF tone/
DTMF tone OFF During a Chara-den call, you can switch to the DTMF Transmission Mode that enables you to enter the data from the numeric keys and to send DTMF (touch-tone signals). You can operate it only during a Chara-den call. pSend DTMF tone is displayed when the mode is not DTMF Transmission Mode and DTMF tone OFF is displayed in DTMF Transmission Mode. pIn DTMF Transmission Mode, you cannot operate the action of Function menu V.phone settings
(White balance) At videophone start-up Automatic V.phone settings
(Color mode set) At videophone start-up Normal V.phone settings
(Night mode) At videophone start-up OFF V.phone settings
(Focus) At videophone start-up Landscape Operation/Explanation You can adjust the colors of the camera image to be sent to the other party, to make the colors look more natural.
White balanceSelect an item. Fine weather . For talking outdoors in fine weather Cloudy weather. For talking in cloudy weather or in the shade Automatic. For adjusting white balance automatically Light bulb. For talking under incandescent light You can switch the color tone of the camera image to be sent to the other party.
Color mode setSelect a color tone. You can lengthen the cameras exposure time to make the camera image to be sent clear in a dark place.
Night modeON or OFF You can set the focus for the outside camera during a videophone call.
FocusClose-up or Landscape pThe focus for the inside camera is fixed to Portrait (suitable mode to shoot portraits), so you cannot change the setting. Chara-den setup See page 74. Chara-den images. Backlight pThe DTMF tone may not be received depending on the device You can select whether to light the display constantly or light for about 15 seconds after an operation.
Constant light or 15 seconds light of a receiving end. See page 77. LCD AI See page 119. Own number You can display your phone number. You can adjust the brightness of the camera image to be sent to other party to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
BrightnessSelect a brightness level. Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during a videophone call. V.phone settings
(Visual preference) V.phone settings
(Brightness) At videophone start-up 0 76
<Hands-free with Videophone>
Setting Videophone Hands-free You can set whether to switch to Hands-free automatically for when a videophone call starts. 1 mSettingsVideophoneHands-free w/ V. phone
ON or OFF pSee page 63 for the operation while Hands-free is activated and how to switch to Hands-free.
<Visual Preference>
Setting Image Quality for Videophone Calls You can set the quality of both the receiving image and sending image on the display. 1 mSettingsVideophoneVisual preference
Select an image quality. pPrefer motion spd is effective for moving images. When there is little motion, the quality becomes better if you set to Prefer img qual. pIf you operate from the Function menu during a videophone call, the setting is effective only for the current videophone call. Information pIf the radio wave conditions weaken during a videophone call, the image may appear like a mosaic.
<Select Image>
Changing Image Displays for Videophone Calls You can set an image to be sent to the other party. 1 mSettingsVideophoneSelect image
Select an item. On hold . Sets an image for during answer-hold (On hold). Holding . Sets an image for while a call is on hold (Holding). Substitute image
. Sets a substitute image (still image or Chara-den) for when the camera is off. Record message
. Sets an image while recording a record message. Preparing . Sets an image for while playing back an answer message. Movie memo
. Sets an image for while recording a movie memo. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 2 Select an image. Pre-installed . For sending a pre-installed still image to the other party. Original . For sending an appropriate message with a still image stored using Set display. Chara-den . For sending a Chara-den image selected by Substitute image.
(See page 74)
(Displayed only when Substitute image has been selected in step 1.)
) to play back a demo to check the still image or Chara-den pPress l(
image. pTo change the setting of Original or Chara-den, press i(
Change setting, then select a still image or Chara-den image. If you have selected Original, select a still image after selecting a folder. See Set display for settable still images.
), select Information pEven if you delete the still image selected from Original, that still image is displayed to the other party. To change, set by Change setting or Set display. 77 s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Set by Call You can set an image to be sent to the other party for making a videophone call. 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record.
)Select imageMe or Chara-den pThe setting is completed when you select Me. pTo cancel the setting by call, select Release. The setting is completed. 2 i(
3 Select a Chara-den image.
<Voice Call Auto Redial>
Redialing as a Voice Call when a Videophone Call cannot be Connected If a videophone call cannot be connected, it will be automatically redialed as a voice call. 1 mSettingsVideophoneVoice call auto redial
ON or OFF Information pThe charges for calls once switched to voice calls are billed at the rates for the voice calls. pVoice Call Auto Redial does not work when a videophone call cannot be connected such as when the line is busy or the other partys phone is in Public Mode (Drive Mode). However, Voice Call Auto Redial works when you make a videophone call to a phone that does not support the videophone function. 78
<Notify Switchable Mode>
Setting for Switching between a Voice Call and a Videophone Call You can let the other party know that your FOMA phone can switch between a voice call and videophone call. This function is set to Indication ON at the time of contract. When Notify switchable mode is set to Indication ON, the caller can switch between the videophone call and voice call. pYou cannot operate Notify switchable mode when you are out of the service area or radio waves do not reach, or during a call. 1 mSettingsVideophoneNotify switchable mode
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Indication ON
YESOK Indication OFF
YESOK Check indication You can check the setting of the function.
<Videophone while Packet>
Selecting Response to Incoming Videophone Calls during i-mode 1 mSettingsIncoming callV-phone while packet
Select an item. V-phone priority
. Shows the Videophone Call Receiving display. When you answer the videophone call, packet communication is disconnected. Packet downld priority
. Rejects the videophone call and continues the communication. V-phone answerphone
. Connects the incoming videophone call to the Voice Mail Service Center. Call forwarding
. Forwards the incoming videophone call to the forwarding destination. Information pIf you have not signed up for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, Packet downld priority works even if you set to V-phone answerphone or Call forwarding. Connecting FOMA Phone to External Devices to Use Videophone Function You can operate your FOMA phone from an external device such as your personal computer for making or receiving videophone calls by connecting them using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option). To use this function, you need to install a videophone application program on a dedicated external device or personal computer, and further, you need to prepare equipment (commercial item) such as an earphone/microphone or USB compatible web camera. pFor operating environments for a videophone application program and how to set or operate it, refer to the instruction manual or other literature for an external device. pYou can use (DoCoMo Videophone Software) for the application program that supports this function. Download it from the DoCoMo Videophone Software web site.
(For details such as operating environment for the personal computers, refer to the support web page.) http://videophonesoft.nttdocomo.co.jp/ (Japanese only) FOMA videophone communication speed 64 kbps Base station FOMA network Information pYou cannot make a videophone call from the external device during a voice call. Information pWhen you have signed up for Call Waiting Service, an incoming videophone call from an external device during a voice call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls. The same applies for an incoming voice call, videophone call, and 64K data communication during a videophone call from an external device.
<Remote Monitoring>
Checking inside the Room when You are Out You can use the inside camera of the FOMA phone as a monitoring camera to observe the remote location from a phone that has the videophone function based on 3G-324M. While Remote monitoring is set to ON, the FOMA phone automatically starts Remote Monitoring when it receives a videophone call from a phone number stored as Other ID of Remote monitoring.
(The FOMA phone needs to be set to Normal Style.)
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pTo release Remote Monitoring, select Set, then select OFF. 1 mSettingsVideophoneRemote monitoring 2 Other ID<Not recorded>
Enter a phone number. pTo change, select the stored phone number. pYou can store up to five phone numbers that can enter up to 26 digits by using numerals, #, :, or +. pTo return to the setting display for Remote Monitoring, press r from the Other ID list after storing phone number. Other ID list 3 Ring timeEnter a ring time (seconds). pYou can enter the time from 003 through 120 in three digits until Remote Monitoring starts after receiving a videophone call. pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each. 79 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 4 SetON pWhen receiving videophone calls from the phone numbers stored as Other ID, the FOMA phone automatically answers to start Remote Monitoring after the ring time elapses. is displayed while this function is set to ON. p pYou cannot set to ON in Manner Mode. Function Menu of the Other ID List For answering a videophone call without starting Remote Monitoring at the receiving end Press d or Oo(
automatically. If you press m(
image to the other party. pWhen a remote monitoring call comes in, Setting when opened is disabled. pIf you press h when a remote monitoring call comes in, the call will be cut and Remote Monitoring will not start.
) before the FOMA phone answers a videophone call
), the videophone call starts sending the substitute Operation/Explanation Information s l l a C e n o h p o e d V e c o V i
i Function menu Look-up address Delete this Delete all Information You can call up a phone number in the Phonebook, Dialed Calls, or Received Calls to enter it.
Select an item. Phonebook
. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number. Dialed calls
. Highlight a phone number and press Oo(
Received calls
. Highlight a phone number and press Oo(
YES
YES
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pIf you delete all phone numbers stored as Other ID, Remote monitoring is set to OFF. Perform Remote Monitoring 1 Make a videophone call from a stored phone number. After the ring time set for Remote monitoring elapses, Remote Monitoring automatically starts. pThe image through the receiving ends camera appears on the display and the sound comes out of the speaker. pYou cannot set Voice-only Remote Monitoring. pMake a videophone call notifying your caller ID. If the caller ID is not notified, Remote Monitoring will not start and the call will be handled as an ordinary incoming videophone call. 2 Remote Monitoring ends when the calling end or receiving end presses h. 80 pWhen your FOMA phone is used for the receiving end, an image through the callers camera appears, and sound comes out. (You cannot switch to a substitute image.) pRemote Monitoring does not start during Manner Mode and Public Mode (Drive Mode). However, it starts even during Lock All. pWhen Remote Monitoring is set to ON and a videophone call comes in from the phone number set as Other ID, Remote Monitoring starts after the set ring time, even when Ring time, Auto answer setting, or Record message setting is set and regardless of their ring times. pWhen Remote Monitoring is not performed, it is recorded in Received Calls as a missed videophone call. pIf the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected when a remote monitoring call comes in, the ring tone will sound from both the earphone and the speaker, even when Headset usage setting is set to Headset only. pThe ring tone for Remote Monitoring sounds. (You cannot change the ring tone for Remote Monitoring.) The ring tone sounds at the volume set for Videophone of Ring volume, but at Level 2 if you have set Step, Level 1 or below. The flickering color is Gradation, and its flickering pattern is Standard, regardless of the Illumination setting. pYou cannot put incoming remote monitoring calls on answer-hold (On Hold). pIf you set both Call Forwarding Service and Remote Monitoring, and give priority to Remote Monitoring, set its ring time shorter than that for Call Forwarding Service. pTo use Call Forwarding Service for Remote Monitoring, store the phone number of dialing side as Other ID and set a 3G-324M videophone as the forwarding destination. pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA phone to give a remarkable nuisance and misdeed to the public. Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. PushTalk What is PushTalk? . Making a PushTalk Call . Adding a Member during PushTalk Communication . Receiving a PushTalk Call . Storing in PushTalk Phonebook
. <Store in PushTalk Phonebook>
Making a Call Using PushTalk Phonebook . Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries
. <Delete from PushTalk Phonebook>
Making Full Use of PushTalk Phonebook . Setting PushTalk Calling/Receiving. 82 82 84 84 85 86 87 87 88 81 What is PushTalk?
You can communicate with multiple persons (up to five persons including yourself); press the PushTalk key to access the PushTalk Phonebook, select the persons you want to talk with, and press the PushTalk key. You are charged a PushTalk communication fee each time you press (talk) the PushTalk key. pFor details on PushTalk or compatible models, refer to DoCoMo web page or Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. PushTalkPlus This service enables you to have a PushTalk call with up to 20 persons including you. You can use the shared Phonebook on the network, and can check the members for their status, thus PushTalk becomes more useful. You need to subscribe separately. pFor details such as how to operate, refer to the booklet which is supplied at k l a T h s u P subscription. Making a PushTalk Call 1 Enter the other partys phone number
p When you are dialing, a confirmation tone for starting a PushTalk call sounds for a few seconds, and then the same ring tone as the voice (videophone) call sounds. pYou can make a group call to multiple persons using the PushTalk Phonebook. (See page 85 and page 86) 82 2 When the other party answers, talk while pressing p. When the other party answers, a confirmation tone for starting communication sounds. p blinks during dialing and lights during communication. pWhen you get the talkers right, the talkers right obtained tone sounds. The other party hears your voice only while you are pressing p and having the talkers right. When you release p, the talkers right is released, and a confirmation tone sounds. pYou cannot get the talkers right and an error tone sounds even if you press p when another member has it. pPress l(
member. Go to step 1 of Adding a Member during PushTalk Communication on page 84.
) and select Add member to add a
) or press i(
3 Press h to end the communication after talking. A tone to notify the disconnection of communication sounds at the other end. pWhen the call you made is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself continues even if you press h, and the icon indicating that you are not participating appears on each members display and a confirmation tone sounds. However, when all the members exit, the PushTalk communication itself ends. Information pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the talkers right obtained tone sounds. pYou cannot make emergency calls at 110/119/118 from PushTalk. pThe duration you can talk per talkers right is limited. The talkers right release notice tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talkers right is released. In addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talkers right in a certain period of time. pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by Hands-free w/
PushTalk. (See page 88) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of Hands-free w/ PushTalk. pThe FOMA phone works according to Setting when closed if you close it during communication. You can set also by pressing +i(
closed. (See page 67)
) and selecting Set. when Information pWhether to notify others of your phone number when you make PushTalk calls follows the setting for Activate of Caller ID notification (see page 47). However, when you set Notify caller ID from the Function menu for dialing, or when Notify/Not notify is displayed in the detailed Redial/Dialed Call/Received Call display, each of those settings will work. pWhen you make a PushTalk call with your phone number notified, your phone number as well as all members phone numbers are notified to all members including added members. When you make a PushTalk call without notifying your phone number, User unset appears in the callers and members fields on the displays of all the members including added members. Your phone number is very important information, so take the utmost care to notify others of it. pIf you make a PushTalk call during i-mode communication, the i-mode communication is disconnected. pYou cannot use PushTalk by Number B of 2in1. Making/Receiving a PushTalk group call You can use the PushTalk Phonebook or Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to communicate with multiple members. While making or receiving a PushTalk group call, the group name and the members in the group are displayed. Press No to confirm other members. When a call is received with the other partys phone number not provided, User unset is displayed. Re-participating or participating midway in PushTalk communication Use Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk call while the PushTalk communication continues among other members. pIf the PushTalk communication has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new PushTalk call. Display while dialing/communicating
The phone number of the member who has the talkers right is displayed, and the state of the talkers right is displayed in color of the round icon at the upper left. When the name of that member, phone number, and image are stored in the Phonebook, his/her name and image are displayed. However, when you cannot receive a members information correctly, ? is displayed. When the FOMA phone is closed, the phone number
(name) of the member who has the talkers right is displayed on the Private window.
P u s h T a l k During group communication Color of the round icon at the upper left Blue Green State of the talkers rights Calling You can get the talkers right. Blinking in green You have the talkers right. Blinking in yellow Another member has the talkers right. Blinking in green and red The talkers right will be released automatically in a few seconds because it has long been retained (A release notice tone sounds).
The state of members is shown by icons during dialing or communicating.
(Characters other than shown below might appear.) Icon State of members Calling Has participated in the PushTalk call. Does not answer, has ended the PushTalk call, out of the service area, or the power is off. Has activated Public Mode (Drive Mode). Displayed only for the PushTalk communication among three or more members.
The number of times you have got the talkers right is the total of the number of
. When 999 times are exceeded, the counting is reset and the number shown in to 0. 83 Adding a Member during PushTalk Communication You can make a PushTalk call to another member during PushTalk communication and add that member to the communication. You can add a person to the members by accessing the PushTalk Phonebook, Phonebook, or Dialed Calls/Received Calls, or by directly entering a phone number. You can add up to five members (including yourself), and can repeat adding up to that number. pMembers can be added from the calling end only. pYou can add even the members who use the PushTalk compatible models which do not have this function. pIf you have already made a call to four members, you cannot add a new member though you can call up a member who has exited the call again. k l a T h s u P pThe added members are not stored in Redial/Dialed Calls. 1 During PushTalk communicationl(
Do the following operations.
) Information pThe caller cannot add members if he/she uses a PushTalk compatible model which does not have this function. pFor a member who uses a PushTalk compatible model which does not have this function, the members added during PushTalk communication are not shown and a confirmation tone does not sound. Receiving a PushTalk Call 1 When a PushTalk call comes in, PushTalk call is displayed, the ring tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator flickers. pPushTalk group call is displayed for an incoming group call. pTo reject a call, press i(
) during ringing and select Call rejection. You can reject the call also by pressing h. Item Operation/Explanation View PushTalk PB You can call up a PushTalk Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk call. (See page 86) Instead of pressing p, press l(
pPress c to switch between the PushTalk Phonebook list and PushTalk Group list.
) to call.
). You can call up a Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk call.
Call up a Phonebook entryHighlight a phone number and press l(
You can enter a phone number to make a PushTalk call.
Enter a phone numberl(
You can call up Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk call.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberl(
) View phonebook Direct input View call records 84 2 Press p to answer a PushTalk call
Talk while pressing p. pYou can answer also by pressing d or Oo(
instead of pressing p. You can answer also by pressing p with the FOMA phone closed. pWhen you get talkers right, the talkers right obtained tone is played back. The other party hears your voice only while you are pressing p and having the talkers right. When you release p, the talkers right is released and a confirmation tone sounds. pYou cannot get the talkers right and an error tone sounds, even if you press p when another member has it.
) pSetting when opened and Record message setting become invalid. 3 Press h to end the communication after talking. A tone for confirming the end of communication sounds at the other end. pWhen the call you received is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself continues even if you press h, and the icon indicating that you are not participating appears on each members display and a confirmation tone sounds. However, when all the members exit, the PushTalk communication itself ends. Information pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the talkers right obtained tone sounds. pThe duration you can talk per talkers right is limited. The talkers right release notice tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talkers right is released. In addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talkers right in a certain period of time. pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by Hands-free w/
PushTalk. (See page 88) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of Hands-free w/ PushTalk. pThe FOMA phone works according to Setting when closed if you close it during communication. You can set also by pressing +i(
closed. (See page 67)
) and selecting Set. when pYou cannot use On hold or Holding function for PushTalk. pA PushTalk call that comes in during a voice call, a PushTalk call that comes in during Public Mode (Drive Mode), and a voice call (when PushTalk arrival act is set to other than Answer), a videophone call, data communication, or a PushTalk call that comes in during PushTalk communication are recorded as missed calls in Received Calls. pA PushTalk call that comes in during a videophone call or during data communication does not work and is not recorded in Received Calls. pAfter you finish PushTalk communication or when you cannot answer to a PushTalk call, you can use a received call record to make a PushTalk call and to re-participate or participate midway in the communication so long as the PushTalk communication continues among other members. If the PushTalk communication among other members has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new PushTalk call. pWhen a caller adds members during PushTalk communication, the added members are not stored in Received Calls. pSee page 89 for how to respond to the PushTalk call during i-mode communication. pWhen the caller is defined as the one to be rejected, the call is rejected. The setting of call rejection applies to the setting for both voice calls and videophone calls. P u s h T a l k Information pWhen a PushTalk call comes in during Lock All or Omakase Lock, appears after the lock is released.
<Store in PushTalk Phonebook>
Storing in PushTalk Phonebook From the items stored in a FOMA phones Phonebook entry, you need to store a name (reading) and a phone number in the PushTalk Phonebook. You can store up to 1,000 entries in the PushTalk Phonebook. 1 pm(
Do the following operations. pYou can store also by selecting <New>. pIf you store multiple phone numbers from a Phonebook entry, the phone number previously stored in the PushTalk Phonebook is overwritten. pYou cannot display the PushTalk Phonebook list even when you press p when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. Phonebook list PushTalk Item View phonebook Direct input Operation/Explanation You can access an entry already stored in the FOMA phones Phonebook and store it in the PushTalk Phonebook.
Call up a Phonebook entrySelect a phone number
YES You can store the entry in the PushTalk Phonebook after storing it in the FOMA phones Phonebook.
PhoneSelect a storing method. New . Go to step 2 on page 92. Add . Go to step 3 of Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook on page 96. pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook entry, press l(
) and select the phone number you want to store in the PushTalk Phonebook. The mark is added to the phone number that has already been stored in the PushTalk Phonebook. 85 Item View call records Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation You can access a dialed call record or received call record to store it in the PushTalk Phonebook. You cannot store in the PushTalk Phonebook from the dialed/received call record of the party who is not stored in the FOMA phones Phonebook.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberYES Search
Select a search method. Reading? . See page 98. Group? . See page 98.
Select a member. You can display the Group Member Selection display with the searched members selected. k l a T h s u P Information pIn the PushTalk Phonebook, you cannot store the Phonebook entries set to B by Phonebook 2in1 Setting. Store in Group You can store PushTalk Phonebook entries in groups. You can store up to 19 members per group and create up to 10 groups. 1 PushTalk Phonebook listc(
) to show the PushTalk Phonebook pPress c(
list. Making a Call Using PushTalk Phonebook You can make a group call to up to four members using the PushTalk Phonebook or PushTalk group. 1 PushTalk Phonebook list
Put a check mark for members you want to make a call to
p or l(
pPress c(
pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made
) to show the PushTalk Group list.
) PushTalk Group list to the highlighted member. Make a Call from PushTalk Group 1 PushTalk Group listSelect a group.
) to make a pSelect a group and press p or l(
call to all the members in the group. pPress c(
list.
) to show the PushTalk Phonebook 2 Select a groupm(
Put a check mark for members to be stored
l(
) pYou can store also by selecting <Edit group members> from the Group Member list. Group Member list Group Member Selection display Function Menu of the Group Member Selection Display Function menu Members to store Operation/Explanation You can display only members applied with a check mark. pPress Oo(
) to store the members to the group. 86 PushTalk Phonebook list PushTalk Group list 2 Put a check mark for members you want to make a call to
p or l(
) pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made to the highlighted member. Group Member list Information pWhen five or more members are stored in a group, you cannot make a call to all the members by selecting the group.
<Delete from PushTalk Phonebook>
Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries 1 PushTalk Phonebook listi(
DEL from P-Talk PBDo the following operations.
) Item Delete this Operation/Explanation
Select a deleting method. DEL from P-Talk PB
. Deletes an entry in the PushTalk Phonebook only. Does not delete the entry in the FOMA phones Phonebook. DEL from all PBs
. Deletes an entry in both the PushTalk Phonebook and FOMA phones Phonebook.
YES Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pThe FOMA phones Phonebook entries are not deleted. Delete from PushTalk Group 1 PushTalk Group listi(
YES Delete Group Members 1 Group Member listi(
Do the following operations.
)DEL group members Item Delete this Delete all Information Operation/Explanation
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pEven when you delete PushTalk groups or group members, the PushTalk Phonebook entries and FOMA phones Phonebook entries are not deleted. Making Full Use of PushTalk Phonebook Function Menu of the PushTalk Phonebook List/PushTalk Group List/Group Member List P u s h T a l k Function menu Members to call Operation/Explanation When the PushTalk Phonebook list or Group Member list is displayed, you can display the checked members only. pPress p or Oo(
pPress i(
select whether to notify your phone number. When Cancel prefix is selected, the FOMA phone works according to the setting by Caller ID notification.
) to make a PushTalk call.
) to select Notify caller ID and then you can Search PushTalk PB
[Phonebook list only]
Select a search method. Reading? . See page 98. Group? . See page 98.
)DEL from PT group
Select a member. You can display the PushTalk Phonebook list with the searched members selected. 87 Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation k l a T h s u P Function menu Store in P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
DEL from P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
Edit group members
[Group list/Member list]
See page 85. See page 87. You can edit the members in the group. Go to step 2 on page 86. Edit group name
[Group list only]
Enter a group name. pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. DEL from PT group
[Group list only]
See page 87. DEL group members
[Member list only]
See page 87. Sound setting See page 88. Vibration setting See page 89. Auto answer set. See page 88. Ring time setting See page 88. Hands-Free See page 88. Set. when closed See page 67. i-mode arrival act See page 89. P-Talk arrival act See page 88. 88 Network connection You can connect to the network to use PushTalkPlus. This is available only when you have singed up for PushTalkPlus.
(See page 82) Setting PushTalk Calling/Receiving 1 mSettingsPushTalkDo the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Auto answer setting Select an item. ON . Automatically answers immediately after receiving regardless of Ring time setting. OFF . Does not answer automatically. Ring time setting Enter a ring time (seconds). Hands-free w/
PushTalk pEnter two digits from 01 through 60. pDisconnected is displayed at the other end after the ring time has elapsed. You can set whether to hear the other partys voice from the speaker or from the earpiece for when PushTalk communication starts.
ON or OFF pSee page 63 for how the FOMA phone works while Hands-free is activated and how to switch to Hands-free during communication. PushTalk arrival act Select an item. Voice mail . Connects an incoming voice call to the Call forwarding . Forwards an incoming voice call to the Voice Mail Service Center. forwarding destination. Call rejection . Rejects an incoming voice call and does not answer. Answer . Shows the Voice Call Receiving display. You can set a ringing pattern for the sounds during PushTalk communication.
Select a pattern. Sound setting Item Vibration setting Information Operation/Explanation You can set whether to notify you by the vibration when you try to get the talkers right, or when a members state changes to Connected.
ON or OFF
<Auto answer setting>
pWhen you set to ON, calls are automatically answered even when the FOMA phone is closed regardless of Setting when closed. pWhen you set to ON, calls are automatically answered after switching to Hands-free regardless of Hands-free w/ PushTalk. However, the FOMA phone works according to the setting of Hands-free w/ PushTalk if you open the FOMA phone after you answer a call with the FOMA phone closed. pWhen you set to ON, the ring tone, vibrator, Call/Charging indicator, and backlight do not work. Calls are not automatically answered during Manner Mode.
<PushTalk arrival act>
pIf you press -h for an incoming voice call while Answer is set, the Call Receiving display appears after you finish the PushTalk communication, and then you can answer the voice call. To continue the PushTalk communication, press +i(
and select Call rejection, Call forwarding, or Voice mail.
<Sound setting>
pIn Simple mode, some part of the confirmation sounds (talking right obtained tone, etc.) become silence during PushTalk communication. i-mode Arrival Act You can set whether to show the PushTalk Call Receiving display for when a PushTalk call comes in during i-mode communication. 1 ii-mode settingsi-mode arrival actSelect an item. PushTalk preferred . Ends i-mode communication and brings up the PushTalk Call Receiving display. i-mode preferred . Rejects receiving a PushTalk call and continues i-mode communication. The call is not recorded in Received Calls. P u s h T a l k 89 90 Phonebook 92 Phonebooks Available for FOMA Phone . 92 Storing Phonebook Entries. <Add to Phonebook>
96 Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook 97 Setting Groups . <Group Setting>
Dialing from Phonebooks . <Search Phonebook>
98 Editing Phonebook Entries . <Edit Phonebook> 100 Deleting Phonebook Entries . <Delete Data> 100 Checking Number of Phonebook Entries
. <No. of Phonebook> 100 Making Full Use of Phonebooks. 101 Making a Call with a Few Touches . <Two-touch Dial> 103 Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice . <Voice Dial> 103 Saving (Restoring/Updating) Phonebook to Data Storage Center
. <Data Security Service> 105 91 Phonebooks Available for FOMA Phone You can use two types of Phonebook, namely the Phonebook in the FOMA phone itself, and the Phonebook on the UIM. Number of entries Name (Reading) Group Phone number Phone number icon Mail address Mail address icon Address Location information Birthday Memo Image Memory No. Ring tone Vibrator Illumination Picture Chara-den Mail ring tone Mail vibrator Mail illumination Answer message Restrict dialing Call rejection Call acceptance Call forwarding Voice mail k o o b e n o h P m e i t i c s a k B o o b e n o h P f o s t n e n o C t m e t i g n i t t e S s n o i t c i r t s e R k o o b e n o h P f o s t n e n o C t Secret code Storage in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only FOMA phone 1,000 entries 19 groups UIM 50 entries 10 groups 4 phone numbers 1 phone number 3 mail addresses 1 mail address 100 images From 000 to 999 100 Chara-den images FOMA phone UIM Name Ring tone Vibrator Illumination Picture Chara-den Mail ring tone Mail vibrator Mail illumination Answer message p u o r G f o s t n e n o C t
: Can be stored. pYou can set your UIM into another FOMA phone and use the UIM Phonebook entries.
: Cannot be stored.
<Add to Phonebook>
Storing Phonebook Entries You can store Phonebook entries in the FOMA phone (Phone) or on the UIM. 1 Xo(for at least one second)Phone or UIM The Edit Name display appears. Go to step 2 and enter a name. pYou cannot display the registration display for the Phonebook entries even when you press and hold Xo for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. 2 Do the following operations. pYou can press No to switch between the Basic item tab and Settings tab for the FOMA phones Phonebook. 92 For the FOMA phone For the UIM Item Name Reading Operation/Explanation Item Operation/Explanation You can enter the name of the person or company in kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabetic characters, or numerals.
Enter a name. pFor the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. You can enter pictographs and symbols as well. pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 10 full-pitch characters/21 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 10 characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters. You can enter the reading in half-pitch katakana, alphabetic characters, or numerals.
Enter a reading. pFor the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 32 half-pitch characters. You can enter half-pitch symbols as well. pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 12 full-pitch characters/25 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 12 characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters. pIf the displayed reading is acceptable, you do not need to edit it. However, depending on the characters entered for names or entering method, they are not reflected in the reading. pIf you enter (reduced size) or (reduced size) for a name,
(half-pitch, regular size) (for the FOMA phone) and
(regular size) (for the UIM) are displayed in the reading field. Phone number You can store up to four phone numbers per Phonebook entry in the FOMA phone. You can set an icon for each phone number to categorize mobile phone numbers, office phone numbers, and so on. You can store only one phone number per Phonebook entry on the UIM.
Enter a phone number. pEnter from the city code for the phone numbers. pYou can enter up to 26 digits. However, you can enter up to 20 digits for blue UIMs. pPress and hold a for at least one second to insert a pause
(p) into the phone number you store. However, you cannot insert the pause (p) to the beginning of phone number or insert it consecutively. The pause (p) inserted to the end of phone number is not stored. P h o n e b o o k pIf you insert : in the middle of a phone number, you cannot make a call. However, the phone number is recorded in Redial or Dialed Calls. pYou can store the phone number which includes # such as that for information service as well.
Select an icon. pIf you have stored a phone number in the FOMA phone,
<Phone number> will appear in the another Add-to-Phonebook display. To store another phone number, select
<Phone number>. Group In the FOMA phone, 19 groups are available. On the UIM, 10 groups are available.
Select a group. pWhen the storage is completed with no group selected, the Phonebook entry is stored in No setting. 93 Item Mail address Item Location information Operation/Explanation You can store up to three mail addresses per Phonebook entry in the FOMA phone. You can set an icon for each mail address to categorize mobile phone addresses, home addresses, and so on. You can store only one mail address per Phonebook entry on the UIM.
Enter a mail address. pThe mail address can consist of up to 50 half-pitch alphabets, numerals or symbol characters. pWhen the mail address is phone number@docomo.ne.jp, store the phone number only. Operation/Explanation
Select an item. By position loc. Measures the current location and store the location information. After checking the location information, press Oo(
). From loc. history
. Select a piece of location information from Location History and store it. Attach from image
. Stores the location information from an image. Select a pFor the FOMA phone, you can set a secret code as well. (See folder, then the image. page 102)
Select an icon. pIf you have stored a mail address in the FOMA phone, another
<Mail address> will appear in the Add-to-Phonebook display. To store another mail address, select address>.
<Mail Address
Enter a ZIP codeEnter a postal address. pYou can enter up to 7 digits for the zip code. pYou can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100 half-pitch characters for the postal address. Further, you can enter pictographs as well. pYou cannot enter or - (hyphen) in the zip code. pTo delete the stored location information, select Delete location info. pWhen you press i(
) during measuring the current location, the confirmation display appears asking whether to display the result obtained so far from the location information. pTo cancel measuring the current location, press r or l(
pPress l(
information to restart measuring in Quality mode.
) from the confirmation display for the location
). Birthday
Enter a birthdayON or OFF pYou can enter the birthday from January 1, 1800 through December 31, 2099. pWhen you set to ON, the birthday is stored as an anniversary in the schedule of every year. (Birthday) (name) is stored as the anniversary content. pEven if you delete the Phonebook entries, the stored anniversaries are not deleted.
Enter a memo. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters. Further, you can enter pictographs as well. Memo k o o b e n o h P 94 Item Image Memory No. Ring tone Operation/Explanation The stored still image is displayed when you call up the Phonebook entry.
Select an item. Select image . You can store a still image in Data Box. Shoot image. You can store the shot still image. Perform step 2 through step 3 on page 155. pTo release the stored still image, select Release image. pThe size of a still image you can store is Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller and up to 300 Kbytes in JPEG format or GIF format. pIf you store a still image larger than 72 x 54 dots, it is displayed shrunk on the detailed Phonebook display. pIf you store a still image larger than 240 x 180 dots, it is displayed shrunk on the Call Receiving display. pWhen Disp. PH-book image is set to ON, the stored still image is displayed for an incoming call. However, when another image is stored in the Picture field, that image is preferentially displayed for the incoming call.
Enter a memory number. pEnter a three-digit number of 000 through 999. pThe lowest empty memory number 010 through 999 is entered in advance. If 010 through 999 are all occupied, the lowest empty memory number from 000 through 009 is entered. You can set a ring tone for when a voice call or videophone call comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone Go to step 2 on page 108. pTo release the stored ring tone, select Release ring tone. Item Vibrator Illumination Picture Chara-den Mail ring tone Mail vibrator Operation/Explanation You can set a vibration pattern for when a voice call or videophone call comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern. pTo release the stored vibrator, select Release vibrator. You can set an illumination color for when a voice call or videophone call comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect a color. pTo release the stored illumination, select Release illumination. You can set an image to be displayed for when a call comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select pictureSelect a type of imageSelect a folder
Select an image. pTo release the stored image, select Release picture. The stored Chara-den image is displayed as a substitute image for videophone calls with the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select Chara-denSelect a Chara-den image. pTo release the stored Chara-den image, select Release Chara-den. You can set a ring tone for when a mail message comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone Go to step 2 on page 108. pTo release the stored mail ring tone, select Release ring tone. You can set a vibration pattern for when a mail message comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern. pTo release the stored mail vibrator, select Release vibrator. P h o n e b o o k 95 k o o b e n o h P Item Operation/Explanation Mail illumination You can set an illumination color for when a mail message comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect a color. pTo release the stored mail illumination, select Release illumination. Answer message You can set an answer message for Record Message by Phonebook entry.
Select answer messageSelect an answer message. pTo release the stored answer message, select Release answer message.
). 3 Press l(
the entry. pIf you have not entered any name, is not displayed and you cannot store Phonebook entries while editing When the low battery alarm sounds The Phonebook entry you are editing is saved automatically. The confirmation display appears asking whether to resume editing when you continue editing after charging the battery or when you operate step 1 on page 92 and select the storage location for the interrupted Phonebook entry after changing to a charged battery. Recall . You can resume editing the Phonebook entry. New . You can edit a new Phonebook entry. In this case, the interrupted data is retained. If you execute Add to phonebook after storing the new Phonebook entry, the confirmation display appears again. pOnly the most recently interrupted entry is retained. pIf you resume editing the data but then cancel editing without storing it, that data will be abandoned. Once you recall the data, be sure to store it. If you receive a call or mail You can respond it leaving the edited data as it is, thanks to the Multitask function. To return to the Phonebook Edit display, press and hold x for at least one second to switch the menu. You can return to the Phonebook Edit display also by ending the call or mail function. 96 Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook You can store the displayed or selected phone number, mail address, and still image in the FOMA phones or UIMs Phonebook. Storable items Phone number Phone number Operation While a phone number is entered While a redial item, dialed call record, or received call record is displayed While Sent Address or Received Address is displayed While a site or screen memo is displayed While the text of Message R/F or mail is displayed While the data scanned by Bar Code Reader or Text Reader is displayed While a ToruCa file is displayed While your current location or location history is displayed Location information While a registered LCS client is displayed Name/Phone number Still image While the Still Image list or a still image is displayed Phone number/Mail address Phone number/Mail address Phone number/Mail address Phone number/Mail address Phone number/Mail address 1 Bring up/Select an item to be storedi(
Add to phonebook pTo store the address of the sender (or of another recipient of simultaneous mail)
) of the received mail or the destination address of the sent mail into the Phonebook, select Store address. When the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination addresses are found, the display for selecting an address appears. Use Bo to select the mail address or phone number you want to store. pTo store the results scanned by Text Reader in a Phonebook entry, select Store phone No. or Store mail add.. pTo store a still image in the Phonebook, select Phonebook from Set display. pWhen Add to phonebook is displayed on the Scanned Code Result display for Bar Code Reader, select Add to phonebook; then other information in the scanned code besides the phone number or mail address is entered into each field. New . Go to step 2 on page 92. Add . Adds data to the existing Phonebook entry. When storing data on the 2 Phone or UIMSelect a storing method. 3 Select a search methodSearch the Phonebook
Select a Phonebook entry to be storedOo(
UIM, Overwrite is displayed.
) The phone number or mail address is entered automatically. pSee step 2 on page 92 to edit other items in the Phonebook entry. pWhen you store into the FOMA phones Phonebook, you can remain the original entry and store a new entry into a different location by changing the memory number. 4 l(
)YES pIf you store the entry in the UIM Phonebook, select Overwrite to overwrite the original entry, or select Add to store it as a new entry. Information pThe Phonebook entry does not store the information of Notify caller ID included in Redial/Dialed Calls. To set Caller ID Notification, add 186/184 to the phone number and store it. pCharacters that cannot be stored may be replaced by spaces or deleted, and then stored. pYou may not be able to store the information from some sites into the Phonebook.
<Group Setting>
Setting Groups You can utilize the Phonebook by sorting the entries by group such as Company or Friend, or by your interest such as Baseball or Ceramic art. You can set a ring tone, vibration pattern, or illumination by group. pThe groups on the UIM are indicated by pTo reset the group names and respective settings by group, which have already been stored, press i(
), select Reset group, and then select YES. 1 mPhonebookGroup setting 2 Highlight a group and press l(
Select an item to be setSet the contents. pWhen you select Group name, enter a group name. You can store up to 10 full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters. However, you can store only up to 10 characters (regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters) when you enter both full-pitch and half-pitch characters for a UIM group name. pSee step 2 on page 92 for the operations of the other items. However, you cannot set for groups on the UIM. pSelect a stored group, or press i(
its settings. However, you cannot check the settings of the groups on the UIM.
) and select Check setting to check
) P h o n e b o o k 3 Press l(
). 97 Search Phonebook display 2-touch dial?
[FOMA phone only]
k o o b e n o h P
<Search Phonebook>
Dialing from Phonebooks You can retrieve stored Phonebook entries by eight search methods. 1 XoDo the following operations. pThe display for the same search method as the previous one appears once you have carried out a search. Press r to show the Search Phonebook display. pYou cannot display the Search Phonebook display even when you press Xo when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. Item All?
Reading?
Group?
Memory No.?
[FOMA phone only]
Name?
98 Operation/Explanation You can bring up all Phonebook entries. pThe tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 99) You can enter the reading of the other partys name from the first character and search. You do not need to enter the full reading.
Enter a part of the readingBo pThe tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 99) You can bring up Phonebook entries stored in the specified group.
Select a group. pThe tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 99) pIf you press i(
) on the Group list, the Function menu for Group setting is displayed. You can search for the entry by the memory number assigned when it was stored in the Phonebook.
Enter the memory number. pEnter from 000 through 999 in three digits. pThe tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 99) pFrom the Stand-by display, you can press d and then press Bo to display the Memory No. Dial display. From there you can make a voice call by entering the memory number of the phone number. You can enter the other partys name from the first character and search. You do not need to enter the full name.
Enter a part of the nameBo Item Phone number?
Mail address?
Operation/Explanation You can enter a part of the other partys phone number and search. You can search for the entry even from the middle of phone number.
Enter a part of the phone numberBo pYou can display the Phonebook list also by entering a part of the phone number from the Stand-by display or the Talking display, and pressing Bo. You can enter a part of the other partys mail address and search. You can search for the entry even from the middle of mail address.
Enter a part of the mail addressBo You can bring up the list of Phonebook entries in memory number 000 through 009. pPhonebook entries not yet stored or being set with secret are displayed as <>. 2 Select an entryd or Oo(
) pWhen the entry contains multiple phone numbers, or when you searched by Mail address?, press Mo from the detailed display to select a phone number. pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l(
pressing p.
) or PushTalk call by Information pIn a search method other than Group? and 2-touch dial?, enter nothing and press Bo; then you can search all through the Phonebook. pWhen no Phonebook entry is found that matches the condition you entered by Reading? or Memory No.?, the entry that is the closest to the condition is displayed. Search order The Phonebook entries are searched in the order of readings you entered for storing, as follows:
Space at the beginning of the reading Japanese syllabary (... ) Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z) Numerals (0 through 9) Symbols No reading. For All? and Reading?, searching is done in the following order:
Japanese syllabary (... ) Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z) Space at the beginning of the reading Numerals (0 through 9) Symbols No reading. The Memory No. Search searches in the order of the memory numbers.
About Phonebook List When you search from All?, Reading?, Group?, or Memory No.?, the tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. With All? and Reading?, the entries are sorted by every column of reading, with Memory No.? by every 100 of the memory number, and with Group? by every group. Press No to display the Phonebook entries in the tab at left or right. However, when there are 12 or more Phonebook entries in a tab, pressing m(
page. pAfter you search by Reading?, you can move the cursor to the through , , and tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press the same numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to display the tab. Each time you press 5, the cursor Phonebook list
), or <> brings up the previous or next
), c(
moves to the top of and so on. pAfter you search by Group?, you can move the cursor to the top of each column in the tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press the same numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the top of the column. Each time you press 5, the cursor moves to the top of and so on. pAfter you search by Memory No.?, you can move the cursor to the 000~ to 900~
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the 500~ tab. pYou can make a voice call to the phone number stored for the name highlighted on the Phonebook list, by pressing d. Also, press l(
) to make a videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk call. When multiple phone numbers are stored for the name, the one stored first will be dialed. p appears for the Phonebook entries set to A by Phonebook 2in1 Setting, appears for the Phonebook entries set to B, and entries set to common data. (Only in Dual Mode) appears for the Phonebook pWhen you refer to the Phonebook entries, appears for the Phonebook entries which contain the location information. Memory No. Still image Notify caller ID P h o n e b o o k About the detailed display Use No to highlight a tab, then the detailed contents are displayed. pFor the Phonebook entry stored is displayed on on the UIM, the memory number field. Group Reading Name pWhen Notify Caller ID is set to Notify caller, appears, and when set to Dont notify, appears. pUnder the still image, appears for the Phonebook entries set to A by Phonebook 2in1 Setting, appears for the Phonebook entries set to B, and appears for the Phonebook entries set to common data. (Only in Dual Mode) Detailed Phonebook display (Item list) pWhen a Phonebook entry contains the setting for Multi Number or Chaku-moji, the set contents are displayed in the Item list/Phone Number display. Item list The first stored phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, and memo are displayed. Phone number Mail address pWhen you select the item, you can compose an i-mode mail message with that mail address entered into the address field. Personal information
) or r to return to the former display. pWhen you select a postal address, memo, or still image, the full display appears. Press Oo(
When you select the location information, the Function menu of the location information appears. (See page 279) Settings pWhen you select each item, a demo is played back. Press Oo(
) or r to end the demo. 99 k o o b e n o h P 2 l(
)YES
<Edit Phonebook>
Editing Phonebook Entries 1 Detailed Phonebook displaym(
Select an item to be editedEdit the contents. pSee step 2 on page 92 for how to edit the Phonebook entry. pEven if you edit the Phonebook entry in the FOMA phone (Phone), you can remain the original contents in the original location and store the edited contents in the different location by changing the memory number. pIf you edited the UIM Phonebook entry, select Overwrite to overwrite the original contents, or Add to save the contents as a new entry.
<Delete Data>
Deleting Phonebook Entries Delete from the Detailed Phonebook Display 1 Detailed Phonebook displayi(
Select an itemYES pYou can delete an item highlighted by pressing Mo from the detailed display or delete the Phonebook entry.
)Delete data Delete from the Phonebook List 1 Phonebook listi(
Do the following operations.
)Delete data Item Operation/Explanation Delete this
YES 100 Item Delete selected Operation/Explanation
)YES
Put a check mark for Phonebook entries to be deleted
l(
pYou can check or uncheck all items by pressing i(
and selecting Select all in tab/Select all/Release all in tab/
Release all.
) pPerform the same operation as that of Delete all when you have selected all Phonebook entries including secret ones. Delete all in tab You can delete all the Phonebook entries for the displayed tab.
YES Delete all You can delete all Phonebook entries including secret entries.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES Information pWhen you delete a Phonebook entry that is stored in the PushTalk Phonebook, the PushTalk Phonebook entry is also deleted.
<No. of Phonebook>
Checking Number of Phonebook Entries 1 mPhonebookNo. of phonebook Phone Phonebook . The number of Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA phone
(Phone) Secret . The number of Phonebook entries stored as secret data during Secret Mode or Secret Data Only Image. The number of Phonebook entries in which still images are stored Chara-den . The number of Phonebook entries in which Chara-den images are stored PushTalk . The number of Phonebook entries stored in the PushTalk Phonebook Voice dial . The number of Phonebook entries set as voice dial entries
: The number of phone numbers that can still be stored Rest .
: The number of mail addresses that can still be stored UIM Phonebook . The number of Phonebook entries stored on the UIM Information pWhile you are using 2in1, the number of displayable Phonebook entries for each mode is displayed. (See page 459) Making Full Use of Phonebooks Function Menu of the Phonebook List Function menu Operation/Explanation New Sort Attach to mail You can store a new Phonebook entry. Go to step 1 on page 92. You can change the display order.
Select a type of order. pYou can sort Phonebook entries in reverse order by selecting Ascending or Descending. pYou cannot sort on the Phonebook list with tabs displayed. You can send an i-mode mail message with the Phonebook entry attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. Send Ir data
(Send phonebook) Send Ir data
(Send all phonebook) See page 370. See page 371. transmission See page 372.
(Send phonebook) transmission See page 372.
(Send all phonebook) Send to Bluetooth
(Send phonebook) You can send the Phonebook entry using Bluetooth communication.
Send phonebookSelect a Bluetooth device to be sent
YES pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the confirmation display appears asking whether to search. pSee page 427 for registering and connecting Bluetooth devices. Function menu Send to Bluetooth
(Send all phonebook) Operation/Explanation You can send all Phonebook entries using Bluetooth communication.
Send all phonebookSelect a Bluetooth device to be sent
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pWhen Session number setting of Bluetooth settings is set to ON, enter your Terminal Security Code and then a session number. pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the confirmation display appears asking whether to search. pSee page 427 for registering and connecting Bluetooth devices. Copy to microSD See page 357. Connect to Center See page 105. Delete data See page 100. Character size You can switch the character size for the Phonebook and on the displays within Phonebook settings, etc. (See Phonebook on page 129) Set secret/Release secret You can activate/deactivate Secret for the Phonebook entry. pIf you select Set secret in ordinary mode (not in Secret mode or Secret data only), enter your Terminal Security Code. P h o n e b o o k Information
<Send to Bluetooth>
pYou cannot send Phonebook entries from the UIM. pSee page 425 for the Bluetooth function. Function Menu of the Detailed Phonebook Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Notify caller ID See page 47. Prefix numbers See page 62. Intl dial assist See page 61. 101 Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation k o o b e n o h P Function menu 2in1 dial Multi number Chaku-moji Restrictions Edit data Delete data You can select a phone number to notify the other party in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 458) You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party.
(See page 456) See page 57. See page 142. Go to step 1 of Editing Phonebook Entries on page 100. See page 100. Store in P-Talk PB You can store the phone number in the PushTalk Phonebook. Add desktop icon See page 127. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the mail address. Go to step 3 on page 198. Compose SMS Attach to mail You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 244. You can send an i-mode mail message with the Phonebook entry attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. Send Ir data
(Send phonebook) Send Ir data
(Send all phonebook) See page 370. See page 371. transmission See page 372.
(Send phonebook) transmission See page 372.
(Send all phonebook) Send to Bluetooth
(Send phonebook) Send to Bluetooth
(Send all phonebook) See page 101. See page 101. 102 Copy to microSD See page 357. Connect to Center See page 105. Copy name Copy phone number/
Copy mail add./
Copy address/
Copy location info/
Copy birthday/
Copy memo Secret code pYou can paste the copied text to a mail message and others. pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight an item to be copied. The items in the Function menu differ depending on the highlighted item. pYou can paste the copied text to a mail message and others. You need to add the recipients secret code when sending i-mode mail to anyone who has registered a secret code. Once you set the secret code for the mail address in the Phonebook entry, it will be added automatically whenever you send mail to that address.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSet code pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight a phone number or mail address to be set with a secret code. pTo check the secret code, select Check code. pTo release the secret code, select Release code.
Enter a four-digit secret codeYES pIn the Function menu, Secret code is indicated by , after it is set. pEnter a four-digit number for secret code. You cannot set 0000. Character size You can switch the character size for the Phonebook and on the displays within Phonebook settings, etc. (See Phonebook on page 129) Set secret/Release secret See page 101. Function menu Copy to UIM/
Copy from UIM See page 422. Select image See page 78. Operation/Explanation Information Sort phone number/
Sort mail address
Select a phone number or mail address
Use Bo to change the orderOo(
p From the detailed display, press No to highlight an item to be sorted. The items in the Function menu differ depending on the highlighted item.
) pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l(
) Information
<Secret code>
pYou cannot set secret codes for UIM Phonebook entries. pThe secret code can be added only when the recipients mail address is in the form of phone number or phone number@docomo.ne.jp. It cannot be added to any other form of mail address. pIf you have stored the mail address as phone numbersecret code@docomo.ne.jp, you cannot reply to mail messages from the party of that mail address. After changing the mail address to phone number@docomo.ne.jp, set the secret code.
<Two-touch Dial>
Making a Call with a Few Touches When the entry is stored in memory number 000 through 009 in the FOMA phones Phonebook, you can dial the phone number just by pressing the lowest one digit of memory number and d. 1 Numeric key (0 to 9)d or Oo(
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l(
pressing p.
) or a PushTalk call by P h o n e b o o k pWhen the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number will be dialed. pWhen you set Restrict dialing to a Phonebook entry of memory number 000 through 009, set it to the first phone number in the Phonebook entry. pWhen you store a Phonebook entry of memory number from 000 through 009 as secret data, make a call to that entry in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.
<Voice Dial>
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice Just vocalize the other partys voice dial name and then the Phonebook entry is accessed for making a call. Voice Dial Setting You can store up to 100 voice dial entries selecting from among the Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA phone (Phone).
+m-2-6 1 mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Voice dial setting<New>
pYou can edit the stored voice dial name by pressing l(
pTo delete the stored voice dial entry, press i(
Delete all and then select YES.
). Go to step 3.
) and select Delete or 2 Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry. 3 Enter a voice dial name. The display for search method you used last time appears. pThe mark is added to the Phonebook entry stored in the Voice Dial list. pYou can enter up to 22 half-pitch katakana characters. pThe reading (katakana only) of the Phonebook entry is displayed as the voice dial name. Correct the name to the easy-to-identify words. 103 k o o b e n o h P Information Information pThe voice dial name set by this function is effective only for calling up a voice dial pWhen you vocalize, keep your mouth away from the microphone about 10 cm. If your entry. For the voice guidance function, the reading (name) stored in the Phonebook is read aloud. pWhen multiple similar voice dial names are stored or when the voice dial name is short, the recognition rate lowers and a wrong voice dial entry (Phonebook entry) might be accessed. In this case, rename the existing voice dial name and store it. pYou cannot store (Boisusettei) as a voice dial name. Dial from Phonebook by Voice By your voice, you can access the Phonebook entry you set in the Voice Dial list. When Read aloud settings is set to ON and Voice dial is checked, the operation is guided by the voice guidance. 1 d(for at least one second)
As soon as the voice recognition start tone sounds, vocalize the voice dial name. Start vocalizing within four seconds after the voice recognition start tone sounds. Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed. pYou cannot change the volume of the voice recognition start tone. The voice recognition start tone does not sound during Manner Mode. pIf you say the word (Boisusettei), the display of Voice settings appears. (See page 105) pWhen Auto voice dial is set to ON, the display for Auto Voice Dial appears after the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry. Then about two seconds later, the FOMA phone automatically dials out. pYou cannot access a voice dial entry even when you press and hold d for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. 2 Highlight a detected result and pressd or Oo(
The first phone number in the selected Phonebook entry is dialed. pYou can bring up the detailed Phonebook display by pressing l(
Highlight a phone number and press d or Oo(
Also, you can make a videophone call by pressing l(
by pressing p.
) to make a voice call.
) or a PushTalk call
). voice is too distant, it may be difficult to recognize your voice. pPronounce the voice dial name as clearly as possible. pBefore and after voice production, avoid making the sounds unrelated to the voice dial name such as clearing your throat, clicking your tongue, noisy breathing or other noise. pVocalize in quiet, noise-free locations. pWhile vocalizing, do not put your fingers over the microphone, or press or brush the keys. To access a voice dial entry using the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch You need to set Voice earphone dial to ON and open the FOMA phone in advance. Microphone with Switch (option) for at least one second. 1 Press and hold the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
2 Perform the operations in step 1 and step 2 of Dial from Phonebook by Voice on page 104. pYou can make a call also by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch instead of pressing d or Oo. To access a voice dial entry using a Bluetooth device You can access a voice dial entry with the FOMA phone closed as well. You need to set Voice earphone dial to ON in advance, and connect with the Bluetooth device using the Headset service or Hands-free service. pFor using the Hands-free service, the Bluetooth device needs to support a voice recognition function. 1 Press the switch of the Bluetooth device. pYou can access a voice dial entry also by pressing and holding < for at least one second when the FOMA phone is closed. 104 2 Access a voice dial entry following the voice guidance. Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed. pThe FOMA phone automatically dials out about two seconds after the voice guidance informing of dialing finishes. Voice Settings 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Do the following operations. Item Auto voice dial Operation/Explanation You can automatically make a call to the phone number accessed by voice.
ON or OFF Voice earphone dial You can access the voice dial entries by using the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) or Wireless Earphone Set 02 (option).
ON or OFF Read aloud settings See page 406. Read aloud volume See page 407. Read aloud speed See page 407. Read aloud output See page 407. Read aloud valid set. See page 407. P h o n e b o o k
<Data Security Service>
Saving (Restoring/Updating) Phonebook to Data Storage Center You can save the Phonebook stored in your FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. You can use restoration of the saved Phonebook and automatic update settings from Data Security Service Site [iMenu English iMenuMy Menu (Data Security Service)] on the i-mode. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis. pYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of the service area. pFor details on Data Security Service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. 1 mLifeKitData Security Service
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Connect to Center Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Sent/recv. PB data list You can display the records of communication such as saving the Phonebook, mail messages, or images to the Data Storage Center.
Select a record. pSelect a communication completion time in the list to switch to the detailed display. PB image sending You can set whether to save images set for the Phonebook entries to the Data Storage Center.
ON or OFF Information
<Connect to Center>
pYou cannot save the UIM Phonebook. pWhen the Phonebook entries saved to the Data Storage Center exceeds the number of Phonebook entries storable in the FOMA phones Phonebook, the excess entries cannot be updated. 105 Information
<Sent/recv. PB data list>
pUp to 30 records are saved. When more than 30 records are saved, the older records are overwritten.
<PB image sending>
pYou cannot save the images whose output from FOMA phone is prohibited. Auto-update k On the site of the Data Storage Center, you can set so as to periodically update and save the Phonebook entries in your FOMA phone to the Data o o Storage Center. b pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. e n o h P Downloading the Phonebook entries from the Data Storage Center to your FOMA phone Note that if you delete the Phonebook entries from your FOMA phone and execute auto-update, the Phonebook entries on the Data Storage Center are also deleted. When you download the Phonebook entries from the Data Storage Center to your FOMA phone, do the following operations to restore them. 1. iiMenuEnglish iMenuMy Menu (Data Security Service)
(Data Storage Center)Enter the i-mode password. 2. Select (Download to mobile phone) from the Phonebook entries on the Data Storage CenterOK pAbout 15 seconds later, download starts. Information pThe Phonebook is not automatically updated while another function is working at the time of Auto-update. pIf the Phonebook cannot be updated, the notification icon of
(PB in Center updated) appears on the Stand-by display. Select
, and the update display appears if Auto-update is set. If Auto-update is not set, the update display appears after you enter your Terminal Security Code. 106 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Sound Settings Changing Ring Tone. <Select Ring Tone> 108 Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or Melody
. <Melody Effect> 109 Informing You of an Incoming Call by Vibration . <Vibrator> 110 Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone . <Voice Announce> 110 Changing Calling Tone. <Melody Call Setting> 110 Setting Keypad Sound . <Keypad Sound> 111 Setting Charging-start/end Tones. <Charge Sound> 111 Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be Disconnected
. <Quality Alarm> 111 Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
. <Mail/Message Ring Time> 111 Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
. <Headset Usage Setting> 112 Silencing Tones from FOMA Phone . <Manner Mode> 112 Selecting Manner Mode Type . <Manner Mode Set> 113 Screen/Light Settings Changing Displays. <Display Setting> 115 Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook during Ringing
. <Display Phonebook Image> 117 Setting Displays for Private Window . <Private Window> 117 Displaying Arrival Information by Opening FOMA Phone
. <Received Mail/Call at Open> 118 Setting Lights for Display and Keypad . <Backlight> 118 Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically . <LCD AI> 119 Making Display Hard to See from People Around
. <View Blind> 119 Setting Quality of Display . <Image Quality> 119 Setting Color Combination for Display
. <Color Theme Setting> 119 Setting Display of Main Menu . <Menu Icon Setting> 120 Using Kisekae Tool . <Kisekae Tool> 121 Setting Display of Horizontal Open Menu
. <Horizontal Open Menu> 122 Using FeelMail . <FeelMail> 122 Setting Color of Call/Charging Indicator and Others
. <Illumination> 122 Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by Tone and Call/Charging Indicator . <Info Notice Setting> 124 Using Icons on Desktop . <Desktop Icon> 125 Changing Character Font . <Font> 128 Changing Character Size . <Character Size> 129 Setting Clock Display . 130 107 s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
+m-1-3
<Select Ring Tone>
Changing Ring Tone You can set ring tones by incoming type. If you select an i-motion movie, the i-motion movie and sound are played back for incoming calls/messages. (Chaku-motion) pThe ring tone is the PCM sound source, chord of 128 tones, and ADPCM compliant. pSee Add to Phonebook for setting a ring tone by Phonebook entry, and see Group Setting for setting it by group. Ring Tone list (pre-installed) Display Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 I GOT RHYTHM / INST 1 TRITSCH TRATSCH POLK1 Title I GOT RHYTHM / INST TRITSCH TRATSCH POLKA OP 214 ETUDE NO 12/12 ETUDE ETUDE NO 12/12 ETUDES OP 10 EL COLIBRI EL COLIBRI HABANERA/CARMEN 1 LA FILLE AUX CHEVEUX1 SOMEDAY MY PRINCE HABANERA/CARMEN LA FILLE AUX CHEVEUX DE LIN SOMEDAY MY PRINCE WILL COME SUMMERTIME SUMMERTIME 3D Eye Catch1 3D Sound1 3D Lighter1 3D Magical Stick1 3D Garden Terrace1 Waterdrop 108 The Name of Lyricist/Composer Composer:
GERSHWIN GEORGE Composer:
STRAUSS JUN JOHANN Composer:
CHOPIN FREDERIC FRANCOIS Composer:
SAGRERAS JULIO S Composer:
BIZET GEORGES Composer:
DEBUSSY CLAUDE ACHILLE Composer:
CHURCHILL FRANK E Composer:
GERSHWIN GEORGE Display Mail 1 Mail 2 2 Title
(CHURAUMI KAKUREKUMANOMI) The Name of Lyricist/Composer 1 3D sound is supported. See page 109 for 3D sound. 2 i-motion movie
(Note) The names of lyricists and composers are described conforming to the JASRAC web page. Whole part of long titles may not be displayed due to restriction of the display size. 1 mSettingsSoundSelect ring tone
Select an incoming type. pSelect an item and press l(
or displayed.
) to check the contents actually played back 2 Select ring toneSelect a type of ring tone. Melody . Sets a melody as a ring tone. MUSIC. Sets a Chaku-uta Full music file as a ring tone. imotion . Sets an i-motion movie as a ring tone. (Chaku-motion/
Chaku-uta) Voice announce . Sets the sound recorded by Voice announce as a ring tone. The setting is completed. OFF . Sets a ring tone off. The setting is completed. 3 Select a folderSelect a ring tone. pIf you select MUSIC in step 2, select Fullsong ring tone or Point ring tone.
(See page 398) pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Information pYou can set the Call Receiving display by selecting Phone or Videophone, and then by selecting Select calling disp.. Go to step 2 on page 116. pYou can set the Mail Receiving display by selecting Mail, Chat mail, MessageR or MessageF, and then by selecting Select receiving disp.. Go to step 2 of Set Stand-by Display on page 115. Information pThe priority order of ring tones is as follows: Read aloud settings Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Select ring tone. When a call comes in to the additional number, the ring tone specified by Set as ring tone of Multi number sounds. If a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1, the priority order of the ring tones is as follows: Read aloud settings Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Ringtone set. for No. B (see page 457). pThe ring tone or images set at purchase might be played back or displayed for incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and Display setting. pSee imotion info to check whether the i-motion movie can be set for a ring tone. pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a mail ring tone, you can press -r or others to stop the ring tone. pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back taking priority over Display setting. However, if you set a voice-only i-motion movie for the ring tone, the image set by Display setting is displayed. pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for Select calling disp., the i-motion movie is played back taking priority over this function for incoming calls. However, if you set an i-motion movie containing only video for Select calling disp., the ring tone selected for this function is played back for incoming calls. pYou cannot set an i-motion movie which contains video as a PushTalk ring tone. pWhen different types of mail i-mode mail, SMS messages, chat mail, or Messages R/F are received at the same time, the priority order of ring tone as follows: Chat mail i-mode mail/SMS MessageR MessageF. If you receive the same type of mail simultaneously, the ring tone corresponding to the mail you have received last works. pFor the melody downloaded from a site or attached to mail, or the melody prohibited to attach to mail or output from the FOMA phone, a playing part may be specified in advance. When the play-part-specified melody is set for the ring tone, only the specified part is played back.
<Melody Effect>
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or Melody You can set whether to add stereophonic sound effects to the playback tone of melodies and i-motion movies, ring tones, and effect tones.
+m-6-4 1 mSettingsSoundMelody effect
Do the following operations.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Item Stereo&3DSound Position to play Operation/Explanation Plays back 3-dimensional sound from the stereo-speakers. Effective for the i-ppli effect tones or ring tones.
ON or OFF Sets the play start position of the melody that has been set for the ring tone or alarm tone.
Select an item. Play all. Plays back from the beginning of the melody. Play portion . Plays back from the start position set for the melody. 3D Sound 3D Sound is a function that creates the stereophonic sound and the sound moving through the space, using the stereo-speakers (or stereo-earphone set). 3D Sound compatible i-ppli games, ring tones, and i-motion movies enable you to enjoy live-like feeling of sounds. To enjoy the powerful 3D Sound and to get the best performance, keep the FOMA phone about 40 cm away from you, holding it in front of you. Note that the sound effects may be weakened if you hold the FOMA phone to the left or right from the front or if it is too close to or too far from you even in front of you. Information pStereognostic sense might differ depending on the person. If you feel strange, switch Stereo&3DSound to OFF. 109 s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
+m-5-4
<Vibrator>
Informing You of an Incoming Call by Vibration You can set the vibrator to notify you of incoming calls and mail. 1 mSettingsIncoming callVibrator
Select an incoming typeSelect a vibration pattern. Pattern 1. Alternates between vibration on (about 0.5 second) and off Pattern 2. Alternates between vibration on (about 1 second) and off
(about 0.5 second). Pattern 3. Alternates between vibration on (about 3 seconds) and off
(about 1 second).
(about 1 second). Melody linkage . Vibrates in time with the vibration pattern stored in the melody. OFF . Does not vibrate. pWhile you are selecting a pattern, the FOMA phone vibrates by the selected pattern for confirmation. However, it does not vibrate if you select Melody linkage. pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while the vibrator is set:
: Vibrates for incoming voice calls, PushTalk calls or videophone calls.
: Vibrates for incoming mail, chat mail or Messages R/F.
: Vibrates for incoming voice calls, PushTalk calls or videophone calls, and vibrates for incoming mail, chat mail or Messages R/F. Information pThe priority order of vibrators is as follows: Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Vibrator. pThe vibrator vibrates at a regular strength, regardless of the ring volume level. pEven when Melody linkage is set, the FOMA phone vibrates with Pattern 2 if an i-
motion movie or melody with no vibration pattern is set for the ring tone. pBe careful not to leave the FOMA phone on a desk or similar places with the vibrator activated; when a call comes in, the FOMA phone might move and fall by vibration. 110
+m-5-5
<Voice Announce>
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone You can set the sound you recorded with the FOMA phone for a ring tone
(including a ring tone for Number B of 2in1), On hold tone/Holding tone, alarm for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, and Book program, and an answer message for Record Message. You can record only one item for about 15 seconds. 1 mLifeKitRec.msg/voice memoVoice announce
Record pTo suspend recording midway, press Oo(
recorded to that point are saved.
), h, or r. The contents pThe tone beeps about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 15 seconds) ends. When recording ends, the tone beeps twice, and the former display returns. pThe recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program, or Timer recording sounds, or when you switch displays using Multitask during recording. (The contents recorded to that point are saved.) pTo play back the recorded sound, select Play. To suspend playback midway, press Oo(
pTo erase the recorded sound, select Erase, then select YES.
), h, or r.
<Melody Call Setting>
Changing Calling Tone Melody Call is a service that changes the ringing tone phone callers hear, to a melody you like. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. pMelody call is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. 1 mSettingsMelody Call settingYES
Operate following the instructions on the display. Information pMelody Call is not available for incoming videophone calls and PushTalk calls. pWhen you select YES from the confirmation display asking whether to connect to the site, the line is connected to the i-mode site. You are not charged a packet communication fee for connecting to the site for settings, however, you are charged for connecting to the IP site, i-mode menu site, and free melody corner.
<Keypad Sound>
Setting Keypad Sound 1 mSettingsSoundKeypad soundON or OFF
+m-3-0 Information pThe sound volume for keypad sound cannot be changed. pIf you set this function to OFF, the battery level tone (see page 44) and respective warning tones do not sound. pThe keypad does not make a sound when you press .<, during ringing, or during playback of a moving image or i-motion movie. pWhen you press .> with your FOMA phone closed, the FOMA phone works according to Info notice setting on page 124.
<Charge Sound>
Setting Charging-start/end Tones The confirmation tone sounds twice when charging starts/ends. 1 mSettingsOther settingsBatteryCharge sound
ON or OFF Information pThe sound volume for charge sound cannot be changed. pThe charging confirmation tone does not sound when a display other than the Stand-by display is shown or during Manner Mode or Public Mode (Drive Mode).
+m-7-5
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be Disconnected When a call is likely to be disconnected midway due to bad radio wave conditions, an alarm sounds to inform you right before disconnection. 1 mSettingsTalkQuality alarmSelect an alarm. No tone . Does not sound. High tone. High alarm sounds. Low tone . Low alarm sounds. Information pYou might be disconnected without hearing an alarm if radio wave conditions deteriorate suddenly. pAn alarm for Quality alarm sounds only from the earpiece during a videophone call.
+m-6-8
<Mail/Message Ring Time>
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F You can set the duration of the ring tone which sounds for incoming i-mode mail, SMS messages, Chat mail and Messages R/F. 1 mSettingsSoundMail/Msg. ring time
Select a type of mail or messageON or OFF
Enter a ring time (seconds). pEnter in two digits from 01 through 30. 111
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
+m-5-1
<Headset Usage Setting>
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only You can set where you make the ring tone and alarm sound from for when you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option). 1 mSettingsSoundHeadset usage setting
Headset and speaker or Headset only Information pEven when you set Headset only, the ring tone sounds from both the earphone and speaker about 20 seconds after ringing starts. However, the tone does not sound from the speaker but sounds from the earphone only even after 20 seconds have elapsed if the tone sounds for the operations other than incoming calls, incoming mail, and alarm notification. pEven when you set Headset only, the tone sounds from the speaker when you do not connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch or when you start shooting still or moving images. pIn the following cases, the tone sounds from the earphone when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch is connected, and from the speakers when it is not connected, regardless of this setting:
During watching a 1Seg program During playback of a video file During playback of an i-motion movie During playback of a music file by MUSIC Player During playback of a melody During playback of a Music&Video Channel program While an i-ppli program is running pDo not wind the cord of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch around the FOMA phone. pThe FOMA phone may pick up noise if you take the cord of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch close to the FOMA phone during a call. 112
<Manner Mode>
Silencing Tones from FOMA Phone Just by pressing a key, you can set to silence tones such as a ring tone and keypad sound from the FOMA phone. You can use Manner mode set to select Manner Mode functions from three types; Manner mode, Super silent, or Original. While Manner mode or Super silent is activated, or while Mic sensitiv. is set to Up in Original, you can talk softly on the phone but your voice can still be heard clearly at the other end. 1 During standby/During a call
s(for at least one second) Manner mode selected in Manner mode set is set. pWhen the FOMA phone is closed, press and hold > for at least one second to activate Manner Mode. pDuring Manner Mode, is displayed. The settings you selected for Manner mode set are also displayed.
: Indicates that Vibrator will work to notify events.
: Indicate that Ring volume has been set to Silent.
Information pIf you activate Manner Mode during a call or calling, the message to that effect appears. pThe recording start tone sounds even in Manner Mode when you shoot still images or moving images. pIn Manner Mode, if you try to play back a melody, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. Select YES to play back the melody at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. If the setting is Silent or Step, the volume is Level 2. pIn Manner Mode, if you do the following operations, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play back voice or music. Watching a 1Seg program Playing back an i-motion movie Playing back a video file Playing back a music file by MUSIC Player Playing back a Music&Video Channel program Select YES to play it back at the volume set for each player. When you change the volume level, it is played back at the set volume for the next time. Information pWhen a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, the sound comes out of the earphone. The confirmation display asking whether to play back sound or music files during Manner Mode does not appear. Further, the playback tone does not sound from the speakers even if you unplug the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch during playing back sound or music files by each player. To release Manner Mode Press and hold s for at least one second. During a call or calling, two beeps sound and the message that is released appears. pWhen the FOMA phone is closed, press and hold > for at least one second to release Manner Mode.
) ( s for PushTalk call) or >. To activate Manner Mode during ringing Press l(
Manner Mode is activated and Record Message is simultaneously activated so that the caller can leave a voice/video message. Even when Record message setting has not been set to ON, the Record Message function works. Press d or Oo(
m(
pWhen five messages for voice calls and two messages for videophone calls have
) to answer a voice call, or press d, +
) to answer a videophone call. Oo(
), or already been recorded, or when a PushTalk call comes in, Record Message does not work. Manner Mode specified by Manner mode set works. pAfter you finish a call, Manner Mode is still activated.
<Manner Mode Set>
Selecting Manner Mode Type You can select one of three types of operations for Manner Mode. Operations during Manner Mode Manner Mode Original
+m-2-0 Record message Vibrator1 Phone volume Mail volume Alarm volume2 VM tone Keypad sound Microphone sensitivity Low voltage alarm tone
(Low battery alarm) Confirmation tone for selecting ring tone On hold tone Holding tone ToruCa obtained tone and ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone Confirmation tone for recording voice announce Battery level tone Voice recognition start tone Confirmation tone for checking missed calls and new mail Playback tones of attached melody Effect tones of Decome-Anime Warning tones Schedule alarm Super Silent Set value of Record message ON Silent Silent Silent ON OFF OFF Up OFF Silent Silent Silent Silent ON or OFF ON or OFF Silent through Level 6 and step Silent through Level 6 and step Silent through Level 6 and step ON or OFF ON or OFF Normal or Up ON or OFF When LVA tone is set to ON, it works with the same set value as .3 Works with the same set value as
. Works with the same set value as .4 Works with the same set value as .5 Works with the same set value as .
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s ON OFF Works with the same set value as . Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Works with the same set value as .6 Silent Silent Works with the same set value as . Works with the same set value as . 113 Manner Mode Super Silent Original Works with the same set value as . Works with the same set value as .7 Works with the same set value as .8 Level 4 Works with the same set value as .4 You can select from among standard Manner mode to inform you of incoming calls or mail by the vibrator, Super silent to erase sounds including confirmation tones from the earpiece, or Original to customize operations. 1 mSettingsIncoming callManner mode set
Manner mode, Super silent or Original
Do the following operations. ToDo alarm Alarm for Book program Alarm for Timer recording Start tones for shooting still and moving images Confirmation tone for selecting shutter sound Switching to Hands-free by Hands-free w/ V. phone or Hands-free w/ PushTalk Read aloud volume Silent Silent Silent Level 4 OFF OFF Silent s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
OFF Item Record msg. Works with the same set value as Read aloud volume on page 407. Effect tones of Flash movies 1 Incoming calls and alarms for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program and Silent Silent Timer recording are notified by the vibration. The vibration pattern is the same as the setting you set on page 110. However, if the setting you set on page 110 is OFF, Pattern 2 applies. Confirmation tone for checking missed calls and new mail Vibrates for about 1 second when you have missed calls or new mail messages. Vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed calls and new mail messages. 2 When Prefer manner mode on page 409 is set to OFF, the tone sounds at the volume set for Alarm. 3 The tone sounds at Level 1 when is Silent. 4 The tone sounds at Level 2 when is Step. 5 The tone sounds at Level 1 when is not Silent. 6 The tone sounds at Level 6 when is not Silent. 7 When Prefer manner mode on page 305 is set to OFF, the tone sounds at the volume set for Book Program. 8 The tone does not sound when is Step. Vibrator Phone vol. Mail vol. Alarm vol. VM tone Operation/Explanation
ON or OFF pEven if you select ON, the ring time is fixed to about 13 seconds and cannot be changed when Record message setting on page 71 is set to OFF. pSee page 71 for Record Message Setting. You can set the FOMA phone to vibrate for incoming calls and mail.
ON or OFF pSee page 110 for Vibrator. You can adjust the ring volume for incoming voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pSee page 68 for Ring Volume. You can adjust the ring volume for i-mode mail, SMS messages, and Messages R/F.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pSee page 68 for Ring Volume.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pSee page 408 for Alarm. You can set the FOMA phone to sound a confirmation tone when a record message is played back, a voice memo is recorded or played back, and a movie memo is recorded.
ON or OFF 114 Keypad sound
ON or OFF pSee page 111 for Keypad Sound. Mic sensitiv.
Normal or Up Item LVA tone Operation/Explanation
ON or OFF pSee page 44 for LVA Tone (low battery alarm). 2 Press l(
+m-5-6
<Display Setting>
Changing Displays Set Stand-by Display You can set an image for the Stand-by display. You can set also i-motion movies shot by the FOMA phone or downloaded from sites for the Stand-by display. You can set it for the vertical display and horizontal display respectively. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by display or Standby disp. Wide
Select a type of image. pIf you select Calendar/schedule, select a display format, and then select BG image ON or BG image OFF. If you select BG image OFF, the setting is completed. You cannot select Calendar (2 months) or Calendar (3 months) for Standby disp. Wide. pIf you select ippli display, select an i-ppli program. The setting is completed. You cannot select ippli display for Standby disp. Wide. 2 Select a folderSelect an image. pWhen the image is larger than the Stand-by display, the overall image is displayed with the dimensions shrunk and proportional ratio retained. Depending on the image size, the image smaller than the Stand-by display is displayed in equivalent dimensions or enlarged two times at both lengthwise and sidewise. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. When Calendar/schedule is set You can display schedule events of the day (up to 10) or calendar in the set format on the Stand-by display. You can check the schedule event or calendar and can set schedule events (see page 411) with ease. You can operate the schedule or calendar by pressing Oo from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. Highlight an item to be operated and press Oo(
). pWhen you select the schedule, you can confirm the previous or next schedule events by pressing Bo. You can display the detailed schedule display by pressing Oo(
). pWhen you select the calendar, you can display the previous or next calendar by pressing Bo. If Calendar (1 month), Calendar (2 months), or Calendar (3 months) is set, you can display the previous or next calendar also by pressing No. You can set a schedule event by pressing Oo(
Calendar+schedule For
). When an original animation or animation GIF is set It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by display, or open the FOMA phone. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display. When a Flash movie is set It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by display, or open the FOMA phone. The image stopped such as by your first operation is displayed as the Stand-by display. When an i-motion movie is set It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by display, or open the FOMA phone. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display. pPress Bo or </> during playback to adjust the volume. Press Oo, l, i, m, c, No, r, d, p or h to end the playback. pIf you play back an i-motion movie during Manner Mode, the sound is not played back. 115
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Not to display icons on the Stand-by display Press h from the Stand-by display. Calendar, schedule events, status icons, notification icons, and desktop icons are cleared. Press h again to show the icons and others. When a Flash movie is set as the Stand-by display, however, the following operations are performed:
When you press h during playback of a Flash movie, the playback pauses. Press h again to clear the icons and others. Information pThe schedule list shows the todays schedule events whose start time has not come, and the todays schedule events set as Whole day. Holiday and Anniversary are not displayed. pSome i-motion movies might not be correctly displayed. pYou cannot set a still image which is in excess of 300 Kbytes for the Stand-by display. pYou cannot set some images or i-motion movies for the Stand-by display. pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back. Set the Wake-up Display You can set an image or message to be displayed for when the power is turned on. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Wake-up displaySelect a type of image. pIf you select Message, enter a message. You can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100 half-pitch characters. pIf you select My picture or imotion, go to step 2 of Set Stand-by Display on page 115. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Information pYou cannot set some images or i-motion movies for the Wake-up display. pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back. 116 Set Displays for Dialing/Calling and Others You can set an image for the Dialing/Call Receiving display, Mail Sending/Mail Receiving display, and Checking display. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Select a type of display. pWhen Incoming call or Videophone incoming is selected, select Select calling disp.. pWhen Mail receiving is selected, select Select receiving disp. and go to step 2 of Set Stand-by Display on page 115. pIf you select Dialing, Videophone dialing, Mail sending, Check new message, or Mail/msg. rcpt result, go to step 2 of Set Stand-by Display on page 115. pSelect Incoming call, Videophone incoming or Mail receiving and press l(
) to check the contents actually displayed or played back. 2 Select a type of image. Go to step 2 of Set Stand-by Display on page 115. Information pWhen you select Incoming call, Videophone incoming, or Mail receiving, select Select ring tone to set the ring tone. Go to step 2 on page 108. pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Disp. PH-book image Display setting. However, when Incoming call or Videophone incoming of Read aloud settings is set to ON, the default image is displayed. The same order applies if a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1. However, when you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion) by Ringtone set. for No. B, it is played back as Chaku-motion, taking priority over this function. pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back for incoming calls, taking priority over this function. However, if you set a voice-only i-motion movie, the image set by this function is displayed. pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for Select calling disp., the i-motion movie is played back taking priority over Select ring tone of Incoming call for incoming calls. However, if you set an i-motion movie containing only video for Select calling disp., the ring tone selected for Select ring tone of Incoming call is played back. Information pThe images or ring tone set at purchase might be displayed or played back for incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and Select ring tone. pYou cannot set some images for Display setting. pThe sound of Flash movies is not played back.
<Private Window>
Setting Displays for Private Window 1 mSettingsDisplayPrivate windowON or OFF
Do the following operations.
+m-9-3 Set Battery Icon and Antenna Icon You can set the icons for battery level and radio wave reception level that appear on the display. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Battery icon or Antenna iconSelect a pattern. pYou cannot change icons such as or
. Show Icons in Color/Monochrome 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay settingIcon color
Color or Monochrome pYou cannot change the battery icon and antenna icon.
<Display Phonebook Image>
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook during Ringing If the caller ID notified by the caller matches the phone number stored in the Phonebook, the still image stored in the Phonebook is displayed. 1 mSettingsIncoming callDisp. PH-book image
ON or OFF Information pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: Picture for Phonebook entry Picture for group Image for Phonebook entry Display setting. However, when Incoming call or Videophone incoming of Read aloud settings is set to ON, the default image is displayed. Item Clock Orientation Brightness Called Mail i-Channel ticker Disp. connection Operation/Explanation You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Pattern 1, Pattern 2, Pattern 3 or Pattern 4 You can set the direction of the clock to be displayed.
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 You can adjust the brightness to Level 1 (dark) through Level 3
(bright).
Select a brightness level. You can display the phone number (name when stored in the Phonebook) of the caller during ringing.
ON or OFF You can set whether to display a Chaku-moji message.
ON or OFF You can display the received date/time and others of the mail message or Message R/F. (See page 32)
ON or OFF pThe received date/time and others of the mail messages or Messages R/F in the box or folder with security set are not displayed.
ON or OFF pYou can set for each mode of 2in1. When 2in1 is deactivated, it becomes common to the setting in A Mode. You can set whether to display animations/characters during communication.
ON or OFF 117
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
<Received Mail/Call at Open>
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening FOMA Phone When you have a missed call, new mail message, new chat mail message, or new Message R/F, the detailed Missed Call display/Inbox list/Chat Mail display/Message R/F list is displayed at opening the FOMA phone. 1 mSettingsDisplayRecv. mail/call at open
ON or OFF Item Charging Area Brightness Information pWhen a call comes in while you are using Simple Menu, the detailed Received Call display appears. Soft light pWhen newly received messages and missed calls are found, the detailed Missed Call Operation/Explanation
Standard or Constant light Standard. Lights during charging in the same setting Constant light . Always lights during battery charge. as it lights in ordinary time. You can set the range the backlight lights in.
LCD+Keys or LCD You can adjust the brightness of the backlight for the display to Level 1 (dark) through Level 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level. pWhen Auto setting is set, the backlight set by Area is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness that has been detected by the light sensor. You can set whether to light the backlight softly for the display.
ON or OFF pEven if you set to OFF, the backlight might light softly for some functions. display appears. pWhen a new mail message, chat mail, Message R/F are simultaneously received, the messages are displayed in the order of the chat mail message, i-mode message, Message R, and Message F.
<Backlight>
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad 1 mSettingsDisplayBacklight
Do the following operations.
+m-7-0 Operation/Explanation You can set whether to light the backlight in ordinary time.
ON or OFF pIf you set to OFF, appears on the Stand-by display. Also, you can set whether to activate Power Saver Mode for the display.
ON or OFF Enter a light time (seconds). pEnter from 015 through 999 in three digits. Item Lighting 118 To switch the backlight on/off by pressing one key Press and hold 5 for at least one second. Information pWhen Lighting is set to ON, the backlight stays lit while a call is coming in and the area specified by Area lights for about 15 seconds when you turn on the power, touch the keys, or open the FOMA phone. The backlight stays lit while the camera is activated or a moving image/i-motion movie is played back. When OFF is set, it does not light. However, it stays lit during recording of a moving image regardless of the Lighting setting. pSee page 76 for Backlight during a videophone call. pSee page 310 for Backlight during watching a 1Seg program. pIf the power is supplied from external power sources such as an AC adapter (option), the setting for Charging applies, regardless of the on/off setting of the backlight for Lighting. pWhen you display the text of i-mode mail or Messages R/F, the lighting time varies according to the length of the text. pIf Power saver mode is set to ON and the specified time elapses without doing any operations on the Stand-by display or on the voice call talking display, the display switches to Power Saver Mode and goes off. To switch View Blind on/off by pressing one key Press and hold 8 for at least one second. pWhile an i-ppli program is running or PDF file is displayed, you cannot switch View Blind on/off by pressing and holding 8 for at least one second.
<Image Quality>
Setting Quality of Display 1 mSettingsDisplayImage qualitySelect an item. Normal. Normal image quality Vivid. Vivid image quality Dynamic . Dynamic image quality in which motion is emphasized
+m-8-6
<Color Theme Setting>
Setting Color Combination for Display You can set the display color pattern of characters, backgrounds, and so on. 1 mSettingsDisplayColor theme setting
Select a color theme. pWhile a color theme is selected, the selected color theme appears on the display for confirmation. Information pYou cannot change the color for icons and images displayed in multiple colors, the DoCoMo pictographs, and the Internet web pages (sites) supporting i-mode. Information pWhen an image other than still image is set for the Stand-by display, the Stand-by display shifts to Power Saver Mode after the image is played back and a standby time elapses. pThe FOMA phone does not switch to Power Saver Mode during data communication or charging, or while the i-ppli Stand-by display is running. pThe display appears when you operate the FOMA phone, receive a call, or receive i-Channel tickers. However, the receiving display does not appear when you receive a call in Public Mode (Drive Mode).
<LCD AI>
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically You can set whether to automatically adjust the brightness of the display backlight and to compensate the image quality according to that brightness during playback of i-motion movies, PC movies, Music&Video Channel programs, or video files, during a videophone call, or during watching a 1Seg program. 1 mSettingsDisplayLCD AION or OFF pIf you operate the setting from the Function menu during a videophone call or watching a 1Seg program, the setting is effective only for the current videophone call or 1Seg program. Information pIf you set to ON, the brightness is adjusted within the level specified for Brightness of Backlight. The brightness is adjusted also while you are selecting a menu item. pThis function is disabled during Play Background.
<View Blind>
Making Display Hard to See from People Around You can adjust the contrast of the display so that it is hardly viewed from a slanted angle. 1 mSettingsDisplayView blindON or OFF
Select a contrast. pYou can adjust the contrast to Level 1 through Level 3. It is most difficult to view in Level 3. 119
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
<Menu Icon Setting>
Setting Display of Main Menu You can change the icons and the background images of Main Menu. 1 mi(
)Menu icon settingSelect a pattern.
+m-5-7 2 When you select Customize in step 1, select a menu icon or background image to be changed
Select a folderSelect an image. Repeat step 2 and set menu icons and a background image. pWhile selecting a menu icon or background image, press l(
pTo reset the menu icon and background image set to Customize to (Standard) in the Pre-installed folder, press i(
Reset or All reset, then select YES.
) to confirm the currently set image.
) and select Metal Black White pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Information pThe image you can customize is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller and up to 300 Kbytes. Perform Change size or Trim away for other images. pWhen a customized image is deleted, (Standard) in the Pre-installed folder returns. pWhen Personal Data Lock is activated while Customize is set, the default image is displayed. pWhen you set Customize, the main menu icons do not switch even if you switch Select language. Pink Enlarge menu Normal 120
<Kisekae Tool>
Using Kisekae Tool You can use Kisekae Tool to change the ring tone, Stand-by display, menu icons and others at a time. pSee page 184 for details on how to download Kisekae Tool files. Items that can be set with Kisekae Tool Select ring tone Display setting Color theme setting Menu icon setting Clock and Orientation of Private window pItems that can be set differ depending on the Kisekae Tool file. pThe setting change of phone/videophone ring tones, mail ring tone, and Stand-by Illumination Illumination in talk Side key illumination Posit. tone/illum. Tone display is applied only to the A Mode of 2in1. The other changes are applied to the all modes of 2in1. 1 mSettingsKisekae
Highlight a Kisekae Tool file and press l(
YES p is added to the Kisekae Tool file collectively set at the moment. pDepending on the selected Kisekae Tool file, the confirmation display might
) appear asking whether to change the character size. When you select No, you might not be able to set the Kisekae Tool file correctly. Information pFor the functions set by Kisekae Tool, each setting display is shown with Follow Kisekae Tool highlighted. You can separately change each setting, however, if you want to reset to the setting by Kisekae Tool, you need to perform collective settings again. You cannot select Follow Kisekae Tool. Information pIf you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply. In that case, you cannot operate as described in this manual, so you are advised to show Main Menu of Normal by Disp. default MENU, or reset Main Menu by Reset menu screen. pWhen you set P906i of Kisekae Tool for Main Menu, the main menu items and sub-menu items are displayed in Japanese even if Select language is set to English. Function Menu of Main Menu Function menu Operation/Explanation Menu icon setting See page 120. Change launcher You can manually replace the items on Main Menu.
Select a destination to save toYES Disp. default MENU You can temporarily show Main Menu of Normal. pOnce you close Main Menu of Normal, the currently set Main Reset Menu returns. See page 121. Reset Changed Design You can reset the items changed by Kisekae Tool. 1 mi(
)Reset
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. Reset disp. /sound. Resets all of Items that can be set with Kisekae Tool to the default. Reset menu screen . Resets Main Menu to the default. You can reset also by pressing and holding r for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display and selecting YES. Reset menu log . Resets the operation records of Main Menu to the default. 121
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Information pEven if you perform Reset disp. /sound or Reset menu screen, you cannot reset Character size. pEven if you execute Reset menu screen, the Main Menu items you have manually replaced by Change launcher are not reset.
<Horizontal Open Menu>
Setting Display of Horizontal Open Menu s 1 mSettingsDisplayHorizontal open menu
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 Pattern 1 Pattern 2
<FeelMail>
Using FeelMail The FeelMail reproduces the atmosphere of a mail message by actions of 45 types of animated characters.Once you activate FeelMail, a FeelMail image is played back after you receive an i-mode mail/SMS message. pTo end the playback, press h or r. pWhen the FOMA phone is closed, press p or </> to end the playback. 122 1 mSettingsFeelMailDo the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Disp. /play new one A FeelMail image is played back after you receive an i-mode mail/SMS message.
ON or OFF pWhen this function is set to OFF, a FeelMail icon does not appear on the Received Address list/Detailed Received Address display, the Inbox list, and the detailed Received Mail display even while Disp. /play in history is set to ON. A FeelMail icon appears on the Received Address list/Detailed Received Address display, the Inbox list, or the detailed Received Mail display.
ON or OFF Disp. /play in history
<Illumination>
Setting Color of Call/Charging Indicator and Others 1 mSettingsIlluminationDo the following operations. Item All illum. setting Operation/Explanation You can set all illumination items at one time.
Select a pattern. Illumination See page 123. Illumination in talk You can set the flickering color of the Call/Charging indicator for during a call.
Select a color. pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers for confirmation while you are selecting. pIt flickers in the same color as it flickers during a call, while Record Message is working, during answer-hold (On Hold), or while a call is on hold (Holding). Miss/unread illum. The Call/Charging indicator flickers for missed calls, new mail messages, new chat mail messages, or new Messages R/F at about 5-second interval for about 3 hours.
ON or OFF Item Music&Video ch illum. Operation/Explanation The Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining Music&Video Channel programs is completed at about 5-second interval for about 30 minutes.
ON or OFF Item Side key illumination Illum. when folded The Call/Charging indicator lights when the FOMA phone is Operation/Explanation You can set the lighting color of the Call/Charging indicator for when you press < with the FOMA phone closed.
Select a color. pThe Call/Charging indicator lights for confirmation while you are selecting. pThe lighting duration differs depending on the illumination. closed.
ON or OFF Hourly illumination You can be notified of the specified time (every hour at 0 minutes) by the tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator.
Select a pattern. OFF . The Call/Charging indicator does not light. Pattern 1 . A fixed tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator lights in the fixed color. Pattern 2 . The tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator change by time. pHourly illumination does not work while a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, or Lock All or Omakase Lock is activated. pTime tone sounds at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. If Step is set, it sounds at Level 2. MUSIC illumination The Call/Charging indicator flickers for about 15 seconds when Bluetooth illumination you start playback by MUSIC Player.
ON or OFF The Call/Charging indicator flickers during connecting to Bluetooth devices.
ON or OFF pIt flickers at about 5-second interval for about 5 minutes when the connection is completed. IC card illumination The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you place the PushTalk illumination FOMA phone over an IC card scanning device or during iC communication.
ON or OFF pIt does not light/flicker during IC Card Lock. The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you try to get the PushTalk talkers right, or when a members state changes to Connected.
ON or OFF
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Check settings You can check the setting contents for Illumination, Illumination in talk, Hourly illumination and Side key illumination. Illumination You can set the flickering color of the Call/Charging indicator according to the incoming type.
+m-8-9 1 mSettingsIlluminationIllumination
Do the following operations. Item Set color Set pattern Operation/Explanation
Select an incoming typeSelect a color. pTo make the indicator light in colors Color 1 to Color 12 in order, select Gradation. pThe Call/Charging indicator lights for confirmation while you are selecting. You can set the flickering pattern of the Illumination.
Select a pattern. Standard . Flickers in the same pattern repeatedly. Melody linkage. Flickers with the ring tone. Color setting
(Edit color name)
Edit color nameSelect a colorEnter a name. pYou can edit Color 1 through Color 12 only. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Color setting
(Adjust color tone)
Adjust color toneSelect a colorAdjust the color tone. pYou can adjust the color tone of Color 1 through Color 12 only. pUse Bo to select a color and use No to change the color tone. 123 s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Information
<Set color>
pThe priority order of illumination is; Setting for Phonebook entry Group setting Set color.
<Set pattern>
pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers in peculiar pattern for each illuminations when Set color is set to other than Color 1 through Color 12 and Gradation. pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers by Standard when an i-motion movie or melody with no flickering pattern is set for the ring tone.
+m-6-5
<Info Notice Setting>
Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by Tone and Call/Charging Indicator When the FOMA phone is closed, you can press > to check for missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, new Messages R/F, record messages, and voice mail messages. To use this function, you need to set Side keys guard to OFF in advance. 1 mSettingsIncoming callInfo notice setting
Select an item. ON . Notifies you whether there are missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or new Messages R/F by the electronic sound and flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator. OFF . Turns off the information notice. When Select language is set to (Japanese), you can select
(electronic sound) or (voice). With (voice), Japanese electronic voice and flickering of the Call/Charging indicator notify you of new chat mail, new mail, missed calls, record messages and voice mail messages in this order. 124 If you press .> while the FOMA phone is closed When you have a missed call, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F
(When the Missed call icon, New mail icon, Chat mail, or Message R/F icon is displayed on the Stand-by display.) If Info notice setting is set to ON, a double-beep tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator lights for about five seconds. If Info notice setting is set to (voice) in Japanese display, a beep tone sounds and a voice message announces that you have new mail, a missed call, and so on, and the Call/Charging indicator lights for about five seconds. pWhen Info notice setting is set to (voice) in Japanese display, and a new Message R/F comes in, a voice message announces that you have new mail. pIf you press > again while the voice is being played back, you can stop it. When you have no missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F If Info notice setting is set to ON, or (voice) in Japanese display, a triple-beep tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator flickers for about five seconds. Even when Info notice setting is set to (voice) in Japanese display, the notice is not made by voice. Information pYou cannot check for the mail messages held at the i-mode Center by this function. pThe confirmation function might not work depending on the function being activated. pThe sound volume for electronic sound cannot be changed. p (voice) sounds at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. If Step is set, the sound volume is Level 2. pThe missed call, new mail, and new chat mail are informed by both the Call/Charging indicator and the vibrator unless Phone of Vibrator has been set to OFF. pThe vibrator notifies the information as follows:
Vibrates for about 1 second when you have a missed call, new mail, or new chat mail message. Vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed calls, new mail, or new chat mail message. pIf you open the FOMA phone during notification, it stops.
<Desktop Icon>
Using Icons on Desktop Status icon Operation when a status icon is selected Notification icon Desktop icon Vibrator Shows the display for Vibrator. (See page 110) Ring Volume Shows the display for Ring Volume. (See page 68) Manner mode Shows the display Manner Mode Set. (See page 114) Public Mode (Drive Mode) Shows the display for releasing Public Mode (Drive Mode). (See page 69) Notice call cost Shows the display for Notice Call Cost. (See page 420) Alarm Shows the list of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book Program, or Timer Recording.
(See page 304, page 305, page 408, page 411 or page 415) A Music&Video Channel program is booked Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 384) Backlight Shows the display for Backlight. (See page 118) Side keys guard Shows the display for Side Key Guard. (See page 141) USB mode setting Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 363) Voice mail service Voice mail service of B mode Shows the Voice Mail display Service. (See page 363) Shows the Voice Mail display Service. (See page 447) Record message for voice calls Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 71, page 73, page 110 and page 418) Record message for videophone calls Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 71, page 73, page 110 and page 418) Operation when a notification icon is selected Missed call Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 55) Missed call to Number B of 2in1 Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 55) Record message Shows the Record Message list. (See page 73) Videophone record message Shows the Videophone Record Message list. (See page 73) New i-mode mail or SMS Shows the Inbox list. (See page 218) New chat mail Starts Chat Mail. (See page 242) New Message R/F Shows the Message R/F list. (See page 236) When i-ppli did not start automatically Shows the i-ppli Auto Start Info. (See page 262) When a ToruCa file is obtained from a scanning device Shows the ToruCa File list. (See page 269) When a security error occurred on the i-ppli Stand-by display Shows the Security Error History. (See page 253) Success in downloading a Music&Video Channel program Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 384) Failure in downloading a Music&Video Channel program Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 385)
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s 125 s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Missed alarm Shows the contents of the alarm that could not be notified.
(See page 410) Missed program Shows the contents of the booked program that could not be notified. (See page 309) When timer recording was completed Shows the contents and results of the timer recording. (See page 309) When Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center Shows the Voice Mail display. (See page 446) When the Phonebook could not be updated by Data Security Service Shows the update display for Data Security Service. (See page 106) When Provide Location was executed automatically Shows Location History. (See page 286) When Provide Location could not be executed automatically Shows Location History. (See page 286) When you did not respond to a location provision request Shows Location History. (See page 286) When Software Update is needed Starts Software Update. (See page 531) When Software Update was executed Shows the Update Completion display or the reason for not completing. (See page 530) When Software rewriting is possible Shows the rewriting confirmation display. (See page 529) When pattern data was updated automatically Shows the updated result. (See page 535) When the FOMA phone and a personal computer are connected by the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 363) Operation when a desktop icon is selected Phone number Shows the dialing display with the phone number entered. (See page 50 and page 82) URL of site Shows the site of that URL. (See page 172) 126 URL for Full Browser Shows the site of that URL by Full Browser. (See page 314) Senders/Destination address of i-mode mail Shows the Message Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 198) Senders/Destination address of SMS Shows the SMS Composition display with the mail address entered. (See page 244) i-ppli Starts the i-ppli program. (See page 251) Picture Shows it on the Picture viewer. (See page 330) i-motion movie Plays it back by the i-motion player. (See page 338) Video file Plays it back by the Video player. (See page 345) Chara-den image Plays it back by the Chara-den player. (See page 349) Melody Plays it back by the Melody player. (See page 351) PDF file Shows it on the PDF viewer. (See page 374) ToruCa file Shows it on the ToruCa viewer. (See page 269) Private menu Shows the Private menu. (See page 416) Alarm Shows the list of Alarm. (See page 408) Schedule Shows the Calendar display. (See page 412) ToDo Shows the ToDo list. (See page 415) Text memo Shows the list of Text Memo. (See page 421) Calculator Shows the calculator. (See page 421)
(Guide) Shows the display for (Guide). (See page 39) Bar Code Reader Shows the Bar Code Reader menu. (See page 165) Receive Ir data Shows the Ir Data Receiving display.(See page 370 and page 371) Camera Shows the Camera menu. (See page 155 and page 158) Text Reader Shows the Text Reader menu. (See page 168) Bluetooth function Shows the Bluetooth Function Selection display.
(See page 427, page 429, and page 432 MUSIC Player Starts MUSIC Player. (See page 392) Music&Video Channel Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 384) When the original data is deleted or overwritten, the desktop icon is disabled. Paste Icons to Desktop You can paste up to 15 desktop icons of such as phone numbers, mail addresses, etc. 1 The display for an item to be pasted i(
Add desktop iconYES pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
) found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail address or phone number to be pasted. Information pYou may not be able to paste the URL to the desktop depending on the site. pYou can store the title for URL of up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. When the number of characters for the title exceeds that much, the characters in excess are deleted. If no title exists for a site, up to 22 half-pitch characters of the URL excluding http:// or https:// is displayed. pSome files and data might not be pasted to the desktop. Proceed to Respective Functions from Icons on Desktop 1 PressOo. pYou cannot select the icon even when you press Oo when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s 2 Use Mo to highlight an icon, and press Oo(
pUp to five Desktop icons are displayed. If there are six or more icons, and are displayed. pA Notification icon is
). deleted when each function is executed. To delete all Notification icons, press and hold r for at least one second from the display in step 1. When a record message icon is selected Information pWhen the notification icon of Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center (
) appears while you are overseas, you cannot operate the Voice Mail function from the notification icon. Follow the steps of Operate Voice Mail Service from the Country You Stay on page 480. Check Details of Desktop Icon 1 mSettingsDisplayDesktop icon The list of desktop icons pasted to the desktop is displayed.
+m-6-3 2 Select the icon whose details are to be displayed. Desktop Icon list 127 Change Character Font and Color of Phone Numbers You can set the font and color of phone numbers or the name stored in Phonebook displayed on the following display:
Font of dial number Dialing/Call Receiving/Talking display Detailed Sent Chaku-moji Message Font color Dialing/Call Receiving/Talking display Detailed Sent Chaku-moji Message pWhen you use 2in1, the setting here applies to Number A. To specify for Number B, Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Redial Sent/Received Address list Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Redial operate Set call/receive No. (Disp. call/receive No.) of 2in1 setting. 1 mSettingsIncoming callDisp. call/receive No.
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Font of dial number Select a pattern. Font color Information
Select a color. pYou can switch between 16 color and 256 color by pressing c(
pYou can reset the set color by pressing i(
). pIf you set the background color by Color Theme Setting or Kisekae Tool to the color same as the font color set by this function, the font color is changed automatically. pYou cannot change the color of pictographs. s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Function Menu of the Desktop Icon List pYou can bring up the Function menu also by pressing i(
desktop icon from the Stand-by display.
), while highlighting a Function menu Add to desktop Edit title Operation/Explanation
Put a check mark for the function to be added
l(
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
) Sort Reset desktop However, the number of characters for the title displayed when you highlight the icon is up to 11 full-pitch/ 22 half-pitch characters from the beginning of the title.
Select a desktop iconUse Bo to change the order
Oo(
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l(
The desktop icons are reset to the default.
YES
) Delete this Delete all
YES
YES
<Font>
Changing Character Font 1 mSettingsDisplayFontFont 1 or Font 2
+m-6-6 Information pSome characters are displayed in Font 1 regardless of the setting of this function. pYou cannot change the font of a phone number entry or clock display. 128
<Character Size>
Changing Character Size 1 mSettingsDisplayCharacter size
Do the following operations. Item Set at one time Mail Operation/Explanation You can set all the items of Character size at a time.
Large, Standard, or Small pThe confirmation display might appear asking whether to change the character size of the menu as well. If you select YES, the menu icons are set to Enlarge menu when you have set to Large, and they return to the default when you have set Standard or Small. pWhen Large is set, Mail, i-mode, Character input
(Character size) and Character input (Candid. disp. size) are set to Extra large. pWhen Small is set, Settings, Data box, Phonebook, Dialed/recv. calls and Character input (Character size) are set to Standard. pIf you select YES from the confirmation display asking whether to enlarge the font when switching to Simple Menu, Large is set. You can set the character size for the detailed mail display, detailed Message R/F display and on the displays within Mail settings.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small pWhile a sent or received mail message is displayed, press 3, or press i(
Character size.
) to select Display and then select pYou cannot change the character size of the text of the Decome-Anime or Deco-mail pictograms. pWhile the detailed mail display is displayed, you can change character size also by pressing and holding No for at least one second. Item i-mode i-Channel ticker Setting menu Data box Phonebook Dialed/recv. calls Operation/Explanation You can set the character size of text on sites and on the displays within i-mode settings memos.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small You can set the character size for the tickers of i-Channel.
Large, Standard, or Small pYou can check the ticker by pressing l(
You can set the character size on the displays within Settings on Main Menu.
Large or Standard
). You can set the character size on the displays within Data box on Main Menu.
Large or Standard You can set the character size for the Phonebook display and on the displays within Phonebook settings.
Large or Standard pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Character sizePhonebook. You can set the character size for the Redial/Dialed Call/
Received Call/Sent Address/Received Address list.
Large or Standard pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Character sizeDialed/recv. calls. Character input
(Character size) You can set the character size for the character entry display, Message Composition display, or SMS Composition display.
Character sizeExtra large, Large or Standard Character input
(Candid. disp. size) You can set the character size of the conversion candidate list that is shown below the Character Entry (Edit) display.
Chandid. disp. sizeExtra large, Large, Standard, or Small 129
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s When the character size is set, the display appears as shown below:
<For Detailed Received Mail display>
Item Operation/Explanation Color
Black or White Information
<Position>
pEven if you set any of Pattern 3 through Pattern 13, the clock is displayed in Pattern 2 in the following cases:
When you set Calendar for the Stand-by display When World Time Watch or the sub clock is displayed under the clock on the Stand-
by display When a carrier name is displayed on the Stand-by display by Operator name display When time zone of Set time is not set to GMT +9. During Lock All During Omakase Lock Even if you set to Pattern 1, the clock is displayed in Pattern 2. pIf you set Pattern 1, the settings of Clock display and Day of week are invalid. s g n i t t e S i
t h g L n e e r c S d n u o S
Extra large Large Standard Small Information pDepending on the function, characters might not be displayed in set size. pWhen Extra large or Large is set, some item names displayed for each operating procedure differ from the ones displayed for when Standard or Small is set.
+m-5-6 Setting Clock Display You can set whether to display the clock on the Stand-by display and can set its display pattern. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay settingClock
Do the following operations. Item Clock display Day of week Position 130 Operation/Explanation
Big, Small, or OFF pYou cannot change the clock size on the Private window, World Time Watch, and the sub clock. When Select language is set to (Japanese), you can select (Japanese) or (English). pThe setting here applies also to the clock display on the Private window. pIf you set to (English), also region names of World Time Watch are displayed in English.
Select a pattern. pYou cannot change the clock position of the horizontal Stand-by display. Passwords Passwords. 132 Changing Terminal Security Code . <Change Security Code> 133 Setting PIN Code. <UIM Setting> 133 Releasing PIN Lock . 134 Restricting Operations or Functions Locking your Phone to Prevent Use by Others . <Lock All> 134 Using Omakase Lock . <Omakase Lock> 135 Using Self Mode . <Self Mode> 135 Locking Functions Regarding Personal Information
. <Personal Data Lock> 136 Setting a Variety of Locks . <Lock Setting> 137 Using Face Reader . <Face Reader Setting> 138 Locking Keypad Dial . <Keypad Dial Lock> 140 Preventing Side Key Operation . <Side Keys Guard> 141 Security Settings Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls or Messages Setting not to Display Redial/Received Calls
. <Record Display Set> 141 Protecting Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events from Prying Eyes. <Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only> 141 Applying Secret for Mail in Mail Box
. <Secret Mail Display> 142 Setting not to Display Mail in Mail Box without Permission
. <Mail Security> 142 Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries . <Restrictions> 142 Setting Response to Incoming Calls without Caller ID
. <Call Setting without ID> 144 Delaying Start of Ringing Operation . <Ring Time> 144 Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone Numbers which are not Stored in Phonebooks . <Reject Unknown> 145 What is Data Security Service? . 145 Other Security Settings Other Security Settings . 146 131 s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S Passwords For some functions of the FOMA phone, you need to enter your password. In addition to the Terminal Security Code for operating respective mobile phone functions, the Network Security Code to use network services, and i-mode password are available. These passwords help you utilize your FOMA phone. Cautions on passwords pYou should avoid using the numbers for passwords such as denoting your birth date, part of your phone number, local address number, room number, 1111 or 1234 that is easily decoded by a third party. Also make sure that you take a note of the passwords you have selected just in case you forget them. pTake care not to let others know your passwords. Even if your passwords are known and used by a third party, we at DoCoMo take no responsibility in any event for the resultant loss. pNote that we at DoCoMo will never make any inquiries about your passwords. pIf you do not remember your respective passwords, you need to bring an identification card such as your drivers license, the FOMA phone and UIM to the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop. For details contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual. Terminal Security Code The Terminal Security Code is set to 0000 at purchase but you can change it by yourself. (See page 133) When the display for entering the Terminal Security Code appears, enter your four- to eight-digit code and press Oo(
). pWhen you enter your Terminal Security Code, the entered numbers are indicated by _ and not displayed. pIf you have entered wrong numbers or nothing for about 15 seconds, a warning tone sounds and a warning message is displayed; then the display prior to entering the Terminal Security Code returns. Check the correct code and retry entering numbers. Network Security Code The Network Security Code is a four-digit number for procedures on DoCoMo e-site or for using network services. This is determined at the time of contract but can be changed by yourself. If you have DoCoMo ID/Password for My DoCoMo, the overall support site for personal computers, you can use a personal computer to take proceedings of changing your Network Security Code to new one. Also, you can change it by yourself from (procedures) on DoCoMo e-site by using the i-mode phone. For My DoCoMo and DoCoMo e-site (e), see the back of the back page of this manual. i-mode Password You need to enter the four-digit i-mode password for registering or deleting My Menu, applying for or canceling Message Services, i-mode pay service, and so on. (Some information providers may provide you with their specific password.) The i-mode password is 0000 at the time of your contract, but you can change it by yourself. (See page 177) From i-mode, you can change the i-mode password by following operation:
iMenu English iMenu Options Change i-mode Password PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code For the UIM, you can set the two security codes, namely the PIN1 code and PIN2 code. These security codes are 0000 at the time of your contract, but you can change them by yourself. (See page 134) The PIN1 code is the four- to eight-digit number for checking the user each time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA phone or each time the FOMA phone is turned on, so that you can prevent the third party from using your UIM. By entering your PIN1 code, you can make or answer calls, or use functions in the FOMA phone. The PIN2 code is the four- to eight-digit number for executing Reset Total Cost, using the user certificate or applying for the issue of it, etc. pIf you purchase a new FOMA phone and use the existing UIM with the new FOMA phone, use the PIN1 code and PIN2 code you have set previously. 132
). When the PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code Entry display appears, enter your four- to eight-digit PIN1 code/PIN2 code and press Oo(
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as _. pIf you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in succession, it is locked and the FOMA phone cannot be used. (The remaining number of times you can enter appears on the display.) When you enter the correct PIN1 code/PIN2 code, the remaining number of times you can enter will return to three times. pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even from the PIN1/PIN2 Code Entry display. For PIN1 code PUK (PIN Unblock Code) The PUK (PIN unblock code) is the eight-digit number for releasing the PIN1 code and PIN2 code lock state. You cannot change this code by yourself. pIf you enter a wrong PUK (PIN unblock code) 10 times in succession, the UIM is locked. Security when the power turns on Operation of user certificate Connecting to FirstPass sites Enter PIN1 code Enter PIN2 code Wrong entry 3 times in succession Enter PUK (PIN unblock code) Entry OK Set new PIN code Wrong entry 10 times in succession Consult the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop
+m-2-9
<Change Security Code>
Changing Terminal Security Code Change the default for the Terminal Security Code required for operating functions to your own four- to eight-digit code so that you can make full use of the FOMA phone. Make sure you take a note of the security code you have changed just in case you forget it.
Enter the current Terminal Security Code. pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter 0000. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityChange security code 2 Enter a new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)YES
<UIM Setting>
Setting PIN Code PIN1 Code Entry Set You can set the FOMA phone not to work unless you enter your PIN1 code when turning on the power. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
PIN1 code entry setON or OFF
Enter the PIN1 code. pSee page 132 for the PIN1 code. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s 133 Change PIN1 Code/Change PIN2 Code You need to have set PIN1 code entry set to ON to change the PIN1 code. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change PIN1 code or Change PIN2 code
Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code. pSee page 132 for the PIN1 code/PIN2 code. s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as _. 2 Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits). 3 Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again. Releasing PIN Lock If you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in succession on the display requiring its entry, it is locked and the FOMA phone cannot be used. In this case, release the PIN1 code/PIN2 code lock and set a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code. 1 Enter the PUK (PIN unblock code)
(eight digits). pThe entered unblock code is displayed as _. pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even from the PUK Entry display. 2 Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits). pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as _. 134 3 Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
<Lock All>
Locking your Phone to Prevent Use by Others If you set Lock All, you can do no operations other than answering calls and turning on/off the power. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock all
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pTo release Lock All, enter your Terminal Security Code from the Stand-by and Lock all appear and Lock All is set. display. Even if you turn off the power, Lock All will not be released. Information pYou cannot make calls during Lock All. However, you can make emergency calls at 110/119/118. Select YES from the confirmation display for dialing. pYou can receive calls, but the callers data such as their names and images stored in the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone numbers. Further, the ring tone sounds in Pattern 1. pGPS Location Provision is available even during Lock All. pIf you fail to release Lock All five times in succession, the power to the FOMA phone turns off. However, you can turn it on again. pYou can receive mail messages or Messages R/F during Lock All; however, the Receiving or Reception Result display for incoming mail messages and Messages R/
F does not appear. The icons such as released. appear after Lock All is
, or
, pThe notification icon, desktop icon, and schedule on the desktop disappears during Lock All. When Lock All is released, the icon reappears. pThe tickers of i-Channel are not displayed during Lock All. pThe default Wake-up display appears during Lock All even when an i-motion movie has been set for the Wake-up display. pEven if you set Lock All, IC Card Lock is not activated.
<Omakase Lock>
Using Omakase Lock When you have lost your FOMA phone or in other cases, you can use this service to remotely lock the FOMA phone in which your contracted UIM is inserted by contacting DoCoMo or by operating from My DoCoMo. To release the lock, contact DoCoMo by phone, etc. Omakase Lock is a pay service. However, you are not charged if you apply for this service at the same time as applying for the suspension of the use or during the suspension. Even during Omakase Lock, your FOMA phone corresponds to the location provision request of GPS function if Location request menu is set to ON. Setting/Releasing Omakase Lock 0120-524-360Business hours: 24 hours You can set/release also from My DoCoMo site via a personal computer or other devices. pFor details on Omakase Lock, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Omakase lock is displayed on the Stand-by display and Omakase Lock is set. pDuring Omakase Lock, all the key operations are locked and respective functions (including IC card functions) are disabled, except for answering voice calls/videophone calls, putting them on answer-hold (On Hold), turning on/off the power, adjusting the earpiece volume and adjusting the ring volume. pYou can receive voice calls and videophone calls (except PushTalk calls), but the callers data such as names and images stored in the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone numbers. In addition, the ring image, ring tone, and vibrator are reset to the default. When you release Omakase Lock, the former settings return. pMail messages received during Omakase Lock are held at the Mail Center. pYou can turn on/off the power, however, Omakase Lock is not released by turning off the power. pGPS Location Provision is available even during Omakase Lock. pNote that neither the UIM nor the microSD card is locked. Information pEven while another function is working, Omakase Lock applies after finishing that function. Information pOmakase Lock can be set even when another lock function is set. However, if you have set Public Mode (Drive Mode) before setting Omakase Lock, you cannot receive voice calls and videophone calls. pOmakase Lock cannot be set when the FOMA phone is out of the service area, turned off, or during Self Mode. pWhen you have signed up for Dual Network Service and are using the mova phone, Omakase Lock cannot be set. pEven when the contractor and the user of the FOMA phone differ, the FOMA phone will be locked if the contractor offers to DoCoMo.
<Self Mode>
Using Self Mode You can disable all phone calls and communication functions. During Self Mode, the caller hears the guidance to the effect that radio waves do not reach or the power is turned off. If you use DoCoMo Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, you can use these services in the same way as when the FOMA phone is turned off. 1 mSettingsLock/SecuritySelf modeYESOK appears and Self Mode is set. pTo release Self Mode, perform the same operation. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Information pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even during Self Mode. In this case, Self Mode is released. pYou cannot receive mail messages, Area Mail messages, or Messages R/F during Self Mode. pEven if a call comes in during Self Mode, the Missed call icon does not appear after releasing Self Mode. 135
<Personal Data Lock>
Locking Functions Regarding Personal Information To prevent other people from reading or tampering with your personal information, you can set the following functions not to be used:
Record message Play/Erase msg. Select image Remote monitoring PushTalk phonebook Add to phonebook Group setting No. of phonebook Phonebook settings Search phonebook Voice dial Voice announce Kisekae tool FeelMail image playback Desktop Restrictions Reject unknown Camera Bar code reader Text reader i-mode Bookmark i-Channel Mail Photo-sending Mail group Chat group i-ppli IC card content ToruCa GPS function 1Seg Full browser PC movie Still image Moving image Video Chara-den Melody microSD card Infrared data exchange iC communication PDF viewer Document viewer Music&Video Channel MUSIC MUSIC player Alarm Schedule ToDo Alarm setting Own number Voice memo Movie memo Voice recorder Text memo UIM operation Reset settings Initialize Number setting and Set as ring tone for Multi number Data transfer s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S 136 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityPersonal data lock appears and Personal Data Lock is set.
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pTo release Personal Data Lock, perform the same operation. When Timer Lock ON At Close is set, the display for releasing Personal Data Lock appears also by opening the FOMA phone. When you set PIM/IC security mode to Face reader, follow the operation of Use Face Reader to Release Lock on page 140. When you set to Double security, enter your Terminal Security Code after the operation on the page 140. To temporally release Personal Data Lock When you select a function which cannot be used during Personal Data Lock, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears depending on the function. When you enter your Terminal Security Code, use the function. pWhen you show the Stand-by display while no menu function is activated, Personal is cleared and you can temporarily Data Lock is set again. Information pYou can automatically receive Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, chat mail messages, and SMS messages during Personal Data Lock; however, the Receiving or Reception Result display does not appear. Further, the receiving operation such as ringing/vibration does not work, so you are not notified of receiving. The icons such as appear after Personal Data Lock is released.
, or
, pDuring Personal Data Lock, the Notification icon and Desktop icon such as New mail, Missed alarm, Phone number, URL and Mail address do not appear, however, they reappear when you release Personal Data Lock. pDuring Personal Data Lock, you cannot check a missed call or new mail by pressing
.> with the FOMA phone closed. pDuring Personal Data Lock, the Pre-installed substitute image is sent to the other party if you send the substitute image during a videophone call. pIf you set Lock all during Personal Data Lock, is cleared and appears instead.
<Lock Setting>
Setting a Variety of Locks Timer Lock ON At Close You can set Timer Lock ON At Close that automatically activates Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock when the specified time has elapsed after closing your FOMA phone. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
Timer lock ON at close
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Personal data lock or IC card lock
Select an elapse time. If you set to other than OFF, appears and then Timer Lock ON At Close is set. After each lock is activated, the Lock Release display appears when you open the FOMA phone. Information pWhen the Stand-by display is not shown, or when another function is working with the Stand-by display shown, the lock is not activated even after the specified time elapses. However, when another function ends after closing the FOMA phone, the lock is activated after the specified time elapses. pWhen a call or mail message comes in after closing the FOMA phone, or when you open it, the elapsed time counter returns to 0 seconds. pWhen this function is activated, the lock is temporarily released if you release each lock. However, it is re-locked when the specified time elapses after closing the FOMA phone. PIM/IC Security Mode You can set the way to release Personal Data Lock and IC Card Lock. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
PIM/IC security mode
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Select a security mode. Security code . Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock. The setting is completed. Face reader. Use Face Reader authentication to release the lock. Double security . Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock after using Face Reader authentication. The setting is completed. 2 YES Information pYou cannot change PIM/IC Security Mode when the face data files stored by Face Reader Setting are fewer than three, or during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s 137
<Face Reader Setting>
Using Face Reader You can store your face data files in Face Reader and use it for authentication when releasing IC Card Lock or Personal Data Lock. To use Face Reader, you need to store three or more face data files and set PIM/IC security mode to either Face reader or Double security. Notes on using Face Reader pThe dirty camera might result in erroneous operation. Use this function after wiping it with a soft cloth to clean the dirt off. pIn environment where the face is exposed to strong light and the brightness significantly differs depending on the region of the face, the face will not be recognized easily. In this case, storing might become difficult or the recognition rate (the rate of correct identification) might be lowered. Adjust so that the face is exposed to even light. pThe face might not be recognized normally when its entire part is exposed to the light and becomes white. pStoring the face might become difficult or the recognition rate might be lowered when the face conditions are as described below:
When the features of the face (eyes, mouth, nose, and eyebrows, etc.) are hard to see as they are covered by hair, glasses, or a mask When the brightness significantly differs depending on the region of the face such as when you are under the light in a dark place pThe recognition rate might rise by reacting in accordance with the face conditions such as by raising the hair so that the eyes, nose, mouth, and eyebrows are clearly visible
(taking the glasses and mask off) or moving to a place where the face is exposed to even light. The recognition rate rises also by storing the face data file additionally. pThe face authentication technology does not completely guarantee that you are recognized as yourself. Accordingly, we are not at all responsible for damages resulting from the use of this product by a third party or when the damages are caused by what you could not use the function because of wrong authentication by Face Reader. s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S Store To use Face Reader, store 3 or more face data files. You can store up to 10 face data files. 1 mSettings Guide frame Recognition frame
Lock/Security
Lock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security CodeStore
OK Face to the front, and locate the face within the guide frame. You can prevent the failure in authenticating the face data file, which results from the difference in the position of the face at storing and authenticating the data. When your face is recognized, the recognition frame for the eyes and mouth is displayed and the guide frame becomes green. When the recognition frame is not displayed or it comes off your eyes and mouth, place your face off the frame; then change the facing direction of your face to correctly display the recognition frame. pThe number of face data files is displayed by the bar on the Face Data Reading Face Data Reading Stored number bar display
). The face data file is shot. display. 2 Press Oo(
3 Press Oo(
). The face data file you have shot is stored. Repeat step 1 through step 3 to store three or more face data files. pWhen the third face data file is stored, the message appears telling that Face Reader can be more easily used by adding face data file. pWhen you press r, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the face data file. 138 pIf you try to store the face data file in the same environment, you might not be able to store it. Change the direction of the face or the place for shooting. Information pAt shooting, the Call/Charging indicator flickers in red and the shutter tone sounds regardless of the Manner Mode setting. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be changed. Furthermore, the shutter tone does not sound during playback of a music file by MUSIC Player, or playback of a program by Music&Video Channel, or in pause state. Function Menu of the Face Data Reading Display Function menu Brightness At Face reader start-up 0 Help Operation/Explanation You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level. pYou can adjust brightness also by pressing 3 from the Face Data Reading display. You can check the cautions for shooting. pYou can bring up Help also by pressing 0 from the Face Data Reading display. Delete Stored Images You can reset all the face data files stored in Face Reader. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Delete stored imagesYES Information pYou cannot reset the face data files during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock. pWhen you reset the face data files, PIM/IC security mode is set to Security code. Recognition-failed Image The images not judged as yourself by Face Reader recognition operation are saved. You can use these images to specify who tried to illegally access your data. The image is overwritten every time recognition-failed image is made. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Recog. failed imageSelect an image. pTo delete the recognition-failed images, press i(
and then select YES.
), select Delete this, Face Reader Security You can set Face Reader to additionally recognize blinking of the eyes. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Face reader securityNormal or High Normal. Does not recognize blinking of the eyes. High . Recognizes blinking of the eyes. Change Security Code You can set a password to be entered instead of the Face Reader authentication for when PIM/IC security mode is set to Face reader or Double security. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change security code
Enter the current Face Reader Security Code. pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter 0000. 139 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S 2 Enter a new Face Reader Security Code (four to eight digits)YES Use Face Reader to Release Lock When PIM/IC security mode is set to Face reader, use Face Reader to release the lock instead of using your Terminal Security Code. When it is set to Double security, use Face Reader for authentication and then enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock. 1 Display for releasing Personal Data Lock/IC Card LockMatch the face to the guide frame and press Oo(
). Guide frame Face to the front, and locate the face within the guide frame. The recognition frame for the eyes and mouth is displayed, and the guide frame becomes green. When the recognition frame is not displayed or it comes off, place your face off the frame; then change the facing direction of your face to correctly display the recognition frame. pPerform the operation for authentication with the same facial expression as when you stored the face data file. pPress l(
operate to authenticate instead of using Face Reader. For the Face Reader Security Code, see page 139.
) and enter your Face Reader Security Code; then you can Face Data Reading Recognition frame display If you failed to be authenticated When additional storing of the face data file is possible, select OK to bring up the confirmation display asking whether to store additional face data file. Select YES, enter your Terminal Security Code; then you can store additional face data file. When you cannot store any more face data files, select OK to show the Face Data Reading display. If the shot face is judged as another person, a shutter tone sounds and the recognition-failed image is saved. Select OK to show the Face Data Reading display. Try authentication using Face Reader again. pWhen 10 face data files are stored and a new data file is added, the oldest data file is overwritten. 140 When Face reader security is set to High After you are successfully authenticated by Face Reader, your eye blinking is checked. Repeat blinking your eyes slowly. When the detection of eye blinking fails, the authentication also fails. pEven in the same environment as that for the authentication by Face Reader, the detection of eye blinking may fail. Change the place or the direction of your face, and then operate.
<Keypad Dial Lock>
Locking Keypad Dial You can lock dialing from the numeric keys. When using the FOMA phone for business purposes, private use of the FOMA phone can be prevented. Unavailable operations Dialing from the numeric keys Initial setting Phonebook (storing, editing, deleting, copying from the microSD card, sending/receiving using Infrared rays, sending/receiving using iC communication, and sending/receiving using Bluetooth communication) Phone To/AV Phone To function Mail To function Available operations Dialing from the Phonebook or Voice Dial Dialing from Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, Sent Address, or Received Address
(Only phone numbers stored in the Phonebook) 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityKeypad dial lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pTo release Keypad Dial Lock, perform the same operation. is displayed and Keypad Dial Lock is set. Information pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 using numeric keys even during Keypad Dial Lock. Information pIf you set Keypad Dial Lock, you can send mail only when the address is called up from the Phonebook and when the address stored in the Phonebook is called up from Sent Address or Received Address.
<Side Keys Guard>
Preventing Side Key Operation You can disable the side keys p, <, and > for when the FOMA phone is closed. You can prevent operation errors in a bag. 1 ma(for at least one second) appears and Side keys guard is set to ON. pTo set to OFF, perform the same operation. Information pEven when Side keys guard is set to ON, you can answer an incoming PushTalk call by pressing .p. You can get the talkers right by pressing .p during the PushTalk communication. pWhen an external device such as the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option) is connected, the function of the side keys is valid regardless of this setting.
<Record Display Set>
Setting not to Display Redial/Received Calls 1 mSettingsIncoming callRecord display set
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. Received calls . Sets whether to display Received Calls and Received Redial/Dialed calls. Sets whether to display Redial, Dialed Calls and Sent Address. Address. 2 ON or OFF of voice calls, either. pWhen you set Received calls to OFF, you cannot play back record messages
<Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only>
Protecting Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events from Prying Eyes In ordinary mode, you cannot access/refer to Phonebook entries or schedule events stored as secret data. In Secret Mode, you can select whether to store the stored/edited Phonebook entries/schedule events as secret data or as ordinary data. The Phonebook entries/schedule events you have stored/edited in Secret Data Only are stored as secret data. You can access/refer to all the data files in Secret Mode but can access/
refer to only the secret data files in Secret Data Only.
+m-4-0
+m-4-1 Activate Secret Mode Activate Secret Data Only 1 mSettingsLock/Security
Secret mode or Secret data only
Enter your Terminal Security Code. When Secret mode is selected, When Secret data only is selected, items is displayed, and then Secret Data Only is activated. pIf you call up a Phonebook entry or schedule event in Secret Mode, appears and Secret Mode is activated. blinks, the number of stored secret data stays lit for ordinary data and pTo deactivate Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, perform the same operation or press h from the Stand-by display. blinks for secret data. To change secret data to an ordinary Phonebook entry or schedule event In Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, select Release secret from the Function menu of the Phonebook entry or schedule event to be released. Information pOnly the Phonebook entries in the FOMA phone can be stored as secret data. 141 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S Information pWhen you make a call to the party stored as secret data, his/her name is not displayed but the phone number is displayed on the Dialing/Talking display. pIf you call up a secret entry to make a call or send mail, the record is not stored in Redial, Dialed calls or Sent address. pIf you simultaneously activate Lock all and Secret mode or Secret data only, deactivating Lock all deactivates Secret mode or Secret data only.
<Secret Mail Display>
Applying Secret for Mail in Mail Box You can set whether to display the mail (secret mail) message from the sender or to the destination address that matches secret data in the Phonebook. 1 lMail settingsSecret mail display
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF Information pEven when Secret mail display is set to OFF, you can check secret mail in Secret Mode or in Secret Data Only. pWhen Secret mail display is set to OFF, and any secret address is included in addresses of simultaneous mail, that mail message is not displayed. pWhen Secret mail display is set to OFF, and any secret member is included in chat members, chat mail messages of all chat members are not displayed. pWhen Secret mail display is set to OFF, Area Mail messages are not displayed in Secret Data Only. 142
<Mail Security>
Setting not to Display Mail in Mail Box without Permission You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox and Draft of the Mail menu. You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to display the mail messages in security-activated boxes. 1 lMail settingsMail security
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for boxes to be setl(
) pWhen security is set, is added to the icon of the set box in the Mail menu. Information pIf you set security for the Outbox and Inbox, mail addresses are not stored in Sent Address and Received Address.
<Restrictions>
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries Restrict Dialing You can disable making voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls to phone numbers other than specified ones. When you use the FOMA phone for business use, this function is useful for preventing the private use. Bring up the specified Phonebook entry and press d or Oo(
press l(
), and to make a PushTalk call, press p.) You can specify up to 20 phone numbers. Call Rejection You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from specified phone numbers. You can set only the calls you do not want to receive to be rejected. The caller hears a busy tone. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers. This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is advisable to activate Caller ID request and Call setting w/o ID simultaneously.
) to make a voice call. (To make a videophone call, Call Acceptance You can receive voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls only from specified phone numbers. You can set only the calls you want to accept to be connected. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers. This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is advisable to activate Caller ID request simultaneously. Restrict Dialing/Call Rejection/Call Acceptance 1 Detailed Phonebook displayi(
)Restrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. Restrict dialing. You can dial the specified phone numbers only. Call rejection . You can reject calls from the specified phone numbers. Call acceptance . You can accept calls from the specified phone numbers only. Call forwarding . See page 451. Voice mail. See page 448. The set item is indicated by . pWhen a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, press Mo on the detailed display to highlight the phone number you will set Restrictions for. pTo set Restrict Dialing for multiple phone numbers, first set Restrict Dialing and press r to return to the detailed Phonebook display; Mo to highlight the phone number to be set for Restrict Dialing and continue the operation. If you press h to return to the Stand-by display, additional settings cannot be done. To do additional settings, release Restrict Dialing for the set phone number and activate Restrict Dialing again, including the released phone number. pTo release Restrictions, perform the same operation. Information pYou cannot set this function for Phonebook entries stored as secret data, and in the UIM Phonebook. pIf you activate Personal data lock while Call rejection or Call acceptance is set, you can accept all incoming calls. Information pYou cannot operate the following while Restrict dialing is set:
Calling up/Referring to phone numbers other than specified Keypad dial (except for the calls to the specified phone numbers) Dialing from Received Calls (except for the calls from the specified phone numbers) Storing/Editing/Deleting Phonebook entries, copying Phonebook entries from the microSD card, and copying Phonebook entries to the UIM pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even if you set Restrict dialing. pWhen a call comes in from the phone number set with Call rejection, or from other than the phone number set with Call acceptance, the call is stored in Received calls as a missed call record and the Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to Activate. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA phone is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of the setting of Call rejection or Call acceptance. Check/Release Restrictions on Phonebook Entries 1 mPhonebookRestrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. pThe set item is indicated by . pTo release all the Phonebook entries set with Restrictions, press i(
select Release, and then select YES.
), 2 Select a Phonebook entry. The phone number set with Restrictions is displayed. pTo release Restrictions per phone number, select the phone number you want to release by following the same steps above, and select YES. 143 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s
<Ring Time>
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation 1 mSettingsIncoming callRing time
Do the following operations.
+m-9-0 Item Ring start time Operation/Explanation You can set the FOMA phone not to start ringing operation immediately for when a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call comes in from the party whose phone number is not stored in the Phonebook. This function is effective as a countermeasure for blocking nuisance calls such as one ring phone scam (one-giri).
ON or OFFEnter a start time (seconds). pEnter from 01 through 99 in two digits. Missed calls display You can set whether to display the call disconnected within the time specified for Ring start time in Received Calls.
Display or Not display Information pWhen a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the FOMA phone starts ringing as soon as the call comes in even if 186/184 is added to the phone number. However, during Personal Data Lock, or for the call from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, ringing starts according to the setting of this function. pIf the ring start time is longer than the ring time for Record Message Setting, the ringing operations do not start, activating Record Message instead. To activate Record Message after starting the ringing operations, set the longer ring time for Record Message Setting than the ring start time. The same applies to the ring time for Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, and Auto Answer Setting. s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S
+m-1-0
<Call Setting without ID>
Setting Response to Incoming Calls without Caller ID You can set whether to receive (accept) or not to receive (reject) a voice call, videophone call, and PushTalk call depending on the reason for no caller ID. There are three reasons; Unavailable, PublicPhone, and User unset. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityCall setting w/o ID
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. Unavailable . Calls from the other party who cannot notify his/her phone number such as calls from overseas or from landline phones via call forwarding services.
(However, the caller ID might be notified depending on the telephone companies the calls go through.) PublicPhone . Calls from public phones, etc. User unset . When the caller has set the caller ID not to be notified. 2 Accept or Reject pIf you select Accept, go to step 2 on page 108 to select a ring tone. If you select Same as ring tone, the ring tone will be the one selected in Phone of Select ring tone. Information pIf you select Reject, the ring tone does not sound even if a call comes in, the call is stored in Received calls as a missed call record and the Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to Activate. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA phone is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting. 144
<Reject Unknown>
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone Numbers which are not Stored in Phonebooks You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from the party whose phone number is not stored in the Phonebook. This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is advisable to activate Caller ID request and Call setting w/o ID simultaneously. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityReject unknown
Enter your Terminal Security CodeAccept or Reject Information pIf a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, the call is not rejected, regardless of this setting. pIf you simultaneously activate Reject unknown and Call acceptance of Restrictions, the latter has priority. pWhen a call comes in from anyone whose phone number is not stored in the Phonebook while you set this function to Reject, the call is stored in Received calls as a missed call record, and the Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to Activate. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA phone is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. pEven when this function is set to Reject, your FOMA phone follows the settings specified by Call setting w/o ID if each setting of Call setting w/o ID is set to Accept. pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail regardless of this setting. pYou cannot set Reject unknown to Reject while Ring start time of Ring time is set to ON. What is Data Security Service?
You can back up the Phonebook by auto-updating. Data Security Service enables you to save the Phonebook entries, images, and mail messages stored in your FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center and to restore the saved data files even when the FOMA phone is lost or exposed to water. Further, you can notify of your mail address change to multiple addresses at a time. You are not charged a packet communication fee for mail sending. If any personal computer (My DoCoMo) is available, you can use this service more conveniently. pFor details on Data Security Service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version. FOMA phone Saves/Downloads the Phonebook entries, images, mail messages Data Storage Center Personal computer etc. Easily restores the data when the FOMA phone is lost or exposed to water, or when the time of phone model change Reflects the contents edited on the personal computer Internet Browse/Edit the saved data pData Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
(You need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for Data Security Service.) 145 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Other Security Settings Other than introduced in this chapter, the following functions/services for the Security Settings are available:
If you want Functions/Service name Reference page To store/check safety information using i-mode when a disaster occurs i-mode Disaster Message Board Service If you want Functions/Service name Reference page To change the mail address To reject mail with URL To protect the IC card function from being used illegally IC Card Lock To prevent crank calls or vicious sales calls from incoming Nuisance Call Blocking Service To prevent the incoming call that does not notify a caller ID Caller ID Request To ensure safe and reliable data communication by using electronic authentication services Limited to FirstPass sites To update software programs in the FOMA phone when necessary FirstPass Software Update To protect the FOMA phone from data liable to cause trouble Scanning Function To receive necessary mail only from among the large volume of incoming mail Receive Option s g n i t t e S y t i r u c e S 275 451 452 190 528 534 214 146 Change Mail Address Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mail with URL) Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject/Receive Mail Settings) To accept or reject mail from the specified domain To accept or reject mail between i-mode mobile phones only To accept or reject mail from the specified address To set the recommended Spam Mail Prevention easily Spam Mail Prevention
(Easy Mail Setting) To reject the 500th and succeeding i-mode mail messages sent from a single i-mode phone on the same day Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders) To reject SMS messages Spam Mail Prevention
(SMS Rejection Settings) To reject advertising mail that is sent unilaterally Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail To restrict the file size of incoming mail Limit Mail Size To confirm the settings for the mail function Confirm Settings To stop the mail function temporarily Suspend Mail To check whereabouts of lost mobile phone Refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version Keitai-Osagashi Service Information pThe priority order of functions simultaneously set to prevent nuisance calls is as follows: Nuisance Call Blocking Service Call rejection Reject unknown/Call setting w/o ID Ring time. Camera Before Using Cameras . 148 Shooting Still Images . <Still Image Shoot> 155 Shooting Moving Images . <Moving Image Shoot> 158 Changing Settings for Shooting Images . 159 Setting Image Size and Image Quality . 160 Using Bar Code Reader. <Bar Code Reader> 165 Using Text Reader . <Text Reader> 168 Copyrights and Portrait Rights You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents of which a third party holds the copyright such as text, image, music, or software programs downloaded from web pages on the Internet, or recorded using this product, without permission from the copyright holder except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the copyright law. Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you refrain from shooting portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this may violate portrait rights. pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA phone to give a remarkable nuisance and misdeed to the public. Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. 147 If the battery pack is removed off while saving a file to the FOMA phone or microSD card, that data becomes contingent. You need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions related to the microSD card. The microSD card is available at mass retailers for home electric appliances, etc. (See page 355) Use Cameras You can use the cameras to shoot still or moving images. You can switch between the front
(inside camera) and the back
(outside camera). The outside camera comes with the automatic focusing function to automatically focus on subjects.
(See page 160) The Image Stabilizer function enables you to shoot images with less blur. (See page 162) You can easily operate the main functions for shooting not only from the Function menu but also by operating the keys. Inside camera Outside camera a r e m a C Before Using Cameras Notes for when Shooting Images Check the lens for any stain before shooting. If the lens is stained, clean the lens with a soft cloth. If the lens is stained with fingerprints or something oily, you will not be able to focus on a subject, or the stains are reflected on still or moving images you shoot. Make sure that you do not let fingers, hairs, or the strap overlap the lens when shooting. Make sure that you hold the FOMA phone securely with your hands so that it does not move when shooting. Otherwise, the image may be blurred, especially in a dark place. Do not leave the FOMA phone with the lens pointing direct to the sunlight. Pixels may be discolored or burns may result. If you shoot under a fluorescent lamp, mercury lamp, or sodium lamp flickering at high speeds, flicker symptom, horizontal stripes flow from top to bottom or left to right of the display, may result. The color tone for the image may vary depending on a shooting timing. If you shoot a subject containing an area of an extremely high brightness such as the reflection of sun light, the bright area might be black-spotted but this is not a malfunction. Images shot by the cameras might differ from actual subjects in color tone and brightness. When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save still or moving shot images. A slight time lag is found between when you press Oo(
you actually shoot. Therefore, if you shoot a fast moving subject, the subject might be shot with its position slightly away from the one you see it when you press Oo(
Do not remove the microSD card while saving files to it. The FOMA phone or microSD card could malfunction. If you turn off the power while saving a file, an incomplete file may be saved.
) and when
). 148 Keys used for shooting Icon menu operation Function menu access Bar code reader Shutter/Save Tele Wide Settings for Focus (when the outside camera is used)1 Autofocus (when the outside camera is used) Change camera-mode2 Displays for Icons3
+l
+i
+m Oo Vo Co Zo Xo
+c
Brightness White balance Photo mode Image quality Image size Image stabilizer Auto timer Settings for Store in4 Switch cameras5 End camera (in ordinary time) Release focus lock (when focus is locked) End camera
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-9
-d
-r
-h 1 Each time of pressing switches in order of Face detection (in Photo Mode) AutoClose-upLandscape. 2 Each time of pressing switches in order of Photo modeMovie mode Continuous mode. 3 Each time of pressing switches between ON and OFF. 4 Each time of pressing switches between Phone and microSD. 5 Each time of pressing switches between inside camera and outside camera. Information pWhile the camera is activated, the Call/Charging indicator flickers. You cannot turn off flickering. pYou cannot change or silence the volume of the shutter sound. You cannot set a downloaded melody for the shutter sound, either. pIf no key operation is done on the Finder display, the camera is automatically deactivated after about three minutes. pWhen you shoot in a dark place, ensure to set Photo mode of Camera settings to Night mode. pYou can operate the following by the Icon menu: Brightness, White balance, Photo mode, Image quality, Image size, Focus. Camera Setting and Finder Display On the Finder display, the settings are indicated by bars and icons.
Icon/bar name Icon Description
Camera mode Photo mode Movie mode
Store in
Continuous mode (Auto, Manual, Auto bracket) Phone: Stores in the FOMA phone. microSD: Stores on the microSD card. C a m e r a Page 155 158 155 162 149
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page Icon/bar name Icon Description Page Number of frames at Manual shooting in Continuous mode ON Normal Portrait Sports Food Scenery Night mode Backlight Character Snow Sunset Pet 162 164 161 161
Image quality Normal: Standard quality Fine: Fairly high quality Super fine: High quality
Number of recordable image Memory capacity bar File size setting Number of remaining recordable still images Up to 999 images are displayed. Memory usage state (estimate) in Movie mode Displayed in red when the memory space reaches maximum. Mail restrictn (S): Up to 500 Kbytes can be saved.
Number of frames for continuous shooting Auto timer
Photo mode a r e m a C Image stabilizer Shooting status Mail restrictn (L): Up to 2 Mbytes can be 160 saved. Long time: Long time recording is possible. Auto During moving image recording 162 158 162 159 161 161 Movie type set Records only the video. Recordable time (estimate) for moving images Shows the vertical direction of the still or moving image. Zooming status Brightness of shot image Auto: For adjusting white balance automatically Fine: For shooting outdoors in fine weather Cloudy: For shooting in cloudy weather or in the shade Light bulb: For shooting under incandescent light Fluorescent light: For shooting under fluorescent light Recordable time
Top icon
Zoom bar
Brightness
White balance 150 Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Image size
(Photo mode/
Continuous mode) Image size
(Movie mode)
Focus 5M (2592 x 1944) 3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456) 3M (2048 x 1536) 2M Wide (1920 x 1080) 2M (1600 x 1200) Stand-by (480 x 854) g VGA (640 x 480) n t o o h p a r e m a c e d s t u O i t o o h p a r e m a c e d s n i I i t o o h s s u o u n i t n o C CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 160 VGA (640 x 480) HVGA Wide (640 x 352) QVGA (320 x 240) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) Face detection Auto Close-up Landscape Specifications for Still Image Shooting File format JPEG Compression format Baseline format Pixels Photo: 5M (2592 x 1944), 3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456), 3M (2048 x 1536), 2M Wide (1920 x 1080), 2M (1600 x 1200), Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480), CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) Continuous shooting: VGA (640 x 480), CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) jpg Automatically set according to the date and time the image was saved and the number of shot frames (when the 1st frame was shot at 10:00 on November 18, 2008) 2008/11/18 10:00 Automatically set according to the date and time the image was saved and the number of shot frames (when the 1st frame was shot at 10:00 on November 18, 2008) 2008111810000000 (Store in: Phone) P1000001 (Store in: microSD) C a m e r a Extension Title File name Maximum file size 1.8 Mbytes Mail attachment/Output Can be attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone by 161 Memory capacity using the microSD card. Approx. 101.6 Mbytes (Phone) 151 Specifications for Moving Image Shooting File format Coding system Pixels Extension Title File name MP4, ASF Video: MPEG4 Voice: AMR, G.726 VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240), QCIF (176 x 144), Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 3gp, mp4, asf Automatically set according to the date and time the image was recorded (when shot at 10:00 on November 18, 2008) 2008/11/18 10:00 Automatically set according to the date and time the image was recorded (when shot at 10:00 on November 18, 2008) 200811181000 (Store in: Phone) MOL001 (Store in: microSD) Maximum file size 2 Mbytes (Store in: Phone) Can be limited to the size which can be attached to i-motion mail when shooting. (See page 160) Mail attachment/Output Can be attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone by Memory capacity using the microSD card. Approx. 101.6 Mbytes (Phone) Estimate of the number of storable still images The number of files that can be saved varies depending on shooting environments. The number of files that can be saved to the FOMA phone and microSD card has limit. The number of files that can be saved to P906i Image quality Image size 5M (2592 x 1944) 3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456) 3M (2048 x 1536) 2M Wide (1920 x 1080) 2M (1600 x 1200) Stand-by (480 x 854) VGA (640 x 480) CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) a r e m a C Super fine
(Approx.) Fine
(Approx.) Normal
(Approx.) 54 81 97 139 139 649 950 1,697 1,980 2,500 2,500 74 97 120 191 191 880 1,131 2,160 2,500 2,500 2,500 97 121 137 237 237 1,080 1,320 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 pThe number of files that can be saved the default estimate value. The number of files that can be saved to the microSD card (64 Mbytes) Image quality Image size 5M (2592 x 1944) 3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456) 3M (2048 x 1536) 2M Wide (1920 x 1080) 2M (1600 x 1200) Stand-by (480 x 854) VGA (640 x 480) CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) Super fine
(Approx.) Fine
(Approx.) Normal
(Approx.) 34 51 62 89 89 411 608 1,087 1,268 2,536 3,805 47 62 77 122 122 563 724 1,383 1,691 3,044 5,073 62 77 87 152 152 691 845 1,902 2,174 3,805 5,073 pThe number of files that can be saved is the estimate value. 152 Estimate of recordable time The recordable time varies depending on shooting environments. Take reference to the recordable time and memory capacity which appear on the Finder display as well. Recordable time to P906i Image size File size setting Movie type set VGA
(640 x 480) HVGA Wide
(640 x 352) QVGA
(320 x 240) QCIF
(176 x 144) Sub-QCIF
(128 x 96) Mail restriction
(S) Mail restriction
(L) Mail restriction
(S) Mail restriction
(L) Mail restriction
(S) Mail restriction
(L) Mail restriction
(S) Mail restriction
(L) Mail restriction
(S) Mail restriction
(L) Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice pThe recordable time is the default estimate value. Recordable time per recording (Approx.) Image quality Total recordable time (Approx.) Image quality Super fine 2 sec 2 sec 8 sec 8 sec 3 sec 3 sec 11 sec 11 sec 4 sec 4 sec 16 sec 16 sec 10 sec 10 sec 39 sec 40 sec 19 sec 20 sec 75 sec 80 sec Fine 4 sec 4 sec 305 sec 16 sec 16 sec 20 min 5 sec 5 sec 305 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 min 5 sec 5 sec 305 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 min 35 sec 39 sec 305 sec 141 sec 159 sec 20 min 62 sec 78 sec 305 sec 254 sec 318 sec 20 min Normal 8 sec 8 sec 30 sec 30 sec 10 sec 10 sec 40 sec 40 sec 15 sec 15 sec 59 sec 60 sec 69 sec 78 sec 279 sec 318 sec 122 sec 156 sec 497 sec 10 min Super fine 349 sec 351 sec 349 sec 351 sec 464 sec 468 sec 464 sec 468 sec 11 min 11 min 11 min 11 min 29 min 30 min 29 min 30 min 57 min 60 min 57 min 60 min Fine 11 min 11 min 957 min 11 min 11 min 957 min 15 min 15 min 957 min 15 min 15 min 957 min 15 min 15 min 957 min 15 min 15 min 957 min 108 min 121 min 957 min 108 min 121 min 957 min 194 min 243 min 957 min 194 min 243 min 957 min C a m e r a Normal 22 min 22 min 22 min 22 min 29 min 30 min 29 min 30 min 44 min 45 min 44 min 45 min 213 min 243 min 213 min 243 min 380 min 487 min 380 min 487 min 153 Recordable time to microSD card (64 Mbytes) Image size VGA
(640 x 480) HVGA Wide
(640 x 352) QVGA
(320 x 240) QCIF
(176 x 144) Sub-QCIF
(128 x 96) a r e m a C File size setting Movie type set Long time Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice Recordable time per recording (Approx.) Image quality Total recordable time (Approx.) Image quality Super fine 227 sec 231 sec 301 sec 308 sec 447 sec 462 sec 18 min 20 min 34 min 40 min Fine 447 sec 462 sec 180 min 577 sec 10 min 180 min 577 sec 10 min 180 min 60 min 80 min 180 min 96 min 160 min 180 min Normal 14 min 15 min 18 min 20 min 26 min 30 min 96 min 160 min 137 min 180 min Super fine 227 sec 231 sec 301 sec 308 sec 447 sec 462 sec 18 min 20 min 34 min 40 min Fine 447 sec 462 sec 240 min 577 sec 10 min 240 min 577 sec 10 min 240 min 60 min 80 min 240 min 96 min 160 min 240 min Normal 14 min 15 min 18 min 20 min 26 min 30 min 96 min 160 min 137 min 320 min pThe recordable time is the estimate value. 154
<Still Image Shoot>
Shooting Still Images You can shoot still images by using the camera. The shot still images are saved to the Camera folder of My picture in the FOMA phone or to the microSD card. pSee Storage setting (Store in) and Select storage for selecting a storage location. pSee page 330 for how to display saved still images. Shoot a Still Image 1 Press c. pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKitCamera. You can start also by selecting Photo mode from the Camera menu. pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See page 127) pChange the direction of the FOMA phone according to the direction of the Top icon. 2 Press Oo(
). Finder display A still image is shot. The Post View display for confirmation appears. pWhen Focus is set to Face detection or Auto while shooting with the outside camera, shooting starts after the focus operation. pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored) when you shoot with the inside camera; however the image is correctly displayed when played back. pWhen Auto save set is set to ON, the Post View display does not appear; the still image is automatically saved. Go to step 4. 3 Press Oo(
). The still image you shot is saved to the Camera folder. pTo save the still image as an mirrored image
(horizontally reversed), press i(
Mirror save.
) and select pWhen Store in is set to microSD, the still image is saved to the folder selected by Select storage. pPress r to cancel the shot still image and return to the Finder display. 4 Press h to end the camera. Post View display Continuous Shooting You can continuously shoot still images. You can set the number of frames, and shooting interval for auto-shooting. (See page 162) 1 cc(
c(
) C a m e r a pThe camera starts in the mode you used last time, Auto, Manual, or Auto bracket. To change Continuous Mode, see Continuous mode of Cont. shooting set.. Finder display 155 2 Press Oo(
). Continuous shooting starts. When Continuous mode is set to Manual, press Oo(
times of shooting frames. The Post View display for confirmation appears. pWhen Focus is set to Auto while shooting with the outside camera, shooting starts after the focus operation. pTo cancel shooting midway, press r. If you shoot in the Auto or Auto bracket mode of Continuous mode, you can cancel also by pressing l(
). You can cancel shooting also by closing the FOMA phone. pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored) when you shoot with the
) the number of 3 a r e m a C inside camera; however the image is correctly displayed when played back. pWhen Auto save set is set to ON, the Post View display does not appear; the still images are automatically saved. Go to step 4.
)Oo(
) To select a still image and save it Select a still image and press c(
pPress No from the detailed display to show the previous or next still image. pTo save the still image as a mirrored image
(horizontally reversed), press i(
) and select Mirror save. c To save all still images l(
)Save or Mirror save The still images you shot are saved to the Camera folder. pPress r from the Post View display to cancel the shot still images and return to the Finder display. pWhen Store in is set to microSD, the still images are saved to the folder set by Select storage. 4 Press h to end the camera. Information pThe image quality may be coarse depending on Image size or Display size. pWhen you shoot, the tone selected for Shutter sound sounds regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be changed. pEven when a mail message comes in while shooting, the shooting operation continues. Though unread message icon is displayed, the Mail Receiving display is not displayed. pIf you end the camera function by using Multitask while shooting, unsaved still images are deleted. pWhen shooting, hold the FOMA phone securely to avoid blurred images. pWhile you are shooting in Photo Mode or Manual of Continuous Mode, the Call/
Charging indicator flickers. In Auto/Auto bracket of Continuous Mode, it lights. Function Menu of the Post View Display in Photo Mode/
Detailed Display in Continuous Mode Post View display Detailed display Function menu Operation/Explanation To select multiple still images and save them Put a check mark for still images to be saved
l(
)Save or Mirror save Save Mirror save Attach to mail See page 155 and page 156. See page 155 and page 156. You can save the still image you shot and attach it to an i-mode mail message. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
). 156 Function menu Attach location Operation/Explanation
Select an item. By position loc. Measures the current location and store the location information. After checking the location information, press Oo(
). Location History and store it. From loc. history. Select a piece of location information from pWhen you press i(
) during measuring the current location, the confirmation display appears asking whether to display the result obtained so far from the location information. pTo cancel measuring the current location, press r or l(
pPress l(
information to restart measuring in Quality mode.
) from the confirmation display for the location
). Set display Change frame You can paste the still image to the Stand-by display and others for displaying. This is available only in Photo Mode. Go to Set display on page 331. pEven when Store in is set to microSD, the still image is saved to the FOMA phone. Store in Normal display/
Mirror display File restriction You can replace the frame added to the shot still image by new one. This is available only in Photo Mode.
Select a frame. pPress No to bring up the previous or next frame. pTo reselect a frame, press l(
Oo(
pYou cannot release the frame.
) Normal display/
Mirror display You can switch between a correct image and a mirrored image
(horizontally reversed). Store in Display size See page 162. See page 162. File restriction See page 164. Icon Cancel See page 163. You do not save the shot still image. Function Menu of the Post View Display in Continuous Mode pIf you highlight a still image from the Post View display and press Oo(
added. Press Oo(
) again to release the selection.
), is Function menu Operation/Explanation Save See page 156. Store all/animatn You can save all the shot still images to store as an original animation.
Save pTo save as a mirrored image (horizontally reversed), select Mirror save.
<New>
See page 162. You can switch between a correct image and a mirrored image
(horizontally reversed). You can set the file restrictions on the image on the Post View display.
File unrestricted or File restricted pSee page 164 for the file restrictions. C a m e r a Cancel You do not save the shot still images. Information
<Store all/animatn>
pWhen Store in is set to microSD, this function is not available. pIf you have shot a single still image only, this function is not available. 157
<Moving Image Shoot>
Shooting Moving Images You can shoot moving images by using the camera. The shot moving images are saved to the Camera folder of imotion in the FOMA phone or to the microSD card. pFor selecting a storage location, see Storage setting (Store in) and Select storage. pSee page 338 for playing back the saved moving images. 1 cc(
) pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKitCamera. You can start also by selecting Movie mode from the Camera menu. pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See page 127) a r e m a C 2 Press Oo(
). Finder display Recording starts. pWhen Focus is set to Auto while shooting with the outside camera, shooting starts after the focus operation. While shooting, the subject is automatically focused regardless of the setting of Focus. pWhen you shoot with the inside camera, the horizontally reversed (mirrored) image is displayed, but it is displayed normally when played back. 3 Press Oo(
). Recording ends. The Post View display for confirmation appears. pRecording automatically ends when a call comes in, the low battery alarm sounds, or the FOMA phone is closed during recording. pWhen Auto save set is set to ON, or File size setting is set to Long time, the Post View display does not appear; the moving image is automatically saved. When Store in is set to microSD, the moving image is saved to the folder set by Select storage. Go to step 5. 158 4 Press Oo(
). The moving image you shot is saved to the Camera folder. pPress r to cancel the shot moving image and return to the Finder display. 5 Press h to end the camera. Post View display If recording ends or the image quality deteriorates while shooting When you use a microSD card that you repeatedly save/delete data files to/from, the writing speed slows down, recording might end midway or the image quality might deteriorate. Do the following operations to improve such symptoms:
1. Copy all the data files from the microSD card onto your personal computer as they are. pWhen your personal computer is set so as to hide folders and files, change the settings to display those folders and files, and then operate. For how to change the settings, refer to the operating manual or Help on the personal computer you use. pDo not change the names of folders and files copied to the personal computer. 2. Use the personal computer to delete all the data files on the microSD card. pDo not format the microSD card. The data files might not be played back. 3. Copy the data files copied in step 1 back to the microSD card. pBe sure to copy them back to the same microSD card. Even if you save the copyrighted data files on another microSD card, you cannot play them back. Information pThe shutter tone set by Shutter sound sounds when shooting starts and ends regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be changed. Information pIf you do key operations while recording, the operation sound may be picked up. pThe Call/Charging indicator lights during recording. pWhen you switch the subject you are shooting to a subject with a difference in perspective, it takes time to focus on the new subject. pWhen you have difficulty focusing on a subject, switch to another subject. Then the subject might come into focus. pThe operating speed of Autofocus is slowed down in a dark place. Function Menu of the Post View Display in Movie Mode Function menu Operation/Explanation Changing Settings for Shooting Images You can set the camera when shooting images. Use Zoom You can display the image through the camera in Wide or Tele. The maximum magnification for each size is as follows:
Outside camera Camera mode Size Level of zoom The maximum magnifications Play Save Attach to mail Set as stand-by Set as standbyWide See page 338. See page 158. You can save the recorded moving image and attach it to an i-mode mail message. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
You can save the recorded moving image and set it for the Stand-by display.
). Photo Store in Display size See page 162. See page 162. File restriction See page 164. Icon Cancel Information See page 163. You do not save the recorded moving image.
<Set as stand-by> <Set as standbyWide>
pSome moving images might not be displayed correctly. pSee page 115 for playback of the moving image set for the Stand-by display. Continuous Movie
(Image stabilizer:
Auto) 5M (2592 x 1944) 3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456) 3M (2048 x 1536) 2M Wide (1920 x 1080) 2M (1600 x 1200) Stand-by (480 x 854) VGA (640 x 480) CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) VGA (640 x 480) CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) VGA (640 x 480) HVGA Wide (640 x 352) QVGA (320 x 240) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) VGA (640 x 480) Movie HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
(Image stabilizer:
OFF) QVGA (320 x 240) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 1 level 1 level 6 levels 6 levels 11 levels 11 levels 31 levels 31 levels 31 levels 31 levels 31 levels 11 levels 21 levels 31 levels 31 levels 31 levels 11 levels 11 levels 21 levels 31 levels 31 levels 11 levels 11 levels 21 levels 31 levels 31 levels C a m e r a
(Approx.) 1.0 times 1.0 times 1.2 times 1.3 times 1.6 times 1.5 times 3.0 times 5.5 times 8.1 times 11.0 times 15.1 times 1.9 times 2.7 times 3.8 times 5.5 times 7.5 times 1.6 times 1.6 times 2.4 times 4.4 times 6.0 times 1.9 times 1.9 times 3.0 times 5.5 times 7.5 times 159 Inside camera Camera mode Size Level of zoom The maximum magnifications Photo/
Continuous Movie VGA (640 x 480) CIF (352 x 288) QVGA (240 x 320) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) VGA (640 x 480) HVGA Wide (640 x 352) QVGA (320 x 240) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 1 level 11 levels 11 levels 31 levels 31 levels 1 level 1 level 21 levels 31 levels 31 levels
(Approx.) 1.0 times 1.6 times 1.5 times 3.3 times 5.0 times 1.0 times 1.0 times 2.0 times 3.5 times 5.0 times a r e m a C 1 Finder displayUse No to adjust the magnification. Information pThe image quality may slightly change when you select Wide or Tele. pTele is released in the following cases:
When you press -h to end the camera When a size is changed When camera mode is switched Use Focus Function You can shoot with the outside camera focused on a subject. pWhen Focus is set to Face detection, faces are detected in the first place. Up to five faces are detected, and the image is shot with a single face of those faces is focused. When the detection fails, the auto-focus function works and then the image is shot. 1 Finder displayXo When the subject is focused, a confirmation tone sounds, then the frame becomes green and the focus is locked. When the subject is not focused, the frame becomes red. pPress r to focus again. 160 Information pIf Movie type set is set to Voice in Movie Mode, you cannot use Autofocus. pFace detection is available only in Photo Mode. pWhen Face detection is set, you cannot paste a cushy mark in the image. pEven when Focus is set to Face detection, you might not be able to detect the face in the following cases:
When the face faces sideway or askew When the face is at a slant When part of the face is covered by glasses, a cap, or shadows When the face is extremely small, large, or dim when compared to overall screen size When the face is placed at the edges of the display pWhen Focus is set to Face detection, you are advised to shoot images within 2.5 m of the distance from the face. Setting Image Size and Image Quality Function Menu of the Finder Display Function menu Inside camera/
Outside camera Operation/Explanation You can switch between the inside camera and outside camera. CHG camera-mode Select a mode. Image size File size setting
[Movie Mode only]
pWhen you select Continuous mode, the camera starts in the mode you used last time, Auto, Manual, or Auto bracket.
Select an image size. pWhen you shoot a photo for sending during a voice call, you can select only QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96).
Select an item. Mail restrictn (S). You can shoot up to 500 Kbytes. Mail restrictn (L). You can shoot up to 2 Mbytes. Long time. You can shoot for a long time. The moving image is saved to the microSD card. Function menu Image quality Camera settings
(Brightness) At Camera start-up 0 Camera settings
(White balance) At Camera start-up Auto Operation/Explanation You can set the image quality for saving.
Select an image quality. You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
BrightnessSelect a brightness level. Function menu Camera settings
(Photo mode) At Camera start-up Normal You can adjust the coloring of the image on the Finder display to create a natural color tone.
White balanceSelect an item. Auto. For adjusting white balance automatically Fine . For shooting outdoors in fine weather Cloudy. For shooting in cloudy weather or in the shade Light bulb . For shooting under incandescent light Fluorescent light . For shooting under fluorescent lighting Camera settings
(Color mode set) At Camera start-up Normal
Color mode setSelect a color mode. Normal . Shoots in normal color. Sepia . Shoots in sepia color. Monochrome . Shoots in monochrome. Vivid . Makes the contours vivid, raises the Natural . Makes the contours smooth, lowers the saturation, and then shoots. saturation, and then shoots. Whitening . Shoots faces in bright color. Suntan. Shoots faces in dark color. Camera settings
(Focus) At Camera start-up Photo Mode:
Face detection Continuous/Movie Mode:Auto Camera settings
(Shutter sound) Operation/Explanation You can set a photo mode suitable for the place.
Photo modeSelect a photo mode. Normal. Standard mode Portrait . For shooting portraits Sports . For shooting moving subjects such as athletes Food . For shooting dishes Scenery. For shooting scenery Night mode. For shooting in dark places such as in nighttime Backlight. For shooting against the sun (from behind) Character . For shooting characters Snow . For shooting in snowy places Sunset. For shooting in sunset Pet . For shooting pets, etc. You can set the focus of the outside camera.
FocusSelect an item. Face detection . For focusing on a persons face Auto. For focusing automatically before shooting
(See page 160) Close-up . For focusing on a subject in a short distance Landscape . For focusing on a landscape in a long pFace detection is available only in Photo Mode. distance You can set a shutter sound. You can set a shutter sound each for Photo Mode (Continuous Mode) and Movie Mode.
Shutter soundSelect a shutter sound. pWhile you are selecting, the shutter tone sounds for confirmation. C a m e r a Camera settings
(Flicker correction) You can suppress blur on the Finder display for when shooting with the outside camera.
Flicker correctionAuto, Mode 1 (50Hz) or Mode 2 (60Hz) 161 Function menu Storage setting
(Store in) Storage setting
(Auto save set) Storage setting
(File restriction) Img. stabilizer
[Photo/Movie Mode]
Operation/Explanation You can set the storage location for the still or moving images you shot.
Store inPhone or microSD You can set whether to automatically save the image after shooting. When Store in is Phone, the image is saved to the Camera folder. When Store in is microSD, the image is saved to the folder set by Select storage.
Auto save setON or OFF See page 164. You can correct camera shake for when shooting with the outside camera.
Auto or OFF Auto timer See page 164. You can shoot a still image with a frame.
Shoot with frameON or OFFSelect a frame. You can shoot a persons face with a cushy mark pasted. The cushy mark is automatically pasted in an appropriate position.
Cushy markON or OFFSelect a cushy mark. Shooting effect
(Shoot with frame) At Camera start-up OFF
[Photo Mode only]
Shooting effect
(Cushy mark) At Camera start-up OFF
[Photo/Movie Mode]
a r e m a C Function menu Cont. shooting set.
(Continuous mode)
[Continuous Mode only]
Cont. shooting set.
(Shot interval)
[Continuous Mode only]
Cont. shooting set.
(Shot number)
[Continuous Mode only]
Movie type set At Camera start-up Normal
[Movie Mode only]
Display size Common replay mode
[Movie Mode only]
Operation/Explanation
Continuous modeSelect a mode. Auto . Shoots automatically at an interval and with the number of frames as specified by Shot interval and Shot number. Manual . Shoots one by one manually with the number Auto bracket . Shoots automatically nine still images at an of frames specified by Shot number. interval of about 0.3 second while changing the brightness and color tone one by one. pSelect Manual to display the number of frames for continuous shooting.
Shot intervalSelect a shooting interval. pYou can set this only in Auto of Continuous Mode.
Shot numberEnter the number of photos. pWhen Image size is set to VGA (640 x 480) or CIF (352 x 288), you cannot change Shot number. pYou can set this only in Auto or Manual of Continuous Mode. You can select whether to record both the video and voice, or one of them when you shoot the moving image.
Normal, Video, or Voice You can set whether to display a moving image or still image in the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the screen size on the Finder display.
Actual size or Fit in display You can set a shooting size appropriate for attaching to i-mode mail.
YES pImage Size is set to QCIF, File Size Setting is set to Mail restrictn (S), and Image Quality (Movie Mode) is set to Normal. 162 Function menu Operation/Explanation Icon You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF pEven if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as
, you receive a mail message or Message R/F. or appears during communication or when Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Information
<Inside camera/Outside camera>
pWhen Image size is set to larger than Stand-by (480 x 854), and you switch to the inside camera, the camera starts up in VGA (640 x 480).
<File size setting>
pWhen the File size setting is set to Long time, Store in is set to microSD.
<Camera settings>
pNote that the image may blur in Night Mode because the exposure takes a longer time. Information
<Img. stabilizer>
pThis function is only for decreasing the degree of camera shake, so its effect differs depending on the subject or condition. pImage Stabilizer might not work effectively in the following cases:
When the camera shakes to a great extent When zooming is in use When shooting moving subjects pWhen Photo mode of Camera settings is set to Sports, Night mode, or Pet in Photo Mode, Img. stabilizer becomes invalid. pResidual images might remain in the area where the subject is moving, or noise might be found in overall area. In that case, set this function to OFF. pIn Movie Mode, the shooting range varies depending on the Auto or OFF setting because peripheral pixels are used for the processing by Image Stabilizer. pWhen this function is activated in Photo Mode, the processing time after shooting might be longer about two seconds due to the processing by Image Stabilizer. pYou cannot use Image Stabilizer for the inside camera.
<Shooting effect>
pWhen Image size is set to larger than 2M (1600 x 1200), you cannot shoot with a C a m e r a pIf you set Flicker correction to Auto, it may take a while to automatically adjust the frame. image quality. In this case, switch to Mode 1 or Mode 2 according to the power frequency provided in the shooting location. pEven if you change the setting of Brightness, White balance, Color mode set, or Focus, the setting appropriate for each Photo mode applies when you change Photo mode.
<Storage setting>
pSee Select storage for how to set a storage location on the microSD card. pIf you change File size setting to Long time, Store in is set to microSD and Storage setting cannot be operated. pWhen Auto save set is set to ON, the image is saved to the latest folder if Select storage is not set or the folder set as a destination folder is deleted. pIf you shoot a still image with a frame using the inside camera and save it, the frame is also horizontally reversed when the still image is automatically reversed as a correct image. pYou cannot save the still image shot with a frame as the mirrored image. pWhen Image size is set to larger than Stand-by (480 x 854), cushy marks cannot be pasted in Photo Mode. pWhen Focus is set to Face detection, cushy marks cannot be pasted in Photo Mode.
<Cont. shooting set.>
pThe number of shots that can be set differs depending on the image size. The number of shots that can be set is as follows:
VGA (640 x 480): 4 CIF (352 x 288): 4 QVGA (240 x 320): 5 through 10 QCIF (176 x 144): 5 through 20 Sub-QCIF (128 x 96): 5 through 20 163 Information
<Display size>
pWhen Image size is set to a size larger than HVGA Wide (640 x 352), Fit in display always applies. pWhen Image size is set to QCIF (176 x 144) or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), the image is enlarged two times at both lengthwise and sidewise when it is displayed in Actual size. pThe setting for the Finder display is reflected in the Post View display; however the setting for the Post View display is not reflected in the Finder display.
<Common replay mode>
pYou cannot operate when you set File size setting to Long time. File Restriction r e m a C a You can set the file restrictions for when you save the shot still or moving image. The operation of attaching to i-mode mail is disabled at the receiving end who has received the image as the first distribution. 1 Finder displayi(
)Storage setting
File restriction or Post View display in Photo Mode, Movie Mode or Photo sending/Detailed display in Continuous Modei(
)File restriction 2 File unrestricted or File restricted For File unrestricted First distribution Secondary distribution Attach to mail Attach to mail Your FOMA phone Destination mobile phone 164 For File restricted First distribution Secondary distribution Attach to mail Attach to mail Your FOMA phone Information Destination mobile phone pEven when you set File restriction to File restricted, the still or moving images can be output from the destination mobile phone by transmitting the images using infrared data exchange or by copying them to the microSD card. pAfter saving, you can use File restriction on page 332 to change the settings. pWhen you set File size setting to Long time in Movie Mode, File restriction becomes File unrestricted. Auto Timer At Camera start-up OFF 1 Finder displayi(
Enter a delay time (seconds). pEnter from 01 through 15, in two digits.
)Auto timerON or OFF When Auto Timer is set to ON blinks. The Call/
appears on the Finder display.
), a confirmation tone sounds and If you press Oo(
Charging indicator flickers every about 1 second until about 5 seconds before shooting. From about 5 seconds before shooting, the Call/Charging indicator flickers every about 0.5 second, and the confirmation tone sounds every about 1 second. Shooting takes place after the set delay time has elapsed. pTo cancel shooting, press l(
flickering. Even if you cancel shooting, Auto timer stays set to ON. pYou can shoot immediately by pressing Oo(
elapsed.
) or r while the Call/Charging indicator is
) before the delay time has pWhen you shoot, a confirmation tone sounds regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for the confirmation tone cannot be changed. Information pYou cannot use Auto Timer in Manual of Continuous Mode. pAuto Timer is set to OFF when shooting ends.
<Bar Code Reader>
Using Bar Code Reader You can use the outside camera to scan JAN codes and QR codes and store them as data. From the scanned data, you can make calls, compose i-mode mail messages, and access Internet web pages, and so on. When scanning with Bar Code Reader pTake the character strings as large as possible within the guide frame. pAutofocus works when you scan a code about 10 cm or more away from it. When you scan a code in the out-of-focus state, the recognition rate lowers. pScan so that the camera is in parallel with the code. Guide frame JAN Code JAN Code is a bar code that denotes numerals with the vertical bars of a different width. You can scan 8-digit (JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13) JAN codes. p4942857112597 is displayed when you scan this bar code with the FOMA phone. QR Code QR Code is one of the 2-dimensional codes that denotes data in the vertical and horizontal directions. Kanji, katakana, alphanumeric characters, and pictographs are displayed when you scan it. Some QR codes have image or melody information. pNTT (NTT DoCoMo, Inc.) is displayed when you scan this QR code with the FOMA phone. Scan a Code At Bar Code Reader start-up Brightness: 0 Zoom: Magnified view You can store up to 5 scanned codes. You can scan up to 16 divided QR codes. The Bar Code Reader menu is displayed. pYou can paste the Bar Code Reader menu to the desktop. (See page 127) 1 mLifeKitBar code readerScan code 2 Fit a code to be scanned to the guide frame and press Xo. C a m e r a When the focus is locked, a confirmation tone sounds and the cross mark becomes green. pPress i(
) and select Brightness; then you can adjust brightness to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright). pPress Co to show the reduced display, and press Vo to return to the former display. Scanning Code display 165 a r e m a C 3 Press Oo(
). The code is scanned. (The shutter tone does not sound.) pTo cancel scanning, press r or Oo(
pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion tone sounds and the Call/
). Charging indicator lights. The sound level is fixed and cannot be changed. However, the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while Phone of Ring volume is set to Silent. p is displayed for melody files and or is displayed for incompatible or damaged files. pWhile you are entering (editing) characters, the Scanned Code Result display does not appear; the Text Data Confirmation display of the scanned code appears. To enter the scanned code, press Oo(
) or r. The characters that cannot be displayed are replaced by l(
half-pitch spaces. When the code containing no text data has been scanned, the code is not correctly displayed.
). To discard it, press pIf scanning is not completed in a certain period, the scanning is suspended and the Scanning Code display returns. pWhen the scanned code is part of divided QR codes, select OK to repeat step 2 and step 3 for scanning the rest of codes.
)Save resultOK The scanned data is stored. 4 i(
Scanned Code Result display Information pYou cannot scan bar codes or 2-dimensional codes other than JAN codes or QR codes. pScanning may take a long time. Hold the FOMA phone securely with your hands during scanning. pYou may not be able to scan codes correctly depending on scratch, dirt, damage, the quality of printed material, light reflection, or QR code version. pYou cannot scan some codes depending on the type or size. Function Menu of the Scanned Code Result Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Save result See page 166. 166 Function menu Display list Internet Operation/Explanation You can bring up the Bar Code Reader list when one or more files are stored. You can connect to the highlighted URL via i-mode or Full Browser.
i-mode or Full BrowserYES pYou can connect to the URL also by highlighting the URL and pressing Oo(
). Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the Dialing highlighted mail address. Go to step 3 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by highlighting the mail address and pressing Oo(
pWhen you select Compose message from the Scanned Code Result display, the data on the Scanned Code Result display is entered into the address, subject, and text field.
). You can make a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call to the highlighted phone number.
Select a dialing type. pWhen you select Select image, select an image to send to the other party during the videophone call. pWhen you select Compose SMS, you can compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 244. pYou can make a call also by highlighting the phone number and pressing Oo(
Dial pTo make an international call, select Intl dial assist. (See
). page 61) pTo set Caller ID Notification, select Notify caller ID. (See step 2 on page 48) Add to phonebook See page 96. Add bookmark You can bookmark the site name and URL.
YES pSelect Page title to edit the title.
OKSelect a destination folder. Function menu Save image Save melody Save ToruCa Start ippli Copy Operation/Explanation You can save the scanned image data to set to the Stand-by display or other displays.
Select a destination folder. Go to step 3 on page 182. pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum. You can save the scanned melody data to set it as a ring tone or other tones.
YESSelect a destination folder. Go to step 2 on page 183. pSelect pSee page 186 when melodies are stored to the maximum. to play back the melody. You can save the scanned ToruCa file.
Select a destination folder. pSelect pSee page 186 when ToruCa files are stored to maximum. You can start up i-ppli from the scanned data.
YES to display the ToruCa file.
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying. pYou can copy codes of up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. pSee page 442 for pasting copied characters. Information
<Internet>
pURL can be displayed in up to 512 half-pitch characters by Bar Code Reader and up to 256 half-pitch characters by Text Reader.
<Compose message>
pIf the scanned data contains nonenterable characters, you cannot enter it as a mail address, and those characters may become spaces in the text field.
<Dialing>
pYou cannot make emergency calls by scanning 110, 119 or 118.
<Add bookmark>
pYou can display up to 512 half-pitch characters for a URL and can store up to 256 characters from the beginning. Information
<Save image>
pThe file name and title for the saved image are imageXXX (XXX are numerals).
<Save melody>
pThe file name for the saved melody is melodyXXX (XXX are numerals). pFor the melody with no title, the file name is displayed as the title. pWhen playing back the melody, it is played back at the sound volume set for Phone of Ring volume. Display the Saved Data List 1 mLifeKitBar code reader
Saved data The titles for stored data are displayed from the latest one. pSelect a title to show the Scanned Code Result display. Information Bar Code Reader list C a m e r a pThe titles for the scanned data are as follows:
(Example) When the scanned data is saved at 10:00 on November 18, 2008;
Title name: 20081118_1000_0000 If you store multiple data items for the same date and time, the lower four-digit numbers increase up to 9999. Function Menu of the Bar Code Reader List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title Result Delete
(Delete this)
Enter a title. You can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters. You can bring up the Scanned Code Result display for stored data.
Delete thisYES 167 Function menu Operation/Explanation Delete
(Delete all)
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Text Reader>
Using Text Reader You can scan printed phone numbers, mail addresses or alphanumeric characters such as URLs using the outside camera, and store them as text information. Use the text information to make calls, compose i-mode mail, connect to the Internet, and so on. When scanning with Text Reader pTake the character strings as large as possible a r e m a C within the guide frame. pAutofocus works when you scan characters about 10 cm or more away from them. When you scan characters in the out-of-focus state, the recognition rate lowers. pScan the character string with the camera set in parallel. Guide frame Scan Text At Text Reader start-up Zoom: Magnified view You can store eight scanned data files of up to 256 half-pitch characters per item. The number of characters you can scan at a time is up to 50 half-pitch characters, and you can scan the increased characters in parts. 1 mLifeKitText readerScan text The Text Reader menu is displayed. pYou can paste the Text Reader menu to the desktop. (See page 127) 168 2 Fit the characters to be scanned to the guide frame and press Xo. When the focus is locked, a confirmation tone sounds and the guide frame becomes green. pPress Co to show the reduced display, and press Vo to return to the former display. 3 Press Oo(
Scanning Text display
). The characters are scanned. (The shutter tone does not sound.) pTo cancel scanning, press r. pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion tone sounds and the Call/
Charging indicator lights. The sound level is fixed and cannot be changed. However, the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while Phone of Ring volume is set to Silent. 4 Confirm the scanned result. The scanned characters are underlined. Confirm the scanned characters for mistakes. pPress r to restart scanning. pTo store the characters without correcting, go to step 7. Conversion candidate Scanned result Scanned Text Confirmation display 5 Press Mo to highlight a character to be corrected
Press the number of the conversion candidate. pConversion candidates are displayed up to four kinds for each character. pWhen you want to correct a character to other than the conversion candidate, highlight the character to be corrected and press l(
), then enter a character after switching to Alphabet entry mode or Numeric entry mode. However you cannot enter characters such as .ne.jp or .co.jp by pressing a. The scanned characters are set. pTo link characters, repeat step 2 through step 6. pTo release the set characters, press r. 6 Press Oo(
7 i(
)Store The scanned characters are stored. pWhen scanned text contains tel, @, or http://, you can execute Phone To or Web To function by selecting the text. (See page 187) You can select only first item even if multiple items are found. pPress l(
Reader. Go to step 2. Scanned Text Result display
) to overwrite the scanned characters and activate Text Information pHold the FOMA phone securely with your hands during scanning so that you can scan characters correctly. pCharacters you can scan are alphabet letters (uppercase and lowercase), numerals, and symbols (#, &, (, ), -, ., /, :, @, [, ], _, ~, ?, =, %, and +). You cannot scan kanji and hiragana characters. You might not be able to scan those correctly depending on the surroundings such as lighting. pYou cannot scan handwritten characters correctly. pYou might not be able to scan the following:
Characters received by a FAX/Copied characters/Designed characters/Characters having no certain space between characters/Characters difficult to identify from the background. Display the Saved Data List 1 mLifeKitText reader
Saved data Up to 22 half-pitch characters are displayed for each stored data. pSelect a data item to show the Scanned Text Result display. Function Menu of the Scanning Text Display/Scanned Text Confirmation Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Store Edit See page 169. You can edit and store the scanned character string.
Edit the text. Recognition mode You can set this mode according to the type of the character At Text Reader start-up Auto setting string you want to scan.
Select an item. Auto setting . Automatically recognizes the type of characters. URL . Select this when you scan a URL. http:// or https:// is automatically entered to the head of the character string when it is stored. Mail address. Select this when you scan a mail address. Phone number . Select this when you scan a phone number. Number . Select this when you scan numerals. Free character . Select this when you scan alphabetic characters that are not especially specified. NEGA/POSI mode You can set this mode to fit to the printing conditions of the At Text Reader start-up Auto setting character string you want to scan.
Select an item. Auto setting . Automatically recognizes printing conditions. Positive fix . Select this when deep color characters are Negative fix. Select this when faint color characters are printed over faint color ground. printed over deep color ground. C a m e r a Text Reader list 169 Function Menu of the Scanned Text Result Display/Text Reader List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Internet
Edit the text. See page 166. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the scanned mail address as a destination address. Go to step 3 on page 198. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
See page 166.
). Dialing a r e m a C Store mail add. See page 96. Store phone No. See page 96. Add bookmark You can bookmark the URL you have scanned.
OK pSelect Page title to edit the title.
Select a destination folder. Search phonebook You can search for Phonebook entries using the scanned phone number or mail address.
Select a search methodBo The Phonebook list that corresponds to the phone number or mail address is displayed. Display detail/
Display list You can switch between the Scanned Text Result display and Text Reader list.
Delete thisYES
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete all) 170 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel What is i-mode? . 172 Displaying Sites Accessing Sites . <iMenu> 172 How to View/to Operate Sites . 173 Displaying Most Recently Accessed Site. <Last URL> 176 Using My Menu . <My Menu> 177 Changing i-mode Password . <Change i-mode Password> 177 Displaying Internet Web Pages . <Enter URL> 178 Bookmarking Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access
. <Bookmark> 178 Saving Site Contents . <Screen Memo> 180 Downloading Images or Melodies from Sites Downloading Files or Data Items from Sites . 182 Uploading Images or Moving Images to Sites Uploading Files to Sites . 186 Convenient Functions of i-mode Operations from Highlighted Information . 187 Setting Functions of i-mode Setting i-mode. <i-mode Settings> 188 Setting Connection Timeout . <Set Connection Timeout> 189 Changing a Host from i-mode (ISP Connection Communication)
. <Host Selection> 189 Using Certificates Operating SSL Certificates . <SSL Certificate> 190 Setting FirstPass . <Client Certificate> 190 Changing a CA Center. <Certificate Host> 192 Using i-motion What is i-motion?. 193 Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites
. <Obtain i-motion Movie> 193 Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion Movies
. <imotion Auto-play> 194 Using i-Channel What is i-Channel?. 195 Using i-Channel . 195 Setting How Ticker is Displayed. 196 171 What is i-mode?
i-mode is the service that makes use of the display of the FOMA phone supporting i-mode (i-mode phone) to enable you to use online services such as site (program) access, Internet access, and i-mode mail. pi-mode is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis. pFor details on i-mode, refer to the Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Before Using i-mode pContents of sites (programs) and web pages (Internet web pages) are generally protected by copyrights law. Data such as text and images that you obtained to the i-mode phone from sites (programs) and Internet web pages can be used for personal entertainment but cannot be used in whole or in part, as it is or after modification, for commercial purposes or sent as e-mail attachments or output from your i-mode phone to other devices, unless you have permission from the copyright holders. pIf you replace the UIM with another one or turn on the power with the UIM not inserted, you cannot display/play back files depending on the model, such as still images/moving images/melodies obtained from sites, attached files (still images/
moving images/melodies and other files) sent/received by mail, screen memos, or Messages R/F. pWhen the file whose display and/or playback is restricted by the UIM is set for the Stand-by display or specified ring tone, the FOMA phone works with the default contents when you replace the existing UIM with new one or turn on the power with the UIM not inserted.
<iMenu>
Accessing Sites You can use a variety of services offered by IPs (Information Providers). From the display of the FOMA phone, you can check your bank balance, reserve tickets, and do similar tasks. (IPs offer different types of services. Some of them need to be applied for separately.) 172 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i 1 iiMenu While you are online, blinks. p blinks while you are using the i-mode service
(during i-mode standby). pTo cancel during the
). connection, select Cancel. To cancel while obtaining a page, press l(
pTo end i-mode, press h
and select YES while the site is displayed. goes off and i-mode ends. It may take longer to end i-mode. 2 Select an item (link). i-mode menu Repeat selecting items (links) to display the desired site. pYou can select underscored items on the displayed site. When you select an item, it is highlighted. pIf there is a number at the head of the item showing the link, you can connect to that link directly by pressing the numeric key corresponding to that number.
(Some sites cannot be connected.) pWhile the site is displayed, press Bo to scroll through line by line. Press m(
) or </> to scroll through page by page.
)/c(
To obtain an SSL site (SSL pages) The display on the right appears. When obtaining is completed, the SSL page appears and pTo cancel during authentication, select Cancel. To cancel obtaining the SSL page after authentication, press l(
lights.
). To return to a non-SSL site The display on the right appears. Select YES to display the ordinary site;
goes off. Information pDepending on the site, you may need to apply for the service in writing separately, or to pay information fees to use it. pThe maximum display size of the images on the site is 1400 x 480 dots. If an image is larger than 1400 x 480 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained. pDepending on the site, might be displayed when the image is not correctly displayed. pDepending on the site or data, you might not be able to download or save melodies, PDF files, software programs, and others. pWith some Internet web pages (sites) supporting i-mode, the color setting might make the text difficult or impossible to see. pWhen you are asked from the site to send information about music you have played back on the FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears for about sending your music information. Select YES to send the information (title names, artist names, and played dates) of the music played back on the FOMA phone. The sent music information is used for the IP (information provider) to provide customized information to you. Change to iMenu in English The iMenu can be displayed in English. 1 iiMenuEnglish iMenu iMenu in English will be displayed. pTo change back to the Japanese display, select
(Japanese). Information pThe iMenu in English differs slightly from the iMenu in Japanese. pItems such as Tokusuru Menu and News are not shown on the English iMenu. pGenerally, Whats New site will be updated every other Monday. pEnglish sites are displayed after entering Menu list (sites differ from Japanese version). pAccess news from DoCoMo and usage regulations on Whats New. How to View/to Operate Sites Basic operating methods while a site is displayed are explained. Return to Obtained Previous Page/Go to Obtained Next Page The FOMA phone saves the files such as the displayed Internet web pages to a temporal storage area called a cache. By pressing No, you can bring up the page stored in the cache without communicating. pWhen you bring up a page that exceeds the cache size on the FOMA phone or a page that is configured (created) to always read its latest information, the FOMA phone starts communication. pWhen i-mode ends, the cache is cleared. 1 Press Co to return to the previous page. Press Vo to go to the next page. Two pages before One page before Currently displayed page No No 173 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l
To turn pages You can move back up through the pages that you have displayed so far by pressing Co repeatedly. However, if you display a different page (D) from the previous page
(B), you cannot return to C from D even when you press Co twice. Instead, the pages are displayed in the order of D B A.
<When pages have been displayed in the order of ABCBD>
A B Co Co C D Co Sequence of page display Sequence when previous page from the display D has been displayed Name Text box Pull down menu Display example Operation/Explanation You can enter characters. Highlight a text box and press Oo(
display.
) to show the Character Entry
) to show You can select an item from the option list. Highlight a pull-down menu and press Oo(
the option list. pYou might be able to select multiple items from pull-down menus. Each time you use Bo to highlight an item and press Oo(
select/release items repeatedly. After selecting items, press l(
), you can
). Information pWhen you display a page stored in cache, you cannot display text or settings you entered when connected before. pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the site behavior might differ from the one for ordinary sites. Select/Enter Information on Sites In sites, you may use the displayed radio buttons, check boxes, text boxes, and pull down menus. Information pDepending on the site, the display authenticating your user ID or password might appear. Enter your user ID and password, and then select OK. Flash Function Flash is an animation technology using pictures and sound. Flash movies make the sites more attractive. You can download Flash movies to your FOMA phone and play them back or set them for the Stand-by display. Name Radio button Check box Display example
: Not selected
: Selected
: Not selected
: Selected Operation/Explanation Information Radio buttons are for selecting one from multiple choices. Check boxes are for selecting one or more items from multiple choices. pThe maximum display size of the Flash movies on the site is 700 x 480 dots. If a Flash movie is larger than 700 x 480 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained. pSome Flash movies refer to the phone-information data in your FOMA phone. To permit the use of the information in your FOMA phone, set Use phone information to YES. (YES is set at purchase.) 174 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Information Function menu Operation/Explanation pEffect tones sound for some Flash movies. To silence them, set Sound effect setting
(or Sound effect) to OFF. pThe effect tone and vibrator for the Flash movie set for the Stand-by display do not work. pThe effect tone for Flash movies does not sound during Play Background. pSome Flash movies may vibrate the FOMA phone while they are being played back. The FOMA phone vibrates regardless of the setting of Vibrator. pWhen you play back a Flash movie after saving to Data Box, microSD card, or Screen Memo, it might look different depending on the saving location. pSome Flash movies might not work correctly. pYou cannot save the Flash movies if an error occurs while they are being played back. pYou can operate some Flash movies by using +
operated sometimes even when Oo. Flash movies can be is not displayed. Mo or +
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the behavior might differ from ordinary sites. Serial Number of Mobile Phones/UIMs When you select an item, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the serial number of mobile phone/UIM. pThe serial number of your mobile phone/UIM to be sent is used by an identifying the user, providing customized information, and for judging if the contents the IP
(Information Provider) offers are available on your mobile phone. pThe serial number of your mobile phone/UIM is sent to the IPs (Information Providers) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IPs (Information Providers) or others, by this operation. Function Menu while Site is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation iMenu You can return to iMenu. Bookmark
(Add bookmark) See page 178. Bookmark
(Bookmark)
Bookmark Go to step 1 on page 179. Screen memo
(Add screen memo) See page 180. Screen memo
(Screen memo list)
Screen memo list Go to step 2 on page 181. Internet
(Enter URL) Internet
(Switch to FB) Reload You can enter a URL to display an Internet web page.
Enter URLSelect the text box. Go to step 2 on page 178. pThe URL of the displayed site is input beforehand. See page 316. The site contents will be updated with the latest information. Save image See page 182. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL/image of a displayed site/screen memo pasted or attached.
Select an item. Attach URL . Pastes a URL to the text of an i-mode mail message. Attach image . Select an image to attach it to an i-mode Insert dec. mail . Select an image to paste it to a Deco-mail mail message. message. Go to step 2 on page 198. pSee page 202 for Deco-mail. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Add to phonebook See page 96. Add desktop icon See page 127. 175 Information
<Others (Title)>
pUp to 128 half-pitch/64 full-pitch characters can be displayed for a title.
<Last URL>
Displaying Most Recently Accessed Site Display Last URL When you end i-mode, the URL of the page displayed last is stored as Last URL. You can display the page you viewed last time by selecting Last URL from the i-mode menu. 1 iLast URL Information pSome pages cannot be stored as Last URL, such as pages whose URLs contain more than 2,048 half-pitch characters, the Obtaining Completion display for melodies or i-motion movies, etc. and FirstPass Center pages. Reset Last URL You can initialize the URL of the page you viewed last time to the iMenu URL. 1 ii-mode settingsReset last URLYES Function menu Others
(Change CHR code) Operation/Explanation When characters are not correctly displayed, you can convert them to the correct ones.
Change CHR code pThis setting is valid only for the site and Internet web page being Others
(Title) Others
(URL) Others
(Certificate) displayed. You can display the title of the displayed site.
Title You can display the URL of the displayed site.
URL You can check the subject name, author, validity period and serial number of the certificate used in SSL communication. Up to five certificates are displayed.
Certificate Others
(Set image display) See page 188. Others
(Sound effect) Others
(Retry) Information See page 188. You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the beginning.
Retry pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area, the Flash movie might not be played back.
<Compose message>
pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the text is up to 256 half-pitch characters. If the URL contains 256 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it. pYou may not be able to attach or paste some images to i-mode mail.
<Others (Change CHR code)>
pWhen characters are not correctly displayed, repeat the operation. However, the previous character is displayed if you repeat the operation four times. pEven when you repeat this operation, the correct character might not appear. pIf you change the character code when the correct characters are displayed, wrong characters might appear instead. 176 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i
<My Menu>
Using My Menu If you register frequently used sites in My Menu, you will be able to access them easily. You can register up to 45 sites. Register Sites in My Menu pThe page configuration differs depending on the site. 1 Bring up a page to be registeredRegister My Menu 2 Select the i-mode password text box
Enter the i-mode password (OK) pThe entered i-mode password is displayed as _. pSee page 132 for the i-mode password. Information pSome sites cannot be registered in My Menu. pWhen you subscribe to a pay site in (Menu/Search) and Menu list, it will be registered in My Menu automatically. Access Sites from My Menu 1 iiMenuEnglish iMenuMy Menu
Select a site to be accessed. Information pIf you are using Dual Network Service, you might not be able to use My Menu registered by the mova phone using the FOMA phone, or My Menu registered by the FOMA phone using the mova phone.
<Change i-mode Password>
Changing i-mode Password The i-mode password (four digits) is required to subscribe to and unsubscribe from message services and i-mode pay sites, and to do i-mode mail settings. Be sure not to let others know your i-mode password. 1 iiMenuEnglish iMenuOptions
Change i-mode Password
Select the Current Password text box
Enter the i-mode password (four digits). pIf you enter the i-mode password for the first time, enter 0000 (four zeros) which i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l is set at a time of your contract. pThe entered numeral is displayed as _.
Enter a new i-mode password (four digits). pEnter your own i-mode password. 2 Select the New Password text box 3 Select the New Password (Confirmation) text box
Enter the new i-mode password (four digits)Select pEnter the same number that you entered in step 2. Information pNote that if you do not remember the i-mode password, you need to bring an identification card such as your drivers license to the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop. 177
<Enter URL>
Displaying Internet Web Pages 1 iGo to location<NEW>
2 Enter a URLOK 512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser). pYou can enter up to 256 half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols (up to pFor Full Browser, the confirmation display appears telling that the web page might not be displayed. Information pFor i-mode, Internet web pages not supporting i-mode or some type of internet web pages to be connected might not be displayed correctly. pWhen the file size of the page you have received exceeds the maximum obtainable size of a page, receiving is suspended. The data obtained so far might be displayable by selecting OK. Function Menu of the URL History List Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the highlighted URL pasted to the text. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 127.
). You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES pYou can operate this only from the URL History list of Full Browser.
Delete (Delete this)YES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for URL histories to be deletedl(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Add desktop icon Set as home URL Delete
[Delete (Delete this)]
Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) Displaying Web Pages from URL History Up to 10 entered URLs can be stored in URL History. 1 iGo to location
Select a URL to be displayedOK pExcluding http:// and https://, up to 22 half-pitch characters can be displayed. pYou can edit the URL by selecting the URLs text box. URL History list Information pWhen the entered URLs exceed 10 items, the URL histories are overwritten automatically, starting from the oldest one. pWhen you newly enter a URL to access a site, that URL is saved as a different record even if you access the same URL. 178
<Bookmark>
Bookmarking Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access Add Bookmark Once you bookmark a frequently accessed site, you can display the page directly. You can register 100 bookmarks each for i-mode and Full Browser. 1 From the page to be registeredi(
BookmarkAdd bookmarkYES
Select a destination folder.
) l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Information pURLs containing up to 256 half-pitch characters can be registered (up to 512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser). URLs longer than this cannot be registered. pUp to 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters are stored for a title. For longer titles, the excess characters are deleted. If no title is entered, the URL without http:// or https:// is registered. pThe contents entered in the site are not saved to the bookmark. pSome pages cannot be bookmarked. Display Web Pages or Sites from a Bookmark 1 iBookmarkSelect a folder
Select a bookmark to be displayed. pAfter you use a bookmark to display a page, that bookmark will be displayed at the top of the Bookmark list. Bookmark Folder list Bookmark list Function Menu of the Bookmark Folder List Function menu Operate folder
(Add folder) Operation/Explanation You can add a new folder. You can add up to nine folders in addition to each Bookmark folder/Screen memo folder.
Add folderEnter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Operate folder
(Edit folder name)
Edit folder nameEdit the folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Operate folder
(Delete folder) You can delete the folder and all bookmarks and screen memos in the folder. You cannot delete the Bookmark folder/Screen memo folder.
Delete folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Function menu transmission Ir/
(Send all Ir data) transmission Ir/
(All transmission) Operation/Explanation See page 371. See page 372. No. of bookmarks You can check the number of bookmarks stored in all folders. Delete all The folders will not be deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Function Menu of the Bookmark List Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the highlighted Attach to mail Move Edit title URL pasted to the text. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
You can send an i-mode mail message with the bookmark attached. Go to step 2 on page 198.
). You can move bookmarks or screen memos to another folder.
Select a destination folderPut a check mark for bookmarks or screen memos to be movedl(
YES
Edit the title. pYou can edit the title also by pressing m(
) from the list. pYou can enter up to 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters for a bookmark. If you press Oo(
without http:// or https:// is registered. pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters for a screen memo. If you press Oo(
memo is registered as No title.
) with a blank, the URL
) with a blank, the screen i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 179 Function menu Operation/Explanation Copy
(Copy URL) Copy
(Copy to microSD) Set as home URL You can copy the URL of the bookmark.
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying. pSee page 442 for how to paste copied characters. See page 357. You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES pYou can operate this only from the Bookmark list of Full Browser. Add desktop icon See page 127. transmission Ir/
(Send Ir data) Ir/
transmission transmission) See page 370. See page 372. No. of bookmarks You can display the number of bookmarks stored in the displayed Delete
[Delete (Delete this)]
Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) folder.
Delete (Delete this)YES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for bookmarks or screen memos to be deletedl(
You can delete all bookmarks or screen memos stored in the folder.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES 180 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i
<Screen Memo>
Saving Site Contents Save as a Screen Memo You can save a displayed page as a screen memo to the FOMA phone. You can display the page saved as a screen memo without connecting to i-mode. You can save up to 100 screen memos, however, the number of screen memos you can save decreases depending on the data volume. 1 From a page to be savedi(
Add screen memoYESSelect a destination folder. pSee page 186 when screen memos are stored to the maximum.
)Screen memo Information pUp to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters are stored for a title. For longer titles, the excess characters are deleted. pIf you save the Obtaining Completion display, its data file is saved as well. (The Obtaining Completion display for Chaku-uta Full music files, for i-motion movies with playable deadline, or for the ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited cannot be saved.) Some Obtaining Completion displays cannot be saved as screen memos. The display except the Obtaining Completion display is saved with a URL of that page of up to 256 half-pitch characters. pWhen you save SSL pages, their SSL certificates are saved as well. pThe contents entered in the text box, or selected with the pull-down menu, check box, or radio button are not saved to screen memos. pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per page. However, you can save up to 500 Kbytes of the i-motion Obtaining Completion display, up to 200 Kbytes of the Deco-mail Template Obtaining Completion display, up to 100 Kbytes of the Decome-Anime Template Obtaining Completion display, up to 1 Kbyte of the ToruCa Obtaining Completion display, and up to 20 Kbytes of the Download Dictionary Obtaining Completion display. Display a Screen Memo 1 iScreen memo 2 Select a folderSelect a screen memo. pUse No to check other screen memos. Screen Memo list Detailed Screen Memo display Information pThe page saved as a screen memo has the information at the time it was saved. This might differ from the latest information on the site. Function Menu of the Screen Memo Folder List Function menu Operate folder
(Add folder) Operate folder
(Edit folder name) Operate folder
(Delete folder) Security ON/OFF Operation/Explanation See page 179. See page 179. See page 179. You can set the folder to open only when you enter your Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES The folder changes to pTo release it, perform the same operation. No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen memos and protected screen memos in all folders. Function menu Delete all Operation/Explanation You can delete all screen memos. The folders will not be deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Screen Memo Folder list Function Menu of the Screen Memo List Function menu Operation/Explanation Move Edit title Protect ON/OFF No. of memos Delete
(Delete) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) See page 179. See page 179. You can protect screen memos not to be deleted. You can protect up to 50 screen memos, however, the number of screen memos you can protect decreases depending on the data volume. Protected items are indicated by pTo release protection, perform the same operation. You can display the number of stored screen memos and protected screen memos in the displayed folder. See page 180. See page 180. See page 180. Function Menu of the Detailed Screen Memo Display Function menu Operation/Explanation i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing Edit title l(
See page 179.
). (See page 175) Protect ON/OFF See page 181. Save image See page 182. 181 pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum. 2 YESSelect a destination folder. 3 To set it as a display, select YES. Go to Set display on page 331. Information pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name. When the file name is not specified, a part of the downloaded URL or imagexxx (xxx denotes numerals) is saved as the file name. pEven when an image is displayed on the site, it might not be displayed on the Picture viewer after saving it to the FOMA phone. Image of 20 x 20 dots pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a Deco-mail pictogram:
GIF or JPEG image Image without file restrictions Image of 6 Kbytes or less pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a frame or a mark:
Transparent GIF (except animation GIF) The extension is ifm. Image of Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller Images of Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480), CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96 are saved as frames, and others are saved as marks. pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per image via i-mode, or 500 Kbytes per image via Full Browser. pFor Full Browser, you cannot save some images. You can save images in BMP format and PNG format only to the microSD card. Function menu Operation/Explanation Add to phonebook See page 96. Others
(URL) Others
(Certificate) Others
(Sound effect) Others
(Retry) You can display the URL of the screen memo.
URL See page 176. See page 188. You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the beginning.
Retry pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area, the Flash movie might not be played back. Delete
YES Downloading Files or Data Items from Sites You can download the files such as images and melodies from sites and save them to the FOMA phone. You can save some files directly to the microSD card. Download Image You can save the image displayed on a site or screen memo, and then set it as the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or another display. You can save images, frames and marks for Deco-mail as well. You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) 1 From a site display/Detailed Screen Memo display
)Save image
i(
Save image or Save BG image pWhen you save an image, select it. 182 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Download Melody You can download melodies and set them as a ring tone and other tones. You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) 1 Bring up a melody downloadable site
Select a melodySaveYES
Select a destination folder. pSee page 352 for operations while a melody is being played back. pSelect Property to display the melody information.
(See page 352) pSee page 186 when melodies are stored to the maximum. Obtaining Completion display pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. 2 Select YES to set the downloaded melody as a ring toneSelect an incoming type. Information pFor some melodies, the play part might have been specified. If you set the play-part-specified melody for a ring tone, it is played back according to the setting of Position to play of Melody effect. pSome downloaded melodies might not be played back successfully. pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name. When the file name is not specified, a part of the downloaded URL or melodyxxx
(xxx denotes numerals) is saved as the file name. pUntitled melodies are indicated by No title on the Obtaining Completion display or list. pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per melody. Download PDF File You can download PDF files from sites for display. You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) 1 Bring up a PDF file downloadable siteSelect a PDF file. pWith the PDF file that cannot be displayed unless you download all pages, the confirmation display appears asking whether to download all pages. Select YES to select the destination folder. pIf you have not downloaded all pages, you can additionally download the remaining pages by using Download remain. pSee page 377 for how to save the displayed PDF file to the FOMA phone. You can save the PDF file containing pages that have not been downloaded or the PDF file of which download was suspended midway as well. pThe password entry display might be displayed depending on the PDF file. Enter the password, and then select OK. pSee page 374 for operations while PDF file is displayed. Information pThe file size of the PDF file you can download from i-mode sites is up to 2 Mbytes. You cannot download the PDF file in excess of 2 Mbytes. pYou might be able to display the failed-to-download PDF file by re-downloading. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 183 Download Kisekae Tool File You can download Kisekae Tool files from the site to change the ring tone, Stand-by display, icons, and others at a time. You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) pYou can download the pre-installed Kisekae Tool file from the P-SQUARE site.
(See page 186) 1 Bring up a Kisekae Tool downloadable siteSelect a Kisekae Tool fileSave
YESPhone or microSD pWhen you save a Kisekae Tool file to your FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to set the Kisekae Tool file at a time. pSelect Property to display the Kisekae Tool information. (See page 354) pSee page 186 when Kisekae Tool files are stored to the maximum. pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining Completion display
) to suspend downloading or when downloading is When downloading Kisekae Tool file is suspended When you press l(
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select YES to resume downloading the remaining part. Select NO to show the Obtaining Completion display. When you select Save pt., select Phone or microSD to save. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from Kisekae Tool in Data box. Information pYou can save up to 2,078 Kbytes per Kisekae Tool file. 184 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Download ToruCa File You can download ToruCa files from sites. You can save up to 495 files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume because the memory space is shared with other data files.
(See page 537) 1 Bring up a ToruCa file downloadable siteSelect a ToruCa fileSave
YESSelect a destination folder. pSelect Display to preview the ToruCa file. You can save the ToruCa file also by pressing Oo(
it is previewed.
) while pSee page 186 when ToruCa files are stored to the maximum. pPress i(
) and select Add screen memo to save the display as a screen memo. (See page 180) Obtaining Completion display Download Template (Deco-mail) You can download templates for Deco-mail from sites. You can save up to 100 templates including the pre-installed ones, however, the number of templates you can save decreases depending on the data volume. pYou can download the pre-installed templates from the P-SQUARE site.
(See page 186) 1 Bring up a template downloadable site
Select a templateSaveYES pSelect Property to display the information about the template. (See page 208) pSee page 208 for how to check the stored template. pSee page 186 when templates are stored to the maximum. pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining Completion display Information pWhen no decoration is set for the template, you cannot save it. pWhen a file is attached to the template, that file is deleted. pWhen the image whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is inserted, the inserted image is deleted when saving. When the inserted image is deleted and thus no decoration is found, you cannot save the template. pThe title of the downloaded template takes the name of YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm. (Y:
year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute) pYou can download up to 200 Kbytes per template file, but when the number of characters used for the mail text exceeds 5,000 full-pitch characters or 10,000 half-
pitch characters, or when the total of the image size inserted exceeds 90 Kbytes, you cannot save that template file. Download Template (Decome-Anime) You can download templates for Decome-Anime from sites. You can save up to 100 templates including the pre-installed ones, however, the number of templates you can save decreases depending on the data volume. pYou can download the pre-installed templates from the P-SQUARE site.
(See page 186) 1 Bring up a template downloadable site
Select a templateSaveYES
Phone or microSD pSelect Property to display the information about the template. (See page 210) pSee page 209 for how to check the stored template. pSee page 186 when templates are stored to the maximum. pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining Completion display 2 Select YES to compose Decome-Anime. Go to step 2 on page 206. Information pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per template file. Download Dictionary You can download dictionaries from sites. You can save up to 10 dictionaries including the pre-installed ones. pYou can download the pre-installed dictionaries from the P-SQUARE site.
(See page 186) 1 Bring up a dictionary downloadable siteSelect a dictionarySaveYES pSelect Property to display the information about the dictionary. (See page 443) pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining 2 <Not stored>To set it as a dictionary file, select YES. pSee page 443 for how to operate the downloaded dictionary. Completion display Information pYou can save up to 20 Kbytes per dictionary. pDepending on the site, you might not be able to download dictionaries. Download Chara-den Images You can download Chara-den images from sites. You can save up to three Chara-den images including the pre-installed ones. pYou can download the pre-installed chara-den images from the P-SQUARE site.
(See page 186) 1 Bring up a Chara-den image downloadable site
Select a Chara-den imageSave
YES pSelect Property to display the information about the Chara-den image. (See page 349) pSee page 186 when Chara-den images are stored to the maximum. pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining Completion display 185 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Information pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per Chara-den image. Search by i-mode You can look for your favorite files on the site and download them. The number of files you can save differs depending on the files you download. You cannot change the site. 1 Each selection displaySearch by i-modeYES
Select a file. pThe way of downloading differs depending on the file. Information pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. i-motion movies Chara-den images i-ppli programs Screen memos Kisekae Tool files When the data files are stored to the maximum If the maximum number of data files is stored or there is not enough memory when you try to save the data files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the unnecessary file and save new one. pPerform this operation to save the following data:
Images Melodies Programs Chaku-uta Full music files PDF files ToruCa files Templates 1. YESPut a check mark for data files to be deletedl(
As the data files except Chara-den images, templates, and screen memos are stored in the same storage area, you can select other files when deleting files. Select a folder and put a check mark for the files to be deleted. appears on the folder which contains the checked files. shortage. pYou can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing i(
Select all in page/Release in page. pEach time you press d or i(
) and select Change disp. mode, you can switch display/nondisplay of the folder volume and data volume. pWhen selecting a file in MUSIC, you can show the lower level folders by pressing l(
pEach time you press r, the upper level folder returns. appears when you put it for the files whose amount of data is equal to memory
), or each time you press i(
) and selecting
)YES
). 186 pFor programs, you need to delete many files when deleting other files because the data volume per program is large. pIf the maximum number of programs are stored when you execute Move program or try to save an i-ppli program or ToruCa file, you need to delete at least one file which belongs to the same type. pIf there is a security-applied folder for screen memos, the confirmation display appears asking whether to enable you to select screen memos in that security-applied folder. When you select YES, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code. pThe file set for another function is indicated by . pSee page 254 for deleting mail-linked i-ppli. pIf you operate this when moving an i-ppli program from the microSD card to the FOMA phone, you cannot delete the i-ppli program with its data file on the IC card. About P-SQUARE You can download the pre-installed Kisekae Tool file, templates, dictionaries, Chara-den images, and Deco-mail pictograms from the P-SQUARE site (Japanese only). iMenu (Menu/Search)
(Mobile Phone Maker) P-SQUARE QR code for accessing the site Uploading Files to Sites You can upload JPEG or GIF images and i-motion movies stored in the FOMA phone to a site. 1 Bring up a file uploadable site(Reference)
Picture or imotionSelect a file to be uploaded. pProcedure for uploading files differs depending on the site. Information pYou can upload up to 2 Mbytes in total. pYou cannot upload files that are prohibited from output from the FOMA phone to other devices. l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Operations from Highlighted Information You can easily make a call, send mail, display Internet web pages, start 1Seg, book programs, and set timer recordings using highlighted information (phone numbers, mail addresses, URLs, melodies, images, and so on) displayed on sites and in mail. pThe Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, i-ppli To, Media To and Address Link functions might not be available depending on the mail sent from a personal computer or the site. pYou might be able to use the Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, or i-ppli To function using highlighted information other than a phone number, mail address or URL. pIn B Mode of 2in1, the Mail To function is not available. pThe information is not highlighted in the Decome-Anime. Phone To/AV Phone To Function You can make voice calls, videophone calls or PushTalk calls by using phone numbers or similar information displayed on sites and in mail. pThe Phone To function to make a videophone call is called the AV Phone To function. 1 Select a phone number or similar information
Select a dialing type. pWhen you select Select image, select an image to be sent to other party during a videophone call. pSelect SMS to compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 244. pThe choices for dialing types may not be displayed when the phone number is prefixed by tel: or tel-av:. Go to step 2. 2 Dial pTo make an international call, select Intl dial assist. (See page 61) pTo set Caller ID Notification, select Notify caller ID. (See step 2 on page 48) Information pYou cannot make a call in Horizontal Open Style. Mail To Function You can send mail by using mail addresses or similar information displayed on sites and in mail. 1 Select a mail address or similar information. The destination mail address is already entered in the address field. Go to step 3 on page 198. Web To Function You can access Internet web pages, via i-mode or Full Browser, from URL or similar information displayed on sites or in mail. 1 Select a URL or similar information
i-mode or Full BrowserYES pWhen the URL or similar one contains the information of i-mode or Full Browser, you are connected via the function which corresponds to the information. pTo cancel during connection, select Cancel. To cancel while obtaining a page, press l(
). i-ppli To Function You can start i-ppli programs from URLs (links) displayed on sites and in mail. 1 Select i-ppli informationYES i-ppli starts. Information pEven if i-mode mail text contains a link to start an i-ppli program, you cannot quote the link when forwarding or replying to. Also, you cannot quote it when using DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function. 187 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Media To Function You can start 1Seg, book programs, or set timer recordings from the information (links) displayed on sites and in mail. 1 Select 1Seg informationYES 1Seg or the program booking/timer recording starts. pWhen the program booking/timer recording function starts, press l(
book a program or set timer recording. To change contents you want to book/set, go to step 1 of Book Program List on page 304 or step 1 of Timer Recording List on page 305.
) to Information
<i-mode Settings>
Setting i-mode 1 ii-mode settingsDo the following operations. Item Scroll Operation/Explanation You can set the number of lines that are scrolled for when you use Bo while displaying a site or screen memo.
Select the number of lines. Character size See i-mode on page 129. l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i pYou may not be able to use the Media To function even if information is highlighted. Set image display You can set whether to display images or Flash movies included Address Link Function You can bring up a map from the postal address shown in a site or others or can use the location information on the GPS compatible i-ppli program. You can send the location information by i-mode mail as well. 1 Select the location information such as postal address
Select an item. Run ippli . Selects and starts a GPS compatible i-ppli program. Read a map . Connects to the map site and displays a map. Paste to mail . Converts the location information into a URL and composes an on sites or in screen memos.
ON or OFF Set connection timeout See page 189. Host selection See page 189. imotion auto-play See page 194. Use phone information To display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is displayed, the information in the FOMA phone may be used. You can select whether to permit the information to be used for that case.
YES or NO i-mode mail message with the URL pasted to the text. Location info (Check loc. info)
. Displays the details of the selected location information. Sound effect setting You can set whether to make an effect tone sound for when you display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is displayed.
ON or OFF Doc. display settings See page 377. i-mode arrival act See page 89. Check settings You can check each of i-mode settings. Reset last URL See page 176. 188 Information
<Set image display>
pEven when ON is set, images might not be displayed correctly. In this case, is displayed. pWhen OFF is set, pIf you change this setting, Set image display of User settings of 1Seg is also is displayed and the data file is not received. changed.
<Use phone information>
pThe available information is as follows:
Date and time set by Set time Reception level of radio waves Battery level Sound volume set by Phone of Ring volume Language selected by Select language Model name and serial number of FOMA phone
<Sound effect setting>
pEven when ON is set, the effect tones may not sound depending on Flash movies.
<Set Connection Timeout>
Setting Connection Timeout It may take long to obtain some sites. You can set the time to wait before canceling obtaining. Obtaining is not canceled automatically when Unlimited is set. 1 ii-mode settingsSet connection timeout
Select a timeout. Information pEven when you have set Unlimited, you may be disconnected owing to radio wave conditions.
+m-8-1
<Host Selection>
Changing a Host from i-mode
(ISP Connection Communication) Normally, you do not need to change this setting. You can set the host (APN) to use for receiving services other than i-mode (DoCoMo). If you change this setting, you will not be able to use i-mode. 1 ii-mode settingsHost selection
Highlight <Not recorded>and press l(
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to the selected one. pTo delete the stored host, press i(
Security Code, and then select YES.
), select Delete, enter your Terminal 2 Do the following operations. Item Host name Host number Host address Host address 2 3 Press l(
Operation/Explanation
Enter a host name. pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Enter a host number. pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Enter a host address. pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Enter a host address 2. pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
). 189 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Information pIf you set any other host than i-mode, Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai Full are not applied.
<SSL Certificate>
Operating SSL Certificates 1 iOperate certificateCertificate
Highlight a certificate and press i(
Do the following operations.
) Item Certificate info Valid/Invalid Operation/Explanation The subject name, author, validity period, and serial number of the certificate are displayed. pYou can check the certificate also by pressing Oo(
instead of i(
The selected item is invalidated; then pWhen you select an invalid certificate, it will be validated. pIf you set a certificate to invalid, you cannot display the sites with changes to
). that SSL certificate. pYou cannot set DoCoMo Cert 2 to Invalid. Certificates used for SSL communication Certificate . Certificates issued by the authenticating company and stored in the FOMA phone at purchase. DoCoMo Certificate . Certificates required for connecting to the FirstPass Center or FirstPass sites; they are stored on the UIM (green/white). User Certificate . Certificates downloaded from the FirstPass Center by selecting Client certificate from the i-mode menu; they are stored on the UIM (green/white). 190
<Client Certificate>
Setting FirstPass User certificates verify that you have subscribed to the FOMA service. Downloaded user certificates are stored on the UIM for the use on FirstPass sites. When you cannot display a FirstPass site because the user certificate on the UIM has expired or the required user certificate is not stored on the UIM, you can request the issue and download the user certificate from the FirstPass Center. pYou can request and download user certificates from the FirstPass Center. pThis function is not available with the blue UIM. pThe display and operating method displayed in the FirstPass Center site are subject to change. pTo show FirstPass sites, you can use Full Browser as well. pYou cannot send/receive mail or receive Messages R/F while connected to the FirstPass Center. pSet the date and time using Set time beforehand to connect to the FirstPass Center. pThis function is not available overseas. Client Authentication pWith the FOMA phone, server authentication and client authentication are performed for safer data exchange. The site and your FOMA phone exchange certificates, check the other partys certificate and verify each other for safer communication service. By getting client authentication, you can enjoy more secure communication services. pClient authentication is available via the Internet communication from the FOMA phone or via the Internet communication with the FOMA phone connected to a personal computer. To use the personal computer for the client authentication, you need to install the FirstPass PC software from the provided CD-ROM. For details, refer to FirstPassManual (PDF format) in the FirstPassPCsoft folder on the CD-ROM. Adobe Reader (version 6.0 or higher is recommended) is required to see FirstPassManual (PDF format). If it is not installed in your personal computer, install Adobe Reader from the provided CD-ROM to see it. For details such as how to use it, refer to Adobe Reader Help. l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Access FirstPass Center You can perform user certificate operations on the site of the FirstPass Center site. 1 iOperate certificateClient certificateEnglish Site display for the FirstPass Center Information pBefore using the FirstPass Center, select The usage regulation (Japanese only) and carefully read the regulation. pYou are not charged a packet communication fee for connecting to the FirstPass Center. Request Issue of User Certificate for Download You need to request the issue of the user certificate before you download it. When requesting the issue of your user certificate is completed, download the user certificate. After the downloading is completed, it is saved on the UIM and the FirstPass sites will be displayable. 1 Site display for the FirstPass Center
Request your certificateContinue pFor an update, the message Updating user certificate is displayed. pWhen you have already requested the issue of the user certificate, select Download from the site display for the FirstPass Center, go to step 3. 2 Enter your PIN2 code. pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry. pSee page 132 for PIN2 code. 3 DownloadContinue pIf you do not download the user certificate immediately, select Menu. From the confirmation display asking whether to close the SSL page, select YESto return to the site display for the FirstPass Center. Information pBefore downloading a new or an updated certificate, be sure to request the user certificate to be issued. User certificates cannot be downloaded until the request for issue has been made. Access Sites with User Certificate You can connect to FirstPass sites with your user certificate. 1 Bring up a FirstPass siteSelect an itemYES 2 Enter your PIN2 code. pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry. pSee page 132 for PIN2 code. Information pIf you try to connect to the FirstPass site without the user certificate or when its available period is expired, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue connecting to the site. Select NOto return to the previous page. Download or update the user certificate from the FirstPass Center site and then access the site again. pThe packet communication fee for accessing the FirstPass site is included in Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai Full. 191 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 2 Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations. Item Default URL Host address 3 Press l(
Operation/Explanation
Enter a default URL. pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Enter a host address. pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
). Before Using FirstPass pFirstPass is DoCoMos electronic authentication service. By using FirstPass, client authentication is enabled, whereby the site and your FOMA phone exchange certificates, check the other partys certificate and perform mutual authentication. pWhen requesting issue of a user certificate, carefully read The usage regulation
(Japanese only) on the display, agree to this, and then make the request. pYou need to enter the PIN2 code to use the user certificate. Once you have entered your PIN2 code, all subsequent operations will be deemed to be done by you, so be careful not to let anyone else use your UIM or PIN2 code. pIf your UIM is lost or stolen, DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual can revoke your user certificate. pDoCoMo bears no obligation or responsibility with regard to the sites and information provided by FirstPass sites. Please solve the problem between you and FirstPass sites. pDoCoMo and the CA do not guarantee security when you use FirstPass and SSL, so you should use them on your own judgment and responsibility. Request Revocation of User Certificate You can revoke the downloaded user certificate. 1 Site display of the FirstPass CenterOther settings
Revoke your certificateYESEnter your PIN2 code. pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry. pSee page 132 for PIN2 code. 2 ContinueContinueContinue Information pTo use FirstPass after revoking a certificate, you need to apply again for your user certificate to be issued and then download it. pSee page 190 for how to view the download user certificate.
<Certificate Host>
Changing a CA Center Normally, you do not need to change this setting. You can set the host for downloading the user certificate. 1 iOperate certificateCertificate host
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l(
). pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host. pTo delete the stored host, press i(
Security Code, and then select YES.
), select Delete, enter your Terminal 192 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i What is i-motion?
i-motion movies are composed of video, sound and music, and you can play them back obtaining from i-motion compatible sites into your FOMA phone. You can set the i-motion movie for a ring tone. Two types of i-motion movies are available as shown below. The type of the obtained i-motion movie differs depending on the site or file. You can save up to 10 Mbytes per i-motion movie. Categories Type Playback type Standard
(normal) type
(can be saved) Plays back after obtaining Plays back while obtaining Plays back while obtaining Streaming type
(cannot be saved) Description Plays back after obtaining all the data of an i-motion movie. Plays back while obtaining an i-motion movie. After obtaining, you can play it back in the same way as Plays back after obtaining. Plays back while obtaining an i-motion movie. The data is deleted after playback, so you cannot play it back again or save it to the FOMA phone.
<Obtain i-motion Movie>
Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites Play Back an i-motion Movie Obtained from a Site 1 Select an i-motion movie from an i-motion obtainable sitePlay See page 339 for the operation during playback. pIf an i-motion movie can be played back during obtaining, it will be played back during obtaining. pIf imotion auto-play is set to ON, the i-motion movie will be played back automatically after it is obtained. pSelect Property to display the i-motion information.
(See page 340) pSee page 180 to save a screen memo. Obtaining Completion display Information pDepending on the accessed site or an i-motion movie, you might not be able to obtain the data or play it back during obtaining, or play it back after obtaining. Also, you cannot obtain an i-motion movie in ASF format. pSee page 339 for the file formats of playable i-motion movies. pEven when you stop playing back the data of standard (normal) type while obtaining, obtaining still continues. pEven if imotion auto-play is set to ON, the data is not automatically played back after obtaining when it is played back while obtaining. pFor an i-motion movie that has restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable deadline, is displayed at the head of the title. An i-motion movie with the playable period restricted cannot be played back before or after the restriction period. If you remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/
time information in your FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the i-motion movie that has restrictions on the playable period and playable deadline. See imotion info for checking the playback restrictions. pimotion info of an i-motion movie and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by date/time with Summer time set to OFF. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 193
<imotion Auto-play>
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion Movies You can set whether to play back an i-motion movie automatically, for when you have obtained a standard (normal) type of i-motion movie from a site or have selected a screen memo which contains a standard
(normal) type of i-motion movie. 1 ii-mode settingsimotion auto-playON or OFF Information pNote that a streaming type of i-motion movie is played back automatically even if this function is set to OFF. Information pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave conditions, the playback during obtaining might be suspended or the images might be distorted. You can repeatedly play back the standard (normal) type of i-motion movies after obtaining, but cannot play back the streaming type of i-motion movies. Save an i-motion Movie You can save the obtained i-motion movie to your FOMA phone and set it for a ring tone, the Stand-by display, and the Wake-up display. You can save up to 101.6 Mbytes of files in total sharing the memory space with other data files. (See page 536)
Select a destination folder. pSee page 186 for when i-motion movies are stored to the maximum. 1 Obtaining Completion displaySaveYES 2 Select YES to execute Set imotion. Go to Set imotion on page 340.
) to suspend downloading or when downloading is When downloading i-motion movie is suspended When you press l(
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select YES to resume downloading the remaining part. Select NO to show the Obtaining Completion display for a partially savable i-motion file. Select Save pt. to save that file to any folder in imotion in Data box. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from Data box. pThe file name of the partially saved i-motion movie is movie. pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved i-motion movie has expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file. You can delete the partially saved file when you try to download the file. Information pDepending on the i-motion movie, you might not be able to save the obtained data to the FOMA phone. pPartially saved i-motion movies cannot be played back from Data Box. 194 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i What is i-Channel?
i-Channel is a service that news, weather forecast and others are distributed to i-Channel mobile phones as graphical information. Information is periodically received and tickers flow on the Stand-by display for the latest information. You can press the i-Channel key to show the Channel list. (See page 195) Also, two types of channels are available, Basic channel which is provided by DoCoMo and Favorite channel which is provided by IPs
(Information Providers). The packet communication fee that is charged for auto-updates of information distributed through Basic channel is not charged. For Favorite channel which is enabled by registering your favorite channels, you are separately charged a packet communication fee for when information is automatically updated. Note that you are separately charged a packet communication fee for browsing detailed information. When you use the international roaming service, you are charged a packet communication fee for both auto-update and browsing detailed information. pi-Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
(You need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-Channel.) pFor details on i-Channel, refer to the Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pThe i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only. Information pWhen the FOMA phone is turned off or if radio wave conditions are bad such as when it is out of the service area, you may not be able to receive information even if you have contracted to the i-Channel service. In that case, select the channel for unsigned subscribers that appears by pressing +
Zo; then you can now receive information, and tickers flow on the Stand-by display. If your FOMA phone remains in the default state, you may not be able to receive information. Press +
received and tickers flow on the Stand-by display. Zo, and then information is pTo receive i-Channel information overseas, you are charged a communication fee by channel (domestic talk-free service does not apply). pAfter you cancel the contract for the i-Channel service, the ticker setting is automatically set to off. Using i-Channel When Ticker ON/OFF is set to ON, up to 10 ticker files for the latest information flow repeatedly on the Stand-by display. If you want to know more about the information, you can obtain the details from the Channel list. 1 Press Zo. blinks during receiving information. The Channel list appears regardless of the Ticker ON/
OFF setting. p pYou cannot display the Channel list even when you press Zo when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. 2 Select an item (link). Channel list Information pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work even when information comes in. In addition, the Call/Charging indicator does not light or flicker. Zo to pTickers are not displayed in the following cases:
When the information is automatically updated after that or when you press +
receive the latest information, tickers automatically flow. When the UIM is replaced. When Host selection is changed. When Reset i-Channel is executed. When Reset settings is executed. When Initialize is executed. However, the information might not be automatically updated when Host selection is changed. To receive the latest information, press +
pWhen Host selection is changed, the i-Channel connecting end is also changed. (In Zo to display the Channel list. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l pIf you cancel the contract for the i-mode service before you cancel the contract for the ordinary, you do not need to change the setting.) i-Channel service, the ticker setting remains on. 195 Information Information
<Reset i-Channel>
pTickers are not displayed after you execute Reset i-Channel. When the information is automatically updated after that or when you press +
information, tickers automatically flow. Zo to receive the latest pDepending on your usage state, you might receive information from i-Channel when you display the Channel list. Setting How Ticker is Displayed 1 ii-ChannelDo the following operations. Item Channel list Operation/Explanation You can display the Channel list. Go to step 2 on page 195. Ticker ON/OFF You can set whether to display tickers on the Stand-by display.
ON or OFF Ticker font size set. See i-Channel ticker on page 129. Ticker color set. You can set the background color and font color of ticker.
Select a pattern. pYou can check the ticker by pressing l(
). Ticker scroll speed You can set the ticker flowing speed.
Select a speed. pYou can check the ticker by pressing l(
You can initialize the ticker information, set Ticker ON/OFF to ON, and i-Channel ticker of Private window to OFF.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
). Reset i-Channel Information pYou can perform Ticker ON/OFF, Ticker font size set, Ticker color set., Ticker scroll speed, and Reset i-Channel for each mode of 2in1. However, i-Channel information is initialized for all modes. Further, when 2in1 is deactivated, they become common to the settings in A Mode.
<Ticker ON/OFF>
pIn Public Mode (Drive Mode), or during Lock All, tickers are not displayed. 196 l e n n a h C
i
n o i t o m
i
e d o m
i Mail What is i-mode Mail? . 198 Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail Composing i-mode Mail to Send . <Compose Message> 198 Composing Deco-mail to Send . 202 Creating Decome-Anime to Send . 206 Composing Deco-mail or Decome-Anime by Using Template
. <Template> 208 Attaching Files . <Attachments> 210 Using Photo-sending . <Photo-sending> 212 Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically . <Mail Auto-receive> 213 Receiving Selected i-mode Mail . <Receive Option> 214 Checking whether Center Holds i-mode Mail
. <Check New Message> 215 Replying to Received i-mode Mail
. <Reply> <Reply with Quote> 215 Forwarding Received i-mode Mail. <Forward> 216 When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is Received . 216 Operating Mail Box Displaying Mail from Inbox/Outbox/Draft
. <Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft> 218 How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display . 220 Managing Mail Messages. 224 Using Mail History Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
. <Sent Address> <Received Address> 229 Setting Mail Settings Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder . <Auto-sort> 231 Creating Mail Group. <Mail Group> 233 Setting Mail and Messages R/F . <Mail Settings> 233 Using Message Services Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
. <Receive Message R/F> 235 Reading Received Messages R/F . <Display Message R/F> 236 Using Emergency Alert Area Mail What is Emergency Alert Area Mail? . 238 Receiving Emergency Alert Area Mail . 238 Setting Emergency Alert Area Mail. <Area Mail Settings> 239 Using Chat Mail Using Chat Mail . <Chat Mail> 239 Creating Chat Group . <Chat Group> 243 Using SMS Composing SMS Messages to Send . <Compose SMS> 244 Receiving SMS Messages Automatically . <Receive SMS> 245 Checking whether Center Holds SMS Messages
. <Check New SMS> 246 Setting SMS . <SMS Settings> 246 Using Web Mail Using Web Mail . <Web Mail> 247 197 What is i-mode Mail?
Once you subscribe to i-mode, you can exchange e-mails over the Internet as well as with other i-mode phones. You can attach up to 10 files (photo or movie file, etc.) within 2 Mbytes in total besides mail text. The i-mode mail also supports Deco-mail, so you can change the character color, character size, and background color of mail text. Further, you can use the Deco-mail pictograms, so you can easily send pleasant messages. pFor details on i-mode mail, refer to the Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version.
<Compose Message>
Composing i-mode Mail to Send You can compose and send i-mode mail messages. You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS messages to the Outbox. See page 202 for composing Deco-mail. l i a M 1 ll(
) Address field Subject field Attachment field Text field
(When you enter text, the number of bytes is displayed.) 2 Select the address fieldSelect an item. Phonebook. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or Sent address . Select a phone number or mail address and press Received address . Select a phone number or mail address and press mail address. Oo(
Oo(
). Mail group . Select a mail group. Enter address . Enter a mail address or phone number. pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. pIf the destination is an i-mode phone, you can send mail also by entering only the part preceding the @ mark of a mail address. pSee page 199 for sending to multiple destination addresses. pSee page 199 for deleting an added address. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters. 3 Select the subject fieldEnter a subject. 4 Select the attachment fieldSelect an item. 5 Select the text fieldEnter text. pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch pSee page 210 for how to select an attachment. characters. Message Composition display pSee page 200 for pasting a header or signature. pYou can select a Deco-mail picture by pressing and holding d for at least one second. 6 Press l(
). Message Entry display The animation display during transmission appears and the mail message is sent. pTo cancel sending midway, press Oo(
least one second). However, the mail message might be sent depending on the timing.
) or press and hold r(for at 198 7 OK Information pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be displayed correctly at the destination. pIf you send an i-mode mail message to other carriers mobile phone with a pictograph entered, the pictograph is automatically converted into a similar pictograph at the receiving end. Depending on the model or function of the receiving ends mobile phone, however, the pictograph might not be correctly displayed or be converted into a character or = when no corresponding pictograph is found. pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the FOMA phones storage maximum, they will be overwritten from the oldest one. However, protected sent mail messages cannot be overwritten. pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the maximum and those messages are all protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full. Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages, and then operate again. pWhen you select Compose message from the Function menu such as when entering a phone number, the mail address is entered as a destination address if the phone number and mail address are stored in a Phonebook entry. When multiple mail addresses are stored in the Phonebook entry, the first mail address is entered. pIf you try to send the mail whose address is a phone number headed by 184/186, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail. pYou cannot send mail to the addresses that include a comma (,). pYou can enter an address in the To, Cc and Bcc fields. pIf the destination address has been stored in the Phonebook with a secret code, the secret code will be added automatically at sending. However, even if a secret code is stored in the Phonebook, the secret code will not be added and the mail will be sent as ordinary i-mode mail unless the address is a phone number or phone number@docomo.ne.jp. pIf you store the secret code and send mail to a mail address other than that of DoCoMo mobile phones, you might not receive the error message for unknown address. pThe recipients might not be able to receive the full length of the subject depending on their phones. pYou can send up to 2,000 full-pitch characters in text to the i-mode phone of the mova service. pEach line feed is counted as one full-pitch character, and a space is counted as one full-pitch or half-pitch character. Information pThe mail message you entered a Deco-mail pictogram becomes a Deco-mail message. pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose i-mode mail. Function Menu of the Message Composition Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Send Preview Save Operate receiver
(Add receiver) You can send the mail message. Go to step 7 on page 199. Check the address, subject, text and attachments before sending. pYou can send the mail message by pressing l(
When composing or editing the mail, you can save it to the Draft.
). You can add multiple addresses in the address field to send the same i-mode mail to multiple recipients simultaneously. You can send the same mail to up to five addresses at the same time.
Add receiverSelect an item. Phonebook. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a M a i l Sent address . Select a phone number or mail address Received address . Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). Enter address. Enter a mail address or phone number. pTo consecutively add addresses, select <Not entered> and repeat the above operations. pPress i(
selected mail address. Select YES. pPress i(
type of mail. (See page 200)
) and select Delete receiver to delete the
) and select Change rcv. type to change the pSelect an entered mail address on the Mail Composition display
) to show the Address list.
l(
You can delete the selected address when there are multiple addresses.
Delete receiverYES Operate receiver
(Delete receiver) 199
1 2 3 | User Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB |
Function menu Operate receiver
(Change rcv. type) Operation/Explanation
Change rcv. typeSelect a type of address. To . This is the direct destination address. To recipients are displayed at the receiving ends. Cc . Specify to let parties know the mail contents in addition to the direct recipients. Cc recipients are displayed at the receiving ends. Bcc . Specify to hide the recipients from others. Bcc recipients are not displayed at the receiving ends. They might not be displayed depending on the mobile phone, device, or mail software of the receiving end. Operate att. file
(Activate camera) You can shoot and attach an image or i-motion movie.
Activate cameraSelect a shooting mode. pSee page 155 and page 158 for how to shoot. See page 210. See page 212. You can read in a Deco-mail template and compose a Deco-mail message.
Load template pWhen the text has already been entered, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the text.
Select a template. The contents of the template are entered into the text. pWhile selecting a template, press l(
contents of the template.
) to check the pSee page 202 for composing Deco-mail. You can save the Deco-mail you are composing as a template.
Save templateYES pSee page 186 when templates are stored to the maximum. pSee page 208 for how to check the stored template. l i a M Operate att. file
(Attach file) Operate att. file
(Delete att. file) Template
(Load template) Template
(Save template) 200 Function menu Add header/sig. Operation/Explanation You can paste a header/signature at the beginning or ending of the text of the i-mode mail message.
Add header or Add signature pYou need to store the header/signature beforehand. (See page 235) Information
<Operate receiver>
pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for To, Cc, and Bcc already contains five addresses in total or contains no addresses. pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the To field is blank.
<Template (Save template)>
pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the title of the template. If no subject is entered, the title takes the name of YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm.
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
<Add header/sig.>
pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including the header/signature, would exceed 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters. pIf the decoration such as font color or character size is set for the top or end of text, the header or signature will be decorated as well. Function Menu of the Message Entry Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Decorate mail See page 203. Template
(Load template) Template
(Save template) See page 200. See page 200. Full pitch/Half pitch See page 439. Copy Cut Paste See page 442. See page 442. See page 442. Function menu Phrase/code/quote
(Bar code reader) Char. input/dict.
(Own dictionary) Char. input/dict.
(Learned words) Char. input/dict.
(Change input mode) Char. input/dict.
(Candid. disp. size) Char. input/dict.
(Predict) Char. input/dict.
(Candidate display) Char. input/dict.
(Character set time) Char. input/dict.
(2/NIKO-touch guide) Help JUMP Preview Operation/Explanation See page 165. See page 442. See page 443. See page 440. See Character input (Candid. disp. size) on page 129. See page 439. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. See page 441. You can check the contents of the text before sending. pYou can preview also by pressing p. Function menu Operation/Explanation Undo Pictograph/
symbols
(Pictograph) Pictograph/
symbols
(Symbols) Pictograph/
symbols
(Space) Phrase/code/quote
(Common phrases) Phrase/code/quote
(Kuten code) Phrase/code/quote
(Input time) Phrase/code/quote
(Quote phonebook) Phrase/code/quote
(Quote own data) Phrase/code/quote
(By position loc.) Phrase/code/quote
(From loc. history) Phrase/code/quote
(From phonebook) After entering or deleting characters, pasting data, or operating on a decoration, you can undo your most recent operation. You can do it up to twice. pYou can undo the operation also by pressing m(
See page 439.
). See page 439. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. See page 440. You can obtain the current location information by using the GPS function, convert that information into the URL, and then paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Paste locationBy position loc.Oo(
You can convert the location information retained in Location History of the GPS function into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Paste locationFrom loc. history
Select a location recordYES
)YES You can convert the location information stored in the Phonebook into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Paste locationFrom phonebook
Select a Phonebook entryOo(
)YES M a i l 201 Information
<Undo>
pOnce you use Undo to return to the previous status, you cannot cancel this by using Undo again. pIf you close the Message Entry display, you cannot return to the previous status by using Undo when you re-open it. (However, after you have exited Preview, you can return to the previous status by Undo.)
<Phrase/code/quote>
pYou can paste up to 512 half-pitch characters by Paste Location, and the pasted URL is counted as the number of characters in the mail text. p is inserted before the URL pasted by Paste Location. However, you can delete it while editing. Composing Deco-mail to Send When editing an i-mode mail message, you can change the size of the font and the color of the background as well as inserting images, thus composing your own original mail. You can compose Deco-mail also using the templates (patterns). (See page 208) l i a M Activated decoration Blink Ticker Background color Insert line Insert image Font color Font size Swing Deco-mail pictogram Moving font effect Word alignment Entering characters Previewing 1 Perform the operations in step 1 through step 3 on page 198. 202 2 Select the text fieldDecorate the text using Palette. pSee page 203 for how to use Palette. To enter text after selecting decorations dSelect one of decorationsEnter text. To set decorations after entering text Enter textd
(Select area) Go to Select area on page 204. pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. (The number of characters you can enter decreases depending on the decoration.) pOnce you decorate the mail text, pYou can preview the contents of the text by pressing p. Press i(
) to finish previewing and return to the former display. appears. 3 Press Oo(
). The Message Composition display is displayed. Go to step 6 on page 198. Information pEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the decoration data remain and the number of characters you can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then delete the characters. If you delete the characters by pressing and holding
-r for at least one second, the characters as well as the decoration data are deleted. pWhen you reply with quote to the received Deco-mail or you forward it, the decorations or inserted images are displayed at the replying destination or forwarding destination. pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach to mail for sending, the image is deleted. pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000 bytes, it is received at the destination as a mail message with the URL for browsing Deco-mail described depending on the recipients i-mode phone. However, depending on the model, only the mail text without the URL for browsing might be received. pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send or receive Deco-mail to and from devices such as personal computers. Information pThe movement of Ticker/Swing, blink and animation playback stop when a certain period has passed. About Decorations You can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette. You can set multiple decorations for one point. pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for one point. pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by Font Color. pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images and moving font effects are inserted with the specified state. pYou can enter Deco-mail pictograms using Insert image, and from Pictograph on the Function menu as well. How to use Palette Press d from the Message Entry display to display Palette. pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed. Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo(
); then you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can release the area selection also by pressing r while the area is selected. pPress i(
also by pressing r while you are operating on it. Switch operations You can switch between the operation of Palette and the operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed. pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns. When you use Palette in succession, press d and operate.
) to close Palette. You can close Palette How to operate Decoration Function Insert image
(Font effect) Insert image
(My picture) Insert image
(Camera) Operation/Explanation
Select a folderSelect an image.
Select a moving font effectEnter text. You can convert characters to a mark and insert it into the text. The mark animates in various ways and conveys your feelings to the other party.
pTo delete the moving font effect, move the cursor to the moving font effect and press r. You can insert the image stored in My picture into the text of mail.
pYou can select a Deco-mail picture by pressing and holding d for at least one second from the Message Entry display. pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and press r. You can insert the image shot by the camera on the spot into the text of mail.
pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF (128 x 96),
Shoot a still image. QCIF (176 x 144), QVGA (240 x 320) or CIF (352 x 288). pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and press r. pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 155 for how to shoot. M a i l Palette operation Font color You can change the color of characters and lines to be entered.
Select a colorEnter text. pYou can switch between 20 Color and 256 Color by pressing c(
pIn the font color changing mode, is displayed at the
). upper right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession. pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text. 203 Function Operation/Explanation Background color You can change the background color of the mail text. Insert line Undo
Select a color. pYou can switch between 20 Color and 256 Color by pressing c(
You can insert a horizontal line into the mail text. The line feed is inserted automatically, and the line is inserted. pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the line and press r. You can return to the previous status of the set decoration. You can do it up to twice. pYou can undo the operation also by pressing m(
). Decorate all reset You can release all the decorations.
YES pIf you have inserted an image, the message In-line image is deleted is displayed. l i a M 204 Function Select area Font size Operation/Explanation You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size, Word Alignment, Ticker and Swing over the selected text you have entered. You can also change the set decoration, add another decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.
Select a start point. pYou can select all text by pressing i(
selecting YES.
) and
Select an end point. Set, change, add or cancel each decoration. p is displayed at the upper right of the display during selecting decoration area.
<Set, change, or add decoration>
Select an icon and set, change, or add decorations. pSelect another icon in succession to change the multiple decorations or add decorations.
pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set, reselect each icon and complete decorations.
<Release Blink, Ticker, or Swing>
Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or Swing
Select the same icon again. You can change the size of characters to be entered.
Select a font sizeEnter text. pIn the font size changing mode, or is displayed at the upper right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession. pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text. Function Select blink Select ticker Select swing Operation/Explanation You can make characters to be entered blink.
Enter text. The set characters are blinking. pIn the blink setting mode, is displayed at the upper right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d
(Reset blink) You can make characters to be entered and images to be inserted flow (moving from right to left).
Enter text. The line feed is inserted automatically and before and after the cursor. pIn the ticker setting mode, is displayed at the upper is displayed right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d
The line feed is inserted automatically.
(Reset ticker) You can make characters to be entered and images to be inserted swing (moving to left and right back).
Enter text. The line feed is inserted automatically and before and after the cursor. pIn the swing setting mode, is displayed at the upper is displayed right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d
The line feed is inserted automatically.
(Reset swing) Function Word alignment Operation/Explanation You can change the position of characters to be entered and images to be inserted.
Select a word alignmentEnter text. The line feed is inserted automatically, and the alignment is set. pIn the word alignment setting mode, is displayed at the upper right of the display. pYou can set other decorations in succession. pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text. Information
<Insert image>
pYou can insert up to 20 types of images within 90 Kbytes in total. However, you can insert up to 2 kinds of flash movie. Even if the inserted types of images are 20 or fewer, the confirmation display appears for some operations asking whether to re-edit the text because the maximum number of images has exceeded. pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a single type of file. If you copy/paste the image already inserted, that image is regarded as the same image and handled as a single type of file. However, if you insert the same Flash image, it is handled as the second type of files. pYou can apply Blink, Ticker, Swing, and Word Alignment to the inserted images, however, you cannot apply any decorations to Flash movies.
<Font color>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another color is set, the setting changes to that color. pThe color for pictographs is also subjected to the specified font color. To restore the color to ordinary one, select /Default. pYou cannot change the color of Deco-mail pictograms.
<Background color>
pYou cannot change the background color when editing the header or signature.
<Font size>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different font size is set, the font size is changed to that size of the character. pYou cannot change the size of the Deco-mail pictogram.
<Select blink>
pYou cannot make Deco-mail pictograms blink. M a i l 205 Creating Decome-Anime to Send Decome-Anime is a mail service which enables you to create expressive mail using Decome-Anime templates on which Flash images with messages and images are available. You can create Decome-Anime with pre-installed templates or purchased templates from IPs (Information Providers) site. 3 Select the text fieldPhone or microSD
Select the Decome-Anime template to be sent. pWhen a Decome-Anime template is already selected, the Edit Decome-Anime display appears. Go to step 4. pPress l(
pOnce you select a Decome-Anime template, pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you cannot edit contents. pWhen you send the contents of the Decome-Anime template as they are, go to
) to display the preview of the Decome-Anime template. appears. step 5. pYou cannot edit the text in the Decome-Anime template when it has once been saved to the Draft, when you forward from the Inbox, or when you re-edit from the Outbox. 4 Select the contents field to be edited. To edit characters l i a M Edit Decome-Anime Previewing 1 lCreate new Decome-Anime display Select the character entry fieldEdit characters. To change images Select the insert image field
Select a folder, and select the image to be changed. pYou cannot set decoration when you enter characters. You cannot paste header or signature. pWhen you break a line, the number of the characters decreases for remaining space. pYou can edit total of up to 90 Kbytes of templates, characters, and images. When 90 Kbytes are exceeded, you can no longer edit them. pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you might not be able to insert the Flash movies even if its volume is even less than 90 Kbytes. pAs the fonts and display position of images and characters are fixed, you cannot 2 Perform the operations in step 2 through step 4 on page 198. Decome-Anime Creation display 206 edit them. 5 l(
) You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime. Go to step 6 on page 198. Information Function menu Operation/Explanation pYou cannot create a Decome-Anime when the number of sent mail messages in Template Outbox has reached the maximum. pThe image you can insert is a GIF file (including animation GIF), JPEG file, and SWF file. pWhen an animation GIF file or SWF file is inserted, overflowing of the volume size for sending might occur. pEven when sending fails, you cannot re-edit it. pWhen you send a Decome-Anime, it is received at the destination as a mail message with the URL for browsing Decome-Anime described depending on the recipients i-mode phone. However, depending on the model, only the text of Decome-Anime without the URL for browsing might be received. pYou cannot use received Decome-Anime as a template. Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Creation Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Send Preview Save You can send the Decome-Anime. Go to step 7 on page 199. You can check the Decome-Anime by playback before sending. pSee page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works. pPress i(
display.
) to go back to the Decome-Anime creation When creating or editing the Decome-Anime, you can save it to the Draft. After saving, you cannot re-edit the text of Decome-Anime.
YES Operate receiver See page 199. Operate att. file See page 200. You can read in a Decome-Anime template and create a Decome-Anime.
Phone or microSD
Select a Decome-Anime template to be sent. Go to step 4 on page 206. pIf any Decome-Anime template is selected, the confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the current contents to read in the new one. Function Menu of the Edit Decome-Anime Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Template Preview Delete Quit editing See page 207. See page 207. You can delete the insert image. Deleted insert image field becomes blank. You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime. Go to step 6 on page 198. M a i l 207
<Template>
Composing Deco-mail or Decome-Anime by Using Template The Deco-mail template and Decome-Anime template are available for the templates. Template is form data for Deco-mail for which decorations such as font size and image insertion are already specified. Other than those pre-installed in the FOMA phone, you can download templates from sites (see page 184). You can also save Deco-mail you sent, received or composed as a Deco-mail template (see page 200 and page 228). You can edit the saved Deco-mail template using Palette. The Decome-Anime template denotes the pattern data for Decome-Anime and is created by combining characters and animations. Other than those pre-installed in the FOMA phone, you can also download templates from sites. You cannot edit the Decome-Anime template. pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can re-download them from the P-SQUARE site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them. l i a M 208 Deco-mail Template 1 lTemplateDecomailSelect a template.
) to pPress l(
compose Deco-mail using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 198. pEven if you set Header/
signature to automatically paste the header or signature, you cannot paste it. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Deco-mail Template list Detailed Deco-mail Template display Function Menu of the Deco-mail Template List Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose a Deco-mail message using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 198. Sort Edit title Info You can change the order of displayed templates.
Select an order.
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters. You can display the file size, saved date and time of the template, and whether it contains images. No. of messages You can display the number of stored templates. Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES Function menu Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) Operation/Explanation
Delete selectedPut a check mark for templates to be deletedl(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Function Menu of the Detailed Deco-mail Template Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose a Deco-mail message using the contents of Edit the template. Go to step 2 on page 198. You can edit the contents of the template and save it.
Edit the textOo(
YES . Overwrites and saves. NO . Saves as a separate file. pSee step 2 through step 3 on page 202 for how to edit the text. pSee page 186 when the templates are stored to the maximum.
)YES or NO Save insert image You can save images inserted into the template or Deco-mail text, and set them as the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.
Select an imageYESSelect a destination folder. Go to step 3 on page 182. pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum. Information
<Edit>
pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm
(Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).
<Save insert image>
pDeco-mail pictograms are saved to the (Favorite) folder in the Decomail-pictograph folder. Decome-Anime Template pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. 1 lTemplateDecome-AnimePhone or microSD 2 Select a template. You can display the preview of the template. pPress l(
create Decome-Anime using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 206.
) to Decome-Anime Template list Previewing M a i l When you display the playback display of Decome-Anime or Preview The animation is played back automatically. Some Decome-Anime may sound effect tones, or vibrate the FOMA phone. Also, depending on the Decome-Anime, you can operate by using Bo, Oo, 0 through 9, s, or a on playback display or preview. pPress m(
resume the animation playback.
) to pause the animation during playback. Press m(
) again to pThe effect tone sounds according to the setting of Auto melody play. When the message is previewed from the Decome-Anime Template list, the effect tone sounds regardless of the setting. However, when a melody file is attached, that melody is played back. The effect tone for Decome-Anime does not sound. pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background. pThe FOMA phone vibrates regardless of the setting of Vibrator or Manner Mode. pSome Decome-Anime refer to the phone-information data in your FOMA phone. To permit the use of the information in your FOMA phone, set Use phone information in i-mode settings to YES. (YES is set at purchase.) 209 Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Template List Function menu Create Decome-Anime Preview Edit title Operation/Explanation You can create a Decome-Anime using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 206. You can display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Copy to microSD See page 357. Copy to phone See page 358. Info You can display the title, file name, format, and whether it set with file restriction. l i a M transmission Ir/
(Send Ir data) Ir/
transmission transmission) See page 370. See page 372. Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) See page 208. See page 209. See page 209. 210
<Attachments>
Attaching Files You can send an i-mode mail message with files attached. You can attach following files:
Still image Melody ToruCa file PDF file ToDo item Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser) Word Excel You can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total. pYou cannot attach files that are prohibited from being attached to mail or output from Moving image/i-motion movie Phonebook entry Schedule event PowerPoint SD other files the FOMA phone to other devices. pRegardless of the File restriction setting, you can attach the still image or moving image/i-motion movie shot with your FOMA phone or the files received via infrared rays. pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on the Message Composition display. pDepending on the recipients i-mode phone, it receives only compatible files within the memory space of that model. pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the size of attached files. 1 Message Composition display
Select the attachment field
Do the following operations. Item Picture Melody imotion Operation/Explanation
Select a folderSelect an image. pHighlight an attached image and press Oo(
the image. Press r to return to the former display.
Select a folderSelect a melody. pHighlight an attached melody and press Oo(
back the melody. Press any key to stop the playback.
) to display
) to play
Select a folderSelect an i-motion movie. pHighlight the attached i-motion movie and press Oo(
play back the i-motion movie. Press r during playback or stop the playback to return to the former display.
) to Operation/Explanation Information Item ToruCa PDF Phonebook Schedule ToDo Bookmark Document file Other When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details), it is attached as a ToruCa file (details).
Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file. pHighlight the attached ToruCa file and press Oo(
preview it. Press r to return to the former display.
Select a folderSelect a PDF file. pHighlight an attached PDF file and press Oo(
the PDF file. Press r to return to the former display.
Select a search methodSelect a Phonebook entry
Oo(
pWhen you specified a search method last time, the Phonebook
) to display
) to
) entry is searched by that method.
Select a dateSelect a schedule eventOo(
Select a ToDo itemOo(
i-mode or Full BrowserSelect a bookmark.
) You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.
Select a folderSelect a file. You can attach a file stored in SD other files.
Select a folderSelect a file. 2 Go to step 2 on page 198.
<Picture>
pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode phones of the mova service;
they are in the form of URLs for browsing images and automatically attached with expiry dates and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text that can be sent to an i-mode phone of the mova service is up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes).
(When the acceptable number of characters of the mova phone is 250 full-pitch characters) When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and just the mail text is sent. pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images. pYou can attach a Flash movie as well. pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be displayed or coarsely displayed depending on the model at the receiving end.
<Melody>
pMelodies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the melodies to the FOMA phone. (See page 360) pIf the receiving end is other than FOMA P906i, the sent melody might not be played back correctly or the attachment might be deleted. pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode phone of the mova service.
<imotion>
pSome i-motion movies cannot be attached to mail or their file sizes may become M a i l larger or smaller. pMoving images stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the moving images to the FOMA phone. (See page 360) pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion movies cannot be correctly received/displayed, might become coarse, or might be converted into consecutive still images. When sending moving images to other than the 2 Mbytes compatible model, it is advisable to shoot them with the following settings:
File size setting: Mail restrictn (S) Image quality: Normal
<ToruCa>
pToruCa files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the ToruCa files to the FOMA phone. (See page 271) 211 Delete Attached File You can delete an attached file you are selecting or all attached files. 1 Message Composition display i(
Operate att. fileDelete att. file
Delete this or Delete allYES pTo delete a single file, highlight the file to be deleted.
<Photo-sending>
Using Photo-sending You can send photos (still images) to the other party during a voice call. The photo is sent as the attachments of i-mode mail, and the receiving end can view it during a call. To send photos during a voice call, you need to store the phone number and mail address of the other party in the same Phonebook entry beforehand. Depending on the model of other partys phone, the other party might not be able to view the photo during a call. l i a M Shoot and Send Photos During a voice call, you can send photos (still images) you shoot on the spot.
)Shoot/send photo
Photo mode The camera starts up. 1 During a voice calli(
2 Press Oo(
). The photo is shot. pPress h from the Finder display to return to the Talking display. pSee page 160 for how to operate on the Finder display. 3 Oo(
)Select a mail address. The photo is saved and sent. pYou can send it also by pressing i(
pYou can set Set display and File restriction by pressing i(
page 157 and page 164)
) and selecting Save & send.
). (See pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the mail address you send the mail message to. pWhen you select Quit, the photo is saved to the Draft as the image-attached mail. Information pThe image sizes of the camera are QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96). Select and Send Photos You can send the saved photos (still images).
My picture 1 During a voice calli(
2 Select a folderSelect a photoSelect a mail address. The photo is sent. pYou can select a photo (still image) of QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x
)Shoot/send photo 96). pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the mail address you send the mail message to. When you received a photo (still image) When Photo auto display is set to ON, the photo is automatically displayed. If you have received multiple photos during a voice call, you can press No to switch them. pYou can display the received photo during a voice call by pressing i(
selecting Display photo. pYou can also execute Check new msg. during a voice call by pressing i(
(See page 215)
) and
). 212 Information pPhoto-sending is not available in the following cases:
When the phone number and mail address of the other party on the phone are not stored in the same Phonebook entry When the phone number and mail address of the other party on the phone are stored as secret data in the Phonebook When a caller ID is not notified to the receiving end (User unset, PublicPhone, Unavailable etc.)
(However, you can send from the calling end.) When Restrict dialing is not set for the phone number of the other party on the phone during Restrict dialing When the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the maximum and those messages are all protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full (You cannot send.) When the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail (You cannot receive.) During Call Waiting In B Mode of 2in1 pYou cannot send Flash movies by Photo-sending. pYou cannot send images by Photo-sending. pA photo sent/received during a voice call is saved to the Outbox or Inbox as a file attachment of the image mail (the subject is the phone number).
<Mail Auto-receive>
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically When the FOMA phone is in the service area, you can receive i-mode mail, SMS messages and SMS reports automatically. (See page 214 for receiving i-mode mail after selecting it.) When a mail message comes in, display. You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS messages.
(pink) appears at the top of the 1 When i-mode mail arrives, (pink) blinks and the receiving message is displayed. When receiving is completed, the display shows the number of received i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F. pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting Mail. pTo cancel receiving midway, select Cancel or press and hold r for at least one second while Mail Receiving... is displayed. However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing. Reception Result display pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds,
(see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for Mail/Msg. ring time.) Press Oo, highlight pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
, and press Oo(
) to display the Inbox list. Information pYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an i-mode mail message including attached files. You can manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes from the i-mode Center. (See page 217) pWhen the total number or size of received messages stored in the FOMA phone has reached the maximum, the mail messages will be overwritten in the priority order of mail in the Trash box folder and older received mail. However, unread or protected mail is not overwritten. 213 M a i l Information Information pWhen the total number of unread or protected mail messages in the Inbox has pWhen the number of characters in the text of received i-mode mail exceeds the reached the maximum, no new mail can be received and
(dark blue) is displayed. To receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread mail or release protection of mail until
(dark blue) clears, and then perform Check new message. maximum, / or // is inserted at the end of the text and the excess part is deleted automatically. pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not be correctly displayed. pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or other files attached. You can receive incompatible attached files but you cannot display them. pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc and Bcc, you can check whether the message was sent to you as To, Cc or Bcc. When the image is larger than the screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained. pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML mail) sent from a personal computer might not be displayed correctly. During a videophone call During infrared data exchange During iC communication pMail Messages for you are held at the i-mode Center in the following cases:
When the power is off During Self Mode During Omakase Lock When you are out of the service area While connecting to the FirstPass center During PushTalk communication While copying to the microSD card While connecting to the Data Storage Center When the space of the Inbox is full with protected or unread messages pWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center,
(dark blue), appears. when they are held to the maximum,
(pink) appears, and l i a M Display Newly Received i-mode Mail 1 Reception Result displayMail
Select an i-mode mail message to be displayed. pFor Decome-Anime, the playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i(
the detailed display. pPress and hold No for at least one second from the detailed i-mode mail display to change the size of characters. (See Mail on page 129.)
) to display Information pUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc. 214
<Receive Option>
Receiving Selected i-mode Mail You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held at the i-mode Center and select them to receive, or delete them at the Center before receiving. To use this function, set Receive option setting to ON beforehand. When Receive option setting is set to ON, you cannot receive i-mode mail messages automatically. When a mail message comes in the i-mode Center, is displayed. Receive Option Setting You can set whether to select and receive necessary i-mode mail only. 1 lMail settingsReceive option settingON or OFF Select and Receive Mail Messages 1 lReceive optionOperate following the procedure described in Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version. pWhen Receive option setting is set to OFF, the display to the effect that it will be set to ON appears. Press Oo(
pYou can bring up the Receive Option display also by iiMenu
(Menu/Search) (Receive Option).
) to set Receive option setting. Information pEven when Receive Option Setting is set to ON, you will still receive all mail messages if you execute Check new message. If you do not want to receive all mail messages, remove a check mark from Mail. (See page 234) pWhen you bring up the Receive Option display, the icon goes off. Also, the icon goes off if you turn the power off or bring up the mail display. pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.
<Check New Message>
Checking whether Center Holds i-mode Mail i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at the i-mode Center are automatically sent to your FOMA phone. However, the messages will be held at the i-mode Center if your FOMA phone cannot receive mail because it is turned off or out of the service area, or when Receive Option Setting is set to ON. When (pink) is displayed, receive mail by checking the i-mode Center. See Receive option when is displayed. 1 Press and hold l for at least one second.
(pink) and
(yellow)/
(yellow) will blink, the message Checking... will be displayed, and the i-mode mail and Messages R/F will be delivered. On the results of checking, the numbers of the received i-mode mail and Messages R/F are shown. pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at least one second. However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing. pYou cannot receive i-mode mail message and Message R/F even when you press and hold l for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. Information
(dark blue), pWhen icons such as
(dark blue) are displayed, the FOMA phone cannot receive any more i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Delete unnecessary mail and messages, or read unread mail and messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected mail and messages are overwritten automatically from the oldest one.)
(dark blue) or
(dark blue)/
Information pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, the
(pink) icon to
(dark blue) icon telling that messages are held to the maximum that effect, or the at the i-mode Center might not appear.
(This happens if mail arrives at the Center when, for instance, your FOMA phone is off.) pYou can select items to be checked by Set check new message. pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages. Use Check new SMS to receive them.
<Reply> <Reply with Quote>
Replying to Received i-mode Mail You can reply to the sender. With Rep.w/ i-mode mail, you can compose the normal i-mode mail message, with Rep. w/ Deco-Anime, you can compose the Decome-Anime, or with Reply with quote, you can quote the original text in your received i-mode mail and reply to it. You cannot use Reply with quote for Decome-Anime and SMS messages. 1 Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi(
Reply/forwardRep.w/ i-mode mail, Rep. w/
Deco-Anime or Reply with quote pYou can reply for i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found, you can choose whether to
). reply to the sender only or to all addresses. Select To sender or To all. pJust one quotation mark (see page 235) is added to the beginning of the text in M a i l the i-mode mail to be replied with quote. 2 Enter a subject and text, and then send. When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on page 198. When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3 on page 244. After you send mail, changes to
. Information pFor the senders address that cannot be replied to (such as when the mail address exceeds 50 half-pitch characters), is displayed. 215 Information Information pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your forwarding mail. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function. See page 221 for pasted data. pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is attached to the mail message, the attached file returns to a ToruCa file before obtaining details. pWhen a mail message on the microSD card is forwarded, the attached file is deleted. pWhen you Forward a mail/SMS message received to Number B/Address B in Dual Mode of 2in1, the sent mail message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you switch to A Mode. When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/
Pasted is Received You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on your FOMA phone. However, you receive only the attached file information for the files in excess of 100 Kbytes, so you need to manually obtain those attached files from the i-mode Center. The FOMA phone supports following files:
Still image PC movie Phonebook entry Schedule event ToDo item Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser) Word You cannot play back or display the files other than above. You can save them to any folder in SD other files, or use the i-mode mail to forward them. You can use Attachment preference to select the files to be received. pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be displayed. Melody ToruCa file PDF file Moving image/i-motion movie PowerPoint Excel pRe: is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be replied or replied with a quotation. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess part is deleted. (When Re: has already been prefixed, it changes to Re2: and will be counted up toRe99:.) pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your reply. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function. See page 221 for pasted data. pIf the text of Deco-mail contains images that are prohibited from being attached to mail or being output from the FOMA phone to other devices, such images will be deleted when you reply to it. pFor Decome-Anime, you cannot reply with quote. l i a M
<Forward>
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail You can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others. 1 Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi(
2 Enter an address and send the mail.
Reply/forwardForward pYou can forward also by pressing m(
) from the Inbox list. When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 198. When you have selected a Decome-Anime, go to step 2 on page 206. When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244. After you send mail, changes to
) Information pFw: is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be forwarded. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess part is deleted. (When Fw: has already been prefixed, it changes to Fw2: and will be counted up toFw99:.) pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you have not obtained yet, the file information is deleted. 216 Obtain Receive Option Attached Files You can obtain the receive option attached files held at the i-mode Center. 1 Detailed Received Mail display
Select an attached file which has not been obtained. After obtaining is completed, files are played back/
displayed. Information pYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused memory space in the Inbox is smaller than the files. Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted Files You can play back or display the attached/pasted files already obtained. 1 Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail displaySelect an attached file. The file is played back or displayed. pFor a PC movie or document file, the confirmation display appears telling that you cannot play it back/display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the microSD card. pFor the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, bookmarks, and files which are not supported by the FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save them. Information pWhen the senders device is other than FOMA P906i, the received melodies might not be played back correctly. pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that still image only is automatically displayed when the mail message is opened. The size of a still image displayed automatically is up to 5M (2592 x 1944) size. pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is displayed shrunk. Information pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes. pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes. pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes. Save Attached or Pasted Files You can save the attached or pasted files that you have obtained. You can set some files for a ring tone, or an image on the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or other displays. 1 Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail display/Detailed Message R/F display
Highlight an attached file and press i(
Operate fileSave attached fileYES pPC movies are saved to the destination folder in microSD folder of PC Movie. pDocument files are saved to the destination folder in Document viewer. pThe files not supported by the FOMA phone are saved to the destination folder in
) M a i l SD other files. pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA phone, some of them cannot be saved to the FOMA phone depending on the file such as an invalid data file or whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save it to the microSD card. When you save it, it is saved to a destination folder in SD other files. pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part of the file cannot be saved depending on the attached file. 217 l i a M 2 Select a destination or folder to save to. For melodies, go to step 2 on page 183. For still images, go to step 3 on page 182. For i-motion movies, go to step 2 on page 194. pBookmarks are saved according to each information of i-mode or Full Browser. pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or there is no usable memory space when you save SD other files, PC movies, or document files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete unnecessary files and to save new files. Select YES to list the files in Data Box, then select unnecessary files and delete them. See page 186 for when files other than SD other files, PC movies, or document files are stored to the maximum. Information pYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone. pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone. pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone.
<Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft>
Displaying Mail from Inbox/Outbox/Draft Display Mail from Inbox You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS messages. You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately from i-mode mail messages and SMS messages. You can check the received i-mode mail messages, SMS messages, and Area Mail messages. pThe mail message has been saved by default. 1 lInboxSelect a folder. pSee page 236 for displaying Messages R/F. Inbox Folder list 218 2 Select a mail message. pWhen you select an unread
(pink) mail message, changes to
. pFor Decome-Anime, the
) to playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i(
display the detailed Received Mail display. See page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works. pUse No to check other mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message from the detailed Received Mail display, the Decome-Anime playback display does not appear. pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can
)/c(
press m(
scroll for Decome-Anime.
) or >/< to scroll page by page. You cannot Detailed Received Mail display Inbox list Information pThe mail message is not charged a communication fee. pYou cannot reply to the mail message . pThe effect tone sounds according to the setting of Auto melody play when a melody file is attached, when a Flash movie with effect tone is inserted in mail text, or when the Decome-Anime text has the effect tone. However, when a melody file is attached to a mail message and a Flash movie with effect tone is inserted in the mail text or the Decome-Anime text has the effect tone, the melody is preferentially played back. The effect tone for the Flash movie or Decome-Anime does not sound. pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background. Display Mail from Outbox You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS messages. You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and SMS messages. 1 lOutboxSelect a folder. Display Mail from Draft You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the Draft. You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including SMS messages. 1 lDraft Outbox Folder list 2 Select a mail message. pFor Decome-Anime, the
) to playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i(
display the detailed Sent Mail display. See page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works. pUse No to check other mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message from the detailed Sent Mail display, the Decome-Anime playback display does not appear. pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can
)/c(
press m(
scroll for Decome-Anime.
) or >/< to scroll page by page. You cannot Detailed Sent Mail Outbox list display Information pWhen the Decome-Anime text has the effect tone, it sounds according to the setting of Auto melody play. pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background. 2 Select a mail message. When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 2 on page 198. When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244. Draft list M a i l Information pWhen you select the i-ppli mail folder, the mail-linked i-ppli that supports the folder starts. 219 How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display Mail menu Icons might have the following marks:
Unread mail messages or messages are saved in the Inbox. Failed-to-send mail messages are saved in the Outbox. Draft mail messages are saved in the Draft. Mail security is activated. (displayed also for chat mail) l i a M Inbox Folder list
Folder status and appears when unread messages are found, appears when Mail Security is activated.
Ordinary folder i-ppli mail folder Message R folder Message F folder Trash box folder
Folder name Inbox list and detailed Received Mail display
Inbox list For Date+sender/
receiver subject
Mail status and type Inbox list For Date+subject Detailed Received Mail display
appears when protection is set.
(pink) Unread mail Read mail Forwarded mail Replied mail Type of the received mail (Detailed display only)
Received date and time The Inbox list shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the mail received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from the Center is displayed.
Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail Senders mail address (Detailed display only) Senders mail address that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only) Recipients mail addresses of simultaneous mail (Detailed display only) Recipients mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only) 220 Subject
<For Inbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
When Mail list display is set to Date+sender/receiver subject, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to Date+subject, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top. For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(SMS or Area Mail is displayed on the detailed display.) In Dual Mode of 2in1, of SMS/i-mode mail messages received to Number B/Address B. is displayed at the end of the subject or senders address
(blue) SMS messages in the FOMA phone SMS messages on the UIM Attached or pasted data Area Mail The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Inbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Received Mail display>
is added to each icon when you execute Delete att. file (Detailed display only). Melody file Image file Inserted image file (List only) i-motion movie file PC movie file ToruCa file PDF file Document file Phonebook entry file Schedule event or ToDo item file Bookmark file Other files Attached file before obtaining
(Detailed display only) Attached file suspended to be obtained (Detailed display only) Attached file failed to be obtained (Detailed display only) i-ppli start information
(List only) i-ppli mail (List only) Multiple files (List only) Multiple pasted files File set with the UIM restrictions Attached file i-ppli mail File set with the UIM restrictions FeelMail icon When you press c(
See page 122 for FeelMail. Text of mail
) from Inbox list, the FeelMail image is played back. Outbox Folder list
Folder status appears when Mail Security is activated.
Ordinary folder i-ppli mail folder
Folder name
M a i l 221 Outbox list and detailed Sent Mail display
Outbox list For Date+sender/
receiver subject Outbox list For Date+subject Detailed Sent Mail display l i a M
Mail status appears when protection is set.
(pink) Mail successfully sent Mail failed to be sent Simultaneous mail successfully sent to all addresses
(gray)
(pink) Simultaneous mail sent to some addresses Simultaneous mail failed to be sent to all addresses
Sent date and time The Outbox list shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail sent until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent. appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipients phone number or mail address Mail address successfully sent (Detailed display only) Mail address failed to be sent (Detailed display only) 222 Subject When Mail list display is set to Date+sender/receiver subject, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to Date+subject, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top. For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (SMS is displayed on the detailed display.)
(blue) SMS messages in the FOMA phone SMS messages on the UIM SMS report received [List
(Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed display only]
Attached data The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Outbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Sent Mail display>
is added to each icon when you execute Delete att. file (Detailed display only). Melody file Image file Inserted image file (List only) i-motion movie file PC movie file ToruCa file PDF file Document file Phonebook entry file Schedule event or ToDo item file Bookmark file Other files i-ppli mail (List only) Multiple files (List only) File set with the UIM restrictions
<For Outbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Attached file i-ppli mail Text of mail File set with the UIM restrictions Draft list
Mail status
(pink) Ordinary mail Simultaneous mail
Saved date and time The Draft list shows the time for the mail saved today, and shows the date for the mail saved until yesterday. when the date/time is corrected. appears
Recipients phone
<For Date+sender/receiver subject>
Attached data
Melody file Image file Inserted image file i-motion movie file PC movie file ToruCa file PDF file Document file Phonebook entry file Schedule event or ToDo item file Bookmark file Other files Multiple files (List only) File set with the UIM restrictions For Date+sender/
receiver subject For Date+subject
<For (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
number or mail address When the phone number or mail address is stored in the Phonebook, the name stored in the Phonebook is displayed. Attached file File set with the UIM restrictions Subject When Mail list display is set to Date+sender/receiver subject, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to Date+subject, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top. For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(blue) SMS messages Text of mail Information pSee Mail list display on page 233 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/
Draft list. pWhen Name in phonebook of Mail list display is checked, the name stored in the Phonebook is displayed as sender or recipient. However, when the senders mail address is phone number@docomo.ne.jp, the name is not displayed even when phone number@docomo.ne.jp is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook entry. Store the phone number part only to display the name. When a senders/
recipients phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as secret data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only. Even when a senders/recipients phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the name is not displayed in Secret Data Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name. pWhen Message of Mail list display is not checked, the text does not appear on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list. 223 M a i l Managing Mail Messages Function Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List Function menu Mail security Function menu Operate folder
(Add folder) Operation/Explanation You can add a new folder. You can add up to 22 folders to each of Inbox and Outbox.
Add folderEnter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Operate folder
(Edit folder name) You can edit the names of the added folders only.
Edit folder nameEdit the folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Operate folder
(Sort folder) l i a M Operate folder
(Delete folder) Open folder Read all
[Inbox Folder only]
Sort
(Auto-sort) Sort
(Re-sort)
) You can sort folders. You can sort the added folders, Message R/
F folder, and the i-ppli mail folders.
Sort folderUse Bo to sort the orderOo(
All the mail messages including secret mail in the folder will be deleted as well.
Delete folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can display the mail messages in the i-ppli mail folder without running mail-linked i-ppli. You can change unread mail in the folder to read mail.
YES See page 231. You can resort mail messages following the sorting conditions specified by Auto-sort.
Re-sortYES pWhen the folder applied with Mail security (see page 224) is found, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code. 224 Operation/Explanation You can set the folder to open only when you enter your Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pTo release it, perform the same operation. transmission Ir/
(Send all Ir data) See page 371. transmission Ir/
(All transmission) See page 372. No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail messages, Messages R/F, and sent mail messages. Delete
(DEL all read mails)
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the read mail messages including secret mail in all Inbox folders. All the read SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.
DEL all read mailsYES Delete
(DEL all recv. mails)
[Inbox Folder only]
DEL all sent mails
[Outbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in all Inbox folders. All the received SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.
DEL all recv. mailsEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in all Outbox folders. All sent SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Information
<Operate folder (Delete folder)>
pYou cannot delete an i-ppli mail folder if corresponding mail-linked i-ppli exists. If the software program does not exist, you can delete the i-ppli mail folder, but this will delete both folders created in the Outbox Folder list and Inbox Folder list.
<Sort (Re-sort)>
pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the Chat folder and Trash box folder. pMail messages which are not applied with Auto-sort are sorted into the Inbox folder. Function menu Protect
(ProtectSLCT. ON/
OFF)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Move/copy
(Move)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Move/copy
(Move to trash)
[Inbox only]
Move/copy
(UIM operation)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Move/copy
(Copy to microSD) Move/copy
(Store in Center) Information
<Mail security>
pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor edit its name. Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft List Function menu Operation/Explanation Reply/forward
(Reply)
[Inbox only]
Reply/forward
(Reply with quote)
[Inbox only]
Reply/forward
(Forward)
[Inbox only]
Edit
[Outbox only]
Protect
(Protect ON/OFF)
[Inbox/Outbox]
See page 215. See page 215. See page 216. You can re-edit the sent mail message and send it again. When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 198. When you have selected a Decome-Anime, go to step 2 on page 206. When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244. You can protect the mail message so that it is not overwritten and deleted. You can protect all the received and sent messages.
(2,500 received messages, 1,000 sent messages) The protected one is indicated by
Protect ON/OFF pTo release protection, perform the same operation. pYou can switch between protected and unprotected also by pressing 1 from the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display. Operation/Explanation
ProtectSLCT. ON/OFFPut/Remove a check mark for mail messages to be protected/unprotectedl(
pA check mark is placed to the mail already protected.
)YES
MoveSelect a destination folder
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved
l(
You can move mail messages to the Trash box folder. The mail messages moved to the Trash box folder are preferentially overwritten (deleted).
Move to trashPut a check mark for mail messages to be moved to the trash boxl(
You can copy or move the mail message to the UIM or FOMA phone. (See page 422)
)YES See page 357. M a i l You can save mail messages stored in FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
Store in CenterEnter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for mail messages to be saved
l(
pYou can select up to 10 mail messages. pYou do not need to put a check mark for the mail messages on
)YES the detailed Received Mail display and detailed Sent Mail display. 225 Function menu Search/sort
(Search sender/
Search receiver)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Operation/Explanation You can retrieve mail messages with a mail address or phone number of a sender or recipient. Search sender for received mail and Search receiver for sent mail are displayed respectively.
Search mailSearch sender or Search receiver
Select an item. Phonebook . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a Function menu Mail history
[Inbox/Outbox]
Received address. Select a phone number or mail address Sent address. Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). l i a M Enter address . Enter the mail address or phone number. pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Search/sort
(Search subject)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.
Search mailSearch subjectEnter a subject. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters. Color label
[Inbox/Outbox]
List setting Search/sort
(Search subject+msg)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Search/sort
(Sort)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Search/sort
(Filter)
[Inbox/Outbox]
Search/sort
(Display all)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject or text.
Search mailSearch subject+msg
Enter a part of a subject or text. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters. You can change the order of displayed mail messages.
SortSelect an order. You can display the mail messages only that satisfy the condition.
FilterSelect a type. You can re-display all mail messages in By date order after using Search Mail, or the Sort or Filter function.
Display all transmission Ir/
(Send Ir data) transmission Ir/
(Send all Ir data)
[Draft only]
Ir/
transmission transmission) transmission Ir/
(All transmission)
[Draft only]
226 Operation/Explanation You can display the history of sent/received mail from the sender or to the recipient being selected or displayed. Up to 1,000 histories are displayed in the chronological order from the most recent one.
Select a senders or destination address. The target sent/received mail histories are displayed. Sent mail
. Received mail pSelect a history; then you can bring up the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display. Press r to return to the former display. pYou can display also by pressing 7 on the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display. You can color the characters on the Inbox list and Outbox list for classifying mail. Select Default to set ordinary character color.
Select a color. You can select the item to be displayed on the list. You can also switch between the name stored in the Phonebook and the mail address/phone number for the display in the senders/destination address field. You can set to list the mail messages by subject depending on the setting of Mail list display.
Select an item to be displayed. pYou can switch each time you press c(
Outbox list and Draft list.
) from the See page 370. See page 371. See page 372. See page 372. Operation/Explanation Information Function menu No. of messages Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete read mails)
[Inbox only]
Delete
(Delete all SMS-R)
[Inbox only]
You can display the number of stored received mail messages, sent mail messages and draft mail messages.
Delete thisYES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for mail messages to be deletedl(
You can delete all the read mail messages in the folder.
Delete read mailsYES
)YES You can delete all the SMS reports. While displaying SMS reports using the Search Mail function or Filter function, only the displayed SMS reports are deleted.
Delete all SMS-REnter your Terminal Security Code
YES Delete
(DEL all frm folder)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can delete all mail messages in the folder.
DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES You can delete all the mail messages in Draft.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Delete
(Delete all)
[Draft only]
Information
<Edit>
pTo use Mail group for destination addresses, delete all the entered addresses, press
+l(
<Protect>
pYou cannot protect mail messages in the Trash box folder. pIf you protect all the sent messages which are stored to the maximum, you can no
) to complete the deletion, and then re-select the address field. longer compose i-mode mail messages.
<Move/copy (Move to trash)>
pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read mail.
<Move/copy (Store in Center)>
pYou cannot save the SMS messages stored on the UIM. pYou cannot save the files attached to mail. pYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of the service area. pWhen you have not signed up for Data Security Service, the message to that effect appears. pYou can download the mail messages saved to the Data Security Center from its site to your FOMA phone. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version.
<Search/sort>
pEven if you set No title for Search subject of Search mail, you cannot search for the i-mode mail whose subject is not entered and displayed as No title.
<Color label>
pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when they are copied to the microSD card, copied/moved to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via infrared rays or iC transmission. pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is released when the UIM is dismounted and then mounted. Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail Display/
Detailed Sent Mail Display M a i l Operation/Explanation Function menu Reply/forward
(Reply)
[Received Mail only]
Reply/forward
(Reply with quote)
[Received Mail only]
Reply/forward
(Forward)
[Received Mail only]
Edit
[Sent Mail only]
See page 215. See page 215. See page 216. See page 225. 227 Function menu Operation/Explanation Resend
[Sent Mail only]
You can re-send the sent mail message.
YES Protect ON/OFF See page 225. Move/copy
(Copy) Move/copy
(Move) Move/copy
(Move to trash)
[Received Mail only]
CopySelect an item to be copied. pSee page 442 for how to copy. pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail address or phone number to be copied.
MoveSelect a destination folder. You can move the mail to the Trash box folder. The mail messages moved to the Trash box folder are preferentially overwritten (deleted).
Move to trashYES Move/copy
(UIM operation) You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or FOMA phone. (See page 422) l i a M See page 357. See page 225. See page 217. See page 209. You can save Deco-mail pictograms in the mail text at once. You can save up to 20 of them.
Save D-pictographYES pSee page 186 for when the Deco-mail pictograms are stored to the maximum. pSee page 330 for how to check the stored Deco-mail pictograms. Move/copy
(Copy to microSD) Move/copy
(Store in Center) Operate file
(Save attached file) Operate file
(Save insert image) Operate file
(Save D-pictograph)
[Received Mail only]
228 Function menu Operate file
(Save as template) Operate file
(Property) Operate file
(Delete att. file) Store
(Store address) Operation/Explanation You can save the sent/received Deco-mail as a template.
Save as templateYES pSee page 186 for when the templates are stored to the maximum. pSee page 208 for how to check the stored template. You can display the file name and file size of the image inserted into the text.
PropertySelect an image.
Delete att. fileYES See page 96. Store
(Add to phonebook) See page 96. Store
(Auto-sort) You can store a sender or subject as a sort condition. (See page 231) Store
(Add desktop icon) See page 127. Mail history Color label Display
(Name/address) Display
(Scroll) Display
(Character size) Display SMS report
[Sent Mail only]
See page 226. See page 226. You can display the senders/destination address by the name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address/phone number.
Name/address pYou can switch also by pressing 5. See page 233. See Mail on page 129. You can check the result of the SMS message you sent, or the date and time it arrived at the destination. To receive the SMS report, set SMS report request to ON. Function menu transmission Ir/
(Send Ir data) Ir/
transmission transmission) Delete Information Operation/Explanation See page 370. See page 372.
YES pYou can delete the mail message also by pressing 0.
<Resend>
pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as the sent mail message. If you re-send the failed-to-send simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as the sent mail message.
<Sent Address> <Received Address>
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS messages are stored in Sent Address and Received Address, up to 30 messages each. You can check the list for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When you exchange mail messages with the same mail address or phone number, the older one is deleted. pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 records for Number A/Address A and Number B/
Address B are stored in Received Address in total. 1 Press and hold Vo for at least one When Using Sent Address second.
: SMS message successfully sent
: i-mode mail successfully sent
: SMS message failed to be sent
: i-mode mail failed to be sent
: Time-difference corrected time Sent Address list M a i l
) from the Sent Address list to display Redial. When the Sent pPress m(
Address list is displayed from Dialed Calls, you can press m(
) to display Dialed Calls. pYou cannot display the Sent Address list even when you press and hold Vo for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal diplay. When Using Received Address Press and hold Co for at least one second.
: SMS message
: i-mode mail
: Time-difference corrected time
: SMS/i-mode mail message received to Number B/
Address B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1) Received Address list
) from the Received Address list to display Received Calls. pPress m(
pYou cannot display the Received Address list even when you press and hold Co for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal diplay. 229 2 Select a record to be displayed. The detailed display of the Address list is displayed. pWith an SMS message for which the other partys phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is displayed. pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press Oo(
step 3 on page 198. To send an SMS message to the displayed phone number, press Oo(
pTo store in the Phonebook, press m(
Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook on page 96.
) and go to step 3 on page 244.
). Go to step 2 of Storing Displayed
) and go to Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is Displayed Function menu Character size FeelMail
[Received Address only]
Operation/Explanation You can switch the character size for the list. (See Dialed/recv. calls on page 129) The FeelMail image is played back. See page 122 for Feel Mail. pYou can play back the Feelmail image also by pressing c(
). l i a M Add to phonebook See page 96. Add desktop icon See page 127. Redial/Dialed calls
[Sent Address only]
Received calls
[Received Address only]
Function menu Operation/Explanation Dialing If the mail address has been stored in a Phonebook entry, you can make a voice call, videophone call or PushTalk call to the phone number stored in the Phonebook.
Select a dialing type. pWhen you select Select image, select an image to be sent to the other party during a videophone call. To cancel the setting, select Release. pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook entry, you can dial the first phone number.
Dial pTo make an international call, select Intl dial assist, select an international call access code, and follow the procedure above after selecting Dialing from the Function menu. (See page 61) pTo set Caller ID Notification, select Notify caller ID. (See step 2 on page 48) You can display the Redial list or the Dialed Call list. You can display the Received Call list. All received calls (all calls) are displayed. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message. The mail address is Delete this entered in the address field. Go to step 3 on page 198. Delete selected
YES
Put a check mark for records to be deletedl(
YES
) Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The phone number is entered into the address field. Go to step 3 on page 244. Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES 230
<Auto-sort>
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder You can automatically save the mail messages that satisfy the set conditions to the specified folder. This function applies to only the added folders and i-ppli mail folders. 1 Inbox Folder list/Outbox Folder listi(
Auto-sort Follow the operation of the Function menu list on page 231 to set Auto-sort. If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have been set, the Auto-sort Setting display appears.
)Sort Auto-sort Storing You can specify a sort condition and folder from the detailed Sent/
Received Mail display. 1 Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail displayi(
Do the following operations.
)StoreAuto-sort Item Address sort Subject sort Operation/Explanation You can set the displayed senders/recipients address for a sorting condition.
Select a folder. pWhen multiple addresses are found, select an address. You can edit the displayed subject and set it for a sorting condition.
Edit the subjectSelect a folder. To change the condition The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition or to overwrite it. Select YES to release the set condition and set the new one. When the same condition is set for another folder The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition. Select YES to release the condition set for another folder and to set it for the selected folder. pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated folder. When storing another address for the folder set for Address sort The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the address. Information pYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders. pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the priority below.
Sort all
Subject sort Reply impossible/Send impossible Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address) Address sort (Look-up mail group) Address sort (Look-up group) pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members cannot be sorted by Address sort or Send impossible. pArea Mail messages are not sorted by Address sort. Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting Display Function menu Address sort
(Look-up address) Operation/Explanation You can look up a mail address or phone number in the Phonebook or Sent/Received Address and set it to the folder for sorting.
Look-up addressSelect an item. Phonebook. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a M a i l Sent address . Select a phone number or mail address Received address . Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). 231 Function menu Operation/Explanation Address sort
(Look-up group) You can set a group to be sorted into the folder.
Look-up groupSelect a group. Address sort
(Look-up mail group) Address sort
(Enter address) Subject sort You can set a mail group to be sorted into the folder.
Look-up mail groupSelect a mail group. You can directly enter a mail address or phone number to be sorted into the folder.
Enter addressEnter a mail address or phone number. pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. pWhen the mail address is phone number@docomo.ne.jp, enter the phone number only. You can sort SMS messages as well if you enter the phone number only. You can enter the subject of i-mode mail messages to be sorted into the folder. One subject can be set per folder.
Enter a subject. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters. Reply impossible You can set reply-disabled mail messages to be sorted. You can set for only one folder. Send impossible Sort all Edit addr/subj List setting You can set failed-to-send mail messages to be sorted. You can set for only one folder. You can sort all mail messages into the i-ppli mail folder. You can set for only one i-ppli mail folder each in the Inbox and Outbox. When Sort all is set, other sort settings are disabled.
YES You can edit and store the mail address, phone number, and subject set for the folder.
Edit the mail address, phone number or subject. You can switch whether to display the destinations by the name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address or phone number.
Name or Address pYou can switch also by pressing c(
). l i a M Function menu Release
(Release this) Release
(Release selected) Release
(Release all) Information Operation/Explanation You can release the sort condition. (The item is deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Release thisYES You can select mail addresses or phone numbers, and release the sort condition for them. (The items are deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Release selectedPut a check mark for mail addresses or phone numbers to be releasedl(
You can release all sort conditions. (The items are deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Release allYES
)YES
<Address sort (Look-up group)>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, pYou cannot set groups on the UIM. pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in Secret mode or Secret is added to the top of the name. data only) are not sorted into the folder.
<Address sort (Look-up mail group)>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display,
<Subject sort>
pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple folders, it is sorted to the folder is added to the top of the mail group name. nearest to the Inbox folder or Outbox folder. pEven if you set No title, the i-mode mail titled with No title because of no entry cannot be sorted. pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.
<Sort all>
pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have been directly received on the UIM. 232
<Mail Group>
Creating Mail Group You can store mail addresses by group. You can send mail to regular destinations. You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to 20 groups.
+m-2-6 1 mPhonebookPhonebook settingsMail group
Select a Mail group to be stored. pWhen mail addresses are stored in a Mail group, appears at the lower left of the display. Press l(
i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 198. Mail Group list
) to compose 2 Highlight <Not stored> and press
l(
). pIf you select a stored mail address, the Mail Group Address Confirmation display appears. Detailed Mail Group display 3 Enter a mail address. pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. When you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3. Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/Mail Group Address Confirmation Display Function menu Edit address Look-up address Operation/Explanation Go to step 3 on page 233. pYou can edit the address also by pressing l(
You can call up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item. Phonebook. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
). Sent address . Select a phone number or mail address Received address . Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). Delete this Delete all
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Mail Settings>
Setting Mail and Messages R/F 1 lMail settingsDo the following operations. M a i l Function Menu of the Mail Group List Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to the Mail group. Go to step 3 on page 198. Edit group name Enter a name of the Mail group. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Item Scroll Operation/Explanation You can set the number of lines that are scrolled at a time for when you press Bo on the detailed mail display, detailed Message R/F display, Message Composition display and preview display.
Select the number of lines. Character size See Mail on page 129. Reset group name You can reset the name of Mail group to the default. Mail list display
YES You can set items to be displayed on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list by using radio buttons or check boxes.
Select a display formatl(
) 233 Operation/Explanation Item Operation/Explanation Item Message display You can set whether to display received mail in standard display
(from the top) or from the text.
Standard or From message l i a M Mail security See page 142. Secret mail display See page 142. Auto color label You can specify the text color of the sender, received date/time and others on the Inbox list by mail address. You can store up to 10 items.
<Not stored>Select an item. Phonebook . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
). Received address. Select a phone number or mail address Sent address. Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
Enter address . Enter a mail address or phone number. pTo change the set color, press i(
) and select Select color. pTo delete the set item, press i(
Delete this or Delete all and select YES. If you select Delete all, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
) and select Delete
Select a color. Pred. conv. at reply You can set whether to preferentially display the words contained in the subject and text of the received mail message as conversion candidates when you reply to, reply with quote to, or forward it.
ON or OFF Header/signature See page 235. Set check new message You can select items to be checked from among i-mode mail, Message R and Message F, for when you perform Check new message.
Put a check mark for the items to be checkedl(
) 234 Auto-display See page 236. Receiving display You can set whether to display the Message Receiving and Reception Result displays, even during operation of another function.
Alarm preferred or Operation preferred Alarm preferred
. Prioritizes the Message Receiving and Reception Result displays when you have new mail. Operation preferred
. Prioritizes the display of the current operation when you have Receive option setting Attachment preference Auto melody play new mail. See page 214. You can set whether to receive the attached file with an i-mode mail message. The attached files for which you remove a check mark are held at the i-mode Center.
(The file in excess of 100 Kbytes is held at the i-mode Center, even if you put a check mark for it.)
Put a check mark for items to be receivedl(
pPut a check mark for Tool data to receive Phonebook entries,
) schedule events, ToDo items, and bookmarks. pPut a check mark for Other to receive PC movies, document files, and files unsupported by the FOMA phone. You can set whether to play back the attached or pasted melodies automatically for when you display the text of received mail, or message R/F.
ON or OFF Photo auto display You can set whether to automatically display the photo (still image) received during a call.
ON or OFF Chat setting See page 242. Check settings You can check each of Mail settings. Information
<Message display>
pEven if From message is set, the message might not be displayed from the text depending on the number of characters in the text. Information
<Auto color label>
pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail message already received does not change.
<Set check new message>
p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F by Check new message, change these settings to
<Auto melody play>
pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies during Play Background regardless of the setting of Auto melody play. Header/Signature You can store a header, signature and quotation mark. Also, you can set whether to automatically paste the header or signature. 1 lMail settingsHeader/signature
Do the following operations. Item Header Signature Quotation marks Operation/Explanation The header is the sentence such as greeting at the beginning of the text.
Select the header fieldEnter a headerl(
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
) characters. pIf you do not want the header to be pasted automatically, select Insert to change header by mail message. to
. See page 200 for adding a The signature is your name and other information, placed at the end of the text.
Select the signature fieldEnter a signaturel(
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
) characters. pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted automatically, select Insert to change adding a signature by mail message. to
. See page 200 for The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a quotation from received mail for when you reply to mail.
Enter a quotation mark. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Information pYou can set decorations in a header and signature. pEven if you have put a check mark for Insert, the header and signature cannot be pasted when you compose i-mode mail for Photo-sending during a call or from a template or i-ppli. pYou cannot paste the header, signature, and quotation marks to Decome-Anime and SMS messages.
<Receive Message R/F>
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically Message services automatically deliver information you want to your FOMA phone. When your FOMA phone is in the service area, it receives Messages R/F automatically from the i-mode Center.
(yellow) or (yellow) appears at the top of the display when a Message R/F is delivered. You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F. 1 When you receive a Message R/F, the
(yellow) or
(yellow) blinks and the message for receiving the Message R/F appears. After the message is received, the number of received mail messages and Messages R/F is displayed. pYou can display the Message R/F list by selecting MessageR or MessageF. pIf Auto-display is set to other than OFF, the contents of received Message R/F are displayed automatically. They are displayed for 15 seconds when Mail/Msg. ring time is set to 0 through 10 seconds, or for the specified duration plus 5 seconds when it is set to 11 seconds or longer. pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, or
(see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for Mail/Msg. ring time.) Press Oo, highlight Message R/F list.
, and press Oo(
) to display the or pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed. 235 M a i l When unread Messages R/F are found is added to Message R/F of i-mode menu. Information pReceived Messages R/F are not automatically displayed while a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, while an i-ppli program is running, during Public Mode (Drive Mode), during Lock All, or during Personal Data Lock. pWhen the Messages R/F exceeds the maximum number of messages that can be saved, they are overwritten starting from the oldest one. Unread or protected Messages R/F are not overwritten. pWhen the FOMA phone cannot receive any more Messages R/F,
(dark blue) or
(dark blue) is displayed. Delete unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread Messages R/F or release protection. pWhen the icon
(pink) or R/F. When the icon can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform Check new message to receive them.
(dark blue) or
(pink) is displayed, the i-mode Center holds Messages
(dark blue) is displayed, the i-mode Center l i a M pAfter being displayed automatically, Messages R/F are still displayed as unread ones in the Message R/F list. However, if you scroll through the messages while they are being displayed automatically, they will be indicated as read. pMessages R/F for you are held at the i-mode Center in the following cases:
When the power is off During Self Mode During infrared data exchange During PushTalk communication During iC communication While connecting to the Data Storage Center When the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or unread messages During a videophone call When you are out of the service area While connecting to the FirstPass Center During Omakase Lock During copy to microSD Auto-display You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F received during standby. 1 lMail settingsAuto-display
Select an option for automatic display. Information pThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when Mail security is set for Inbox, or when Mail security is set for MessageR folder or MessageF folder. 236
<Display Message R/F>
Reading Received Messages R/F 1 lInboxMessageR or MessageF
Select a Message R/F to be displayed. pYou can display Messages R/F also by iMessage R/FMessageR or MessageF. pWhen you select an unread
(pink)
. Message R/F, changes to pUse No to check other Messages R/F. pWhen the text of Message R/F is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can press m(
) or </> to scroll page by page. Message R/F list
)/c(
Detailed Message R/F display Message R/F list and Detailed Message R/F Display
Message R/F list Detailed Message R/F display
Status of Message R/F appears when protection is set. Unread Message R/F
(pink) Read Message R/F
Received date and time The list shows the time for the Message R/F received today, and shows the date for the Message R/F received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the Message R/F was received.
Subject The data attached or pasted The detailed display shows the data volume. Valid melody file Valid image file Valid ToruCa file Multiple attached files Multiple pasted files File set with the UIM restrictions Text of message The phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed by the name stored in the Phonebook. Function Menu of the Message R/F List Function menu Protect
(Protect ON/OFF) Protect
(Unprotect all) Search/sort
(Sort) Search/sort
(Filter) Operation/Explanation You can protect a Message R/F not to be overwritten or deleted. You can protect up to 50 messages (Message R and Message F each). Protected messages are indicated by
Protect ON/OFF pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
Unprotect allYES You can rearrange the displaying order.
SortSelect a displaying order. You can display only Messages R/F that satisfy the condition.
FilterSelect a displaying type. Function menu Operation/Explanation Search/sort
(Display all) No. of messages Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete read mails) Delete
(DEL all frm folder) Information After you execute Sort or Filter, you can reset it and list all Messages R/F by By date .
Display all You can display the total number of Messages R/F stored in the FOMA phone, as well as the number of unread messages and protected messages.
Delete thisYES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for Messages R/F to be deletedl(
You can delete all read Messages R/F.
Delete read mailsYES
)YES You can delete all Messages R/F.
DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES
<Search/sort>
pTo return to the former status, execute Display all. pIf you close the list and re-open it, you can return to the list of all items. Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Protect ON/OFF See page 237. Operate file
(Save attached file) You can save attached or pasted files. (See page 217) Operate file
(Save insert image) You can save the attached image and set it as the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or another display. (See page 209) Operate file
(Save BG image)
Save BG imageYESSelect a destination folder. Go to step 3 on page 182. M a i l 237 Function menu Operation/Explanation Operate file
(Save D-pictograph) You can save the all Deco-mail pictograms inserted into the text.
(See page 228) Add to phonebook See page 96. Delete
YES What is Emergency Alert Area Mail?
This service enables you to receive reports such as emergency earthquake alerts distributed from the Japan Meteorological Agency. pYou can receive Area Mail messages without i-mode contract. pYou need to set Receive setting to receive Area Mail messages. See page 239 for Receive setting of Area Mail. pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:
During a call (voice call/videophone call) During packet communication (i-mode communication, data communication, PushTalk communication) During updating software program pYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:
During Omakase Lock During international roaming During Self Mode When you could not receive the messages by the reasons above, you cannot receive them again. l i a M 238 Receiving Emergency Alert Area Mail When you receive an Area Mail message, the ring tone for Area Mail sounds. The Ring volume, Ring time, and Vibrator settings follow those of Mail. When you receive an emergency earthquake alert, a dedicated buzzer
(alarm) sounds, and the vibrator works to notify you. Further, the contents are automatically displayed. Ring volume is fixed to Level 4, and Vibrator is fixed to Melody linkage, so you cannot change their settings. You can use Area mail settings to set Beep time. Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the Inbox. 1 When an Area Mail message arrives, blinks and the message telling its arrival appears. pIf you press any key, the former display returns. display pThe details of some Area Mail messages might be displayed when you receive them. To clear it, press Oo, r, or h. pSee page 218 for displaying Area Mail messages. Reception Result Information pThe buzzer sounds when you receive an emergency earthquake alert with Original set to sound any of the following tones. When every setting is set to mute, the buzzer does not sound:
Mail volume VM tone pEven when Vibrator of Original is set to OFF, the vibrator works if you receive an Phone volume Keypad sound Alarm volume emergency earthquake alert. pWhen you receive a new Area Mail message with 30 Area Mail messages saved, the read messages are overwritten from the oldest. When all 30 messages are not read, they are overwritten from the oldest one in order. pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are displayed or not depends on the setting by the Area Mail message provider.
<Area Mail Settings>
Setting Emergency Alert Area Mail 1 lArea mail settingsDo the following operations.
<Chat Mail>
Using Chat Mail You can send or receive chat mail messages to and from multiple persons on a single display. To use Chat Mail, you need to store chat members. You can easily store them by creating chat groups. Item Receive setting Receive entry Beep setting Beep time Operation/Explanation You can set whether to use Area Mail.
Read exemption clause thoroughlyYes or No You can register Message IDs for the reports to be received other than emergency information. You can register up to 20 IDs.
<New>Enter your Terminal Security Code
Enter a registration nameEnter a Message ID. pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it, press l(
and then enter your Terminal Security Code.
), pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters for a registration name, and enter 4 half-pitch characters for a Message ID. pYou can edit also by selecting Edit from the Function menu. Select Delete this to delete the Message ID, and select Delete all and enter your Terminal Security Code to delete all Message IDs. pYou cannot edit/delete Emergency information. You can set whether to make the beep sound for when you receive an Area Mail message that beeps.
ON or OFF pWhen you set OFF, the dedicated ring tone for Area Mail sounds. You can set the duration the beep sounds.
Enter a beep time (seconds). pEnter it in two digit, from 01 through 30. Store Chat Members You can store up to six chat members including the user (yourself). 1 lChat maili(
Chat member<Not recorded>
Enter a mail address. pTo edit a stored member, select the member. pWhen the mail address is phone
) number@docomo.ne.jp, store the phone number only. pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Chat Member list M a i l Information pIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the members name and image are changed. Function Menu of the Chat Member List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit You can edit the mail address. Go to step 1 on page 239. 239 l i a M Function menu Refer address Change member
(Chat group) Change member
(Mail group) Display setting 240 Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation You can look up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Received Address, or Sent Address to enter it.
Select an item. Phonebook . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a Sent address. Select a phone number or mail address Received address. Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). You can store the members stored in a chat group as chat members.
Chat groupGroup list or Member list Group list. You can select members by chat group. Member list . You can select members from all the members stored in chat groups. pIf you select Group list, select a chat group. The members from the selected group are stored. pIf you select Member list, check the members you want to store and press l(
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
). display appears asking whether to replace all the chat members. You can store the mail addresses stored in Mail group as chat members.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group. pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the chat members. You can check the chat members name, image, background color, and mail address. pYou can press No to switch members. pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is not displayed. Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete all)
Delete thisYES
Delete allYES Exchange Chat Mail Messages 1 lChat mail Chat Mail display characters.
)Enter characters. pYou can enter up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch 2 Oo(
3 Press l(
4 The display for receiving chat mail The chat mail message is sent. The sent chat mail message is displayed at the top of the Chat Mail display.
). appears and a chat mail message is received. The received chat mail message is displayed at the top of the Chat Mail display. Repeat step 2 through step 4 to send and receive chat mail messages. 5 rYES or NO YES . You can delete read and sent chat mail message from the Chat folder. NO . You do not delete read and sent chat mail message from the Chat folder. Chat Mail ends. pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h. pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are found, the confirmation display does not appear. Chat Mail display
Image The image you have stored in Chat Group is displayed.
Member name The chat members name store in the chat group is displayed. Also, the name is displayed with a specified background color. pWhen the name is not stored in the chat group, up to eight half-pitch characters from the beginning of the mail address are displayed. When the mail address is stored in the Phonebook, up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters from the beginning of the name are displayed. Current Chat mail Chat Mail history
Broadcast mark Displayed when the chat mail message set with multiple addresses is received.
(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member.
(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat Member are found. Sent/Received date and time The date and time the chat mail message was sent/received are displayed. The time is displayed for the chat mail messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail messages sent/received until yesterday. Text The text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of characters of the text to be displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters. If the text exceeds four lines, No. pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history. pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is displayed in black. The text of is displayed and you can switch the pages by pressing the chat mail message failed to be sent is displayed in gray. Input box Entered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the beginning by a factor of one line. Information pThe communication fee for when you send chat mail messages to multiple chat members is the same as for sending a chat mail message to one member. (However, the data for the added address fields will involve a higher charge.) pWhen Receive option setting is set to ON, you cannot execute Chat Mail. pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages, you cannot execute Chat Mail. Delete unnecessary mail messages or read unread mail messages, or release the protection and then operate. pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed. pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the Chat folder. pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is (chat mail) (half-pitch characters). pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display contains the phone number, mail address, or URL, the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are not available. However, those functions will be available when Chat Mail is finished and chat mail message is brought up from the Inbox or Outbox. pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone for the chat mail message does not sound. M a i l If You Receive Chat Mail during Standby If you receive a chat mail message during standby, desktop. Press Oo, highlight up.
, and press Oo(
appears on the
); then Chat Mail starts Information pMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the following cases:
When the senders address or destination address is stored in Chat Member or in a chat group When the subject contains (chat mail) (all full-pitch or all half-pitch characters) pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a member of a chat group other than Chat Member while Chat Mail is running, appears. 241 Function menu Delete read mails Operation/Explanation You can delete all the received read chat mail messages and sent chat mail messages including secret mail and chat mail messages failed to send.
YES Information
<Broadcast address>
pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in Chat Member. Chat Setting 1 lMail settingsChat setting
Do the following operations. Item Sound setting Chat image User setting Operation/Explanation You can set a tone for when you send/receive a chat mail message on the Chat Mail display.
Select a folderSelect a tone. pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail message comes in from a member not stored in Chat Member. You can set whether to display images on the Chat Mail display.
ON or OFF You can set the name and image of the user (yourself).
Select the name fieldEnter a user name. pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters. pIf you do not change the user name, go to the next step.
Select the image fieldSelect a folderSelect an image. If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat Group If you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that is not stored in Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete stored member and start Chat Mail. Select YES; then the current chat members are deleted and the senders mail address or chat group members are stored in Chat Member. If you start Chat Mail from the desktop The senders mail address is stored in Chat Member. When the senders mail address has been stored in a chat group, the members in that chat group are stored in Chat Member. However, the mail address selected as the destination is only the mail address of the sender. If you start Chat Mail from Chat Group The chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All members of the group are selected as the destination. Function Menu of the Chat Mail Display l i a M Function menu Operation/Explanation Send You can send the chat mail message. Select receiver Chat member From among chat members, you can select destination addresses to send the chat mail messages to.
Put a check mark for destination addresses to send the messages tol(
You can store chat members. (See page 239)
) Broadcast address You can check the destination addresses you have simultaneously sent a chat mail message to. pWhen there are destination addresses that are not stored in Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store them in Chat Member. If you store them in Chat Member, select YES and put a check mark for the destination addresses to be stored and press l(
You can receive chat mail messages that you could not automatically receive. If you receive a new chat mail message, the Chat Mail display is updated.
). Reload View first line View last line You can display the latest chat mail message. You can display the oldest chat mail message. 242
+m-2-6
<Chat Group>
Creating Chat Group You can store the mail addresses you want to exchange chat mail per group. By storing multiple members in a group, you can set them as chat members at a time. You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You can create up to five groups. Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit group name Enter a chat group name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Reset group name You can reset the name of the chat group to the default.
YES Function Menu of the Detailed Chat Group Display/Chat Group Address Confirmation Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Chat Group list Refer address
), Chat group members are stored in Chat Member and 1 mPhonebookPhonebook settingsChat groupSelect a chat group to be stored. pWhen the selected chat group has any member, If you press l(
Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 240. appears at the lower left of the display. 2 Highlight <Not stored> and press
l(
). pIf you select a stored mail address, the Chat Group Address Confirmation display appears. 3 Enter a mail address. Detailed Chat Group display Change member pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the Phonebook, and the image is stored in the Phonebook, the image is also set. pWhen the mail address is phone number@docomo.ne.jp, store the phone Member setting number only. When you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3. Function Menu of the Chat Group List Function menu Activate chat Operation/Explanation The members in the chat group are stored as chat members and Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 240. M a i l You can edit the mail address. Go to step 3 on page 243. pYou can edit also by pressing l(
You can look up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item. Phonebook. Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
). Sent address . Select a phone number or mail address phone number or mail address. and press Oo(
and press Oo(
). Received address . Select a phone number or mail address You can store members from a Mail group in the chat group.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group. pIf you have already stored members in the chat group, the confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the members. You can set the members name and image. You can switch members by pressing No.
Select the member name fieldEnter a members name. pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters. pNot to change the members name, go to the next step.
Select the picture fieldSelect a folderSelect an image. 243 Function menu Operation/Explanation Delete Delete all
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Compose SMS>
Composing SMS Messages to Send You can compose and send SMS messages. You can save up to 1,000 sent SMS messages including i-mode mail messages to the Outbox. pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from subscribers of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo. For the countries and overseas carriers available for the service, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 422) 1 lCompose SMS l i a M Address field Text field SMS Composition display 2 Select the address fieldSelect an item.
). Phonebook . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number. Sent address . Select a phone number and press Oo(
Received address. Select a phone number and press Oo(
Enter address . Enter a phone number. Only one address can be specified. pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including +). pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo, enter +
(press and hold 0 for at least one second), country code, and destination mobile phone number in that order. When the mobile phone number begins with 0, enter the phone number except for the 0. Also, you can enter 010, country code, and destination mobile phone number in that order to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS messages received from overseas, enter 010.) 3 Select the text fieldEnter text. pThe number of characters you can enter differs depending on the SMS input character. 244 The animation display during transmission appears and mail is sent.
). 4 Press l(
5 OK Information pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be sent successfully to the destination. pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the maximum number of storage, they will be overwritten starting from the oldest sent mail. However, protected sent mail cannot be overwritten. pYou cannot compose an SMS message when the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the maximum and those messages are all protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full. Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages, and then operate again. pEven if Activate of Caller ID notification is set to OFF, the caller ID is notified to the other party you send an SMS message to. If you attempt to send an SMS message to the phone number headed by 184/186, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail. pIf you set SMS report request to ON, you cannot send SMS messages to the i-mode phone of the mova service. p+ is valid only at the beginning of the address. pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include any characters other than numbers, _, # and +. pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text. pThe special symbols (see page 506) are replaced by half-pitch spaces. pEach space is counted as a character. pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is User unset/PublicPhone/
Unavailable. pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages. Function Menu of the SMS Composition Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Send Preview Save You can send the SMS message. Go to step 5 on page 244.
) to send the SMS message. Before sending, you can check the address and the text contents. pPress l(
You can save the SMS message you are composing or editing to the Draft. pYou cannot save the message when the address field and text field are blank. SMS report req. See page 246. SMS valid. per. See page 246. SMS input char. See page 247.
<Receive SMS>
Receiving SMS Messages Automatically You can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages including i-mode mail messages. pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 422) 1 When an SMS message arrives,
(pink) lights and the receiving message is displayed. When receiving ends, the display shows the number of received SMS messages. pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting Mail. pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, Reception Result display
(see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for Mail/Msg. ring time.) Press Oo, highlight pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
, and press Oo(
) to display the Inbox list. Information pWhen the number of unread or protected messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum, no new messages can be received and receive SMS messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or release protection until
(dark blue) clears, and then perform Check new SMS.
(dark blue) is displayed. To Display Newly Received SMS Messages 1 Reception Result displayMail
Select an SMS message to be displayed. pPress and hold No for at least one second from the detailed SMS display to change the size of characters.
(See Mail on page 129) Information pDepending on the characters entered in the received SMS message, spaces might be displayed. pWhile the senders address (phone number) is highlighted in the displayed SMS message, you can press +
) to make a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call to the displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function). Further, if the senders phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the stored name is highlighted. In this case, you can dial the phone number in the same way. Oo(
pA Short Mail message is received as an SMS message on the FOMA phone. When the sender does not notify you of the phone number, the reason is displayed in the senders field. M a i l 245
<SMS Settings>
Setting SMS SMS Report Request You can set whether to request an SMS report for when sending an SMS message. The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was delivered to the destination. You can check received SMS reports in the Inbox folder. 1 lSMS settingsSMS report requestON or OFF pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing. SMS Validity Period You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an SMS message sent but unsuccessfully delivered due to the out-of-service area, etc. 1 lSMS settingsSMSvalidity period
Select a holding period. pIf you select None, the stored SMS message is re-sent after a certain period of time and deleted from the SMS Center. pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
<Check New SMS>
Checking whether Center Holds SMS Messages When SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are automatically sent to your FOMA phone, but will be held at the SMS Center if your FOMA phone cannot receive messages such as when it is off or out of the service area. You can receive the messages by Check new SMS. 1 lCheck new SMS 2 Return If the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA phone automatically receives them. l i a M Information pSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after checking. pWhen
(dark blue), etc. are displayed, you cannot receive any
(dark blue) or more SMS messages. Delete unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release protection. (Read and unprotected messages are overwritten automatically from the oldest one.) pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Use Check new message to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. 246 SMS Input Character You can set the characters you can enter into the text of SMS messages. You can set to enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and half-pitch symbols. 1 lSMS settingsSMS input characterSelect an item. Japanese (70char.) . You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You
(see cannot enter pictographs except page 502). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text. and English (160char.) . You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up to 160 characters for the text. pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing. SMS Center Selection Normally, you do not need to change this setting. You can set the address and Type of number for the SMS Center. This setting is for getting any service other than SMS Service you currently use. 1 lSMS settingsSMS center selection
User settingEnter an address
International or Unknown pYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters for the address. However, if : or
# is included, you cannot set it for International. pYou can reset User Setting to DoCoMo by ResetEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES.
<Web Mail>
Using Web Mail You can send mail messages or browse received mail messages on the i-mode site. pYou can use only in B Mode or Dual Mode of 2in1. pFor details on Web mail, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [2in1]. 1 lWeb mail
Operate following the instructions on the display. M a i l 247 248 i-ppli What is i-ppli? . 250 Downloading i-ppli from Sites . <i-ppli Download> 250 Starting i-ppli . <i-ppli Run> 251 Setting i-ppli . <ippli Settings> 261 Starting i-ppli Automatically . 262 Operating i-ppli Stand-by Display
. <i-ppli Stand-by Display> 263 Displaying i-ppli Data Files on the microSD Card
. <ippli(microSD)> 264 249 What is i-ppli?
By downloading i-ppli from i-mode sites, you can use the FOMA phone more convenient. You can use the i-ppli which enables you to directly store the data into the Phonebook or Schedule, or the i-ppli which links to Data Box, enabling you to save or obtain images. Also, as the large capacity mega i-ppli is supported, you can enjoy playing high-resolution 3D games and full-length role playing game. pFor details on i-ppli, refer to the Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version.
<i-ppli Download>
Downloading i-ppli from Sites You can download software programs from sites to the FOMA phone. You can save up to 100 files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume because the memory space is shared with other data files. (See page 537) 1 Bring up an i-ppli downloadable site
Select a software program. i l p p
i 2 Select OK when downloading ends. pSee page 186 when i-ppli programs are stored to the maximum. pWhen downloading ends, the display for Software Setting (Network Set, Stand-by Set, Location Usage, or Program Guide Key) might appear. These settings can be done also from the Software list. 3 YES or NO YES . Starts i-ppli. NO . Returns to the site display. When downloading is suspended When you press r or h to suspend downloading an i-ppli program of 100 Kbytes or more, or when downloading is suspended by the radio wave conditions, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select YES to resume downloading the remaining part. Select NO to show the confirmation display asking whether to save the file downloaded halfway. Select YES to partially save the file. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved i-ppli program from the Software list. When you downloaded mail-linked i-ppli An i-ppli mail folder is created automatically each in the Inbox/Outbox Folder list, and the title of the downloaded mail-linked i-ppli becomes the name of the folder. pYou can save up to five mail-linked i-ppli programs. pYou cannot download the software program if the mail-linked i-ppli using the same folder is already in the Software list. pYou cannot download mail-linked i-ppli while Mail Security is set. pYou cannot download mail-linked i-ppli if the Inbox/Outbox Folder list contains five i-ppli mail folders. pWhen re-downloading mail-linked i-ppli whose folder only remains, the confirmation display appears asking whether to use the existing i-ppli mail folder. If you select YES, the existing folder is used. If you select NO because you do not use it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete an existing folder and create a new one. You cannot download mail-linked i-ppli without creating a new folder. Information pYou can download pre-installed i-ppli programs from the P-SQUARE site (Japanese only). iMenu (Menu/Search)
(Mobile Phone Maker)P-SQUARE pDownloading is not available from some accessed sites. QR code for accessing the site 250 Information pSome i-ppli programs can automatically connect to the i-mode Center after they are downloaded. However, to use this service, you need to set it in advance in Software setting (Network set). p appears at the top of the display while software information or a software program is being downloaded from SSL pages. pAt downloading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM. Select YES to start downloading. In this case, the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation. pIf you attempt to re-download the software program that was downloaded using a different UIM, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite the software program. With the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli, the confirmation display appears telling that the data on the IC card is to be deleted. Select YES to start downloading. When downloading ends, the software program that was downloaded using a different UIM and the data on the IC card are deleted. pYou cannot download some software programs while the IC card function is working or IC Card Lock is activated. pSome software programs that start immediately after downloading cannot be saved. pDepending on the data volume on the IC card, you might not be able to download Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli even if there is still available space for software storage. Delete the displayed software programs following the confirmation display, and then download it again. (Some software programs might not be targeted for deletion, depending on the software type to be downloaded.) Depending on the software program, you need to start it and delete the files on the IC card before deleting the software program itself. pYou can save up to 1 Mbyte per i-ppli program. pi-ppli mail is the mail sent and saved by mail-linked i-ppli and mail received as mail-linked i-ppli. i-ppli mail is automatically saved to the i-ppli mail folder. pThe 3D polygonal engine enables cubic images to be displayed in i-ppli. By combining polygons, a deep, cubic image is displayed. Display Software Info You can display software information when downloading i-ppli. 1 mi-ppliippli settingsDisp. software info
Display or Not display
<i-ppli Run>
Starting i-ppli 1 i(for at least one second)
Select a software program to be started.
: GPS compatible i-ppli
: Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli
: Management information i-ppli
: microSD card compatible i-ppli
: Vertical full display compatible i-ppli
: Horizontal display compatible i-ppli (incompatible with full display)
: Horizontal full display compatible i-ppli
: i-ppli DX
: Mail-linked i-ppli
: Partially saved i-ppli
: Set for Auto Start
: Set for the i-ppli Stand-by display
: Set for both Auto Start and the i-ppli Stand-by display
: Can set for the i-ppli Stand-by display
: Downloaded from an SSL page
: Downloaded or upgraded by using a different UIM i
p p l i Software list 251
) from the Software list in the FOMA phone, the pYou can display the Software list on the microSD card by mi-ppliippli(microSD)SW list(microSD). pEach time you press c(
display format changes. pWhen you start an i-ppli DX program or while it is running, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to permit the i-ppli DX program to use the FOMA phones information and functions. pWhen you start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program for the first time, the confirmation display appears asking whether to make the UIM and IC card compatible. The UIM information that has been made compatible is saved on the IC card as IC owner information. pWhen you select a partially saved i-ppli program, you can download the remaining part of it. p pTo end i-ppli, press and hold r for at least one second or press h; then select YES. is displayed while an i-ppli program is running. or i l p p
i pThe software program you started last time comes at the top of the list. You cannot manually change the order of software programs. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. pYou cannot display the Software list even when you press and hold i for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. Information pWhen a software program to be started is not specified, select a software program. pTo start up i-ppli DX, set the data and time by Set time beforehand. pWhen a software program is running, melodies are played back at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. However, melodies are not played back during a call. pYou may need to set the communication setting while a software program is running. pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a certain period of time while an i-ppli program is running, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue communicating. pWith some software programs, you can use the Web To function and the Phone To/
AV Phone To function from i-ppli. However, you cannot use them while the software program is running as the i-ppli Stand-by display. pIf you start the camera from i-ppli, the shot images are not saved with ordinary images, but are saved as part of i-ppli for its usage. 252 Information pIf you start the camera from i-ppli, you can specify the image size or image quality for some i-ppli programs. pYou can scan QR codes and JAN codes from i-ppli using the camera. The scanned data is saved and used by the software program. pImages that are used by i-ppli and data you have entered might be sent over the Internet to the server automatically. i-ppli uses the following types of images:
Images shot by the camera after it is started from a camera-linked application program Images obtained by the infrared data exchange function of i-ppli Images downloaded from sites or Internet web pages Images obtained from Data Box by i-ppli pi-ppli mail running under mail-linked i-ppli might not be displayed correctly. pSome i-ppli programs save the various information used on the i-ppli programs when you end them. However, the information might not be saved if the low battery alarm sounds or the battery pack is removed while the i-ppli program is running. If the battery level indicates accordance with the operation of each software program.
, either press -h or end the i-ppli program in pYou can save the data files of some software programs to the microSD card, but you might not be able to use them for another model. You can check ippli(microSD) for the software programs that use the microSD card. pSome IPs (Information Providers) may access the software program stored in your mobile phone and have it directly halted, depending on the software program. In that case, you will not be able to start or upgrade the software program, or use it for the Stand-by display. You can delete it or display the software information. To resume running the software program, you need to receive the communication to cancel the software halting state. Contact the IP (Information Provider) to inquire about that. pSome IPs (Information Providers) might send data to the software program stored in your mobile phone depending on the software program. pWhen the IP (Information Provider) requests to halt or re-open the software program or sends data to it, the mobile phone communicates and case, you are not charged a communication fee. pTo creators of i-ppli If you encounter an error while creating a software program, the Trace Information display might help identify the problem. For how to check the trace information, see Trace Information on page 253. is displayed. In this Motion tracking The FOMA phone supports motion tracking which operates i-ppli programs (by inclining or swinging the FOMA phone) through the recognition technology of the inside camera. pIt might not work in the following cases:
When the lens of the inside camera is dirty When the clothes you are wearing are similar to the background When the background is not stable such as when you are moving When you are in a dark or too bright place Information pThis application program is the game played by inclining or swinging the FOMA phone. If you excessively swing your FOMA phone, it might happen that it hits against persons or objects, resulting in accidents or damage. When playing the game, securely take hold of your FOMA phone, do not swing to an extent more than necessitated, and check around you for safety. Trace Information You can check the details when a software program malfunctions. 1 mi-ppliippli infoTrace info pWhen the memory space for Trace Info becomes full, the information is overwritten from the oldest one. pYou can operate Copy info and Delete info from the Function menu. Security Error History You can check the details when an i-ppli program ends because of a security error. 1 mi-ppliippli infoSecurity error history pYou can operate Copy info and Delete info from the Function menu. pYou can display the security error history also by selecting on the desktop. Function Menu of the Software List Function menu Set ippli To Operation/Explanation You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to start from a link on site or mail message. You can set also for when you place the FOMA phone over an IC card compatible scanning device. You can set this for each software program.
Put a check mark for items to be setl(
pSome items might not be set depending on the software
) program. Auto start time See page 262. Software setting
(Stand-by set) Software setting
(Network set) Software setting
(Stand-by net) Software setting
(Icon info) Software setting
(Hor. open menu set) Software setting
(Change mld./img.) See page 263. You can set whether to communicate while an i-ppli program is running.
Network setON, OFF or Check every startl(
pIf you select Check every start, the confirmation display appears each time you start the i-ppli program. See page 263.
) You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to use information of icons indicating i-mode mail, SMS messages, Messages R/F, battery level, Manner Mode, and within/out-of service area.
Icon infoON or OFFl(
You can set the i-ppli program for when it starts by selecting i-ppli on the Horizontal Open Menu.
Hor. open menu setON or OFFl(
You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to change the setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc. This function is available only for i-ppli DX programs.
Change mld./img.ON, OFF or Check every change
l(
pIf you select Check every change, the confirmation display appears each time the i-ppli program tries to change the setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc.
) 253 i
p p l i Operation/Explanation Information Function menu Software setting
(See P. book/hist.) Software setting
(View ToruCa) Software setting
(Location usage) Software setting
(Program guide key) i l p p
i Software info Upgrade
) You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to refer to the Phonebook, Redial, and Received Calls. This function is available only for i-ppli DX programs.
See P. book/hist.ON or OFFl(
You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to refer to ToruCa files. This function is available only for i-ppli DX programs.
View ToruCaON or OFFl(
You can set whether to permit the i-ppli program to use location information. This function is available only for i-ppli DX programs.
Location usageON or OFFl(
You can set the software program for the Program Guide i-ppli that starts up from 1Seg. You can set this only for the i-ppli DX program that links to 1Seg.
Program guide keyON or OFFl(
You can display the software name, version, and others of the i-ppli program.
YES
) Add desktop icon See page 127. Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all)
Delete thisYES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for software programs to be deletedl(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Move to microSD See page 361. Move to phone See page 361. Power saver You can set whether to validate Power Saver Mode for each i-ppli program for when Power saver is set to ON.
ON or OFF 254
<Software setting (Icon info)>
pWhen you set Software setting (Icon info) to ON for the i-ppli Stand-by display, the icon information for unread mail/message, battery level, Manner Mode, radio wave strength and out-of-service area can be sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet in the same way as the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM, and can be deciphered by third parties. pWhen the software program needs Software setting (Icon info), the software program might not run if OFF is selected.
<Upgrade>
pDepending on the software program, you can upgrade it at start. pAt upgrading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM. Select YES to start upgrading. In this case, the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation. pYou cannot upgrade the mail-linked i-ppli in the following cases:
While details of the corresponding i-ppli mail folder are displayed While Mail Security is set When Mail Security is set for the corresponding i-ppli mail folder When you delete mail-linked i-ppli The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the i-ppli mail folder as well. If you do not delete it, you can check the text of mail from the Outbox/Inbox list. YES. Deletes both the software program and the i-ppli mail folder. NO. Deletes the software program only and the i-ppli mail folder is left. Cancel. Does not delete both the software program and i-ppli mail folder; the former display returns. pYou can delete neither the i-ppli program nor the i-ppli mail folder even if you select YES, in the following cases:
While Mail Security is set While displaying details of the folder When the folder contains protected mail While the folder is set with security When you delete an i-ppli program whose files are on the microSD card The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete files on the microSD card as well. YES . Deletes both the software program and files on the microSD card. Press YES again on the confirmation display. You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to execute Delete or Delete selected. NO. Deletes the software program only and the files are left. Cancel. Does not delete both the software program and files on the microSD card, and the former display returns. When you delete Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli The confirmation display appears telling that the files on the IC card will be deleted. pYou cannot delete the iD (iD Setting Application). pYou might not be able to delete the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli while the IC card function is working or IC Card Lock is set. Pre-installed i-ppli Programs The following i-ppli programs are pre-installed:
pYou can delete the pre-installed i-ppli programs except for G
(G Guide Program List Remote-controller). You can re-download them from the P-SQUARE site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them. pDeadlines for re-download services U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079): the end of April, 2012
(Professor Layton and the Curious Village):
the end of April, 2012 GPS (Countdown Train GPS): the end of April, 2011 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P):
the end of April, 2012 pThe re-download service might be halted or closed without notice even in the service period. pDeadlines for downloading i-ppli additional data U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079): the end of April, 2012
(Professor Layton and the Curious Village):
the end of April, 2012 GPS (Countdown Train GPS): the end of May, 2011 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P):
the end of May, 2012 U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079) The Gundam is now appearing in your mobile phone. Operate the Gundam and then break through heated battles. 1 Software list U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079)
OoOoOo When you activate this i-ppli program in Normal Style, the confirmation display appears telling that you are advised to play the game in Horizontal Open Style. 2 Confirm to upgrade to the complete version
YES or NOOo YES . Connects to the site and upgrade to the complete version NO . Not upgrade to the complete version pYou are charged a packet communication fee for when you connect to the site or upgrade to the complete version. pThe complete version data is saved to the microSD card. pYou can upgrade to the complete version also from the menu. pYou cannot carry over the previous data when you upgrade to the complete version. i
p p l i pIf you put a check mark for (Does not show this display from the next start-up.), the confirmation whether to upgrade to the complete version is not made when you start the program next time. 3 Select a menu. TIME ATTACK . Challenges how fast you can shoot down a certain number of enemy airplanes SURVIVAL. Challenges how many enemies that appear one after another you can shoot down HELP . For displaying how to operate the game OPTION . For selecting a key operation type and setting the volume level or vibrator UP GRADE . Connects to the site and upgrade to the complete version QUIT. For ending the application program 255 GPS (Countdown Train GPS) You can download the time schedule of trains, and can count down the departure time of the train you want to catch on a minute/second basis. The alarm function is also provided to notify you of 5 to 30 minutes before the departure. You can update the time schedule from the menu so the latest one is always available. Further, you can search for the nearest station using the GPS function. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using. pFor details, refer to (Help) in the menu. Powered by JR Travel Navigator
) (YES)
-P (Countdown Train-P) 1 Software list 2 Read (Exemption clause) thoroughly
i(
3 l(
)GPS [Search the nearest station (GPS)] or (Search by entering station name) GPS [Search the nearest station (GPS)]
. Measures your current location and searches the surroundings for a station.
(Search by entering station name)
. Enter a station name, and press i(
). You do not need to enter the whole station name. 4 Select a station nameSelect a line and direction
) (YES)
i(
(Professor Layton and the Curious Village) This is the transplanted version of an adventure puzzle game, which was a huge hit for game consoles. 1 Software list (Professor Layton and the Curious Village)0 When you activate this i-ppli program in Normal Style, the confirmation display appears telling that you are advised to play the game in Horizontal Open Style. LEVEL-5 INC. 2 Select a menu. i l p p
i
(From the beginning) . Start the game from the beginning
(Option) . For setting the volume level or vibrator
(Upgrade). Upgrade to the complete version pYou are charged a packet communication fee for when you upgrade to the complete version. pThe complete version data is saved to the microSD card. Mobile Google Map Mobile Google Map is the convenient i-ppli program that enables you to get town information visually. You can easily search for information about areas or shops using the map. You can switch to the aerial photos as well. pYou need to agree with (Usage rules) for the first time. pYou are separately charged a packet communication free. 256 for P
(J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P) Just by speaking a phrase to be translated into your FOMA phone, this application program translates it from Japanese to English or Chinese and vice versa. pYou can use all the functions charge free for 60 days from when you start using this application program. The phrases available for translation are restricted from the 61st day after. To use all the services, you need to register My Menu
(charged) from the (Speech Translation) site by ATR-Trek Co., Ltd.
[(How to access: iMenu (Menu/Search)
(Dictionary/Convenient Tool)
(Convenient Tool) (Speech Translation)]
The display is for English version. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using. ATR-Trek 1 Software list
_P (J-E Speech Translation_P) or _P (J-C Speech Translation_P)
SKIP pSelect _P (J-E Speech Translation_P) for using English version, or select _P (J-C Speech Translation_P) for using Chinese version. 2 Read (What is Speech Translation?) and (Usage rules) thoroughly (Agree) pYou need to agree with (Usage rules) for the first time. 3 Read (Cautions in use) thoroughly
OK (YES) pIf you select (NO), (What is Speech Translation?), (Usage rules), and (Cautions in use) do not appear when you start the program next time. 4 (YES)OK p (How to use i-ppli) appears at the first startup. 5 Select a menu item.
(Translate Japanese to English)
. Start to translate Japanese to English.
(Translate English to Japanese)
. Start to translate English to Japanese.
(Translate Japanese to Chinese)
. Start to translate Japanese to Chinese.
(Translate Chinese to Japanese)
. Start to translate Chinese to Japanese.
(Change scene)
. You can select the scene to translate. pPress i to switch between Japanese and English or Chinese.
(Map Application) By using the GPS function and map, you can check the map for where you are currently in or for the place you specify, or check your nearby area for details. You can then navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car. Further, you can easily get train information by voice input. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to use Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for using this software program. pIf you delete this software program and then when you want to resume it, download it from (i-area -Local Information-). pThis software program is the i-ppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode. pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and promptness of the map and route information. pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver operates this application program. pSee page 279 for details on operations. i
p p l i 257
(i-ppli Banking) This is an i-ppli program that enables you to conveniently use mobile banking. Mobile banking enables you to use your FOMA phone to check the account balance, check the deposits/withdrawals, and transfer/shift money whenever you want and wherever you are. By entering your specified password at the start of this application program, you can use the mobile banking services for up to two banks. pTo use mobile banking, you need to have the bank account and subscribe to the mobile banking service of each bank. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. pFor details on i-ppli Banking, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pFor the information about i-ppli Banking, refer to i-mode site. i-mode site: iMenu (Menu/Search)
(Mobile Banking)
(i-ppli Banking) The display is for reference. The actual one may differ. QR code for accessing the site 2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2) The display is for reference. The actual one may differ. QR code for accessing the site 2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2) enables you to easily exhibit your goods on Rakuoku whenever you want wherever you are. Even if you are a beginner, an instruction guides you through exhibition procedures, so you can use it easily. The convenient functions such as shooting/
editing photos and saving records are available so that you can exhibit your goods in a shorter time than you do on sites. pYou need to agree with (Usage rules) for the first time. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. pFor details on Rakuoku, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. pTo exhibit on Rakuoku, you need to register with the Rakuten membership and exhibitor membership. pFor the information about Rakuoku, refer to i-mode site. i-mode site: iMenu --
(Rakuoku
-Auction-) i l p p
i 258 G
(G Guide Program List Remote-controller) This is an i-ppli program that bundles the TV program list and AV remote-controller function and the monthly charge is free. Anytime and anywhere you are, you can easily obtain the terrestrial digital, terrestrial analog or BS digital TV program information for the desired time zone. You can know about titles, contents, and start/end times of TV programs. Further, you can start a 1Seg program from the program list and vice versa. If there is any program you want to watch, you can set timer recordings of the program on a DVD recorder, etc. over the Internet. (You need to have a DVD recorder, etc. that supports the remote timer recording function. And you need to perform initial settings of this application program.) Further, you can search for the program information by keywords such as program genres or celebrities you like, or pickup keywords on the top of the display. You can also remote-control a TV, video recorder, and DVD player. (Some models are not supported.) pSee Using Infrared Remote-controller Function on page 371 for details on the infrared The actual one differs. Local programs according to your region appear on your display. The display is for reference. remote-controller. pYou need to make the initial settings and to agree with the usage rules for the first time. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. pTo use this application program overseas, set the time for the FOMA phone to Japan time. pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pYou cannot delete G (G Guide Program List Remote-controller). pThis software program is the i-ppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode. About program booking function You can select and book a program you want to watch from the program list of this application program. How to book a program 1. Software listG (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)
Highlight a program to be booked and press i(
(Book program) (Execute booking)
Operate following the instructions on the display. About timer recording function You can select a program you want to record and set a timer recording from the program list of this application program. How to set a timer recording 1. Software listG (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)
Highlight a program to be set for a timer recording and press i(
(1Seg timer recording) (Execute booking)
Operate following the instructions on the display.
(You can set a timer recording also by highlighting a program and pressing s.)
) i
p p l i About remote timer recording function If you have a DVD recorder, etc. that supports the remote timer recording function, you can set timer recordings from the program list of this application program over the Internet even if you are away. For remote timer recording, you need to make initial settings of this application program. How to make initial settings 1. Set the Internet connection for the DVD recorder, etc. 2. Software listG (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)
(Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD recorder, etc. you use.)
i(
Operate following the guidance.
) (Remote timer recording) How to set timer recordings After the initial settings, specify your desired program and select
(Remote timer recording). Then, the DVD recorder, etc. specified on this application program is connected via the Internet, and you can set timer recordings. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. 259 iD (iD Setting Application) Chargeless electronic money iD is a service that enables you to do shopping by placing your Osaifu-Keitai or a credit card with iD mounted over a scanning device. You can do shopping easily and conveniently without signing. Depending on the card publishing company, cashing is also supported. pFor using iD, you need to subscribe to a card publishing company that supports iD as well as to have Osaifu-Keitai on which specified settings have been completed by the iD application program and card application program provided by the card publishing company, or a credit card on which iD is mounted. pWhen you use iD on Osaifu-Keitai, you need to complete iD The display is for reference. The actual one may differ. application settings and then make settings at the card application end by downloading or starting the card application provided by your card publishing company. Depending on the card you use, you might be able to use iD only with the settings at the card application end without any iD application settings. pThe expense (annual fees, etc.) charged for the iD service differs depending on the card publishing company. pFor the information about iD, refer to the i-mode site of iD. i-mode site: iMenu (Menu List)iD i l p p
i QR code for accessing the site 260 DCMX (DCMX Credit Application) DCMX is a credit service that supports iD and offered by NTT DoCoMo Group. DCMX provides DCMX mini that enables you to use up to 10,000 per month and respective DCMX/DCMX GOLD services that enable you to use more amount and save up DoCoMo points. With DCMX mini, you can easily make a subscription from this application program and immediately use Mobile Phone Credit. The display is for reference. The actual one may differ. Subscribing for membership/Screening 1 Setting card information Use No troublesome deposit is required!
Just by placing the mobile phone with completing card information setting at a shop where the following iD mark is put up, you can enjoy shopping without signing2. Check 3 You can check, on the application program, the service contents of DCMX, the balance for the current month, and detailed account!
Change You can perform setting when changing models, or updating your validity period from the application program. 1 The online screening is conducted at your subscription for DCMX mini. For subscribing to a service other than DCMX mini, you are connected to the subscription page for i-mode. 2 You might be required to enter your pin number under certain conditions. 3 Only for DCMX mini, you can check usage status from the application program. For the other than DCMX mini, you can check it at the i-mode site. pFor service contents and details of subscriptions, refer to the i-mode site of DCMX. i-mode site: iMenuDCMX iD
<ippli Settings>
Setting i-ppli 1 mi-ppliippli settings
Do the following operations. QR code for accessing the site Item Operation/Explanation Auto start setting See page 262. Disp. software info See page 251. Preferred tone Information pTo start this application program for the first time, you need to agree with
(Cautions in use). pYou are charged a packet communication fee for settings and operations. Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli Note that we take no responsibility for any information set on your IC card. FOMA
(FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) FOMA (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) enables you to check whether the FOMA phone is available at the FOMA High-Speed Area. pUse FOMA (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) with your consent to
(Cautions in use). pDepending on the communication environment (such as weather, radio wave conditions, network congestion state) at communication environment check, the different result or out of service might appear even in the same area or at the same period of time. The display is for reference. The actual one may differ. Backlight Power saver pYou might not be able to check correctly if you use another function while using this application program. Vibrator i
p p l i You can set which sound to be output preferentially, from MUSIC/
1Seg or i-ppli program, for when you start an i-ppli program during music playback or use of 1Seg.
MUSIC/1Seg or ippli You can set the backlight operation for when an i-ppli program is running.
Select an item. Depend on system . Follows the setting of Backlight. Depend on software . Follows the setting of each software program. Constant light. Lights constantly. You can set to Power Saver Mode to decrease battery consumption by suspending the i-ppli program temporarily for when you close the FOMA phone during i-ppli running.
ON or OFF pThis setting is valid from when an i-ppli program starts until it closes. pEven when this function is set to ON, Power Saver Mode becomes invalid if Power saver that can be set for each i-ppli program is set to OFF. You can set the vibrator operation for when an i-ppli program is running.
Depend on system or Depend on software Depend on system . Does not work regardless of the setting of Vibrator. With some software programs, the vibrator works. Depend on software . Follows the setting of each software program. Check settings You can check each of ippli settings. 261 5 Press l(
). Auto Start Info You can check whether a software program has started automatically and properly. Also, you can check the information of start failure from IC card. Up to three records of automatic start, a record of automatic start set by i-ppli, and a record of start failure from IC card are stored. 1 mi-ppliippli infoAuto start info StartO . Started automatically and properly. StartX . Did not start automatically. When Oo(
) to start the software program. is displayed, you can press Start. Has not started yet. Information pSoftware programs do not start automatically in the following cases:
When the FOMA phone is turned off When the date and time are not set When another function is working During Lock All During Personal Data Lock During playback of animations/Flash movies When the time set for automatic start is identical to the reserved time set for Software update, or the time set for an alarm of Alarm, Schedule or ToDo, Book program or Timer recording When a start time has been specified to the same software program within 10 minutes from the previous auto-start pIf automatic start fails, appears on the desktop. Select the icon to bring up the Auto Start Info. Information
<Backlight> <Vibrator>
pWith some software programs, the backlight and vibrator settings are OFF. Consequently, if you set Depend on software, the backlight and vibrator will not work; if you want them to work, set Depend on system. Starting i-ppli Automatically You can make an i-ppli program start automatically at the set date and time. Set the date and time for automatic start using Auto Start Time. Auto Start Setting You can set whether to enable automatic start of i-ppli programs. 1 mi-ppliippli settingsAuto start setting
ON or OFF Auto Start Time You can set the date and time for automatic start. You can set for up to three software programs. Time interval set . Starts at an interval specified by the software program. The
)Auto start time 1 Software listi(
2 Put a check mark for an item to be setl(
3 Select start timeEnter the date and time to be set. 4 1 timeSelect a type of repeat. Start time set . Starts at the set start time automatically. setting is completed.
) pIf you select 1 time, the automatic start is not repeated. pIf you select Weekly, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l(
). i l p p
i 262
<i-ppli Stand-by Display>
Operating i-ppli Stand-by Display Software Setting (Stand-by Set) You can set an i-ppli program for the Stand-by display. Once set, the i-ppli Stand-by display automatically appears each time you bring up the Stand-by display. 1 Software listi(
Stand-by setON or OFFl(
)Software setting
) is displayed for the software program set as the Stand-by display. or is displayed while an i-ppli Stand-by display is running. To operate an i-ppli program as a normal i-ppli program when an i-ppli Stand-by display is running From the i-ppli Stand-by display, press r. and then you can operate the i-ppli or program as a normal one. pTo return to the i-ppli Stand-by display, press and hold r for at least one second or press h; then select Ended. To release the i-ppli Stand-by display, select Terminated, and select YES. changes to a blinking or Information pIf you turn off the FOMA phone while the i-ppli Stand-by display is running, the confirmation display appears asking whether to start the i-ppli program when you turn on the power again. pYou can set only one software program for the i-ppli Stand-by display. pSome i-ppli programs cannot be set for the Stand-by display. pWith some software programs set as the i-ppli Stand-by display, you can press a key to go from the normal i-ppli status to the i-ppli Stand-by display status. However, you cannot return to the i-ppli Stand-by display if another menu function is running. pNote that you might not be able to receive timely information if you have set Software setting (Stand-by net) to OFF. pYou cannot use the Web To function and the Phone To/AV Phone To function from the i-ppli Stand-by display. pIf the software program which connects to the network is set for the i-ppli Stand-by display, it might not operate successfully because of radio wave conditions or other factors. Information pWhen you bring up the Stand-by display while a menu function is operating, the image set for Stand-by display of Display setting will be displayed, even when the i-ppli Stand-by display is set. pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a certain period of time while an i-ppli program is running as the i-ppli Stand-by display, the confirmation display appears. When you press -r, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue communication. pIf you set Lock All or Personal Data Lock when the i-ppli Stand-by display is shown, the i-ppli Stand-by display will end. If you set Lock All, the image set for Stand-by display of Display setting will be displayed and if you set Personal Data Lock, the default Stand-by display will be displayed. The i-ppli Stand-by display will return when you release each lock. Software Setting (Stand-by Net) You can set whether to permit communication for when the i-ppli Stand-by display is running. 1 Software listi(
Stand-by netON or OFFl(
)Software setting
) End Stand-by Display You can temporarily end the running i-ppli Stand-by display. Also, you can release the i-ppli Stand-by display. 1 mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by displayEnd ippli display
End or Terminate pWhen you select Terminate, select YES. 263 i
p p l i End Stand-by Info When the i-ppli Stand-by display does not end successfully, you can check the date/time and its reason. 1 mi-ppliippli infoEnd stand-by info is displayed on the End Stand-by Info display, press i(
pWhen and select Copy info to copy the information. Select Delete info, and select YES to delete the information.
<ippli(microSD)>
Displaying i-ppli Data Files on the microSD Card Depending on the i-ppli program, you can save its data files on the microSD card. You can display the i-ppli data files saved on the microSD card. 1 mi-ppliippli(microSD)ippli(microSD) Function Menu while i-ppli Data File is Displayed Function menu Folder info Operation/Explanation You can display the information of the software program that uses the selected folder, available/unavailable for folder usage, and the reason if unavailable. Delete folder You can delete the selected folder and files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES i l p p
i 264 Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa What is Osaifu-Keitai?. 266 What is iC Transfer Service? . 266 Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-ppli
. <IC Card Content> 267 Checking IC Owner Data in IC Card . <Check IC Owner> 268 What is ToruCa? . <ToruCa> 268 Obtaining ToruCa Files . <Obtain ToruCa Files> 269 Displaying ToruCa Files . <ToruCa Viewer> 269 How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display . 272 Setting about ToruCa . <ToruCa Settings> 274 Locking IC Card Function . <IC Card Lock> 275 265 What is iC Transfer Service?
iC transfer service1 is the service for transferring the data files on the IC card at a time2 to your new Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone3 when you replace your Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone such as at the time of model change or malfunction. After completing the transfer of data files on the IC card, just download an Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program, and then you can easily use the Osaifu-Keitai services. iC transfer service is available at the service counters such as a DoCoMo shop nearby. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. 1 You are charged a handling fee for using iC transfer service. (You might not be charged at times.) In addition, you are charged a packet communication fee for downloading iC application programs and respective settings. 2 Some Osaifu-Keitai services are not supported. The services that are not supported are deleted when you use iC transfer service, so ensure that you use a back-up service for the Osaifu-Keitai services or delete them in advance. 3 iC transfer service is available when new Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone is iC transfer service compatible model. What is Osaifu-Keitai?
The convenient i-mode function which uses the IC card function of the i-mode phone (i-mode FeliCa), or the i-mode phone with the IC card mounted is called Osaifu-Keitai. FeliCa is one of the non-contact IC technologies that enables you to read and write data just by placing it over a scanning device. Just by placing Osaifu-Keitai over the scanning device in a shop, you can pay by electronic cash or use it as an air ticket or reward card. Mobile phones have become one of easy-to-use tools. Further, different from the existing FeliCa compatible non-contact IC card, the new one enables you to deposit electronic money by using the communication into the IC card inside the Osaifu-Keitai or to check your account for balance or usage details. To use Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, you need to make the settings from i-ppli
(IC application) program which supports the IC card function [for details, inquire of IP
(Information Provider)]. For cautions on using each Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pData on the IC card might be lost or deformed owing to the malfunction of Osaifu-Keitai. (When we keep your Osaifu-Keitai for repair, we cannot keep it with data files left, so the data files shall be deleted beforehand by yourself as a rule.) Use the backup service of the IP (Information Provider) for supports such as reissue, restoration, temporary storage or transfer of data files, except for the data transfer by iC transfer service. The availability of backup services and their usage conditions
(necessary applications, charges, etc.) and the support availability of iC transfer service differ depending on the service. Contact the IP (Information Provider) beforehand. For your important data files, be sure to use the service with backup support. pIn any case including malfunction or model change, we cannot be held responsible for the loss or deformation of data on the IC card or other losses caused regarding Osaifu-Keitai compatible services. pIf your Osaifu-Keitai has been stolen or lost, inquire of the provider for Osaifu-Keitai compatible service you use about ways of dealing with the trouble, immediately. With this FOMA phone, you can use Omakase Lock or IC Card Lock. (See page 135, and page 275) a C u r o T
i a t i e K
u f i a s O 266
<IC Card Content>
Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-ppli Read and Write Data inside the IC Card You can start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli from the Software list. By using Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli, you can read/write the data inside the IC card and use convenient functions such as depositing electronic money or traffic tickets, or checking your account for the balance and usage details on the mobile phone. pTake care of your Terminal Security Code and password used for each service not to reveal to anyone. pWhen you start or download the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program for the first time, the message Use IC card for current UIM? appears. When you select YES, you cannot use the IC card function afterward unless you insert the same UIM. To use the IC card function with another UIM, delete all the information on the IC card from Change IC owner, and then delete all the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli programs other than iD (iD Setting Application). Otherwise, you cannot use it. pReading and writing data from the software program and to the IC card is suspended in the following cases:
In that case, the read or written data is discarded. The operation after the communication ends differs depending on the service you use. When a call comes in while an i-ppli program is running When the battery goes flat 1 mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card content The list of the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program is displayed. When you select the i-ppli program, it starts up. Use Osaifu-Keitai Place the FeliCa mark device, and you can use the FOMA phone as electronic money to pay for shopping or to use it as a traffic ticket. This function is available without starting the software program. pDuring a call or i-mode connection, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the FeliCa of the FOMA phone over the scanning mark over the scanning device, however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli. 1 Place the FeliCa mark of the FOMA phone over the scanning device to use the target service. pThe Call/Charging indicator lights when you bring your FOMA phone close to a scanning device and communication becomes ready. Place the FeliCa mark phone over the scanning device. of the FOMA Information pMount the battery pack to use Osaifu-Keitai. Even when the power is turned off or when the battery has gone flat, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the FeliCa mark over the scanning device, however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli. You might not be able to use Osaifu-Keitai if you have left the battery unused for a long period or not charged it after the low battery alarm sounds. Charge the battery. pWhen the FeliCa mark of the FOMA phone placed over the scanning device is not identified, slightly move the mark forwards, backwards, to left, or to right. pOsaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli might start when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device. O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 267
<Check IC Owner>
Checking IC Owner Data in IC Card You can check whether IC owner information for using the IC card is consistent with the information of the currently inserted UIM. 1 mOsaifu-KeitaiCheck IC owner pWhen the UIM differs from the one for stored information, select and reset the data inside the IC card, and then you can store the UIM information. Flow for using ToruCa Place your Osaifu-Keitai over a scanning device to obtain a ToruCa file. Change IC Owner You can delete the data in IC card, and reset the IC owner data. After resetting, you can re-register by currently inserted UIM. pDelete all the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli programs other than iD (iD Setting Application) to delete the IC owner information. However, the i-ppli program with its data file on the IC card is not initialized, so you need to delete it separately. 1 mOsaifu-KeitaiChange IC ownerResetYES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES a C u r o T
i a t i e K
u f i a s O
<ToruCa>
What is ToruCa?
ToruCa is an electronic card that you can obtain with Osaifu-Keitai for use as fliers, restaurant cards, and coupon tickets. You can obtain ToruCa files from scanning devices or sites and can easily exchange them using mail, infrared ray, or a microSD card. The obtained ToruCa files are saved to ToruCa of Osaifu-Keitai. pAvailable on the ToruCa compatible model. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. You can view more detailed information by using (Details) key. Sources of ToruCa files Scanning device Site microSD card i-ppli QR code Mail, infrared data exchange, iC communication Exchanges ToruCa files between i-mode phones. 268
<Obtain ToruCa Files>
Obtaining ToruCa Files Obtain from Scanning Device You can obtain the ToruCa file from a scanning device using the IC card function. By obtaining detailed information, a ToruCa file becomes a ToruCa file (details) which has more pieces of information. pFor a ToruCa file (details), you can download up to 100 Kbytes per file, and for a ToruCa file before obtaining the details, you can download up to 1 Kbyte per file. of the FOMA phone over the 1 Place the FeliCa mark scanning device. About Auto-reading Function of ToruCa If you set Auto reading to Accept to use the ToruCa files by placing the FOMA phone over the scanning device, the available ToruCa files are automatically recognized. The used ToruCa files are converted into Used and then moved to the Used ToruCa folder. Up to 20 used ToruCa files are saved, and when the number of the files exceeds 20, the files are deleted from the one downloaded at the oldest date. pEven if Auto reading is set to Reject, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to use Auto reading when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device. To use ToruCa files, select YES, and then set Auto reading to Accept. Information pWhen you fail to obtain a ToruCa file, the ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator lights. pA ToruCa obtained tone and a ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone sound at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. pDepending on the settings by IPs (Information Providers), you might not be able to update ToruCa files or send them by mail or infrared rays. When the ToruCa file is obtained A ToruCa obtained tone sounds, the Call/Charging indicator flickers. pWhen Receiving display is set to ON, detailed display of obtained ToruCa file appears. pFor a ToruCa file before obtaining detailed information, the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to a site to download detailed information. Select YES to display a ToruCa file (details) with detailed information obtained. Select NO to display a ToruCa file without detailed information. pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds or Receiving display is set to OFF, Press Oo, highlight
); then the ToruCa File list appears. appears on the desktop.
, and press Oo(
<ToruCa Viewer>
Displaying ToruCa Files You can display the ToruCa file obtained using the IC card function, or from sites or mail. 1 mOsaifu-KeitaiToruCa
Select a folder. pEach time you press m from the ToruCa Folder list, you can switch folders between the FOMA phone and the microSD card. ToruCa Folder list pWhen the folder contains unread ToruCa files, appears. 269 O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 2 Select a ToruCa file. Function menu Operation/Explanation Operate folder
(Delete folder) All ToruCa files in the folder are deleted.
Delete folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can search through all ToruCa files in the FOMA phone
(except ToruCa files stored in the Used ToruCa folder) by specifying a search condition.
Select a search condition. Genre . Select a genre. Press l(
belonging to the genre.
) to display a list of category icons Title . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in the title. Index. Enter characters to be searched for, from those in location data. pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index search. Search all folders ToruCa File list Detailed ToruCa File display When obtaining detailed information from a ToruCa file A ToruCa file before obtaining detailed information itself does not show the detailed information. Select (Details) on the ToruCa file display and select YES to connect to the site to obtain more detailed information. After obtaining the detailed information, the ToruCa file is overwritten and saved. Information pYou are charged the ordinary packet fee for obtaining. Function Menu of the ToruCa Folder List Function menu Operate folder
(Add folder) Operation/Explanation You can create a user folder. You can create up to 20 folders.
Add folderEnter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for the microSD card. Operate folder
(Edit folder name) You can edit the folder name for the user folder.
Edit folder nameEnter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for the microSD card. a C u r o T
i a t i e K
u f i a s O 270 Function menu Auto-sort Operation/Explanation You can set to automatically sort and save the ToruCa files that satisfy the conditions set to the folder for when you obtain them from a scanning device or automatically obtain them from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.
Select a sorting condition. Genre . Put a check mark for the genre to sort into and press l(
). You can put it for multiple genres. Title . Enter characters from those in the title, to be a sorting condition. Index . Enter characters from those in the location data, to be a sorting condition. Release. Select YES to release the sorting condition you specified. pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title sort, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index sort. pWhen a sorting condition is already specified for the folder, it is displayed. Press i(
You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.
Copy to microSD
) to set a sorting condition again. You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.
CPY all to microSDEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES Copy
(Copy to microSD) Copy
(CPY all to microSD) Copy
(Copy to phone) You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from the microSD card to the FOMA phone.
Copy to phone Copy
(Copy all to phone) You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from the microSD card to the FOMA phone.
Copy all to phoneAdd or Overwrite
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Function menu transmission Ir/
(Send all Ir data) transmission Ir/
(All transmission) Operation/Explanation See page 371. See page 372. Memory info Delete all Select storage You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the number of saved files. You can delete all the ToruCa files stored in the FOMA phone.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can set a destination folder for when copying from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.
YES Information
<Auto-sort>
p is displayed when the Genre sort is set, is displayed when the Title sort is set, and is displayed when the Index sort is set. pWhen a file satisfies multiple conditions, it is sorted into the top of the folder in the ToruCa Folder list.
<Copy (Copy to microSD)>
pThe ToruCa file (details) is copied as a ToruCa file before obtaining details if it contains data which is prohibited to output from the FOMA phone or set with UIM restrictions.
<Copy (CPY all to microSD)>
pThe ToruCa files in the ToruCa folder within the FOMA phone are saved to SD ToruCa on the microSD card.
<Copy (Copy all to phone)>
pThe ToruCa files in SD ToruCa on the microSD card are added or overwritten and then saved to the ToruCa folder in the FOMA phone.
<Select storage>
p pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal is displayed for the folder set as a destination. computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again. O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 271 How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display Function Menu of the ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display
Function menu Attach to mail
ToruCa File list Detailed ToruCa File display
(for ToruCa file) Detailed ToruCa File display
[for ToruCa file (details)]
a C u r o T
i a t i e K
u f i a s O
Indicates the state of ToruCa file 1 2 Unread ToruCa file Read ToruCa file FOMA phone incompatible ToruCa file 1 Does not apply to the ToruCa file downloaded from a site. 2 Appears for only the ToruCa file on the microSD card. p p is add to the expired ToruCa file. is add to the ToruCa file whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited.
Indicates the category Displays a category icon that matches the contents of the ToruCa file.
Indicates the Index file Displays the location data of the publisher that publishes the information about the ToruCa file. Indicates the title Indicates the date and time the ToruCa file was obtained Indicates the ToruCa information Simple explanation and the (Details) key are displayed for a ToruCa file. Information about the publisher is displayed for a ToruCa file (details). 272 Move Search/sort
(Search)
[List only]
Search/sort
(Sort)
[List only]
Copy
(Copy) Operation/Explanation You can compose an i-mode mail message with the ToruCa file attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
Select a destination folder. pYou cannot select the Used ToruCa folder.
). You can search through ToruCa file in the folder by specifying a search condition.
SearchSelect a search condition. Genre . Select a genre.
) to display a list of category icons Press l(
belonging to the genre. Title . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in the title. Index. Enter characters to be searched for, from those in location data. pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index search. You can change the order of displayed files.
SortSelect an order. You can copy the displayed or highlighted ToruCa file to another folder.
CopySelect a destination folder. pYou cannot select the Used ToruCa folder. Copy
(Copy to microSD) The files are copied to the folder as specified by Select storage on page 271.
Copy to microSD Copy
(Copy to phone) You can copy the ToruCa file from the microSD card to the ToruCa folder in the FOMA phone.
Copy to phone Function menu Multiple-choice
[List only]
Operation/Explanation
)Select an item. You can select multiple ToruCa files and operate.
Put a check mark for ToruCa files to be selected
i(
Move . See page 272. Copy . See page 272. Copy to microSD. See page 272. Copy to phone. See page 272. Send Ir data . See page 370. Select all . Selects all files. Release all . Releases all selections. Update ToruCa
[Detailed display only]
Operate image
(Save image)
[Detailed display only]
Operate image
(Save BG image)
[Detailed display only]
You can re-obtain the information about the ToruCa file. The re-obtained ToruCa file (details) is automatically overwritten and then saved.
YES pYou cannot update some ToruCa files. pSee page 186 for when ToruCa files are stored to the maximum. You can save the image displayed on the ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display or Wake-up display.
Save imageSelect an imageYES
Select a destination folder. Go to step 3 on page 182. pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum. You can save the background image of the ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display or Wake-up display.
Save BG imageYESSelect a destination folder. Go to step 3 on page 182. pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum. Operate image
(Retry)
[Detailed display only]
You can play back an animation image or Flash movie in the ToruCa file from the beginning.
Retry pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area, the Flash movie might not be played back. Add to phonebook
[Detailed display only]
See page 96. Add desktop icon See page 127. Function menu transmission Ir/
(Send Ir data) Ir/
transmission transmission) Memory info
[List only]
Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected)
[List only]
Delete
(Delete all)
[List only]
Operation/Explanation See page 370. See page 372. You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the number of saved files.
Delete thisYES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for ToruCa files to be deletedl(
)YES You can delete all ToruCa files in the folder.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Information
<Attach to mail>
pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is attached as a ToruCa file before obtaining details. pYou might not be able to attach the ToruCa file to i-mode mail depending on its file size.
<Copy (Copy)>
pYou cannot copy ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited. O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 273 Information
<Copy (Copy to microSD)>
pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited or the data set with the UIM restrictions is copied as a ToruCa file before obtaining details. pWhen the number of files in the destination folder on the microSD card is full, a new folder is automatically created and ToruCa files are saved to that folder. When copying is completed, the message This folder is set for storage XXXXXX
(XXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears. pThe name of copied ToruCa file is TORUCXXX (XXX denotes a numeral). pWhen no folder is set as a destination folder on the microSD card, a new folder is created automatically and the file is saved to the folder. After saving, the newly created folder is set as the destination folder. pYou might not be able to execute Copy to microSD for the ToruCa file depending on its file size.
<Copy (Copy to phone)>
pYou might not be able to execute Copy to phone for the ToruCa file depending on its file size.
<Operate image>
pThe images that satisfy the following conditions are saved as frames or stamps:
The transparent GIF file that is not an animation GIF file The file extension is ifm. The image size is Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480), CIF (352 x 288), QVGA
(240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) for frames; and Stand-by
(480 x 854) or smaller except frames for stamps. a C u r o T
i a t i e K
u f i a s O
<ToruCa Settings>
Setting about ToruCa 1 mOsaifu-KeitaiSettings
Do the following operations. Item Receive ToruCa Operation/Explanation You can set whether to obtain ToruCa file from a scanning device using the IC card function.
Accept or Reject ToruCa from dataBC You can set whether to obtain ToruCa files automatically from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.
Auto receive ON or Auto receive OFF Receiving display You can set whether to display the detailed ToruCa File display when you obtain a ToruCa file while the Stand-by display is shown.
ON or OFF You can set whether to check the same ToruCa file is already obtained before obtaining a ToruCa file from a scanning device or obtaining a ToruCa file automatically from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.
ON or OFF ON . Checks and does not obtain a new ToruCa file if the same ToruCa file is already obtained. OFF . Does not check. Obtains even the same ToruCa file. You can set whether to have the available ToruCa files automatically recognized for when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device.
Accept or Reject Check same data Auto reading Information
<Check same data>
pThe ToruCa files stored in the Used ToruCa folder or expired ToruCa files are not included as target files.
<Auto reading>
pIf Auto reading is set to Reject, you might not be able to use ToruCa files. 274
<IC Card Lock>
Locking IC Card Function To prevent the IC card function from being used by others, you can set the Osaifu-Keitai, obtained ToruCa, or iC communication disabled. pIf the battery runs out when the IC card is locked, the IC card stays locked. 1 Press and hold m for at least one second. appears and IC Card Lock is set. pTo release IC Card Lock, perform the same operation and enter your Terminal Security Code. When Timer Lock ON At Close is set, the display for releasing IC Card Lock appears also by opening the FOMA phone. When you set PIM/IC security mode to Face reader, follow the operation of Use Face Reader to Release Lock on page 140. When you set it to Double security, enter your Terminal Security Code after the operation on page 140. pYou cannot set/release IC Card Lock even when you press and hold m for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display. IC Lock (Power-off) You can set whether to lock the IC card function while the power is turned off. or mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card lock set. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityLock setting 2 IC lock (power-off)
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item. Setting before OFF . Follows the setting at just before the power-off. Lock. Sets IC Card Lock. O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 275 276 GPS Function About Using GPS Function. 278 Checking Your Location . <Position Location> 278 Using GPS Compatible i-ppli . <GPS Compatible i-ppli> 279 Providing Location Information upon Request
. <Provide Location> 284 Notifying Location Information. <Notify of Location> 285 Displaying Location Information History
. <Location History> 286 Configuring GPS Service Settings . <Service Settings> 286 Setting GPS . <GPS Settings> 287 277 About Using GPS Function pGPS is operated by the United States Department of Defense, so the GPS radio wave conditions might be controlled (accuracy deterioration, radio wave supply suspension, etc.) depending on the defense strategy of the United States Department of Defense. pNote that we do not take any responsibility for a loss such as pure economic loss resulting from the facts that you have missed the chance to check the measurement
(communication) results, which have been caused by external factors such as malfunctions, erroneous operations, troubles, or power failure (including battery shortage) on the FOMA phone. pYou cannot use the FOMA phone as a navigating system for aircraft, vehicles, and people. Therefore, note that we are not held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of the location information for navigation. pYou cannot use GPS as a high-accuracy measuring device. Note that we do not take any responsibility for the damage caused by an error in the location information. pYou cannot use the GPS function when the FOMA phone is out of the service area (or overseas). Information pYou cannot use the GPS function in the following cases:
During Lock All While the UIM is not inserted Provide Location is available. During Self Mode During Omakase Lock pAs GPS uses radio waves transmitted from the satellites, note that you cannot or might have difficulty to receive radio waves in the following conditions:
In a building or right under it In the basement, tunnel, ground, water In a bag or case In densely crowded areas with buildings and houses In densely crowded trees and right under them Close to high-tension wires In a car or train In bad weather such as heavy rain and snow When there are obstacles (persons and articles) around the FOMA phone. When you cover the displays, keys, microphone, or speakers of the FOMA phone with your hand. In these cases, an error in the obtained location information might become 300 meters or more. 278 n o i t c n u F S P G
<Position Location>
Checking Your Location You can measure your current location and display it. You can display a map of the location, and send the location information by mail as well. 1 mLifeKitGPSPosition location Blinks during measuring
The current location is displayed by the latitude and longitude.
Measurement date Latitude Longitude Geographic datum Accuracy
: Almost accurate location information (Error is about less than 50 meters)
: Relatively accurate location information (Error is less than about 300 meters)
) to measure again in Quality mode (see Positioning Mode
: Approximate location information (Error is about 300 meters or more) The accuracy is an estimate. It might differ from actual one depending on the radio wave conditions in the surrounding area. pPress l(
on page 287). pWhen i and select OK to display the location using the information during measuring. pYou can measure the location also by pressing and holding 1 for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. After measuring, the FOMA phone works Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed on page 279 according to the setting of GPS Button Setting. is displayed at bottom right of the display during measuring, press Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed Function menu Read a map Run ippli Paste to mail Operation/Explanation You can display a map by connecting a map site.
YES pAfter displaying the map, you can use i-area to search for the surrounding information. For details about i-area, refer to the DoCoMo web page. You can use the location information on a GPS compatible i-ppli program.
Select an i-ppli program. You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL converted from the location information pasted to the text.
YES Go to step 2 on page 198. pThe URL of the location information to be sent is displayed on i-
mode compatible phones only. Add to phonebook You can store the location information in the Phonebook.
YES Go to step 2 of Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook on page 96. Attach to image You can store the location information in the image.
Select a folderSelect an imageYES or NO YES . Overwrites and saves. NO . Saves as a separate file.
<GPS Compatible i-ppli>
Using GPS Compatible i-ppli 1 mLifeKitGPSippli The list of i-ppli programs that support GPS is displayed. Select an i-ppli program to start it. pSee page 251 for the Software list. Information pWhen you use a GPS compatible i-ppli program, the location information is sent to the information provider of the i-ppli program you use. pYou need to set Location usage of Software setting to ON when you use the GPS function on a GPS compatible i-ppli program. Using (Map Application) The pre-installed (Map Application) enables you to check the map of the place you are currently in or the place you specify, or check your nearby area for details by using the GPS function and map. You can then navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car. Further, you can easily get transfer information by voice input. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to subscribe to Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for using this software program. pIf you delete this software program and then when you want to resume it, download it from (i-area -Local Information-). pThis software program is the i-ppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode. pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and promptness of the map and route information. pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver operates this software program. G P S F u n c t i o n 279 Standard and optional services The standard and optional services are available with this software program. Standard service: Provided by DoCoMo (charge free). Optional service: Provided by ZENRIN DataCom (charged). You can use the optional services charge free except traffic information for up to 90 days from when you have started this software program for the first time. To use the optional services from 91 days on, you need to register yourself as a member of
(ZENRIN/map+navi) (charged) provided by ZENRIN DataCom. Even when you register yourself as a member while you are using this software program, you do not need to re-download it. You can use this software program as it is. Menu
(Map) Descriptions From 91 days on pYou can see the map by using GPS you are currently in, or can Free enter a keyword, genre, address, or phone number to see the map. pBy voice input, you can easily see the map. pYou can check the points stored in this software program or on Charged the server, or in the Phonebook, or check the map for the points retrieved by the previous search. pAfter the storage on the server, the stored points can be shared with your personal computer as well.
(Shops and facilities) pYou can check the details of shops, facilities, or iD member Free stores in the area where you are currently in or you specify, and can obtain coupons from gourmet information. pYou can check nearby weather or empty spaces in parking lots. pBy voice input, you can easily check the details of your nearby area. pYou can navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, Charged or by car. pYou can navigate yourself easily to your home you have stored. pYou can check the train transfer guides and timetables. pYou can check the map for a train route and set an alarm Charged before your departure. pBy voice input, you can easily get transfer information. pIn addition to the ordinary map, you can change the mode to Free show the various types of maps such as the map you can move by inclining the FOMA phone, the 3D map, and the map that accentuates train routes. pUsing GPS, you can leave your footprints on your current position, and view the tracks you moved. pYou can paint colors on the cities, wards, towns, villages, or prefectures of the places where you measured in the past using GPS.
(Navigate)
(Transfer guide)
(Fun) 280 n o i t c n u F S P G From 91 days on Charged Free Menu Descriptions pYou can set how to show the map or navigation, and check pThis i-ppli program links with the map application, does not require communication, and is for when disasters occur. how to use it.
(Disaster time map)
(Settings/
Help) Top menu display and its operation The respective menus are displayed on the TOP display. When you close the menu, the map retrieved by the last search appears. pThe displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ. pAt the first start-up, the usage rules and caution items on use are displayed. TOP display When 91 days have passed without registering yourself as a member At the first start-up on or after 91 days, the message telling that the functions you can use are limited, and the message that refers to the member registration site appear. The same messages appear when you select an optional service menu. To register yourself as a member, access
(ZENRIN/map+navi) via this software program. Map display and its operation 2008 ZENRIN DataCom Map View display Key operation when the map is shown Key operation Action l[ (Menu)] Can show the menu. Oo i[
(Enlarge/Reduce)]
Can show the quick access menu. Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[
(close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar. Mo r Can move the map up, down, left, and right. Can close the menu, or returns to the point retrieved by the first search. Can turn the map counterclockwise. a 0 s Key operation when the quick access menu is shown Can turn the map northward. Can turn the map clockwise. Key operation Co[
(Send here)]
Vo[
(Store here)]
Can send the URL for the displayed map by i-mode mail. Action Can store the location information of the center of the map in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook. When you store it on the server, the stored point can be shared with your personal computer as well. Oo[ (To map)] Can close the quick access menu. 1[3D
(3D/Panorama)]
Can show the point from where a three-dimensional intersection or panoramic image can be viewed. Select the point to display the three-dimensional intersection or panoramic image. Can show the buildings around and can click to check the tenants in the buildings if any. 2[
(Building/Tenant)]
The Search Result display for the local information and its operation pThe display is for reference, so the actual one might differ. pThe display and operation are for when you show the search result on the map, not for when you select it from the list. The Search Result display for the local information G P S F u n c t i o n Key operation Zo[
(Check local information)]
Xo[
(Navi to)]
Action Can check the local information centering around the area on the map. 2008 ZENRIN DataCom Key operation when the Search Result display for the local information is shown When the cursor is not placed over the shop, etc. retrieved by the search, the quick menu appears. Can set the start point and search for a route to the center of the map. Oo Key operation Action Can confirm detailed information about search results. 281 Key operation Action Can move the map up, down, left, and right. Can re-search the center area of the displayed map. Can show the previous search results. Can show the next search results. Mo 5 4 6 l[ (Menu)] Can show the menu. i[
(Enlarge/Reduce)]
Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[
(close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar. n o i t c n u F S P G Searching for a Route and Navigating Yourself to Destination by Voice and on Display You can set a start point and destination, and search for a route. The route you can go through on foot, by public transportation, or by car are displayed. After you search for the route, the voice and display navigate you to your destination.
(Select a start point/destination) 1 TOP display (Navigate) 2 (Start point)Select a setting method. GPS [Current location (GPS)]
. Measures and sets the current location.
(Keyword search)
. Set a start point searching by keywords.
(Specify on map)
. Set a start point on the map. TEL (TEL/ZIP code search)
. Set a start point searching by the phone number or zip code.
(From address list)
. Set a start point selecting an address.
(From genre)
. Set a start point selecting a genre.
(From record)
. Set a start point on the map previously displayed.
(From stored point)
. Set a start point from the location information stored in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.
(Home)
. Set a start point from the location information of your home.
(Confirm start point)
. Confirm information about the start point. 282 3 (Destination)Select a setting method.
(Keyword search)
. Set a destination searching by keywords.
(Specify on map)
. Set a destination on the map. TEL (TEL/ZIP code search)
. Set a destination searching by the phone number or zip code.
(From address list)
. Set a destination selecting an address.
(From genre)
. Set a destination selecting a genre.
(From record)
. Set a destination on the map previously displayed.
(From stored point)
. Set a destination from the location information stored in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.
(Home)
. Set a destination from the location information of your home.
(Confirm destination)
. Confirm information about the destination. 4 (Specify time)Select an item.
(Specify by current time)
. Search for a route by the current time.
(Specify start time)
. Search for a route specifying the start time.
(Specify arrival time)
. Search for a route specifying the arrival time.
(Use last train)
. Search for a route by the last train of the day. 5 (Set conditions)Select a condition.
(Transfer conditions)
. Select a transfer condition from (Fast), (Cheap), and
(Easy).
(Foot route)
. Select a route condition from (Free), (Many roofs), and
(Less stairs).
(Use special express)
. Select whether to use special expresses for even when the total distance is less than 100 km.
(Ordinary type of vehicles)
. Select a type of vehicle. 6 (Fix as specified above) 7 (Search for a route)
(Search by You can search for a route by searches all types of routes, or (Search by only searches for routes only by car. Up to six routes are displayed as search results. When the routes using different transportation are found, the characteristics of the routes are displayed by the icons shown below:
(Fast): Arrival time is early.
(Cheap): Fare is cheap.
(Easy): Transfer is less.
(Recommendable): Route provided with three conditions, (Fast),
) that
) that
(Cheap), and (Easy).
(Charged): Route by car using toll roads
(Ordinary): Route by car using ordinary roads pTo store the route, select (Store route). 8 (Select a route)
(Navi/Confirm route)
(Navi) or [Navi (power saver)]
Navigation to the destination starts. pTo confirm the route, select (Confirm route). pTo check the timetable, select (Timetable). Route (Car)/Navigation (Car) View display and its operation pThe displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ. The current location and proceeding direction is displayed. The route to the destination is displayed. Navigation (Car) View display 2008 ZENRIN DataCom Key operation when using Navigation Key operation Action l[ (Menu)] Can end the Navigation program and shows the TOP menu. Oo i[
(Enlarge/Reduce)]
Can show the quick access menu. Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[
(Close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar. Can move the map up, down, left, and right. Can switch to the intersection mode. Can return to the current location. Mo r 2 5 a 0 s Key operation when the quick access menu appears Can turn the map northward. Can turn the map clockwise. Can turn the map counterclockwise. Can pause or start the Navigation program. Key operation Xo[
(Result&Settings)]
Co[
(Point setting)]
Vo[
(Re-route)]
1[
(Clear route)]
2[
(Switch mode)]
Action Can show search results of routes (time, fare, and others), or sets the navigation. Can search for a route by adding up to three points you go through to the destination. Can re-search for a route from the current point to the destination. Can clear the displayed route. G P S F u n c t i o n Can switch to the intersection mode. 283 Using (Voice search) By voice input, you can easily check the local information, get transfer information, or see the map from the Voice search menu.
<Example> When using (Voice search) to check the local information
(Voice search) How to input your voice is displayed. 1 TOP display (Shops and facilities) 2 Explanatory display for voice input
(Start voice input) The display for voice input appears. After the Voice Input display appears, speak in Japanese about the local information to search for. Example: Konohen-no Konbini (nearby convenience store) n o i t c n u F S P G The confirmation display appears after your voice is recognized. When the recognition result is wrong, select
(Re-input voice). Using Settings and Help 1 TOP display (Settings/Help)Select an item. Action You can check whether you are registered as a member of
(ZENRIN/map+navi). Item
(Confirm member information) 284 Action You can perform the overall settings of the software program such as specifying map display color or font size. You can perform the overall settings of the navigation program such as re-routing or the sound level of voice guide. You can register the location of your home. You can clear the records of the map or Navigation used. You can get explanation about how to use, FAQ, and usage rules. Item
(Standard settings)
(Navi settings)
(Home setting)
(Clear records)
(Explanation about how to use/FAQ/
Usage rules)
<Provide Location>
Providing Location Information upon Request You can provide your location information upon the request from others. Depending on the service you use, you need to set GPS service settings beforehand. (See page 286) Also, you need to set Location request menu to ON or set the permitted period by Permission schedule beforehand.
<When the setting by service is (Check every time)>
1 When a location provision request arrivesYES or NO YES . Measures the current location and sends the location information. NO . Rejects to provide the location information. pIf no keys are pressed for about 20 seconds, the former display returns without providing your current location.
<When the setting by service is (Accept)>
1 When a location provision request arrivesOK pWhen you select OK or about three seconds elapse, the current location provision starts. pThe information of the service provider might not be displayed. pPress r to stop providing information. However, your location information might be sent depending on the timing. Information pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds from the Position Location Result display or the Failure display, the former display returns. pTo use imadoco-search, you need to set
[Location Information Usage Setting (imadoco-search Setting)] of
(Options) of (Bill & Subscription/Setting) on iMenu. pTo use Provide Location, you might need to subscribe to a service provider which supports the Provider Location function or to pay the service fee. pEven when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio wave conditions. pWhen Location request menu is set to OFF, the location information is not displayed, and the request is rejected. pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request to be checked every time, the location information is not provided on the location provision request during Public Mode (Drive Mode). pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request to be accepted, the location information is provided with a display during Public Mode (Drive Mode) but the positioning tone, vibrator, and illumination do not work. pWhen you are requested to provide your location information from the other party using imadocokantan search, the confirmation display appears asking whether to send the current location information each time you receive a request. Select YES to immediately send the rough position location result. After selecting YES, the GPS Measuring display appears and the precise position location result is notified after GPS measuring. The rough position location result is notified even if you suspend the location providing during GPS measuring. In this case, it is stored in Location History but the location information is not displayed. Information pRegardless of the mode of 2in1, the location information can be searched for Number A only. When the other party searches you by your Number B, your current location is not provided and the searcher is notified that the search has failed. pA fee is not charged for using the Provide Location function. pFor using the service, refer to the information on your service provider or the DoCoMo web page.
<Notify of Location>
Notifying Location Information You can notify a service provider of your current location. 1 mLifeKitGPSNotify of locationDirect input
Enter a party to be notifiedYES pYou can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, #
and :. pIf you have stored LCS clients by Reg. LCS client beforehand, you can select an LCS client from View service clients. pYou can press l(
) to stop measuring, but your current location might be notified depending on the timing. 2 OK Information pEven when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio wave conditions. pYou are charged a fee for using the function to notify your current location. 285 G P S F u n c t i o n Information pTo use Notify Of Location, you might need to subscribe to a service provider that supports Notify Of Location. Further, you might be charged a fee for using the service. pYou cannot enter any digits during Keypad Dial Lock. pRegardless of the mode of 2in1, your location information is notified by Number A. pFor using the service, refer to the information on your service provider or the DoCoMo web page.
<Location History>
Displaying Location Information History Up to 50 histories of Position Location, Notify Of Location, and Provide Location are stored. 1 mLifeKitGPSLocation history
Select a location history.
: Position location
: Provide location
: Notify of location Information n o i t c n u F S P G pWhen the location histories exceed 50, they are automatically overwritten from the oldest one. pThe location information and accuracy stored in Location History may differ from the ones sent to the location provision requester or LCS client depending on the radio wave conditions, and others. pWhen you cancel Position Location midway, you fail to measure your current location, or you set Location request menu to OFF, its history is not stored in Location History. pEven when the histories of Provide Location or Notify Of Location are stored, they might not have been delivered to your service providers. pYou cannot operate a failed-to-measure history of Provide Location or Notify of Location for other than Compose message, Dialing, Delete this, and Delete all. pWhen Provide Location was used, the name of the location provision requester is checked against the Phonebook entries which appear in each mode of 2in1 and then shown. p is displayed for the records of successful positioning. 286 Function Menu while Location History is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Read a map Run ippli Paste to mail See page 279. See page 279. See page 279. Add to phonebook See page 279. Attach to image See page 279. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to your location provision requester. Go to step 3 on page 198. See page 166.
Delete thisYES
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Dialing Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete all)
<Service Settings>
Configuring GPS Service Settings By connecting to GPS service settings (a host set by Host selection), you can configure the settings for the Provide Location service such as the permission for location information search and password. 1 mLifeKitGPSService settings pSee page 173 for operations while a site is displayed. Information pYou cannot use the Bookmark or Screen Memo function.
<GPS Settings>
Setting GPS GPS Button Setting You can set an operation for after measuring your location by pressing and holding 1 for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. You can select an operation from Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed on page 279. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsGPS button setting
Select an operation. pIf you set to Confirm every session, you can select an operation each time you measure the location. Positioning Tone/Illumination You can select a tone to sound for when you check your current location or when you are requested to provide location information. You can set a color of the Call/Charging indicator and the vibration pattern as well. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsPosit. tone/illum.
Select an operation to be set
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Select posit. ring tone
Select a folderSelect a ring tone. pWhile selecting, the selected tone sounds for confirmation. Ring time setting You can set a ring time for positioning ring tone.
Enter a ring time (seconds). pEnter two digits from 00 through 30. For Location req./
Confirm, however, enter two digits from 00 through 20. If you set to 0 seconds, the tone does not sound. Item Select vibrator Operation/Explanation
Select a vibration pattern. pIf you select Melody linkage, the FOMA phone vibrates in time with ring tone. pWhile selecting, the FOMA phone vibrates by the selected pattern for confirmation. Select illumination Select a color. pWhile selecting, the Call/Charging indicator lights in the selected color for confirmation. Positioning Mode Select a mode for measuring the current location from either Standard mode or Quality mode. When you select Quality mode, it takes a longer time for measuring, but the measuring accuracy might be improved as a result. You can set a measuring mode for Position Location, Notify Of Location, and Provide Location respectively. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsPositioning mode
Select an operation to be set
Standard mode or Quality mode Register LCS Client If you have stored LCS clients, you can select an LCS client when you notify of your current location. Further, you can automatically notify of your current location when you make a call to the stored phone number. You can store up to five LCS clients. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsReg. LCS client
Highlight <Not stored> and press l(
Oo(
)Do the following operations.
) or pIf you select a stored LCS client, you can confirm the stored contents. Item Operation/Explanation Service client name Enter a service client name. pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. 287 G P S F u n c t i o n Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Item Service client ID Phone number
Enter a service client ID. pYou can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, # and :. pEnter the service client ID specified by your service provider.
Enter a phone number. pYou can enter up to 26 digits. pHighlight the phone number field, press i(
), and select Enter from PB to call up a phone number from the Phonebook and enter it. pIf you enter a phone number by Enter from PB with Service client name not entered, the name for the Phonebook entry is entered. Notify when dialing You can set whether to notify of your current location for when you make a voice call or videophone call to the stored phone number.
ON, OFF or Confirm every dial pTo check each time you make a call, select Confirm every dial. 2 Press l(
Information
). Edit Send Ir data Go to step 1 of Register LCS Client on page 287. pYou can edit also by pressing l(
See page 370.
). Send all Ir data See page 371. transmission See page 372. All transmission See page 372. Location Request Menu You can set whether to accept a location provision request (provide location information). You can set validity period as well. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Location request menu
Enter your Terminal Security Code
ON, OFF or Permission schedule 2 Do the following operations. n o i t c n u F S P G pEven if Notify when dialing is set to ON or to Confirm every dial, you cannot notify of your current location when you make a call without notifying of your caller ID. Item Operation/Explanation Permit from
Enter the time for starting permission. Function Menu while LCS Client is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Permit to Repeat Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete all)
Delete thisYES
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES Add to phonebook You can store the service client name and phone number stored in Reg. LCS client into the Phonebook. (See page 279) Validity period 3 Press l(
Enter the time for ending permission.
Select a repeat type. pWhen you select 1 time, the permission period does not repeat. pWhen you select Select day, put a check mark for days of the week to be repeated, then press l(
When you set to Repeat, you can set the period to be valid.
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (from)
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (to).
). 288 Information pYou can set Location request menu also by Initial setting (see page 46). pWhen ON is set, the location information might be sent without any operation on the FOMA phone, and might be notified to the searcher. pWhen OFF is set, the location provision is rejected even if its location provision request is received. The history is not stored. pYou can specify from January 1, 2008 through December 31, 2037 for Permission schedule. Operations when the validity period for location provision is specified Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the start time and 21:00 as the end time Repeat Validity period Period of location provision 1 time Daily Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF Select day Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF 14:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov Every day 14:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through 30/Nov Every day 14:00 through 21:00 from 18/Nov through 30/Nov Every day 14:00 through 21:00 on and after 18/Nov 14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 18/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week on and after 18/Nov Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the start time and 21:00 as the end time Repeat Validity period Period of location provision 1 time Daily Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF Select day Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov Every day 10:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through 30/Nov 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day 10:00 through 21:00 from 19/Nov through 30/Nov 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day 10:00 through 21:00 on and after 19/Nov 10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 19/Nov through 30/Nov If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week on and after 19/Nov Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the start time and 10:00 as the end time Repeat Validity period Period of location provision 1 time Daily Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF Select day Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF 14:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 20/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 18/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after 18/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 18/Nov through 30/Nov 14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week on and after 18/Nov G P S F u n c t i o n 289 Host Selection Normally, you do not need to change this setting. You can use this setting for changing the host for Service Settings. 1 mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsHost selection
Highlight <Not stored> and press l(
). pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host. pTo delete a stored host, press i(
), select Delete and select YES. 2 Do the following operations. Item Host name Host number Host address 3 Press l(
Operation/Explanation
Enter a host name. pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Enter a host number. pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Enter a URL. pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
). Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the start time and 10:00 as the end time Repeat Validity period Period of location provision 1 time Daily Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF Select day Start date: 20/Nov End date: 30/Nov Start date: 10/Nov End date: 30/Nov OFF 12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov 10:00/20/Nov through 10:00/1/Dec 12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/1/Dec 12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, every day 10:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after 19/Nov 10:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 19/Nov through 30/Nov If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through 10:00 of the next day of the specified days of the week on and after 19/Nov n o i t c n u F S P G 290 1Seg What is 1Seg? . 292 Before Using 1Seg . 293 Setting Channels . <Channel Setting> 294 Watching 1Seg Programs . <Activate 1Seg> 295 Using Program Guide i-ppli. <Program Guide i-ppli> 300 Using Data Broadcasting . <Data Broadcasting> 301 Using TV Links . <TVlink> 302 Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching . 303 Booking Programs or Setting Timer Recording of 1Seg
. <Book Program> <Timer Recording> 304 Settings for 1Seg . <User Settings> 309 291 Messages on the display when you use 1Seg for the first time When you use 1Seg for the first time after purchase, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display appears. Press Xo or Vo and then press Oo(
If you select NO from the succeeding confirmation display, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward. pThe Exemption Clause Confirmation display also appears when you replace the UIM
). with another one. What is broadcasting storage area?
The broadcasting storage area is a storage area inside the terminal that is exclusive for 1Seg. The information you input according to the instruction on the data broadcasting program is saved to that broadcasting storage area following the settings of television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). The information to be saved might contain answers for quiz, and personal information such as membership number, gender, age, or occupation. The saved information might be displayed, or be sent to television entrepreneurs
(broadcasting stations) without your re-input when you browse to the data broadcasting site. pSee page 311 to erase information in the broadcasting storage area. When you replace the UIM with another one, the confirmation display appears asking whether to reset the broadcasting storage area. Select YES, and reset it. If you select NO, the services using the broadcasting storage area are not available. Messages on the display when the information in the broadcasting storage area is read out When the information in the broadcasting storage area is used while you are watching a program, the message Use saved information? It may include information used by the same broadcasting group is displayed. If you select YES, the confirmation display asking whether to read out the stored information while watching the same program does not appear after that. Further if you select YES (confirm once), the same confirmation display does not appear afterward. What is 1Seg?
1Seg is the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for mobile objects, and it broadcasts data as well as video and audio. Further, by using i-mode, you can obtain the detailed information, can participate in quiz programs or can have fun with TV shopping. For details on the 1Seg service, browse to the web page as follows:
(The association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting) From personal computers:
From i-mode:
Using 1Seg pThe 1Seg broadcasting is a service provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting http://www.dpa.or.jp/
http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese only) stations). pThe subscription is not required to receive video, audio and data broadcasting transmitted on the airwaves for the 1Seg service, and its charge is free. pThe information displayed in the data broadcasting area contains Data broadcasting and Data broadcasting site. Data broadcasting is displayed on airwaves together with video and audio, and Data broadcasting site is displayed by connecting from the information of data broadcasting to the sites provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). Also, it might be connected to i-mode site, etc. When connecting to sites, you need to subscribe to i-mode separately. pYou are charged a packet communication fee for browsing Data broadcasting site and i-mode site. You might be charged an information fee for using some sites (i-mode pay sites). Radio waves 1Seg is one of the broadcasting services receiving radio waves (broadcasting waves) different from that used for the FOMA services. Accordingly, you cannot watch the broadcasting when you are out of reach of the broadcasting waves, or when the broadcasting is suspended regardless of whether you are in or out of the FOMA service area. Even when you are in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area, reception condition might be deteriorated or you might not be able to receive programs in the following places:
Where the radio tower that transmits broadcasting waves is far away Where the radio waves are blocked by geographical features such as mountains or Where the radio waves are weak or do not reach, such as in tunnels, underground, or valleys of high-rise buildings recesses of buildings The reception conditions might be improved by moving your FOMA phone away from or close to you, or moving yourself to another place. 292 g e S 1 Before Using 1Seg How to Watch a 1Seg Program
<Example> When you watch a 1Seg program for the first time Store the channel list for the area you use. (See page 294) 1 2 Channel Setting Activating 1Seg Activate 1Seg. (See page 295) Battery level If you try to start 1Seg or 1Seg starts automatically by Book Program when the battery is low, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to start it. Also, when the battery becomes low while you are watching or recording a 1Seg program, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end 1Seg. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of Keypad sound. pWhen you do nothing from the confirmation display for about one minute, 1Seg automatically terminates. pWhile Rec. when low battery is set to ON, the confirmation display does not appear during recording. (See page 309) pIf the battery level becomes low during recording and recording ends, the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved. pDuring Multitask, the battery alert tone sounds but the confirmation display does not appear. Switch to the viewer display and then operate. When a call etc. comes in while you are watching or recording a 1Seg program When the events shown below occur while watching or recording a 1Seg program, the video and audio are suspended, and each function works. Recording is not suspended. After you finish each function, you can resume watching a 1Seg program. See page 300 for receiving i-mode mail, SMS messages or Messages R/F. pIncoming voice call pIncoming videophone call pIncoming PushTalk call pNotification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book Program
(when Alarm setting is set to Alarm preferred) pNotification of Timer Recording
(When the start date/time comes, the FOMA phone works according to the setting of Priority.) Information pWhen you have not inserted the UIM, when you have canceled the contract with DoCoMo, or when you have temporarily suspended using the FOMA service, you cannot watch 1Seg programs. pEven when you have inserted the UIM contracted with DoCoMo, you might be disabled to start 1Seg if you repeatedly watch 1Seg programs in the condition the FOMA phone cannot communicate such as when you are out of the service area. In that case, try to start 1Seg in the condition the FOMA phone can communicate such as by moving into the FOMA service area. pWhen you watch a 1Seg program for the first time, start 1Seg in the FOMA service area. p1Seg is not available while USB mode setting is set to microSD mode or MTP mode and the FOMA phone is connected to a personal computer. p1Seg might automatically start when you end a call by closing the FOMA phone during a call. In such a case, be careful not to use the FOMA phone close to your ear because audio is played back at the sound volume for 1Seg. pThe life of battery pack may shorten if you watch 1Seg programs for a long time during charging. 1 S e g 293
<Channel Setting>
Setting Channels To watch 1Seg programs, you need to execute Channel Setting and to select a channel list in advance. You can store up to 10 channel lists. pThe broadcasting stations you can receive differ depending on the local area. If you store a channel list of the area for traveling or business trip, you can watch programs in the area just by selecting the channel list. pThe remote-control numbers you use with channel selections are previously set for respective broadcasting stations. pYou cannot execute Channel Setting during recording a 1Seg program. Auto Channel Setting The broadcasting stations you can currently watch are automatically searched and stored in a channel list. pYou need to set this function in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area. 1 m1SegChannel settingAuto channel setting
YES Searching takes place. pFrom the Channel list display or viewer display, press i(
Channel setting, and select Auto channel setting.
), select pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. pWhen you press Oo(
name of YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute) pTo cancel searching midway, press l(
) or r; then select YES. You can store the searched broadcasting stations in a channel list.
) without entering a title, the title name takes the Information pWhen the multiple broadcasting stations which have the same remote-control number are retrieved, the message to the effect that the remote-control number is doubled appears. Select OK and select your area from the Local Area Selection display. The channels in the area you select are preferentially assigned to remote-control numbers 1 to 12, and channels in the area you do not select are assigned to remote-control numbers 13 onward. 294 2 YESEnter a title. g e S 1 Information pThe time to search channels requires for about 30 to 60 seconds. However, it differs depending on the number of broadcasting stations or airwave conditions, and might exceed 60 seconds. Select Area You can store the broadcasting stations set by prefecture to a channel list. 1 m1SegChannel settingSelect area
Select an areaSelect a prefectureYES pFrom the Channel list display or viewer display, press i(
Channel setting, and select Select area.
), select Information pDepending on the area, you may not be able to correctly store the broadcasting stations by Select area. In that case, search for the broadcasting stations by Auto channel setting. Select Channel List You can select a channel list to set the broadcasting stations you receive. Also, you can edit the channel list already stored. 1 m1SegChannel listSelect a channel list. Remote-control number The channel list you receive is set, and the detailed display appears. pSelect a broadcasting station to watch a 1Seg program. pWhen you select Channel Channel list display list from the Function menu of viewer display, the viewer display returns by selecting a channel list. pYou can watch a 1Seg program also by pressing l(
list display and selecting a broadcasting station. Detailed Channel list display
) from the Channel Function Menu of the Channel List Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Channel setting See page 294. Edit title Delete
Enter a title. You can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.
YES pYou cannot delete the channel list currently set. Function Menu of the Detailed Channel List Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Remote control No. You can change the broadcasting station set for the remote-control number.
Select a broadcasting station you want to change
Select the remote-control number to be set. pIf any broadcasting station has already been set for the specified remote-control number, the broadcasting stations switch positions. Repeat the operation to set a broadcasting station for a remote-control number.
l(
YES pWhen you delete all the broadcasting stations in the channel
)YES list, the channel list itself is deleted. pYou cannot delete the broadcasting station in the channel list currently set. Delete
<Activate 1Seg>
Watching 1Seg Programs Just change the style to automatically switch between the vertical display and horizontal display when you are watching. You can switch displays manually also by pressing d in Normal Style. pWhen you use 1Seg for the first time, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display appears. (See page 292) pYou can start 1Seg also by using the channel information displayed in the Program Guide i-ppli, sites, or mail. pYou can play back the audio from 1Seg programs via a commercial Bluetooth device.
(See page 430) 1 Press and hold c for at least one second. 1Seg starts from the channel you watched last time. is displayed while watching a 1Seg program. pWhen you have not stored any channel list, the confirmation display appears. Select OK and execute Channel Setting. (See page 294) pYou can start 1Seg also by switching to Horizontal Open Style while the display for selecting a 1Seg function is shown in Normal Style. pWhile Work with style is set to 1Seg, you can start 1Seg also by switching to Horizontal Open Style from the Stand-by display. pTo end watching, press h and select YES. Viewer display 1 S e g 295 About Viewer display
(When Switch display is V. img+Caption+DBC.)
Vertical display
Video
Horizontal display Guide display appears on the upper right of the display when the data broadcasting linked with a 1Seg program is found while you are watching on the horizontal display or in the multiwindow.
Caption You can set display position of the caption on the horizontal display by Caption posit. in w-scr. g e S 1
Data Broadcasting Operation Mode Video Mode: Operates the video or audio. (See page 295) Data Broadcasting Mode: Operates the data broadcasting. (See page 301) Off Timer appears while Off Timer is set. ECO Mode appears during ECO Mode. Channel (remote-control number) Airwave Reception Level (estimate)
(Strong)
(Weak) appears out of the broadcasting area.
Reception of Caption is displayed while caption information is being received.
Sound Volume 296
Program Information (outline) The program name is displayed on the vertical display. The channel, start/end time, and program name are displayed on the horizontal display. This is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.
Record Video appears during video recording, and recording by Timer Recording. appears during video appears during pause of recording.
Icon/Caption Icon: ON/OFF of Icon Caption: Position (
This is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.
: Upper) and OFF
: Lower, pAfter you select a channel using Channel Search, the channel (remote-control number) might not be displayed. pWhile Icon is set to OFF in the horizontal display, the guide display appears when you operate keys or switch styles. Channel switching operation (in Video Mode only) Operation Direct channel selection Sequential channel selection Channel search Key operation Remote control No.1~9 . 1~9 Remote control No.10. a Remote control No.11. 0 Remote control No.12. s No No(for at least one second) pEach time of pressing switches channels by searching receivable broadcasting stations in order of frequency. pl(
) or r to suspend Operations while watching a 1Seg program Operation Sound volume adjustment Mute Key operation Bo1 or <>
pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially. pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available. r1 pr1 or adjust volume to play back sound Key operation Information Operation Start program guide i-ppli Program info Program info
(outline) Switch display m(
l(
)2 l(for at least one second)2 m(
) pThe data broadcasting cannot be displayed on the horizontal display. pIf you move, the receivable airwaves or broadcasting stations might change being affected by mountains or buildings. If reception on 1Seg goes bad after moving, perform Auto channel setting; then reception might be improved via different airwaves or you might be able to watch programs of other broadcasting stations. pIf you use Channel Search to select channels after you move, etc., you might find the channels you could not store by Auto channel setting. Execute Add to ch. list to store the channels you found, and then you can watch the channel from the next time.
) while displaying program information (outline) pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches the pWhen starting 1Seg or switching channels, it takes a while before you can watch a setting of Icon and Caption posit. in w-scr. 1Seg program. Full display d23 Record video pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display directions. pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches between the normal display and the full display. Oo(
pOo(
)1 or p(for at least one second)
)1 or p to end Record still image p Switch TV/data BC c(
)2 pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode. Function Menu of Viewer Display Function menu Channel info Program info Operation/Explanation You can display the detailed display of the selected channel list. Select a broadcasting station to switch to it. You can display information of the program you are watching. pWhen you have not obtained program information, it is not displayed. Channel list Go to step 1 of Select Channel List on page 294. Channel setting See page 294. 1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, you cannot operate. 2 You cannot operate in Horizontal Open Style. 3 When you close the FOMA phone, the vertical display returns. In Horizontal Open Style, the horizontal display automatically appears; the vertical display does not appear. Add to ch. list You can add the broadcasting station you are currently watching to the channel list.
YES pThe broadcasting station is stored in the lowest number of an unoccupied remote-control number from 13 onward. 1 S e g Information pEven when you switch the display by using Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the audio from the 1Seg program is played back. (Play Background) The audio might not be played back, however, depending on the function or program.
(See page 511) pWhen TV sound while closed is set to ON, the audio is played back even if you close the FOMA phone while you are watching a 1Seg program. You cannot do anything other than adjusting the volume when your FOMA phone is closed. pThe following might occur depending on the airwave conditions:
The audio is interrupted. The data broadcasting is not operable. Block-shaped noise appears on the display or playing stops. The video or the data broadcasting is not displayed. (A dark screen appears.) pThe caption might not be displayed depending on the program. Program guide See page 300. 297 Function menu Switch display At 1Seg start-up When Caption is set to ON:
V. img+Caption+D BC When Caption is set to OFF:
Visual image+DBC Operation/Explanation You can switch the contents of the viewer display.
Select an item. pIf you set to Enlarged V. img+DBC, the video on the vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the video might be cut depending on the program. pEven if you set to Data broadcasting, the audio from 1Seg programs is played back. Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode while watching a 1Seg program on the vertical display. At 1Seg start-up Video Mode Icon See page 310. Mail ticker disp. See page 310. Compose message See page 299. Settings
(Off timer) At 1Seg start-up OFF When the specified time elapses, the confirmation display appears asking whether to end watching or recording a program
(except for Timer Recording).
Select a time. g e S 1 Settings
(Brightness) You can set the brightness of the display light to Level 1 (dark) through 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level. pIf you set to Auto setting, it is adjusted automatically in accordance with the ambient brightness sensed by the light sensor. pThe setting here is valid until you finish watching the 1Seg program. The setting at 1Seg start-up follows the setting specified by Brightness of Backlight on page 118. Settings
(Mobile W-Speed) See page 309. Operation/Explanation Function menu Settings
(Image quality) Settings
(LCD AI) Settings
(Auto volume) Settings
(Remaster) Settings
(Listening) See page 309. See page 119. See page 309. See page 309. See page 310. Settings (Equalizer) See page 310. Settings
(Main/sub sound) At 1Seg start-up Main sound
SoundMain/sub sound
Main sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub sound Settings
(Switch audio data)
SoundSwitch audio dataSound 1 or Sound 2 pYou can switch only when audio that can be switched is found. Settings
(TV sound w/
closed) Settings
(ECO mode) See page 310. See page 310. Data broadcasting
(Reload contents) You can reload the data broadcasting site being displayed.
Reload contents pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to re-send the data you entered, depending on the site. Data broadcasting
(Certificate) Data broadcasting
(Set image display) See page 176. See page 188. 298 Function menu Data broadcasting
(Sound effect) Data broadcasting
(ToruCa from dataBC) Data broadcasting
(Reset settings) Back to data BC Tune service TVlink list AV output Information Operation/Explanation See page 310. See page 274. See page 310. You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and return to the data broadcasting. You can select a program to watch when the same broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services (programs).
Select a channel. You can display the TVlink list. (See page 302) See page 382.
<Settings (Off timer)>
pIn the following cases, the Off Timer confirmation display appears after each operation finishes. When the timer recording is on standby When a booked program is being recorded When a still image is being saved When an unsaved image is left When channels are being searched by Auto Channel Setting Send i-mode Mail while Watching You can compose and send i-mode mail messages while you are watching a 1Seg program. (Multiwindow) When you send an i-mode mail message to the FOMA phone supporting the Media To function by Recom. channel mail, the receiving end can start 1Seg by using the Media To function. pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the Message Composition display is shown. You cannot display the caption and data broadcasting, either. pYou can compose SMS messages while watching a 1Seg program. 1 Viewer displayi(
Compose message or Recom. channel mail Compose message
. You can compose a new i-mode
)Compose message mail message. Go to step 2 on page 198. Recom. channel mail
. You can compose an i-mode mail message whose text contains the information of the channel you are watching. Go to step 2 on page 198. Message Composition display Viewer display pWhen the Message Composition display is shown, you can switch between the Message Composition display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold c for at least one second. When the viewer display is shown, you can change the display directions each time you press d. 1 S e g Information pEven when you show the Message Composition display/detailed Sent Mail display by Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow. pOnly the audio is played back from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display if you select Mail history from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list or a detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program and show the detailed Sent Mail display of a mail message sent to a person whose mail address is not stored in the Phonebook. pWhen appears at the lower left of the display, switch to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to the viewer display and then operate. 299 Information Information pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose/send i-mode mail message. (See page 456) Receive i-mode Mail while Watching The ticker notifies you of the receiving of the i-mode mail message, SMS message, and Messages R/F. You can open the detailed Received Mail display while you are watching a 1Seg program. (Multiwindow) pYou cannot use this function when Mail ticker display is set to OFF. pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the detailed Received Mail display is shown. You cannot display the caption and data broadcasting, either. pYou can display SMS messages while watching a 1Seg program. 1 Receive i-mode mail while viewer display is shown
) while the ticker is displayed.
Press l(
pWhen the Detailed Received Mail display is shown, you can switch between the Detailed Mail display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold c for at least one second. When the viewer display is shown, you can change the display directions each time you press d. g e S 1 Information Detailed Received Mail display Viewer display No to show other messages. However, you can press +
pWhen the display is shown in the multiwindow, or when only audio from a 1Seg program is played back with the detailed Received Mail display shown, you cannot press +
No to show other messages when you select Mail history from the Function menu of the Inbox/
Outbox/Draft list or the detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program. pWhen appears at the lower left of the display, switch to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to viewer display and then operate.
<Program Guide i-ppli>
Using Program Guide i-ppli By using the Program Guide i-ppli, you can start 1Seg by selecting a program from the program guide, book programs, and set timer recordings. (See page 259) 1 m1SegProgram guide G (G Guide Program List Remote-controller) starts. pPress l(
) from the display of G
(G Guide Program List Remote-controller) to watch the program currently broadcast on the selected channel. pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. pEven if Mail ticker display is set to Sender+subject, the titles are not displayed for Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, and SMS messages received from the parties not stored in the Phonebook. pEven when you show the detailed Received Mail display by Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow. However, you cannot show the viewer display and only the audio from a 1Seg program is played back when you display a mail message from a person whose mail address is not stored in the Phonebook. Information pYou can set the Program Guide i-ppli by Program guide key of Software setting. pWhen you use G (G Guide Program List Remote-controller) for the first time, you need to do initial settings. pThis software program is the i-ppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode. 300
<Data Broadcasting>
Using Data Broadcasting 1Seg enables you to use the data broadcasting in addition to the video and audio. Various information including still/moving images is available from the site linked with TV programs. 1 Viewer display (Video Mode)
c(
) Video Mode switches to Data Broadcasting Mode and pAudio from a 1Seg program is played back even during appears. Data Broadcasting Mode. pYou can display only data broadcasting when you press i(
broadcasting of Switch display.
) from the viewer display and select Data 2 Select an item (link). pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode depending on the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site. pSee page 173 for the operation while a site is displayed. Information pEach time you press +c(
switched.
), Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode are pIf you change a channel during Data Broadcasting Mode, Video Mode returns. pYou cannot display the data broadcasting on the horizontal display. pYou cannot enter pictographs when you enter characters on data broadcasting or data broadcasting site. pThe audio might be played back depending on the program while the i-mode site is displayed. The 1Seg video does not appear, however. pWhen you display the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, a tone might be output depending on the program. In that case, the playback of the 1Seg audio temporarily stops, and the tone of the data broadcasting is preferentially output. Information pWhile the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is displayed, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the contents you entered on the site or whether to permit obtaining mobile phone information. pWhen you select YES (confirm once) from the confirmation display for data broadcasting, the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee while watching a 1Seg program or playing back a video. (See page 311) pIf you move in a place where the airwave is unstable while watching a 1Seg program, the video, data broadcasting, and data broadcasting site may be automatically updated. In that case, the top page of the data broadcasting appears, and the information you have entered into the connected data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is cleared. Ensure that you watch the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site in a place where the airwave is stable. Use Highlighted Information for Various Operations You can use the highlighted information in the data broadcasting site to easily use the functions such as making calls, or sending mail. Select an item (link) and use the Phone To/AV Phone To or Mail To function. (See page 187) Information pDepending on the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, the function of composing i-mode mail or storing the Phonebook entries might be automatically used. The confirmation display asking whether to use each function appears. 1 S e g 301
<TVlink>
Using TV Links Some data broadcasting programs might contain TV links which lead to the details of the programs or related information site. From the TV links, you can store the site address information in the TVlink list and can easily call them up for browsing later. Store in TV Links When you select the item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink list, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it in the TVlink list. You can store up to 50 TV links. 1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, select an item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink listYES pWhen you try to store the same URL or memo information, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite it. pWhen the maximum number of TV links has already been stored in the TVlink list, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store after deleting. Information g e S 1 pValidity period is set for some links. If the validity period is expired, you cannot store it. pThe number of characters that can be stored for a URL is up to 60 half-pitch characters. When the number of characters used for a URL exceeds that, you cannot store it. pYou can store a title of up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters. When the number of characters exceeds that, the excess is deleted. When a TV link has no title, the URL is displayed on the list display. pThe contents you entered in the site is not stored in the TVlink. 302 Bring Up a Stored TV Link 1 m1SegTVlink
Select a TV link to be displayed. pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode, select YES. pFor a link whose validity period is expired, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it. TVlink list pAfter you brought up a site using a TV link, the TV link is displayed at the top of the TVlink list next time. Icons in the TVlink list Icon Format Description Memo information Displays memo information. Link communication contents Connects to the data broadcasting site.
(Video and caption are not displayed.) i-mode contents Connects to the i-mode site. Full Browser contents Connects via Full Browser. Function Menu of the TVlink List Function menu Display detail Operation/Explanation Displays the title, URL, outline, content type, and validity period of the TV link. No. of TVlink Displays the number of the registered TV links. Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all)
Delete thisYES
Delete selectedPut a check mark for TV links to be deletedl(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching You can save the program as video or still images while you are watching. pThe copy control signals such as Copy never, Copy once, and Copy free are incorporated into 1Seg. The copy control signals are determined by each broadcasting station. pYou cannot record the programs of Copy never. Further, when the copy control signal is changed to Copy never during recording, the recording session is closed, and the video recorded up to that point is saved. Record Video The recorded video is saved to the microSD card (Data box1Seg Video). pSee page 345 for playing back the recorded video. pYou cannot save the recorded video to the FOMA phone. 1 Viewer displayp(for at least one second) The confirmation tone sounds, pYou can start recording also by pressing Oo(
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates appears, and recording starts.
) in Video Mode.
, you cannot record video. Even is indicated, you might not be able to record it depending on the airwave if conditions. pYou cannot change the channel during recording. 2 Press p. The confirmation tone sounds and video is saved. pYou can save the video also by pressing Oo(
pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Gbytes, or the storage location becomes full, the recording automatically ends, and then the video recorded up to that point is saved.
) in Video Mode. Estimate of the number of saved files and recordable time The maximum savable number 99 The maximum recordable time (total) Approx. 000 minutes pThe savable number of video files decreases depending on the data volume. pThe maximum recordable time is an estimate for microSD card of 2 Gbytes, and it is an estimate for 224 kbps of video, 48 kbps of audio, and 52 kbps of data (including captions). The recordable time varies depending on the broadcasting station or program. Information pThe playing time of the saved data might become shorter than the recording time depending on the airwave conditions. pThe recording is not suspended even when you switch displays by Multitask or when a call comes in during recording. pWhen the airwave conditions are changed to indicate during recording, recording shifts to pause state, then audio during that period are not saved. and are displayed. Video and pIf you remove the battery pack or pull out the microSD card during recording, the recorded data is saved as the file that cannot be played back. pDepending on the broadcasting station or program, video and audio might be saved a few seconds after your recording operation. pYou cannot record when the video storage area is full. Also, you might not be able to record when the unused space in the storage area is not enough. Delete unnecessary video files and try again. pSome programs cannot use the storage area fully. pThe file name and title name of the saved video are as follows:
File name: PRGXXX Title name: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm
(X: numerals, Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute) pYou cannot set the recorded video for the Stand-by display, ring tone or Call Receiving display. pYou cannot save video during AV output. Record Still Images The recorded still images are saved to your FOMA phone (Data box 1SegImage folder). You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) pSee page 330 for displaying the recorded still image files. pYou cannot save still images to the microSD card. 1 Viewer displayp The confirmation tone sounds, and the still image is saved. pWhen the airwave reception level indicates
, you cannot record still images. 1 S e g 303 Information pThe file name and title name of the saved still image are as follows:
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX Title name: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, X: numeral) Item Start date setting Operation/Explanation Enter a date/time for starting watching.
Select an item. Enter date. Enter a date/time directly. Choose date . Select a date from the Calendar and enter a pYou cannot set the recorded still image for the Stand-by display or the Call Receiving time. display. pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum. pData broadcasting and caption cannot be saved as still images. pYou cannot record still images during AV output.
<Book Program> <Timer Recording>
Booking Programs or Setting Timer Recording of 1Seg You can book programs or set timer recordings of 1Seg. At the specified date/time, an alarm sounds to notify you of the start of the program. pYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by using the channel information displayed in the Program Guide i-ppli, sites, or mail. g e S 1 Book Program List You can book programs by setting the date/time, channel, and program name. By using Act. TV w/ alarm, 1Seg automatically starts at the set time. You can book up to 100 programs. 1 m1SegBook program listl(
Do the following operations. pSelect a booked program to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing l(
). Item Channel Edit title Operation/Explanation
Select a channel.
Enter a program name. pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96 half-pitch characters. 304 Repeat
Select a type of repeat. pIf you select 1time, the booking is not repeated. pIf you select Select day, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l(
pThe program booking set with repetition is counted as one
). booking. Alarm
Select an alarm method. ON . Alerts you at the time set for the start date/time comes. The setting for alarm notification is completed. ON/Set time . Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification. OFF . Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification is completed.
Select how many seconds (minutes) before the specified time to be alerted. pWhen you set Auto power ON to ON, you cannot set 15 seconds before, 30 seconds before, and 45 seconds before as the prenotification time.
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pIf you set to Step, the alarm tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6. Alarm tone Volume Item Operation/Explanation Act. TV w/ alarm Select an item. Auto ON . After the Booking Alarm Notification display appears, 1Seg automatically starts. Manual ON . You can manually activate 1Seg from the Booking Alarm Notification display. OFF . Only the booking alarm notification is notified. You cannot activate 1Seg from the Booking Alarm Notification display. Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to notify booking alarm when the booking alarm notification time arrives during power off.
ON or OFF 1Seg volume Off timer Prefer manner mode 2 Press l(
You can set the sound volume of a 1Seg program when it is activated by Act. TV w/ alarm.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. You can set to end watching a 1Seg program for when the specified time elapses after the 1Seg program automatically starts by Act. TV w/ alarm.
Select a time. You can set the booking alarm tone which sounds at the specified time during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF ON . Sounds at the same volume as set for Alarm for Book program on page 114. OFF . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
). Timer Recording List You can set timer recordings by setting the date/time, channel, and program name. You can set up to 100 timer recordings. 1 m1SegTimer recording listl(
Do the following operations. pSelect a set timer recording to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing l(
pYou can display the used memory space (estimate) by pressing i(
). Item Channel Edit title Start date setting End date setting Operation/Explanation
Select a channel.
Enter a program name. pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96 half-pitch characters. Enter a date/time for starting or ending recording. The booking alarm notification is made about one minute before the starting time.
Select an item. Enter date . Enter a date/time directly. Choose date. Select a date from the Calendar and enter a time. Repeat Alarm Volume
Select a type of repeat. pIf you select 1 time, the recording is not repeated. pIf you select Select day, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l(
pThe timer recording set with repetition is counted as one event.
). 1 S e g You can set whether to make the alarm tone for the booking alarm notification.
ON or OFF
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pYou cannot set the volume to Step. 305 Item Priority Operation/Explanation Information You can set a recording operation for when the start date/time arrives while operating a function which cannot be started up simultaneously.
Recording or Operation Recording . Suspends and terminates the function being operated, and starts recording. Operation. The confirmation display appears asking whether to start recording. Select YES to suspend and terminate the function being operated and start recording. pFor while operating a function which can be started up simultaneously, recording starts by the Multitask function. pWhen the start time arrives during a call (including dialing and ringing), recording starts after you end the call. When you are using another function during a call, recording starts after you end the call and the function. Overwrite setting When you set a recording to be repeated and set Overwrite setting to ON, the program recorded last time is automatically deleted and overwritten.
ON or OFF
). g 2 Press l(
e S 1 pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to set the timer recording, select YES. If you select YES (confirm once), the same confirmation display does not appear afterward. Information pYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by using the program information displayed in the Program Guide i-ppli, sites, or mail. In that case, the registration display might appear with the start date/time, end date/time, channel, and program name entered. pWhen you booked multiple programs whose booking alarm notification is made at the same date/time, the notification for the program set for the earliest start date/time is preferentially made. When the start date/time of the programs is the same, the notification set for the program booked in the last is preferentially made. pYou cannot set multiple timer recordings whose recording time overlaps. If you set two timer recordings and the recording end time of one program is the same as the recording start time of the other, recording of the first program ends about one minute earlier. 306 pYou cannot book programs or set timer recordings of which starting date/time or alarm notification date/time (for Timer Recording, about one minute before) is over except for the booking set to be repeated. pThe program bookings and timer recordings of which alarm notification date/time is over are automatically deleted. However, the bookings set to be repeated, program bookings for which Alarm is set to OFF are not deleted. Also the bookings are not deleted if you were operating the program booking/timer recording function on the notification date/time. pWhen no channel lists are set, you cannot book programs and set timer recordings. pTurn off the FOMA phone after setting Auto power ON to OFF when you are near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals. pWhen you have set Priority to Operation and the confirmation display is shown, the recording does not start even at the recording start time and starts at the time you select YES. However, the recording is not executed if the recording end time is over. pWhen Overwrite setting is set to ON, the timer recording starts after erasing the program previously recorded. Regardless of whether you have watched the recorded program or not, or whether you have succeeded or failed timer recording, the previously recorded program is erased. If it is not erased before the timer recording starts, recording might not start on time. pWhen you set Overwrite setting to ON for a recording, the file size of the recorded video might become larger than that of the video recorded last time because the file size varies depending on the recording (or watching) environment or programs. Note that you might not be able to record correctly when the unused memory space in the storage location is not enough. pThe title of the recorded video file takes the program name booked for the timer recording. appears on the viewer display during recording by Timer Recording. p pThe audio from a 1Seg program is not played back during recording that has been started by Timer Recording. You can play back the audio by pressing -r or adjusting the sound volume, however. Function Menu while Book Program List or Timer Recording List is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation New Go to step 1 on page 304 for Book Program. Go to step 1 on page 305 for Timer Recording. Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Sort Delete this Delete past Delete selected Delete all Memory info
[Timer Recording list only]
Go to step 1 on page 304 for Book Program. Go to step 1 on page 305 for Timer Recording. You can change the display order.
Select an order.
YES You can delete the program bookings and timer recordings whose start date/time or end date/time is set for the past date/
time.
YES
Put a check mark for program bookings or timer recordings to be deletedl(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES You can display the used memory space (estimate). When you set an alarm for Book program or Timer recording The icon appears on the desktop. Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time). Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only. pIf you set Display settingClockClock display to OFF, or set Alarm to OFF for a program booking, the icons are not displayed. When the time specified for Book program or Timer recording comes
<Book Program>
If you set Act. TV w/ alarm to other than Auto ON, the alarm sounds for about five minutes, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for Phone of Vibrator. The set start date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on the display. If you set Alarm to ON and Act. TV w/ alarm to Auto ON, 1Seg automatically starts when the specified time comes. The alarm does not sound. To end watching, press h and select YES. If you set Off timer, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue watching when the specified time elapses. If you select NO or do nothing for about 15 seconds, 1Seg automatically terminates.
<Timer Recording>
About one minute before starting time, the alarm sounds for about two seconds, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for Phone of Vibrator. The set start date/time, end date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on the display, then the viewer display appears. If you do nothing for about one minute after the recording starts, the Stand-by display appears. If the timer recording has started with the FOMA phone closed, you can show the viewer display by opening the FOMA phone. If the FOMA phone is opened, you can show the viewer display by re-opening the FOMA phone or by pressing x and selecting Activate 1Seg. To end video recording by Timer Recording and save video, press p on the viewer display. In Video Mode, you can end the video recording and save video also by pressing Oo (
pDuring a call
) and selecting YES. The alarm sounds from the earpiece. pDuring operations
<Book Program>
When Alarm setting is set to Operation preferred, the booking alarm notification is made only when the Stand-by display is shown. When it is set to Alarm preferred, the booking alarm notification is made even while you are operating another function or during a call. (See page 416)
<Timer Recording>
Timer Recording works according to the setting of Priority (see page 306). However, Timer Recording might not work when you are reading to/writing from the microSD card, or accessing the Data Storage Center. 1 S e g 307 pWhen the booking alarm notification for a program booking or timer recording is set to the same time of Alarm, ToDo, or Schedule The notification is made in the priority order of Alarm Timer recording ToDo Schedule Book program. However, if you set alarm for Auto power ON and a program booking to the same time, and the specified time comes while the power is turned off, the icon does not appear on the desktop. A missed program booking or timer recording is notified by the icon on the desktop. pWhen the power is turned off The booking alarm notification is not made except for the program booking set with Auto power ON. For Timer Recording, you cannot record a 1Seg program unless the power has been set to ON one minute before the start date/time. The icon does not appear on the desktop even after turning on the power. pIn Manner Mode The vibrator, message display, and illumination light notify you. The alarm sounds at the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 113) pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each lock is released one minute before the start date/time. After releasing each lock, the icon appears on the desktop to inform you. pDuring infrared data exchange, during iC communication, or while SD-PIM is operated The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each function is finished one minute before the start date/time. After each function is finished, the icon appears on the desktop to inform you. pWhile updating software program g e S 1 The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless software update is finished one minute before the start date/time. When the specified time comes during updating software program, the icon does not appear on the desktop even after updating is completed. Information pWhen you book programs or timer recordings with Alarm setting set to Alarm preferred, and the booking alarm time arrives while you are dialing, the alarm sounds after you have called up the other party. When booking alarm time arrives during ringing, the alarm sounds after communication has started. Information pWhen you have set PIN1 code entry set to ON and set Auto power ON to automatically turn on the power to make a booking alarm notification for a program booking, the display for entering your PIN1 code appears after the power is automatically turned on. The booking alarm notification is not made unless you enter your PIN1 code. pWhen you set Auto power ON to automatically turn on the power to make a booking alarm notification for a program booking, the alarm notification is made after the wake-up image stops. pYou might not be able to set some i-motion movies/Chaku-uta Full music files for an alarm for a program booking. pDepending on the i-motion movie you set for the alarm for a program booking, only the audio might be played back at the specified time. pWhen a Chaku-uta Full music file is set for an alarm for a program booking, only the audio is played back at the specified time. The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm tone differs from for when you are notified by an alarm. To clear alarm tone/booking alarm message, animation, and i-motion for Book Program The alarm tone stops by pressing any of the keys, but the animation/i-motion becomes a still image, and the booking alarm message stays displayed. When Act. TV w/ alarm is set to OFF, press any key again to clear. However, you cannot clear the booking alarm message by pressing a side key, with the FOMA phone closed. When a call comes in, the alarm stops. When Act. TV w/ alarm of Book Program is set to Manual ON Press Oo(
) and select YES from the Booking Alarm Notification display; then 1Seg starts, and you can watch the booked program. If you start watching the booked program during recording, the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved;
then the booked program appears. 308 When Booking Alarm Notification is not executed or recording is completed The icon appears on the desktop. You can check that icon for the contents of the missed booking alarm (booking information) or recording result. The booking information or recording result is the latest missed one. pWhen Act. TV w/ alarm is set to other than OFF, you can start 1Seg also by pressing Oo(
) and select YES from the display of booking Information. pWhen recorded video is stored, you can play back the video also by pressing Oo(
) from the display of recording result. Recording Result You can display up to 20 recording results from the latest one. 1 m1SegRecording result
Select a recording result. pTo delete all recording results, press i(
your Terminal Security Code, and select YES.
), enter
<User Settings>
Settings for 1Seg 1 m1SegUser settings
Do the following operations. Item Caption Operation/Explanation You can set whether to display the caption for when watching starts.
ON or OFF Caption posit. in w-scr You can set the caption position on the horizontal display.
Upper or Lower Item Rec. when low battery Operation/Explanation You can set whether to continue recording when the battery runs short during recording.
ON or OFF ON . The confirmation display does not appear and recording continues. OFF . The confirmation display appears asking whether to end recording. Rec. program when call You can set whether to start recording automatically when a call or PushTalk call comes in during watching a 1Seg program.
ON or OFF Mobile W-Speed Image quality The outlines of images are automatically corrected so that you can watch more smooth videos of 1Seg programs.
ON or OFF You can change the image quality.
Select an item. Standard . The average image quality Sports . The image quality suitable for sports programs Cinema . The image quality suitable for movies Dynamic . The dynamic image quality by accentuation Sound
(Auto volume) Sound
(Remaster) You can set whether to turn up the sound volume so that it will be more audible.
Sound effectAuto volumeON or OFF You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.
Sound effectRemasterON or OFF 1 S e g 309 Operation/Explanation You can set sound effect for listening.
Sound effectListeningSelect an item. Surround . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic. Natur 1/2. Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste. OFF. Sets Listening to OFF. pNatur 1/2 is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device. You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.
Sound effectEqualizerSelect an item. Normal . Reproduces normal sound quality. Dynamic. Makes the sound dynamic by accentuation. Voice. Makes conversation audible. Train . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage. You can set whether to continue outputting audio for when you close the FOMA phone while watching a 1Seg program.
TV sound while closedON or OFF pWhen the setting is OFF, audio is silenced when you close the FOMA phone. Audio is played back again when you open the FOMA phone and select OK. You can set ECO Mode which fixes some settings and reduces the battery consumption.
YES pTo release ECO Mode, perform the same operation. pOnce ECO Mode is set, the following settings are fixed and cannot be changed. However, if you release ECO Mode, settings return. Mobile W-Speed: OFF Image quality: Standard Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Equalizer: Normal Item Sound
(Listening) Sound
(Equalizer) Sound
(TV sound while closed) g e S 1 ECO mode 310 Item Display light Operation/Explanation You can set the period of time of the display lights while you are watching a 1Seg program.
Constant light or Lighting duration
Enter a lighting duration (minutes). pEnter from 01 through 30 in two digits. Data broadcasting
(Set image display) You can set whether to display images of the data broadcasting site. (See page 188) Data broadcasting
(Sound effect setting) You can set whether to sound an effect tone of the data broadcasting and the data broadcasting site.
Sound effect settingON or OFF Data broadcasting
(Reset settings) If you select YES (confirm once) from the confirmation display for data broadcasting during watching a 1Seg program or playing back video, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward for both of them. The confirmation display resumes after you execute Reset Settings.
Reset settingsYES Icon You can set whether to always display guide (see page 296) in the horizontal display.
ON or OFF pEven if you set Icon to OFF, the icon such as appears during communication or when an i-mode mail or message or Message R/F comes in.
, Mail ticker display For when you receive an i-mode mail message, SMS message, or Message R/F while watching a 1Seg program, you can set whether to notify you of the receiving by the ticker on the viewer display.
Select an item. Sender+subject. Displays ticker of the sender and title. Rcpt notification . Displays ticker of reception notification only. OFF . Does not display ticker on the viewer pSee page 300 for details on ticker display. display. Check TV settings You can check each of User settings. Reset channel setting You can delete all channel lists.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Item Reset storage area i(
Operation/Explanation
)DeleteDelete this or Delete all Delete this . Deletes only the information of the affiliated broadcasting stations you selected, from the broadcasting storage area. Delete all. Deletes the information of all affiliated broadcasting stations created in the broadcasting storage area.
YES pIf you select Delete all, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code. You can reset each of User settings to the default. See Function List for the items to be reset. (See page 482)
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Reset TV settings Information
<Rec. program when call>
pThe recording cannot be started when the call comes in the following cases:
During displaying in the multiwindow During playing background During recording video During recording by Timer Recording During preparing recording of Timer Recording
<Mobile W-Speed>
pWhen you set to ON, you might not be able to have enough effects of Image quality. pMobile W-Speed becomes invalid during ECO mode, displaying in the multiwindow, or AV output. pDepending on the broadcast state, you might not be able to have the effects of Mobile W-Speed. pEven when Mobile W-Speed is set to ON during recording or during timer recording, it is invalid when you play back the recorded video.
<Sound (TV sound while closed)>
pWhen TV sound while closed is set to ON, the information about the data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee. pRegardless of the setting of this function, the audio is played back even if your FOMA phone is closed when you switch displays by Multitask, or when the display appears in multiple windows. Information
<Data broadcasting (Set image display)>
pIf you change this setting, Set image display of i-mode settings is also changed.
<Data broadcasting (Reset settings)>
pYou cannot reset the confirmation display at the start of 1Seg (see page 292) and at the time of Timer Recording (see page 306).
<Icon>
pThe guide display might appear even if Icon is set to OFF when the airwave conditions have got worse. 1 S e g 311 312 Full Browser/PC Movie Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC . <Full Browser> 314 Setting Full Browser . <Full Browser Settings> 317 What is PC Movie?. 320 Downloading PC Movies . 320 Playing Back PC Movies from Data Box . <PC Movie Player> 322 313
<Full Browser>
Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC You can browse Internet web pages designed for PCs using the Full Browser function. You can display even the Internet web pages that cannot be correctly displayed by i-mode. However, you cannot display or correctly display some Internet web pages. If you change the style while running Full Browser, the display automatically switches between the vertical display and the horizontal display. However, the display might not switch automatically during data communication or while a message is shown. When you switch it manually, select CHG wide scr. mode from the Function menu. pThe data such as Home URL or Bookmarks registered via Full Browser cannot be used via i-mode. The contents set by Full Browser are invalid for i-mode, either. pNote that you are charged a high communication fee for the massive data communication such as browsing Internet web pages having many images or downloading data files. For details on the packet communication fee, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pYou can browse Internet web pages composed of frames. You can select a frame to display it as well. (See page 316) pYou can display SSL/TLS-compatible pages via Full Browser. SSL and TLS are the methods of safer data communication using authentication/
1 iFull BrowserSelect an item. Home. Displays an Internet web page set as Home URL. Bookmark. Displays an Internet web page stored in Bookmark.
(See page 178) Last URL. Displays an Internet web page you viewed last time. Go to location . Displays an Internet web page by entering a URL.
(See Displaying Internet Web Pages on page 178) Full Browser settings
. Configures Full Browser settings. (See page 317) pWhen Access setting is set to No, the confirmation display appears asking whether to start Full Browser. Highlight Yes and select OK to switch setting of Access setting, then Full Browser starts up. pTo end Full Browser, press h with an Internet web page displayed and select YES. Information pIt may take long to display some Internet web pages. pYou cannot use the following functions on Full Browser:
Phone To function Flash movies Screen memos PDF files Full Browser Display encryption technology to protect your privacy. SSL/TLS pages prevent eavesdropping and information alteration during communication by exchanging encrypted data files. Further, server authentication prevents web spoofing, thus making your personal information such as credit card number or postal address exchanged safer.
: Displaying in the multiwindow
Window number/Number of windows
: During communication in another window
: During communication in another frame
: Phone Mode
: PC Mode
: Displaying an enlarged frame Full Browser Display e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F 314 Operations for the Full Browser display Operation Return to previous page Forward to next page Key operation Phone Mode PC Mode Co or 1 Vo or 3 Bo 1 3 Mo Scroll display Scroll display page by page </> or m(
)/c(
) pTo scroll to the top/end of the page, </>(for at least one second), m(
least one second) or a/s 2
)/c(
) (for at Reload Enlarge/Reduce display size 7 to reduce the display size, 8 to display in standard size, 9 to enlarge the display size Display Bookmark Folder list 0 Switch Display Mode Two modes, Phone mode and PC mode, are available for the Full Browser display. 1 iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Display Mode settingPhone mode or PC mode Phone mode
. Displays an Internet web page to fit in the display width of the FOMA phone. You do not need to scroll sideways; you can browse Internet web pages by scrolling upward and downward. PC mode
. Displays an Internet web page in the same format as when it is displayed on your personal computer in 800 (width) x 600 (height) dots. You can browse Internet web pages by scrolling upward, downward, and sideways. pWhen you show an Internet web page, you can switch the display modes each time you select Change disp. mode from the Function menu. pWhen you show the horizontal display, PC mode is automatically set and you cannot change the setting.
) from the Full Browser display to switch to Operation Use Operation Mode Press l(
mode. The operation palette is displayed by switching to Operation Mode, then you can move to the previous/next page or enlarge/reduce the display size. No: Moves to the previous/next page. Bo: Enlarges/reduces the display size. Open in the Multiwindow You can simultaneously open up to five Internet web pages via Full Browser. pYou can switch the simultaneously opened Internet web pages to show one by one.
)Open new window 1 Full Browser displayi(
Select an item. Bookmark . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page stored in Bookmark. (See page 178) Enter URL . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page by entering a URL. (See Displaying Internet Web Pages on page 178) Home . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page set as Home URL. Link . Opens a new window to show a page of the link highlighted on the Full Browser display. pSee page 316 for how to switch or close the window. Information pSome Internet web pages have links configured to open in new windows. When you open such a link, the new window opens even if you do not perform above operations. F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e 315 Display a Page Composed of Frames You can display Internet web pages composed of frames. You can select a frame, and enlarge each selected frame for displaying. 1 From an Internet web page composed of frames
Use Bo to highlight a frame, and press Oo(
Function Menu of Full Browser Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Add bookmark See page 178. pTo return to the display for all frames, press r or select All frames from the Function menu.
). Bookmark Enter URL See page 179. You can enter a URL to display an Internet web page.
Select a text box. Go to step 2 on page 178. pThe URL of displaying site is entered beforehand. Reload The contents on the Internet web page is updated to the latest ones. Change disp. mode See page 315. CHG wide scr. mode The image is displayed horizontally by rotating the display 90 degrees to the right. pWhen it is already displayed horizontally, the vertical display returns. All frames Enlarged by frame Open new window See page 315. Information pWhen an Internet web page has many divided frames, you might not be able to open all frames. is added to the frames that you could not open. Switch from i-mode to Full Browser You can switch to Full Browser to show the Internet web pages incorrectly displayed by i-mode. 1 While a page to be shown is displayed in Full Browser
)InternetSwitch to FBOK
i(
Information pYou cannot correctly display some Internet web pages. Change window Close window You can switch the windows while displaying the Internet web pages in the multiwindow.
Select a window. You can close the window while displaying the Internet web pages in the multiwindow.
YES Save image See page 182. Add desktop icon See page 127. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL of the displayed Internet web page pasted to the text. Go to step 2 on page 198. Home
(Set as home URL) You can set the displayed Internet web page as Home URL.
Set as home URLYES e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F 316 Function menu Operation/Explanation Information Home
(Display home) You can display the Internet web page set as Home URL.
Display home Scroll (Speed) See page 317. Scroll
(Focus while scroll) See page 317. Zoom All frames Retry Page info See page 318. You can return to the display for all frames from the display for the enlarged frame. You can play back the displayed animation from the beginning. You can display information of the displayed Internet web page.
URL or Title Others
(Set image display) You can set whether to display images.
Set image display See page 318. Others
(Change CHR code) See page 176. Others
(Cookie setting) Others
(Delete Cookies) Others
(Referer setting) You can set whether to validate cookies.
Cookie setting Go to step 1 of Cookie Setting on page 319. You can delete cookies.
Delete Cookies Go to step 1 of Delete Cookies on page 319. You can set whether to send a referer.
Referer setting Go to step 1 of Referer Setting on page 319. Others
(Certificate) See page 176.
<Compose message>
pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the text is up to 512 half-pitch characters. If the URL contains 512 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it. Upload Images You can upload JPEG or GIF images stored in the FOMA phone to an Internet web page. pProcedure for uploading images differs depending on the Internet web page. Follow the instructions on the display. Information pWhen the total size of the selected images exceeds 80 Kbytes, or when the total size of the selected image and other files exceeds 100 Kbytes, you cannot upload the images. pYou may not be able to upload images depending on the Internet web page. pYou cannot upload the images whose output from FOMA phone is prohibited.
<Full Browser Settings>
Setting Full Browser 1 iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Do the following operations. Item Display Mode setting Scroll (Speed) Operation/Explanation See page 315. You can set scroll speed.
SpeedHigh speed or Low speed Scroll
(Focus while scroll) You can set whether to highlight links while scrolling.
Focus while scrollON or OFF F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e 317 Item Window Open Guard Operation/Explanation You can set whether to prevent a new window from opening automatically by JavaScript.
Valid or Invalid Check settings You can check respective Full Browser settings. Reset last URL You can erase the URL of the Internet web page you viewed last.
YES Information
<Access setting>
pIf you replace the UIM with a new one when Yes is set, the setting switches to No.
<Set image display>
pEven when ON is set, images might not be displayed correctly. In this case, is displayed. is displayed and the data file is not received. pWhen OFF is set,
<Script setting>
pSome Internet web pages may not be displayed correctly unless Valid is set. pEven when Valid is set, it might not work depending on JavaScript. Item Zoom Access setting Operation/Explanation You can set the display size of the Internet web page. From the Function menu of the Full Browser display, you can enlarge/reduce the display size by each page.
Select a display size. pIn PC Mode, you can select a display area by Select disp. area from the Function menu of the Full Browser display. You can set whether to use Full Browser. Yes . Uses Full Browser. No . Displays the cautions at the start of Full Browser. Check the cautions, highlight Yes and then select OK, then the setting switches to Yes, and Full Browser becomes available. Home URL You can set Home URL.
Select the URL fieldEnter a URLOK Set image display You can set whether to display images.
ON or OFF PC Movie auto-play You can set whether to automatically play back the downloaded type of PC movies while obtaining.
ON or OFF Cookie setting See page 319. Delete Cookies See page 319. Referer setting See page 319. Script setting You can set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a simple program language that runs on Internet web pages. It is widely used to create Internet web pages with movements. When Valid is set, you can use the JavaScript function to browse Internet web pages on Full Browser.
Valid or Invalid e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F 318 Cookie By using cookies, you can effectively access the Internet web pages you have accessed once. A cookie is the system to temporarily save personal information such as the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet web page. The information from the server is written into the FOMA phone, temporarily saved, and used for content services. pIf a cookie is sent, the information such as the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet web page is also sent to the web page. Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending a cookie, we cannot be held responsible for that. However, you may not be able to correctly display or use some Internet web pages or content services unless the cookie setting is valid. Cookie Setting You can set whether to validate cookies. 1 iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Cookie settingSelect an item. Valid. Always validates cookies. The confirmation display does not appear before a cookie is sent or received. Invalid . Always invalidates cookies. Sending. Validates cookies sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears each time before a cookie is sent. Receiving . Validates cookies sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears each time before a cookie is received. Sending/receiving
. The confirmation display appears asking whether to permit a cookie to be sent or received each time before a cookie is sent or received. pWhen you replace a UIM with another one, Invalid is set. If you change the setting with the another one, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code might appear. Information pWhen Sending, Receiving, or Sending/receiving is set, the confirmation display might consecutively appear asking whether to send/receive (update) cookies depending on the Internet web page. Delete Cookies 1 iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Delete CookiesEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES Referer The referer denotes the link source information. When a referer is sent, the information about from which page you have accessed it is sent to the site. Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending a referer, we cannot be held responsible for that. Referer Setting You can set whether to send a referer while an Internet web page is open. 1 iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Referer settingSelect an item. Send. Sends a referer. Unsend . Does not send a referer. Notify . When a referer is sent, the confirmation display appears asking whether to send it. Information pWhen Notify is set, the confirmation display might consecutively appear asking whether to send a referer depending on the Internet web page. F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e 319 Downloading PC Movies Playing Back a Streaming Type of PC Movie 1 Select a PC movie from a PC movie obtainable siteYES See page 322 for the operation during playback. About license (Windows Media DRM) pAmong the PC movies protected by the license, you can play back the streaming type of PC movies only. You cannot play back the download type of PC movies protected by the license. pYou might not be able to play back PC movies depending on the license setting of the PC movies. pIf files are stored to the maximum when you try to obtain a license to save it to the FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete currently stored licenses to save a new one. Select YES to delete all the stored licenses to save it. You need to obtain a license again to play back a PC movie whose license is deleted. What is PC Movie?
By using high speed communication, you can play back smooth and high-quality PC movies provided by portal sites, movie specialty sites and other sites on the Internet. pPC Movie Player supports playback of Windows Media Video. pWhen downloading or streaming a PC movie, you might receive a bulky size of file. Note that you are charged a high packet communication fee for a bulky sent/received file such as a streaming type file whose size is not limited. For the details of the packet communication fee and billing plan, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version. Categories Type Playback type Streaming type
(cannot be saved) Plays back while obtaining Download type
(can be saved) Plays back while obtaining Plays back a file saved to the microSD card Description You can play back a PC movie while obtaining it. A long time playback is available. When PC Movie auto-play is set to ON, you can play back a PC movie while obtaining it. You can save it to the microSD card after download and play it back without re-connection. Up to 10 Mbytes of a file can be downloaded. To the microSD card, you can save not only data files obtained by the FOMA phone but also PC movies obtained or created on a personal computer, and then play them back. You can save a bulky file of up to the space size of microSD card. pThe distribution server for streaming type supports Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services 9. You cannot play back a streaming type of PC movie distributed from other than Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services 9. pSome sites check the operating environment (browser type, OS type, etc.) are checked and you might not be able to play back PC movies. pSee page 323 for the supported file format of PC movies. 320 e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F Playing Back a Download Type of PC Movie 1 Select a PC movie from a PC movie obtainable siteYES See page 322 for the operation during playback. pIf PC Movie auto-play is set to ON, a PC movie is played back during obtaining. If OFF is set, you can play it back by selecting Play from the Obtaining Completion display. pWhen you obtain a download type of PC movie from a site, the file is obtained while it is played back, and obtaining itself continues even when you suspend the playback midway. Obtaining Completion display
) to resume When obtaining a PC movie is suspended Depending on the type of a PC movie being obtained or the reason why the obtaining is suspended, the operation differs. Streaming type After the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of communication, the obtaining will be in pause state. Press Oo(
playback from the suspended point. The display before playback returns when you suspend obtaining by pressing r or h. Download type After the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of communication, the Obtaining Completion display appears. However, when it is played back while obtaining, the display in pause state appears. Select Play to play back the obtained segments of the file. Select Save to save the obtained segments of the file. (See Saving PC Movies.) Select ResumeDL to resume obtaining from the suspended point. The confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the data when you suspend obtaining by pressing r or h. pFor download type of PC movies, the downloading is continued during suspension if it is suspended by an incoming voice call, receiving a mail message or Message R/F, or alarm notification. pDepending on the PC movie or the site you are connecting to, you cannot resume from the suspended point even by pressing Oo(
case, the obtaining resumes from the top of the file.
) or selecting ResumeDL. In that Information pNote that there is no upper size limit for a streaming type of PC movie, you might exchange the files of no size limit. When obtaining it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. pDepending on the site or PC movie you are connecting to, you might not be able to obtain a file, play it back during obtaining, or play it back after obtaining. pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave conditions, the playback during obtaining might be suspended or the images might blur. You can repeatedly play back the download type of PC movies after obtaining but cannot play back the streaming type of PC movies. pIf the PC movie has the restrictions on the playable period, you cannot play it back before and after that period. If you leave your FOMA phone with the battery pack removed for a long time, the date/time information retained in the FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the PC movie that has the restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See Contents info for checking the playback restrictions. pIf you try to play back a PC movie with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of Keypad sound, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback. pContents info of a PC movie and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by the date/time with Summer time set to OFF. Saving PC Movies You can save the obtained PC movies to the microSD card. However, you cannot save the streaming type of PC movies. 1 Obtaining Completion displaySaveYES The PC movie is saved to the folder selected by Select storage. pWhen the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or memory space is full, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete unnecessary files to save new one. Select YES to list the files in Data Box, and select the unnecessary files to delete them. Before deleting, you can play back PC movies on the microSD card for confirmation, but cannot display the previous or next files. Information pYou cannot attach the saved PC movie to an i-mode mail message for sending. 321 F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e
<PC Movie Player>
Playing Back PC Movies from Data Box You can play back moving images published on the Internet for personal computers or PC movies saved to the microSD card via a personal computer, etc. PC movie is played back in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during playback. pYou can play back the sound of moving images from a commercial Bluetooth device.
(See page 431) 1 mData boxPC Movie PC Movie Type Selection display PC Movie Folder list PC Movie list 2 microSDSelect a folderSelect a file. pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second during playback, pause, or halt, or press h, PC Movie Player ends. It ends even when you play back during obtaining. e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F Operations while playing back a PC movie pSee page 325 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Pause1 Fast forward1 Display next file23 Display previous file23 Oo(
pOo(
l(
pl(
Vo Co4 Key operation
) or p
) or p to play back
) to play back Operation Select position to play15 Sound volume adjustment Key operation Press and hold No. Bo or </>
pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially. Mute Switch vertical display/
horizontal display67
[Normal Style only]
Icon
[Horizontal Open Style only]
Remaster Listening Equalizer
) pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available. i(
pi(
sound c(
pEach time of pressing switches display direction.
) or adjust the sound volume to play back
) m8 pEach time of pressing switches whether to display icons and navigations. 9 pEach time of pressing switches between ON and OFF. 8 Each time of pressing switches in order of OFF Surround Natur1 Natur2. 7 pEach time of pressing switches in order of Normal S-XBS1 S-XBS2 Train. 1 You might not be able to operate this for some PC movies. 2 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of PC movie, or when you are playing back a PC movie while obtaining it. You cannot operate this when you play back an obtained but unsaved PC movie from the Obtaining Completion display, either. 3 The files are displayed in the order on the PC Movie list. You can operate this when you play back from the PC Movie list. However, PC movies in WVX, ASX, and WAX formats are skipped. 4 When three seconds have elapsed after starting playback, this operation returns the position to the beginning of the file. However, you might not be able to operate this for a streaming type of PC movie or when you are playing back a PC movie while obtaining it. 5 You cannot operate this during fast-rewinding. 6 The horizontal display is valid only for the current display of playback display. When 322 you close the playback display, the vertical display returns. 7 You cannot operate this for PC movies with incompatible video data or voice-only Icons on the PC Movie list PC movies. 8 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in. or
, pIf you play back on the horizontal display from the pause state, the display might become dark, however, the video appears soon after you resume the playback. You can perform the following operations when you play back or pause a PC movie using the switch of Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option) or Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option). Operation Pause Play back next file Play back previous file Switch operation Press once. pTo play back, press again. Press twice in succession. Press three times in succession. pWhen playback time is over three seconds, you go back to the beginning of the file. Specification for PC movie playback File format Extension Codec Bit rate Video size Frame rate WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, ASX wmv, wma, wvx, wax, asf, asx Video Audio Video only Voice only Video + Voice QVGA (sidewise 320 dots x lengthwise 240 dots) 30 fps Windows Media Video 8 through 9 Windows Media Audio 2 through 9 512 kbps 192 kbps 512 kbps + 64 kbps Icon Icon File format WMV, ASF WVX, ASX WMA WAX Description PC movie on the Internet. PC movie saved to the microSD card. pAbove icons are displayed only for Position memory or Played history. When you select Position memory from the PC Movie Type Selection display The Position Memory Selection display appears. When you select Marker to resume or Position memory1 through 9, the PC movie is played back from the stored position. Marker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a PC movie, or when you terminate the PC Movie player during playback. Position memory You can store in any optional position in a PC movie, and create up to nine position memories. (See page 324 and page 325) pYou can display information about the position memory by pressing i(
selecting Posit. memory info. pTo delete Position memory, press i(
this, or Delete all. You cannot delete Marker to resume.
) and select Multiple-choice, Delete
) and You might be able to play back the files that exceed the bit rates described above. pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to obtain files, play back during obtaining, or play back after obtaining depending on the file. pIf the file format of either video or audio is not supported, the file might be played back pWhen a PC movie with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, or when its file name has been edited, you cannot play it back. pEven when you play back a PC movie from a position memory, it may be played back from the beginning, depending on the PC movie. with the supported format only. Information pFiles with the extension of wvx, wax, asx are the files for which the URL of a PC movie on the Internet is specified. When you select those files saved on the microSD card, streaming or downloading playback starts from the specified URL. F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e 323 When you select Played history from the PC Movie Type Selection display When you play back a PC movie, the URL or storage location of that file is stored as a history. Up to 30 histories are stored, and when those are exceeded, the oldest history is overwritten. Select a played history to play back the PC movie according to the history information. pWhen a PC movie stored in a played history has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back. Played History list pWhen you play back an obtained but unsaved PC movie from the Obtaining Completion display, it is not stored in Played History. Function Menu of the PC Movie Folder List Function menu Add folder Operation/Explanation
Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters. Edit folder name Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters. Delete folder
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Select storage You can set a destination folder for saving downloaded PC movies to the microSD card.
YES Information
<Select storage>
p is displayed for the folder set as a destination folder. Function Menu of the PC Movie List/Played History List Operation/Explanation You can display the file title, file name, and others of the PC movie. You can move the PC movie to another folder.
Select a destination folder. Function menu Contents info Move 324 e i v o M C P
r e s w o r B l l u F Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title
(Edit title) Edit title
(Reset title) Copy
Edit titleEnter a title. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. You can reset the title to the default.
Reset titleYES You can copy the PC movie to another folder.
Select a destination folder. History info You can display information of the played history. Position memory Multiple-choice Description You can store the URL information of the PC movie stored in Played History to a position memory. When you play back the file from the position memory, it is played back from the beginning.
Select a position memory number to be registered. pYou cannot select Marker to resume. You can select multiple files and operate them.
Put a check mark for files to be operatedi(
Select an item. Delete . See Delete this on page 324. Copy . See page 324. Move . See page 324.
) You can display the lyric or description of the PC movie.
The words view or Description view pUp to 1,024 full-pitch/2,048 half-pitch characters can be displayed in each. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Delete this Delete all Listing
YES You can delete all the files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can change the display format of PC Movie list.
Title or File name Function Menu during Pause/at the End of Playback Function menu Operation/Explanation Fast Rewind Stop Position to play Sound effect
(Remaster) Sound effect
(Listening) Sound effect
(Equalizer) The PC movie is played back fast. pTo cancel it, press l(
). The PC movie is played back fast in the opposite direction. pTo cancel it, press l(
You can end playback.
). You can set the start position for playing back the PC movie.
Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo(
pTo cancel, press r. You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.
RemasterON or OFF You can set sound effect for listening.
ListeningSelect an item. Surround . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic. Natur 1/2 . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste. OFF . Sets Listening to OFF. pNatur 1/2 is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device. You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.
EqualizerSelect an item. Normal . Reproduces normal sound quality. S-XBS1 . Enhances bass sound. S-XBS2 . Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1. Train . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound Contents info See page 324. leakage. Function menu Position memory Operation/Explanation You can store a position memory in the PC movie. Operate it at the desired position in pause state.
Select a position memory number to be stored. pYou cannot select Marker to resume. Description Copy URL Display size See page 324. While playing back a PC movie published on the Internet, you can copy the URL of that PC movie. pYou can copy up to 512 half-pitch characters for the URL. You can set the display whether to display a PC movie in the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the display size.
Actual size or Fit in display pEven if you set to Actual size, the PC movie in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size. Information
<Position to play>
pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the PC movies.
<Sound effect>
pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are displayed on the display.
<Position memory>
pRegardless of the point of pause, the position memory might be stored at the beginning of the file depending on the PC movies.
<Display size>
pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off. F u l l B r o w s e r
P C M o v i e 325 326 Data Display/Edit/Management About Data Box. 328 Making Full Use of Still Images Displaying Images . <Picture Viewer> 330 Editing Still Images. <Edit Picture> 335 Creating Animations. <Original Animation> 338 Making Full Use of Moving Images Playing Back Moving Images/i-motion Movies
. <i-motion Player> 338 Using Playlist . 343 Editing Moving Images/i-motion Movies . <Edit imotion> 343 Making Full Use of Video Playing Back Video. <Video Player> 345 Making Full Use of Chara-den What is Chara-den? . <Chara-den> 349 Displaying/Operating Chara-den Images
. <Chara-den Player> 349 Recording Chara-den Images . <Record Chara-den> 350 Making Full Use of Melodies Playing Back Melodies . <Melody Player> 351 Making Full Use of Kisekae Tool Checking Kisekae Tool . <Kisekae Tool> 354 Making Full Use of microSD Card About microSD Card . 355 Inserting/Removing microSD Card . 355 Displaying Data Items on microSD Card . <SD-PIM> 356 Copying Still Images, Moving Images, etc. . 359 Moving Copyrighted Files . <Movable Contents> 361 Managing Unsupported Files . <SD Other Files> 362 Formatting microSD Card . <microSD Format> 362 Checking microSD Card . <Check microSD> 362 Displaying Capacity of microSD Card . <microSD Info> 363 Using a microSD Card with a Personal Computer . 363 Folder Configuration on microSD Card . 364 Making Full Use of Data Managing Folders . 366 Making Full Use of Infrared Data Exchange About Infrared Data Exchange . 367 Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data Files . 370 Sending/Receiving All Data Files . 370 Using Infrared Remote-controller Function. 371 Communication Setting. <Forwarding Image> 371 Making Full Use of iC Communication About iC Communication . <iC Transmission> 372 Sending/Receiving One Data File. 372 Sending/Receiving All Data Files . 372 Making Full Use of Voice Recorder Using Voice Recorder . <Voice Recorder> 373 Making Full Use of PDF Viewer Displaying PDF Files . <PDF Viewer> 374 Making Full Use of Document Viewer Displaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files
. <Document Viewer> 378 Printing Still Images Printing Saved Images . 379 Displaying Images on TV Displaying Still Images, Moving Images/i-motion Movies on TV
. <AV Output> 380 327 About Data Box Data Box contains the items and folders as listed below. Data is saved to respective folders according to the contents. My picture i-mode Search by i-mode Camera Decomail-picture Decomail-
pictograph Downloaded still images, etc. Connects to the data site. Still images shot by the camera, shot Chara-den images, etc. Still images to be used for composing Deco-mail Connects to the data site. pYou can delete the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograms. You can re-download them from the P-SQUARE site
(see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them. Search by i-mode
(Favorite)1 Pictographs to be used for composing Deco-mail i (ipictograph)1
(Decoration)1
(Heart/Sparkling)1
(Weather/Season)1
(Transfer/Life)1
(Phone/Mail)1
(Food)1
(Cartoon character)1
(Character)1 Search by i-mode t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Connects to the data site. Pre-installed still images Still images in the user folder The function of displaying still images continuously Still images to be used for frames Still images to be used for marker stamps and cushy marks Connects to the data site. Still images shot by the camera, and images in JPEG format and GIF format that conform to the DCF standard and were copied from the FOMA phone Animation images in GIF format copied from the FOMA phone, and images in JPEG format that do not conform to the DCF standard Copyrighted still images moved from the FOMA phone Movable contents Decomail-pictograph Deco-mail pictograms copied from the FOMA phone Pre-installed User folder2 Original animation Frame Stamp Search by i-mode microSD Picture Image Box 328 MUSIC i-mode Initial folder Chaku-uta Full music files obtained from sites Search by i-mode Connects to the data site. User folder2 Search by i-mode microSD WMA Music&Video Channel Downloaded program Saved program imotion i-mode Search by i-mode Camera Pre-installed Voice recorder User folder2 Playlist Position memory Search by i-mode microSD Movie Movable contents Other contents Chaku-uta Full music files in the user folder Connects to the data site. Copyrighted Chaku-uta Full music files downloaded or moved from the FOMA phone WMA files obtained from personal computer Programs downloaded via Music&Video Channel Programs saved to the FOMA phone i-motion movies obtained from sites, etc. Connects to the data site. i-motion movies recorded by the camera, shot Chara-den movies, etc. Pre-installed i-motion movies Voices recorded by the voice recorder i-motion movies in the user folder Playback of playlist Playback of marker position Connects to the data site. Moving images shot by the camera or copied from the FOMA phone Copyrighted moving images moved from the FOMA phone Voice-only i-motion movies3 recorded by using the camera function, voice-only i-motion movies3 copied from the FOMA phone, or video-unplayable i-motion movies3 copied from the FOMA phone Melody i-mode Search by i-mode Pre-installed User folder2 Voice announce Downloaded melodies, etc. Connects to the data site. Pre-installed melodies Melodies in the user folder Data files recorded by using Voice announce Playlist Search by i-mode microSD Melody Movable contents Playback of playlist Connects to the data site. Melodies copied from the FOMA phone Copyrighted melodies moved from the FOMA phone Icons in the File list My documents i-mode microSD Kisekae Tool Search by i-mode microSD Downloaded PDF files, etc. PDF files downloaded or copied from the FOMA phone Connects to the data site. Kisekae Tool files downloaded, or moved from the FOMA phone
File Type Icon
Picture Title name Type File format Chara-den Pre-installed or downloaded Chara-den images PC Movie microSD Position memory Played history 1Seg Image Video PC movies downloaded, or saved by personal computer Playback of marker position Playback histories of PC movies Still images recorded by 1Seg Video recorded by 1Seg, and copyright-protected and 1Seg compatible moving images made with other AV devices Playback of marker position Position memory Document viewer Document files saved from mail (attached files) SD other files SD others Incompatible files saved from mail (attached files), or files in BMP or PNG format obtained by Full Browser 1 The folder names can be changed by Edit folder name. Deco-mail pictograms are directly saved to these folders, and files other than Deco-mail pictograms cannot be saved to them. 2 The folder names you have entered for Add folder are displayed. 3 Includes the music files in AAC format. Still image Still image with location information Still image/Animation image Frame Marker stamp Cushy mark Flash movie i-motion movie i-motion movie i-motion movie i-motion movie i-motion movie Video Video already viewed Video not viewed yet Partially saved i-motion movie Melody Melody Complete PDF file Partial PDF file Incomplete PDF file Damaged PDF file i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t JPEG JPEG GIF GIF GIF GIF SWF MP4(AMR) MP4(AAC) MP4(AAC+[HE-AAC]) MP4(Enhanced aacPlus) ASF MPEG2-TS MPEG2-TS MPEG2-TS SMF MFi PDF PDF PDF PDF 329 t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Icon Type File format Kisekae Tool file Partially saved Kisekae Tool file Chara-den image Word file Excel file PowerPoint file Incompatible file WORD EXCEL POWERPOINT For the video recorded by the device other than this FOMA phone, the icon for already viewed video is displayed. pFor the file with the file restrictions, pSome files have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable is added to each icon. deadline. added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions expired. is added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions and is
Acquired source Icon Description Obtained from sites or i-mode mail attachment Files shot by the FOMA phone, or recorded by the voice recorder Obtained from infrared data exchange or iC communication or microSD card Files of recorded Chara-den images Files of recorded 1Seg programs For the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, Available operation is displayed. Icon Description Attach to i-mode mail Insert image into Deco-mail, or create Decome-Anime Set display Send Ir data, iC transmission Copy to microSD card Upload 330
+m-4-6
<Picture Viewer>
Displaying Images You can display the still images saved to the FOMA phone or the microSD card. Picture is displayed in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during display. 1 mData boxMy pictureSelect a folder
Select a file. pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:
Folder list Still Image list pWhen selecting folders or still images by another function, some folders or still images may not be displayed depending on the function. You may at times be able to confirm the still image by pressing l(
) while you are selecting it. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Display Images Recorded by 1Seg 1 mData box1SegImageSelect a file. Operations when playing back still images pSee page 334 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Display the next file1 Display the previous file1 Zoom (Enlarge/Reduce)2 Icon
[Horizontal Open Style only]
Key operation
) Vo Co Oo(
pi(
reduce during zooming pOo(
m3 pEach time of pressing switches whether to display
) to return to the former file
) to display enlarge/
) or l(
icons and navigations. 1 Files are displayed in the order on the Still Image list. 2 You cannot operate depending on the image size or file format. 3 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in. or
, Specifications for playing back still image files File format Extension Pixels File size JPEG1, GIF, Flash jpg, gif, swf, ifm Files of 5M (2592 x 1944) size or smaller2 Still images of 2 Mbytes or less 1 The types of JPEG file you can play back are Baseline and Progressive of the Exif/
CIFF/JFIF format. 2 For the file in the progressive format, you can display the file of VGA (640 x 480) size or smaller. pYou cannot display some files even if their file formats are supported. Function Menu of the Still Image List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit picture See page 335. Function menu Edit title Operation/Explanation
Enter a title. pFor a file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters. pFor a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/
36 half-pitch characters. Display picture You can display the image. Set display You can paste the image to the Stand-by display and other displays for displaying. See Positioning for the position to which you paste the still image.
Select the display you paste it to. p is displayed for the pasted items but not for the videophone related items other than Videophone dial or V.phone incoming even if already pasted. pIf you select the videophone related items other than Videophone dial or V.phone incoming, an appropriate message is displayed at the center of the still image. Picture info You can display the still image title, file name and others. pThe item of Set display only is displayed for Picture info of original animations. Location info
(Attach location)
Attach locationSelect an item. By position loc. Measures the current location and store the location information. After checking the location information, press Oo(
). From loc. history
. Select a piece of location information from Location History and store it. From phonebook
. Select a Phonebook entry which contains the location information for storing. pTo delete the stored location information, select Delete loc. info. pWhen you press i(
) during measuring the current location, the confirmation display appears asking whether to display the result obtained so far from the location information. pTo cancel measuring the current location, press r or l(
pPress l(
information to restart measuring in Quality mode.
) from the confirmation display for the location
). 331 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t Function menu Operation/Explanation Location info
(Delete loc. info) You can delete the location information stored in the image.
Delete loc. infoYES Function menu Positioning Location info
(Details) Attach to mail Decorate mail t n e m e g a n a M You can check the location information detail.
Details pIf you press i(
Function menu for the location detail is displayed.
(See page 279)
) while displaying the detail, the
). Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
You can compose Deco-mail using data in the Decomail-picture folder or Decomail-pictograph folder. Go to step 2 on page 198. pSee page 202 for Deco-mail.
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372. Add desktop icon See page 127. Copy to microSD See page 359. Store in Center You can save the still image stored in the FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for still images to be savedl(
YES pYou can select up to 10 still images. pYou can switch between Picture and Title name by pressing i(
pWhile a still image is displayed, you do not need to put a check
) mark for the still image. Copy to phone See page 360. Move to microSD See page 361. Move to phone See page 361. 332 Edit file name File restriction Operation/Explanation You can set the position for when you paste the still image to the Stand-by display, etc. See page 331 for Set display.
Select a position for displaying.
Enter a file name. pYou can enter up to 36 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. If you set File restricted for the file, the operation of attaching to i-mode mail is disabled at the receiving end who receives the image as the first distribution.
File unrestricted or File restricted pSee page 164 for the file restrictions. DPOF setting See page 379. Slideshow Copy Move Delete this Delete all All still images are consecutively displayed starting from the still image selected in the folder. You can select the speed the still image switches at.
Normal or Slow Press Oo(
resume Slideshow.
) to stop Slideshow. Press Oo(
) again to You can copy the still image, moving image, PDF file, document file, or SD other file on the microSD card to another folder on the microSD card.
Select a destination folder. You can move the still image, moving image, PDF file, document file, Kisekae Tool file, or SD other file to another folder.
Select a destination folder. pPress l(
lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
YES
) to display folders at the second-tier level or You can delete all files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Function menu Multiple-choice Operation/Explanation Information
) You can select multiple files and operate them.
Put a check mark for the files to be operatedi(
Select an item. Picture/Title name/Listing
. See page 333, page 354 and page 375. Delete . See Delete this on page 332. DPOF setting . See page 379. Copy . See page 332. Move . See page 332. Copy to microSD. See page 359. Copy to phone. See page 360. Send Ir data . See page 370. Select all . Selects all files. Release all . Releases all selected files. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Sort You can change displayed order.
Select an order. pYou cannot sort the files on the microSD card. Picture/Title name You can switch the lists of still images. pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c(
Still Image list.
) from the Information
<Edit title>
pYou may not be able to edit the title depending on the file.
<Display picture>
pYou may not be able to execute Display Picture depending on the file. pFlash movies are played back at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. When Phone of Ring volume is set to Step, they are played back at Level 2.
<Set display>
pFlash movies can be pasted only to Stand-by display, Wake-up display, Dialing, Calling, Videophone dial, V.phone incoming, Mail sending, Mail receiving, Checking, and Mail/msg. rcpt result. pAnimation GIF images cannot paste to the videophone related items other than Videophone dial or V.phone incoming. pThe displayed size might differ from the actual size depending on the image size or the display pasted to. pYou cannot execute Set display for some image files.
<Attach to mail>
pYou may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the image. pSee page 164 for attaching a file set with the file restriction to mail.
<Decorate mail>
pWhen an image size is larger than Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size, the display for selecting how to convert the image size appears. The converted still image is saved as a separate new file. Select Attach directly; then the image size does not change. Select Sub-QCIF scale down; then the image size is scaled down to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size or smaller with its proportional ratio retained. Select Sub-QCIF trim away; then the image size is scaled down or cut out to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size or smaller with its proportional ratio retained. If the file size exceeds the maximum size to create Deco-mail, its size is converted to the maximum size to create Deco-mail or less. pEven if you scale down or cut out the still image to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size, you can again scale down or cut it out by pressing +l(
selecting Cancel. When you press +i(
Composition display appears.
) and select Set, the Message
) or pressing +i(
) and pYou may not be able to create Deco-mail depending on the image. 333 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information
<Store in Center>
pYou cannot save the following still images:
Images whose sizes exceed 100 Kbytes Images whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited Images other than in JPEG or GIF format pYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of the service area. pWhen you have not signed up for Data Security Service, the message to that effect appears. pYou can download the saved still images from the Data Storage Center site to your FOMA phone. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version.
<Edit file name>
pYou may not be able to edit the file name depending on the file. pYou cannot use half-pitch space for the file name.
<File restriction>
pYou may not be able to set the file restrictions depending on the file.
<Slideshow>
pFlash movies are not displayed. pThe time interval to show the images might differ depending on the image.
<Copy> <Move>
pIf a call comes in while copying/moving multiple files, copying/moving is canceled even midway.
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pIf a call comes in while deleting multiple files, deleting is canceled.
<Multiple-choice>
pYou can select up to 3,500 still images, moving images, melodies, PDF files and Kisekae Tool files, and up to 100 videos, document files and SD other files.
<Picture/Title name>
pWhen you use Picture to display still images, some images may appear different. Function Menu while Playing Back Still Image Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit picture Set display Picture info Location info
(Attach location) Location info
(Delete loc. info) Location info
(Details) See page 335. See page 331. See page 331. See page 331. See page 332. See page 332. Attach to mail See page 332 Decorate mail See page 332. Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372. Display size You can set whether to display the still image in original size
(normal size) or to fit to the display size.
Normal or Fit in display pEven if you set to Normal, the still image in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size. Also, when the still image is QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, it is doubled at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed. Add desktop icon See page 127. Copy to microSD See page 359. Store in Center See page 332. Copy to phone See page 360. Positioning See page 332. DPOF setting See page 379. Delete See Delete this on page 332. 334 Function menu Operation/Explanation Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the beginning.
<Edit Picture>
Editing Still Images 1 Still Image list/Still image in play
)Edit picture
i(
pWhen the still image, which is not the Stand-by (480 x 854) size, is larger than VGA (640 x 480) size, it is reduced to VGA (640 x 480) size. pWhen the still image to be edited is larger than the display size, use Mo to scroll it. Edit Picture display
)Edit the still image. See page 336 to page 337 for how to operate.
)YES or NO 2 i(
3 Oo(
YES . Overwrites the image to save. NO . Saves the image as a new still image. The edited still image is saved. pTo edit and save an edited still image on the microSD card, press Oo(
step 3; then it is saved to the i-mode folder anew. pNot to save the edited still image, press r or h; then select YES. pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum. VGA 1 2 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t The size of still image you can edit 5M, 3M, 2M, VGA, CIF, QVGA, QCIF, Sub-QCIF 3.7M Wide, 2M Wide Stand-by Other sizes smaller than Edit menu Marker stamp Frame Character stamp Cushy mark Fit in screen Change size Trim away Retouch Rotate Brightness
: Editing picture is disabled. Attach to mail
: Editing picture is enabled. 1 You cannot edit the still image smaller than 24 x 24 dots. 2 You cannot edit the still image of Chat Picture (80 x 80) size or smaller. pYou can edit the still images of 1920 x 1440 dots, 1632 x 1224 dots, 1616 x 1212 dots, 1600 x 900 dots, and 1280 x 960 dots as well. Information pYou can execute Edit picture only for the File unrestricted files of still images shot by the cameras, obtained by data communication, downloaded from sites, or retrieved from i-mode mail. pYou cannot edit some still images, or you might have difficulty to produce editing
) in effect. pIf you repeat editing image such as pasting frames or marker stamps to the shot still image, the image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger. pIf you change the size of a still image, some still images cannot be allowed to edit picture. 335 t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information pIf the battery runs out during editing, the edited contents are discarded. pThe file name, title, storage location, and acquired source of the newly saved still Function menu Character stamp image are as follows:
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmnnnn Title: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, n: number) Storage location: Folder the source file is saved to (Still images on the microSD card Acquired source: The same as the source file are saved to the i-mode folder.) Function Menu of the Edit Picture Display Operation/Explanation
). You can add the marker stamp in the Stamp folder.
Select a marker stamp. pYou can rotate the marker stamp by pressing i(
) and selecting 90 to right/90 to left/180. Select Scale up/Scale down to enlarge or shrink the marker stamp. pYou can reselect a marker stamp by pressing l(
Use Mo to position the marker stamp and press Oo(
pYou can add a marker stamp by pressing l(
Oo(
Select a frameOo(
pYou can add the frame whose size is the same as the size of the image you are editing. pYou can display the previous or next frame by pressing No. Press and hold No for at least one second to display sequentially. pYou can rotate the frame by pressing i(
180 rotation. pYou can reselect a frame by pressing l(
) and selecting Cushy mark Fit in screen Function menu Marker stamp Frame 336 Operation/Explanation
) and select Character color to select a color;
You can add text.
Enter characters. You can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters. However, the number of characters you can enter decreases depending on the size of the still image. pPress i(
then, you can change the color of characters. You can switch between 16 Color and 256 Color by pressing c(
). Select Font to change the character fonts. Select Character size to enlarge or shrink characters. Select Character input to edit entered characters.
Use Mo to position the charactersand press Oo(
Oo(
pYou can reselect a position by pressing l(
You can compound a cushy mark in the Stamp folder. The persons facial region is automatically recognized and the cushy mark is pasted to an appropriate position.
Select a cushy mark. pPress i(
or shrink the cushy mark. pTo cancel, press l(
Use Mo to position the cushy markand press Oo(
pThe cushy mark that comes out of the still image is cut off. pYou can add a cushy mark by pressing l(
Oo(
You can convert an image size into Stand-by (480 x 854) size. pDepending on the source still image size, the confirmation
) and select Scale up/Scale down to enlarge
) display might appear asking whether to cut out an image size and convert into Stand-by (480 x 854) size. Function menu Change size Trim away Retouch Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation
Select an image size to change to. pIf you select the size different in proportional ratio from the source still image, the still image is enlarged or shrunk so that it does not exceed the selected size with its proportional ratio retained.
Oo(
pYou can reselect a size by pressing l(
You can trim the still image to a certain size.
Select an image size to trim to. pYou cannot select a trimming frame larger than the still image
) you are editing.
). pWhen you select Dial/recv. PIC (480 x 288) or VGA (480 x 640), the still image you are editing or the trimming frame are halved at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed.
Use Mo to select a part to be trimmed and press Oo(
pYou can reselect a size to trim by pressing l(
Oo(
pYou can reselect a part to be trimmed by pressing l(
You can set texture and color tone of the still image.
Select an item. Sharp. Stresses the outline. Blur . Softens the outline. Sepia . Makes the color tone sepia. Emboss. Makes the still image rugged. Negative . Reverses the color tone. Horizontal flip . Flips the image horizontally. Super clear shadow . Makes the dark still image clear. Memory color. Corrects the color and contrast.
Oo(
pYou can reselect an effect by pressing l(
). Rotate Brightness
90 to right, 90 to left or 180Oo(
pYou can reselect the rotation angle by pressing l(
You can adjust the brightness to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
). i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t Attach to mail See page 332 Save See page 335. Information
<Marker stamp>
pYou cannot select the marker stamp with following sizes:
When the size is larger than the still image to be edited CIF (352 x 288) QCIF (176 x 144) Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) pYou cannot enlarge a marker stamp to the size larger than the still image you are QVGA (240 x 320) VGA (640 x 480) editing.
<Character stamp>
pYou cannot set some character colors depending on the image to be edited. In that case, select another color.
<Cushy mark>
pYou cannot select a cushy mark larger than VGA (640 x 480) size. pYou can enlarge or shrink a cushy mark up to three times, but cannot enlarge it to the size larger than VGA (640 x480) size. pPersons face or outline might not be recognized correctly. When multiple persons faces are found, a single persons face only is recognized. 337
<Original Animation>
Creating Animations You can select up to 20 JPEG files (20 frames) of Stand-by (480 x 854) size or smaller from the i-mode folder, Camera folder and user folders, and play them back as an animation. You can store 20 original animations. 1 mData boxMy picture
Original animation<New>
pTo change, select an original animation you have set. Original Animation list
Select a folderSelect a still image. pTo release the stored still image, select Release this. 2 Select a frame position from <1st> to <20th>
3 Repeat step 2l(
) Function Menu of the Original Animation List Function menu Edit title Operation/Explanation
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters. Org. animation Go to step 2 on page 338. Display picture You can play back the original animation. Set display Picture info See page 331. See page 331. Release animation YES t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu Operation/Explanation Display size See page 334. Retry You can play back the original animation again. Information pIf you delete a still image stored in an original animation, the original animation which contains the still image is released.
<i-motion Player>
Playing Back Moving Images/i-motion Movies You can play back moving images saved to the FOMA phone or the microSD card. Moving image is played back in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during playback. pYou can play back the sound of moving images from a commercial Bluetooth device.
(See page 431) 1 mData boximotionSelect a folder
Select a file. pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. Function Menu while Playing Back Original Animation Folder list Moving Image list Function menu Operation/Explanation Set display See page 331. 338 pThe following images are displayed when you cannot display the preview images:
images No preview Playback restrictions have Incomplete Cannot be download played back pWhen you select a folder or i-motion movie from another function, some folders or i-motion movies may not be displayed depending on the function. You may be able to confirm the i-motion movie by pressing l(
) while selecting an i-motion movie. pDepending on the i-motion movie, you can play back by selecting a chapter set expired, and the like. for the i-motion movie. (See page 341) Operations when playing back moving image pSee page 341 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Key operation Operation Icon
[Horizontal Open Style only]
Remaster Listening Equalizer Key operation m4 pEach time of pressing switches in order of Display icons and navigations Nondisplay icons and navigations Full display. 9 pEach time of pressing switches between ON and OFF. 8 pEach time of pressing switches in order of OFF Surround Natur1 Natur2. 7 pEach time of pressing switches in order of Normal S-XBS1 S-XBS2 Train. Quick View Mute Pause1 Play back frame by frame2 Sound volume adjustment Display next file or chapter3 Display previous file or chapter3
) or adjust the sound volume to play back sound
) (See page 341) l(
i(
pi(
Oo(
pOo(
l(
pEach time of pressing proceeds frame by frame. Bo or </>
pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially. pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 6 is available. Vo
) during pause
) to resume Co pWhen playback time is over three seconds, you go back to the beginning of the file. (You go back to the top of the chapter for the file with chapters.) Search (fast forward)2 Press and hold Vo. Search (fast rewind)2 Press and hold Co. Change vertical disp./
horizontal disp./full disp.
[Normal Style only]
) c(
pEach time of pressing switches display format. 1 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of i-motion movie. 2 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of i-motion movie, or when you are playing back an i-motion movie while obtaining it. Further, you might not be able to operate this depending on the i-motion movie. 3 Moving images having no chapters are switched in the order on the Moving Image list. This operation is available when you play back from the Moving Image list. Moving images having chapters are switched in the order that the chapters are stored. 4 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in. or
, Specifications for moving image playback File format MP4, ASF Coding system MP4 file Image: MPEG4, H.263, H.264 Audio: AMR, AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), Enhanced aacPlus ASF file Image: MPEG4 Audio: G.726 Pixels MPEG4: Files of VGA (640 x 480) size or smaller H.263: Files of Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) or QCIF (176 x 144) size only H.264: Files of QVGA (240 x 320) size or smaller Extension sdv, 3gp, mp4, asf pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files. 339 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Operation/Explanation You can display the i-motion movie title, file name and others. You can compose an i-motion mail message with the file attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 370.
). When you select Position memory from the Folder list for moving images The display for selecting Position Memory appears. When you select Marker to resume or Position memory 1/2, the moving image is played back from the stored position. Function menu imotion info Attach to mail Marker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a moving image. Position memory You can store in any optional position in a moving image, and create up to two position memories. (See page 342) pTo delete Position memory, press i(
the Marker to resume.
) and select Delete. You cannot delete pWhen the moving image with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back. Information pWhile searching (fast forward or fast rewind) a moving image or playing it back frame by frame, it does not sound. You can search (fast forward or fast rewind) while pausing or playing back the moving image (including slow and quick view). pIf you receive mail or a Message R/F when playing back an i-motion movie, the video or sound might be interrupted. Send Ir data transmission See page 372. Copy to microSD See page 359. Copy to phone See page 360. Move to microSD See page 361. Move to phone See page 361. Copy Move See page 332. See page 332. Add desktop icon See page 127. Edit file name See page 332. File restriction See page 332. Function Menu of the Moving Image List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit imotion See page 343. Reset title Delete this Delete all You can reset the title to the default.
YES See page 332. See page 332. See page 331. Multiple-choice See page 333. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Sort See page 333.
) You can set a moving image for a ring tone.
Ring toneSelect an incoming typel(
pThe set item is indicated by . You can set a moving image for the Stand-by display.
Stand-by displayYESl(
You can set a moving image for the (horizontally) Stand-by display.
Standby disp. WideYESl(
You can set a moving image for the Wake-up display.
Wake-up displayYESl(
) Edit title Set imotion
(Ring tone) Set imotion
(Stand-by display) Set imotion
(Standby disp. Wide) Set imotion
(Wake-up display) 340 Function menu Operation/Explanation Listing You can change the displayed contents for Moving Image list. You can select whether the title or file name is displayed in the microSD Card list.
Select a display format. Title . The titles or file names are listed. Title + Image. The title or file name, and image are displayed at a time. The displayed image is the first frame of moving image. Title/File name . You can select whether to display the title or file name. pIn the case of the microSD Card list, Title is displayed as Name, and Title + Image is displayed as Name + Image. pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c(
Moving Image list.
) from the Information
<Set imotion>
pYou cannot set the i-motion movie whose acquired source is pSee imotion info to check whether the i-motion movie can be set for a ring tone or as a ring tone. receiving display.
<Attach to mail>
pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Mbytes, the confirmation display appears asking whether to cut it out to the mail size. Select YES to cut out the i-motion movie from the beginning to the about 2-Mbyte point. pYou may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the i-motion movie. pDepending on the i-motion movie, its file size may become larger or smaller. pYou cannot attach an i-motion movie in excess of 2 Mbytes to mail from the Edit imotion display. See Trim for mail for how to cut out the i-motion movie for attaching to i-motion mail. Function Menu during Pause/at the End of Playback Function menu Operation/Explanation Normal play The moving image is played back at the normal speed. Function menu Chapter list Slow Operation/Explanation You can display the list of chapters stored in the moving image and select a chapter to be played back.
Select a chapter to be played back. The moving image is played back mute at half the normal speed. pTo cancel Slow playback, press l(
Normal play.
), or perform Quick View (1.25x) The moving image is played back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed. pPress l(
normal speed. Press l(
speed.
) to play back the moving image at twice the
) to play back at the normal Quick View (2x) The moving image is played back at twice the normal speed. pTo cancel Quick View, press l(
play.
), or perform Normal Stop You can end playback. Position to play Sound effect
(Remaster) Sound effect
(Listening)
). You can set the start point for playing back the moving image.
Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo(
pTo cancel, press r. You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.
RemasterON or OFF You can set sound effect for listening.
ListeningSelect an item. Surround. Makes the sound natural and stereophonic. Natur 1/2 . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste. OFF . Sets Listening to OFF. pNatur 1/2 is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device. 341 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu Operation/Explanation Information
<Chapter list>
pWhen restrictions on chapter forward/rewind are applied, you cannot select chapters after/before the one you are currently playing back.
<Slow>
pYou cannot slow-play the following i-motion movies:
A streaming type of i-motion movie An i-motion movie being played back while obtaining data An i-motion movie played back from the Stand-by display
<Quick View>
pYou cannot execute Quick View for some i-motion movies. pi-motion movies are not played back in stereo sound during Quick View. pIt may be hard to hear sound during Quick View.
<Position to play>
pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the moving image/
i-motion movie.
<Sound effect>
pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are shown on the display. pWhen audio format of the i-motion movie is AMR or G.726, sound effect might be unavailable.
<Position memory>
pYou might not be able to store the position memory depending on the moving image/
i-motion movie.
<Display size>
pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off.
<Change to full>
pThe moving image of QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller is not played back in full display. pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off. Sound effect
(Equalizer) You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.
EqualizerSelect an item. Normal . Reproduces normal sound quality. S-XBS1. Enhances bass sound. S-XBS2. Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1. Train . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage. Position memory You can store a position memory in the moving image. Store it at the desired position in pause state.
Position memory1 or Position memory2 Edit imotion See page 343. Attach to mail Set imotion See page 340. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
See page 340.
) from the playback end display. imotion info See page 340. Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372. Copy to phone See page 360. Add desktop icon See page 127. You can set the display whether to display a moving image in the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the display size.
Actual size or Fit in display pEven if you set to Actual size, the moving image in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size. Also, when the moving image is QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, it is doubled at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed. You can change the display format of moving images. Each time of selecting the item switches in order of playback on the vertical display playback on the horizontal display fitted to the display size playback on the enlarged full size display. Display size Change to full 342 Using Playlist You can store moving images in a playlist, and continuously play them back in the order you like. You can create up to 5 playlists, and can store up to 30 moving images per playlist. Store Playlist 1 mData boximotionPlaylist
Select Playlist 1 through 5. Playlist list
Select a moving image. 2 Select <1st> through <30th>Select a folder 3 Repeat step 2l(
) pTo release a stored moving image, press i(
) and select DEL one from list. Select DEL all from list, then you can release all the stored moving images. pTo change the order of stored moving images, press i(
Order to play, and select a moving image whose position to be changed. Then, select the destination position to change the order.
) and select Information pYou cannot store partially saved i-motion movies in the playlist. Play Back Playlist 1 Playlist listHighlight a playlist and press l(
). Function Menu of the Playlist List Function menu Operation/Explanation Play Edit playlist See page 343. You can edit the playlist. Go to step 2 of Store Playlist on page 343. Function menu Release playlist Operation/Explanation You can release all moving images stored in the playlist.
YES Edit playlist name You can edit the name of the playlist.
Edit a playlist name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
<Edit imotion>
Editing Moving Images/i-motion Movies You can edit the moving image/i-motion movie. The moving image/
i-motion movie you edited is saved to the folder containing the source moving image/i-motion movie. 1 Moving Image list/During pause/At the end of playbacki(
Edit imotion pUse Bo or </ > to adjust the sound volume.
) i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t
)Edit the moving image/i-motion movie. Edit imotion display See page 344 for how to operate.
). 2 i(
3 Press Oo(
4 YES pNot to save the edited moving image/i-motion movie, press r or h; then select YES. The edited moving image/i-motion movie is saved. pSee page 186 for when i-motion movies are stored to the maximum. 343 t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Operations during editing an i-motion movie or demo playback Operation Key operation Pause Fast forward Fast rewind Forward frame by frame Rewind frame by frame Sound volume adjustment
) to resume play back. Oo(
) pPress Oo(
Press and hold Vo. Press and hold Co. During pause, press Vo. During pause, press Co. Bo or </>
pYou cannot do some operations depending on the state. Information pYou cannot edit the following moving images/i-motion movies:
The files with File restriction and Replay restriction obtained from sites or i-mode mail The files other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240), QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size The files saved to the microSD card pYou might not be able to edit some i-motion movies. pThe image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger or smaller by executing Edit imotion. pWhen a call comes in, the battery level goes flat, or you close the FOMA phone while editing, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save the fixed edited contents. 344 Function Menu of the Edit imotion Display Function menu Trim imotion Operation/Explanation You can cut out a certain range from an i-motion movie.
Use Vo to display a start frame and press l(
). The start frame is set and the moving image/i-motion movie is played back.
Press Oo(
Playing back the moving image/i-motion movie pauses.
Use Vo to display an end frame and press l(
The cut out range is played back. pWhen the file size reaches about 10 Mbytes, the end frame is
) at the position you want to cut out.
). Trim for picture Trim for mail automatically set.
Press Oo(
pPress l(
moving image/i-motion movie.
) to play back a demo to check the edited You can cut out the still image and save it.
Use Vo to display a frame and press l(
Select a folder. pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum.
)YES You can cut out the moving image/i-motion movie to the size attachable to i-mode mail.
Mail size (S) or Mail size Mail size (S) . Cut out to the size of about 500 Kbytes or less. Mail size . Cut out to the size of about 2,048 Kbytes or less.
Use Vo to display a start frame and press l(
The moving image/i-motion movie is played back. When the file size reaches about 500 Kbytes, about 2,048 Kbytes, or at the end of playback, the playback stops automatically.
Oo(
pPress l(
edited moving image/i-motion movie.
) to play back a demo and you can check the
) Function menu Operation/Explanation Attach to mail See page 340. File restriction See page 332. Information
<Trim imotion>
pIf you execute Trim imotion, the file size may become larger. Function Menu while i-motion Movie is Edited or Demo Playback is in Pause Function menu Operation/Explanation Normal play You can play back at the normal speed. Slow You can play back mute at half the normal speed. Quick View (1.25x) You can play back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed. Quick View (2x) You can play back at twice the normal speed. Starting point You can set the start frame for Trim imotion and Trim for mail. Ending point You can set the end frame for Trim imotion. Determine Stop You can set the frame for Trim for picture. You can stop playing back.
<Video Player>
Playing Back Video You can play back the video saved to the microSD card. Just change the style to automatically switch between the vertical display and horizontal display when you are playing back a video. You can switch displays manually by pressing d. pYou can play back the sound of video from a commercial Bluetooth device.
(See page 431) 1 mData box1SegVideoSelect a file. pWhen the position to play is recorded to the video, the playback starts from the recorded position. Press l(
) to play back from the beginning. pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:
Folder list Video list Operations when playing video pSee page 347 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Key operation Quick View Mute l(
i(
pi(
sound
) (See page 341)
) or adjust the sound volume to play back 345 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Operation Key operation Pause Oo(
pOo(
Play back frame by frame l(
) or p
) or p to resume
) during pause Sound volume adjustment pEach time of pressing proceeds frame by frame. Bo1 or </>
pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially. Fast forward1 Rewind1 Skip (fast forward)12 Skip (rewind)13 Program title4 Switch display Full display Switch TV/data BC
) or p to resume
) or p to resume pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available. Vo pOo(
Co pOo(
Vo(for at least one second) or s during playback or pause Co(for at least one second) or a during playback or pause m(
pIcons and the time bar appear on the horizontal display. m(
pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display
) while displaying program title
) switches ON/OFF of Icon and Caption. pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches the position of the time bar as well regardless of whether Caption is displayed or not. d56 pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display direction. pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches between standard display and full display. c(
pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode
)6 and Data Broadcasting Mode. 1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, you cannot operate. 2 You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 30 seconds. 3 You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 10 seconds. 346 4 When you operate immediately after Skip, Fast forward, Rewind, or Position to play, the program title stored in File property might appear. 5 You cannot operate this in Horizontal Open Style. 6 Close the FOMA phone to return to the vertical display. In Horizontal Open Style, the display automatically appears in the horizontal display in Video Mode and the vertical display does not appear. When you select Position memory from the Folder list for videos The display for selecting Position Memory appears. When you select Marker to resume or Position memory 1/2, the video is played back from the stored position. Marker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a video. Position memory You can store in any optional position in a video, and create up to two position memories. (See page 348) pTo delete Position memory, press i(
the Marker to resume.
) and select Delete. You cannot delete pWhen the video with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back. Information pNo sound is output during frame-by-frame playback or during skipping. Further, captions are not displayed. pThe displayed time bar is for reference. pEven if you set Sound effect setting (or Sound effect) to ON, effect tones do not sound during pause, frame-by-frame playback, slow playback, or quick view playback. pWhen you select YES (confirm once) from the confirmation display for data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program or playing back video, the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee. (See page 310) pThe information about the data broadcasting is discarded when you operate skip, fast forward, rewind, or Position to play. You are charged a packet communication fee when you re-obtain communication contents. pYou might not be able to operate links by selecting them on data broadcasting during pause or at the end of playback. Information Function menu Operation/Explanation pThe part of video that was not correctly recorded owing to the bad radio wave conditions is not displayed and skipped to the position where it can be displayed correctly. In that case, the video might not be played back for a few seconds, or might be distorted. Further, the time bar might not be displayed correctly. pIf you try to play back a video with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of Keypad sound. pIf you edit (divide) the video using a mobile phone or personal computer that supports the edit function, you might not be able to correctly play it back on the FOMA phone. Function Menu of the Video List Function menu Edit title File property Add desktop icon Reset title Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) Operation/Explanation
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. You can display the channel name, the program name, etc. of the video. pYou can display the channel name, the program name, etc. also by pressing c(
See page 127.
). You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Delete thisYES You can select multiple videos and delete them.
Delete selectedPut a check mark for videos to be deleted
l(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Listing You can change the displayed contents for Video list.
Select a display format. Title . The title names are displayed. Title + image. The title name and image are displayed at a time. The displayed image is the first frame of video. Information
<Delete>
pIf a call comes in while deleting multiple videos, deleting is canceled. pThe video whose recording time is long might take a long time to be deleted. Make sure that the remaining battery is full enough. pYou might not be able to delete the video containing data that does not support the FOMA phone.
<Listing>
pThe video that was not recorded correctly owing to the bad radio wave conditions might not be played back. Function Menu during Pause/at the End of Playback Function menu Operation/Explanation Normal play The video is played at the normal speed. Slow Quick View The video is played back mute at half the normal speed. pTo cancel Slow play, perform Normal play. The video is played back quickly.
Select an item. 1.25x . The video is played back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed. (See page 341) 2x . The video is played back at twice the normal speed.
(See page 341) Fast forward The video is played back fast.
10x or 30x pTo cancel fast forward playback, press Oo(
). 347 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Rewind Stop Position to play Position memory The video is played back fast in the opposite direction.
10x or 30x pTo cancel rewind playback, press Oo(
You can end playback.
). You can set the start point for playing the video.
Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo(
pTo cancel, press r. You can store a position memory in the video. Store it at the desired position in pause state.
Position memory1 or Position memory2 File property See page 347. Add desktop icon See page 127. Switch display At player start-up When Caption is set to ON:
V. img+Caption+D BC When Caption is set to OFF:
Visual image+DBC You can switch the contents on the viewer display.
Select an item. pIf you set to Enlarged V. img+DBC, the video on the vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the video might be cut depending on the program. pIf you operate Fast forward or Rewind from the Function menu while Data broadcasting is set, the setting at Video Player start-up returns. pEven if you set to Data broadcasting, the audio from the video is played back. pYou can set Caption from 1Seg. Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting At player start-up Video Mode Mode while watching a video on the vertical display. Icon See page 310. Image quality See page 309. Sound
(Auto volume) See page 309. 348 Sound
(Remaster) Sound
(Listening) Sound
(Equalizer) Sound
(Main/sub sound) At player start-up Main sound Data broadcasting
(Reload contents) Data broadcasting
(Certificate) Data broadcasting
(Set image display) Data broadcasting
(Sound effect) Data broadcasting
(Reset settings) Back to data BC Information See page 309. See page 310. See page 310.
Main/sub sound
Main sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub sound You can reload the displayed data broadcasting site.
Reload contents pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to re-send the data you entered, depending on the site. See page 176. See page 188. See page 310. See page 310. You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and return to the data broadcasting.
<Position to play>
pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the videos. pWhen you have selected the part that was not recorded correctly owing to bad radio wave conditions, the start point moves to the part where you can play back the video correctly.
<Chara-den>
What is Chara-den?
Chara-den is an animation character representing yourself. You can send it as your image during videophone calls. You can use the Chara-den player to play it back and shoot it. pYou can delete the pre-installed Chara-den image. You can re-download it from the P-SQUARE site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to it. pSome Chara-den images synchronize their movement with your voice spoken into the microphone.
<Chara-den Player>
Displaying/Operating Chara-den Images You can display stored Chara-den images. You can make the Chara-den image move by key operation. 1 mData boxChara-denSelect a Chara-den image. Chara-den list Chara-den display Key assignment of operating Chara-den You can use the Action list to check the actions that you can operate. pThe number of actions you can operate varies depending on the Chara-den image. Key operation 19 s1s912
(Whole Action Mode) 11991
(Parts Action Mode) 0 m l c Details Whole action: expresses an action with whole of the body. Parts action: expresses an action with a part of the body. Suspends the running action. Displays the Action list. Makes a videophone call. Records Chara-den images. 1 You cannot operate for the pre-installed Chara-den image. 2 Press s again to cancel the first s. Function Menu of the Chara-den List Function menu Operation/Explanation Chara-den call See page 74. Substitute image See page 74. Rec. Chara-den See page 350. Edit title File property
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. You can display the title, file name, and others of the Chara-den image. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Add desktop icon See page 127. Delete Delete all
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pThis operation deletes the pre-installed Chara-den image as well. 349 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu Multiple-choice Display size Operation/Explanation You can select and delete multiple Chara-den images.
Put a check mark for Chara-den images to be deleted
i(
You can set whether to display the Chara-den image in Actual size or Fit in display.
Actual size or Fit in display
)DeleteYES Reset title You can reset the title to the default one.
YES Information
<File property>
pRec. file restriction denotes whether to restrict the operation such as attaching still images/moving images created by Rec. Chara-den to mail, saving them to microSD card, or editing them.
<Delete> <Delete all> <Multiple-choice>
pIf you delete a Chara-den image set for the substitute image except
(kangaroo), (kangaroo) is set for the substitute image. If you delete
(kangaroo), a pre-installed substitute image will be sent. Function Menu of the Chara-den Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Chara-den call See page 74. Substitute image See page 74. Rec. Chara-den See page 350. Add desktop icon See page 127. You can display the list for actions that you can operate. pHighlight an action, and press Oo(
and press l(
pYou can display the Action list also by pressing m.
) to check the details of the action.
) to run the action;
Action list 350 Function menu Change action At Chara-den display Whole Action Mode Operation/Explanation You can switch the action modes between Whole Action Mode
) and Parts Action Mode (
). File property Display size See page 349. See page 350.
<Record Chara-den>
Recording Chara-den Images You can shoot the displayed Chara-den image as a still image or moving image. 1 mData boxChara-den
Select a Chara-den image to be shot
c(
) pYou can select Rec. Chara-den also from the Function menu of the Chara-den list or Chara-den display for recording. Chara-den Recording display Shoot Still Images 1 Display press Oo(
on the Chara-den Recording display and
). A still image of the displayed Chara-den image is shot. pWhile is displayed, press c(
) to display
. 2 Press Oo(
). The still image you have shot is saved to the Camera folder. Record Moving Images 1 Display pressOo(
on the Chara-den Recording display and
). Recording of the displayed Chara-den image starts. pWhile
) to display
. is displayed, press c(
)Oo(
The recorded moving image is saved to the Camera folder. 2 Oo(
Information pThe image size is fixed to QCIF (176 x 144). pIn Manner Mode or when Phone or Mail of Ring volume is set to Silent, the recording confirmation tone, the recording start tone, and the recording end tone do not sound. pWhen Recording type is set to Video + voice, the voice is recorded as well. Function Menu of the Chara-den Recording Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Switch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image to be displayed. pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to Whole Action Mode. Substitute image See page 74. Action list See page 350. Change action See page 350. Display size See page 350. Function menu Operation/Explanation Recording quality You can set the image quality for saving a moving Chara-den image. You can set only in Movie Mode.
Normal, Prefer image quality, or Prefer motion speed
<Melody Player>
Playing Back Melodies 1 mData boxMelody pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. 2 Select a folderSelect a melody. pWhen selecting folders and
+m-1-6 Folder list i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t melodies by another function, some folders or melodies may not be displayed depending on the function. Some melodies may be played back for confirmation while being selected, or you may at times be able to play back the melody by pressing l(
pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode.
). Melody list Melody Playback Recording size Recording type You can set the image size for recording and saving a still Chara-den image. You can set only in Photo Mode.
QCIF (176 x 144) or Small (117 x 96) You can set whether to record video or voice for recording and saving a moving Chara-den image. You can set only in Movie Mode.
Video + voice or Video Play Back Playlist You can repeatedly play back the melodies selected by Edit playlist. 1 mData boxMelodyPlaylist 351 t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Operation while playing back a melody Operation Key operation Halt Sound volume adjustment
), d, 0 through 9, a, s, Oo(
m, c, p Bo or </ >1 pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially. pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 6 is available. Vo Co Replay next file2 Replay previous file2 1 If the FOMA phone is closed, playback is halted. 2 Valid when played back from the Melody list. Information pThe melodies are played back at the volume set for Phone of Ring volume. When Phone of Ring volume is set to Silent or Step, they are played back at Level 2. However, the melody played back when it is selected does not sound. pEven if you change the volume while playing back, the volume set for Phone of Ring volume returns when you exit the Melody player. Function Menu of the Melody List Function menu Edit title Operation/Explanation
Edit the title. pFor a file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 31 full-pitch/
63 half-pitch characters. pFor a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/
36 half-pitch characters. Edit file name
Edit the file name. pYou can enter up to 36 half-pitch alphanumeric characters
(except extension). Play melody See page 351. Set as ring tone
Select an incoming type. p indicates the set item. 352 Function menu File restriction Operation/Explanation You can set the file restrictions on the selected melody.
File unrestricted or File restricted pSee page 164 for the file restrictions. Add desktop icon See page 127. Attach to mail Send Ir data You can compose an i-mode mail message with the selected melody attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 370.
). transmission See page 372. Copy to microSD See page 359. Melody info You can display the melody title, file name and others. Copy to phone See page 360. Move to phone See page 361. Copy Memory info Reset title Delete
(Delete this) Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) Delete this You can copy the melody from a folder on the microSD card to another folder on the microSD card.
Select a destination folder. You can display the used memory space (estimate). You can reset the title to the default.
YES You can delete the melody stored in the FOMA phone.
Delete thisYES You can select and delete multiple melodies stored in the FOMA phone.
Delete selected
Put a check mark for melodies to be deletedl(
YES
) You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder in the FOMA phone.
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can delete the melody stored on the microSD card.
YES Function menu Delete all Multiple-choice Sort Move Operation/Explanation You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder on the microSD card.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)Select an item. You can select multiple melodies stored on the microSD card and operate them.
Put a check mark for the melodies to be operated
i(
Delete . See Delete this on page 352. Copy . See page 352. Move . See page 353. Select all . You can select all melodies. Release all . You can release all selected melodies. You can change displayed order.
Select an order. pYou cannot sort the files on the microSD card. You can move the melody to another folder.
Select a destination folder
Put a check mark for melodies to be movedl(
YES pPress l(
lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level. pFor the microSD card, you do not need to put a check mark for
) to display folders at the second-tier level or
) the melodies. Move to microSD See page 361. Information
<Edit file name>
pWhen the icon of the acquired source is or and the icon such as or is displayed for that melody, you cannot change the file name. pYou cannot use some characters such as symbols for a file name.
<File restriction>
pYou can set the file restrictions only to the melody with the acquired source icon
. pWhen the melody file exceeds 100 Kbytes by applying the restriction, you cannot set the file restrictions. Information
<Attach to mail>
pYou cannot attach the melody with or
, or the melody in excess of 100 Kbytes, whose acquired source icon is or
<Melody info>
pYou may not be able to attach to i-mode mail even when the file restriction in the melody information is File unrestricted.
<Delete>
pWhen a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default.
(When the melody is set for an alarm tone of Schedule, ToDo, or Book program, or for Alarm, it switches to Clock Alarm Tone.) pYou cannot delete the pre-installed melody. Function Menu of the Melody Playback Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Set as ring tone See page 352. Add desktop icon See page 127. Attach to mail See page 352. Melody info See page 352. Copy to microSD See page 359. Copy to phone See page 360. Play all/
Play portion You can temporarily switch the play start positions of the melody. 353 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t Function Menu while Kisekae Tool File is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title Preview Set at one time File info See page 331. You can preview the Kisekae Tool file. You can set the Kisekae Tool file at one time. (See page 121) pYou can set the Kisekae Tool file at one time also by pressing l. You can display the title, file name, and others of the Kisekae Tool file. Move to microSD See page 361. Move to phone See page 361. Reset title Move Delete this Delete all You can reset the title to the default.
YES See page 332. See page 332. You can delete all files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Multiple-choice See page 333. Memory info You can check the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Sort Listing See page 333. You can change the displayed contents for the Kisekae Tool list.
Title or Image pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c(
Kisekae Tool list.
) from the t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i
<Kisekae Tool>
Checking Kisekae Tool You can check the details on Kisekae Tool files. pYou can delete the pre-installed Kisekae Tool file. You can re-download it from the P-SQUARE site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to it. 1 mData boxKisekae Tool
Select a Kisekae Tool fileSelect an item. Selected image, ring tone or illumination are played back as a demo. If you select a color theme, the display is displayed in selected color theme. pEach time you press m from the Kisekae Tool list, you can switch between the list in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. In the Folder list on the microSD card, you can display the Kisekae Tool list by selecting a folder. Detailed Kisekae Kisekae Tool list Tool display pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image. Cannot be played back No preview image pWhen you select a Chara-den image in a Kisekae Tool file, you can press i(
pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode.
) to use the Function menu of the Chara-den display (see page 350). Information pYou cannot set Kisekae Tool files on the microSD card at a time. pClock display cannot be played back as a demo. 354 About microSD Card You need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions related to the microSD card. The microSD card is available at mass retailers for home electric appliances etc. pFOMA P906i supports a commercial microSD card of up to 2 Gbytes and microSDHC card of up to 4 Gbytes (As of March 2008). For the latest operation check information such as the memory capacity and manufacturers of microSD cards, access the following sites (Japanese only). Note that the microSD cards other than published in the sites might not correctly work. From i-mode to P-SQUARE (As of March 2008) iMenu (Menu/Search)
(Mobile Phone Maker) P-SQUARE From personal computershttp://panasonic.jp/mobile/
Note that the published information is the result obtained from the operation check, which does not necessarily guarantee all performances of those microSD cards. QR code for accessing the site Information pNote that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card. pIf you read/write data from/on a microSD card using a device other than this FOMA phone, the microSD card might become unusable depending on the device or operations. pWhen you insert a microSD card which has been used with another device such as a personal computer into FOMA P906i, new files and folders to be used in FOMA P906i are created. Inserting/Removing microSD Card Inserting 1 Open the cover of the microSD card slot. pDuring processing of the card, is displayed. During processing of the card, never remove the microSD card, or turn off the FOMA phone. Check that processing of the card does not go on before turning off the FOMA phone, and then remove the microSD card. pWhen the FOMA phone or microSD card has many data files, it may take longer to access the files. pFolders and files on the microSD card are recognized up to about 65,500 items. pThe microSD card has an operating life. If you use the microSD card for a long time, you may not be able to write new data on it, or the card may be disabled. pWith the FOMA phone, you can save the downloaded still images, i-motion movies, melodies, Kisekae Tool files, Chaku-uta Full music files, and i-ppli programs with the file restrictions to the microSD card. You cannot save the files IPs (Information Providers) do not permit. Information pYou may not be able to use the microSD card formatted using a personal computer and other devices. Be sure to use the microSD card formatted with FOMA P906i. 2 Face the front surface of the microSD card upwards and insert the card. pPush it until it clicks. 3 Close the cover of the microSD card slot. 355 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Removing 1 Open the cover following step 1 of Inserting and push the microSD card until it stops. pPushing the microSD card inside pops up the card. 2 Remove the microSD card. Icons on the display The following icons appear when you insert the microSD card:
: You can save and read data.
: The microSD card is write-protected. You cannot save data, and execute Check microSD and microSD format.
: You cannot use the microSD card. Remove the microSD card and then insert it again. If is still displayed, execute Check microSD or microSD format. Information pDo not insert or remove the microSD card with the FOMA phone turned on. It may damage the microSD card or its data. pNote that microSD card may pop out when you insert or remove it. pCheck the direction of the microSD card, and then insert or remove it straight. If you obliquely insert the microSD card into the slot, the microSD card may be damaged. pIt may take long to initially read or write data after inserting the microSD card. 356
<SD-PIM>
Displaying Data Items on microSD Card You can display the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks (i-mode/Full Browser) stored on the microSD card. pYou can operate in the same way on the detailed Phonebook display, detailed Mail display, and detailed Bookmark display as when you display data stored in your FOMA phone. See page 101 for detailed operations of the Phonebook. See page 227 for detailed operations of mail. See page 179 for detailed operations of bookmarks. 1 mLifeKitSD-PIMSelect a category. pIf you select Schedule, ToDo items are also displayed. Category list 2 Select a fileSelect a data item. microSD File display
(For Phonebook) Data list
(For Phonebook) Detailed data display
(For Phonebook) Function Menu of the Category List/microSD File Display/
Data List/Detailed Data Display Function menu Edit title Operation/Explanation
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/31 half-pitch characters. Copy Data Items in the FOMA Phone to the microSD Card You can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks stored in the FOMA phone to the microSD card. Copy one to microSD Add to phone See page 358. Overwrite to phone See page 359. Add one to phone See page 358. Add all to phone See page 358. Overwr. all to ph. See page 358. Copy to microSD See page 357. Delete this Delete all
YES You can delete all files in the currently displayed category.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES microSD info See page 363. Property You can display the detailed data display. microSD format See page 362. Check microSD See page 362. Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pWhen the access right is set for read only by devices such as a personal computer, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the data. i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t You can copy a single file from the FOMA phone onto the microSD card. A copied data item is saved as a single file. You cannot copy the secret code stored in a Phonebook entry. 1 Display for a data item to be copiedi(
Copy to microSDYES
) Copy all to microSD You can copy the data items of the category selected on the Category list or of the category displayed on the microSD File display from the FOMA phone to the microSD card. The copied data items are all saved as a single file. You cannot copy secret codes or voice dial entries stored in the Phonebook entries. 1 Category list/microSD File displayi(
Copy to microSD
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pTo copy scheduled events, select Schedule, ToDo, or All (Schedule and
) ToDo). pTo copy bookmarks, select i-mode, Full Browser, or All (i-mode and Full Browser). Information pWhen you copy a file stored as secret data, the file is copied as an ordinary file. pWhen you copy all files, the files stored as secret data are also copied. pWhen you copy all the Phonebook entries, the information from the PushTalk Phonebook entry and the contents of Own number are also copied. 357 Add to phone You can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA phone. The copied data items are added to the FOMA phone. 1 microSD File displayi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES or Data listi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)Add all to phone
)Add to phone Overwrite all to phone You can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File display to the FOMA phone. Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA phone are overwritten and deleted. 1 Category listi(
)Overwr. all to ph.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES or microSD File displayi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
)Overwr. all to ph.
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information pFor copying mail, some files attached to mail may be deleted depending on file format. pWhen you copy mail containing links to start an i-ppli program, the information about starting the i-ppli program in that mail is deleted. pDuring copying, the FOMA phone is placed in the same status as it is out of the service area. Copy Data Items on the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone t You can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail n messages, text memos, and bookmarks (i-mode/Full Browser) stored on e m the microSD card to the FOMA phone. e pSee page 365 for the number of data items that can be saved to the microSD card. g a n a M You can copy the data item selected on the data list or displayed on the detailed data display to the FOMA phone. Add one to phone 1 Data list/Detailed data displayi(
Add one to phone or Copy to phoneYES
) Add all to phone You can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File display to the FOMA phone. The copied data items are added to the FOMA phone. 1 Category listi(
)Add all to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES or microSD File displayi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)Add all to phone 358 Overwrite to phone You can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA phone. Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA phone are overwritten and deleted. 1 microSD File displayi(
Overwrite to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES or Data listi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
)Overwr. all to ph. Information pIf the memory capacity of the FOMA phone runs short during copying, copying is suspended midway; however, the data already copied is stored. pWhen you perform Add one to phone for a Phonebook entry, any group is not set if the group number or group name stored in the microSD file differs from that stored on the FOMA phone. pThe copied Phonebook entries are also stored in the PushTalk Phonebook. When you overwrite the Phonebook entries, the contents of the PushTalk group are also overwritten. When you execute Add one to phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select YES (select a phone number when multiple phone numbers are stored) to store the entry also to the PushTalk Phonebook. pWhen you overwrite the Phonebook entries, the voice dial entries are deleted. pWhen you copy a mail message with the Outbox or Inbox full, the oldest unprotected mail message is overwritten (the read one for the Inbox). pWhen you execute Add all to phone, you cannot copy the following data:
Schedule events set for the same date and time Bookmarks of the same URL pIf the number of files stored on the microSD card increases, it may take long to read or write data. pDuring copying, the FOMA phone is placed in the same status as it is out of the service area. Copying Still Images, Moving Images, etc. Copy Files from the FOMA Phone to the microSD Card File name and the destination folder are as follows:
Still image
(DCF standard) Still image
(Non DCF standard) Still image
(Deco-mail pictogram) Moving image
(With video) Moving image
(Without video) Melody PDF file The destination folder in the Picture folder PXXXXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) The destination folder in the Image Box folder STILXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) The destination folder in the Decomail-pictograph folder DIMGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) The destination folder in the Movie folder MOLXXX (X denotes an alpha-numeral.) The destination folder in the Other contents folder MMFXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) The destination folder RINGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) The destination folder PDFDCXXX (X denotes a numeral.) Decome-Anime template The destination folder DEATXXXX (X denotes a numeral.) pWhen you copy or move a file between the FOMA phone and the microSD card, its file format might change. 1 Still Image list/Still image in play/Moving Image list/
Melody list/Melody during playback/PDF File list/
Decome-Anime Template listi(
Copy to microSD pIf you have used Multiple-choice to select files to be copied, you can copy the
) multiple files at a time. Information pYou can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF and Decome-Anime template files in the i-mode folder, Camera folder, Decomail-picture folder, Decomail-pictograph folder and a user folder. 359 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information Information pYou can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files at a time but not others. pWhen the files in the destination folder are stored to the maximum, a new folder is automatically created and files are saved to that folder. For the files other than still images or Decome-Anime template, the message Storage is changed to XXXXXXX
(XXXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears when copying is completed. pYou can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF and Decome-Anime template files. However, you cannot copy a melody and a SWF file in excess of 100 Kbytes. pYou can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files only at a time. However, you cannot copy multiple moving images of ASF format, VGA (640 x 480) and HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size, or in excess of 10 Mbytes. pWhen you copy moving images, the images are cut out, converted or shrunk;
therefore the image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger or smaller. However, a moving image whose video codec is H.264 is copied without being converted or shrunk. pWhen you copy VGA (640 x 480) size or HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size of a moving image, the image is converted into QVGA (320 x 240) size. When you copy VGA (640 x 480) size or HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size of a moving image, ASF file, or the file in excess of 10 Mbytes, it might take a longer time. pYou cannot copy the moving image in excess of 10 Mbytes in the following cases:
When the video codec is H.264 When the audio codec is AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), or Enhanced aacPlus When the bit rate of the moving image is in excess of the restriction When searching (fast forward or fast rewind) is disabled When the moving image size is other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide
(640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240), QCIF (176 x 144) or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) Some moving images cannot be copied in the conditions other than the above. pPlaying back a copied ASF file may take a longer time. pThe file after copying takes the title of the one set on the microSD card. When no title is set on the microSD card or the default title is unknown, the file name will be the title. pYou cannot copy the following files:
Files that you shot Chara-den models whose Rec. file restriction is File restricted Files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited Pre-installed Deco-mail pictures Files set with playback restrictions Partially saved i-motion movies or Chaku-uta Full music files PDF files partially downloaded page by page pIf you copy the file to the microSD card, the image quality may deteriorate or the file size becomes larger. Copy Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone You can copy files from the microSD card to the i-mode folder in the FOMA phone.
(Deco-mail pictograms are copied to the (Favorite) folder in the Decomail-pictograph folder and Decome-Anime templates are copied to the Phone folder.) 1 Still Image list/Still image in play/Moving Image list/
Moving image in pause/Moving image at the end of playback/Melody list/Melody during playback/PDF File list/Decome-Anime Template list, which is on the microSD cardi(
)Copy to phone pIf you have used Multiple-choice to select files to be copied, you can copy the multiple files at a time. pSee page 186 when images/i-motion movies/melodies/PDF files are stored to the maximum. Information pDo not pull out the microSD card during copying. 360
<Movable Contents>
Moving Copyrighted Files Move Files in the FOMA Phone to the microSD Card You can move the copyrighted file obtained from a site to the microSD card after encoding. The moved file is then saved to the destination folder in the Movable contents folder (the specified destination folder for Chaku-uta Full music files). Some files you moved to the microSD card can be operated only with the UIM you used when moving, and some files can be operated with the UIM and the phone you used when moving. 1 Still image list/Moving image list/Melody list/Kisekae Tool list/Chaku-uta Full Music listi(
Move to microSDOK
) Information pYou can move a file to the microSD card only when the acquired source icon is pPartially saved i-motion movies, Chaku-uta Full music files and Kisekae Tool files
. cannot be moved to the microSD card. pThe setting is released if you move a file set for another function. Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone You can move a copyrighted file from the microSD card to the i-mode folder in the FOMA phone. 1 Still Image list/Moving Image list/Melody list/Kisekae Tool list/Chaku-uta Full Music list, which is on the microSD cardi(
)Move to phone pSee page 186 for when files are stored to the maximum. Information pYou can move a copyrighted file (with file restriction) to the FOMA phone only if its property for Moved to phone is Available or Available (Same model). In addition, you cannot move a file of Available (Same model) to the FOMA phone other than P906i. See Picture info, imotion info, Melody info, File info, or Music info to check whether the file is Available, Unavailable or Available (Same model). pThe setting is released if you move a file set for another function. pThe moved files are saved to the i-mode folder. However, the Kisekae Tool files are saved to the Kisekae Tool folder and Chaku-uta Full music files are saved to the Initial folder in Data Box. Move i-ppli in the FOMA Phone to the microSD Card Some i-ppli programs can be moved to and saved to the microSD card. You cannot start the i-ppli program moved to the microSD card. Move it back to your FOMA phone to start. However, some i-ppli programs can be operated only with the UIM you used when moving, and some other programs can be operated only with the UIM and the phone you used when moving.
)Move to microSDYES 1 Software listi(
Move i-ppli from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone You can move an i-ppli program from the microSD card to the FOMA phone. i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t 1 Software listi(
)Move to phoneYES 361
<SD Other Files>
Managing Unsupported Files You can save a variety of files which are not supported by the FOMA phone, or files in BMP and PNG format obtained by Full Browser, to the microSD card. (See page 217 and page 316) You can attach the saved files to an i-mode mail message to send, or check them on a personal computer. 1 mData boxSD other filesSelect a folder. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. pYou cannot display the contents of the file using the FOMA phone. Folder list SD Other File list Function Menu of the SD Other File List Function menu Operation/Explanation See page 331.
<microSD Format>
Formatting microSD Card When you use the microSD card for the first time, you need to format
(initialize) it. Be sure to use FOMA P906i for formatting. The microSD card formatted using other devices such as personal computers may not be used properly. Note that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card. 1 mLifeKitSD-PIMi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)microSD format Information pDo not remove the microSD card during formatting. Malfunction of the FOMA phone or microSD card could result. pIf you press +l(
formatting the microSD card, formatting is canceled. Format it again.
) or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call while pFiles that have been saved to the microSD card whose formatting is suspended becomes unfixed. pYou cannot format the incompatible memory card. pRequired folders are automatically created when you save data to the microSD card You can display the name and type of files. after formatting. You can compose an i-mode mail message with the file attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 332.
). See page 332. See page 332. See page 332.
<Check microSD>
Checking microSD Card You can check and recover the microSD card. 1 mLifeKitSD-PIMi(
YES
)Check microSD t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Edit title File info Attach to mail Copy Move Delete this Delete all Multiple-choice See page 333. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). 362 Information pDo not remove the microSD card during Check microSD. Malfunction of the FOMA phone or microSD card could result. pYou cannot execute Check microSD for the unformatted microSD card or incompatible memory card. pWhen you execute Check microSD, the microSD card may not be recovered correctly, the data existed before executing Check microSD may be deleted, or the microSD card itself may be initialized depending on the condition of the microSD card. pIf you press +l(
Check microSD, Check microSD is canceled.
) or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call during pIf you cancel Check microSD midway, data not recovered may remain. In this case, try Check microSD again. pIt may take long to complete Check microSD depending on the data volume stored on the microSD card.
<microSD Info>
Displaying Capacity of microSD Card You can display the used and unused memory space (estimate) on the microSD card. pSee page 333 for checking the used memory space for the still images or moving images. 1 mLifeKitSD-PIMi(
Information
)microSD info pAs the microSD card contains the system files for the card, the memory space is smaller than that described on the microSD card even if it contains no data. Using a microSD Card with a Personal Computer By connecting the microSD card to the microSD card adapter, you can use the microSD card on a personal computer which supports SD card. The microSD card adapter is available at mass retailers for home electric appliances etc. For installing the microSD card adapter, refer to the instruction manual for the microSD card adapter. Use FOMA Phone as microSD Reader/Writer With a microSD card inserted, connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer; then you can read the data from or write the data onto the microSD card. The following equipment is required:
pConnector Cable: FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) pPersonal Computer: Personal computer having the USB port (Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev 1.1 compliant) that can be connected with the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) pCompatible Operating Systems: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista
(Japanese version in each) 1 mSettingsOther settingsUSB mode setting
microSD mode pWhen you set to microSD mode, pTo save WMA files from your personal computer to the microSD card, set to appears on the Stand-by appears on the Stand-by display. MTP mode. When you set to MTP mode, display. pTo use the FOMA phone for packet communication, 64K data communication, data sending/receiving (OBEX communication), and for calls with USB Hands-free compatible device, set mode to Communication mode. 2 Connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option). The personal computer recognizes the microSD card. p appears on the Stand-by display. appears on the desktop, and Also, is displayed while the microSD card is in the FOMA phone. 363 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information pIf the FOMA phone and personal computer are not correctly connected, or the remaining battery level of the FOMA phone shows very low or goes flat, you cannot send or receive data. In addition, you may lose data. pWhile data is being read or written, do not pull the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 off. Not only you cannot send or receive data, but also you may lose the data. pWhile data is being read or written, you cannot set this function. Further, make sure that you do not Reset settings or Initialize during reading/writing. Malfunction of the microSD card could result. pYou cannot read from/write to a personal computer while reading from/writing to the FOMA phone, and vice versa. pTo use the DoCoMo keitai datalink, set it to Communication mode. Folder Configuration on microSD Card The FOMA phone creates the following folders on the microSD card to save data files. To write files to the microSD card from a personal computer, you need to write the following configuration and file names. DCIM (Folder for DCF standard still images) _PANA Pzzzz.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.) MISC [DPOF folder (This folder is created automatically when DPOF setting on page 379 is set.)]
SD_VIDEO (Folder for moving images) PRL (Folder for movies) MOL.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.) MGR_INFO (Folder for video management information) PRG (Folder for videos) 364 PRIVATE DOCOMO STILL (Folder for non-DCF standard still images) SUD STILzzzz.### (Extension is JPG, GIF, or SWF.) DOCUMENT (Folder for PDF files) PUD PDFDC.PDF RINGER (Folder for melodies) RUD RINGzzzz.### (Extension is MLD, or SMF.) TORUCA (Folder for ToruCa files) TRC TORUC.TRC MMFILE [Folder for non-SD-VIDEO standard moving images (include music data of AAC format)]
MUD MMFzzzz.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.) WM_SYSTEM WM DECOIMG (Folder for Deco-mail pictograms) DUD DIMGzzzz.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.) OTHER (Folder for SD other files) OUD OTHER.### (Extension is up to three-digit half-pitch alphabets that the FOMA phone cannot recognize.) MOVIE (Folder for PC movie files) MVUD MOVIE.### (Extension is WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, or ASX.) DECO_A_T (Folder for Decome-Anime template) DTUD DEATZZZZ.VGT TABLE (Folder for additional information) MEIGROUP PMC DOCUMENT (Folder for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files) DOC DOCDC.### (Extension is XLS, DOC, or PPT.) TABLE DOCUMENT SD_PIM (Folder for Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks) PIM.### (Extension is VCF for Phonebook entries, VCS for schedule events and ToDo items, VMG for mail messages, VNT for text memos, and VBM for bookmarks.) SD_AUDIO (Folder for SD-Audio) SD_BIND (Folder for i-ppli or movable contents) SVC
: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 100 through 999 (Use the same numerals for the folder name, and for the file name saved to that folder.)
: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 001 through 999
: A hexadecimal numeral of 001 through FFF using half-pitch numerals of 0 through 9 and half-pitch alphabets of A through F
: A five-digit half-pitch numeral of 00001 through 65535 and : Hexadecimal numerals of 0001 through FFFF using half-pitch numerals of 0 through 9 and half-pitch alphabets of A through F zzzz: A four-digit half-pitch numeral of 0001 through 9999
###: Extension The hexadecimal numerals are carried up every 16, unlike the way the decimal numerals are carried up every 10. pUsing a personal computer, you can write a file name of up to 64 bytes (including extension) of free characters for a PDF file, SD other file, PC movie file, Word file, Excel file and PowerPoint file. However, the file name might change when the file is copied or moved in the FOMA phone. The number of files and time that can be saved to the microSD card File Still image (DCF standard) Still image (Non-DCF standard) Moving image (Movie) Moving image (Video) Moving image (Non-SD-VIDEO standard) PC movie file Melody PDF file Word, Excel, PowerPoint file Folder DCIM STILL SD_VIDEO SD_VIDEO MMFILE MOVIE RINGER DOCUMENT PMC Number of savable files/time See page 152. Approx. 58,390 See page 154. 99 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 File SD-Audio ToruCa file Deco-mail pictogram Decome-Anime template SD other file Phonebook entry, schedule event, ToDo item, mail message, text memo, bookmark i-ppli Movable contents Folder SD_AUDIO TORUCA DECOIMG DECO_A_T OTHER Number of savable files/time 999 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 Approx. 58,390 SD_PIM Approx. 58,390 SD_BIND SD_BIND Approx. 58,390 pThe number of savable files and time for saving vary depending on the memory capacity of the microSD card. You can save more files by adding folders to save files to. pYou might not be able to save the maximum number of files depending on the file size. pYou can check used and unused space of the microSD card by microSD info. Information pFolder and file names may be displayed in lowercase characters depending on the personal computer you use. pWhen the personal computer is set not to display extensions and hidden folders, change the setting and then operate. For how to change the setting, refer to the instruction manual for your personal computer or Help. pDo not use the personal computer to delete or move the folders on the microSD card. The microSD card might not be read by FOMA P906i. pYou cannot see the files in the SD_AUDIO, SD_BIND and PRG folders on a personal computer, as they are encrypted. pWhen you save data in the PRG folder by using a personal computer, you might not be able to delete the video using the FOMA phone. pWhen you delete, overwrite, or write a file on a personal computer, ensure that you do not use the same file name you have once used. Even when you have deleted that file, use a different file name. pOn the FOMA phone, you might not be able to display or play back a data item which was saved to the microSD card from other devices. On other devices, you might not be able to display or play back a data item which was saved to the microSD card from the FOMA phone. 365 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Information pTo procure a microSD reader/writer or PC card read adapter, inquire respective manufacturers for the operation of microSD card beforehand. Managing Folders My picture, MUSIC, imotion, Melody, My documents, Kisekae Tool (SD), PC Movie, Document viewer, and SD other files in Data Box manage files in the respective folders. pSee page 397 for folder operations of MUSIC. pEven when the files in the Movable contents folder are listed, the Function menu in the Folder list is displayed. Function Menu of the Folder List Function menu Add folder Edit folder name Operation/Explanation You can create a user folder.
Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in the FOMA phone. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for a folder in the Movable contents folder. You can edit the name of a user folder, or a folder in the Decomail-pictograph folder in the FOMA phone.
Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in the FOMA phone. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for a folder in the Movable contents folder. Delete folder You can delete a user folder and all files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Function menu Folder security
[My picture/
imotion]
DEL all frm folder
[My picture only]
Edit playlist
[Melody only]
Release playlist
[Melody only]
Select storage Information Operation/Explanation You can set the folder to open only when you enter your Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES The folder changes to pTo release it, perform the same operation. You can delete all the files in the folder selected in i-mode, Camera, Decomail-picture, Decomail-pictograph, and user folder in My picture.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can select up to 10 melodies and program them in order as you like. This is displayed while you are selecting Playlist.
Select a playing order from <1st> through <10th>
Select a folderSelect a melody. pTo release a programmed melody, select Release this.
Repeat the operations and complete the playlist editing
l(
You can release all the programmed melodies from the playlist. This is displayed while you are selecting Playlist.
YES You can set the destination folder for when you save the shot still/
moving images or the melodies and PDF files obtained by downloading or data communication to the microSD card.
YES
<Add folder>
pYou can add up to 20 folders in the FOMA phone. pYou cannot add folders on the microSD card in the following cases:
When the Picture folder contains 900 folders When the Movie folder contains 4,095 folders When 999 folders are contained in the Image Box, Decomail-pictograph, Melody, Other contents, My documents, Document viewer, or SD other files. 366 Information
<Edit folder name>
pYou cannot edit the Folder-Security-activated folder name.
<Delete folder>
pWhen a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default.
(When the melody is set for an alarm tone of Schedule, ToDo or Book program, or for Alarm, it switches to Clock Alarm Tone.)
<Folder security>
pYou can set it only for i-mode, Camera, User folder, and Voice recorder. pWhen you select a folder with folder security, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears. Enter your Terminal Security Code to temporarily release folder security.
<Edit playlist>
pIf you change or delete the file name, title, or contents of the melody stored in the playlist, all the melodies are released from the playlist.
<Select storage>
pThe following icons are displayed for the folder set as a destination folder:
. The folders in the Picture folder and Movie folder
. The folders in My documents, Document viewer, and SD other files The folders in the Decomail-pictograph folder, Image Box folder, and Melody folder
. The folders in the Movable contents and Kisekae Tool folder
. The folders in the Other contents folder pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again. About Infrared Data Exchange The FOMA phone conforms to IrMC version 1.1 standard. You can exchange data files with the devices supporting the infrared data exchange function. However, you cannot exchange some files depending on the other partys device. pThe distance for infrared data exchange should be within about 20 cm. Do not move the FOMA phone with the infrared data port pointed to the receiving end until data transfer ends. pHold the FOMA phone with your hands securely so that it does not move. pIf you expose the FOMA phone to direct sunlight or put it under fluorescent lights or near an infrared equipment, you may not be able to transmit infrared ray normally due to their influence. pFirst set at the receiving end and begin sending data from the sending end within 30 seconds. pDuring exchange, the FOMA phone is placed in the same state as it is out of the service area, so you cannot make/receive voice calls, videophone calls or PushTalk calls, use packet communication such as i-mode or mail, or do data communication. Within about 20 cm Infrared data port Within 15 from the center 367 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t List of data files you can transfer Storage location and order of received files t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Transferable data Transfer terms One item Multiple items Phonebook (Own number) Schedule1 ToDo Received mail2 Sent mail Draft mail Decome-Anime template Text memo Melody3, 4 Still image file4, 5, 6 Moving image file4, 7 PDF file3, 4, 8 ToruCa file4 Bookmark (i-mode/Full Browser)9 All items Up to 1,000 items Up to 1,000 items Up to 100 items Up to 2,500 items Up to 1,000 items Up to 20 items Up to 20 items Up to 495 items Up to 100 items each for i-mode and Full Browser LCS client information
: Can be transferred 1 You cannot send/receive holidays and anniversaries. 2 You can send/receive up to 30 Area Mail messages separately. (2,530 messages in
: Cannot be transferred Up to 5 items total) 3 You cannot send/receive some files. 4 The file is sent/received after being converted to the vnt file. 5 Includes Flash movies. 6 You cannot send/receive original animations and still images recorded by 1Seg. 7 You cannot send/receive ASF files and videos recorded by 1Seg. 8 The i-mode bookmarks may be deleted. 9 When sending/receiving bookmarks, the folder-sort setting may not be reflected. 368 Data Storage location/Order Phonebook
(Own number) receive one data The phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory number in 010 through 999 in the Phonebook. If all memory numbers 010 through 999 are occupied, the phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory numbers in 000 through 009 (two-touch dial). receive all data Stored in the same memory number as that of the sender. Schedule receive one data Stored with the starting date/time of the schedule event. receive all data Stored with the same date and time as those of the sender. ToDo receive one data Stored on the top in the ToDo list. receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender. Received mail receive one data Stored in the Inbox folder on the Inbox Folder list with the same date and time as that of the sender. receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the same date and time. Sent mail receive one data Stored in the Outbox folder on the Outbox Folder list with the same date and time as that of the sender. receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the same date and time. Draft mail receive one data Stored with the same date and time as that of the sender. receive all data Stored with the same date and time as that of the sender. Decome-
Anime template receive one data Stored on the top in the Phone folder in Decome-Anime in Template inside Mail. Text Memo receive one data Stored in the first <Not recorded>. receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the top of the list. Melody receive one data Stored on the top in the i-mode folder in Melody inside Data box. Data Storage location/Order Information Still Image file Moving Image file receive one data/
receive multiple data receive one data/
receive multiple data Stored on the top in the i-mode folder in My picture inside Data box. Stored on the top in the i-mode folder in imotion inside Data box. PDF file receive one data Stored on the top in the i-mode folder in My documents inside Data box. Stored on the top in the ToruCa folder. ToruCa file receive one data/
receive multiple data receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the same order. Bookmark receive one data Stored on the top in the Bookmark folder each for i-
mode and Full Browser. pDepending on the mobile phone at the receiving end, subjects of i-mode mail messages cannot be received completely. pThe mail message with an attached file which has not been obtained, or the mail message containing the link information for starting an i-ppli program is sent after the file or information is deleted. pWhen the maximum number of storable received mail messages (see page 537) is exceeded, the messages are overwritten in the following order; messages in the Trash box folder the oldest received message. pWhen the maximum number of storable sent mail messages (see page 537) is exceeded, the oldest unprotected mail message in the Outbox folder is overwritten. pWhen the Decome-Anime template contains a file whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited, the mail message is sent after the file or text data is deleted. pWhen you send a ToruCa file (details) using infrared rays, the confirmation display appears asking whether to forward the file including the detailed information. In this case, select YES to send it with the detailed information, or select NO to send the ToruCa file as a file before obtaining the detailed information. pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the prohibited is sent as a ToruCa file before obtaining the detailed information. LCS client information same order. receive one data Stored in the first <Not stored>. receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the top of the list. Information pYou cannot send the following files:
Files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited Partially saved files Pre-installed Deco-mail pictures Phonebook entries and SMS messages on the UIM pYou cannot send the files on the microSD card. Copy or move to the FOMA phone and then send. pYou can send and receive up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters for a title of a still image, moving image, or PDF file, or up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for a title of a melody. pWhen you send a mail message, the file attached to the mail message is also sent. However some files cannot be sent depending on the file type. pYou cannot receive Phonebook entries while Restrict Dialing is activated. At sending, you can send only the Phonebook entries set with Restrict Dialing and data of Own Number. pIt may take long to forward data or you might not be able to receive data depending on the data size. pYou cannot store a still image in excess of 2 Mbytes, moving image in excess of 10 Mbytes, melody in excess of 100 Kbytes, PDF file in excess of 2 Mbytes, Decome-Anime template in excess of 100 Kbytes, ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte, or ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes. pIf the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) is connected to the FOMA phone, you may not be able to perform infrared data exchange. pYou cannot send files that are not supported by the device at the receiving end. 369 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data Files You can send/receive the data files one by one using infrared rays. You can send/receive multiple still images, moving images, and ToruCa files at a time. Notes on sending/receiving pIn Secret Mode, you can send secret data as well. However, in Secret Data Only, you can send only the secret data. pIf you receive a Phonebook entry stored as secret data in Secret mode or Secret data only, the Phonebook entry is stored as an ordinary one. pWhen sending a Phonebook entry, you cannot send the stored secret code and voice dial entry. Send One or Multiple Data Files 1 Display for a data item to be senti(
Send Ir data pTo send a Phonebook entry, select Send Ir data from the Function menu and
) select Send phonebook. pTo send a mail message, ToruCa file or bookmark, select Ir/
transmission from the Function menu and select Send Ir data. pTo send multiple files, select the files you want to send by Multiple-choice. Press i(
) to select Send Ir data. 2 YES send them. pTo send multiple files, select YES by a factor of selected number of files, and Receive One or Multiple Data Files 1 mLifeKitReceive Ir data pYou can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop. (See page 127)
+m-7-9 370 2 ReceiveYES pWhen you receive Phonebook entries, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store them also in the PushTalk Phonebook. pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to continue receiving after receiving one data file. When you received multiple files, select YES. Information pWhen you receive an instruction for starting a software program, and you have already downloaded a compatible software program, that software program starts. If you have not put a check mark for Ir ippli To of Set ippli To, the software program does not start up automatically. Sending/Receiving All Data Files You can send/receive the following data files all at once using infrared rays: the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, text memos, bookmarks, mail messages, ToruCa files, and LCS client information. To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digit number). The receiving end needs to enter the same session number. Notes on sending/receiving all data files pReceiving all data files deletes all data you have stored including the secret data and protected data, and the received data overwrites the existing data. The data you have stored in Secret mode is deleted as well. Check that no important data is stored before receiving all data files. pIf you send all Phonebook entries, the Own number data is also sent. All the data of Own number at the receiving end is overwritten except the own number. Mail address is also overwritten by senders address, so change it at the receiving end. pIf you send all Phonebook entries, PushTalk Phonebook entries are also sent. Information of voice dial entries are not sent. pThe Phonebook entries stored as secret data are sent not only during Secret Mode but also any other time. The sent secret data is stored as secret data at the receiving end, too. pThe group names in the Phonebook you have received are stored, so the data set in Group setting is also overwritten. pNote that the schedule events at the receiving end are all deleted if you send all ToDo items to the phone that does not support ToDo. pYou can send/receive the protected sent/received mail messages. Send All Data Files 1 Display for a data item to be senti(
Send all Ir dataEnter your Terminal Security Code. pTo send the Phonebook entries, select Send Ir data from the Function menu
) and select Send all phonebook. pTo send mail messages, ToruCa files or bookmarks, select Ir/
transmission from the Function menu and select Send all Ir data. 2 Enter the session numberYES pEnter any four-digit number as the session number.
+m-7-9 Receive All Data Files pYou can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop. (See page 127) 1 mLifeKitReceive Ir data 2 Receive allEnter your Terminal Security Code
Enter the same session number as that entered at the sending endYESYES The stored data is deleted, then receiving starts. Information pWhen you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored or mail to which files are attached, and the multiple same still images or files are found, only one image or file is stored. Using Infrared Remote-controller Function You can use the FOMA phone as a TV remote-controller by starting the i-ppli program. pTo use remote-control devices, you may need to download the software program for those devices. [The pre-installed G (G Guide Program List Remote-controller) supports the infrared remote-controller function.] The key operation for the remote-controller differs depending on the software program. pThis function does not work with some devices. pCommunication might be affected by compatible devices and the ambient light. pYou cannot use the infrared remote-controller during Self Mode. Infrared Remote-controller pTurn the FOMA phones Infrared data port to the front of a device to be operated. You can operate within about 4 meters away from the device. pThe radiation angle of the infrared rays is within 15 from the center. Within 15 from the center Within about 4 meters Infrared data port
+m-2-6
<Forwarding Image>
Communication Setting For when you forward Phonebook entries using infrared rays, iC communication, SD-PIM, or DoCoMo keitai datalink, you can specify whether to forward the stored still images together. 1 mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Forwarding imageON or OFF i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t 371
<iC Transmission>
About iC Communication iC communication is the function that enables you to send/receive data files to/from another FOMA phone using the FeliCa reader/writer function. You can send/receive data files by overlapping the FeliCa mark of your FOMA phone with that of another FOMA phone supporting the iC communication function. pThe type of files and conditions of forwarding are the same as those of infrared data exchange. (See page 368) However, you cannot send multiple files at a time. pYou cannot execute iC communication while IC card lock is activated. pYou might have difficulty in sending or receiving files depending on the destination FOMA phone. In that case, move a FeliCa mark FeliCa mark or move each side up, down, left, or right. close to or away from the other t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Overlap one anothers FeliCa mark
. Sending/Receiving One Data File You can send/receive the data files one by one using iC communication. pSee Notes on sending/receiving on page 370 as well. Send One Data File pYou cannot use this function during charging. 1 Display of the data to be senti(
transmission pTo send a Phonebook entry, select
) transmission from the Function menu and select Send phonebook. pTo send a mail message, ToruCa file or bookmark, select Ir/
transmission from the Function menu and select transmission. 372 2 YES Receive One Data File 1 Overlap the FeliCa mark at the sending end with that of your FOMA phone while the Stand-by display is shownYES pWhen you receive a Phonebook entry, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it also in the PushTalk Phonebook. Sending/Receiving All Data Files You can send/receive the following data files all at once using iC communication: Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, text memos, bookmarks, mail messages, ToruCa files, and LCS client information. To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digits number). The receiving end needs to enter the same session number. pSee Notes on sending/receiving all data files on page 370 as well. Send All Data Files pYou cannot use this function during charging. 1 Display of the data to be senti(
All
Enter your Terminal Security Code. pTo send the Phonebook entries, select menu and select Send all phonebook. transmission
) transmission from the Function pTo send mail messages, ToruCa files or bookmarks, select Ir/
transmission from the Function menu and select All 2 Enter the session numberYES pEnter any four-digits number as the session number. transmission. Receive All Data Files at the sending end with that of your FOMA phone while the Stand-by display is shown. 1 Overlap the FeliCa mark 2 YESEnter your Terminal Security Code
Enter the same session number as that entered at the sending end. The stored data is deleted, and then receiving starts. Start recording. 2 Press Oo(
3 Press Oo(
4 Press Oo(
). pRecording ends. Voice recorder saving pre-check display appears. pPress m(
) to play back the recorded voice. Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Recording display Information pWhen you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored, and the multiple same still images are found, only one image is stored. Function menu File size setting
<Voice Recorder>
Using Voice Recorder This function is for recording voices. You can record voices in a meeting instead of taking notes. pThis function is the same as the one for when Movie type set is set to Voice in Movie Mode. See page 153 for an estimate of recording time. pYou can play back the saved voice from imotion of Data box. pSee page 153 for the estimate of recordable time. 1 mLifeKitVoice recorder Storage setting
(Store in) Storage setting
(Auto save set) Storage setting
(File restriction) Memory info Operation/Explanation
Select an item. Mail restrictn(S). You can record up to 500 Kbytes. Mail restrictn(L). You can record up to 2 Mbytes. Long time . You can record for a long time. The voice is saved to the microSD card. You can set the storage location for the recorded voice. When you set to Phone, the voice is saved to Voice recorder in the imotion folder. When you set to microSD, it is saved to the folder in Other contents which you set for Select storage.
Phone or microSD You can set whether to automatically save the recorded voice after you finish recording.
ONOFF See page 164. You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Saving Pre-check display Function menu Operation/Explanation Voice Recorder Recording display Play See page 373. 373 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu Operation/Explanation Save See page 373. Attach to mail Store in You can save the recorded voice and attach it to i-mode mail. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
See page 373.
). File restriction See page 164. Cancel You do not save the recorded voice.
<PDF Viewer>
Displaying PDF Files You can display the PDF files saved by downloading from sites. 1 mData boxMy documentsSelect a folder
Select a PDF file. pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. pIf you cannot display a preview image, any of the following images are displayed:
Cannot be displayed Does not support
(PDF file displayed as
) or Does not support
(PDF file displayed as
) pSee page 183 when the PDF file is set with a password. 374 Operations when displaying a PDF file pSee page 375 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Key operation Operation Upper scroll Lower scroll Left scroll Right scroll Bring up key operation guide Zoom in Zoom out Fit page Information Zo Xo Co Vo l 3 1 2 Key operation c9>
m7<
Next page Previous page Search Search next 5 6 4 Search previous Bring up bookmark list 8 8 Add bookmark
(for at least one second) pWhen many files are stored in the FOMA phone or the microSD card, it may take long to access them. It may take long to display the PDF file depending on the PDF file. pA PDF file that contains the complicated design or in the format not compatible with the PDF viewer might not be correctly displayed. pWhen you try to display undownloaded pages while the PDF file partially downloaded is displayed, downloading of the page starts. Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title See page 331. Document info You can display the PDF file name, saved date/time, etc. Attach to mail Send Ir data You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 370.
). transmission See page 372. Folder list PDF File list Function Menu of the PDF File List Function menu Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Copy to microSD See page 359. Copy to phone See page 360. Copy Move See page 332. See page 332. Add desktop icon See page 127. Delete this Delete all See page 332. See page 332. Multiple-choice See page 333. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Sort Listing See page 333. You can change the displayed contents of the PDF File list.
Title or Image pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c(
PDF File list.
) from the Information
<Listing>
pWhen you use Image to display PDF files, they might appear different from the actual images depending on the PDF files. Function Menu while PDF File is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Zoom in Zoom out Go to You can zoom in the PDF file. You can zoom in the PDF file up to 1,000%. You can zoom out the PDF file. You can zoom out the PDF file up to 8%. You can move to another page of the PDF file.
Select the page you want to move to. pIf you select Specified page, enter the page number you want to move to in the page number field, and select OK; then you can access to the specified page. Search Bookmark/mark
(Disp. bookmark) Bookmark/mark
(Add bookmark) Bookmark/mark
(Display mark) Bookmark/mark
(Add mark) View types
(View mode) View types
(Rotate view) You can display the screen in which the specified character string is contained. The point that matches the specified character is marked in yellow green.
SearchSelect the search string field
Enter a character string to be searched for. pYou can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
Put a check mark for search conditions to be specified
l(
pIf you select Search next or Search prev., you can continue
) to search under the same condition. See page 376. You can set a bookmark (i-mode bookmark) for the page currently displayed and can display the desired page easily by selecting the bookmark. You can set up to 10 bookmarks.
Add bookmarkYESSelect the title fieldEnter a title
OK pYou can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters. pSee page 377 when bookmarks are stored to the maximum. See page 377. You can store the currently displayed page number and the position within the page as the mark. You can use the stored mark as the sign of the reference point. You can set up to 10 marks.
Add markYES pSee page 377 when marks are stored to the maximum. You can change display format of the PDF file.
View modeSelect a display format. pIf you select User defined, enter the magnification value in the magnification specification field, and select OK; then you can display the page at the specified magnification. pThe magnification you can specify is 8 through 1,000%. pIf you save a file after changing the display format, it is displayed at the saved magnification next time.
Rotate view90 to right or 90 to left 375 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t Operation/Explanation Information t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Function menu View types
(Page layout) At Viewer start-up Single page View types
(Display link) You can change the display layout of the PDF file.
Page layout
Single page, Continuous or Continuous-facing You can display links set in the PDF file. Internal links (links set in the PDF file displayed), Web To, Mail To, and Phone To/AV Phone To are available for the links.
Display linkSelect a link. pWhen multiple links are found in the display, you can select a link by pressing Bo. pWhen you select an internal link, you can move to the linked page in the PDF file. See page 187 for another link. View types
(Page info ON/OFF) At Viewer start-up Display You can set whether to display the zoom magnification, page number, and scroll bar for displaying the PDF file.
Page info ON/OFFSelect an item
Display or Not display View types
(Document info) See page 374. Save See page 377. Download remain Capture screen Attach to mail You can download all pages of the PDF file which you have not completely downloaded yet such as partially downloaded page by page or failed to be downloaded owing to disconnection of communication midway.
YES You can cut out a part of the display and save it as JPEG image.
Oo(
pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum.
)YESSelect a folder. You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. 376
<Search>
pThe search conditions work as shown below:
Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search. Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a word. Search upward: When you do Search next, you can search backwards to the first page from the start page. Search ? as wildcard: ? mark (half-pitch) entered in the search string field is set for a search condition as a random character. Search in this page: Searches in the currently displayed page only.
<View types (Page layout)>
pYou cannot change the layout of the partial PDF file.
<Capture screen>
pYou might not be able to cut out the display depending on the security setting of the PDF file. Display Bookmark You can list the bookmarks set for the PDF file and the i-mode bookmarks additionally set. By selecting a bookmark, you can display the page for which the bookmark is set. 1 While a PDF file is displayedi(
Bookmark/markDisp. bookmark
Bookmark or i-mode bookmarkSelect a bookmark. pSome bookmarks that have been set beforehand are categorized into tier-levels. Press i(
) to display the bookmarks at the lower level. However, all the bookmarks at the third-tier level or lower are displayed at the third-tier level.
) Function Menu while i-mode Bookmark is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title Delete
(Delete)
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters.
DeleteYES Function menu Delete
(Delete selected) Delete
(Delete all) Operation/Explanation
Delete selected
Put a check mark for bookmarks to be deleted
l(
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES Display Mark You can list the marked pages and positions stored in the PDF file. When you select a mark, you can display the page in which the mark is stored. 1 While a PDF file is displayedi(
Bookmark/markDisplay markSelect a mark.
) Function Menu while the Mark List is Displayed Function menu Delete Delete selected Operation/Explanation
YES
Put a check mark for marks to be deletedl(
YES
) Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Save You can save the PDF files. You can save the newly downloaded pages and added bookmarks/marks. You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537) 1 While a PDF file is displayedi(
)SaveYES The PDF file once saved to the FOMA phone or microSD card is overwritten each time you save it. (The operation in step 2 is not required.) The PDF file that is not saved to the FOMA phone or microSD card is newly saved. pWith the PDF file that was re-downloaded from the first page owing to updating at the servers end, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite the current data. Select YES to overwrite it. Select NO to newly save. 2 Select a destination folder. pSee page 186 when PDF files in the FOMA phone are stored to the maximum. When bookmarks or marks are set to the maximum If you try to add a bookmark or mark to the PDF file for which 10 bookmarks or marks have been set, or if you try to save the PDF file for which 11 or more bookmarks or marks have been set, the confirmation display appears asking whether to add/save the bookmark or mark after unnecessary ones are deleted. 1. YES 2. Select bookmarks/marks to be deletedYES or Put a check mark for bookmarks/marks to be deletedl(
pContinue putting a check mark until appears.
)YES Document Display Settings You can set a display format for when the PDF files are displayed from sites. 1 ii-mode settingsDoc. display settings
Select a display format. 377 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i
<Document Viewer>
Displaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files You can display the Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint files saved to the microSD card. 1 mData boxDocument viewerSelect a folder
Select a file. pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list. Function Menu of the Document List Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit title File info Attach to mail Copy Move Delete this Delete all See page 331. You can display the name and type of files. You can compose an i-mode mail message with the document file attached. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
See page 332.
). See page 332. See page 332. See page 332. Folder list Document list Multiple-choice See page 333. Operations when displaying a document file pSee page 378 for when you operate from the Function menu. Operation Key operation Operation Key operation Upper scroll Lower scroll Left scroll Right scroll Bring up key operation guide Zoom in Zoom out Zo Xo Co Vo l 3 1 Fit page Next page Previous page Search Search next Search previous 2 c9>
m7<
5 6 4 Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate). Function Menu while Document File is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Zoom in Zoom out View types You can zoom in the file. You can zoom in the file up to 1,000%. You can zoom out the file. You can zoom out the file up to 8%. You can change display format of the file.
Select a display format. pIf you select User defined, enter the magnification value in the magnification specification field, and select OK; then you can display the page at the specified magnification. pThe magnification you can specify by User defined is 8 through 1,000%. 378 Function menu Operation/Explanation Go to Search Zoom & page Scroll bar You can move to another page or sheet of the file.
Select the page or the sheet you want to move to. pIf you select Specified page for the Microsoft Word file or Microsoft PowerPoint file, enter the page number you want to move to in the page number field, and select OK; then you can more to the specified page. You can display the screen in which the specified character string is contained. The point that matches the specified character string is highlighted.
SearchSelect the search string field
Enter a character string to be searched for. pYou can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
Put a check mark for search conditions to be specified
l(
pIf you select Search prev. or Search next, you can continue
) to search under the same condition. You can set whether to display the zoom magnification and page number for displaying the file.
Display or Not display You can set whether to display the scroll bar for displaying the file.
Display or Not display Printing Saved Images Select a Method to Print the Images Saved in the microSD Card DPOF is the format for recording the print information about the still image you shot with a digital camera. You can input the information into the still image on the microSD card about whether to print it out and how many copies you print out. You can take the card to DPE service shops or use a DPOF compatible printer to print photos as you specify. 1 Still image in play/Still image listi(
DPOF settingPrint
Enter the number of copies to be printed out. pEnter 01 through 99 in two digits. pTo cancel printing the selected still image, select Print OFF. To cancel printing
) all still images, select All print OFF. Information pThe classification icon of the images set DPOF Setting is pYou can set DPOF Setting for up to 999 image files. pYou cannot set DPOF Setting for the image in excess of 2 Mbytes or 5M (2592 x
. 1944) size. Rotate view
90 to right or 90 to left pIf unused space on the microSD card is not enough, DPOF Setting might not be set. Document info You can display the name and type of files. Information
<Search>
pThe search conditions work as shown below:
Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a word. Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search. Search in this page (Excel file only): Searches in the currently displayed page only. Search in this file (Excel file only): Searches in the whole file.
(The icon and Picture Information, however, indicate DPOF is set.) pStill images shot by P906i also support PRINT Image Matching. 379 i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t
<AV Output>
Displaying Still Images, Moving Images/
i-motion Movies on TV When you connect the FOMA phone to a TV using the Flat-plug AV Output Cable P01 (option), you can display still images, moving images/
i-motion movies, and images during a videophone call, video from 1Seg and from i-ppli on the TV. You cannot display any other images. Connect FOMA Phone to TV Open the cover of the Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal on the FOMA phone and connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to it. Then connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to the video/audio input terminal on the TV. t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Video
(yellow) Audio L
(white) Audio R
(red) Video/Audio input terminal
(yellow) (white)
(red) Flat-plug AV Output Cable Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal Information pBefore connecting or disconnecting the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to and from the device such as a TV, turn off the sound volume of the connected device. pTo pull the plug out, take hold of the plug and then pull it out softly. Display Still Images on TV 1 Play back a still image while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected or connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while a still image is being played back. pPress m(
pYou can press Oo(
can press Oo(
pYou can press No to display a previous or next still image. pEach time you press l(
still image clockwise by 90 degrees.
) to start a slide show. You
) to switch the display size.
), you can rotate the
) again to stop it. pSee page 330 for how to display still images. pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When the playback ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well. Information pAV output is not available in the following cases:
When playing back a still image from any other than the Still Image list or icon pasted to the desktop When playing back a still image from any other than the i-mode folder, Camera folder, user folders, Picture folder (microSD), and Image Box folder (microSD)
, and When displaying a still image whose acquired source icon is or Information pYou can connect to the devices other than TV sets for output. pWhen connecting the Flat-plug AV Output Cable, make sure that you firmly insert it. Do not pull the cable forcibly, twist it by the plug, or apply an excessive force. whose File restriction is File restricted When playing back a Chara-den picture you shot a Chara-den model whose Rec. file restriction is File restricted When playing back a still image in the actual size or by slide show When playing back a Flash movie 380 Information Information pWhen a still image is larger than the VGA (640 x 480) size, it is reduced to VGA (640 pOn some TVs, moving images/i-motion movies may not be displayed correctly when x 480) or smaller with its proportional ratio retained for displaying on the TV. the display size is switched. pOn some TVs, still images may not be displayed correctly when the display size is switched. Display Moving Images/i-motion Movies on TV 1 Play back a moving image/i-motion movie while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected or connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while a moving image/i-motion movie is being played back. pPress m(
pSee page 338 for how to play back moving images/
) to switch the display size. i-motion movies and how to operate during playback. pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well. Display Images during a Videophone Call on TV 1 Make a videophone call while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected or connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable during a videophone call. p pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable appears during AV output. off of the FOMA phone. When the videophone call ends, or another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well. Information pAV output is not available in the following cases:
When the image is played back from any other than the Moving Image list or icon pasted to the desktop When playing back a moving image/i-motion movie whose acquired source icon is Information pYou cannot execute AV output for the images of Remote Monitoring. pThe sensitivity of the microphone is improved during AV output. p
(Hands-free icon) does not appear during AV output. However, the voice is output from the connected device. You cannot switch to Hands-free. i D a t a D s p a y E d i t
l
M a n a g e m e n t or
, and whose File restriction is File restricted When playing back a Chara-den movie you shot a Chara-den model whose Rec. file restriction is File restricted When a moving image/i-motion movie in the Pre-installed folder, or Movable contents folder (microSD) is played back 381 t n e m e g a n a M
l
t i d E y a p s D a t a D i Display Video from 1Seg At 1Seg start-up Released 1 Watch a 1Seg program while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected or connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable during watching a 1Seg program. pTo switch to AV output while the Flat-plug AV Output Display Video from i-ppli 1 Start an i-ppli program while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected or connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while an i-ppli program is running. pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When an i-ppli ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled. Cable is connected, select AV output from the Function menu. pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone or select AV output again from the Function menu. When watching 1Seg programs ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled. Information pAV output still continues even if you close the FOMA phone. However, AV output is not available during pause in Power Saver Mode. pAV output of i-ppli programs is unavailable during Play Background. Information pWhen TV sound while closed is set to ON, AV output still continues even if you close the FOMA phone. pThe caption and data broadcasting are not displayed on TV. pAV output is unavailable during recording. pAV output is unavailable for video or still images recorded by 1Seg. pThe sound during AV output is output from a connected device, so adjusting the sound volume of the FOMA phone cannot change the output sound volume. 382 Music&Video Channel/Music Playback Music&Video Channel What is Music&Video Channel? . 384 Setting Programs . 384 Playing Back/Operating Programs. 386 MUSIC Player Playing Back Music . 390 Saving Music Files. 390 Using MUSIC Player. <MUSIC Player> 392 Using Playlist . 400 Handling Music Files You can use music files saved on the microSD card for personal use only. Before using, give enough consideration not to infringe on the third partys intellectual property rights or other rights such as copyright. 383 What is Music&Video Channel?
Music&Video Channel is a service which automatically delivers up to about one-hour programs at night by just setting your favorite music programs in advance. Further, you can enjoy high-quality moving image program of up to about 30 minutes. Programs are updated periodically and you can enjoy the delivered programs at your convenient time such as on commuting. Before using Music&Video Channel p Music&Video Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. (You need to subscribe to i-mode and Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full to apply for it.) p Other than the service fee for using Music&Video Channel, you might be separately charged an information fee depending on the program. p For the details on Music&Video Channel, refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode]. p If you insert the UIM to the Music&Video Channel incompatible FOMA phone after you subscribe to Music&Video Channel, you cannot use Music&Video Channel Service. Note that the service fee applies unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel subscription. pYou cannot obtain or set programs during international roaming. When you try to obtain or set programs, note that you are charged a packet communication fee for the i-mode communication. Take procedures to halt the distribution of programs before departure to overseas. Then, after homecoming, resume receiving distribution. k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M 384 Setting Programs If you previously set a program that you want to watch, the FOMA phone automatically downloads the program data at night. 1 mMUSICMusic&Video Channel Music&Video Channel display 2 Set programFollow the instructions on the display to set a program. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. pSee page 186 when data files are stored to the maximum. When a program is set appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours before the time the program obtaining starts. However, it does not appear if you have inserted a UIM which is different from the one you used to set the program. Programs are automatically obtained at night. The display for obtaining programs does not appear but appears on the desktop when they are successfully obtained. Press Oo,
, and press Oo(
highlight Music&Video Channel display. When obtaining fails,
) to display the appears. Information pWhen the communication is disconnected during obtaining a program, re-obtaining is automatically tried up to five times by an interval of about three minutes. When a display for obtaining a program is shown, however, the confirmation display appears asking whether to re-obtain the program. pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work to notify that obtaining programs starts or is completed. When you set Music&Video ch illum. of Illumination to ON, the Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining programs is completed. (See page 122) pYou can set up to two programs at once. pNote that a newly obtained program overwrites a saved program and you can no longer play back that saved program afterward. To avoid overwriting, perform Move program to move the program to the Saved program folder. pYou cannot save the obtained program to the microSD card. pTo set programs, you need to register the site which offers Music&Video Channel programs to your My Menu. (See page 177) pIf you have not subscribed to Music&Video Channel, select About this service to see the Music&Video Channel introduction page. pWhen the programs could not be obtained due to power off or low battery at the start time of program obtaining, re-obtaining is performed at night of the following day. pIt may take a time to obtain programs, so fully charge the battery and operate in the good radio wave conditions. pYou cannot perform the setting operation and automatic obtaining of the program selected on the Music&Video Channel display or the program in use. pWhen you cancel Music&Video Channel, the programs other than those moved by Move program are deleted. pIf you insert a UIM which is different from the one you used to set programs, programs cannot be automatically obtained. Set the programs again from the Music&Video Channel display. pWhen you select a service menu for Music&Video Channel and the message Confirm set up information? appears, select YES to delete the programs that have already been distributed. However, they may not be deleted while the distribution of programs is halted. pIf you insert the UIM of the FOMA phone that you have already set programs into another Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA phone, the programs cannot be obtained automatically. Select Set program again from the Music&Video Channel display to automatically update the program setting on the FOMA phone, then the programs can be obtained automatically. Check/Cancel the Set Program 1 Music&Video Channel displaySet program
Follow the instructions on the display. You can check or cancel the set program. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Information pEven if the setting of a program is canceled, My Menu is not deleted. M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k Obtain a Program Manually appears on the Stand-by display when the automatic program obtaining fails or the program is not updated even after the program distribution date. When the automatic obtaining fails, you can manually obtain the program. 1 Music&Video Channel displaySelect a programYES pFor a partially obtained program, select Play to play it back. pFor a program which has not been updated, select Play to play it back. Information pWhen obtaining of a program is suspended, the part of the program obtained up to that point is saved. To obtain remaining part, you can manually obtain it except in some time zones. When a program has been updated or switched to another program, obtaining starts not from the suspended point but from the beginning. pYou cannot re-obtain the program whose playable deadline has expired. Such a program cannot be updated until the next distribution date. pYou may not be able to manually obtain programs depending on the time zone. 385 k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i Playing Back/Operating Programs pYou can enjoy playing back programs in stereo sound by connecting the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy playing back programs wirelessly by using a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431) 1 mMUSICMusic&Video Channel
Select a program. activated, and shifts to pause state during Play Background. pWhile highlighting a program, the next distribution date is displayed while Music&Video Channel is is displayed when the program is displayed under the program name. pWhen information of the previously played program exists, playback starts from the position and/or in the mode accordingly. p Highlight a program and press l(
Chapter list is displayed. pHighlight a program and press m(
to the URL of the program URL information.
); then the
) to connect Music&Video Channel display Operate Music&Video Channel from Data Box You can play back programs also from Data Box. From Data Box, you can play back currently distributed programs as well as the programs that have been distributed in the past and moved to the Saved program. 1 mData boxMusic&Video Channel
Downloaded program or Saved program
Select a program. pYou can switch display format each time you press c(
Program list.
) from the p Any of the following images are displayed when you cannot display the preview images:
Program Folder list Program list s u M No preview Cannot be played back pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second or press h during playback or pause, playing back program ends. Playback restrictions have expired, and the like. images Updating program pYou can use mail functions, display sites, and so on, while listening to music using Music&Video Channel (Play Background). (See page 511 386 About Music&Video Channel Playback display
Program image or program video
(When no images are stored, an animation appears.)
Chapter number/The number of chapters Chapter number only on the Private window
Chapter name/Artist name Program name Playback state Playback time/Total playback time Play mode (No indication for Normal)
: Repeat Equalizer
: Normal
: S-XBS2
: S-XBS1
: Train
When the FOMA phone is closed
Stereo/Monaural
: Stereo
Listening (No indication for OFF)
: Surround
: Natur2
Remaster (No indication for OFF)
: ON
: Monaural
: Natur1
Icon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected)
: Being connected
Sound volume Operation while playing back a Music&Video Channel program Operation Key operation Operation Listening Equalizer Key operation 8 pEach time of pressing switches in order of OFF Surround Natur1 Natur2. 7 pEach time of pressing switches in order of Normal S-XBS1 S-XBS2 Train. You cannot operate during pause. From the Music&Video Channel Playback display, you can do the following operations by using the switch of the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option) or the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option):
pYou can operate them when the FOMA phone is closed as well. Halt Pause Sound volume adjustment Replay next chapter
) or p
) or p to play back l(
Oo(
pOo(
Bo or </>
pPress and hold Bo to adjust the sound volume sequentially. pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available. Vo or >(for at least one second) Operation Pause Replay next chapter Replay previous chapter Switch operation Press once. pTo play back, press again. Press twice in succession. Press three times in succession. pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file. Replay previous chapter Co or <(for at least one second) pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous Icons on the Music&Video Channel display/the Program list The icons on the Music&Video Channel display indicate the download status. chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file. Press and hold Vo. Press and hold Co. Search
(fast forward) Search
(fast rewind) Connect to site m(
Play background c(
Display next image 3 1 Display previous image
) Remaster 9 pEach time of pressing switches between ON and OFF. Icon Description Successfully obtained program Broken program Partially obtained program or unsuccessfully obtained program is added to the newly obtained program. p pSome programs have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or playback period. playback restrictions for the program by Program info. is added to the icon of the program with restrictions expired. You can check the is added to the icon of the program with playback restrictions and pSome programs have restrictions on operation. is added to the icon of the program with operation restrictions. pDepending on the program, its playable time zone is fixed. is added to the icon of the program with time zone restrictions. The time follows the time information obtained from the network. 387 M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k Function menu Operation/Explanation Play mode setting Normal or Repeat pWhen obtaining a periodically-updated program fails, appears to tell the program has not been updated. disappears when obtaining the program starts. pThe file restriction is set to all the Music&Video Channel programs. See page 164 for the file restrictions. Information k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M pThe information of the previously played program is erased if you do the following operations:
When you turn on/off the FOMA phone When you update the program When you delete or move the previously played program pIf you try to play back a program with a low battery, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of Keypad sound. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback. pIn the following cases, playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:
When you make/receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while Receiving display is set to Alarm preferred or the Stand-by display is shown When an alarm tone of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program or Timer recording sounds Depending on the function which occurred, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to end the Music&Video Channel program. pIf a black display appears after you play back a program having time zone restrictions, playback starts at the next playable time zone. pProgram info of a Music&Video Channel program and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by date/time with Summer time set to OFF. Program info Move program Add desktop icon Edit title Reset title Multiple-choice Function Menu of Music&Video Channel Display/Program Folder List/Program List Connect to URL Function menu Chapter list Operation/Explanation You can display the list of chapters set for the program. Select a chapter to play back the selected chapter and afterward. pPress i(
information about the chapter title, playback time, etc.
) and select Chapter info to display the Display image Memory info Delete/Delete this Delete all 388 Normal . Plays back the program once in the order of the chapters. Repeat . Plays back the program repeatedly in the order of the chapters. You can display the program title, distribution source, playback restrictions, etc. Programs currently distributed are updated to new programs on the next distribution date. You can save the current programs by moving them to the Saved program folder before the distributed program is updated. You can check Memory info for unused memory space you can save to. You can save up to 10 programs sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of programs you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537)
YES pSee page 186 when programs are stored to the maximum. See page 127.
Enter a title. pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters. You can reset the title to the default.
YES You can select and delete multiple programs stored in Saved program folder.
Put a check mark for programs to be deletedi(
Delete You can access the URL when the program has the URL information.
YES You can display the program images stored in the program. pPress r to return to the list. You can display the used memory space (estimate). You can delete the program.
YES You can delete all the programs stored in the Saved program folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
) Information Function menu Operation/Explanation
<Play mode setting>
pThe playable mode setting is invalid for the programs having the time zone Sound effect
(Equalizer) restrictions. pEven if you set to Repeat, the program is not played back repeatedly if it has no time zone restrictions but has restrictions on the number of playbacks.
<Move program>
pYou cannot move the program when its obtaining is not completed, or the move restriction or time zone restriction is set for the program.
<Edit title>
pWhen the next program is delivered, the edited title is overwritten by the new title.
<Multiple-choice> <Delete/Delete this> <Delete all>
pEven when you delete the program, the program setting is not released. Function Menu during Playback/Pause Function menu Operation/Explanation Chapter list See page 388. Play mode setting See page 388. Sound effect
(Remaster) Sound effect
(Listening) You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.
RemasterON or OFF You can set sound effect for listening.
ListeningSelect an item. Surround . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic. Natur 1/2 . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste. OFF . Sets Listening to OFF. pNatur 1/2 is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device. You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.
EqualizerSelect an item. Normal. Reproduces normal sound quality. S-XBS1 . Enhances bass sound. S-XBS2 . Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1. Train . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage. See page 388. You can display the title, play time, etc. of the chapter currently played back. Program info Chapter info Connect to URL See page 388. Previous image You can display a previous image. Next image You can display a next image. Change to full You can change the display format of images. Each time of selecting the item switches in order of playback on the vertical display playback on the horizontal display fitted to the display size playback on the enlarged full size display. Information
<Sound effect>
pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are displayed on the display.
<Previous image> <Next image>
pYou can display up to three images, however, you may not be able to display them depending on the program.
<Change to full>
pWhen the music program of voice only or moving image program of QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, you cannot play back on the full size display. pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut. 389 M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M Playing Back Music You can play back music files on your FOMA phone by using MUSIC Player or i-motion player. MUSIC Player (See page 392) By MUSIC Player of MUSIC, you can play back Chaku-uta Full music files or music files saved from music CDs to the microSD card via a personal computer. i-motion Player (See page 338) From the imotion folder in Data box, you can play back the voice-only i-motion movie (including music data of AAC format) or AAC format files stored on the microSD card. pYou can display mail, sites, and so on, while listening to music by MUSIC Player (Play When downloading Chaku-uta Full music file is suspended When you press l(
) to suspend downloading or when the downloading is suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select YES to resume downloading the remaining part. Select NO to show the Obtaining Completion display. Select Save pt. to save it to a folder in i-mode folder in MUSIC in Data box. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from Data box. pThe title name of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full music file takes the date and time when it is downloaded. pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full music file has expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file. Further, the partially saved file is deleted when you save re-obtaining data. Background). (See page 511 Saving Music Files Download Chaku-uta Full Music Files You can download Chaku-uta Full music files from sites. You can save up to 101.6 Mbytes of files including other data files. (See page 536) 1 Bring up a Chaku-uta Full music file downloadable siteSelect a Chaku-uta Full music fileSaveYES pSelect Play to play back the Chaku-uta Full music file. See page 395 for operations while a Chaku-uta Full music file is being played back. pSelect Property to display the Chaku-uta Full music file information. (See page 398) pSee page 186 when Chaku-uta Full music files are Obtaining Completion display stored to the maximum. 2 Select a destination folder. pPress l(
Press r to return to the upper level.
) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they exist. About Uta-hodai Uta-hodai files are the Chaku-uta Full music files you can play back just for a period of the contract with a content provider. The playable deadline is specified in the license information that is downloaded together with the music file. Even when the playable deadline has expired, you can play back the music file by updating the license. pWhen a music file (Chaku-uta Full music file downloaded on the membership service basis) whose playable deadline has expired is found at the start of MUSIC Player, the confirmation display appears asking whether to update the playable deadline. Select YES to update the file (Packet communication fee is charged). Select NO not to use the music file. See page 392 for starting MUSIC Player. pSome Uta-hodai music files are applied with surplus playable days even after the playable deadline has passed. During this period, you can play back files without updating the playable deadline information. When the surplus playable days are over, you cannot play back the files. Also if you download a music file with playable period not updated, you cannot play it back before it is saved. pWhen the upper limit of the (membership) music services you can register is exceeded, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite them. Select YES to overwrite a music service whose playable deadline is the oldest. You can no longer play back the music files downloaded from the overwritten service. pPacket communication fee charged for updating a playable deadline during international roaming is not supported by Pake-Houdai and Pake-Houdai Full. pIf you insert the UIM with a phone number different from the one you used to download Uta-hodai music files, you cannot download/play back the files. When you use Uta-hodai with a new UIM, execute Initialize (see page 433). 390 Information pYou can save up to 5 Mbytes per Chaku-uta Full music file. pWhen the Uta-hodai music file set for the ring tone or alarm tone needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired, the default tone sounds when a call comes in, or an alarm sounds/vibrates. pFor a Chaku-uta Full music file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable deadline, is displayed at the head of the title. If you remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in the FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the Chaku-uta Full music file that has restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See Music info for checking the playback restrictions. pMusic info of a Chaku-uta Full music file and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by the date/time with Summer time set to OFF. pPartially saved Chaku-uta Full music files cannot be played back from Data Box. Save WMA Files You can use Windows Media Player 10/11 to save Windows Media Audio (WMA) files from a personal computer to the microSD card. You can save up to 600 WMA files. pAs well as music files, you can save playlists, jacket images, and license keys. 2 Use the FOMA phone as reader/writer Set USB mode setting to MTP mode. (See page 363) 3 Save music files to the microSD card Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save WMA files to the microSD card. pYou cannot save WMA files to the FOMA phone. pFor how to operate Windows Media Player 10/11, refer to Help for Windows Media Player 10/11. pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA phone. When you remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02, remove it after finishing the software in use. About the Napster Application You have the ability to save music files using the Napster application. pPlease download the Napster application from the following web page:
http://www.napster.jp/ (Japanese only) pIf you have any questions about the Napster application, refer to the following web page:
http://www.napster.jp/support/ (Japanese only) 1 Prepare devices required for saving WMA files Information M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k First, prepare the devices required for saving WMA files. pFOMA P906i pmicroSD card pFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) pPersonal computer with Windows Media Player 10 (10.00.00.3802 or later)/11 installed When you use Windows Media Player 10/11 in Windows XP, use Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later. When you use Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11. pBefore connecting the FOMA phone to a personal computer, you need to check the version of Windows Media Player. pDo not remove the microSD card during saving a file. You may lose the file. pMusic files and jacket images are saved to PRIVATE/DOCOMO/MMFILE/WM/ on the microSD card. pThe WMA files saved to the microSD card using another FOMA phone might not be recognized by the FOMA P906i. Further, the files might not be recognized by the FOMA P906i even when it is connected to the personal computer with USB mode setting set to MTP mode. In that case, delete WM folder and WM-SYSTEM folder on the microSD card by using your personal computer, or format the microSD card (see page 362). Note that not only music files but also all the other files are deleted when the microSD card is formatted. 391 k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M 2 Install SD-Jukebox Install SD-Jukebox on the personal computer. 3 Use the FOMA phone as reader/writer Set USB mode setting to microSD mode. (See page 363) 4 Save music files to the microSD card Start SD-Jukebox and set a music CD on the personal computer. Then use SD-Jukebox to save music files to the microSD card. pFor how to operate SD-Jukebox, refer to Help for SD-Jukebox. pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA phone.
<MUSIC Player>
Using MUSIC Player You can play back Chaku-uta Full music files obtained from sites or music files saved to the microSD card. To play back music files, select MUSIC Player from MUSIC on Main Menu. Play Background is available so that you can use mail functions, display sites, and so on, while listening to music. To manage folders or data files, select MUSIC from Data box on Main Menu. pNote that battery consumption will be faster when you use MUSIC Player. pYou can enjoy playing back music in stereo sound by connecting the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy listening to music wirelessly by using a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431) pIf the number of stored files increases, it may take long to start MUSIC Player. Information pWhen you add or delete the WMA files on the microSD card repeatedly, the size of license files might become large, and memory space on the microSD card might become low. In this case, you can delete the license files. You cannot play back the necessary WMA files of license if you delete the license files. To play back, delete the WMA files of the pertinence as well, connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer, and save WMA files again. pWhen unused memory space on the microSD card becomes 300 Kbytes or less, the card might not be recognized by a personal computer. Check the unused memory space on the microSD card, and delete unnecessary data files if the unused memory space is 300 Kbytes or less, then connect to the personal computer after setting USB mode setting to MTP mode. Save Music Files by Using SD-Audio By using SD-Jukebox (commercial item), you can save the music files on the music CDs to the microSD card as AAC format data. pBy using the microSD card adapter (option), you can save music files to the microSD card directly from a personal computer as well. The following steps are an example for when the FOMA phone is used as a microSD reader/writer for saving music files. About SD-Jukebox You can purchase SD-Jukebox from the web page below:
http://www.sense.panasonic.co.jp/PanaSense/special/soft/sd_jukebox/ (Japanese only) pFor details about operating environments, refer to the web page below:
http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/ (Japanese only) 1 Prepare devices required for saving music files First, prepare the devices required for saving music files. pFOMA P906i pmicroSD card pFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) pPersonal computer (Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Vista) pSD-Jukebox (commercial item) pMusic CD you want to save 392 Play Back Music Files 1 Press and hold p for at least one second. The Player Menu display appears. pThe playback display (in pause state) of the previously Player Menu display played music file appears when the information about it remains. You can display the playback display also by pressing and holding p for at least one second with the FOMA phone closed. 2 Select an item. card. All tracks. Displays all the music files saved on the FOMA phone and microSD Artist . Displays all the artist names. Highlight the name of the artist you want to listen to and press Oo(
displayed. (Go to Album) Album . Displays all the albums.
), then all the album names of the selected artist are Genre. Displays all the genres. Highlight the name of the album you want to listen to and press Oo(
Highlight the genre you want to listen to and press Oo(
). Playlist/SD-Audio
. Displays all the playlists created by the FOMA phone and personal computer. See page 401 for the playback of playlists. pThe mark is added to the playlist which is being played back or was previously played back. pWhen you select Artist, Album, or Genre, and press l(
) from the Type list, all the music files stored in the selected item are played back. pYou can switch display format each time you press c(
pWhen
) from the Music list. is displayed on the Type list or the Music list, you can display the playback display of previously played back music file or music file in-play by pressing m(
pYou might not be able to display all the stored music files depending on their file Type list
(For Artist) Music list
). size. pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:
Incomplete download Cannot be displayed No image, etc. 3 Select a music file. Playback starts from the selected music file in the order listed on the Type list or playlist. displayed when the music shifts to pause state during Play Background. pThe mark is added to the music file which is currently played back or was is displayed while MUSIC Player is activated, and is previously played back. pPlayback continues even if you close the FOMA phone during playback. pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second during playback, pause, or halt, or press h, MUSIC Player ends. pWhen you press m(
) during playback, the former Music list is displayed. M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k 393 Manage Folders or Music Files 1 mData boxMUSIC k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M Music Folder list 2 Select an item. MUSIC Player. MUSIC Player starts. (See page 393) i-mode. Displays the i-mode (Chaku-uta Full) Folder list. Select a folder. WMA . Displays the WMA list. pEach time you press m from the i-mode (Chaku-uta Full) Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. pYou can switch display format each time you press c(
Chaku-uta Full Music list and WMA list.
) from the pSee page 393 when you cannot display a preview image. pSee page 186 when you select Search by i-mode. i-mode (Chaku-uta Full) Folder list Chaku-uta Full Music list pSome WMA files have playable license (number/period/
deadline). WMA list 394 3 Select a Chaku-uta Full music file or WMA file. Only the selected music file is played back as a demo. pWhen you close the FOMA phone during playback, the playback stops. pTo terminate playback, press and hold p for at least one second or press h during playback or pause. pYou might be able to play back a Chaku-uta Full music file by pressing l(
another function.
) or selecting Play from the Function menu while selecting it on pChaku-uta Full music files are shown by titles for control (Music title - Artist name in default title) when you display them from the i-mode folder. When you operate them from MUSIC Player, they are shown by titles. About playback display during using MUSIC Player
The jacket image which is stored in the music file
(When no images are stored, an animation appears.)
Track number
Title Artist name Playback state Playback time/Total playback time Play mode (No indication for Normal)
: Play only one
: Repeat all
: Random play & repeat
: Demo (Displayed only in demo playbacks.)
: Repeat one
: Random Equalizer
: Normal
: S-XBS2
Stereo/Monaural
: Stereo
Listening (No indication for OFF)
: Surround
: Natur2
Remaster (No indication for OFF)
: ON
: S-XBS1
: Train
: Monaural
: Natur1
When the FOMA phone is closed
Icon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected)
: Being connected
Sound volume Operations of MUSIC Player in use Operation Key operation Halt Pause Sound volume adjustment Replay next file Replay previous file
) or p to play back
) or p
) or p to play back l(
pOo(
Oo(
pOo(
Bo or </>
pPress and hold Bo to adjust the sound volume sequentially. pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available. Vo or > (for at least one second) Co or < (for at least one second) pWhen playback time is over three seconds, no previous music file is found, and Random or Random play&repeat is set, you go back to the beginning of the file. Search (fast forward) Press and hold Vo. Search (fast rewind) Press and hold Co. m(
Display list Play background c(
2 Display image/
Display lyric/Player pEach time of pressing switches in order of Playback display
(Jacket image) Full display lyric image Full display jacket image.
) Display next image 3 Display previous image 1 9 Remaster pEach time of pressing switches between ON and OFF. 8 pEach time of pressing switches in order of OFF Listening Equalizer Surround Natur1 Natur2. 7 pEach time of pressing switches in order of Normal S-XBS1 S-XBS2 Train. You cannot operate during halt or pause. pYou cannot use some operations during playback of a demo. From the playback display during using MUSIC Player, you can operate the following by using the switch of the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set
(option) or the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option):
pYou can operate them when the FOMA phone is closed as well. Operation Pause Press once. pTo play back, press again. Press twice in succession. Replay next file Replay previous file Press three times in succession. Switch operation pWhen playback time is over three seconds, no previous music file is found, and Random or Random play&repeat is set, you go back to the beginning of the file. Playback specifications of Chaku-uta Full music files File format Codec MP4 MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC+ (HE-AAC) Enhanced aacPlus 8 to 128 kbps 3gp Bit rate Extension Playback specifications of SD-Audio files and number of storable files MPEG-2 AAC, MPEG-2 AAC+SBR 32 to 256 kbps 999 files File format Bit rate Maximum number of storable files Maximum number of playlist Except All tracks. Playback specifications of WMA files and number of storable files 99 files (Up to 99 files can be stored in a single playlist.) File format Bit rate Maximum number of storable files Maximum number of playlist WMA (Windows Media Audio 9 Standard) 32 to 192 kbps Maximum 600 files 100 files (Up to 250 files can be stored in a single playlist.) 395 M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k Icons on the Music list When you select a music file from MUSICMUSIC Player, the following icons are displayed:
Icon Description Stored in the FOMA phone Stored on the microSD card SD-Audio file type Chaku-uta Full file type WMA file type UIM restrictions function Chaku-uta Full music file with playback restrictions Chaku-uta Full music file with playback restrictions expired Playable Uta-hodai music file Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired Unplayable Uta-hodai music file File with file restrictions Icons on the Chaku-uta Full Music list When you select a Chaku-uta Full music file from Data boxMUSIC, the following icons are displayed:
k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M Icon Audio format AAC, AAC+(HE-AAC), Enhanced aacPlus Type MP4 file Partially saved Chaku-uta Full music files pSome Chaku-uta Full music files and Uta-hodai music files have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or playable period. The following icons are added. File with playback restrictions. File with playback restrictions expired . Playable Uta-hodai music file . Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired. Unplayable Chaku-uta Full music file or Uta-hodai music file. You can check the playback restrictions for the file by Music info. 396 pAll Chaku-uta Full music files are set with file restrictions. See page 164 for file restrictions. Icon Acquired source Sites For the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, is displayed. Information pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files. pThe information of the previously played music file is erased if you do the following operations:
When you remove/insert the microSD card When you turn on/off the FOMA phone When you execute Reset settings or Initialize When you delete the previously played music file When you delete the previously played playlist When you do not insert the microSD card on which the previously played music file is stored When you set USB mode setting to microSD mode or MTP mode and connect to a personal computer When you played back a music file from other than a playlist last time, and then when you perform Edit music info or Reset music info, or when you newly download, save or delete a Chaku-uta Full music file When the music file previously played is an Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired When the previously played music file is a WMA file and when you delete all the WMA licenses When the WMA license becomes invalid pPartially saved Chaku-uta Full music files are not displayed when you operate from MUSIC Player. pNote that the battery is consumed sooner if you perform the fast-forward and other similar operations frequently. Information pIn the following cases, the playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:
When you make/receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while Receiving display is set to Alarm preferred or the Stand-by display is shown When an alarm tone of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program or Timer recording sounds Depending on the event which occurred, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to end MUSIC Player. pWhen a music file is switched to the previous or next one, the music file whose playable deadline or playable period has expired, or WMA file whose WMA license is deleted is skipped. When the Chaku-uta Full music file has restrictions on the number of playbacks, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back regardless of the remaining number of playbacks. However, the music file whose number of playbacks has finished is skipped. Function menu Add folder Operation/Explanation
Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. pYou can create a total of 25 folders at each level up to the second-tier level in the FOMA phone. You can create folders at each level up to the seventh-tier level on the microSD card. Edit folder name Enter a folder name. Delete folder Select storage pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. You can delete a user folder and all Chaku-uta Full music files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can set the destination folder for when you move the Chaku-
uta Full music file to the microSD card. You can set it for up to seventh-tier-level folders.
YES Function Menu of the Music Folder List/i-mode (Chaku-uta Full) Folder List/Player Menu Display Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Function menu Operation/Explanation Information Play mode setting Select a play mode. Normal . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist in order as listed. Finishes after the last music file is played back. Play only one . Plays back the selected music file once. Repeat one. Plays back the selected music file repeatedly. Repeat all . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in Random . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist in order as listed repeatedly. the playlist at random. Finishes after all the music files are played back. Random play&repeat
. Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist at random repeatedly.
<Add folder>
pYou cannot create a user folder in the WMA folder.
<Delete folder>
pIf you delete the Chaku-uta Full music file set for another function, the setting returns to the default.
<Select storage>
p pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal is displayed for the folder set as a destination. computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again. 397 M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k Function Menu of the Chaku-uta Full Music List/Type List/
Music List/WMA List Function menu Add to playlist k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M Function menu Player menu Operation/Explanation You can show the Player Menu display from the Type list or Music list. Play mode setting See page 397. Set as ring tone
(Fullsong ring tone) Set as ring tone
(Point ring tone) Music info You can set a full piece of Chaku-uta Full music file as a ring tone.
Fullsong ring toneSelect an item. pFor the Chaku-uta Full music files on the microSD card, the confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to the FOMA phone. See Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone on page 361. You can set a part of Chaku-uta Full music file as a ring tone.
Point ring toneSelect a range to be setSelect an item. pYou can check the range to be set by pressing l(
). pFor the Chaku-uta Full music files on the microSD card, the confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to the FOMA phone. See Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone on page 361.
) with the music information of Chaku-uta You can display the title, artist name, playback time, etc. pPress i(
Full music file displayed and select Edit music info; then you can edit the information contents. Select a desired item and then edit it. To return the edited information to the unedited one, select Reset music info. Select a desired item and select YES. 398 Operation/Explanation
Select a storing method. Add one to P-list . You can store the music file. Add some to P-list . Select the music files to be stored, and press l(
). pThe music files are stored in the displayed order.
Select a playlist you store music files to. pIf you create a new playlist and store music files to, select New playlist, then enter a playlist name. If the playlist is stored to 30 lists, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it. You can move the Chaku-uta Full music file in the FOMA phone to another folder inside it, or can move the Chaku-uta Full music file on the microSD card to another folder inside it.
Select a destination folder. pPress l(
lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level. You can move the Chaku-uta Full music file to the microSD card. (See page 361)
) to display folders at the second-tier level or Move Move to microSD Move to phone You can move the Chaku-uta Full music file on the microSD card to the FOMA phone. (See page 361) Edit title Reset title You can edit the title of Chaku-uta Full music file.
Enter a title. pFor a Chaku-uta Full music file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters. pFor a Chaku-uta Full music file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. You can reset the title of a Chaku-uta Full music file to Music title - Artist name.
YES Add folder See page 397. Edit folder name See page 397. Function menu Operation/Explanation Information Delete folder See page 397. Multiple-choice Connect to URL Display image Display lyric You can select multiple Chaku-uta Full music files and operate them.
Put a check mark for Chaku-uta Full music files to be operatedi(
)Select an item. Delete . See Delete this on page 399. Move . See page 398. You can access the URL when the Chaku-uta Full music file has the URL information.
YES You can display jacket images stored in the music file. pWhen multiple jacket images are stored, press No to display a previous or next jacket image. pWhen the image is storable, press Oo(
YES, then select any destination folder to save it.
) and select You can display lyric images stored in the Chaku-uta Full music file. pWhen multiple lyric images are stored, press No to display a previous or next lyric image. You can display up to seven lyric images. pWhen the image is storable, press Oo(
YES, then select any destination folder to save it.
) and select Select storage See page 397.
<Set as ring tone>
pWhen an Uta-hodai music file set for a ring tone cannot be played back, needs to be updated because of expired playback deadline, or is set with UIM restrictions, the default ring tone returns. pSee Music info for checking whether to be set as ring tone.
<Add to playlist>
pYou cannot add music files to the playlist created using a personal computer.
<Reset title>
pIf there is no music title or artist name, it is displayed as Unknown for each.
<Display image>
pSome images may not be displayed correctly.
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pIf you delete the Chaku-uta Full music file set for another function, the setting returns to the default. pIf you delete the WMA file stored in the WMA playlist, it is released from WMA playlist. Function Menu during Playback/Halt/Pause Function menu Player menu Operation/Explanation You can show the Player Menu display from the playback display during using MUSIC Player. pPlayback state continues even when you show the Player Menu display. Play mode setting See page 397. Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items. Sound effect
(Remaster) DEL all licenses You can delete the WMA license files.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.
RemasterON or OFF Delete this Delete all
YES You can delete all Chaku-uta Full music files or WMA files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES pIf there is a user folder in a folder, you cannot delete the user folder or Chaku-uta Full music files in the user folder. 399 M u s i i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k
1 2 3 | User Manual Part 3 | Users Manual | 1.68 MiB |
Function menu Operation/Explanation Information
<Display image/Display lyric/Player> <Previous image/Previous lyric> <Next image/Next lyric>
pFor Chaku-uta Full music files, you can display up to 3 jacket images and up to 7 lyric images. For SD-Audio files saved by SD-Jukebox, you can display up to 20 jacket images, and for WMA file, you can display up to 2 image buried in a file. When you use the Napster application program, you can display 1 image stored as a jacket image. There are no lyric images for them. Using Playlist You can create the list of music files you want to listen to, and play them back in the order you like. You can play back using the playlists created by the FOMA phone or Windows Media Player, or the SD-Audio playlists created by SD-Jukebox. pThe maximum number of playlists that can be created and the number of music files that can be stored per playlist are as follows:
Creating source Number of playlist Playlists created by FOMA phone Maximum 30
(Except All tracks) Playlists created by Windows Media Player Maximum 100 SD-Audio playlists created by SD-Jukebox Maximum 99
(Except All tracks) Number of music files that can be stored per playlist 100 250 99 pWhen you create a playlist on the FOMA phone, you can store the Chaku-uta Full music files saved on the FOMA phone or microSD card, the WMA files saved by Windows Media Player, and the SD-Audio files saved by SD-Jukebox into the same playlist. k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i Sound effect
(Listening) Sound effect
(Equalizer) You can set sound effect for listening.
ListeningSelect an item. Surround . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic. Natur 1/2. Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste. OFF. Sets Listening to OFF. pNatur 1/2 is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device. You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.
EqualizerSelect an item. Normal . Reproduces normal sound quality. S-XBS1. Enhances bass sound. S-XBS2. Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1. Train . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage. Music info See page 398. Connect to URL See page 399. Display image/
Display lyric/Player s u M Previous image/
Previous lyric Next image/
Next lyric You can change the display of playback display. Display image . Display jacket image on full size display. Display lyric. Display lyric image on full size display. Player . Display playback display. You can display a previous jacket image or lyric image. You can display a next jacket image or lyric image. Information
<Sound effect>
pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are displayed on the display. 400 Icons on the Playlist list Icon Type All tracks All tracks for SD-Audio FOMA playlist SD-Audio playlist WMA playlist Create Playlist 1 Player Menu display
Playlist/SD-Audio Play Back Playlist 1 Playlist listSelect a playlist
Select a music file. pPress l(
music files from the top one in the selected playlist.
) from the Playlist list to play back the pYou cannot play back a playlist from MUSIC of Data Box. M u s i Playlist list Function Menu of the Playlist List Music list of a Playlist
)Create playlist 2 i(
Select a type and display the Music list
Put a check mark for music files to be stored
l(
) pThe music files are stored in the displayed order. 3 Enter a playlist name. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. Information pIn a playlist, you cannot store partially saved Chaku-uta Full music files or files with playback restrictions expired. Add Function menu Operation/Explanation Player menu You can show the Player Menu display. Play mode setting See page 397. Create playlist See page 401. Copy playlist
Enter a playlist name. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. pWhen you copy the SD-Audio playlist or WMA playlist, it is copied to the FOMA phone as the FOMA playlist. Edit playlist name You can edit the name of the FOMA playlist.
Edit the playlist name. pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters. You can add the music files to the FOMA playlist.
Select a type and display the Music list
Put a check mark for the music files to be added
l(
pThe music files are stored at the end of the list in the displayed
) order. 401 i c
V d e o C h a n n e l
M u s i l c P a y b a c k Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Add to playlist See page 398. Display image See page 399. Display lyric See page 399. Information
<DEL from playlist>
pYou cannot release music files from the playlists created on a personal computer. Function menu Delete playlist You can delete the FOMA playlist.
Select a deleting method. Delete this . You can delete the playlist. Delete selected . Select the playlists to be deleted, and press l(
). k c a b y a P c l i s u M
l e n n a h C o e d V
c i i s u M Delete all . Enter your Terminal Security Code.
YES Information
<Copy playlist>
pYou cannot copy the WMA playlist with no music file stored in. Function Menu of the Music List of a Playlist Function menu Player menu Operation/Explanation You can display the Player Menu display. pPlayback state continues even when you show the Player Menu display. Play mode setting See page 397. Music info Add See page 398. See page 401. You can release the music files from the FOMA playlist.
Select a deleting method. DEL one from list . You can release the music file. DEL some from list. Select the music files to be released, and press l(
). DEL all from list . You can delete the whole playlist.
YES You can change the order of playlist created on the FOMA phone.
Select a fileUse Bo to change the order to play
Oo(
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l(
) DEL from playlist Order to play 402 Convenient Functions Multiaccess . <Multiaccess> 404 Multitask . <Multitask> 405 Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail Message by Voice
. <Reading Aloud> 406 Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a Specified Time
. <Auto Power ON/OFF> 408 Using Alarm. <Alarm> 408 Using Calendar to Manage Schedule . <Schedule> 411 Using ToDo to Manage Schedule . <ToDo> 415 Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm . <Alarm Setting> 416 Using Your Original Menu . <Private Menu Setting> 416 Storing Your Name, Mail Address and Other Information
. <Own Number> 417 Recording Voice during a Call or Standby as Voice Memo
. Voice Memo during a Call Voice Memo 418 Recording Images during a Videophone Call as a Movie Memo
. <Movie Memo> 419 Checking Call Duration and Cost . <Call Data> 419 Resetting Total Duration/Total Cost
. <Reset Total Cost&Duration> 420 Setting Call Cost Limit. <Notice Call Cost> 420 Using Calculator . <Calculator> 421 Making Text Memos. <Text Memo> 421 Copying/Deleting Data Items in FOMA Phone or UIM
. <UIM Operation> 422 How to Use Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
. <Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch> 423 Selecting a Microphone when Earphone is Connected
. <Headset Microphone Setting> 423 Selecting a Call Destination when Earphone is Connected
. <Headset Switch to Call> 424 Answering a Call Automatically when Earphone is Connected
. <Auto Answer Setting> 424 Using Bluetooth Function . <Bluetooth Function> 425 Resetting Function Settings . <Reset Settings> 433 Deleting Stored Data All at Once . <Initialize> 433 403 Receive a Voice Call during i-mode or during Packet Communication You can receive a voice call without disconnecting i-mode or packet communication. 1 The Call Receiving display appears when a call comes in
Press d to answer the call. pTo return to the display for i-mode or packet communication without answering the call, press and hold x for at least one second. Press and hold x for at least one second again to return to the Call Receiving display. The caller hears not a message but a ringing tone. Use Communication during Voice Call You can use i-mode, send/receive i-mode mail, etc. without disconnecting a voice call. 1 During a voice callxm(
Select an icon to operate each function.
) Information pWhen a mail message or Message R/F comes in during a call, the ring tone does not sound and illumination does not flicker regardless of the Receiving display setting. pA ring tone sounds and the Receiving Result display appears when Receiving display is set to Alarm preferred except for the following cases:
During a call During watching a 1Seg program When an i-ppli program set for the Stand-by display is running as an ordinary i-ppli program While the camera is activated pWhen you perform packet communication via a personal computer, make a call-out operation from the personal computer during a voice call.
<Multiaccess>
Multiaccess Multiaccess enables you to simultaneously connect to three lines; a voice call, packet communication, and SMS. To switch the displays, press and hold x for at least one second; or press x to switch from TASK MENU. (See page 406) See page 510 for details on combination of Multiaccess. Voice call i-mode, i-ppli, i-mode mail, packet communication via PC SMS Single line Single line Single line Information pYou are charged a fee for each line during Multiaccess. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Make a Voice Call during i-mode or during Packet Communication You can make a voice call without disconnecting i-mode or packet communication.
Stand-by display The Stand-by display appears. 1 During i-mode or packet communicationx 2 Make a call. pIf you make a videophone call during i-mode, i-mode is disconnected and the videophone call is made. After you finish the videophone call, the i-mode display returns. 404
<Multitask>
Multitask The FOMA phone supports Multitask that enables you to use up to three functions such as menu functions (see page 33) at the same time. By combining Multiaccess and Multitask, you can use following functions simultaneously (see page 511 for the combination patterns of Multitask):
Mail group i-mode mail and SMS functions i-mode group Menu functions inside i-mode group on Main Menu Setting group Menu functions inside Setting group on Main Menu Tool group Menu functions inside Tool group on Main Menu Other functions which do not belong to the groups Voice call, videophone call, 64K data communication, etc. Mail group i-mode group Setting group Tool group Start Another Function 1 When a function is runningx
m(
)Start another function. or another mark is For the icon of the group in use, added. When a single function is used, When multiple functions are used, is displayed. is displayed. When a function in the Tool group is running If another menu function in the same group has already been called up The confirmation display appears asking whether to switch the functions. Select YES to close the current menu function and the new menu function will be called up. Information pYou are charged a call fee even when you are running other functions during a call. pIf a call comes in while another function is working, the call might not be received correctly. In that case, Record message or Call Forwarding Service may start in a shorter time than the ring time specified for them. pIf you use Multitask to switch functions while executing another function whose load of processing is high, delay may occur in displaying operation, and so on. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 405 Switch Displays When multiple menu functions are working, you can switch the displays by pressing and holding x for at least one second. The display switches from the latest one in chronological order. To display the menu list for functions in use Press x. You can switch functions by selecting a function from the list. Select Stand-by display to show the Stand-by display, and select Open Menu in Normal Style to show Main Menu, and select Open Menu in Horizontal Open Style to show Horizontal Open Menu. Information pEven if you press -x to switch the displays, neither menu function in use is closed nor the call is disconnected. Also, even when you switch the Character Entry display
(see page 436) to another menu and use that menu for editing text, you can continue editing the previous text if you switch tasks. pIf you press and hold -x for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display while another function is not working, the setting display for Switch 3G/GSM appears. Exit a Function To close a menu function, press h with the menu function displayed. pPress i(
) from TASK MENU, and select YES to close all menu functions and to return to the Stand-by display. pWhen you press h from the Stand-by display during Play Background, the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the menu function. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i 406
<Reading Aloud>
Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail Message by Voice You can set to notify of incoming calls by voice instead of a ring tone, or to have the mail contents automatically read aloud. Further, the voice guidance tells you how to operate Voice Dial. This function is available in Japanese Mode only. Read Aloud Settings 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud settingsON or OFFPut a check mark for items to be read aloudl(
Voice dial . Instructs you through the Voice Dial operation by
) voice guidance. Incoming call . Notifies you of the caller information by voice while a voice call is coming in. Videophone incoming . Notifies you of the caller information by voice while a Number of mails/msgs. Notifies you of the number of mail messages/
videophone call is coming in. Messages R/F by voice at reception. The setting of Mail/Msg. ring time is invalid. Mail list . Reads aloud the sender/destination address and subject on the Inbox/Outbox list. Displaying mail . Reads aloud the sender/destination address, subject, and text on the detailed mail display. However, the voice guidance is not provided when a melody is automatically played back while Auto melody play is set to ON. Does not read aloud the text on the Decome-Anime Playback display. Send mail preview. Reads aloud the destination address and text when previewed. pYou can stop the voice guidance for a mail message midway by pressing any key. However, it continues if you scroll the display. pThe voice guidance for a mail message is not provided while the audio from a 1Seg program is played back or when you display a mail message stored on the microSD card. Read Aloud Volume 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud volumeUse Boto adjust the volume. Read Aloud Speed 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud speedSelect a speed. Read Aloud Output You can set whether to play back the voice guidance from the speaker or hear it from the earpiece. 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud outputSpeaker or Earpiece Information pThe voice guidance of Incoming call, Videophone incoming and Number of mails/
msgs. is output from the speaker even when this function is set to Earpiece. pWhen the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, the voice guidance is output according to the setting of Headset usage setting. However, when Read aloud output is set to Earpiece and Headset usage setting is set to Headset and speaker, the voice guidance is output from the earphone except for Incoming call, Videophone incoming and Number of mails/msgs.. pFrom a Hands-free device, the voice guidance for Incoming call and Videophone incoming only might be provided. pYou might not be able to stop the voice guidance even by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option). Read Aloud Valid Setting You can set the voice guidance to be provided only when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected. 1 mSettingsOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud valid set.Normal or Earphone Normal. Always provides the voice guidance. Earphone. Provides the voice guidance only when the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch is connected. Information pWhen you set to Earphone, the voice guidance continues even if you remove the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch during the voice guidance. When a call comes in while the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch is removed, the voice guidance does not start even if you connect it. Rules of Voice Guidance The contents of Phonebook entries and mail messages are read aloud generally according to the rules as described below:
pThey may not be read aloud as specified in the following rules depending on the function you use:
<Numerics>
pA numeric string up to 16 digits is read aloud as a number. When a numeric string begins with 0 or it is identified as a URL or mail address, it is read aloud digit by digit. pWhen numerals are separated by / or ., they are read aloud as dates. p1 is differently read aloud for the meaning of the date (1st date of a month) and for others. The kanji characters of dates other than 1 are always read aloud as for the dates. pWhen numerals are separated by :, they are read aloud as time. p-, ( and ) contained in a phone number or zip code are not read aloud, and numbers only are read aloud. pWhen a numeric string begins with , , , or , it is read aloud as the meaning of money amount. When , is used, the numeric string before , is identified as money amount and that after , is identified as a number, unless it is separated by every three digits. p(Numeral) (numeral) is read as a fraction.
<Alphabet>
pAlphabetical letters are read aloud according to the voice guidance dictionary pre-installed in the FOMA phone. pWhen a word consists of four or more letters and can be read in romaji-reading, it is read aloud in romaji-reading. pThe alphabetical letters after a numeral might be read aloud as a unit. pM, T, S, and H before a date are converted to the Japanese era name and then read aloud. pAlphabetical letters other than above are read aloud in alphabetical reading. 407 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s
<Symbol>
pSymbols are read aloud according to the Symbol list. When the same symbol continues three times or more, that symbol is not read aloud. p is read aloud for the following character strings:
Re:, Re>, Re2:, Re2> and Re2*
p is read aloud for the following character strings:
Fw:, Fw>, Fw2:, Fw2>, Fw2*, Fwd:, Fwd>, Fwd2:, Fwd2> and Fwd2*
pWhen symbols for Reply or Forward are consecutively repeated, they are read aloud only once.
<Pictograph>
pPictographs are read aloud according to the Pictograph list.
<Smiley>
pSmileys are read aloud according to the voice guidance dictionary pre-installed in the FOMA phone. When they are identified as a URL or mail address, however, they are read aloud as symbols.
<Other items>
pTexts are read aloud separated by punctuation marks and symbols such as !, or ?. pWhen the kanji character that expresses the day of the week is put between ( and ), it is read aloud as the day of the week. pWords might not be correctly read aloud depending on the context of the text
(especially place names and proper nouns).
<Auto Power ON/OFF>
Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a Specified Time 1 mSettingsClockAuto power ON/OFF
Auto power ON or Auto power OFFSelect an item. OFF . Does not set Auto Power ON/OFF. The setting is completed. 1 time . Sets to turn on/off the power automatically at the specified time only once. Daily . Sets to turn on/off the power automatically at a specified time everyday s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i repeatedly. 2 Enter a time. Information pWhen you set Auto power ON and Auto power OFF to the same time, and the specified time arrives, the FOMA phone will turn on if it is turned off, and the FOMA phone will turn off, if it is turned on. 408 Information pWhen you set Auto power OFF to the same time of an alarm, schedule alarm, or others, those alarms preferentially work. pEven when you set Auto power OFF, the power does not turn off at the specified time if other than the Stand-by display is displayed. The power turns off after the function in working is finished. When you set a Flash movie as the Stand-by display, the power might not be turned off while the Flash movie is moving. pTurn off the FOMA phone after setting Auto power ON to OFF when you are near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
<Alarm>
Using Alarm You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone, animation and illumination. You can store up to 12 alarms.
+m-4-4 1 mStationeryAlarmHighlight an alarm and press l(
Do the following operations.
) Item Alarm Time Repeat Operation/Explanation You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Enter the time for sounding the alarm. pYou cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored alarm.
Select a type of repeat. pIf you select 1 time, the alarm is not repeated. pIf you select Select day, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l(
). Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Item Tone Volume Snooze Prefer manner mode 2 Press l(
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Use Bo to adjust the volume. pIf you set Step, the alarm tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6. You can set whether to activate Snooze. If you set to OFF, set the duration that the alarm tone is to continue sounding.
ON or OFFEnter a ring time (minutes). pYou can enter from 01 through 10 in two digits. pSee page 410 for how Snooze works. an alarm sound when the alarm time arrives during power off.
ON or OFF You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF ON . Sounds at the same volume as set for Alarm volume on page 113. OFF . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
). Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to make pThe following icons appear on the display depending on the setting:
: Repeats daily.
: Repeats on the specified day of the week. Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Detail Set this Go to step 1 of Using Alarm on page 408. You can display the stored alarm contents. You can validate the stored alarm.
YES pYou can validate also by pressing Oo(
). Set all Release this Release all Information You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES You can invalidate the stored alarm.
YES pYou can invalidate also by pressing Oo(
You can invalidate all the stored alarm.
YES
). pIf the alarm tone sounds during a call, press any key to stop it. Once again press any key to end the alarm including Snooze. If the other party on the phone hangs up, an alarm including Snooze ends. pDuring a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Volume (earpiece volume). pIf any of the following events occurs in Snooze state, Snooze is released:
When you receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while Receiving display is set to Alarm preferred When you receive a location provision request while Location request menu or the setting by service is set to other than OFF When an alarm tone of Schedule, ToDo, Book program or Timer recording sounds pWhen you set the power to automatically turn on and an alarm to sound, the default alarm tone sounds if the alarm which is set with the UIM restrictions has been selected. pTurn off the FOMA phone after setting Auto power ON to OFF when you are near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals. When you set an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, and ToDo The icon appears on the desktop. Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time). Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only. pIf you set Alarm of the stored schedule event/ToDo item to OFF, the icons are not displayed. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 409 When the time specified for Alarm, Schedule or ToDo comes The alarm sounds for about five minutes (in the case of Alarm, the alarm sounds for specified time), and illumination lights. The vibrator works as you set for Phone of Vibrator. The set alarm message and an animation or i-motion movie linking to the selected icon appear on the display. pIf you set Snooze of Alarm to ON The alarm sounds for about one minute at an interval of five minutes, up to six times, until Snooze is released by pressing h. pDuring a call The alarm sounds from the earpiece three times repeatedly. pDuring operations The FOMA phone works according to the setting of Alarm setting. (See page 416) pWhen you set an alarm to the time of another alarm The alarm sounds in the priority order of AlarmTimer recordingToDo ScheduleBook program. A missed schedule event or ToDo is notified by the Missed alarm icon. pWhen the power is turned off
<Alarm>
When Auto power ON is set to ON, the power automatically turns on to make an alarm notification sound. When the auto-power setting is set to OFF, an alarm does not sound with the power stayed off. Even after turning the power on, the Missed alarm icon is not displayed.
<Schedule/ToDo>
The alarm does not sound. The Missed alarm icon is not displayed even after turning the power on. pIn Manner Mode The vibrator and illumination light notify you. For Schedule/ToDo, a message is also displayed. The alarm sounds at the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 113) pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock The alarm does not sound. After releasing each lock, the Missed alarm icon is displayed to inform you of the missed alarm. Further, if the power is turned off, the power does not turn on and the Missed alarm icon does not appear even after releasing each lock. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i pWhile SD-PIM is activated, during infrared data exchange, or during iC communication The alarm does not sound. After each function is finished, the Missed alarm icon is displayed. pWhile updating a software program The alarm does not sound. When the specified time comes during rewriting the software program, the Missed alarm icon is not displayed even after updating is completed. Information pIf you set Alarm setting to Alarm preferred and the alarm time has come when you are dialing, the alarm sounds after calling up the other party. If the alarm time has come when receiving a call, the alarm sounds after starting communication. pYou might not be able to set some i-motion movies or Chaku-uta Full music files for the alarm. pSome i-motion movies set for the alarm might be played back only with sound at the specified time. pThe Chaku-uta Full music file set for the alarm is played back only with sound at the specified time. The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm tone might differ from for when you are notified by an alarm. To clear alarm tone/alarm message, and animation/i-motion movie from the display Press any key to stop the alarm tone but the animation/i-motion movie changes to a still image and the alarm message remains displayed. Press any key again (press h if you set Snooze of Alarm to ON) to clear the display. However, you cannot clear the alarm message for the schedule event or ToDo item by pressing a side key, with the FOMA phone closed. When a call comes in, the alarm stops sounding. When Alarm did not work Missed alarm icon is displayed on the desktop. You can check that icon for the contents of the missed alarm (Missed alarm information). The latest missed alarm information that could not be notified is displayed. 410
+m-4-5
<Schedule>
Using Calendar to Manage Schedule You can display the calendar by month or week to check the stored schedule events. You can display or store from January 1, 2000 through December 31, 2037. pSee page 410 for how alarm works. Item Repeat Operation/Explanation
Select a type of repeat. pIf you select 1 time, the alarm is not repeated. pIf you select Select day, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l(
pThe schedule event set with repetition is counted as one event.
). Alarm
Select an alarm method. ON . Alerts you at the time of the starting date/time of Store Schedule Events When the specified date and time come, an alarm tone, an illumination, alarm message (summary or contents of the schedule event) and an animation corresponding to the set icon notify you of the schedule event. You can store up to 1,000 schedule events. 1 mStationerySchedulel(
Do the following operations.
)Schedule Tone Contents Item Operation/Explanation Edit summary Select an icon. pWhen the alarm tone alerts you, the animation corresponding to the selected icon is displayed.
Enter the summary of the schedule event. pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters. pA summary corresponding to the selected icon is entered in advance. You can set whole day schedule without entering starting and ending date/time.
OFF or ON pIf you set to ON, the alarm sounds at 12 a.m. Whole day Date (from)
Enter the date and time for starting the schedule. Date (to)
Enter the date and time for ending the schedule. the schedule event. The setting for alarm notification is completed. ON/Set time . Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification. OFF . Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification is completed.
Enter the date and time to be alerted.
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Enter schedule contents. pYou can enter up to 256 full-pitch/512 half-pitch characters.
). 2 Press l(
pThe following icons appear on the display depending on the setting:
: Alarm sounds.
: Repeats daily.
: Repeats on the specified day of the week.
: Repeats monthly.
: Repeats yearly. When you attempt to set two schedule events to the same date and time You can set the schedule events to the same setting time only by a combination of 1 time and Daily/Select day/Monthly/Yearly for Repeat. When both two events are set to 1 time or Daily/Select day/Monthly/Yearly, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite on each. When one event is set to 1 time and the other is set to Daily/Select day/Monthly/
Yearly, the confirmation display appears telling that 1 time has priority. 411 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Information pIf you enter a date on or after 29th in Date (from) and set Repeat to Monthly, the schedule event is set on the last day of the month when the month does not have the specified date. pIf you enter February 29 of the leap year in Date (from) and set Repeat to Yearly, the schedule event is set on February 28 when the year is not the leap year. pFor the schedule event stored as secret data, an animation for secret data appears when the alarm sounds in ordinary mode (not in Secret mode or Secret data only). An alarm message is not displayed. pDuring standby, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Phone of Ring volume. During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Volume (earpiece volume). Store Holidays/Anniversaries You can store up to 100 each of holidays and anniversaries. However, you cannot store multiple holidays for the same date. 1 mStationerySchedulel(
Holiday or AnniversaryDo the following operations.
) Item Operation/Explanation Date setting
Enter the date. Repeat Contents
Select a type of repeat. pIf you select 1 time, the holiday/anniversary is not repeated. pThe holiday or anniversary set with repetition is counted as one event.
Enter the contents of the holiday or anniversary. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
) or anniversary (
) you set is stored. 2 Press l(
pThe holiday (
: Repeats yearly. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Check Schedule Events You can check the details of schedule events, holidays, or anniversaries. 1 mStationerySchedule The Calendar display appears. pToday and the selected date are highlighted and the number of stored schedule events and the contents of the day are displayed at the bottom of the display. pDisplay on the calendar
(blue): Schedule set for a.m.
(orange): Schedule set for p.m.
: Schedule continues two days or more Calendar display
(Monthly display) Calendar display
(Weekly display)
) from the monthly display, the calendar
) from the weekly display, the calendar for pHolidays are displayed in red, and anniversaries are marked with a red circle.
) or c(
pIf you press m(
for the pervious or next month is displayed. If you press m(
) or c(
the pervious or next week is displayed. 2 Select a date. The Schedule list for the selected date is displayed. Schedule list 412 3 Select a schedule event, holiday, or anniversary. Detailed Schedule display Information pNational holidays on the calendar are conformance with Law on National Holidays and the partially amended version of the Elder Law (up to No.43, 2005). Spring Equinox Day and Autumn Equinox Day are announced on the official gazette of February 1 in the previous year, therefore, they may differ from the days on the calendar. (As of March 2008) Function Menu of the Calendar Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Function menu No. of schedules Operation/Explanation You can display the number of schedule events, holidays, and anniversaries. You can display the number of the schedule events stored as secret data during Secret Mode or Secret Data Only. Add desktop icon See page 127. Send all Ir data See page 371. All transmission See page 372. Customize holiday You can specify the color for the day of the week. Delete past Delete all
Select a day of the weekDefault, Red, or Blue pThe display color of national holidays and stored holidays has priority over this setting. You can delete the schedule events, holidays or anniversaries stored for up to a preceding day of the selected day.
Select an item to be deletedYES You can delete all the schedule events, holidays or anniversaries.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Select an item to be deletedYES pWhen you delete all holidays, the setting for national holidays will be reset. You can restore the national holidays you deleted to its default. You cannot reset the holidays you have set.
YES i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s New
Select an item. Schedule. Go to step 1 on page 411. Holiday . Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries Reset holiday on page 412. Anniversary . Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries Monthly display/
Weekly display You can switch the Calendar displays.
Monthly display or Weekly display on page 412. Icon display
Select an icon to be displayed. The Schedule Event list for the selected icon is displayed. pSelect a schedule event to display the details. Information
<Icon display>
pOn the Icon display, the schedule set with repetition is displayed as a single event. For the date, the nearest date of the schedule event is displayed.
<Customize holiday>
pThey are displayed in the default color during Lock All, Omakase Lock, and Personal To specified date Enter the date. Data Lock. 413 Function Menu of the Schedule List/Detailed Schedule Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message whose text contains Function menu Operation/Explanation
Select an item. Schedule . Go to step 1 on page 411. Holiday. Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries Attach to mail on page 412. the date and contents of the schedule event. Go to step 2 on page 198. You can attach the schedule event to an i-mode mail message to send. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can attach it to an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
See page 370.
) from the detailed Schedule display. Send Ir data Send all Ir data See page 371. transmission See page 372. All transmission See page 372. Copy to microSD See page 357. Delete this Delete past Delete select
YES pIf you delete a schedule event, holiday or anniversary set for repeat, the all data items set for repeat will be deleted. pYou can delete national holidays only by Delete this. See page 413.
)YES
Put a check mark for schedule events to be deleted
l(
You can delete all schedule events, holidays or anniversaries. You can operate this only when the Icon display is displayed.
(See page 413) New Edit Copy s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Anniversary. Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries pYou can store also by pressing l(
list.
) from the Schedule on page 412. Go to step 1 on page 411 for the schedule event. Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries on page 412 for the holiday and anniversary. pYou can edit also by pressing Oo(
Schedule display.
) from the detailed pYou cannot edit national holidays. You can copy the schedule event, holiday or anniversary and store it for another date.
Enter the date and time you are pasting to. Go to step 1 on page 411 for the schedule event. Go to step 1 of Store Holidays/Anniversaries on page 412 for the holiday and anniversary. pEven if Repeat of the copy source is set to Daily/Select day/
Monthly/Yearly, the pasted one is set to 1 time. Delete all pYou cannot copy national holidays. Calendar display You can return to the Calendar display from the Icon display. You can operate this only when the Icon display is displayed. Icon display See page 413. To specified date See page 413. Set secret/
Release secret You can have the schedule event set to or release from secret.
YES pWhen you select Set secret in ordinary mode (not in Secret mode or Secret data only), enter your Terminal Security Code. 414
<ToDo>
Using ToDo to Manage Schedule You can manage your schedule events in the list and make an alarm tone sound when the specified time comes. You can store up to 100 ToDo items to manage your schedule. pSee page 410 for how alarm works.
+m-9-5 1 mStationeryToDol(
Do the following operations. pYou can check the stored contents by selecting a stored ToDo item, and you can edit it by pressing Oo(
). Item Edit ToDo Due date Operation/Explanation
Enter ToDo contents. pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Select an item. Enter date. Enter the date (due date) directly. Choose date. Select a date (due date) from the calendar. Check the date and press Oo(
). No date . Does not set the date (due date). The alarm does not work. Priority
Select a priority. pIf you sort the items in due date order, the items for the same due date are displayed from the higher priority. Category
Select a category. Alarm
Select an alarm method. ON . Alerts you at the set time. The setting for alarm notification is completed. ON/Set time . Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification. OFF . Does not alert you. The setting for alarm notification is completed.
Enter the date and time to be alerted. Item Alarm tone 2 Press l(
: Priority high
: Priority low Operation/Explanation
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
). pIf you do not enter the contents, is not displayed, and you cannot store the ToDo item. Function Menu while ToDo Item is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation New Edit Change status Go to step 1 on page 415. Go to step 1 on page 415. pTo edit Completion date of the ToDo item set with Completion, select in Due date of step 1 on page 415.
, and perform the same operation as The set status icons are displayed on the ToDo list.
Select a status. pThe status icons switch from blue to red after the due date. pIf you select Completion, perform the same operation as in Due date of step 1 on page 415. Category display Select a category. pSelect a ToDo item to display the details of it. Sort/Filter You can sort ToDo items for display. You can also list them up by the specified status.
Select the order or state you want to display. Add desktop icon See page 127. Attach to mail You can attach the ToDo item to an i-mode mail message to send. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can attach it to an i-mode mail message also by pressing l(
item.
) while checking the stored contents of the ToDo Send Ir data See page 370. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 415 Function menu Operation/Explanation Send all Ir data See page 371. transmission See page 372. All transmission See page 372. Copy to microSD See page 357. Delete this Delete select Delete completed
YES
Put a check mark for ToDo items to be deleted
l(
You can delete the Completion ToDo items.
YES
)YES Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Information pDuring standby, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Phone of Ring volume. During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for Volume (earpiece volume).
<Alarm Setting>
Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm You can set whether to make an alarm notification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo and Book program, for when operating another function. 1 mSettingsClockAlarm setting
Operation preferred or Alarm preferred Operation preferred . Alerts you only during the Stand-by display. Alarm preferred. Alerts you even when you are operating the FOMA phone or during a call. Information pWhen you could not be alerted, the Missed alarm icon appears on the desktop. 416 s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i
<Private Menu Setting>
Using Your Original Menu You can store frequently used functions in the Private menu. You can store a total of 12 items from respective functions in Main Menu (see page 482). Select a Function from the Private Menu 1 mm(
) Private menu is displayed. pPress i(
pIf you have not touched any keys for at least 15
) to display the Private Menu list. seconds, the Stand-by display returns. 2 Select an icon. The display for the selected function is displayed. Display the Private Menu List 1 mSettingsDisplay
Private menu setting Private menu
+m-5-2 Private Menu list Function Menu of the Private Menu List Function menu Add to menu Operation/Explanation You can store the frequently used function in the Private menu.
Select a function to be stored. pPress No to display the storable functions by main menu item or sub-menu item. Press Bo to highlight the function you store. Change BG image Select a folderSelect an image. Add desktop icon See page 127. Reset menu Release this Release all Information You can reset the Private menu to the default.
YES
YES
YES
<Change BG image>
pThe image you can set is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is Stand-by display (480 x 854) or smaller and up to 300 Kbytes. Perform Change size or Trim away for other images to set. However, when you set a GIF animation, the first frame is displayed.
+m-0
<Own Number>
Storing Your Name, Mail Address and Other Information In addition to the phone number (own number) you have signed up, you can store your personal information such as your name, reading of your name, phone numbers (up to three), mail addresses (up to three), a postal address, a birthday, memorandums, and a still image. If you change the mail address or register a secret code, change the mail address in this function as well. 1 mPhonebookOwn numberl(
Enter your Terminal Security Code. Perform the operation in step 2 on page 92 to store personal information. pYou cannot change or
) delete own number. pIf you have already entered your Terminal Security Code by operating another function such as Display all data, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code does not appear. Own Number display 2 Press l(
). Information pThe items other than own number are displayed even if you use another UIM, because they are stored in the FOMA phone. pThe mail address you can change using this function is limited to the mail address displayed by Own number. You cannot change the actual mail address. Function Menu of the Own Number Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Go to step 1 on page 417. 417 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Function menu Character size Display all data Copy name Copy phone number/
Copy mail add./
Copy address/
Copy birthday/
Copy memorandums Send Ir data transmission Copy to microSD Erase phone number/
Erase mail add./
Erase address/
Erase birthday/
Erase memorandums/
Delete image Reset s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Operation/Explanation You can switch the character size for the Own Number and on the displays within Phonebook settings, etc. (See Phonebook on page 129) You can display all the stored phone numbers and mail addresses.
Enter your Terminal Security Code. Use No to display each item. You can copy a name. You can copy each item. pThe items in the Function menu differ depending on the displayed item.
). See page 370. pYou can send data via infrared data exchange also by pressing c(
See page 372. pYou can send data via iC transmission also by pressing m(
See page 357.
). You can delete each item.
YES pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears, enter the code. pThe items in the Function menu differ depending on the displayed item. You can reset (delete) all the stored personal data such as phone numbers or mail addresses except own number.
YES pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears, enter the code. Auto acquire No. B You can check if the 2in1 service is contracted. When it has been contracted, Number B is stored. 418
<Voice Memo during a Call> <Voice Memo>
Recording Voice during a Call or Standby as Voice Memo Two types of Voice Memo are available; one is Voice memo (during a call) for recording the other partys voice during a call and the other is Record voice memo for recording your own voice during standby. You can record either one of Voice memo (during a call) or Voice memo for about three minutes. pSee page 73 for playing back/erasing Voice memo (during a call) or Voice memo. Record Other Partys Voice during a Call 1 During a voice call
>(for at least one second) or l(
). A beep sounds and recording starts. pTo suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
>(for at least one second). pPress h to end the recording and the call. pA beep sounds about five seconds before the recording time (for about three
) or r, or press and hold minutes) ends. The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the Talking display returns. Information pIf you record a voice memo when either Voice memo (during a call) or Voice memo has already been saved, the old one is overwritten regardless of whether you have played back or not. pYou cannot record a voice memo while operating each item in the Function menu. Record Your Voice during Standby 1 mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memoVoice memo
YES A beep sounds and recording starts. Speak into the microphone. pTo suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
pA beep sounds about five seconds before the recording time (for about three
), r or h.
+m-5-5 minutes) ends. The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the former display returns. Information pThe recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program, or Timer recording sounds, or when you switch the displays by Multitask.
<Movie Memo>
Recording Images during a Videophone Call as a Movie Memo During a videophone call, you can record the receiving images along with voice. You can record up to five items for about 20 seconds per item. pSee page 73 for playing back/erasing Movie memo. 1 During a videophone call>(for at least one second) is displayed during recording. A beep sounds and recording starts. pA still image specified by Movie memo of Select image is shown on the other partys display. pTo suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
) or press and hold >(for at least one second). pPress h to end the recording and the call. pA beep sounds about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 20 seconds) ends. The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the Talking display returns. Information pIf you record a movie memo when five movie memos have already been recorded, the oldest movie memo is overwritten regardless of whether you have played it back or not. pYou cannot record a movie memo while operating each item in the Function menu.
<Call Data>
Checking Call Duration and Cost You can confirm the last and accumulated call duration and cost for voice calls and videophone calls. pDisplayed call duration and cost are for reference and might differ from the actual ones.
+m-6-1 In addition, the consumption tax is not included in the call cost. pBoth the voice call duration and digital communications duration (videophone call duration + 64K data communication duration) are displayed and both incoming and outgoing calls are included in the duration. pThe call cost is for the outgoing calls only. However, 0 or __ is displayed for toll free calls such as Free Dial or for Directory Assistance Service (104), etc. pThe call cost is accumulated on the UIM. Therefore, when you replace the UIM, the charge accumulated on the UIM in use is displayed. (accumulation from December 2004) You cannot display the accumulated cost on the UIM using the FOMA phones that were released before the 901i series. (The cost is accumulated on the UIM.) pYou can reset the displayed call duration and call cost. 1 mSettingsCall time/costCall data Last call duration Talk: Displays the call duration of the latest voice call. Digital Videophone: Displays the call duration of the latest videophone call. Non-limiting digital: Displays the call duration of the latest 64K data Last call cost communication. Talk: Displays the call cost for the latest voice call. Digital Videophone: Displays the call cost for the latest videophone call. Non-limiting digital: Displays the call cost for the latest 64K data communication. Total calls duration Talk: Displays the call duration of voice calls from the time Reset Total Duration was executed to the current time. Digital: Displays the call duration of videophone calls and 64K data communication from the time Reset Total Duration was executed to the current time. Total calls Displays the call cost from the time Reset Total Cost was executed to the current call. 419 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Calls reset Displays the date and time when Reset Total Duration was executed last time. Cost reset Displays the date and time when Reset Total Cost was executed last time. Information pWhen Last Call Duration exceeds 19 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds, or Total Calls Duration exceeds 199 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds, 0 s returns to re-count the time. pIf you switch between the voice call and videophone call during a call, the call duration and call cost are counted respectively for the calls. You are not charged while Changing (see page 53) is displayed. pThe duration/charge for PushTalk, i-mode communication and packet communication are not counted. For how to check the i-mode fee, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version which is supplied on your i-mode contract. pThe charge for Chaku-moji is not counted. pThe international call fee for using WORLD CALL is counted. The fees for using other international call services are not counted. pThe duration for ringing and calling is not counted as call duration. pIf you turn off the power or remove the UIM, Last Call Duration is reset to 0 s; and Last Call Cost is reset to __.
<Reset Total Cost&Duration>
Resetting Total Duration/Total Cost 1 mSettingsCall time/costReset total cost&dura.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations.
+m-6-0 s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i
<Notice Call Cost>
Setting Call Cost Limit You can set the call cost limit for Total Calls and can be notified when it is exceeded. If you set Auto reset setting to ON, the call cost is reset at midnight on the 1st of the month and is deleted. 1 mSettingsCall time/costNotice call cost
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
Enter a max cost. pYou can set from 10 through 100,000 in unit of 10. 2 Select a method to alertON or OFF
Enter the PIN2 code. pSee page 132 for PIN2 code. When Total Calls has exceeded the max cost appears. When Icon + alarm is set as a notice method and the Stand-by display returns, the message to the effect that the call cost has exceeded the maximum cost is displayed, and a warning tone sounds from the speakers. Clear Max Cost Icon You can clear displayed by Notice Call Cost. 1 mSettingsCall time/costCLR max cost icon
Enter your Terminal Security Code. Information Item Operation/Explanation Reset total duration You can reset Last Call Duration and Total Calls Duration to 0 s. is cleared also by executing Reset Total Cost, Reset Settings, or Initialize. p pTo be re-notified of the set limit after the maximum cost is exceeded, reset Total Calls.
YES Reset total cost You can reset Last Call Cost and Total Calls to 0.
YESEnter the PIN2 code. pSee page 132 for PIN2 code. 420
+m-8-5
<Calculator>
Using Calculator You can display the calculator to make the four rules of calculation
(, , , ). You can display up to 10 digits. 1 mStationeryCalculator
Follow the operation below to make a calculation. Vo Co Oo
+i %
Zo Xo
+l Decimal point
-r C (Clear): Clears the numeral you have entered last. AC (All clear): Clears all the calculations you entered. Information pYou cannot enter a minus sign while you are performing calculation. pWhen the calculated result exceeds 10 digits or invalid calculation like divided by 0 is performed, .E is displayed.
+m-4-2
<Text Memo>
Making Text Memos You can store up to 20 text memos. 1 mStationeryText memoSelect <Not recorded>
Enter a text memo. pYou can enter up to 256 full-pitch/512 half-pitch characters. pYou can check the stored contents by selecting a stored text memo, and you can edit it by pressing Oo(
). Function Menu while Text Memo is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Go to step 1 of Making Text Memos on page 421. Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message containing the Edit schedule contents of the text memo. Go to step 2 on page 198. pYou can compose it also by pressing l(
You can create a schedule event containing the contents of the text memo.
Schedule Go to step 1 on page 411.
). Add desktop icon See page 127. Send Ir data See page 370. Send all Ir data See page 371. transmission See page 372. All transmission See page 372. Copy to microSD See page 357. Text memo info You can display the date and time when the text memo was created, the date and time of the latest update, and the category. Category You can classify text memos by category.
Select a category. pIf you do not set, the category is set to None. Delete this
YES Delete selected Delete all
Put a check mark for text memos to be deleted
l(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 421
<UIM Operation>
Copying/Deleting Data Items in FOMA Phone or UIM You can exchange the Phonebook entries or SMS messages between the FOMA phone and the UIM. You can also delete the Phonebook entries or SMS messages stored in the FOMA phone or the UIM. You can save a total of 20 received and sent SMS messages to the UIM. Copy/Delete Data Items 1 mPhonebookUIM operation
Enter your Terminal Security Code. When you enter your Terminal Security Code, phone and mail functions. pWhen a call comes in just before entering your Terminal Security Code, UIM appears, and you cannot use s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Operation ends. 2 Copy or DeleteSelect a copy end or delete source
Phonebook or SMS Phonebook Search the Phonebook to list the entries. SMS Inbox. Copies or deletes the data in the Inbox. Outbox . Copies or deletes the data in the Outbox. Select a folder and show the list. pWhen copying or moving data items to the UIM, the confirmation display appears telling that 2in1 management information will be deleted if 2in1 is activated. 3 Put a check mark for data items to be copied or deleted
l(
)YES Function Menu while the Phonebook List or SMS List is Displayed Function menu Start copy/Start deletion Operation/Explanation You can start copy or deletion. Select this You can select the data item. Select all in tab You can select all the Phonebook entries in the displayed tab. Select all You can select all data items. Release this You can release the selection. Release all in tab You can release all the selected Phonebook entries in the displayed tab. Release all You can release all selections. Detail You can display the detailed Phonebook display or the detailed SMS display. Copy from the Function Menu of Phonebook 1 Detailed Phonebook displayi(
Copy to UIM or Copy from UIMYES
) Move or Copy from the Function Menu of Mail 1 Outbox list/Detailed Sent Mail display/Inbox list/
Detailed Received Mail displayi(
Move/copyUIM operation
Select a move method or copy methodYES
(blue) indicates an SMS message in the FOMA phone. indicates an SMS message on the UIM.
) 422 Information pThe number of phone numbers/mail addresses you can store in a single Phonebook entry differs between the FOMA phone and the UIM. Therefore, you cannot copy the second or later phone numbers/mail addresses stored in the FOMA phone to the UIM. You cannot copy the data that cannot be stored on the UIM such as a postal address, either. Information pThe types of character fonts you can use differ between the FOMA phone and the UIM; therefore a pictograph is converted into a space. pWhen you copy Phonebook entries from the FOMA phone to the UIM, the name of up to 10 full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters and the reading of up to 12 half-pitch characters are converted to full-pitch katakana characters and copied. The rest characters are not copied. pPhonebook entries stored as secret data cannot be copied to the UIM even in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only. pIf you set the same group name in the FOMA phone and the UIM, the group settings for the Phonebook are retained. If you set different group names in the FOMA phone and the UIM, the group settings are not retained. pYou can neither move nor copy SMS reports. pYou cannot protect SMS messages you have moved or copied to the UIM. If you copy or move protected SMS messages to the UIM, SMS messages on the UIM are unprotected. Also, the reply and forward icons become the read icons. pIf SMS messages are moved or copied from the FOMA phone to the UIM, you can check them in the Inbox or Outbox folder. While you use 2in1, all the SMS messages are saved as the ones for Number A, regardless of the current mode. pWhen you move or copy SMS messages from the UIM to the FOMA phone, they are moved or copied to the Inbox or Outbox folder.
<Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch>
How to Use Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch You can make/receive a call by using the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option). Connect Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch Open the cover of the Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal and insert the connecting plug of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch. (See page 26)
<Headset Microphone Setting>
Selecting a Microphone when Earphone is Connected You can select the microphone to use when the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (option) is connected from the microphone of the FOMA phone or the microphone of the earphone/microphone. 1 mSettingsOther settingsHeadset mic. setting
Built-in microphone or Headset microphone Information pWhen you connect earphones without a microphone, select Built-in microphone. pWhen you set to Built-in microphone and connect the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch, the sensitivity of the microphone of the FOMA phone is improved. Make Calls Using the Switch 1 Enter a phone number or bring up a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 2 Press and hold the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch for at least one second
Start talking when the other party answers. A beep sounds and you are connected. pYou can use this function even in Horizontal Open Style. However, you cannot make a videophone call by pressing the switch of Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch. pYou can make a call also by operating the FOMA phone. 3 After talking, press and hold the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch for at least one second to end the call. A beep sounds twice and you are disconnected. 423 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Receive Calls Using the Switch 1 During ringingPress the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch. A beep sounds and you are connected. With a videophone call, a camera image is sent to the other party. You can switch between the camera image and the substitute image by pressing m during the videophone call. (See page 75) pYou can use it also with the FOMA phone closed or in Horizontal Open Style. If you receive a videophone call in Horizontal Open Style, substitute image is sent to the other party. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i pYou can answer calls also by operating the FOMA phone. pWhen Auto answer setting is set to ON, a call is answered automatically after the ring time elapsed. 2 After talking, press and hold the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch for at least one second to end the call. A beep sounds twice and you are disconnected. Information pRegardless of the setting for Keypad sound, a tone for connecting and disconnecting the line sounds. pNote that you might be connected if you try to connect the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch after the ring tone sounds. pTo release hold, press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch during answer-hold (On Hold) and while a call is on hold (Holding). (When a videophone call is put on hold, the camera image is sent and the videophone call starts.) pDo not press or release the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch in succession. You might be automatically connected. pIf you have signed up for Call Waiting Service and Multi calling is displayed during a call, you can switch two calls by pressing and holding the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch for at least one second. However, you cannot use the switch to end the call. pYou can adjust the earpiece volume by pressing .< (raise) or .> (lower) during a call. 424
<Headset Switch to Call>
Selecting a Call Destination when Earphone is Connected When Headset switch to call is set to Voice call and the Stand-by display is shown, you can press the switch on the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (option) to make voice calls.
Voice call or OFF pYou can check the currently set phonebook entry by pressing l(
1 mSettingsOther settingsHeadset switch to call 2 Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry.
). Information pWhen the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number is set. pIf you delete the set Phonebook entry, the Phonebook entry stored in the memory number 999 is automatically set to Headset Switch to Call.
+m-9-4
<Auto Answer Setting>
Answering a Call Automatically when Earphone is Connected If a call comes in while Headset mic. setting is set to Headset microphone and the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option) is connected, the FOMA phone automatically answers the call after the specified ring time elapses. 1 mSettingsIncoming callAuto answer setting
ON or OFFEnter a ring time (seconds). pEnter from 001 through 120 in three digits. pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each. Information pWhen the FOMA phone automatically answers a videophone call, a substitute image is sent to the other party. You can switch between the substitute image and the camera image by pressing +m during the videophone call. (See page 75) pIf you activate Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service together with Auto Answer Setting and want to give priority to Auto Answer Setting over the service, set its ring time shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service. pEven if you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch while ringing, Auto Answer Setting does not work. However, if you disconnect it while ringing, Auto Answer Setting works. pDuring 64K data communication or connecting the Flat-plug AV Output Cable
(option), Auto Answer Setting does not work.
<Bluetooth Function>
Using Bluetooth Function You can connect between Bluetooth devices wirelessly. When you connect, for an example, your FOMA phone to Wireless Earphone Set 02
(option) using Bluetooth communication, you can talk on the phone or listen to music with your FOMA phone carried in a bag. pNote that battery consumption will be faster when you use Bluetooth connection. pWireless communications with all the Bluetooth devices are not necessarily guaranteed. What You can Do with Bluetooth Function With your FOMA phone, the following six services are available:
Headset, Hands-free, Audio, Dial-up Communication, Object Push and Serial Port services. Also, the Audio/Video remote control service might be available when you use the Audio service. (Only with compatible Bluetooth devices) Supported version Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.0 + EDR compliant Supported profiles (Supported services) HSP: Headset Profile HFP: Hands-Free Profile A2DP: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile AVRCP: Audio/Video Remote Control Profile DUNP: Dial-up Networking Profile OPP: Object Push Profile SPP: Serial Port Profile Talk through Headset When you connect Wireless Earphone Set 02 (option) or a Bluetooth headset
(commercial item) to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication, you can talk wirelessly. Use the Headset service. Talk Hands-free When you connect a Bluetooth communication device such as a car navigation system (commercial item) to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication, you can communicate hands-free using the microphone and speaker on the car navigation system. Use the Hands-free service. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 425 i-motion playback tone Video playback tone PC movie playback tone MUSIC Player playback tone L L L L Music&Video Channel playback tone Alarm tone Mail ring tone Alarm preferred L 4 Operation preferred L5 L Operation preferred L5 Alarm preferred Connected service HSP HFP A2DP 3 L5 L5 L L L L L 4 L5 L L5
: Output from the Bluetooth device. L: Not output from the Bluetooth device, instead it is played back from the FOMA phone. 1 The ring tone sounds from both the Bluetooth device and FOMA phone when Headset usage setting is set to Headset and speaker. 2 The ring tone sounds from the FOMA phone when Forward ring tone is set to OFF. 3 The tone does not sound for i-motion movies played back while being obtained from sites. 4 The alarm tone sounds from the Bluetooth device only during a call. The alarm tone that sounds from the Bluetooth device is not the one set for Alarm. It beeps. 5 The alarm tone/mail ring tone does not sound when a display other than the Stand-by display is shown. pSome Bluetooth devices might not work as specified in the table above. Information pRefer to the instruction manual for a Bluetooth device as well. Play back on Audio Equipment When you connect Wireless Earphone Set P01/02 (option) or Bluetooth communication compatible audio equipment (commercial item) to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication, you can play back a stereophonic high-quality sound wirelessly. However, the devices that support audio of 1Seg programs or video files are limited.
(For details, see Information of Play Back Audio of 1Seg Programs Using Bluetooth Device.) Use the Audio service. Communicate wirelessly When you connect a Bluetooth communication compatible personal computer to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication, you can perform packet communication or 64K data communication using the FOMA phone as a modem. Use the Dial-up Communication service. For details, refer to the PDF version of Manual for PC Connection. Send Phonebook via Bluetooth communication You can send the Phonebook entries by connecting the Bluetooth device to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication. You can send them from the Function menu of the Phonebook. Use the Object Push service. Use Bluetooth communication from i-ppli By connecting the FOMA phone with another mobile phone or Bluetooth communication compatible device using Bluetooth communication, you can play a match game with your friends or manage data files on an i-ppli program. Use the Serial Port service. Tone from Bluetooth devices Connected service HSP HFP 1, 2 2 L L L L A2DP L L L L L Voice call dial tone Voice/Videophone call ring tone Calling tone at voice/videophone call The other partys voice at voice/videophone call Callers voice from Record Message at voice call PushTalk ring tone 1Seg audio 426 s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Notes on using Bluetooth devices Observe the following to make a good connection:
pThe distance between your mobile phone and another Bluetooth device must be within 10 meters under line-of-sight conditions. The allowable connection distance may be shorter, depending on the ambient environment (such as walls or furniture) and the structure of a building. When there are any obstructions between the FOMA phone and Bluetooth device, the allowable connection distance may also be shorter. Particularly, if there is a wall or floor of reinforced concrete between them, they may be unable to connect with each other. Above mentioned connection distance is not guaranteed. pDuring connection, keep Bluetooth devices as possible as away from other electric devices (such as home electric appliances, AV devices, OA devices). (The Bluetooth device is liable to be adversely affected by a microwave oven so keep as possible as away from the microwave oven.) Otherwise, normal connection cannot be performed when electric devices are powered on or Bluetooth devices may cause noises or a reception failure on a television or radio set (television images may degrade for particular channels of UHF or satellite broadcasting). pIf there is a broadcast station or radio near a Bluetooth device to which you want to connect, your FOMA phone may be unable to connect with the Bluetooth device. In such a case, move the Bluetooth device to a place where connection is possible. Strong radio waves may prevent connection between Bluetooth devices. pWith a Bluetooth device put in your bag or pocket, you can make a wireless connection. However, if the Bluetooth device and FOMA phone is separated by your body, communication speed might be lowered or noise could result. Radio interference with wireless LANs Bluetooth devices use the same frequency band (2.4GHz) as wireless LANs
(IEEE802.11b/g). Therefore, if a Bluetooth device is used near a wireless LAN device, radio interference may cause lowering of the communication speed, noise or connection fail. In this case, take the following measures:
pKeep your FOMA phone and the wireless connection-target Bluetooth device away from the wireless LAN device 10 meters or more. pWhen you use them within a distance of 10 meters, turn off the power to the wireless LAN device. Radio waves generated from the Bluetooth device may possibly give an adverse effect on electronic medical appliances. As an accident could result in some cases, make sure that you turn off the power to the FOMA phone and Bluetooth devices in places as shown below:
On trains Nearby automatic doors or fire alarms In places such as gas stations where flammable gas is generated In airplanes In hospitals Register Bluetooth Device You can register a Bluetooth device to the FOMA phone. You can register up to 10 Bluetooth devices. 1 mLifeKitBluetoothDevice list
YES The Bluetooth devices around the FOMA phone are searched. You need to place the Bluetooth device to be registered on standby for registration beforehand. Up to 20 searched devices are listed on the Device list. pYou can search for Bluetooth devices also by pressing l(
pWhen any Bluetooth devices have already been registered, Device list is
) from the Device list. displayed and those registered ones are displayed.
Enter your Terminal Security Code. 2 Select a Bluetooth device to be registeredYES 3 Select the text box for entering the Bluetooth passkey
Enter the Bluetooth passkeySet pYou can enter up to 16 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. pFor the Bluetooth passkey, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth device. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 427 4 Select a service to be connected. The Bluetooth device is connected and When no communication with the Bluetooth device is made for a certain period of time, your FOMA phone is placed in low power consumption mode, and stays on. pWhen you use the Bluetooth device which is able to
(blue) blinks.
(black) Service Selection display connect multiple services, the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect another service in succession. p
(blue) is displayed during connection,
(gray) is displayed on standby for connection next to the service name. pIf you select Dial-up, the FOMA phone is placed on standby for connection. pTo disconnect, select the connected service and select YES. pSee Place the Bluetooth Devices on Standby for Connection on page 429 for how to cancel the service on standby.
Device list Device list
Device class Following icons are displayed according to the type of Bluetooth device:
Device name The name of Bluetooth device is displayed. When no name is detected by search, the Bluetooth address is displayed.
Connecting status Being connected Not detected Protect Not connected Not registered Displayed when the registered contents are protected. Profile state The state of each profile is displayed in color. Information pWhen 10 Bluetooth devices have already been registered, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite them. When you select YES, the Bluetooth device that is not protected, or not set for Preferred device and with the oldest communication date/time, except in communicating or in standby state, is overwritten. pYou cannot activate Bluetooth function during Self Mode. Mark Connect to Bluetooth Device You can connect the registered Bluetooth device to the FOMA phone. 1 mLifeKitBluetoothDevice list
Select a Bluetooth device to be connected
Select a service to be connected. pSee step 4 on page 428 for details. 428 Device list Service Selection display Character Background color Blue Blue White Green White Gray color Gray Gray Green White Frame color None Blue None Status Not connected (unregistered) Not connected (registered) Being connected Green Standby for connection Light green Gray None None Preferred device Not supported Information pWhen the Bluetooth device is turned off or when the Bluetooth device does not respond while a connection is being established or being disconnected, it takes maximum about 110 seconds for processing. pWhen your FOMA phone is connected using the Headset service, Hands-free service, Audio service, or Dial-up Communication service, and is disconnected from the Bluetooth device, the FOMA phone is placed on standby for connection. Also, your FOMA phone is placed on standby for connection the next time the power is turned on after the FOMA phone is turned off while it is connected or is on standby for connection. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Function Menu of the Device List Function menu Operation/Explanation Register devices Enter your Terminal Security Code. Go to step 3 on page 427. Preferred device Protect/release You can set a Bluetooth device to be connected taking priority over other devices when a call comes in. You can set this for the Headset service compatible Bluetooth device only. pWhen you already set another Bluetooth device for Preferred device, that setting is canceled, and the selected Bluetooth device is set for the priority device. pTo release it, perform the same operation. You can protect the registered Bluetooth device so that it is not deleted or overwritten. You can protect up to five devices. pTo release it, perform the same operation. Change device name You can change the name of the registered Bluetooth device.
Enter a device name. pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. Delete Description You can delete the registered Bluetooth device.
YES You can display the device name, Bluetooth address, device class, and supported profile. Add desktop icon See page 127. Information
<Register devices>
pWhen you select a registered Bluetooth device, the registered profile is updated.
(When the device name has been changed, the profile is retained as it is.) When you select a profile that is different from the registered one, the profile is added and then registered.
<Preferred device>
pEven when Preferred Device is set, you cannot connect that device unless the Headset service is placed on standby for connection. When other Bluetooth device is connected with the Headset service, the Bluetooth device that is being connected has priority.
<Delete>
pYou cannot delete when the status of Bluetooth device is during connection or on standby for connection. Place the Bluetooth Devices on Standby for Connection You can place the connecting state of all the registered Bluetooth devices on standby for connection. 1 mLifeKitBluetoothAccept registered
Put a check mark for the services to be placed on standbyl(
pTo release, remove the check mark and press l(
pDuring standby,
(blue) lights.
). Suspend the Bluetooth Function of the FOMA Phone You can suspend services that are connecting, or are on standby for connection, and can suspend off the Bluetooth function of the FOMA phone. 1 mLifeKitBluetoothBluetooth power OFFYES pYou can activate the previously-connected standby for Bluetooth connection by mLifeKitBluetoothActivate Bluetooth. Accept Dialup Devices You can talk or communicate by connecting the FOMA phone wirelessly with a Bluetooth communication compatible personal computer or car navigation system and others. For details, refer to Preparing Bluetooth Communication on the PDF version of Manual for PC Connection. Make a Call Using Bluetooth Device You can make a call wirelessly when the FOMA phone is connected to a Bluetooth device using Headset service or Hands-free service. 1 Connect a Bluetooth device using Headset service or Hands-free service. pSee page 428 for connecting to a Bluetooth device. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 429 2 Make/Receive a call via the Bluetooth device. is displayed during a call via the Bluetooth device. pFor operations from a Bluetooth device, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth device. Selecting whether to talk over the FOMA phone or a Bluetooth device Press and hold h for at least one second during a call. pDuring a call with the FOMA phone while connecting using Headset service, you can switch only from the Bluetooth device. pFor operations from the Bluetooth device, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth device you use. pYou cannot talk over a Bluetooth device while USB Hands-free compatible device or Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) or Flat-plug AV Output Cable
(option) is connected even if you switch to the Bluetooth device. pYou cannot switch to a Bluetooth device while Remote Monitoring is activated. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Information pWhen a call comes in while the Bluetooth device is connected using Headset service or Hands-free service, the ring tone sounds from the Bluetooth device even if Manner Mode is activated or Ring volume is set to Silent on the FOMA phone. pDuring a call on the Bluetooth device, you cannot adjust the sound volume of the Bluetooth device by adjusting that on your FOMA phone. pDuring a call on the Bluetooth device, the call state does not change by closing the FOMA phone regardless of the setting of Setting when closed. pWhen the Bluetooth communication is disconnected during a call on the Bluetooth device, the call state follows the setting of Disconnection settings. However, when it is disconnected while the FOMA phone is closed and Disconnection settings is set to Continue on the phone, the call shifts to the state as specified by Setting when closed. When Setting when closed is set to End the call, the call shifts to No tone state. 430 Play Back Audio of 1Seg Programs Using Bluetooth Device When you connect your FOMA phone to a Bluetooth device using Audio service, you can output the audio of 1Seg programs from the Bluetooth device. pSee page 428 for connecting to a Bluetooth device. 1 Connect a Bluetooth device using Audio service. 2 Watch a 1Seg program. The sound is output from the Bluetooth device. pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to start the output to the Bluetooth device, select YES. pOnce you connect the FOMA phone to the Bluetooth device using Audio service, a connection history is stored. When the connection history is found, the FOMA phone tries to connect to the Bluetooth device automatically for watching a 1Seg program even if it is not connected using Audio service. When the connection is successfully completed, the audio is output from the Bluetooth device. When the connection fails, the confirmation display appears asking whether to output audio from the FOMA phone. The connection history is overwritten each time the Bluetooth device is connected using Audio service. pFor operations from a Bluetooth device, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth device. Information pYou can play back the audio of 1Seg programs only on an A2DP compatible Bluetooth device that supports copyrighting by the SCMS-T. Open first the 1Seg viewer display, and then operate Wireless Earphone Set P01. If you have been operating Wireless Earphone Set P01 before you open the display, the audio might not be played back. pWhile you are playing back the audio from a 1Seg program via a Bluetooth device, you cannot adjust the sound volume of the Bluetooth device by adjusting that on your FOMA phone. pYou cannot play back the audio from the Bluetooth device when the Flat-plug Stereo/
Earphone Set (option) or Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected. Information pIf the audio from a 1Seg program stops while it is played back on the Bluetooth device, check your FOMA phone as the possible causes are as follows:
When the Bluetooth device is disconnected When a location provision request of GPS comes in When a mail message or Message R/F comes in When a PushTalk call comes in When the low battery alarm sounds When an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program or Timer recording sounds In these cases, the Audio service might be disconnected depending on the Bluetooth device. To resume playback on the Bluetooth device, you need to re-connect the Audio service. Play Back Sound/Music of Moving Image or Video Using Bluetooth Device When you connect your FOMA phone to a Bluetooth device using Audio service, you can output the sound of moving images or video, music via MUSIC Player, etc., from the Bluetooth device. 1 Connect a Bluetooth device using Audio service. pSee page 428 for connecting to a Bluetooth device. pIf you connect using Audio service from the Bluetooth device while placing an Audio service on standby for connection, MUSIC Player starts automatically. However, it might not start automatically when a display other than Stand-by display is shown or another function is activated. 2 Play back a moving image, video or music file. The sound is output from the Bluetooth device. pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to start output to the Bluetooth device, select YES. pOnce you connect the FOMA phone to the Bluetooth device using Audio service, a connection history is stored. When the connection history is found, the FOMA phone tries to connect to the Bluetooth device automatically for playing back a file even if it is not connected using Audio service. When a connection is successfully completed, the sound is output from the Bluetooth device. When the connection fails, the confirmation display appears asking whether to output sound from the FOMA phone. However, it cannot connect to automatically for playing back an i-motion movie. The connection history is overwritten each time the Bluetooth device is connected using Audio service. pFor operations from the Bluetooth device, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth device you use. Information pYou can play back the audio of video file only on an A2DP compatible Bluetooth device that supports copyrighting by the SCMS-T. Open first the Video Playback display, and then operate Wireless Earphone Set P01. If you have been operating Wireless Earphone Set P01 before you open the display, the sound might not be played back. pWhile you are playing back the sound of a moving image, video, or music file from a Bluetooth device, you cannot adjust the sound volume by adjusting that on your FOMA phone. pEven when you are using Play Background for MUSIC Player or Music&Video Channel, the remote-control operation for Bluetooth device is available. pYou cannot play back the audio from the Bluetooth device when the Flat-plug Stereo/
Earphone Set (option) or Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s 431 Information pIf the sound of a moving image, video, or music file stops while it is played back on the Bluetooth device, check your FOMA phone as the possible causes are as follows:
When the Bluetooth device is disconnected When a location provision request of GPS comes in When a mail message or Message R/F comes in When a PushTalk call comes in When the low battery alarm sounds When an alarm for Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book program or Timer recording sounds In these cases, the Audio service might be disconnected depending on the Bluetooth device. To resume playback on the Bluetooth device, you need to re-connect the Audio service. Bluetooth Settings 1 mLifeKitBluetoothBluetooth settings
Do the following operations. pYou cannot operate during a call or data communication. Item Operation/Explanation Set authentications You can set whether to set authentication when sending a Phonebook entry via a Bluetooth device. If you set to ON, set whether to encrypt the data.
ON or OFFON or OFF Session number setting You can set whether to enter the password for sending all Phonebook entries.
ON or OFF Time-out to search You can set the time for searching for Bluetooth communication compatible devices around the FOMA phone.
Enter a device search time (seconds). pEnter two-digit numerals as in 05 through 20. 432 s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i Item Operation/Explanation Forward ring tone You can set whether to send a ring tone for the voice call and Disconnection settings Dial from headset Bluetooth info videophone call to the connected Headset or Hands-free device. When the device is specified as Preferred device, connection is made to send the ring tone even if the device is on standby.
ON or OFF You can select whether to end talking or continue talking on the FOMA phone when Bluetooth communication is disconnected while talking through the Headset or Hands-free device.
End the call or Continue on the phone You can set whether to make a call by pressing the switch on the Headset.
Valid or Invalid You can display the device name, Bluetooth address, device class, and supported profiles of Bluetooth function mounted on the FOMA phone. You can change the device name. pTo change the device name, press l(
), enter the device name. You can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. Information
<Set authentications>
pWhile a Bluetooth device to which Phonebook entries are sent is connected using a service other than Object Push, the Phonebook entries are sent with authentication and with encryption regardless of this setting. pYou cannot set this function while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for connection.
<Forward ring tone>
pYou cannot set this function while a Bluetooth device using the Headset service or Hands-free service is connected or on standby.
<Bluetooth info>
pIf you select a pictograph for the device name, it might not be correctly displayed depending on the destination Bluetooth device.
+m-2-3
<Reset Settings>
Resetting Function Settings You can reset the items indicated by default. (See page 482) 1 mSettingsOther settingsReset settings
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES of Function List to their Information pYou cannot execute Reset settings while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for connection. pYou cannot execute Reset settings during IC Card Lock while PIM/IC security mode is set to Face reader or Double security. pAfter you execute Reset settings, the tickers are not displayed. Then, when the information is automatically updated or you press +
information, the tickers automatically flow. Zo to receive the latest
<Initialize>
Deleting Stored Data All at Once You can delete the stored data and reset the setting contents of each function to the default. See Function List for the setting at purchase. (See page 482) pThe pre-installed data files are not deleted. pThe pre-installed i-ppli programs are not deleted. pThe data files stored in the pre-installed i-ppli programs are deleted. However, the data files stored in Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli programs are not deleted. pThe protected data files are also deleted. pAll the stored data files are deleted regardless of the mode of 2in1. pEven if you have deleted the pre-installed data items, they are restored when you execute Initialize. However, if you delete the pre-installed i-ppli programs, they are not restored. pCharge the battery full before initializing the FOMA phone. When the battery level is not enough, you may not be able to initialize the FOMA phone. pDuring initialization, never turn off the power of the FOMA phone. pYou cannot use other functions during initialization. Also, you cannot receive calls or mail messages. 1 mSettingsOther settingsInitialize
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES When initializing ends, the power automatically turns off and then turns on and the Initial setting display appears. Information pYou cannot execute Initialize while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for connection. pYou cannot execute Initialize during IC Card Lock while PIM/IC security mode is set to Face reader or Double security. pYou cannot delete the data saved to, stored in, or set for the UIM or the microSD card. pYou cannot delete the setting of data communication set by a personal computer. 433 i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Information pTo restore the i-ppli programs, download them from the P-SQUARE site. For downloading, you are charged an additional communication fee. pAfter you execute Initialize, the tickers are not displayed. Then, when the information is automatically updated or you press +
Zo to receive the latest information, the tickers automatically flow. pAfter you initialize the FOMA phone, you cannot automatically obtain Music&Video Channel programs. Access the Setting Confirmation display from the Music&Video Channel menu to reflect the program setting. pInitialization may take a while if the data to be deleted is bulky. s n o i t c n u F t n e n e v n o C i 434 Character Entry Entering Characters. <Character Entry> 436 Entering Characters in Mode 1 (5-touch)
. <Mode 1 (5-touch)> 436 Using Common Phrases . <Common Phrases> 441 Cutting/Copying/Pasting Characters . 442 Storing Words in Own Dictionary. <Own Dictionary> 442 Using Learned Words . 443 Using Downloaded Dictionary . <Download Dictionary> 443 Entering Characters in Mode 2 (2-touch)
. <Mode 2 (2-touch)> 444 Entering Characters in Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)
. <Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)> 444 For details on Kuten Code List, refer to the PDF version of Kuten Code List on the provided CD-ROM or DoCoMo web page. To see the PDF version of Kuten Code List, you need to have Adobe Reader. If it is not installed in your personal computer, install Adobe Reader from the provided CD-ROM to see it. For details such as how to use it, refer to Adobe Reader Help. 435
<Character Entry>
Entering Characters The FOMA phone is provided with many functions that require to enter characters such as when creating the Phonebook or composing mail messages. Character Entry Display On the Character Entry (Edit) display, the information of character input method, input mode, and the remaining number of characters and others are displayed.
Character input method Select Character Input Method Three types of character input methods are available as shown below:
Mode 1 (5-touch) . See page 436
+m-3-5 Multiple characters are assigned to a single key. Each time you press the key, characters switch. Mode 2 (2-touch) . See page 444 Enter characters by pairs of numerals. Mode 3 (NIKO-touch) . See page 444 Enter characters by pairs of numerals. 1 mSettingsOther settingsCharacter input method
Input modePut a check mark for modes to be used
l(
) Mode 2 (2-touch) Mode 3 (NIKO-touch) pNot displayed in Mode 1 (5-touch).
Input mode abcAlphabet input mode 123Numeral input mode Kanji/Hiragana input mode Katakana input mode
Full/Half-pitch 1/1Full-pitch input mode 1/2Half-pitch input mode Remaining/Maximum bytes that can be entered pNumber of entered characters might be displayed depending on the function.
y r t n E r e t c a r a h C 436 pSelect at least two modes. 2 Select a priority mode. pSelect a mode you use preferentially from modes selected in step 1. Switching modes on the Character Entry (Edit) display Press and hold l(
select Change input mode from the Function menu.
) for at least one second, or select Char. input/dict. and then
<Mode 1 (5-touch)>
Entering Characters in Mode 1 (5-touch) In the step for entering characters, press l(
) to switch input modes. You might not be able to switch to some modes depending on the function you enter. Enter Characters You can enter characters by using Prediction Conversion which converts the entered few words into the predicted ones and Context Forecast which displays the next conversion candidates inferred from the relation between words. pThe FOMA phone increases prediction conversion candidates and context forecast candidates by learning characters.
<Example> Enter in a text memo. The Character Entry (Edit) display appears in prediction conversion mode when Predict is set to ON, and appears in ordinary conversion mode when set to OFF. 1 mStationeryText memoSelect <Not recorded>. 2 Enter hiragana characters in Kanji/Hiragana input mode. Press 4 once and Vo once. Press 4 once and a once. Press 5 five times. Press 2 once. Press 3 twice. pYou can enter up to 24 characters at a time. However, when Predict is set to ON, if you enter 6 or more characters, the conversion mode is automatically switched to the ordinary conversion mode. pWhen a character on the same key comes after a character, press Vo to move the cursor, and enter the next character. If you set Character set time, you can omit the operation to move the cursor. pTo switch between uppercase and lowercase, press d after you have entered characters. pEach time you press c(
pIf you set Predict to ON, each time you press l, ordinary conversion mode and prediction conversion mode switch. pYou can press i(
) to display the candidate list of alphanumeric or katakana characters. Depending on the entered character, the conversion candidates for date/time are displayed. pWhen m(
pTo fix a character as it is without conversion, press Oo(
is displayed while editing the i-mode mail text, you can press
) to display the candidate list of Deco-mail pictograms.
), characters are displayed in reverse order.
). pThe conversion mode is automatically switched to the ordinary conversion mode. 3 Use Co to move the cursor onto . 4 Use Bo to move the cursor onto the candidate list
Use Mo to highlight and press Oo(
pBy pressing m(
page. pWhen you press r while you are selecting a conversion candidate, the Character Entry (Edit) display returns. pPress c(
), you can scroll the candidate list page by
) to fix the whole paragraph.
)/c(
5 Use Bo to move the cursor onto the candidate list
Use Mo to highlight and pressOo(
). The selected characters are fixed. pWhen the character strings that are assumed to be the context forecast candidates are found after fixing the characters, that context forecast candidates are displayed. Press Bo to move the cursor onto the candidate list to enter the context forecast candidates. pWhen you press r while you are selecting the context forecast candidates, the Character Entry (Edit) display returns. Information pThe learning function stores up to 1,000 words, and the character of a high conversion rate goes up in the character order list. pThe candidate character strings are displayed from characters converted as usual and from a dictionary downloaded from sites. Only a small number of character strings are registered by default so candidate characters might not be displayed in some cases. By doing the character conversion as usual, the converted characters are added to the candidate characters. You can download a dictionary from sites and add candidate characters from the dictionary. However, when you delete the downloaded dictionary, the added candidate characters are also deleted from the existing candidate characters. (See page 185 and page 443) pIn the candidate list of Deco-mail pictograms, only the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograms are displayed, and the downloaded Deco-mail pictograms are not displayed. Even if you delete the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograms and re-download them, they are not displayed in the candidate list. pYou can use Prediction Conversion and Context Forecast with 2-touch and NIKO-touch in Kanji/Hiragana input mode. pThe number of kanji characters that you can convert to is limited so you might not be able to convert to some kanji characters. You can use Kuten Code to enter kanji characters that you cannot convert to. The number of characters you can enter is 6355 in the JIS level-1 and level-2 kanji sets. pPart of a complicated kanji character is deformed or left out. 437 C h a r a c t e r E n t r y Numbers of remaining characters and entered characters On the Character Entry display, the number of remaining characters and the maximum number of characters you can enter are displayed in bytes. (The number of entered characters is displayed by unit of characters, depending on the function such as entering SMS text.) The number of characters in the Character Entry (Edit) display is counted according to the following rules:
pOne half-pitch character is counted as one byte and one full-pitch character as two bytes. pFull pitch: 5 characters (counted as 10 bytes) Half pitch: 10 characters (counted as 10 bytes) Combination of characters When entering characters, pay attention to the combination of characters.
<Example> When you are entering in half-pitch Katakana input mode and in Kanji/Hiragana input mode 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 pThe number of characters that appears on the display is 9 and counted as 14 bytes that equal 14 half-pitch characters. pHalf-pitch character and are counted as one character. Other Entry Functions Item Smiley input Information Operation/Explanation Enter Use Bo to move the cursor onto the candidate listUse Mo to select a smiley. pSmileys are stored in the pre-installed common phrases.
<Line feed>
pA line feed is counted as one full-pitch character. pYou cannot break a line depending on the function such as editing in the text box for i-mode. Correct Characters 1 Move the cursor to the left of the character you want to correctr The character at the right of the cursor is deleted. Press and hold r for at least one second to delete all characters on and after the cursor. pWhen no character is found to the right side of the cursor, the character to the left side of the cursor is deleted. Press and hold r for at least one second to delete all characters. 2 Enter a correct character. The character is entered in the position of the cursor. Item Katakana input Alphanumeric input Numeral input Line feed 438 y r t n E r e t c a r a h C Operation/Explanation
) a few times to switch to Alphabet input
) a few times to switch to Katakana input Press l(
modePress keys to enter characters. Press l(
modePress keys to enter characters. Press l(
mode Press keys to enter numerals. Press c(
pWhen the cursor is at the end of text and characters are fixed, you can press Xo to break a line.
) a few times to switch to Numeral input
). Data you are editing When the battery alarm sounds The data you have been editing is automatically fixed and saved. Charge the battery or replace it with a new charged battery to resume editing. However, you cannot save the unfixed data being converted. When you press h The confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the data you are editing. When a call or mail comes in The Multitask function works, so the data you are editing is retained, and you can answer the call or receive the mail. You can return to the data edit display by switching menu, by pressing and holding x for at least one second. You can return to the data edit display also by ending the call or mail function. Predict You can set whether to display the prediction conversion/context forecast candidates in the candidate list. 1 mSettingsOther settings
Character input methodPredictON or OFF
+m-3-5 Intelligent with Secret You can set whether to store the characters converted in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only as learned words. 1 mSettingsOther settings
Character input methodInt.with secret
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
+m-3-5 Function Menu while Entering (Editing) Characters pSee page 200 for the Function menu of the Message Entry display. Function menu Operation/Explanation Full pitch/Half pitch You can switch between full pitch and half pitch. Copy Cut Paste Undo See page 442. See page 442. See page 442. You can undo the fixed, deleted, cut, or pasted text. You can undo the operation up to 10 times. However, you can undo the fixing of characters only once. pYou can undo the operation also by pressing m(
). Function menu Operation/Explanation Pictograph/
symbols
(Pictograph)
). You can enter pictographs while showing them on the display.
PictographHighlight a pictograph and press l(
Repeat the above step and enter other pictographs consecutively. pYou can display the Pictograph list also by pressing a in Kanji/Hiragana input mode. pPress c to switch the pictograph lists in order of Pictograph 1 Pictograph 2 Decomail-pictograph
[ (Favorite) through (Characters)]. However, you can enter Decomail-pictograph [ (Favorite) through (Characters)] only while editing the i-mode mail text. Press m to switch them in the reverse order. pYou can select a pictograph also by pressing a column number
(number to the left) and then a row number (number at the top). pPress i(
pPress d to switch between the Pictograph list Full display and ordinary input display.
Oo(
The selected pictograph is entered and the Character Entry (Edit) display returns.
) to display the Symbol list.
) Pictograph/
symbols
(Symbols) You can enter symbols while showing them on the display.
SymbolsHighlight a symbol and press l(
). Repeat the above step and enter other symbols consecutively. pYou can display the Symbol list also by pressing and holding s for at least one second. pPress c to switch the symbol lists in order of Half-pitch symbols Full-pitch symbols. Press m to switch them in the reverse order.
) to display the Pictograph list. pYou can select a symbol also by pressing a column number
(number to the left) and then a row number (number at the top). pPress i(
pPress d to switch between the Symbol list Full display and ordinary input display.
Oo(
The selected symbol is entered and the Character Entry (Edit) display returns.
) C h a r a c t e r E n t r y 439 Function menu Operation/Explanation Function menu Operation/Explanation Pictograph/
symbols
(Space) Phrase/code/quote
(Common phrases) Phrase/code/quote
(Kuten code) You can enter a full-pitch space in full-pitch input mode, and a half-pitch space in half-pitch input mode.
Space pWhen the cursor is at the end of text, you can enter a space also by pressing Vo.
Common phrasesSelect a folder
Select a common phrase. pIn the mode other than numeral input mode, you can bring up the folder list for common phrases also by pressing and holding a for at least one second. You can enter characters, numerals, and symbols on the Kuten Code list (see the PDF version of Kuten Code List on the provided CD-ROM). You can operate in Kanji/Hiragana input mode.
Kuten codeEnter a four-digit Kuten code. A character that matches the entered Kuten code is displayed, and the former input mode returns. pWhen a character that matches the entered Kuten code is not found, a space is inserted. Phrase/code/quote
(Input time)
Input timeSelect a format for entering the date/time
Enter the date/time. pYou can enter the date/time using the numeric keys. pYou can enter years 1800 through 2099. Phrase/code/quote
(Quote phonebook) y r t n E r e t c a r a h C Phrase/code/quote
(Quote own data) 440 You can access and quote Phonebook entries. The following are the items you can quote:
<Inside FOMA phone>
Name, reading, phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, memorandums
<Inside UIM>
Name, reading, phone number, mail address
Quote phonebookSearch the Phonebook
Select a Phonebook entry
Put a check mark for items to be quotedl(
You can access and quote your personal information. The following are the items you can quote:
Name, reading, phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, memorandums
Quote own dataEnter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for items to be quotedl(
) Phrase/code/quote
(Bar code reader) You can start Bar Code Reader. (See page 165)
Bar code reader Char. input/dict.
(Own dictionary) Char. input/dict.
(Learned words) Char. input/dict.
(Change input mode) Char. input/dict.
(Candid. disp. size) Char. input/dict.
(Predict) You can store the words in own dictionary. (See page 442)
Own dictionary See page 443. You can switch the character input methods.
Change input modeSelect an input mode. pYou cannot select the input mode that is not selected in Input mode of Character input method (see page 436). See Character input (Candid. disp. size) on page 129. See page 439. Char. input/dict.
(Candidate display) You can select whether to use context forecast candidates.
Candidate displayON or OFF Char. input/dict.
(Character set time) Char. input/dict.
(2/NIKO-touch guide) Help You can select whether to automatically fix the entered characters while you are entering characters in Mode 1 (5-touch). In addition, you can specify the time until characters are fixed. You can omit the operation of pressing Vo to move the cursor for the entry of characters on the same key.
Character set timeFast, Normal, Slow, or OFF You can select whether to list character conversion candidates at the lower part of the display when you press the first-digit key while you are entering characters in Mode 2 (2-touch) or Mode 3
(NIKO-touch).
2/NIKO-touch guideON or OFF You can check the operating procedures for entering characters.
Select an item. Function menu Operation/Explanation Information JUMP Information You can move the cursor to the top or end of text.
To beginning or To end pWhen the Character Entry (Edit) display ranges over multiple pages, the cursor moves to the beginning or end of the page.
<Full pitch/Half pitch>
pWhen you switch to half-pitch mode in Kanji/Hiragana input mode of NIKO-touch, the input mode switches to half-pitch Katakana input mode.
<Pictograph/symbols (Pictograph)>
pYou might not be able to enter pictographs depending on the Character Entry (Edit) display. pOnce you have entered pictographs, History appears first. pUp to 27 records of the pictographs entered in Pictograph 1 and Pictograph 2 and up to 36 records of Deco-mail pictogram are displayed on History. However, up to 18 records are displayed when the 1Seg viewer display appears below the Message Composition display. pYou can enter up to 20 Deco-mail pictograms. When you insert other images, however, the number of Deco-mail pictograms that can be entered is reduced by the number of inserted images.
<Pictograph/symbols (Symbols)>
pYou can enter by pressing and holding -0 for at least one second in Numeral input mode. pYou might not be able to enter some symbols depending on the Character Entry (Edit) display. pOnce you have entered symbols, History appears first. pUp to 27 records of the symbols entered in half-pitch and up to 36 records in full-pitch are displayed on History. However, up to 18 records are displayed when the 1Seg viewer display appears below the Message Composition display.
<Phrase/code/quote (Common phrases)>
pYou might not be able to enter common phrases depending on the Character Entry
(Edit) display. pIn Japanese Mode, the called-up contents of common phrases pre-installed in the FOMA phone differ depending on the input mode.
<Phrase/code/quote (Quote phonebook)>
pWhen you quote a postal address, you cannot quote or - of the postal code.
<Phrase/code/quote (Quote own data)>
pWhen you quote a postal address, you cannot quote or - of the postal code. pThe personal data of Number A is quoted in A Mode of 2in1, the personal data of Number B is quoted in B Mode, and the personal data of both Number A and Number B is quoted in Dual Mode.
<Char. input/dict. (Character set time)>
pYou might not be able to enter characters as you like depending on this setting and your speed of operating keys.
+m-3-8
<Common Phrases>
Using Common Phrases You can call up and enter, on the Character Entry (Edit) display, the common phrases pre-installed in the FOMA phone, or your own created common phrases. The common phrases are sorted into five folders and each folder contains 10 of them. You can edit the pre-installed common phrases to save as your own common phrases. Display Common Phrases 1 mStationeryCommon phrase/dic.
Common phrasesSelect a folder. 2 Select a common phrase. Common Phrase Folder list Common Phrase list Common Phrase display Information pDo not use half-pitch katakana characters and pictographs for your own common phrases used for composing mail. They might not be correctly displayed. (Pictographs can be used between i-mode mail messages.) pIn Japanese Mode, the common phrases pre-installed in the (Greeting) and (Business) folders are called up as kanji/hiragana common phrases in Kanji/Hiragana input mode and called up as half-pitch katakana common phrases in other input mode. C h a r a c t e r E n t r y 441 Function Menu of the Common Phrase Folder List Information pIf you copy/cut the Deco-mail text during composing and paste it, the information Function menu Operation/Explanation about the decoration is pasted as well. Edit folder name Enter a folder name. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. pWhen you delete all the characters entered as a folder name, Reset name the folder name is reset to the default. You can reset the folder name to the default.
YES Function Menu of the Common Phrase List/Common Phrase Display Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Reset this Reset all
Enter a common phrase. pYou can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters. pWhen you delete all the characters in a common phrase, the common phrase is reset to the default. pYou can edit a common phrase by pressing l(
You can reset the common phrase to the default.
YES
). You can reset all the common phrases in the folder to the default.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES Cutting/Copying/Pasting Characters Cut/Copy You can cut or copy up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.
Cut or CopySelect a start point. pYou can press i(
) to select all characters. 1 Character Entry (Edit) displayi(
2 Select an end point.
) pYou might not be able to cut or copy data such as Deco-mail text because the memory space runs short. Paste You can paste cut or copied characters. 1 Character Entry (Edit) display
Move the cursor to a start position for pasting
i(
)Paste
+m-3-8
<Own Dictionary>
Storing Words in Own Dictionary In Own Dictionary, you can store up to 100 frequently used words with your favorite reading. 1 mStationeryCommon phrase/dic.
Own dictionary<New>Enter a word. pSelect a stored Own dictionary to check the stored contents. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. However, you cannot enter line feeds. 2 Enter a reading. pYou can enter up to 10 hiragana characters. Also, you cannot store symbols other than Long vowel (). However, you can store or for the words to which or can be attached. pEven if you enter a space, the word is stored with the space automatically deleted. Function Menu while Own Dictionary is Displayed Function menu Operation/Explanation New Go to step 1 of Storing Words in Own Dictionary on page 442. y r t n E r e t c a r a h C 442 Function menu Operation/Explanation Edit Delete this Delete selected Delete all Information Go to step 1 of Storing Words in Own Dictionary on page 442. pYou can edit also by pressing l(
YES
Put a check mark for own dictionaries to be deleted
l(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
)YES
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pWhen you display Own Dictionary from the Function menu of the Character Entry
(Edit) display, select Delete from the Function menu, then select Delete this or Delete all.
<Delete selected>
pDelete selected does not appear when you display Own Dictionary from the Function menu of the Character Entry (Edit) display. Using Learned Words The character strings once you entered are automatically stored and displayed as the conversion candidates of learned words. Checking Learned Words 1 Function menu while entering (editing) characters
Char. input/dict.Learned wordsSelect a column
Select a record. pTo delete learned words, press i(
all, then select YES. If you select Delete all, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
) and select Delete this or Delete
+m-3-8 Create Learned Word List You can newly create learned words from the subjects and titles of sent i-mode mail messages stored in your FOMA phone. The learned words before creation are all deleted. 1 mStationeryCommon phrase/dic.
Create learned wd listOK
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESOK Reset Learned Words You can reset the learned words. 1 mSettingsOther settingsCharacter input method
Reset learned words
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
+m-3-5
+m-3-8
<Download Dictionary>
Using Downloaded Dictionary You can make dictionaries downloaded (see page 185) from sites valid. 1 mStationeryCommon phrase/dic.
Download dictionary
Select a downloaded dictionary. The downloaded dictionary you have selected is validated and indicated by . pTo invalidate a downloaded dictionary, perform the same operation. pYou can delete the pre-installed dictionaries. You can re-download them from the P-SQUARE site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them. Function Menu while Downloaded Dictionary is Displayed Function menu Edit title Operation/Explanation
Edit the title. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. Set dictionary You can set the dictionary valid/invalid. Each time you operate, valid and invalid switch. Dictionary info You can display the dictionary title and version. Delete this Delete all Information
YES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Edit title>
pIf you delete all the characters entered as a title, the title is reset to the default. C h a r a c t e r E n t r y 443
<Mode 2 (2-touch)>
Entering Characters in Mode 2 (2-touch) When you press two numeric keys to enter two-digit numerals, a character (symbol) that corresponds to the numerals is entered. Press the first key to list candidate characters (symbols) at the lower part of the display. To list candidate characters, you need to set 2/NIKO-touch guide to ON in advance. pSee page 502 for how characters are assigned to the numeric keys (2-touch). pSee page 436 for switching to 2-touch.
<Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)>
Entering Characters in Mode 3 (NIKO-touch) When you press two numeric keys to enter two-digit numerals, a character (symbol) that corresponds to the numerals is entered. Press the first key to list candidate characters (symbols) at the lower part of the display. To list candidate characters, you need to set 2/NIKO-touch guide to ON in advance. pSee page 503 for how characters are assigned to the numeric keys (NIKO-touch). pSee page 436 for switching to NIKO-touch. Switch Input Modes (2-touch) Press l(
) from the Character Entry (Edit) display to switch input modes. You might not be able to switch to some modes depending on the function you enter. Switch Input Modes (NIKO-touch) Press l(
) from the Character Entry (Edit) display to switch input modes. You might not be able to switch to some modes depending on the function you enter. Enter Characters
<Example> Enter in a text memo. The Character Entry (Edit) display appears. 1 mStationeryText memoSelect <Not recorded>. 2 Enter hiragana characters in Kanji/Hiragana input mode. 41 41, a 55 21 32 pTo enter or , enter the character and then press a. pPress 80 to switch between uppercase and lowercase. You can switch uppercase and lowercase also by entering the character that can be switched between uppercase and lowercase and pressing d. Enter Characters
<Example> Enter in a text memo. The Character Entry (Edit) display appears. 1 mStationeryText memoSelect <Not recorded>. 2 Enter hiragana characters in Kanji/Hiragana input mode. 41 41, a 55 21 32 pTo enter or , enter the character and then press a. pEnter the character that can be switched between uppercase and lowercase and press d; then you can switch. After entering hiragana characters, go to step 3 on page 437. After entering hiragana characters, go to step 3 on page 437. 444 y r t n E r e t c a r a h C Network Services Checking New Voice Mail Messages
. <Check New Messages> 446 Using Voice Mail Service . <Voice Mail> 446 Using Call Waiting Service . <Call Waiting> 448 Using Call Forwarding Service . <Call Forwarding> 450 Using Nuisance Call Blocking Service
. <Nuisance Call Blocking> 451 Using Caller ID Display Request Service
. <Caller ID Request> 452 Using Dual Network Service . <Dual Network> 452 Switching Guidance Language between Japanese and English
. <English Guidance> 453 Using Service Numbers. <Service Numbers> 453 Selecting Response to Incoming Calls during a Call
. <Arrival Call Act> 454 Setting Remote Control. <Remote Control> 455 Setting Additional Number . <Multi Number> 455 Using 2in1. <2in1> 456 Using OFFICEED . <OFFICEED> 462 Using Additional Services. <Additional Service> 462 Available Network Services The following are the DoCoMo network services available from the FOMA phone. For the outline and usage method of each service, see the reference page in the table below. pThe network services are not available when you are out of the service area or out of reach of radio waves. pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. pFor subscriptions and inquiries, contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back page of this manual. Service Application Monthly fee Reference Service Voice Mail Service Call Waiting Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Caller ID Notification Service Caller ID Display Request Service Dual Network Service Required Required Required Not required Not required Not required Charged Charged Free Free Free Free Required Charged 446 448 450 451 47 452 452 English Guidance Multi Number 2in1 Public Mode (Drive Mode) Public Mode (Power Off) OFFICEED Melody Call Application Monthly fee Reference Not required Free Required Required Not required Not required Required Required Charged Charged Free Free Charged Charged 453 455 456 69 70 462 110 pOFFICEED is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. For details, visit the DoCoMo-enterprise-oriented web site (http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/). (Japanese only) pDeactivate does not mean that the contract for Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service or other services is canceled. pYou can store new network services in the menu when they are provided by DoCoMo. (See page 462) pIn this manual, a brief outline for each network service is described following the procedure using the menus of the FOMA phone. 445
<Check New Messages>
Checking New Voice Mail Messages You can check whether any message is held at the Voice Mail Service Center. 1 mServiceVoice mailCheck new messagesOK About checked results pIf any voice mail message is held, the Voice mail icon (
icon such as appear to inform you of the held message.
) and another Voice Mail pTo erase the Voice Mail icon such as
, dial at the Voice Mail Service Center for saving or erasing the voice mail message or follow the operations of Erase icon. pThe Voice Mail icons switch among
(6 or more messages) according to the number of the messages held at the Voice Mail Service Center. The displayed number is the number of messages informed by the guidance when you play back new messages. Saved messages are not included.
, etc., and
, pIf you set Message notification, the ring tone sounds each time a message is added. pSee page 447 for how to play back voice mail messages. When appears You cannot check voice mail messages. Move to a place where is cleared. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 446
<Voice Mail>
Using Voice Mail Service This service provides an answer message for incoming voice calls/
videophone calls and then holds voice mail messages on behalf of you when you are in a place where radio waves do not reach, the power is turned off, or you cannot answer calls. pWhen Record Message (see page 71) is simultaneously activated and you want to give Voice Mail Service priority, set its ring time shorter than that for Record Message. pWhen you do not answer an incoming voice call or videophone call while Voice Mail Service is set to Activate, the call is recorded as a missed call in Received calls, and the Missed call desktop icon appears on the Stand-by display. pVoice Mail Service is valid for voice calls and videophone calls. pA voice mail message can be recorded for up to three minutes. Twenty messages can be recorded respectively for voice calls and videophone calls and held at the Center for up to 72 hours. pWhen a voice mail message of a videophone call is retained at the Voice Mail Service Center, you are notified by an SMS message. pMake a voice call at 1412 to change the Voice Mail setting for videophone calls. pWhen a Chara-den call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center, DTMF operation is not available. Switch to Send DTMF tone on the Function menu. (See page 76) pWhen a call comes in while Voice Mail Service is set to Activate, the ring tone
(specified by Select ring tone) will sound. (You can change the ring time for incoming calls. See page 447.) If you answer the call within the specified time, you can start talking. If you do not answer, the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. pYou can just press keys to connect an incoming call to the Voice Mail Service Center. Also, you can connect the call that comes in during a call to the Center. Basic Flow of Voice Mail Service Step 1: Set the service to Activate. Step 2: The caller records a voice/video message. Step 3: Play back the message. If the caller wants to skip playback of the answer message and record a message such as when in a hurry, he/she can immediately switch to the recording mode by pressing # while the answer message is played back. Use Voice Mail Service 1 mServiceVoice mailDo the following operations. Item Play messages Activate Deactivate Set ring time Operation/Explanation You can play back messages recorded as the Voice Mail.
YESOperate following the voice guidance.
YESYESEnter a ring time (seconds). pEnter from 000 through 120 in three digits.
YES You can set the ring time until the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center.
Enter a ring time (seconds). pEnter from 000 through 120 in three digits. Check setting You can check the setting contents of Voice Mail Service. Setting Check new messages Message notification Erase icon You can switch the setting contents of Voice Mail Service.
YESOperate following the voice guidance. See page 446. You can set the ring tone to sound when a new message is recorded. The ring tone set for Mail of Select ring tone sounds for about five seconds.
YES or NO You can erase the Voice Mail icons (such as Stand-by display.
YES
) from the Activate notice call By an SMS message, you are informed of the received calls which came in when you were out of reach of radio waves or the power was turned off.
Select an item. All calls . Informs you of all received calls. Calls w/ caller ID . Informs you of only the calls that notified the phone number.
YES Item Operation/Explanation Deactivate notice call
YES Notice call status You can check the setting contents of notice call. Information
<Play messages> <Setting>
pYou cannot operate during a call. pIf you press -0 through -9, -a, or -s following the voice guidance, you may not be able to end the call by pressing -h. In this case, press -h again.
<Set ring time>
pIf Set ring time is set to 0 seconds, the calls are not recorded in Received Calls.
<Erase icon>
pEven if you erase the Voice Mail icons, the messages held at the Voice Mail Service Center are not erased.
<Activate notice call>
pEven when you set to reject all SMS messages, you are informed by SMS message of the received call records. Forward an Incoming Call to Voice Mail Service Center during Ringing You can connect an incoming call to the Voice Mail Service Center just by a simple key operation. Even if you do not set Voice Mail Service to Activate, the service will be available using this function. 1 During ringingi(
)Voice mail pYou can connect the incoming call to the Voice Mail Service Center also by pressing i(
), and pressing s. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 447 Forward Specified Calls to Voice Mail Center You can automatically connect the calls coming from the phone numbers stored in the Phonebook to the Voice Mail Service Center regardless of the Activate/Deactivate setting for the Service. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers. This setting is valid only when the caller notifies his/her phone number. It is advisable to activate Caller ID request at the same time. 1 Detailed Phonebook displayi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeVoice mail Voice mail is indicated by . pTo release Voice mail, perform the same operation.
)Restrictions Information pWhen a call comes in from the phone number set with this function, the ring tone sounds for about one second and then the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. You will be notified of the call by the icons on the desktop (see page 71 and page 125) and Received calls. pEven if you set this function, all incoming calls are not connected to the Voice Mail Service Center when you set Personal data lock while Voice Mail Service is deactivated. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N
<Call Waiting>
Using Call Waiting Service When a call comes in during a call, this service notifies you of it by the ring tone in call, and enables you to place the current call on hold to answer the new call. Further, you can make a call to another person putting the current call on hold. pTo use Call Waiting Service, set Arrival call act (see page 454) to Answer in advance. When another option is set, you cannot answer a voice call during a voice call even if you set Call waiting to Activate. 448 Use Call Waiting Service 1 mServiceCall waiting
Do the following operations. Item Activate Deactivate
YES
YES Operation/Explanation Check setting You can check the setting contents of Call Waiting Service. Answer an Incoming Call during a Call You can answer another call putting the current call on hold. 1 Another call comes in during a call
d The current call is automatically put on hold so that you can receive another call. pMulti calling is displayed when there is the party on hold. pEach time you press d, you can switch the parties you can talk with. Information pFor an incoming call or communication that is not supported by Call Waiting, press
-d from the Call Receiving display to show the confirmation display telling that you can answer a new call if you end the current call. Press -h to end the current call, and then the Call Receiving display appears. When you select OK, the Call Receiving display during a call returns. pIf a call comes in during a videophone call, the FOMA phone operates as follows:
The moving image, i-motion movie or Flash movie set as the image for incoming calls is not displayed. A Pre-installed substitute image is sent to the other party of the current call. The vibrator does not work. pWhen a voice call comes in while dialing 117, you hear an in-call ring tone but cannot answer that call. The call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls. End a Call to Answer Another Call You can answer another call after finishing the current call. 1 Another call comes in during a callh The ring tone sounds. You can answer the new call. Continue the Current Call 1 Another call comes in during a calli(
Do the following operations.
) Function menu Operation/Explanation Call rejection You can reject a new incoming call and resume the current call. Call forwarding You can forward a new incoming call to the forwarding destination and resume the current call. Voice mail You can connect a new incoming call to the Voice Mail Center and resume the current call. Information pIncoming calls are rejected during a videophone call, Remote Monitoring or answer-hold (On Hold), or while Record Message is working. The Missed call icon appears when the current call ends, and the call is recorded in Received Calls. (The Missed call icon might not appear and the received call record might not be recorded depending on the contracts and setting for Voice Mail, Call Waiting, and Call Forwarding Services.) Hold a Call to Make a New Call You can make a call to another party putting the current call on hold. 1 Enter another partys phone number during a calld You can talk with the party you have dialed. The call with the first party is automatically put on hold. pMulti calling is displayed when there is the party on hold. pEach time you press d, you can switch the parties you can talk with. End a Call to Answer the Held Call You can answer the held call after finishing the current call. The ring tone sounds. 1 During Multi callingh 2 Press d or Oo(
). pWhen the other party you have been talking with ends the call, press d to talk with the party on hold. End a Held Call 1 During Multi callingi(
Information
)End held call pWhen another call comes in while the current call is put on hold, the held call is released. pWhen another call comes in during Multi-calling, the Call Receiving display appears. Press +i(
) and select End held call to end the held call. If you select End talk, you can end the current call. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 449
<Call Forwarding>
Using Call Forwarding Service This service forwards incoming voice calls/videophone calls when you are in a place where radio waves do not reach, the power is turned off, or you do not answer calls within a specified time. pWhen Record Message (see page 71) or Remote Monitoring (see page 79) is simultaneously activated and you want to give Call Forwarding Service priority, set its ring time shorter than that for Record message setting or Remote monitoring. pWhen you do not answer an incoming voice call or videophone call while Call Forwarding Service is set to Activate, the call is stored as a missed call in Received calls, and the Missed call desktop icon appears on the Stand-by display. pWhen a call comes in while Call Forwarding Service is set to Activate, the ring tone
(specified by Select ring tone) will sound. (You can change the ring time for incoming calls. See page 450.) If you answer the call within the specified time, you can start talking. pYou can just press keys to forward incoming calls. Also, you can forward the call that comes in during a call. Basic Flow of Call Forwarding Service Step 1: Store the phone number of forwarding destination. Step 2: Set Call Forwarding Service to Activate. Step 3: A call comes into your FOMA phone. Step 4: The call is automatically forwarded to the specified destination if you do not answer. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 450 Use Call Forwarding Service 1 mServiceCall forwarding
Do the following operations. Item Activate Operation/Explanation
Register fwd numberEnter the phone number of forwarding destination. pPress Bo to select the phone number from the Search Phonebook display. (See page 98)
Set ring timeEnter a ring time (seconds). pEnter from 000 through 120 in three digits.
ActivateYES Deactivate
YES Change forwarding No. Setting if fwd. No. busy
Enter the phone number of forwarding destination
Select an item. Change No. Select this when Call Forwarding Service is activated. Change No. +Activate
. Select this while Call Forwarding Service is deactivated and you want to activate the Service as soon as the forwarding destination is changed. pPress Bo to select the phone number from the Search Phonebook display. (See page 98) You can set an incoming call to be connected to the Voice Mail Service Center when the forwarding destination is busy. You need to subscribe to Voice Mail Service to use it.
YES Check setting You can check the phone number and ring time of forwarding destination. Information pIf you answer the call while ringing, the call is not forwarded; you can talk. pIf you are out of reach of radio waves or the power is turned off, the ring tone does not sound and the call is automatically forwarded. The call fee from the forwarder to the forwarding destination is charged for the forwarder who has subscribed for the service. Information Information pIf the ring time for Call Forwarding Service is set to 0 seconds, the calls are not pIf you have not signed up for Call Forwarding Service or have not set the forwarding recorded in Received Calls. destination, the call will be a missed call. Set On/Off of Forwarding Guidance 1 1429d
Operate following the voice guidance. pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. Forward an Incoming Call during Ringing You can forward an incoming call to the phone number you specified as a Forwarding number by a simple key operation. Even if you do not set Call Forwarding Service to Activate, the service will be available using this function. 1 During ringingi(
)Call forwarding Forward Specified Calls to Specified Destination You can automatically forward the calls from the specified phone numbers stored in the Phonebook after the ring tone sounds for about one second, regardless of the Activate/Deactivate setting for Call Forwarding Service. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers. This setting is valid only when the caller notifies his/her phone number. It is advisable to activate Caller ID request at the same time. 1 Detailed Phonebook displayi(
Enter your Terminal Security CodeCall forwarding Call forwarding is indicated by . pTo release Call forwarding, perform the same operation.
)Restrictions Information pEven if you set this function, all incoming calls are not forwarded when you set Personal data lock while Call Forwarding Service is deactivated.
<Nuisance Call Blocking>
Using Nuisance Call Blocking Service You can register so as not to receive nuisance calls such as crank calls. Once you register a phone number for rejection, calls from that phone number is automatically rejected and the guidance answers the caller. pWhen a call comes in from the phone number stored for rejection, the ring tone does not sound. The call is not recorded in Received Calls, either. Relation between each Service and incoming calls while Nuisance Call Blocking Service is activated Service Handling of incoming calls from the caller rejected as Register Caller Voice Mail Service Call Rejection guidance is played back.
(Message is not held.) Call Rejection guidance is played back.
(Not forwarded to forwarding destination.) Call Rejection guidance is played back. Call Forwarding Service Call Waiting Service Caller ID Display Request Service Public Mode
(Drive Mode) For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. Call Rejection guidance is played back.
[Public Mode (Drive Mode) guidance is not played back.]
Call Rejection guidance is played back. 1 mServiceNuis. call blocking
Do the following operations. Item Register caller Operation/Explanation You can register the phone number of the call that arrived last for rejection.
YESOK 451 N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s Item Register selected No. Delete last entry Operation/Explanation You can register the specified phone number for rejection so that the call from that phone number does not come in.
Enter a phone numberYES pPress Bo to select the phone number from the Search Phonebook display, and press Vo to select from the Dialed Call list, and press Co to select from the Received Call list. You can delete the phone number registered last. Repeat the same procedures to delete phone numbers one by one from the one registered last.
YESOK Delete all entries YESOK Check No. of entries You can check the number of phone numbers registered for rejection.
<Caller ID Request>
Using Caller ID Display Request Service This service provides the guidance asking the caller ID notification against incoming voice calls/videophone calls without caller IDs, and then automatically disconnects the call. pThe call rejected by Caller ID Display Request Service is not stored in Received calls, and the Missed call desktop icon does not appear. Relation between each Service and incoming calls while Caller ID Display Request Service is activated Service Caller ID Request guidance is played back.
(Not forwarded to the forwarding destination.) Caller ID Request guidance is played back. Handling incoming call from the caller who does not notify a caller ID Voice Mail Service Caller ID Request guidance is played back. (Message is not held.) Call Forwarding Service Call Waiting Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Public Mode
(Drive Mode) For the call from the number registered to be rejected, the Call Rejection guidance is played back. Caller ID Request guidance is played back.
[Public Mode (Drive Mode) guidance is not played back.]
s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 452 1 mServiceCaller ID request
Do the following operations. Item Activate Deactivate Check setting Information Operation/Explanation
YESOK
YESOK You can check the setting contents of Caller ID Display Request Service. pIf you activate this service while you set Call setting w/o ID to Reject, this service has priority. pYou can set and confirm this setting from the FOMA phone with your own UIM inserted. You cannot remote-control the setting from landline phones, public phones, and other mobile phones.
<Dual Network>
Using Dual Network Service You can use a mova phone with the phone number for your FOMA phone. You can use either your FOMA phone or mova phone depending on the service area. pYou cannot use your FOMA phone and mova phone at the same time. pYou need to operate Dual Network Switching from the phone which is not using the service. 1 mServiceDual network
Do the following operations. Item Dual network switching Operation/Explanation You can switch to the FOMA phone so that you can use it. Operate when the FOMA is in the FOMA service area.
YESEnter your Network Security Code. pSee page 132 for the Network Security Code. Item Operation/Explanation Check setting You can check the setting contents of Dual Network Service. Dual Network Service by Key Operations You can press a few keys to use Dual Network Service instead of using the menu function in the FOMA phone. To switch the phones (from the phone which is not using the service) 1540d Enter your Network Security Code Guidance for switching h Check network status (from the phone you want to check) 1546d Check h Information pFor details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. pIf you press -0 through -9, -a, or -s following the voice guidance, you may not be able to end the call by pressing -h. In this case, press -h again.
<English Guidance>
Switching Guidance Language between Japanese and English You can set the guidance for network services such as Voice mail or the voice guidance such as for the out-of-service area, to be played back in English. Outgoing (Guidance to yourself) Language Japanese English Incoming (Guidance to the caller) Description Plays back the guidance in Japanese. Plays back the guidance in English. Language Japanese Japanese+English English+Japanese Description Plays back the guidance in Japanese. Plays back the guidance first in Japanese and then in English. Plays back the guidance first in English and then in Japanese. 1 mServiceEnglish guidance
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Guidance setting Select an item. Outgoing+Incoming . Sets the guidance for outgoing and incoming calls at a time. Outgoing call . Sets the guidance for outgoing calls. Incoming call . Sets the guidance for incoming calls.
Select a guidance language to be setYES pIf you select Outgoing+Incoming, set the guidance for outgoing calls, and then set the guidance for incoming calls. Check setting You can check the setting contents of the English guidance. Information pYou can set and confirm this setting from the FOMA phone with your own UIM inserted. You cannot remote-control the setting from landline phones, public phones, and other mobile phones.
<Service Numbers>
Using Service Numbers You can make calls to the DoCoMo Information Center or DoCoMo repair counter. pDepending on the UIM you use, the displayed items might differ or no items are displayed. 1 mServiceService numbers
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation
(DoCoMo repair counter) You can make a call to the repair counter.
Oo(
Dialing 113 starts.
) 453 N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s Item Operation/Explanation
(DoCoMo Information Center) You can make a call to the Information Center.
Oo(
Dialing 151 starts.
) Item Answer
<Arrival Call Act>
Selecting Response to Incoming Calls during a Call You can set how to manage a voice call/videophone call or 64K data communication that comes in during a call when you have signed up for Voice mail, Call forwarding or Call waiting. pWhen you have not signed up for Voice mail, Call forwarding, or Call waiting, you cannot answer calls that come in during a call. Operation/Explanation If you have set Call waiting to Activate and receive a voice call during a voice call, you can use Call waiting. Any of the following operations is available during a voice call (when Call waiting is set to Deactivate), during a videophone call, or during 64K data communication. pYou can answer incoming voice calls, videophone calls, or 64K data communication after finishing the current voice call, videophone call or 64K data communication. pFrom the Function menu, you can manually operate voice calls, videophone calls, or 64K data communication that come in during a call. pWhen Voice mail or Call forwarding is set to Activate, your FOMA phone follows that setting. pTo use Arrival call act, you need to set Set in-call arrival act to Activate. 1 mServiceArrival call act
Do the following operations. Item Voice mail Call forwarding Operation/Explanation You can connect voice calls or videophone calls that come in during a call to the Voice Mail Service Center, regardless of the setting for Call waiting or Voice mail. You can forward voice calls or videophone calls that come in during a call to the forwarding destination, regardless of the setting for Call waiting or Call forwarding. Call rejection You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, or 64K data communication that come in during a call. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 454 Set In-call Arrival Act You can activate/deactivate the functions you selected in Arrival Call Act and can check the setting contents. 1 mServiceSet in-call arrival act
Do the following operations. Item Activate Deactivate
YES
YES Operation/Explanation Check setting You can check the setting contents of In-call Arrival Act. Information pYou can set and confirm this setting from the FOMA phone with your own UIM inserted. You cannot remote-control the setting from landline phones, public phones, and other mobile phones.
<Remote Control>
Setting Remote Control You can set Voice mail or Call forwarding to be operated from touch-
tone landline phones, public phones, DoCoMo mobile phones, or others. pTo use Voice mail or Call forwarding overseas, you need to set Remote control to Activate in advance. 1 mServiceRemote control
Do the following operations. Item Activate Deactivate
YES
YES Operation/Explanation Check setting You can check the setting contents of Remote Control. Information pYou can set and confirm this setting from the FOMA phone with your own UIM inserted. You cannot remote-control the setting from landline phones, public phones, and other mobile phones.
<Multi Number>
Setting Additional Number You can add and use the additional number 1 and 2 at maximum as the phone numbers of your FOMA phone besides the basic number. pWhen you remove or replace the UIM, the multi number settings (name, phone number, etc.) stored in the FOMA phone might be erased. In this case, store them again. pThe name that corresponds to each multi number (Basic Number/Additional Number1/
Additional Number2) appears on the dialing display/Call Receiving display. pWhen you make a call from Redial, Dialed Calls, or Received Calls, the multi number of the call you dialed/received at that time appears and is dialed. Number Setting You can edit the registration name for the basic number, register additional numbers, and edit the registration names for them. 1 mServiceMulti numberNumber setting
Select a phone number. pYou can register/edit also by pressing i(
pressing l(
pSelect the basic number or registered additional number to check the registration name and phone number. pTo reset the registration name of the basic number, press i(
Reset BasicNo. name, then select YES. pTo delete the registered additional number, press i(
this or Delete all, then select YES.
) and selecting Edit or by
) and select Delete
) and select 2 Enter a registration nameEnter a phone number. pYou can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters for a registration name. pYou cannot edit the phone number of the basic number. Set Multi Number By switching this setting, you can make all calls from a specified phone number. 1 mServiceMulti numberSet multi number
Select a phone number. Basic Number. Dials by the contracted phone number. Additional Number1/2 . Dials by an additional number. pWhen the registration name is changed, each registration name is displayed. However, the registration name is not displayed during Personal Data Lock. 2 YES 455 N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s Set Own Phone Number when Making a Call Before making a call, you can select a phone number to be notified to the other party from the Function menu, and then make a call. 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record.
)Multi numberSelect a phone number. 2 i(
pTo cancel the additional number, select Cancel prefix. pWhen you have not signed up for Multi Number, your basic number is used for dialing even if you select an additional number. Information pIf you select Basic Number or Additional Number1/2, :590, :591, or
:592 is added after the phone numbers. Check Setting You can check a phone number set for Set multi number. 1 mServiceMulti numberCheck setting Set as Ring Tone You can set a ring tone for calls that come in to the additional number. 1 mServiceMulti numberSet as ring tone
Select an additional number. Go to step 2 on page 108. When the ring tone is set to Same as ring tone, the ring tone will be the one set for Phone or Videophone of Select ring tone. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 456
<2in1>
Using 2in1 You can use two phone numbers/mail addresses on your single FOMA phone. By using respective modes, you can operate your FOMA phone as if you are using two sets of them. The following three modes are available with 2in1:
A Mode You can use your phone number (Number A) to make calls and your i-mode mail address (Address A) to send/receive mail messages, and can browse their related data. B Mode You can use your 2in1 phone number (Number B) to make calls and access the sites for Web mail (Address B), and can browse their related data. Dual Mode This mode has the functions of both A Mode and B Mode. pFor details on 2in1, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [2in1]. pAddress B is used to send/receive mail messages via the dedicated Web mail site. pYou can use packet communication even in B Mode if you subscribe to i-mode. pYou can subscribe to either 2in1 or Multi Number. pWhen you replace a UIM with another one (2in1 contractor 2in1 contractor) while using 2in1, perform 2in1 function OFF (see page 457) and then set 2in1 setting to YES, or perform Auto acquire No. B (see page 418), to acquire the correct Number B. When you replace a UIM with another one (2in1 contractor 2in1 non-contractor), perform 2in1 function OFF as well to update the owners information to the correct one. pSee page 459 for how this service works for each mode. Activate 2in1 1 mService2in1 setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES When you activate 2in1, the 2in1 Setting Menu display appears. pThis display appears also by pressing and holding <
for at least one second and entering your Terminal Security Code from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. 2in1 Setting Menu display Configure 2in1 Setting 1 2in1 Setting Menu displayDo the following operations. Item Set call/receive No.
(Disp. call/receive No.) Item Mode switching Phonebook 2in1 setting Stand-by display Stand-by disp. Wide Operation/Explanation You can switch to the mode you use.
Select a mode. pWhen 2in1 is activated, the display for selecting the mode appears also by pressing and holding < for at least one second with the Stand-by display shown, and entering your Terminal Security Code. pWhen Mode link is activated, the confirmation display appears telling that the setting for Receive avoidance set. is also changed. You can change Phonebook 2in1 Setting for the Phonebook entry stored in the FOMA phone.
Select an item. Set to A . Sets as the Phonebook entry for A. You can use it in A Mode and Dual Mode. Set to B . Sets as the Phonebook entry for B. You can Set to Common . Sets as the common Phonebook entry for A use it in B Mode and Dual Mode. and B. You can use it in all modes.
Select a setting method. Set one . Sets a Phonebook entry you call up. Set some. Select multiple Phonebook entries from the Phonebook list you call up, then press l(
). Set group . Sets a Phonebook group you call up. You can set the Stand-by display that appears in Dual Mode or B Mode.
Select a modeSet the Stand-by display. pSee page 115 for how to set the Stand-by display. However, ippli display is not displayed. pIf you select Release, the setting returns to the default. Set call/receive No.
(Ringtone set. for No. B) Operation/Explanation You can set the character font and color of phone numbers or the name stored in Phonebook appears on the display for Number A and Number B respectively.
Number A or Number BSet the font and color. pSee page 128 for how to set the font and color. You can set a ring tone for Number B and a mail ring tone for Address B.
Select an item. Phone . Sets a ring tone for voice calls. Video-Phone. Sets a ring tone for videophone calls. Mail . Sets a ring tone for i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.
Select a type of ring tone. Go to step 3 on page 108. pIf you select Release, the setting returns to the default. 2in1 function OFF You can deactivate 2in1.
YES Receive avoidance set.
(Change recv. avoid.) Receive avoidance set.
(Check recv. avoidance) You can set Receive Avoidance Set. manually for Number A and Number B.
Change recv. avoid.Number A or Number B
Select an item. Unchange . Does not change Receive Avoidance Set. Receive . Receives the calls to the selected phone number. Avoid. Avoids the calls to the selected phone number.
l(
pWhen Mode link is activated, the confirmation display appears
) telling that it is necessary to deactivate it. You can check Receive Avoidance Set.
Check recv. avoidance N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 457 Make a Call in Dual Mode In Dual Mode, Number A dialing is the default setting when you make a call from the Phonebook entry of A/common setting or the dialed/
received call record of Number A, and Number B dialing is the default setting when you make a call from the Phonebook entry of B setting or the dialed/received call record of Number B. Further, you can select a phone number to be notified to the other party before making a call by the following operations. When Entering a Phone Number to Make a Call 1 Enter a phone numberd or Oo(
2 Number A or Number B pTo cancel, select Cancel.
) When Selecting Your Caller ID from Phonebook or Call Records redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 1 Bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, 2 i(
)2in1 dialNumber A or Number B pTo cancel, select 2in1 dial OFF. Item Receive avoidance set.
(Mode link) Operation/Explanation You can activate/deactivate Mode Link. When you activate it, Receive Avoidance Set. automatically changes by linking to switching of the mode of 2in1; You can receive a call only to Number A when in A Mode, only to Number B when in B Mode, and to both Number A and B when in Dual Mode.
Mode linkYES Receive avoidance set.
[Recv. avoid.
(abroad)]
You can operate Receive Avoidance Set. from overseas.
Recv. avoid. (abroad)YES
Operate following the voice guidance. pWhen Mode link is activated, the confirmation display appears telling that it is necessary to deactivate it. Information
<Stand-by display> <Stand-by disp. Wide>
pSee Set Stand-by Display on page 115 to set the Stand-by display in A Mode.
<Set call/receive No. (Ringtone set. for No. B)>
pSee Select Ring Tone on page 108 to set a ring tone for Number A and a mail ring tone for Address A. pIf a call comes in to Number B without notifying his/her caller ID, the ring tone set by Call setting w/o ID sounds.
<Receive avoidance set. (Mode link)>
pWhen Mode link is activated, you cannot switch the mode of 2in1 out of the service area. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 458 Services available to each mode pThe items whose operations differ depending on the mode are listed. (Items that work the same way as with A Mode are omitted.) Voice call Videophone call Phonebook3 Item Dialing Receiving Displaying4 A Mode Number A Phonebook entries with A setting/
common setting Phonebook entries with A setting/
common setting Phonebook entries with A setting B Mode Number B Receiving all calls2 Phonebook entries with B setting/
common setting Phonebook entries with B setting/
common setting Phonebook entries with B setting Dual Mode Selectable when dialing1 All Phonebook entries All Phonebook entries Phonebook entries with A setting Phonebook entries with A setting Phonebook entries with B setting Phonebook entries with A setting Copying senders 2in1 setting6 Phonebook entries with A setting Records for Number A/Address A Phonebook entries with B setting Records for Number B/Address B Phonebook entries with A setting All records At the time of Copy to UIM, 2in1 setting becomes common Changing to name5 2in1 setting when newly storing Receiving all entries using infrared rays/iC or from microSD card Receiving one entry using infrared rays/iC or from microSD card Copy to UIM Copy from UIM Displaying Redial Dialed calls Received calls Received address records Detailed sent Chaku-moji message Mail/SMS Displaying7 pSent/Received mail messages for Address A pSent/Received SMS messages for Number A
<FOMA phone>
pReceived mail messages saved to the
<FOMA phone>
pSent/Received mail messages for FOMA phone for Address B [mail messages you performed
(save to the FOMA phone) on Web mail site], notification mail for new mail, and alarm notification mail Address A, received mail messages saved to the FOMA phone for Address B, notification mail for new mail, and alarm notification mail pSent/Received SMS messages for pReceived SMS messages for Number B Number A
<Web mail site>
Sent/Received mail messages for Address B pReceived SMS messages for Number B
<Web mail site>
Sent/Received mail messages for Address B N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 459 Mail/SMS Item Sending A Mode B Mode pMail messages from Address A pSMS messages from Number A
<FOMA phone>
Unable to send mail/SMS messages Receiving
<Web mail site>
Mail messages from Address B Mail messages to Address A/SMS messages to Number A (with ring tone/
vibration) Mail messages to Address B that you performed the saving operation to the FOMA phone/Notification mail for new mail or alarm notification mail/SMS messages to Number B (without ring tone/vibration) Mail messages to Address A/SMS messages to Number A (without ring tone/vibration) Mail messages to Address B that you performed the saving operation to the FOMA phone/Notification mail for new mail or alarm notification mail/SMS messages to Number B (with ring tone/vibration) Dual Mode
<FOMA phone>
pMail messages from Address A8 pSMS messages from Number A
<Web mail site>
Mail messages from Address B Mail messages to Address A/SMS messages to Number A (with ring tone/
vibration) Mail messages to Address B that you performed the saving operation to the FOMA phone/Notification mail for new mail or alarm notification mail/SMS messages to Number B (with ring tone/vibration) Receiving all messages using infrared rays/iC or from microSD card Receiving one message using infrared rays/iC or from microSD card Copy to UIM (SMS only) Copy from UIM (SMS only) SMS messages for Number A Dialing Receiving PushTalk Phonebook Number A Displayable All usable Number A Recording voice mail messages Connection number for the service12 Forwarding to the forwarding destination Connection number for the service12 Number A Number A Copying senders state6 Mail for Address A/SMS messages for Number A SMS messages for Number A Undisplayable Unusable Number A Undisplayable Usable9 Number B Recording all voice mail messages11 Number B13 SMS messages for Number A Number A Displayable Usable10 Number A/Number B Selectable when dialing Forwarding all calls Number B14 Selectable when dialing s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N PushTalk i-ppli Own number Voice mail Call forwarding 1 The Phonebook entry with A setting or common setting is dialed by Number A and the Phonebook entry with B setting is dialed by Number B by default. 2 When you set Call acceptance, you can receive calls only from the specified phone numbers regardless of the current mode. When you set Call rejection, you can reject calls only from the specified phone numbers regardless of the current mode. 3 When you set a Phonebook entry as secret data, secret mode has priority. 4 Regardless of the mode, all the Phonebook entries on the microSD card are displayed. 460 5 This function checks the phone number/mail address with the Phonebook, and changes it to the name of the Phonebook entry for displaying when the callers phone number, receivers phone number, senders phone number, senders mail address, or receivers mail address is stored in the Phonebook. 6 When the senders model does not support 2in1, all data files are set with A setting. 7 In B Mode, mail messages and SMS messages on the microSD card are not displayed if they do not have B Mode attribute information. 8 When you compose a mail message in Dual Mode, you can select a receivers mail address from the Phonebook entries set with B setting, however, note that the mail message is sent from Address A. 9 Except message application programs, mail-linked i-ppli programs, and the i-ppli Stand-by display. 10 Except the i-ppli Stand-by display. 11 Up to 20 voice mail messages for Number A and Number B can be recorded in total. appears when the voice mail messages for Number A are recorded, and the icon such as appears when the voice mail messages for Number B are The icon such as recorded. 12 You can activate/deactivate the service and make other settings for Number A and Number B respectively. 13 When you execute Check setting of Voice mail, the confirmation display appears asking which number you use for dialing, Number A or Number B. 14 When you execute Check setting of Call forwarding, the confirmation display appears asking which number you use for dialing, Number A or Number B. Information pWhen you delete an image or melody set to a Phonebook entry with B setting or move it to the microSD card in A Mode (or a Phonebook entry with A setting in B Mode), the message telling that the file is set to another function does not appear. pIn B Mode, you cannot use the following mail functions:
Composing i-mode mail/SMS messages Receive option Mail settings Mail To function pIn Dual Mode, you cannot compose i-mode mail/SMS messages, make a PushTalk call, and use Photo-sending from a redial item/dialed call record for Number B, and received Templates Forward Chat mail i-ppli To function from i-mode mail text Photo-sending Reply/Reply with quote Displaying Outbox/Draft call record for Number B. pIn Dual Mode, you cannot execute Reply and Reply with quote from the mail/SMS message sent to Number B/Address B. pRegardless of current mode, when you make an emergency call at 110/119/118 calls are made from Number A:
pWhen you make a call/AT command call from an external device, the call is made from Number A in A Mode and Dual Mode, and from Number B in B Mode. pRegardless of the current mode, you can save up to 2,500 i-mode mail messages including SMS messages in the Inbox. pThe i-mode mail/SMS messages sent to Address B/Number B cannot be replied to, however, they are not saved to the folder set to Reply impossible. pDEL all read mails, DEL all recv. mails, Delete read mails, Delete all SMS-R, DEL all frm folder, and Delete all apply to all the i-mode mail/SMS messages. pRegardless of the current mode, Delete all of the Phonebook applies to all the Phonebook entries. 461 N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s
<OFFICEED>
Using OFFICEED OFFICEED is an in-group fixed bill service that applies to the specified IMCS (In-building Mobile Communication System). The separate subscription is required for use. For details, check the DoCoMo-enterprise-oriented web page (http://
www.docomo.biz/d/212/). (Japanese only) Use OFFICEED Out-of-Area Forwarding Function You can use the OFFICEED out-of-area forwarding function to forward OFFICEED calls to out-of-OFFICEED area. 1 mServiceOFFICEED
Do the following operations. Item Operation/Explanation Area display setting You can set whether to display while you are in the OFFICEED area.
ON or OFF pIf you select ON, the confirmation display appears asking whether to set Area Display Setting to ON. Activate forwarding You can activate the OFFICEED out-of-area forwarding function.
YES Deactivate forwarding You can deactivate the OFFICEED out-of-area forwarding function.
YES Check forwarding set. You can check the setting of the OFFICEED out-of-area forwarding function. s e c i v r e S k r o w t e N 462
<Additional Service>
Using Additional Services When a new network service is provided by DoCoMo, you can register that service in the menu to use it. Add New Service 1 mServiceAdditional serviceAdditional service
Highlight <Not stored> and press i(
Add new service pYou can change the setting for the registered service by pressing i(
and selecting Edit. pTo delete the registered service, press i(
Delete all, then select YES OK.
) and select Delete this or
) pYou can register up to 10 network services. 2 Enter a service name
Enter number or Enter USSD number Select either Enter number or Enter USSD number according to the service contents you add. pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. 3 Enter either a special number or a service code (USSD number)YES Information pYou need to check and enter Special number or Service code supplied by DoCoMo for using the services. Special number
. Number for connecting the Service Center. Service code (USSD number)
. With the FOMA phone, enter it as USSD. The code is for notifying to the Service Center. Use Registered Service 1 mServiceAdditional serviceAdditional service
Select a serviceOo(
) Dialing to the Service Center starts. Register Additional Guidance For when you execute the additional services, you can register up to 10 additional guidance items which correspond to the codes (USSD) that are returned from the Service Center. The additional guidance name is displayed when the registered command is returned as a reply. 1 mServiceAdditional serviceAdditional guidance
Highlight <Not stored> and pressi(
Add new guidance pYou can check the setting by selecting the registered guidance. pYou can change the setting of the registered guidance by pressing i(
and selecting Edit. pTo delete the registered guidance, press i(
Delete all, then select YES OK.
) and select Delete this or
) pEnter the code (USSD) provided by DoCoMo. 2 Enter a command. 3 Enter an additional guidance nameYES pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 463 464 PC Connection Data Communication Available from FOMA Phone . 466 Before Using. 467 Preparation Flow for Data Transfer (OBEX Communication)
. 468 Preparation Flow for Data Communication . 469 AT Command . 469 About CD-ROM. 470 Introduction of DoCoMo Keitai Datalink . 470 For details on data communication, refer to the PDF version of Manual for PC Connection on the provided CD-ROM or DoCoMo web page. To see the PDF version of Manual for PC Connection, you need to have Adobe Reader. If it is not installed in your personal computer, install Adobe Reader from the provided CD-ROM to see it. For details such as how to use it, refer to Adobe Reader Help. 465 Data Communication Available from FOMA Phone The data communication services you can use by connecting the FOMA phone to a personal computer are categorized into data transfer (OBEX communication), and packet communication/64K data communication. The FOMA phone is equipped with the adapter function for packet communication. pYou might not be able to activate or operate other functions during data communication. See Multiaccess Combination Patterns on page 510 for details. pThe 64K data communication is not available overseas. pTo perform the packet communication overseas, perform it via the IP connection.
(You cannot perform the packet communication via the PPP connection.) Data Transfer (OBEX Communication) You can exchange data files such as images, music files, Phonebook entries and mail messages with another FOMA phone or a personal computer. Infrared data exchange
(See page 367) iC communication
(See page 372) Bluetooth communication connection
(See page 425) FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 microSD card (See page 355) DoCoMo keitai datalink (See page 470) P906i P906i n o i t c e n n o C C P 466 Packet Communication This service requires a communication fee according to the amount of data you sent and received. (Maximum download speed: 3.6 Mbps, Maximum upload speed: 384 kbps) It uses an access point which supports FOMA packet communication such as DoCoMo Internet access service mopera U/mopera. To use this service, connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer via the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) or Bluetooth communication, and then carry out settings. The packet communication is suitable for using applications through the high-speed communication. pThe packet communication is charged according to the amount of data you sent and received. Note that you are charged a high communication fee for the massive data communication such as browsing Internet web pages having many images or downloading data files. pThe data is sent/received at the maximum speed of 384 kbps outside the FOMA High-speed Area. pWhen you use the packet communication with sigmarion II, sigmarion III, or musea of DoCoMos PDA, the data is sent/received at the maximum speed of 384 kbps. High-speed communication for FOMA High-speed Area is not supported. 64K Data Communication This service requires a communication fee according to the duration of connection. By connecting the FOMA phone to a personal computer via the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) or Bluetooth communication, you can execute communication. To use this service, connect to an access point which supports FOMA 64K data communication such as DoCoMo Internet access service mopera U/mopera, or an ISDN-synchronous 64K access point. pThe 64K data communication is charged according to the duration of connection. Note that a communication fee becomes expensive if you use this service for a long time. Information pThe FOMA phone does not support Remote Wakeup. pThe FOMA phone does not support the FAX communication. pYou can perform data communications by connecting the FOMA phone with DoCoMos PDA sigmarion ll, sigmarion lll, or musea. To use sigmarion ll or musea, the update is required. For details such as how to update them, refer to the DoCoMo web page. Before Using Charge of Internet service provider To use the Internet, you need to pay the charge for the Internet service provider you use. Besides the FOMA service fee, you need to directly pay this charge to the Internet service provider. For details on the charge, contact the Internet service provider you use. You can use the DoCoMo Internet access service, mopera U/ mopera. To use mopera U, subscription (charged) is required. To use mopera, subscription and monthly charge are not required. However, the maximum communication speed of sending/receiving data is limited to 384 kbps. Setting access point (Internet service provider, etc.) The access points for the packet communication and 64K data communication differ. To use the packet communication, connect to an access point which supports packet communication. To use the 64K data communication, connect to an access point which supports FOMA 64K data communication or ISDN-synchronous 64K. pYou cannot connect to the DoPa access point. About user authentication for accessing network User authentication (ID and password) may be required at connection to some access points. In this case, enter your ID and password on the communication software program (dial-up network). ID and password are specified by the Internet service provider or network administrator of the access point. For details, contact the provider or network administrator. About access authentication for using browser If you need FirstPass (user certificate), install the FirstPass PC software from the provided CD-ROM and make the setting. For details, refer to FirstPassManual (PDF format) in the FirstPassPCSoft folder on the CD-ROM. Adobe Reader (version 6.0 or higher is recommended) is required to see FirstPassManual (PDF format). If it is not installed in your personal computer, install Adobe Reader from the provided CD-ROM to see it. For details such as how to use it, refer to Adobe Reader Help. Conditions of packet communication and 64K data communication To carry out the communication by using the FOMA phone in Japan, the following conditions are required:
pThe personal computer to be used can use the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option). pWhen connecting using Bluetooth communication, the personal computer should support Dial-up Networking Profile of Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.2, or Ver. 2.0+EDR. pThe PDA to be used should support FOMA packet communication and 64K data communication. pWithin the FOMA service area pFor packet communication, the access point should support packet communication of the FOMA. pFor 64K data communication, the access point should support the FOMA 64K data communication or ISDN-synchronous 64K. Even when these conditions are satisfied, if the base station is congested or the radio wave conditions are bad, you may not carry out the communication. P C C o n n e c t i o n 467 Operating Environment For the data communication, the following operating environment is required for your personal computer:
PC main unit PC/AT compatible model When using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option):
USB port (Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev1.1 compliant) When using Bluetooth communication:
Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.2, or Ver. 2.0+EDR compliant (Dial-up Networking Profile) Display resolution 800 x 600 dots, High Color 16 bits or more recommended. OS Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista (Japanese version in each) Memory requirements Windows 2000: 64 Mbytes or more Windows XP: 128 Mbytes or more Windows Vista: 512 Mbytes or more Hard disk space size Unused memory space of 5 Mbytes or more pThe operation on the upgraded OS is not guaranteed. pThe memory requirements and hard disk space size may vary depending on the system environment. n o i t c e n n o C C P Necessary Devices The following hardware and software programs are required besides the FOMA phone and personal computer:
pFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) or FOMA USB Cable (option) pProvided FOMA P906i CD-ROM For USB connection Information pUse a dedicated FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 or FOMA USB Cable. The USB cable for personal computers cannot be used because the shape of the connector differs. pIn this manual, operations are described for the case of using FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02. pIf you use a USB hub, the devices may not work correctly. 468 Connect FOMA Phone to Other Devices The following three ways are available for connecting the FOMA phone to another device:
Use FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 Connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer provided with the USB port using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option). This way of connection applies to all types of communications such as packet communication, 64K data communication, and data transfer. pSet USB mode setting to Communication mode. (See page 363) pYou need to install the FOMA communication setup files (driver) before use. Use Bluetooth communication Connect a Bluetooth communication compatible personal computer wirelessly to the FOMA phone.This way of connection applies to packet communication and 64K data communication. pWhen you perform data communication by using Bluetooth function, the high speed communication is applied to the FOMA phone. However, you may not be able to communicate at the maximum speed because of the limit of communication speed of Bluetooth function. pUse a Bluetooth linked standard modem or a Bluetooth modem provided by the Bluetooth maker. Contact the maker of your personal computer or Bluetooth maker for how to install and to set up. Use Infrared Data Exchange By using infrared rays, you can send/receive data between your FOMA phone and another FOMA phone, mobile phone, or personal computer provided with the infrared data exchange function. (See page 367) This applies only to data transfer. Preparation Flow for Data Transfer
(OBEX Communication) When you use the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option), install the FOMA communication setup files (driver). Download and install the FOMA communication setup files (driver). pInstall the FOMA communication setup files from the provided CD-ROM or download them from the DoCoMo web page and install. Data transfer Preparation Flow for Data Communication The following outline shows a preparation flow for packet communication or 64K data communication:
For details, refer to the PDF version of Manual for PC Connection. When installing FOMA communication setup files (driver) Install the FOMA communication setup files from the provided FOMA P906i CD-ROM or download them from the DoCoMo web page and install. You are advised to install FOMA PC setup software for establishing the APN or dial-up setting easily when you communicate. For USB connection Connect a personal computer to the FOMA phone using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option). For Bluetooth connection Connect a personal computer wirelessly to the FOMA phone using Bluetooth communication. Download and install the FOMA communication setup files (driver). pInstall the FOMA communication setup files from the provided CD-ROM or download them from the DoCoMo web page and install. Check the setting after installation. Check the modem. Install the FOMA PC setup software. Carry out the setting manually without using the FOMA PC setup software. Connect. Install FOMA Communication Setup Files (Driver) Installing the FOMA communication setup files (driver) is required when you connect the FOMA phone to your personal computer via the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) for the first time. Prepare Bluetooth Communication You can make data communication by connecting a Bluetooth communication compatible personal computer wirelessly to your FOMA phone. pSee page 425 for details on Bluetooth function. FOMA PC Setup Software To connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer and perform the packet communication or 64K data communication, you need to configure various settings for the communication. By using the FOMA PC setup software, you can easily carry out the settings. If required, you can set the packet communication and 64K data communication without using the FOMA PC setup software. AT Command AT commands are used to specify and modify the functions of the FOMA phone on the personal computer. P C C o n n e c t i o n 469 Introduction of DoCoMo Keitai Datalink DoCoMo keitai datalink is the software program that enables you to back up your Phonebook entries and i-mode mail messages to your personal computer and edit them. The software program is distributed from the DoCoMo web page. For details and how to download, refer to the web page below. You can access the web page below from the provided CD-ROM as well. http://datalink.nttdocomo.co.jp/ (Japanese only) pFor details on how to download, transferable data, operating environments such as compatible OS, installation method, operating method, and restrictions, refer to the web page above. For operations after installation, refer to Help contained in the software program. To use the DoCoMo keitai datalink, you need to separately have the USB Cable (option). About CD-ROM The provided CD-ROM contains the software programs for using data communication on your FOMA phone, Manual for PC Connection and Kuten Code List (PDF file). For details, refer to the provided CD-ROM.
<Contained software programs/PDF>
FOMA (FOMA Communication Setup Files) FOMA PC (FOMA PC Setup Software) FOMA (FOMA byte counter) datalink (DoCoMo keitai datalink information) FirstPass PC (FirstPass PC Software) mopera U (mopera U/U /U
/FOMA)
[mopera U information (mopera U start up tool/mopera U connection & setting tool/
mopera U requesting original data/FOMA byte counter)]
(Napster information) PDF version of /Manual for PC Connection PDF version of /Kuten Code List Adobe Reader When a warning message appears When you set the CD-ROM on your personal computer, an alert message might appear on the display as shown below. This alert message appears depending on the security settings of Internet Explorer, however, you can use your computer without any problem. Click (YES). The display below is for when you use Windows XP. It might differ depending on the environment of the computer you use. n o i t c e n n o C C P 470 Overseas Use Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING) . 472 Services Available Overseas . 472 Confirmation for Using . 473 Making a Call from the Country You Stay . 475 Receiving a Call . 476 Setting a Network to Use. <Switch 3G/GSM> 477 Setting a Search Method of Carrier
. <Network Search Mode> 477 Setting a Carrier to Preferentially Connect to
. <PLMN Setting> 478 Displaying a Carrier on the Stand-by Display
. <Operator Name Display> 478 Confirming a Communication System. <Status in the Area> 478 Setting Guidance during Roaming
. <Set Roaming Guidance> 479 Setting Your FOMA Phone to Reject Calls during Roaming
. <Call Barring> 479 Using Network Services during Roaming . 480 471 Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING) International Roaming (WORLD WING) is a service that enables you, using local carriers networks, to make calls or to communicate in foreign countries where are out of the service area of the FOMA network. pThere are following three communication systems for network services overseas:
3G Network Third generation mobile communications system that conforms to the world standard specifications, 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project). This is the regional standards organization for developing common technical specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000). GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) Network The most widespread 2G digital mobile standard system available worldwide. GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Network A 2.5G mobile standard system enabling high-speed packet communications by GPRS using GSM communication method. pAt the time of purchase, the FOMA phone is set to automatically switch networks in foreign countries. (See page 477) pYou are advised to read the following booklets to use your FOMA phone overseas:
Booklet title Mobile Phone Users Guide
[International Services]
Contents Describes the details of International Roaming Service such as the contents of the service, billing, and cautions. Mobile Phone Users Guide
[Network Services]
Describes the contents of each local network service and cautions. e s U s a e s r e v O Information pQuick Manual For Overseas Use is attached to the end of this manual. Refer to it when you use the FOMA phone overseas. pFor the country codes, international call access codes, and international prefix numbers for the universal number, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [International Services] or the DoCoMo Global Service web page. pOverseas use fee is added to your monthly bill. You might be requested, however, to pay according to the invoice for the following month on and after depending on the overseas carrier of your stay. Note that the invoice for the total of the fees to be paid for the month might be separately issued. 472 Services Available Overseas Communication Service 3G GSM GPRS Voice call1 In the country you stay, you can use the phone number as used in Japan to make or take local calls, or to make international calls to Japan or to other countries. Videophone call1 You can make international videophone calls to users of the specified 3G mobile phone carriers overseas and FOMA users. i-mode Perform the overseas usage settings. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. i-mode mail You can send/receive i-mode mail overseas by the same address as used in Japan. SMS i-Channel2 Packet communication by connecting with a personal computer
: Available 1 In B Mode or Dual Mode of 2in1, you cannot make calls from Number B. 2 Auto-updates are automatically suspended when you are connected to an overseas carrier. To resume the auto-updates of i-Channel, you need to make the i-Channel settings again. When you use i-Channel overseas, the communication fee for auto-
updates of the basic channel also applies. (In Japan, the fee is included in the monthly service bill.)
: Not available pThe GPS functions and 64K data communications are not available overseas. pYou cannot dial from an additional number even if you are the user of Multi Number. pSome services are not available depending on the carrier or network. For connectable countries, regions, and carriers, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. Confirmation for Using Confirmation before Departure Confirm below in Japan before you use the FOMA phone overseas. About contract pYou do not need to subscribe to WORLD WING if you have subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005. If you offered that you do not need WORLD WING at the time you signed up for the FOMA service, or when you have canceled WORLD WING midway, you are required to newly subscribe to WORLD WING. pIf you have signed up for the FOMA service before August 31, 2005, and have not yet subscribed to WORLD WING, you are required to subscribe to it. pInsert the UIM (other than blue one) that supports WORLD WING into the FOMA phone. (See page 39) pThis service is not available with some billing plans. About charging batteries pSee page 20 for cautions for handling AC adapter. pSee page 42 and page 43 for charging batteries using AC adapter. About the setting of network service When you have signed up for network services, you can operate to activate/deactivate the network services from overseas except some operations. pEven with the network services that you can operate to activate/deactivate, you might not be able to use the services depending on the overseas carrier. Also, some network services are available only in Japan. To use network services overseas, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [International Services] or Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services] before departure. About SMS Even during international roaming, you can send/receive SMS messages to and from the other party who uses the FOMA phone in Japan or overseas or who uses overseas carriers. pWhen you enter the destination address for sending an SMS message to the other party who is using an overseas carrier, add + and a country code to the head of the destination phone number. When the destination phone number begins with 0, however, enter the phone number except for the 0. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as italy. pWhen the text of an SMS message sent to the other party who is using an overseas carrier contains characters that do not support those on the destination phone, the characters might not be correctly displayed. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [International Services] or Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. Check Required at the Country You Stay After you arrive at the country overseas, once turn the power off and then turn on to automatically set an available carrier in that country. pThe network system you are currently using appears at the upper side of the display. 3G network that supports packet communication 3G network that does not support packet communication GSM network GPRS network pWhen Operator name display is set to Display ON, the connected carrier appears on the Stand-by display. pWhen Network search mode is set to Auto, and you move out of the service area of the network you are connected to, the available network of another carrier is automatically searched for and you are re-connected to it. About inquiries For lost, stolen, and cost settlement, or malfunction of your FOMA phone overseas, refer to Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas or Failures encountered overseas on the back page of this manual. Note that you are still charged the call and communication fees incurred after you lose it or have it stolen. pYou need to add the international call access code that is assigned to the country you stay or international prefix number for the universal number to the head of each phone number for inquiries. pFor the latest information about the international call access codes and international prefix numbers for the universal number, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. O v e r s e a s U s e 473 Country codes for major countries Use the following country codes when you make international calls or when you set Intl Dial Assist. (As of March 2008) International call access codes for major countries (Table 1) The international call access codes for major countries are listed below.
(As of March 2008) Service area Country code Service area Country code Service area Access code Service area Access code Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxembourg Macau Malaysia 61 32 55 1 86 420 45 358 33 49 30 852 36 91 62 353 39 352 853 60 Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom 377 31 64 47 63 48 351 7 65 82 34 46 41 886 66 90 971 44 United States of America 1 Vietnam 84 pFor the code for the countries other than listed in the table, or for details, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxembourg Macau Malaysia e s U s a e s r e v O 474 0011 00 Monaco Netherlands 0041/0014 New Zealand 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 810 001 001 00 00 00 002 001 00 00 00 Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States of America 011 Vietnam 00 011 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 001 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 International prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2) The international prefix numbers for the universal number for major countries are listed below. (As of March 2008) Service area International prefix number Service area International prefix number Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada China Colombia Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong Hungary Ireland Israel Italy 00 0011 00 00 0021 00 011 00 009 00 990 00 00 001 00 00 014 00 Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands New Zealand Norway Peru Philippines Portugal Singapore South Africa South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand United Kingdom 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 001 09 001 00 00 00 00 001 00 United States of America 011 Check Required after Homecoming After you return to Japan, the FOMA network is automatically searched and connected. Set Switch 3G/GSM to Auto or 3G. Set to the FOMA network (DoCoMo) with Network search mode set to Auto or Manual. Making a Call from the Country You Stay You can make voice calls or videophone calls from overseas using international roaming service. Make a Call to Outside the Country You Stay (Including Japan) Use Phonebook to Make an International Call to Japan When you make an international call from the country you stay to a landline phone or mobile phone in Japan, you can operate from the Phonebook easily. pThis is available only when the phone number stored in the Phonebook begins with 0. You need to set Auto assist setting of Intl dial assist to ON and to Japan (81) in advance. (Setting at purchase) pPress l(
1 Detailed Phonebook displayd or Oo(
2 Dial
) to make an international videophone call. 0 at the head of the phone number is replaced with +81 when dialed. pWhen you select Original phone No., the phone number is dialed as stored in
) pThe numbers are not available in some areas. pYou can use the universal numbers only in countries listed in the table above. pWhen making a call from a hotel, you may be separately charged the phone usage fee from the hotel. (You are responsible for the fee.) You should check with the hotel before making a call. pNote that, in many cases, the universal number may not be used from a mobile phone, public phone, or hotel phone, etc. the Phonebook. Information pFrom a redial item or dialed call record, or by entering phone number directly, you can make an international call by the same operation. 475 O v e r s e a s U s e Use + to Make an International Call Press and hold 0 for at least one second, then you can enter +
when dialing. By using +, you can make international calls from the country you stay to the countries such as Japan. 1 0(for at least one second)
Enter numbers in order of country code area code (city code)destination phone number
d or Oo(
) pEnter 81 as a country code when you make an international call to Japan. pWhen the area code (city code) begins with 0, enter it except for the 0. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy. pPress l(
) to make an international videophone call. International Dial If you have stored a country code by Country Code Setting (see page 61), you can make international calls from the country you stay to the country such as Japan. The following are the procedures for overseas. 1 Enter a phone number or bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record, or received call record. 2 i(
)Intl dial assist
Select the name of the country you make a call to
d or Oo(
pPress l(
) to make an international videophone call.
) Make a Call to a Phone in the Country You Stay In the same way as you do in Japan, you can make a voice call or videophone call by entering the destinations phone number. 1 Enter a destination phone numberd or Oo(
pPress l(
pTo make a call in the country you stay using the Phonebook, select Original
) to make a videophone call.
) phone No. in step 2 on page 475. 476 e s U s a e s r e v O Make a Call to a Person who is Staying Overseas and Using WORLD WING When you make a call to a person who is also internationally roaming, make the call in the same way as to make international calls to Japan even if he/she is in the country you stay. Receiving a Call In the same operation as you do in Japan, you can answer voice calls and videophone calls overseas. (See page 64 Having calls to your FOMA phone made from Japan You can receive international calls from Japan by just having your phone number entered in the same way as the callers usually do in Japan. Making a call entering 090-XXXX-XXXX or Making a call entering 080-XXXX-XXXX Having calls to your FOMA phone made from countries other than Japan Regardless of the country you stay, you receive calls via Japan; therefore, have the caller enter international call access code of his/her country and 81 (Japan) in the same way as the caller makes a call to Japan and then enter your phone number whose 0 is excluded from the head. Making a call entering international call access code of the country of the caller-
81-90-XXXX-XXXX or Making a call entering international call access code of the country of the caller-
81-80-XXXX-XXXX Information pEven for incoming calls, you are charged a receiving fee including an international forwarding fee, depending on the country or region. pEven when a caller tried to notify of his/her caller ID, it might not be notified depending on the overseas carrier. Also, a different number from the other partys caller ID might be notified depending on the callers network. pWhile you use the FOMA phone overseas, Call setting w/o ID, Reject unknown, and Restrictions (except Restrict Dialing) might not work. In addition, it might work as Answer regardless of the setting of Arrival call act. Information pWhen a call comes in during international roaming, the call is forwarded from Japan regardless of whatever country the call is from. The caller is charged a call fee to Japan and the receiver is charged a receiving fee including an international forwarding fee.
<Switch 3G/GSM>
Setting a Network to Use 1 x(for at least one second)Select a network type. Auto. Uses 3G, GSM, or GPRS network. (3G network has priority.) 3G . Uses 3G network. GSM/GPRS . Uses GSM or GPRS network. Information pIf you set to Auto or 3G, FOMA network is used in Japan. If you set to GSM/
GPRS, you cannot connect to FOMA network, the FOMA phone is placed in out-of-service-area state. pWhile another menu function is activated or display appears on the horizontal display, the setting display for this function is not displayed by pressing and holding -x for at least one second from the Stand-by display, but the display for the menu function in use is displayed.
<Network Search Mode>
Setting a Search Method of Carrier You can set whether to automatically search a network and connect to another carrier when you move out of the service area. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Network search modeSelect an item. Auto . Automatically re-connects to another carrier. The setting is completed. Manual. Connect manually to a carrier on the list. is displayed for unavailable carriers. Network re-search
. When set to Auto, automatically switches to an available carrier. The setting is completed. When set to Manual, displays the list of carriers. 2 Select a carrier. pThe displayed carrier varies depending on the setting of Switch 3G/GSM. pPress l(
) to display the list of carriers again. Information pYou cannot set this function if the UIM is not inserted. pWhen you move out of the service area while this function is set to Manual, appears. pWhen you have set this function to Manual and turn off and on the FOMA phone out of the service area, select a carrier again in the service area. O v e r s e a s U s e 477
<PLMN Setting>
Setting a Carrier to Preferentially Connect to You can specify the priority order of carriers you are connected to for when Network search mode is set to Auto. You can store up to 20 carriers.
PLMN setting pYou can select the stored carrier to check the stored contents. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming 2 i(
pTo search for a carrier by a name of country, press l(
country name. You can search also by pressing l(
Country list and entering a country name.
)PLMN list select
) and select a
) again from the
)Select a network type 3 Select a carrierOo(
l(
)YES Function Menu while PLMN Setting is Displayed Operation/Explanation You can store the carrier you are currently connected to.
l(
See Setting a Carrier to Preferentially Connect to on page 478.
)YES You can store a carrier by entering a country code and operator code. You can store carriers not found in the list.
Enter a country code (3 digits) and operator code (2 to 3 digits)Select a network typel(
Select a number to change tol(
YESl(
YESl(
)YES
)YES
)YES
)YES Function menu Set VPLMN to UPLMN PLMN list select PLMN manual select Change priority Delete this Delete all e s U s a e s r e v O 478 Information pWhen the DoCoMo network is available, you are preferentially connected to it regardless of this setting. pThis setting is stored on the UIM. pYou cannot set this function if the UIM is not inserted.
<Operator Name Display>
Displaying a Carrier on the Stand-by Display You can select whether to display, on the Stand-by display, the carrier you are currently connected to. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Operator name displayDisplay ON or Display OFF When you set to Display ON The carriers name is displayed on the Stand-by display. However, when you use the DoCoMo network, the carrier is not displayed. Carriers name
<Status in the Area>
Confirming a Communication System You can display whether the carrier you are currently connecting to supports the circuit switching (CS)1 and packet switching (PS)2. 1 The communication system used for voice calls, videophone calls, SMS, etc. 2 The communication system used for i-mode, i-mode mail, etc. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingStatus in the area
<Set Roaming Guidance>
Setting Guidance during Roaming For an incoming voice call or videophone call during international roaming, you can have the voice guidance played back to the caller to that effect. pEven when you activate Roaming Guidance, the caller may hear the guidance in a foreign language depending on the overseas carrier. pEven when you deactivate Roaming Guidance, the caller hears a calling tone set by the overseas carrier. pYou need to set this function in Japan. 1 mServiceSet Roaming guidance
Do the following operations. Item Activate Deactivate Check setting Operation/Explanation
YES
YES You can check the setting contents of Set Roaming guidance.
YES
<Call Barring>
Setting Your FOMA Phone to Reject Calls during Roaming pThis setting might not be available depending on the overseas carrier. 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Call barringDo the following operations. Item Activate Operation/Explanation
Select an item. Bar all incoming. Bars all calls including voice calls and Bar VP call/data ex. Bars only videophone calls. videophone calls. Deactivate Check setting
YESEnter your Network Security Code. pSee page 132 for the Network Security Code.
YESEnter your Network Security Code. pSee page 132 for the Network Security Code. You can check the setting contents of Call barring.
YES O v e r s e a s U s e 479 Using Network Services during Roaming You can use some network services such as Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service from overseas. You can set Roaming Guidance as well. pSee page 458 for Receive avoidance set. of 2in1. Operate Voice Mail Service from the Country You Stay 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Voice mail (Int.)Select an itemYES
Operate following the voice guidance. Operate Call Forwarding Service from the Country You Stay 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Call forwarding (Int.)Select an itemYES
Operate following the voice guidance. Operate Caller ID Request Service from the Country You Stay 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Caller ID req. (Int.)YES
Operate following the voice guidance. Information pWhen you use those services from overseas, you are charged an international call fee of the country you stay. pYou need to set Remote control beforehand. pFor the details on network services, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [International Services] and Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. Operate Roaming Guidance from the Country You Stay 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Roaming guidance (Int.)YES
Operate following the voice guidance. Operate Remote Control from the Country You Stay 1 mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming
Remote control (Int.)YES
Operate following the voice guidance. e s U s a e s r e v O 480 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Function List . 482 List of Characters Assigned to Keys (5-touch Input Method)
. 501 List of Characters Assigned to Keys (2-touch Input Method)
. 502 List of Characters Assigned to Keys (NIKO-touch Input Method)
. 503 Symbol List. 504 Pictograph List. 507 Common Phrase List . 509 Multiaccess Combination Patterns . 510 Multitask Combination Patterns . 511 Services Available with FOMA Phones . 513 Introduction of Options and Related Equipment . 514 Interfacing to External Devices Introduction of Software for Playing Back Moving Images . 514 Links with AV Equipment . 514 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting. 515 Error Messages . 516 Warranty and Maintenance Services . 526 i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site . 527 Updating Software . <Software Update> 528 Protecting FOMA Phone from Data Causing Failure
. <Scanning Function> 534 Specifications. 536 Number of Savable/Storable/Protectable Items in FOMA Phone
. 537 SAR Certification Information and Other Information . 538 Export Administration Regulations . 540 481
, and Reset TV settings on page 311 for the items indicated by , to Function List Execute Reset settings (all reset) on page 433 for the items indicated by return to the respective defaults. If you execute Initialize on page 433, all items return to the defaults. pEven if you execute Initialize, the pre-installed i-ppli programs you have deleted are not restored. Main menu item Lower sub-menu item Sub-menu item Setting at purchase Mail Inbox Outbox Pre-installed data only (except inside the UIM) User created folder: None i-ppli mail folder: None No mail messages (except inside the UIM) User created folder: None i-ppli mail folder: None Draft Compose message Create new Decome-Anime Template Decomail Decome-Anime No mail messages (except inside the UIM) Pre-installed data only Pre-installed data only Chat member: Not recorded (except Own) Message/Name in phonebook: Checked Scroll Character size Mail list display Message display Mail security Secret mail display Auto color label Pred. conv. at reply Header/signature Set check new message Auto-display Receiving display Receive option setting 1 line Standard List display: Date+sender/receiver subject Standard All unchecked ON Not stored ON Header: Blank Signature: Blank Quotation marks:
All checked MessageR preferred Alarm preferred OFF Insert: Checked Insert: Checked Reference 218 219 219 198 206 208 209 247 215 244 246 239 214 233 129 233 234 142 142 234 234 235 235 235 234 236 234 214 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Web mail Check new message Compose SMS Check new SMS Chat mail Receive option Mail settings 482 Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Mail Mail settings SMS settings Area mail settings i-mode iMenu Bookmark Screen memo Last URL Go to location Message R/F i-Channel Check new message Operate certificate i-mode settings Attachment preference Auto melody play Photo auto display Chat setting Check settings SMS report request SMS validity period SMS input character SMS center selection Receive setting Receive entry Beep setting Beep time All checked ON ON Sound setting: Alarm 1 Chat image: ON User setting Name: Own OFF 3 days Japanese (70char.) DoCoMo No Emergency information ON 10 seconds Not stored User created folder: None Not stored User created folder: None iMenu No URL histories No messages Channel list Ticker ON/OFF Ticker font size set. Ticker color set. Ticker scroll speed Reset i-Channel Client certificate Certificate Certificate host Scroll Character size Set image display ON Standard Pattern 1 Normal All Valid DoCoMo 1 line Standard ON Image: Apple 234 234 234 242 242 242 234 246 246 247 247 239 239 239 239 172 178 180 176 178 236 195 196 129 196 196 196 215 191 190 192 188 129 188 483 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference 60 seconds i-mode ON YES ON Fit page PushTalk preferred
(Panasonic Recommended movies!) User created folder: None None No URL histories Display Mode setting: Phone mode Scroll Speed: High speed Focus while scroll: OFF Zoom: 100%
Access setting: No Home URL: Home URLhttp://www.google.co.jp Set image display: ON PC Movie auto-play: ON Cookie setting: Valid (No cookies) Referer setting: Send Script setting: Valid Window Open Guard: Invalid Pre-installed i-ppli programs only Display: Icon display Auto start time: All unchecked Power saver: ON i-mode i-mode settings Full Browser Set connection timeout Host selection (m81) imotion auto-play Use phone information Sound effect setting Doc. display settings i-mode arrival act Check settings Reset last URL Home Bookmark Last URL Go to location Full Browser settings l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i i-ppli Software list(phone) ippli(microSD) ippli info 484 SW list(microSD) ippli(microSD) End stand-by info Security error history Auto start info Trace info No information No histories No information No information 189 189 194 188 188 377 89 188 176 314 178 314 178 315 317 318 318 318 318 318 319 319 318 318 251 252 262 254 251 264 264 253 262 253 Setting at purchase Reference Main menu item i-ppli Sub-menu item ippli settings Settings Sound Lower sub-menu item Auto start setting Disp. software info Preferred tone Backlight Power saver Vibrator Check settings Select ring tone (m13) Ring volume (m50) Keypad sound (m30) Melody effect (m64) OFF Not display MUSIC/1Seg Depend on system OFF Depend on system Phone/PushTalk/Videophone: Pattern 1 Mail/Chat mail: Pattern 2 MessageR/MessageF: Pattern 3 All Level 4 ON Stereo&3DSound: ON Position to play: Play all Headset usage setting (m51) Headset and speaker Mail/Msg. ring time (m68) All ON Display Display setting (m56) Ring time: All 5 seconds Stand-by display white for body color White pink for body color Pink Stand-by disp. Wide black for body color Black metal for body color Metal white&pink for body color White/Pink black&metal for body color Black/Metal Clock Clock display Small for body color White/Metal Big for body color Black/Pink Day of week: Unavailable Position Pattern 2 for body color White/Pink/Metal Pattern 1 for body color Black Color: White Dialing, Incoming call, Videophone dialing, Videophone incoming, Mail sending, Mail receiving, Check new message, Mail/msg. rcpt result Water line for body color White Shiny pink for body color Pink Icon color: Color Battery icon/Antenna icon Pattern 1 for body color White/Black Pattern 2 for body color Metal Standard for body color Black/Metal Pattern 3 for body color Pink 262 251 261 261 261 261 261 108 68 111 109 109 112 111 115 115 130 116 117 117 485 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Settings Display Display setting (m56) Backlight (m70) View blind Color theme setting (m86) Menu icon setting (m57) Wake-up display: Wake up Lighting: ON Power saver mode: ON Charging: Standard Area: LCD+Keys Brightness: Auto setting Soft light: ON OFF Light time: 120 seconds Contrast: Level 1 (When View blind is set to ON) White for body color White Pink for body color Pink White for body color White Pink for body color Pink Pattern 2 for body color White/Pink Black for body color Black/Metal Black for body color Black Metal for body color Matal Horizontal open menu Private menu setting (m52) Own number, Ring volume, Caller ID notification, GPS, Alarm, Kisekae Tool, Vibrator, Pattern 1 for body color Black/Metal Desktop icon (m63) Private window (m93) Full Browser, Character size, PC Movie, Schedule Change BG image: Normal Guide (), Bluetooth ON Clock Pattern 3 for body color White Pattern 4 for body color Pink Pattern 2 for body color Black Pattern 1 for body color Metal Orientation: Pattern 2 Brightness: Level 3 Called: ON Chaku-moji: OFF Mail: OFF i-Channel ticker: OFF Disp. connection: ON Font 1 All Standard Japanese () OFF Dynamic ON Font (m66) Character size Select language (m15) Recv.mail/call at open Image quality LCD AI Icons (m36) 486 g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
l i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i 116 118 118 118 118 118 119 119 120 122 416 417 125 117 128 129 45 118 119 119 32 Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Settings Illumination All illum. setting Illumination (m89) Setting at purchase Set color Body color White Phone/Videophone: Pattern C-1 Mail/Chat mail/MessageR/MessageF: Pattern C-2 PushTalk: Pattern C-5 Body color Black Phone/Videophone: Pattern B-1 Mail/Chat mail/MessageR/MessageF: Pattern B-2 PushTalk: Pattern B-5 Body color Pink Phone/Videophone: Pattern D-1 Mail/Chat mail/MessageR/MessageF: Pattern D-2 PushTalk: Pattern D-5 Body color Metal Phone/Videophone: Pattern A-1 Mail/Chat mail/MessageR/MessageF: Pattern A-2 PushTalk: Pattern A-5 Illumination in talk Miss/unread illum. Music&Video ch illum. Illum. when folded Hourly illumination MUSIC illumination Bluetooth illumination IC card illumination PushTalk illumination Side key illumination Check settings Self mode Lock all Personal data lock IC card lock Secret mode (m40) Secret data only (m41) Set pattern: Standard Color setting: All default OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON Pattern C-3 for body color White Pattern D-3 for body color Pink Same as Kisekae Tool in Data box Released Released Released Released Released Released Kisekae Lock/Security Pattern B-3 for body color Black Pattern A-3 for body color Metal Reference 122 123 123 123 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123 492 135 134 136 275 141 141 487 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i l
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Settings Lock/Security Keypad dial lock Reject unknown Call setting w/o ID (m10) Released Accept All Accept Change security code (m29) 0000 UIM setting Scanning function Lock setting Select ring tone: All Same as ring tone Set scan: All Valid Timer lock ON at close: All OFF PIM/IC security mode: Security code IC lock(power-off): Setting before OFF Face reader setting: Not stored Face reader security: Normal Change security code: 0000 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Call time/cost Call data (m61) Reset total cost&dura. (m60) Notice call cost Clock Incoming call CLR max cost icon Set time (m31) World time watch Summer time Auto power ON/OFF Alarm setting Vibrator (m54) Manner mode set (m20) Answer setting (m58) Setting when opened Record display set Disp. PH-book image 488 Last call duration/Total calls duration: 0 seconds Calls reset/Cost reset: --/-- --:--
Last call cost: __ OFF Max cost: 0 (when Notice call cost is set to ON) Method to alert: Icon (when Notice call cost is set to ON) Auto reset setting: OFF (when Notice call cost is set to ON) Auto time adjust ON OFF OFF All OFF Alarm preferred All OFF Manner mode when Original is set Record msg.: OFF Mail vol.: Silent Keypad sound: OFF Any key answer All Keep ringing All ON ON Vibrator: ON Alarm vol.: Silent Mic sensitiv.: Up Phone vol.: Silent VM tone: ON LVA tone: OFF 140 145 144 133 133 534 137 137 275 138 419 420 420 420 46 47 47 408 416 110 113 66 66 141 117 Setting at purchase Reference Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Settings Incoming call Disp. call/receive No. Talk PushTalk Videophone Ring time (m90) Info notice setting (m65) V-phone while packet Auto answer setting (m94) Volume Setting when closed (m18) Set hold tone Voice clear setting Noise reduction (m76) Quality alarm (m75) Reconnect signal (m77) Auto answer setting Ring time setting Hands-free w/ PushTalk PushTalk arrival act Sound setting Vibration setting Visual preference Select image Hands-free w/ V. phone Voice call auto redial Remote monitoring Font of dial number: Pattern 1 Font color Black for body color White/Pink White for body color Black/Metal Ring start time: OFF Start time: 1 second (when Ring start time is set to ON) Missed calls display: Display ON V-phone priority OFF Ring time: 6 seconds (when Auto answer setting is set to ON) Holding tone: JESU JOY OF MANS DESIRING Level 4 Phone/Videophone: End the call PushTalk: Speaker call On hold tone: Tone 1 ON ON No tone No tone OFF 30 seconds ON Answer Quick OFF Normal On hold: Pre-installed Substitute image: Chara-den [ (Kangaroo)]
Record message: Pre-installed Movie memo: Pre-installed ON OFF Other ID: Not recorded Ring time: 5 seconds Set: OFF Holding: Pre-installed Preparing: Pre-installed FeelMail Notify switchable mode Disp. /play new one Disp. /play in history ON ON 128 128 144 144 124 78 424 67 67 67 69 63 63 111 62 88 88 88 88 88 89 77 77 77 78 79 79 80 78 122 122 489 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Settings Network setting Melody Call setting Other settings Prefix setting Intl roaming Intl dial assist Status in the area Work with style Side keys guard Character input method
(m35) Battery Pause dial (m84) Sub-address setting Headset mic. setting Headset switch to call Voice settings USB mode setting Reset settings (m23) Initialize Software update WORLD CALL (009130010) Network search mode: Auto Operator name display: Display ON Switch 3G/GSM: Auto Auto assist setting: ON Country Code set.: Japan (81) IDD prefix setting: WORLD CALL (009130010) Horizontal open menu OFF Input mode: All checked Priority input method: Mode 1 (5-touch) Predict: ON Int.with secret: ON Charge sound: ON Not stored ON Headset microphone OFF Auto voice dial: OFF Voice earphone dial: OFF Read aloud settings: OFF Read aloud volume: Level 4 Read aloud speed: Normal Read aloud output: Speaker Read aloud valid set.: Normal Communication mode Set auto-update: Auto-update Date: Default Time: 3:00 490 62 477 478 477 61 61 61 478 110 28 141 436 439 439 111 59 62 423 424 105 105 406 407 407 407 407 363 433 433 529 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Main menu item Data box Sub-menu item My picture (m46) Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Pre-installed data only User created folder: None Original animation: Not stored Icon: OFF Folder security: All released Edit picture Character stamp Character color: 16 Color, Black Font: Font 1 Character size: Standard size black for body color Black metal for body color Metal Set display Stand-by display white for body color White pink for body color Pink Stand-by disp. Wide white&pink for body color White/Pink black&metal for body color Black/Metal Wake-up display: Wake up Positioning: Center Sort: By date Picture/Title name: Picture Display size: Normal No data User created folder: None Display: Title + Image Volume: Level 12 Sound effect Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Equalizer: Normal No data Information of previously played program: None Display: Title + Image Volume: Level 12 Play mode setting: Normal Sound effect Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Equalizer: Normal Pre-installed data only User created folder: None Playlist: Not stored Position memory: All not stored Volume: Level 4 MUSIC Music&Video Channel imotion Reference 330 338 331 366 336 331 332 333 333 334 394 394 395 399 386 386 386 387 388 389 338 343 340 339 491 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Data box imotion Icon: OFF Folder security: All released Set imotion: All released Sort: By date Listing: Title + Image Sound effect Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Equalizer: Normal Display size: Fit in display Change to full: Vertical display playback Pre-installed data only User created folder: None Playlist: Not stored Set as ring tone: All released Sort: By date No data Sort: By date Listing: Image Pre-installed data only Sort: By date Listing: Image Pre-installed data only Substitute image: (Kangaroo) Rec. Chara-den Camera mode: Photo mode Recording type: Video + voice Recording size: QCIF (176 x 144) Recording quality: Normal Display size: Fit in display Position memory: All not recorded Played history: No histories Volume: Level 12 Listing: Title Sound effect Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Equalizer: Normal Display size: Actual size Position memory: All not stored Volume: Level 12 Listing: Title + image Melody (m16) My documents Kisekae Tool Chara-den PC Movie 1Seg 492 339 366 340 333 341 341 342 342 351 366 352 353 374 333 375 354 333 354 349 74 350 350 323 324 322 324 325 325 346 346 347 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Data box LifeKit Document viewer SD other files Bar code reader Scan code Saved data Receive Ir data (m79) Receive SD-PIM Camera Receive all Phonebook Schedule Inbox Outbox Draft Text memo Bookmark Photo mode/
Movie mode Not stored Inside camera/Outside camera: Outside camera Image size Photo mode: Stand-by (480 x 854) Movie mode: QVGA (320 x 240) File size setting: Mail restrictn (L) Image quality: Fine Camera settings Continuous mode: VGA (640 x 480) Shutter sound: Sound 1 Flicker correction: Auto Storage setting Store in: Phone Img. stabilizer: Auto Cont. shooting set. Auto save set: OFF File restriction: File unrestricted Continuous mode: Auto Shot interval: 0.5 second Shot number VGA (640 x 480)/CIF (352 x 288): 4 shots (Fixed) QVGA (240 x 320)/QCIF (176 x 144)/Sub-QCIF (128 x 96): 5 shots Bluetooth My picture imotion Device list Display size: Actual size Icon: ON Same as My picture in Data box Same as imotion in Data box Not stored Preferred device: Not set Activate Bluetooth/Bluetooth power OFF 378 362 165 167 370 371 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 160 160 160 161 161 162 162 162 162 163 491 491 427 429 429 493 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference LifeKit Bluetooth Accept registered Accept dialup devices Bluetooth settings GPS Position location Notify of location Location history ippil Service settings GPS settings Set authentications: OFF Session number setting: OFF Time-out to search: 5 seconds Forward ring tone: ON Disconnection settings: End the call Dial from headset: Valid Bluetooth info Device name: P906i No histories Pre-installed i-ppli programs only GPS button setting: Read a map Posit. tone/illum. Select posit. ring tone: Position location OFF Location req./Accept Pattern 2 Notify of location Pattern 1 Location req./Confirm Pattern 2 Ring time setting: All 3 seconds Select vibrator: All OFF Select illumination: All Color 5 Positioning mode: All Standard mode Reg. LCS client: Not stored Location request menu: OFF Host selection: Default Text reader Rec. msg/voice memo
(m55) Scan text Saved data Play/Erase msg. Play/Erase VP msg. Record message setting Voice memo Voice announce Voice recoder Not stored Not recorded Not recorded OFF Answer message: Japanese 1 (when Record message setting is set to ON) Ring time: 13 seconds (when Record message setting is set to ON) Not recorded Not recorded File size setting: Mail restrictn(L) Storage setting Store in: Phone Auto save set: OFF File restriction: File unrestricted 494 429 429 432 432 432 432 432 432 432 278 285 286 279 286 287 287 287 287 288 290 168 169 73 73 71 418 110 373 373 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference LifeKit Data Security Service Service Caller ID notification
(m17) Voice mail Call waiting Call forwarding Nuis. call blocking Caller ID request No histories OFF YES Connect to Center Sent/recv. PB data list PB image sending Activate Check setting Play messages Activate Deactivate Set ring time Check setting Setting Check new messages Message notification Erase icon Activate notice call Deactivate notice call Notice call status Activate Deactivate Check setting Activate Deactivate Change forwarding No. Setting if fwd. No. busy Check setting Register caller Register selected No. Delete last entry Delete all entries Check No. of entries Activate Deactivate Check setting 105 105 105 47 47 447 447 447 447 447 447 446 447 447 447 447 447 448 448 448 450 450 450 450 450 451 452 452 452 452 452 452 452 495 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Service 2in1 setting Deactivated Mode switching: Dual mode Stand-by display Dual mode: Pyramid at night B mode: Fruit salad Standby disp. Wide Dual mode: Ring B mode: Mont St Michel Set call/receive No. Disp. call/receive No. Number A Font of dial number: Pattern 1 Font color Black for body color White/Pink White for body color Black/Metal Number B Font of dial number: Pattern 2 Font color Dark blue for body color White Purple for body color Pink Yellowish green for body color Black/Metal Ringtone set. for No. B Phone/Video-Phone: Pattern 4Mail: Pattern 5 Receive avoidance set. Mode link: Deactivated Not stored All Same as ring tone Answer Multi number Arrival call act Set in-call arrival act Remote control Dual network English guidance Set multi number Check setting Number setting Set as ring tone Activate Deactivate Check setting Activate Deactivate Check setting Dual network switching Check setting Guidance setting Check setting 496 Reference 456 455 456 455 456 454 454 454 454 455 455 455 452 453 453 453 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Setting at purchase Reference Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Service Set Roaming guidance Activate Additional service Service numbers OFFICEED Chaku-moji Phonebook Add to phonebook Search phonebook Search phonebook UIM operation Deactivate Check setting Additional service Additional guidance
(DoCoMo repair counter)
(DoCoMo Information Center) Area display setting Activate forwarding Deactivate forwarding Check forwarding set. Create message Message disp. settings Sent messages Prefer Chaku-moji Phone UIM All?
Reading?
Group?
Memory No.?
Name?
Phone number?
Mail address?
2-touch dial?
Copy Delete Not stored Not stored Not stored Calls with callerID No records OFF Not stored Sort: Reading order Sort: Reading order Sort: Reading order PushTalk phonebook Dialed/recv. calls (m24) Dialed calls Not stored No records Received calls No records Sent address: No records Own number (m0) Group setting Received address: No records Not stored (except Own number for Number A) Edit group Group name: Group 01 to 19 (except inside the UIM) Settings: None 479 479 479 462 463 453 454 462 462 462 462 57 58 58 58 92 92 98 98 98 98 101 101 101 98 422 422 85 54 229 55 229 417 97 497 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference Phonebook Restrictions Phonebook settings
(m26) Restrict dialing Call rejection Call acceptance Call forwarding Voice mail Character size Voice dial setting Mail group All released All released All released All released All released All Standard Not stored Not stored Stationery No. of phonebook Alarm (m44) Schedule (m45) Chat group Not stored Edit group name: Group 1 to 5 Forwarding image ON Edit group name: Mail group 1 to 20 Not stored Alarm: All OFF Not stored Monthly display/Weekly display: Monthly display Customize holiday MondayFriday: Default Sunday: Red Not stored Category display: All Sort/Filter: By entered time Not recorded Common phrases Own dictionary Download dictionary Create learned wd list All default Not stored Pre-installed data only Set dictionary: All valid ToDo (m95) Text memo (m42) Calculator (m85) Guide Common phrase/dic.
(m38) 498 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i 143 143 143 143 143 129 103 233 233 243 243 371 100 408 408 411 413 413 415 415 415 421 421 39 441 442 443 443 443 Saturday: Blue Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference MUSIC MUSIC Player 1Seg Music&Video Channel Activate 1Seg Program guide Book program list Timer recording list Recording result TVlink Channel list Channel setting User settings No data Playlist: Not stored Information of previously played music file: None Display: Title + Image Volume: Level 12 Play mode setting: Normal Sound effect Remaster: OFF Listening: OFF Same as Music&Video Channel in Data box Confirmation display at start: Displays the Exemption Clause Confirmation display Confirmation display for the data broadcasting: Displays the Exemption Clause Confirmation Equalizer: Normal Broadcasting storage area: Not stored Volume: Level 12 display Not stored Not stored Confirmation display at timer recording: Displays the Exemption Clause Confirmation display Not stored Not stored Not stored Select area Auto channel setting Caption Caption posit. in w-scr Rec. when low battery Rec. program when call Mobile W-Speed Image quality Sound ON Lower ON OFF OFF Dynamic Sound effect Auto volume: ON Listening: OFF Remaster: OFF Equalizer: Normal ECO mode Display light Data broadcasting TV sound while closed: ON Released Constant light Set image display: ON Sound effect setting: ON 393 400 392 393 395 397 399 491 292 310 292 296 300 304 305 306 309 302 294 294 294 309 309 309 309 309 309 309 310 310 310 310 310 499 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Main menu item Sub-menu item Lower sub-menu item Setting at purchase Reference 1Seg User settings Osaifu-Keitai IC card content DCMX ToruCa IC card lock set. Settings Icon Mail ticker display Check TV settings Reset channel setting Reset storage area Reset TV settings IC card lock IC lock(power-off) Receive ToruCa ToruCa from dataBC Receiving display Check same data Auto reading Others Check IC owner Change IC owner Search by i-mode Clock display of Private window Redial Public Mode (Drive Mode) Manner mode Videophone Photo-sending Character input ON Receipt notification Pre-installed i-ppli programs only No data User created folder: None Sort: By date Released Setting before OFF Accept Auto receive ON ON ON Accept Icons and date/time No records Released Released Backlight: Constant light Image size: QCIF (176 x 144) Char. input/dict. Learned words: Not stored Candid. disp. size: Standard Candidate display: ON Character set time: OFF 2/NIKO-touch guide: ON 500 310 310 310 310 311 311 251 260 269 272 275 275 274 274 274 274 274 268 268 186 33 54 69 112 76 160 440 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i List of Characters Assigned to Keys (5-touch Input Method) Display Key abc 123
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-0
-a
-s
. - @ _ / : 2 1 1
a b c 2 d e f 3 g h i 4 j k l 5 m n o 6 p q r s 7 t u v 8 w x y z 9 0 (space)
.ne.jp .co.jp .or.jp .com http:/
/www. https://www.
@docomo.ne.jp 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
(space) 1
(space) 3 1: Displayed when entering the character in full pitch. 2: Displayed when entering the character in half pitch. 3: Displayed when entering characters consecutively. pIf you press c after entering a character, characters can be scrolled in the reverse order. pAfter entering hiragana, katakana, or alphabetic characters, you can switch uppercase and lowercase characters by pressing d. pYou can enter + by pressing and holding 0 for at least one second in Numeral input mode. If you press a after fixing a character, pictographs are displayed. 501 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l List of Characters Assigned to Keys (2-touch Input Method) Kanji/Hiragana input mode
<Uppercase input mode>
Katakana input mode
<Uppercase input mode>
Alphabet input mode 8 8 9 9 0 0 Second digit 7 4 5 6 3 2 9 8 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Second digit 7 4
) 5 6 t i g d i t s r i F t i i g d t s r i F
<Lowercase input mode>
<Lowercase input mode>
5 8 c h Second digit 9 4 7 d b g i l m n q s v w x r 3 2 1 6 1 a f 2 k 3 p 4 u 5 6 z 7 8 9 0 0 e j o t y i t i g d t s r i F 2 3 5 Second digit 4 7 6 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i i t i g d t s r i F 502 8 9 0 t i g d i t s r i F 2 1 1
2 3 4 5 12 6 7 8 9 0 3 Second digit 5 4 1`2 6 7
: Switches between uppercase input mode and lowercase input mode. 1: Displayed when entering characters in full pitch. 2: Displayed when entering characters in half pitch. Information pA space is entered if you press keys that correspond to a blank where no character is assigned. pIn Kanji/Hiragana or Katakana input mode, you can enter and also by pressing -a just after entering a character. For
, press -a once. For , press -a twice. pYou can enter + by pressing and holding -0 for at least one second in Numeral input mode. List of Characters Assigned to Keys (NIKO-touch Input Method) Kanji/Hiragana input mode
<Lowercase input>
Katakana input mode
<Lowercase input>
Information Second digit 7 4 5 6 3 2 9 8 1 0 1 c 2 b a f 3 e d 4 g i h l 5 j k o 6 m n s 7 p r q v 8 t u z 9 w x y 0
t i g d i t s r i F t i g d i t s r i F 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
<Uppercase input>
<Uppercase input>
1 2 Second digit 4 7 6 3 2 1 9 8 5 1 2 A B C D E F 3 G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 7 P Q R S 8 T U V 9 W X Y Z 0 0 i t i g d t s r i F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 i t i g d t s r i F 3 3 6 Second digit 7 4 5 Second digit 4 7 5 6 pA space is entered if you press keys that correspond to a blank where no character is assigned. pYou can enter and by pressing -a. For , press
-a once. For , press -a twice. In Kanji/Hiragana input mode, you can enter them by pressing the key just after entering a character. pYou can enter + by pressing and holding -0 for at least one second in Numeral input mode. 8 9 0 8 9 0 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l 503
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Symbol List When Read aloud settings is set to ON, symbols are read aloud. Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 504 1 1 1 4 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance 505 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance Symbol Voice guidance 1 Does not read aloud if it is not for a URL or mail address. 2 When it follows a hiragana, katakana, or kanji character, the ending of the character immediately before it is read aloud as a long vowel. 3 When it follows a hiragana or katakana character, the ending of the character immediately before it is read aloud as a long vowel. 4 Reads it aloud (hyphen) if it is for a URL or mail address. Information pSpecial symbols through might not be correctly displayed if they are sent to mobile phones which do not support i-mode or personal computers. Further, you cannot enter special symbols of into the text of SMS messages, and they are replaced by half-pitch spaces. Symbol Candidate List On the Character Entry (Edit) display, enter to convert it to bring up symbol candidates. Further, you can enter characters listed below to convert them into respective symbols. Input Conversion Input Conversion Input Conversion Input Conversion Input Conversion
506 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Pictograph List When Read aloud settings is set to ON, pictographs are read aloud. Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance 507 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Picto-
graph Voice guidance Information pPictographs are all counted as full-pitch characters. pPictographs are not correctly displayed if they are sent to mobile phones which do not support i-mode or to personal computers. Further, the pictographs from through are correctly displayed only when sent to i-mode phones which support those pictographs. 508 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Common Phrase List No. Greetings folder Expressions 1 Good morning 2 Good afternoon 3 Good evening 4 Good night 5 Im going 6 Have a nice day 7 Im back 8 Welcome back 9 Im sorry 10 Good-bye Business folder 1 Your cooperation is greatly appreciated 2 We always appreciate your business 3 Please send my best regards to everyone 4 Thank you very much for the other day 5 Hows everything?
6 I will be late 7 See you later 8 All right 9 Check urgently!
10 Call me No. Internet folder Expressions 1 @docomo.ne.jp 2 .ne.jp/
3 .co.jp/
4 .or.jp/
5 .ac.jp/
6 .com/
7 http://www. 8 https://www. 9 www. 10 .html Smiley 1 folder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Smiley 2 folder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 509 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Multiaccess Combination Patterns Communication event Voice call Videophone call PushTalk i-mode i-mode mail SMS i-ppli i-ppli software running Packet communication
(Data communication) 64K data communication 4 5 9 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 9 8 10 5 5 511 511 4 3 3 4 4 7 4 8 9 8 10 8 9 8 10 10 Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Incoming Connecting Sending Receiving Sending Receiving Outgoing Outgoing Sending Receiving Sending Receiving 3 1 2 3 3 6 5 Communication status Voice call Videophone call PushTalk i-mode i-mode mail SMS i-ppli12 i-ppli software running Packet communication
(Data communication) 64K data communication
: Can start.
: Can start by condition.
: Cannot start simultaneously. The current communication continues (the started communication is rejected). 1:
If you have signed up for Call waiting, you can make another call with the current voice call put on hold. 2:
In the condition of the maximum number of voice line+1, you can activate Voice Mail, Call Waiting, or Call Forwarding.(See page 446, page 448, and page 450) 3:
If you have signed up for Call waiting, Voice mail, or Call forwarding, you can answer an incoming call after finishing a call or communication. (See page 454) 4: The call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls. 5:
6: The FOMA phone works in accordance with the setting of PushTalk arrival act. 7: Only when you are the caller, you can make calls to add members. 8:
9: The FOMA phone works in accordance with the setting of V-phone while packet. 10: The FOMA phone works in accordance with the setting of i-mode arrival act. 11: For i-mode mail and SMS, you can use a single line each at a time. 12: This is the case for when you are upgrading or downloading an i-ppli program. i-mode communication is cut off, and you can make a call.
(pink) appears to notify of incoming mail. 3 5 5 3 3 3 510 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Multitask Combination Patterns When the functions in the same group (
appear depending on the operation. part in the table) conflict, the display for switching the active function appears. However, it might not Started function Function in operation Voice call Videophone call PushTalk Mail i-mode1 i-ppli Settings2 Service Data box111 LifeKit3 Phonebook4 Stationery Voice call Video phone call Push Talk Mail 12 12 12 13 MUSIC5 17 17 17 18 i-mode group Setting group Tool group i-mode 1 i-ppli Settings 2 Service Data box1 LifeKit 3 Stationery MUSIC 5 1Seg5 7 9 9 Phone book 4 8 10 10 16 16 Osaifu-
Keitai 5 Private menu 2 10 6 19 14 14 14 1720 15 10 17 17 17
: Cannot be activated simultaneously. 1Seg5 Osaifu-Keitai5
: Can be activated simultaneously. 1: While a PDF file is displayed, the i-mode group is in use. However, 1Seg programs or 1Seg in Data Box cannot be activated simultaneously. 2: You cannot use it depending on the function. 3: You cannot use Multitask to start up Receive Ir data and SD-PIM. 4: You cannot use Multitask to start up UIM operation. You cannot start up Restrictions while another function is in use, either. 5: The functions not belonging to the Tool group are included. 6: You cannot start up Caller ID notification and 2in1 setting during a call. 7: LifeKit functions you can start up during a call are limited to Bar code reader, still image shooting of Camera, Bluetooth, GPS, Text reader, and Data Security Service. 8: Stationery functions you can start up during a call are limited to Schedule, ToDo, Text memo, Calculator, and (Guide). 9: During a call, you can receive a GPS location provision request. When each service setting is set to other than (Reject), you can provide your location information. i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l 511 10: For some i-ppli programs, MUSIC or 1Seg cannot be simultaneously activated, and Play Background is not available. 11: If you use Multitask to switch functions while you are using the Picture viewer (microSD card), i-motion player, Video player, Chara-den player, or Melody player, or while playing back a demo from MUSIC in Data Box, display or playback ends. You cannot switch functions while you are editing an i-motion movie. 12: Playback/Recording stops when a call comes in while you are playing back Record message, Videophone record message, Voice memo, or Movie memo, or while recording Voice memo. When a call comes in while you are scanning data using Bar code reader or Text reader, the data being scanned is discarded. 13: If you set Receiving display to Alarm preferred and a mail message comes in while you are scanning data using Bar code reader or Text reader, the data being scanned is discarded. 14: You can receive a GPS location provision request. When each service setting is set to other than (Reject), you can provide your location information. 15: You can simultaneously start it with Bar code reader, Camera, GPS, Text reader, or Voice recorder. However, Play Background is not available for these functions other than GPS. 16: You cannot simultaneously start MUSIC with (Guide). 17: Play Background is not available. 18: If you set Receiving display to Alarm preferred and a mail message comes in, the playback is suspended. 19: You cannot use 2in1 setting and Chaku-moji. 20: You cannot simultaneously start MUSIC Player, MUSIC, Music&Video Channel, and PC Movie. 512 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Services Available with FOMA Phones Available services Directory assistance service
(Charges apply: guidance fee + call fee) Listed phone numbers only can be given. Telegrams (Telegram charges apply) Time check (Charges apply) Weather forecast (Charges apply) Emergency calls to police Emergency calls to fire station and ambulance Emergency calls for accidents at sea Disaster messaging service (Charges apply) Collect calls (Charges apply: guidance fee + call fee) Information Phone number
(No prefix) 104
(No prefix) 115
(No prefix) 117 City code of the desired area + 177
(No prefix) 110
(No prefix) 119
(No prefix) 118
(No prefix) 171
(No prefix) 106 pWhen using the collect call (106), the recipient is charged a call fee and handling fee 90 (94.5 with tax) for each call. (As of March 2008) pWhen using the directory assistance service (104), you are charged a guidance fee 100 (105 with tax) plus a call fee. For whom having weak eyesight or handicapped arms, the guidance is available charge free. For more details, dial 116 (NTT inquiry counter) from landline phones. (As of March 2008) Information pThis FOMA phone supports Emergency Location Report. When you make an emergency call such as at 110/118/119, information about the place where you are dialing from (location information) is automatically notified to emergency-response agencies such as police stations. It might happen that your correct location is not detected by emergency-response agencies depending on the location you dialed or radio wave conditions. When your location information is notified, the name of emergency-response agency is displayed on the Stand-by display. When you do not notify your phone number by call such as by adding 184, your location information and phone number are not notified. However, when an emergency-response agency has judged that the location information and phone number should be detected because of emergency priority such as protection of human life, they might be notified regardless of your setting. The region and timing Emergency Location Report is introduced vary depending on the preparation of respective emergency-response agencies. pWhen you make a call at 110/119/118 from the FOMA phone, tell an operator that you are calling from a mobile phone and then precisely notify your phone number and actual location. Further, remain still while talking to prevent your call from being disconnected. Do not turn off the power immediately after the call, but instead make sure that your phone can receive calls for at least 10 minutes. pYou might not be connected to regional police/fire station depending on the area from where you call. If this happens, use public phones nearby or landline phones. pIf you use Call Forwarding Service for the landline phone and specify a mobile phone as the forwarding destination, callers may hear ringing tone even when the mobile phone is busy, out of the service area, or the power is turned off depending on the settings of the landline phone/mobile phone. pNote that the FOMA phone is not available to 116 (NTT inquiry counter), Dial Q2, Message Dial, and credit call services. (You can use auto credit call to the FOMA phone from landline phones or public phones.) 513 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Introduction of Options and Related Equipment Combining various options with the FOMA phone, you can realize more versatile use from personal purpose to business purposes. Some products may not be dealt in depending on the area. For details, consult a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. For details on options, refer to the users manuals of respective options and related equipment. Battery Pack P16 Back Cover P26 FOMA AC Adapter 01/021 FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use1 FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01 FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01 Desktop Holder P27 FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/022 FOMA USB Cable2 FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna3 FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna (Stand Type)3 Carry Case L 01 In-Car Holder 01 Flat-plug AV Output Cable P01 Earphone/Microphone with Switch P001/P0024 Stereo Earphone Set P0014 Earphone Plug Adapter P001 Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch P01/P02 Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 Flat-plug Connector/Stereo Mini-jack Conversion Adapter P01 Bluetooth Headset F015 AC Adapter for Bluetooth Headset F01 Wireless Earphone Set P01/02 Bone conduction microphone/receiver In-Car Hands-Free Kit 016 FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 1 See page 42 and page 43 for charging batteries using AC adapter. 2 If you use a USB hub, the devices may not work correctly. 3 Use it in Japan only. 4 Earphone Plug Adapter P001 is required. 5 AC Adapter for Bluetooth Headset F01 is required. 6 To use/charge the FOMA phone via cable connection (USB connection), FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 is required. Introduction of Software for Playing Back Moving Images To play back moving images (MP4 format file) using your personal computer, you need to have QuickTimePlayer (free) ver. 6.4 or higher (or ver. 6.3 + 3GPP) of Apple Computer Inc. You can download QuickTime from the following web page:
http://www.apple.com/jp/quicktime/download/ (Japanese only) Information pFor download, a personal computer connected to the Internet is required. You are charged a communication fee to download. pFor details such as operating environments, how to download, and how to operate, refer to the web page above. Links with AV Equipment On the FOMA phone, you may be able to play back some moving images in ASF format, which are saved from another AV equipment to the microSD card. Also, you may be able to play back some moving images recorded with the FOMA phone on another AV equipment. For information about links with compatible AV equipment, refer to the following:
http://panasonic.jp/mobile/ (Japanese only) Inquiry Center for Links with Compatible AV Equipment Panasonic Mobile Communications Customer Service Center From landline phones:
From mobile phones or PHSs: 045-938-4023 Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
(Excluding Saturdays, Sundays, national holidays, and specified holidays) pMake sure that you dial the correct number. 0120-15-8729 514 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Troubleshooting pFirst of all, check to see if you need to update the software program and then update it if required. See page 528 for how to update software programs. Problem The FOMA phone does not turn on.
(Cannot use) Cannot dial by pressing numeric keys. Dial but cannot connect; a busy tone sounds. Dial but cannot connect; the guidance is played back telling that confirm usage method. appears and cannot make calls. and Lock all are displayed and pressing keys are null. Pressing the side keys does not work when the FOMA phone is closed. Check point Reference pMake sure the battery is attached to the FOMA phone correctly. pMake sure the battery is fully charged. pIf the mova is usable in Dual Network Service, the FOMA phone service is not available. Is the FOMA phone usable? For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network Services]. pMake sure Keypad Dial Lock is deactivated. pMake sure Restrict Dialing is deactivated. pMake sure Lock All is deactivated. pMake sure Self Mode is deactivated. pEnter the phone number after you hear the dial tone. 41 42 452 140 143 134 135 pMake sure the phone number contains a city code. 50 pYou may be out of the service area or weak radio 45 waves are being received. pThis may be because Switch 3G/GSM is set to 477 GSM/GPRS. pThis may be because Lock All is activated. 134 pThis may be because Side keys guard is set to 141 ON. Alert beeps. pThe battery runs short. You need to charge. 42 Problem Cannot charge.
(The Call/Charging indicator of the FOMA phone does not light, or it flickers.) The display grows dark, showing nothing. Check point Reference pMake sure the battery is attached to the FOMA phone correctly. pMake sure the power plug of the adapter is securely inserted into outlet. pMake sure the adapter and the FOMA phone is firmly connected. For AC adapter (option), make sure its connector is firmly connected to the FOMA phone or a desktop holder (option). 41 43 pMake sure Power Saver Mode is deactivated. 118 Different ring tones sound for incoming mail. pThis may be the mail from a party whose mail ring tone is set by the setting items in the Phonebook. pThis may be the mail from a party stored in a group 95 97 set with a mail ring tone by Group Setting. pThis may be the call or mail message from a party 95 for whom you have set Illumination/Mail illumination by setting items in the Phonebook. pThis may be the call or mail message from a party 97 stored in a group set with Illumination/Mail illumination by Group Setting. pMake sure the UIM that was inserted when you 40 obtained images or melodies is inserted. When a call or mail message comes in, the Call/Charging indicator lights/
flickers differently. Images or melodies selected in the functions are not played back; they are played back at the default setting. Cannot count total calls cost. pMake sure that total calls cost accumulated on the UIM does not exceed the limit (about 16,770,000). Perform Reset Total Cost to return to 0. Cannot watch a 1Seg program. pYou may be out of the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area or weak airwaves are being received. pMake sure the UIM is inserted. pMake sure Channel Setting is set. Cannot perform data transfer pMake sure that you do not use a USB hub. If you use a USB hub, the devices may not work correctly. 420 292 39 294 515 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Error Messages p(numerals) in error messages are the code sent from the i-mode Center for discriminating the error. A Accept serial port devices failed An error occurred during the standby for registering the serial port, so the serial port was not placed on standby for registration. Activating Receive Option Setting is set to OFF. Switch the setting to ON and try again. (See page 214) Activating keypad dial lock Keypad Dial Lock is activated. Release Keypad Dial Lock and try again. (See page 140) Activating mail security Cannot download Mail Security is activated, so you cannot download. Deactivate Mail Security and try again.
(See page 142, page 224) Activating personal data lock Personal Data Lock is set. Release Personal Data Lock and try again. (See page 136) Activating personal data lock Send pre-installed substitute image During Personal Data Lock, a Pre-installed substitute l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i
) image is sent. C
A
e g a s s e M r o r r E Activating record display OFF Record Display Set is set to OFF. Switch the setting to ON and try again. (See page 141) Activating reject unknown Reject unknown is set to Reject. Set to Accept and try again. (See page 145) Activating ring time Ring time is set to ON. Set to OFF and try again.
(See page 144) 516 Address is not valid (451) You could not send the mail correctly. Check the address and try again. (See page 198, page 244) All protected Cannot delete All data items are protected, so cannot be deleted. Release the protection and try again.
(See page 181, page 225, page 237) Another function is active Cannot connect Another function is active Cannot operate Another function is active Cannot switch The function is not available simultaneously in Multitask. End the functions not in use and try again.
(See page 406) Authentication failed An authentication error occurred. Authentication type is not supported (401) Incompatible authentication type, so cannot be connected. Auto time adjust info is not received Unable to play You have not received the auto time adjust information, so could not play back the file with restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. C Cannot compose because too large data The size of the shot image is too large to attach to i-mode mail. Cannot dial An error occurred, so you could not dial. Cannot display Corresponding software program is running. End the software program and try again. (See page 252) Cannot edit message The attached file reaches 10,000 bytes, so you cannot enter the text. Cannot execute because of other tasks The function is not available simultaneously in Multitask. End the functions not in use and try again.
(See page 406) Cannot recognize The text could not be scanned. Change Recognition Mode or NEGA/POSI Mode, and scan the text again.
(See page 169) Cannot record An error occurred, so you could not save. Cannot resend Send after edit The address is invalid or the text exceeds the size that can be entered, so you cannot re-send. Edit the text again and send. (See page 225) Cannot save The data could not be obtained from a site, so could not be saved. Cannot save some attached files Full of images, so part of the images could not be stored into the Phonebook. Cannot set this holiday The received holiday and already stored data are set to the same date, so you cannot store it. Cannot set this schedule The received schedule event and already stored data are set to the same date and time, so you cannot store it. Cannot start any more functions The maximum number of functions is already running using Multitask. End the functions not in use and try again. (See page 406) Cannot start because use mail folder Corresponding software program is running. End the software program and try again. (See page 252) Cannot use network transmission Network set is set to OFF. Set it to ON and try again. (See page 253) Certificate is rejected Certificate is rejected (tampered) You received an altered SSL/TLS certificate, so could not connect. Check new message is set all OFF No check marks are placed to the items for Set check new message. Put a check mark for the items to be checked and try again. (See page 234) Check SMS center selection The SMS Center is not correctly specified by SMS Center Selection. Specify the SMS Center and try again. (See page 247) Conditional access Cannot watch Receiving by limited method, so you cannot watch. Connection failed Failed to connect to the Bluetooth device while switching the voice to it during the call. Radio waves are weak, so you cannot connect. Move to a place where radio waves are strong enough and try again. The destination address set by Host Selection is wrong, so you cannot connect to it. Check the setting and try again. (See page 189) You could not connect because of network trouble. Wait a while and try again. Connection failed (403) You cannot connect to a site or Internet web page. Connection failed (503) Connection failed (562) You could not connect because of network trouble. Wait a while and try again. Connection failed Check the other side device The Bluetooth device is not compatible with the service supported by the FOMA phone, so could not be registered. The service you tried to connect to is invalid for the other ends Bluetooth device, so you could not connect to it. Connection interrupted Disconnected from the personal computer during data communication. Connection is not valid The destination address set by Host Selection is not compatible, so you cannot operate. Check the setting and try again. (See page 189) The user certificate is being operated, so you cannot connect. Complete operating the user certificate and try again. Could not add An error occurred, so you could not store. Could not be found No response from the Bluetooth device, so you could not store or connect it. Could not find your blinks Failed to detect your blinks. Change the direction of your face or the place, and then try again.
(See page 140) D Data in IC card is full Unable to download Delete service?
This is displayed when the memory space within the IC card is short for downloading the i-ppli program that supports Osaifu-Keitai. Select YES to display the service names of Osaifu-
Keitai already registered and the space within the IC card (in bytes). Check the area size for shortage, select the service to delete, start up the i-ppli program, and then delete it. Data is full The maximum number of anniversaries is stored. Delete unnecessary ones and try again.
(See page 413, page 414) The maximum number of holidays/anniversaries is stored. Delete unnecessary ones and try again. (See page 413, page 414) The maximum number of holidays is stored. Delete unnecessary ones and try again.
(See page 413, page 414) The maximum number of Phonebook entries has been stored in the FOMA phone, so you could not receive a new one. Delete unnecessary Phonebook entries and try again. (See page 100) The maximum number of schedule events has been stored in the FOMA phone, so you could not receive a new one. Delete unnecessary schedule events and try again. (See page 413, page 414) The maximum number of ToDo items has been stored in the FOMA phone, so you could not receive a new one. Delete unnecessary ToDo items and try again.
(See page 416) Data is too long A part is deleted Characters for one (or plural) of address, subject, and text of the mail exceeded the maximum, so part of them was deleted. Data not applicable Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. Data size is too big to save The file exceeded the maximum storable size by setting File restriction, so could not be set. Details cannot be saved The ToruCa detailed data was not supported, so was not saved. 517 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l E r r o r M e s s a g e
C
D
) l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i
) I
D
e g a s s e M r o r r E Device list is full No device to overwrite The maximum number of Bluetooth devices is stored, so you cannot store any more. Delete unnecessary Bluetooth devices. (See page 429) Downloaded data exists Cannot connect to network Save the PC movie on the Obtaining Completion display, and then close the Obtaining Completion display. (See page 321) Downloading interrupted Another function was running or an error occurred, so you could not download. E Editing now Cannot delete Being used for another function, so you cannot delete. End the function and try again.
(See page 406) Enter zoom size No magnification is entered. Enter the magnification and try again. (See page 375) Enter + in right position
+ is wrongly positioned. Enter it to the beginning of the phone number. (See page 60) Error An error occurred, so you could not operate. Error in image Does not work correctly The Flash movie had an error, so you could not play it back normally. F Failed in An error occurred, so you could not perform iC transmission transmission. Failed to authenticate An authentication error occurred. 518 Failed to get license file Failed to obtain the license information about the PC movie, so cannot be played back. Failed to read An error occurred while reading information from the microSD card. Failed to read Quitting An error occurred when playing back the moving image. The file cannot be read because you tried to play back the file in the Movable contents folder with a UIM that was not inserted when that file was saved. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was saved, and try again. (See page 39) The microSD card was removed while reading the information from it. Insert the microSD card and try again. (See page 355) Failed to receive channel info Failed to obtain the i-Channel information because part or all of it could not be obtained. Failed to save An error occurred, so you could not copy the ToruCa file. An error occurred, so you could not save. An error occurred, so you could not store. You could not save the shot image. Failed to send Ir data An error occurred, so you could not send the data using infrared rays. Failed to set An error occurred, so you could not set. Failed to store in PushTalk phonebook Could not be stored because the phone number was the number that could not be stored in the PushTalk Phonebook. Format error Insert microSD formatted The format of microSD card is incompatible with FOMA P906i. Use FOMA P906i to format it. (See page 362) I ippli stand-by display terminated due to security error i-ppli DX has forcibly been ended. (See page 253) ippli To function is not set ippli To function is not set A check mark is not put for Set ippli To, so you cannot start up the i-ppli program. Put the check mark and try again. (See page 253) IC card function inactive Unable to download IC card has been locked, so you could not download or upgrade. Release IC Card Lock and try again. (See page 275) Image display is OFF Cannot receive Set image display is set to OFF, so you cannot obtain the image. Set to ON and try again.
(See page 188) Image in message will be deleted The output-prohibited image from the FOMA phone is attached to the mail text, so deleted. i-mode Center is busy Please try again later (555) The line facility has trouble or the line is very busy. Wait a while and try again. i-mode mail service is busy Please try again later (553) The line is very busy. Wait a while and try again. Incomplete data Unable to start The i-ppli program you tried to start up does not start because partial data only is saved. Download the whole i-ppli program and try again.
(See page 250) Input error (205) The entered contents are wrong. Check the contents and try again. Input too long Too many entered characters to send. Decrease the number of characters and send again.
(See page 174) Invalid Cannot resend The address is invalid or the text exceeds the size that can be entered, so you cannot re-send. Invalid code The entered USSD is incorrect. Enter the correct one.
(See page 462) Invalid data Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. You cannot play back the following PC movies:
The data files other than Windows Media files or the files with invalid contents The data file whose image size is larger than 320 dots x 240 dots, image bit rate is higher than 2 Mbps, or voice bit rate is higher than 385 kbps If the server returns an unidentified response when you try to download a savable data file. When the streaming server is not supported by the FOMA phone (The streaming servers supported by the FOMA phone are Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services 9 only.) Invalid data (xxx) Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx). Invalid data Data size is not supported (xxx) Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx). Invalid func in this UIM The function cannot be operated from the inserted Invalid UIM Unable to delete UIM. Invalid ID The entered ID is wrong. Enter the correct ID.
(See page 288) Invalid UIM auto start not display Invalid UIM ippli is unable to run You cannot start up the i-ppli program because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which had been inserted when the i-ppli program was downloaded and try again. (See page 40) Invalid UIM Incorrect display The screen memo cannot be correctly displayed because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM that had been inserted when the screen memo was saved, and try again. Invalid UIM Requested service not available Invalid UIM requested service not available You cannot operate because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which had been inserted when the data or file was obtained and try again. (See page 40) Invalid UIM Requested software failed to start Invalid UIM requested software failed to start You cannot start up the i-ppli program because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which had been inserted when the data or file was obtained and try again. (See page 40) Invalid UIM Unable to download Invalid UIM Unable to move Invalid UIM Unable to start Invalid UIM Unable to upgrade You cannot move, start up, delete, download or upgrade because a UIM different from the one set for the IC card is inserted. Insert the UIM set for the IC card, and try again. (See page 40) Invalid URL The URL is invalid, so you cannot connect to the site or the Internet web page. L Linked page is not downloaded The PDF file has a link but the linked end has not been downloaded, so the linked page could not be displayed. Location provision failed An error occurred because the FOMA phone is out of the service area or by other reasons, so it failed to measure the current location or to provide the location information. Move to a place where radio waves are strong enough and try again. M
(561) Mails could not be sent to following address. (561)
@.ne.jp You could not send the mail message correctly to the displayed address. The mail address differs depending on the destination. Max cost icon is not displayed The Max Cost icon is not displayed, so cannot be deleted. 519 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l E r r o r M e s s a g e
I
M
) l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i
) P
M
e g a s s e M r o r r E Memory full There is no usable memory space, so you cannot operate. Memory function active Cannot operate The microSD card is in use, so you cannot set. Memory No.xxx Cannot overwrite You cannot store in the same memory number with the Phonebook entry stored as secret data. Store in a different memory number. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx).
(See page 95) Memory shortage The memory space is not enough, so processing is suspended. If displayed frequently, turn off and on the power. (See page 45) Memory shortage Cancel update Memory shortage End document viewer Memory shortage Failed to create font effect Memory shortage Return to Access Setting Memory shortage Return to Full Browser menu Memory shortage Return to i-mode menu Memory shortage Return to ToruCa list The memory space is not enough, so processing is suspended. 520 N Network is not found You cannot connect to the specified network. However, the connection is completed if the antenna icon appears afterward. No channel info The channel information cannot be downloaded, so recommended channel mail cannot be composed. No data in phonebook Cannot operate The phone number and mail address of the other party are not stored in the Phonebook. Store them and try again. (See page 93) No picture No frames to fit the size are found. No response No Bluetooth devices were found around the FOMA phone. Sending end was not found while using iC communication. No response (408) No response from the site or Internet web page, so you could not connect to it. Try again. No set melody This is displayed when you try to play back melodies with the playlist unprogrammed. Program the melodies and then play them back.
(See page 366) Not notify phone No. Cannot operate You could not start up because the other partys phone number was not notified. Not registered An error occurred, so you could not store. Not secret data Cannot call You have switched to Secret Data Only, so you cannot access. Release Secret Data Only and try again.
(See page 141) Notification failed You failed to notify the current location because you moved out the service area during the notification or by other reasons. Move to a place where the radio waves are strong enough and try again. O Operation failed An error occurred, so you could not set. Operation may not be performed The microSD card is removed while it is in progress or an error occurred, so it might be possible that no operation is done. Check the Movie folder for the data. (See page 338) Other function active Cannot operate The function is not available simultaneously in Multitask. End the functions not in use and try again.
(See page 406) Out of service Out of service area Radio waves are not received. Move to a place where the radio waves are strong enough and try again. P Page is not found (404) The site or Internet web page does not exist, or URL is wrong. Check the URL and try again.
(See page 178) PIN1 code blocked PIN1 code blocked Enter PUK PIN1 code not recognized Three times erroneous entry of the PIN1 code blocks the code. Enter the PUK (PIN unblock code). (See page 134) Please set To type receiver No address is in the To field. Fill in the To field and try again. (See page 198, page 200) Please wait The audio line/packet communication facility has trouble or the audio line network/packet communication network is very congested. Wait a while and try again. You can make calls at 110/119/118. However, calls might not be connected by the situation. The packet communication facility has trouble or the packet communication network is very congested. Wait a while and try again. Please wait for a while The audio line/packet communication facility has trouble or the audio line network/packet communication network is very congested. Wait a while and try again. You can make calls at 110/119/118. However, calls might not be connected by the situation. Please wait for a while (packet) The packet communication facility has trouble or the packet communication network is very congested. Wait a while and try again. Positioning failed An error occurred because the FOMA phone is out of the service area or by other reasons, so it failed to measure the current location or to provide the location information. Move to a place where radio waves are strong enough and try again. Preparing Cannot record You cannot record just after recording. Wait a while and try again. Protected all Cannot delete All data items are protected, so cannot be deleted. Release the protection and try again.
(See page 181, page 225, page 237) Protected Cannot delete Protected mail Cannot delete Protected memo Cannot delete Protected message Cannot delete Protected data, so could not be deleted. Release protection and try again. (See page 237) PUK blocked PUK code blocked PUK code not recognized Ten times erroneous entry of the PUK (PIN unblock code) blocks the code. Contact the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop. R Read error An error occurred while reading information from the microSD card. Received invalid data Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. Receiver cannot save data The receiving end blocks data. Receiving failed The destination address set by Host Selection is wrong, so you cannot select and receive. Check the setting and try again. (See page 189) Registration is in progress (554) You cannot operate because the user is being registered. Wait a while and try again. Replace with a new one or check the disk The microSD card formatting is abnormal. Execute Check microSD. (See page 362) Replay period has not yet started Playable date has not come yet, so you cannot play back the file. Retention period has expired (492) You could not download attached files held at the i-mode Center because the save period had been over. Return to normal style You cannot operate in Horizontal Open Style. Switch to Normal Style and try. (See page 28) Rewrite failed Failed to update the software program. Contact a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. Root certificate has expired Terminate SSL session Expiration date of SSL certificate has passed, so the connection is suspended. Root certificate is not valid The SSL certificate of that server is set to Invalid for Certificate setting. Set to Valid and try again. (See page 190) The SSL/TLS certificate of that server is set to Invalid for Certificate setting. Set to Valid and try again.
(See page 190) Run software and delete data on IC card Then delete software Data is left inside the IC card, so you cannot delete the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program. Start up the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli program, delete the stored data, and try again. S Secret data You have not switched to Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, so cannot access. Switch to Secret Mode or Secret Data Only and try again. (See page 141) Server is busy The line facility has trouble or the line is very busy. Wait a while and try again. The line is very busy. Wait a while and try again. 521 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l E r r o r M e s s a g e
P
S
) l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i
) T
S
e g a s s e M r o r r E Service is used by a previous software Unable to download Delete a service?
Service is used by a previous software Unable to upgrade Delete a service?
When the software program with the service that uses the same IC card has already been downloaded, you cannot download or upgrade a new service unless you delete the existing service that has already been stored. Select YES to display the service to be deleted, and then delete that service already stored. Service unavailable The function cannot be operated with the inserted UIM. Setting auto assist Cannot delete Setting auto assist Cannot delete all The country code or international call access code set by Auto Assist Setting cannot be deleted. Change/
Cancel the setting and try again.
(See page 61) Setting IC card lock IC Card Lock is set. Release IC Card Lock and try again. (See page 275) Setting receive option Cannot start Receive Option Setting is set to ON, so you cannot start up. Switch to OFF and try again.
(See page 214) Size of data is not supported Data size exceeded the maximum, so you could not download normally. Size of page is not supported Size of this page is not supported The size of site or Internet web page is large, so obtaining is suspended, and only obtained portion is displayed. 522 Software for this folder deleted Refer to Open folder The corresponding mail-linked i-ppli program has been deleted. Software for this folder exists Cannot delete The corresponding mail-linked i-ppli program is contained, so you cannot delete. Software terminated due to security error i-ppli DX has forcibly been ended. (See page 253) Software update active Cannot operate You could not start up during updating the software program. After the software update is completed, try again. Software update is aborted Please retry The FOMA phone was turned off during updating the software program. Try updating it again.
(See page 528) Software upgraded The target software program is not updated, so you cannot execute. Some addresses are not valid Some addresses are incorrect. Enter the addresses correctly and send. (See page 198, page 244) Some data could not be copied The selected files contained ones that could not be copied, so you could not copy some data. Some data could not be moved The selected files contained ones that could not be moved, so you could not move some data. Some data could not be saved The selected files contained ones that could not be copied to the FOMA phone or microSD card, so you could not save some data. Sort is full Cannot add The maximum number of settings is already set. Release unnecessary settings and try again.
(See page 232) Specified page number is not valid The entered page number is invalid. Enter the correct page number and try again.
(See page 375) Specify max cost within 10-100,000 Set the limit of Notice Call Cost to 10 through 100,000. (See page 420) SSL session cannot be established Either an altered SSL certificate was received or an SSL error occurred, so you could not connect. SSL session failed An authentication error occurred at the server, so you cannot connect. SSL/TLS session cannot be established Either an altered SSL/TLS certificate was received or a SSL/TLS error occurred, so you could not connect. SSL/TLS session failed An authentication error occurred at the server, so you cannot connect. Switch to normal style to answer You cannot operate in Horizontal Open Style. Switch to Normal Style and try. (See page 28) Syntax error Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. System is restarted An error occurred, so the system is restarted and then the Stand-by display returns. T This certificate has expired Terminate SSL session Expiration date of SSL certificate has passed, so the connection is suspended. This software is not supported by this phone The software program to be downloaded or upgraded does not support the FOMA phone. This UIM cannot be recognized An error occurred on the UIM or the PUK (PIN unblock code) is blocked. Contact the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop. Check to see if the correct UIM is inserted.
(See page 39) This UIM cannot be recognized Phone is restarted This UIM cannot be recognized correctly. The system is restarted and then the Stand-by display returns. Time out Disconnected from the other ends Bluetooth device during entering a Bluetooth passkey. No response from the Bluetooth device, so you could not store or connect it. The maximum stand-by time for Accept dialup devices had elapsed, so Accept dialup devices was deactivated. Too much data was entered Too many entered characters to send. Decrease the number of characters and send again.
(See page 174) Transmission failed Transmission failed (552) Transmission failed (XXX) You could not send the mail correctly. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx). This certificate is not valid for this URL Terminate SSL session The contents of this SSL certificate do not match, so the connection is suspended. This data is not valid You are trying to paste characters that cannot be used. Check the characters to be pasted and try again. (See page 442) This file is not attachable Cannot resend The output-prohibited file from the FOMA phone has been attached to the mail, so you could not re-send it. This file is not valid The file is incompatible, so cannot be displayed. This image is not valid The image could not be displayed normally, so cannot be saved. Even if normally displayed, it may not be saved depending on the file format. This mail is broken Cannot resend The size of the mail text is too large or the attachment information about the text is damaged, so you could not re-send. This picture is not valid The image data is invalid, so cannot be displayed. This site is not certified Terminate SSL session This SSL certificate was not supported, so the connection was suspended. This software contains an error This software contains an error Unable to download The software program contains invalid data, so cannot be downloaded or upgraded. This software is currently unavailable for use You cannot start up the software program because the effective period is expired or the server has put it in unavailable state. U Unable to acquire remaining data Delete data Unable to acquire remaining data, Data deleted. An error occurred when downloading the remaining data of the file that was partially saved, so the data was deleted. Unable to activate 1Seg. Please activate the application after moving to FOMA coverage You repeatedly watched 1Seg programs out of the service area where you cannot connect to, so you cannot start 1Seg. Move yourself into the FOMA service area where you can connect to, and then try to start 1Seg again. Unable to change title You could not edit the title because entering no characters or entering only space is disabled while editing the title. Enter characters and try again.
(See page 331) Unable to combine/bind You could not concatenate the scanned data. The scanned data up to now is discarded. Unable to compose Unable to compose message You could not compose i-mode mail because the FOMA phone was reading data. Wait a while and try again. Unable to dial Switch to normal style to dial Cannot dial in Horizontal Open Style. Switch to Normal Style and try again. (See page 28) Unable to download Another function was running or an error occurred, so you could not download. The data is invalid, so cannot be downloaded. 523 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l E r r o r M e s s a g e
T
U
) l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c
i v e D l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i
) U
e g a s s e M r o r r E Unable to download Cancel update Another function was running or an error occurred, so you could not download. Unable to download Data exceeds maximum size You tried to download the PDF file exceeding the maximum size, so could not download it. Unable to download Data exceeds maximum size (452) You tried to receive data exceeding the maximum size, so could not receive it. Unable to edit file name You cannot change the file name to the one starting with a period or containing prohibited characters except half-pitch alphanumeric characters. Enter the correct file name and try again. (See page 332) Unable to input because of exceeding maximum size You could not enter the Deco-mail pictogram because it exceeded the maximum size of the images to be inserted. Unable to move The i-ppli program is the one that cannot be moved to the FOMA phone, so could not be moved from the microSD card to the FOMA phone. Unable to perform AV output An error occurred, so the AV output is suspended. Unable to play because of wrong UIM or license info This music file cannot be played back due to UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM you used for obtaining the Chaku-uta Full music file, and try again. If the UIM is the one inserted for obtaining the Chaku-
uta Full music file, the license information of the music file in the FOMA phone is invalid, so cannot be played back. Perform Initialize and try again. (See page 433) Unable to retrieve the requested URL (504) No response from the server, so you cannot connect. 524 Unable to save The data could not be obtained from a site, so could not be saved. Unable to search any available channels Unable to search any channels No broadcasting station was found that can receive programs currently in the area. Unable to select When selecting the end point for Trim imotion, you tried to select the point before the start point or the same point as the start point. So, the end point could not be selected. Reselect the start point again, then proceed. (See page 344) Unable to send all Ir data All the selected files were output-prohibited from the FOMA phone, so could not be sent. Unable to set An error occurred, so you could not set. Unable to set auto-update An error occurred, so you could not set Set auto-update. Unable to set for storage There are no unoccupied memory numbers within the folder, so you cannot set. Unable to support this card The inserted memory card cannot be used on FOMA P906i. Use FOMA P906i compatible microSD card.
(See page 355) Unable to switch audio data There is only one audio, so you cannot switch. Unable to upgrade An error occurred, so you could not upgrade. Unable to use B address history Unable to use PushTalk from call logs of Number B Unable to use PushTalk in B mode You cannot make a PushTalk call from Number B/
Address B while using 2in1. Switch to A Mode or Dual Mode, or make a PushTalk call from Number A/
Address A. (See page 457) Unable to use this function The function cannot be operated with the inserted UIM. Unable to write You cannot write on the microSD card because it is write-protected. Use external devices to unlock the protection and try again. Unsupported contents exist The data that the FOMA phone does not support is contained. Update pattern definitions An error occurred, so you cannot use Scanning Function. Update the pattern data and try again. (See page 534) Updating program The program of Music&Video Channel is updating, so you cannot download or play it back. Wait a while and try again. URL address is not valid URL address is not valid (xxx) Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx). Usage is currently restricted Try again later When a Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full user communicates a large amount of data within a certain duration, the connection might be restricted for a certain duration. Wait a while and try again. Using mail folder Cannot delete Using mail folder Cannot download Using mail folder Cannot start Corresponding software program is running. End the software program and try again. (See page 252) W Wait for a while to retry Currently, it is placed inactive. Wait a while and try again. Wrong PIN1 code The entered PIN1 code is wrong. Enter the correct one.
(See page 132) Y Your HTTP version is not supported (xxx) Received data has an error, so cannot be displayed or saved. The received data is discarded. A three-digit numeral is displayed for (xxx). i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l D e v i
c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l E r r o r M e s s a g e
U
Y
) 525 Warranty and Maintenance Services Warranty pMake sure that you have received a warranty card provided at purchase. After checking the contents of the warranty card as well as Shop name and date of purchase, keep the warranty card in a safe place. If you notice that necessary items of the warranty card are not filled in, immediately contact the shop where you purchased the FOMA phone. The term of the warranty is one year from the date of purchase. pAll or part of this product including the accessories may be modified for improvement without notice. pData stored in the Phonebook and others might be changed or lost owing to a malfunction, repairs, or other mishandling of your FOMA phone. You are advised to take a note of Phonebook entries and other files in preparation for such incidents. After we repair your FOMA phone, we cannot move, with some exceptions, the information downloaded by using i-mode or i-ppli to your repaired FOMA phone because of the copyright law. The FOMA phone enables you to save data files such as Phonebook entries, i-motion movies, or data files used for i-ppli to the microSD card. You can use Data Security Service (pay service that is available on a subscription basis) to save the data files such as Phonebook entries from the FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. If you have a personal computer, you can transfer and save the data files from the Phonebook to your personal computer by using the DoCoMo keitai datalink (see page 470) via the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) or FOMA USB Cable (option). 526 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Maintenance Services When there is a problem with the FOMA phone Before asking repairs, check Troubleshooting in this manual. If the problem remains unsolved, contact the Repairs counter listed on the back page of this manual for malfunction and consult them. When repairs are necessitated as a result of consultation:
Bring your FOMA phone to a repair counter specified by DoCoMo. Note that your FOMA phone is accepted for repair during the repair counters business hours. Also, make sure that you will bring the warranty card with you to the counter. In warranty period Your FOMA phone is repaired charge free in accordance with the terms of warranty. Make sure that you bring the warranty card to the counter for the repair. If you do not show the warranty card, or when troubles or malfunctions are regarded to be caused by your mishandling, the repair cost is charged even within the warranty period. The cost for troubles caused by the use of devices and consumables other than those specified by DoCoMo is charged even within the warranty period. For the damages of liquid crystal display, connector, etc. after purchase, the repair cost is charged. Repairs may not be performed in the following cases:
When wet-detecting sticker is colored; when corrosion due to soaking, dew condensation, or perspiration was found by the test; when the internal parts are damaged or deformed, repair may not be feasible. Even if repair is feasible, repair due to the reasons above is not covered by the warranty, so the repair cost is charged. After the warranty period We will repair your FOMA phone on request (charges will apply). Spare parts availability period The minimum storage period of the performance spare parts (parts required for maintaining performance) for the FOMA phone is basically six years after the closure of its production. Note, however, that your FOMA phone might not be repaired depending on the parts because of shortage of the spare parts. Even after the storage period, some FOMA phones can be repaired depending on the troubled portions. Contact the Repairs counter listed on the back page of this manual. Other points to note pMake sure not to modify the FOMA phone or its accessories. Catching fire, giving injury, or causing malfunctions may result. For the repair of devices that the modification is applied to, we accept it if you agree to have the modification reset. Further, we might reject to repair depending on the conditions of the modification. The following might be regarded as modifications:
To put stickers, etc. onto the liquid crystal display or keys To decorate the FOMA phone using adhesives To replace the coverings etc. with those of other than DoCoMo genuine Repairs of troubles or malfunctions resulting from the modifications are charged even within the warranty period. pDo not peel the nameplate off the FOMA phone. The nameplate is a certificate for ensuring the technological standard. If someone intentionally peel off the nameplate or replace it, the contents described in the nameplate cannot be checked, as we cannot verify the conformity of the product to the technical standard. Note that we may refuse repair for some malfunctions in this case. pThe information such as function settings and Total Calls Duration, etc. might be reset depending on troubles or repairs, or the way you handle the FOMA phone. Set the settings again. pThe following parts of the FOMA phone uses the parts generating magnetic field:
Note that if you put a card such as cash card liable to be influenced by magnetic field close to it, the card might be adversely affected. Using parts: speaker, earpiece pIf the FOMA phone gets wet or becomes moist, immediately turn off the power and remove the battery pack; then visit a repair counter. The FOMA phone may not be repaired depending on its condition. Memory dial (Phonebook function) and downloaded information It is recommended to take a note of the information you have stored in the FOMA phone and keep it in a safe place. We are not responsible for any change in or loss of information. When replacing or repairing your FOMA phone, the data you created, obtained from external devices, or downloaded may be changed or lost. We do not take any responsibility for the loss or change incurred to the data. We may replace your FOMA phone with a new one instead of repairing, for our convenience sake. With this FOMA phone, we move the files including the images and ring melodies downloaded to the FOMA phone or the files you created to the new FOMA phone so far as your existing FOMA phone is troubled or repaired. (We cannot move some files. Also, some files might not be movable depending on the degree of malfunction.) It may take a while to move files, or it might occur that moving files is not possible depending on the memory size of the files stored in the FOMA phone. i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site You can check on your FOMA phone whether sending/receiving mail messages, downloading images/melodies, and others are normally working. pTo connect to Top display Test Menu list
(i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site) i-mode site:
iMenu (News)
(Services & Functions) (i-mode)
(i-mode Trouble Diagnosis)
(Japanese only) QR code for accessing the site pA packet communication fee for connecting to the i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site is free. (When you access it from overseas, you are charged the fee.) pThe test items differ by model of FOMA phones. Further the test items might be changed. pWhen you check operations of your FOMA phone according to each test item, read the cautions on the site thoroughly and then perform the test. pWhen you connect to the i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site and test on sending mail messages, the proper information about your FOMA phone (model name, mail address, etc.) is automatically sent to the server (i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Server). We never use the sent information for other purposes than for the i-mode trouble diagnosis. pWhen you think your FOMA phone is in trouble as a result of your check, contact the Repairs counter listed on the back page of this manual. 527 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l
<Software Update>
Updating Software This function is to check whether you need to update software programs in the FOMA phone by connecting to the network, and if necessary, you can download some parts of software programs using packet communication, and can update the software programs. You are not charged a packet communication fee for updating software programs. If you need to update the software programs, the DoCoMo web page and
(News) in iMenu let you know about it. Auto-update, Update Now and Reserve Update are available for updating software programs. Auto-update: Automatically downloads new software programs, and updates at the time you specified beforehand. Update Now: If you want to, immediately update. Reserve Update: Reserve the date and time for updating software programs, and they are automatically updated at the reserved date and time. pDo not remove the battery pack while updating software programs. You may fail to update. pYou can update software programs with the Phonebook entries, images shot by the camera, or downloaded data retained in the FOMA phone; however note that data may not be protected depending on the conditions (such as malfunction, damage, or drench) your FOMA phone is placed in. You are advised to backup important data. Note that some data such as downloaded ones might not be backed up. 528 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Before Using Software Update pYou can update software programs even when you set Host selection to a user designated destination. pFully charge the battery before updating software programs. pYou cannot update software programs in the following cases:
When the FOMA phone is off During a call During PIN1 code lock During Self Mode When the UIM is not inserted While connecting to external devices such as a personal computer pIt may take time to update (download or rewrite) software programs. pYou cannot make/receive calls, use communication functions, and use other functions When date and time are not set Out of the service area During Omakase Lock While using other functions while updating software programs.
(You can receive voice calls, forward calls or operate Record Message during download.) pWhen updating, the FOMA phone is connected to the server (DoCoMo site) using SSL communication. You need to validate the SSL certificate.
(Setting at purchase: Valid See page 190 for how to set.) pIt is recommended to update software programs when radio wave is strong enough with the three antennas displayed and while you are not moving. If radio wave conditions get worse while downloading software programs, or download is suspended, move to a place with good radio wave conditions and try again to update software programs. pIf you check Software Update with the software programs already updated, the message No update is needed Please continue to use as before is displayed. pWhen Receive option setting is set to ON and mail comes in during software update, the display for notifying you of the arrival of mail may not be displayed after software update is completed. pWhen updating software programs, the proper information about your FOMA phone
(model name or serial number, etc.) is automatically sent to the server (DoCoMo-
managed server for Software Update). We at DoCoMo never use the sent information for other purposes than for updating software programs. pIf you fail to update software programs, Rewrite failed is displayed and you cannot do all the operations. In that case, you are kindly requested to come to a repair counter specified by DoCoMo. pYou cannot use Software Update overseas. Update Software Programs Automatically
<Set Auto-update>
You can download new software programs automatically, then the updating is operated at the time you specified beforehand. When the rewriting state is ready, the Rewrite notification icon appears. Then you can confirm the rewrite time and select whether to change the rewrite time or rewrite the program immediately. pYou cannot change Set auto-update when the notification icon of software update is displayed on the Stand-by display. In that case, select the notification icon, and clear that icon without confirming whether the software update is required. You are then able to change Set auto-update. 1 Set the date/time of updating. 2 Select the Rewrite notification icon on the Stand-by display, and select OK, Change time or Now rewrite. The Rewrite notification icon notifies you that rewriting starts at the set time. (It is cleared when you check it.) Select the Rewrite notification icon. Rewrite notification icon When you select OK After you select it, the Stand-by display returns, and then rewriting starts at the set time. 529 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l When you select Change time You can set day of a week and time for rewriting. When you select Now rewrite l Rewrite notification icon Rewrite completion icon appears only when you select Now rewrite. Rewrite completion icon 530 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Start Software Update If you select Only notification of Set auto-update, Update notification icon notifies you when software update is necessary. You can start Software Update by selecting Update notification icon, or from the Menu display. 3 When updating is not necessary, No update is needed is displayed. Use the FOMA phone as it is. When updating is necessary, Update is needed is displayed. You can select either Now update or Reserve. Start Software Update by Selecting Update notification icon 1 Select Update notification icon on the Stand-by display. Software Update display When updating is not necessary The display for when the software update is unavailable because of the server congestion.
(Wait for a while and then start the software update again.) Start Software Update from Menu 1 mSettingsOther settingsSoftware update
Enter your TerminalSecurity CodeUpdate pIf you select No, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the notification icon. pUpdate notification icon appears in the following cases:
When notification is provided by DoCoMo When Update is needed is displayed in step 3 on page 531 When you fail to update software programs during updating in Reserve Update When you cancel the reservation for the software update 2 Check whether the software programs need to be updated. pYou can answer voice calls during check. 2 Go to step 2 of [Start Software Update by Selecting Update notification icon] on page 531. 531 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Update Software Now (Update Now) 1 When you select Now update, Start download is displayed and downloading starts after a while. (Select OK to start downloading right now.) pYou can answer voice calls during download. pIf you cancel downloading midway, the data downloaded up to that point is deleted. pOnce downloading starts, updating proceeds automatically; you do not need to select menu items. 2 When downloading is completed, rewriting the software programs starts. (Select OK to start rewriting right now.) When rewriting is completed, your FOMA phone automatically restarts. 3 After confirming the update completion, select OK. Reserve Date and Time for Updating Software (Reserve Update) When downloading takes time or the server is busy, you can set in advance the date and time for starting the software update by communicating with the server. 1 Select Reserve from the Software Update display. pIt may take a while to start rewriting. pYou cannot even answer calls while rewriting. While rewriting the software programs, all key operations are disabled. You cannot even stop updating. Also, charging temporarily stops even if the AC adapter (option) is connected. The date and time which can be reserved are displayed. pThe servers time table appears for the software update reservation. When you select Others After communicating with the server, you can select the date and time you want. The availability of each time zone is displayed on the time selection display as follows:
: Available, : Almost full, : Not available When you select one time zone you want, you can communicate with the server again to display candidates for reserving time. 532 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i 2 Confirm the date and time you selected. Select YES. Your FOMA phone communicates with the server again and then the reservation is completed. Check, Change, or Cancel the Reserved Date and Time Select Software update from the setting menu, then enter your Terminal Security Code and select Update; then you can confirm the reserved time. You can change or cancel the reserved date and time from the display for checking reservation. To change, select Change. To cancel, select Cancel. When the reserved time comes The display on the right appears and about five seconds later the software update starts automatically. Before the reserved time, fully charge the battery pack, place the FOMA phone with the Stand-by display shown in a place within reach of radio wave. End Software Update If you select NO or Cancel from each display, the display for ending the operation appears. Select YES; then the software update ends and the Stand-by display returns. To return to the previous display, select NO. Information pIf the battery level points during operation, the software rewriting is not done and the operation ends. Information pNote that updating may not start even when the reserved time arrives if you are using another function. pThe software update may not be started if an alarm is activated. pIf you execute Initialize on page 433 after completing the reservation, the software update does not start even when the reserved time arrives. Make a reservation for the software update again. 533 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l
<Scanning Function>
Protecting FOMA Phone from Data Causing Failure First of all, update the pattern data to make it the latest. Regarding data and programs downloaded or obtained from sites, i-mode mail messages or SMS messages to the FOMA phone, you can detect data that might cause failure, can delete it, and can stop starting an application program. pUse the pattern data for checking. Update the pattern data, because it is upgraded each time new trouble is found. (See page 534) pThe scan function is for filtering out the data that causes failure to mobile phones at the time of browsing web pages or receiving mail messages. Note that this function works only when the pattern data for each failure has been downloaded to your mobile phone and when the pattern data for each failure is found. pThe data contained in the pattern data varies depending on the mobile phone model. Therefore, note that we may stop distributing the pattern data to mobile phones that have been on the market for three years or more. Set Scanning Function <Set Scan>
If you set Scan to Valid, data or a program can be automatically checked when you try to run it. In addition, if you set Message scan to Valid, a received SMS message can be automatically checked when you display it. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityScanning function
Set scanSelect an item. Scan . Sets whether to run the scanning function. Message scan . Sets whether to run the scanning function when displaying an SMS message. pWhile Scan is set to Invalid, you cannot set Message scan. Information pThe scanning is not available for the SMS message which notifies you of receiving mopera mail or of incoming calls for Voice Mail Service. Update Pattern Data <Update>
UpdateYESYES pTo cancel during i-mode connection, select Cancel. 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityScanning function 2 OK pWhen pattern data update is not necessary, Pattern definitions are up-to-date is displayed. Use the pattern data as it is. Information pWhen updating the pattern data, the proper information about your FOMA phone
(model name, serial number, etc.) is automatically sent to the server (DoCoMo-
managed server for the scanning function). We at DoCoMo never use the sent information for other purposes than for the scanning function. pSet the date (year/month/date) for the FOMA phone correctly in advance. pThe pattern data is not updated in the following cases:
During a call When the date/time is not set When the UIM is not inserted During Lock All While another function is working When connecting to external devices such as personal computers While Self Mode is activated pIf you cancel downloading midway, the data downloaded up to that point is deleted. Out of the service area pWhen the scan function is set, an alert is shown by five levels if data that might 2 Valid or InvalidYES cause failure is detected. (See page 535) 534 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Update Pattern Data Automatically <Set Auto-update>
You can set whether to update the pattern data inside your FOMA phone when the pattern data is created anew.
Set auto-updateON or OFF 1 mSettingsLock/SecurityScanning function 2 YESOK pWhen you select ON in step 1, the confirmation display appears telling that your mobile phone information is sent at auto-update. pTo cancel during i-mode connection, select Cancel. Information pWhen setting auto-update or updating automatically, the proper information about your FOMA phone (model name, serial number, etc.) is automatically sent to the server (DoCoMo-managed server for the scanning function). We at DoCoMo never use the sent information for other purposes than for the scanning function. pWhen auto-update is completed, the notification icon of
(Update completed) appears on the Stand-by display. If it is failed, Select to display the update result.
(Pattern update failed) appears. Displays for Scanning Result About the display for scanned problem elements A warning display appears when problematic data is found. Select Detail from the warning display to bring up the name of the problem element. pWhen six or more problem elements are found, the sixth and later problem element names are omitted. pDetail might not appear depending on the detected problem element. The displays for scanning result Alert level 0 Alert level 1 Alert level 2 OK.....Continues the YES ....Stops and ends the OK .... Stops and ends the operation. Alert level 3 operation. NO .....Continues the operation. Alert level 4 operation. YES.....Deletes the data OK .... Deletes the data and and ends the operation. NO ......Stops and ends the operation. ends the operation. pThe alert displays for when displaying i-mode mail messages or SMS messages may differ from the ones above. Check Pattern Data Version <Version>
1 mSettingsLock/Security
Scanning functionVersion 535 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l FOMA P906i Height: 000 mm Width: 000 mm Depth: 000 mm Approx. 000 g In motion: Approx. 000 hours In motion: Approx. 000 hours Standstill: Approx. 000 hours Standstill: Approx. 000 hours Switch 3G/GSM
[3G]
Switch 3G/GSM
[Auto]
Switch 3G/GSM
[Auto]
FOMA/3G network Voice call: Approx. 000 minutes Specifications Handset Model Dimensions
(when closed) Weight (with the battery pack attached) Continuou s standby time FOMA/
3G network GSM network Continuou s talk time GSM network 1Seg watching time Charging time LCD Type Size Videophone call: Approx. 000 minutes Voice call: Approx. 000 minutes Approx. 000 minutes
(in ECO Mode: Approx 000 minutes) AC adapter: Approx. 000 minutes DC adapter: Approx. 000 minutes Display: TFT 262,144 colors Private window: Organic EL one color Display: Approx. 3.1 inches Private window: Approx. 0.9 inches l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Camera Number of effective pixels Number of recording pixels
(maximum) Zooming (digital) Recording Number of Inside camera: Approx. 330,000 pixels Outside camera: Approx. 5,100,000 pixels Inside camera: Approx. 310,000 pixels Outside camera: Approx. 5,000,000 pixels Inside camera: Approx. 5.0 times max. Outside camera: Approx. 15.1 times max. Approx. 3,500 (When stored in the FOMA phone)1 recordable still images Number of still images for continuous shooting Still image file format Moving image recording time Moving image file format Continuous playback time5 Music playback VGA: 4 CIF: 4 QCIF: 5 through 20 QVGA: 5 through 10 Sub-QCIF: 5 through 20 JPEG Phone: Approx. 497 seconds2 microSD card (64MB): Approx. 137 minutes3 Phone: MP4 microSD card: MP4, ASF4 SD-Audio file (supports Play Background):
Approx. 4,560 minutes6 Chaku-uta Full music file (supports Play Background): Approx. 4,150 minutes6 i-motion movie (including Chaku-uta music file):
Approx. 890 minutes6 WMA file (supports Play Background):
Approx. 3,240 minutes Music&Video Channel program (supports Play Background) Music: Approx. 4,150 minutes Video: Approx. 250 minutes Approx. 101.6 Mbytes7 Number of pixels Display: 409,920 pixels (480 dots x 854 dots) Private window: 4,608 pixels (128 dots x 36 dots) Inside camera: CMOS Outside camera: CMOS Inside camera: 1/8.0 inches Outside camera: 1/2.8 inches Memory capacity Chaku-uta Chaku-uta Full Image pickup device Type Size 536 1: Image size: Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), Image quality: Normal, File size: 10 Kbytes 2: The maximum recording time per moving image which can be saved to the FOMA phone with the following conditions:
Image size: Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), File size setting: Mail restriction (L), Image quality: Normal, Type: Video + voice 3: The maximum recording time per moving image which can be saved to the microSD card with the following conditions:
Image size: Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), File size setting: Long time, Image quality: Normal, Type: Video + voice 4: When File size setting is set to Long time. 5: The continuous playback time is the estimated time that the FOMA phone can play back using the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 (option) with the FOMA phone closed. 6: File format: AAC 7: Shares with still images, i-motion movies, melodies, PDF files, Music&Video Channel programs, Kisekae Tool files, ToruCa files, and i-ppli programs. Battery pack Name of product Battery type Voltage Capacity Battery Pack P16 Li-ion (lithium ion) battery 3.7 V 770 mAh Number of Savable/Storable/Protectable Items in FOMA Phone Function Phonebook 1Seg Schedule ToDo Text memo Mail
(total of SMS messages and i-mode mail messages) Area mail Template Message TVlink Book program Timer recording Schedule Holiday Anniversary Received mail Sent mail Draft mail7 User created folder
(Inbox) User created folder
(Outbox) Deco-mail Decome-Anime Message R Message F Bookmark
(i-mode) Bookmark
(Full Browser) Bookmark Bookmark folder Bookmark Bookmark folder Number of savable/storable items Reference
<Number of protectable items>
1,0001 50 100 100 1,000 100 100 100 20 2,500 max. 2, 3, 4, 5
<2,500 max. 2>
1,000 max. 2, 4, 6
<1,000 max. 2>
20 max. 2 22 22 30 100 max. 2, 5 100 max. 2, 5 100 max. 2
<50 max. 2>
100 max. 2
<50 max. 2>
100 10 (incl. Bookmark) 1005 10 (incl. Bookmark) page 92 302 304 305 411 412 412 415 421 218 219 219 224 224 218 208 209 236 236 178 179 178 179 537 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l page 180 181 330 366 338 366 351 366 349 374 386 386 354 268 270 250 250 Number of savable/storable items Reference Function Screen memo Screen memo Screen memo folder Still image
<Number of protectable items>
100 max. 2
<50 max. 2>
10 (incl. Screen memo) 3,500 max. 2, 8, 9 User created folder 20 Moving image/i-motion movie 3,500 max. 2, 8, 9 User created folder 20 Melody Chara-den PDF file Music&Video Channel Kisekae Tool ToruCa i-ppli User created folder Downloaded program Saved program User created folder 3,500 max. 2, 8, 9 20 37 3,500 max. 2, 8, 9 2 10 max. 2, 9 3,500 max. 2, 8, 9 495 max. 2, 9 20 100 max. 2, 9 Mail-linked i-ppli 5 1: Up to 50 Phonebook entries can be stored on the UIM. 2: The number of savable, storable, or protectable items may decrease depending on 3: Includes mail in the Chat folder, Trash box folder and the i-ppli mail folder. 4: In addition, a total of 20 received and sent SMS messages can be saved to the the data volume. UIM. (See page 422) 5: Includes pre-installed data. 6: Includes mail in the Chat folder and the i-ppli mail folder. 7: Can save unsent mail you are composing. 8: Among pre-installed data, only the Deco-mail pictograms are included as the savable/storable items. 9: Still images, i-motion movies, melodies, PDF files, music files, Music&Video Channel programs, Kisekae Tool files, ToruCa files, and i-ppli programs share the number of savable/storable items and memory space. 538 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i SAR Certification Information and Other Information SAR Certification Information This model phone FOMA P906i meets the MICs* technical regulation for exposure to radio waves. The technical regulation established permitted levels of radio frequency energy, based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The regulation employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit is 2 watts/kilogram (W/kg)** averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The value of the limit is equal to the international guidelines recommended by ICNIRP***. All phone models should be confirmed to comply with the regulation, before they are available for sale to the public. The highest SAR value for this model phone is 0.373 W/kg. It was taken by the Telecom Engineering Center
(TELEC), a Registered Certification Agency on the Radio Law. The test for SAR was conducted in accordance with the MIC testing procedure using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest permitted power level in all tested frequency bands. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the MICs technical regulation. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the phone during operation can be well below the maximum value. For further information about SAR, please see the following web pages:
World Health Organization (WHO):
ICNIRP:
MIC:
TELEC:
NTT DoCoMo:
Panasonic Mobile Communications Co., Ltd.:
http://www.icnirp.de/
http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/e/ele/body/index.htm http://www.telec.or.jp/ENG/Index_e.htm http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/product/
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/
http://panasonic.jp/mobile/
(Japanese only)
* Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications
** The technical regulation is provided in Article 14-2 of the Ministry Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment.
*** International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection European RF Exposure Information This mobile phone complies with the EU requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transceiver, designed and manufactured not to exceed the SAR* limits** for exposure to radio-frequency (RF) energy, which SAR* value, when tested for compliance against the standard was 0.311 W/kg. While there may be differences between the SAR* levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet*** the EU requirements for RF exposure.
The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
** The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue, recommended by The Council of the European Union. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements.
*** Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, the lower the power output. Declaration of Conformity The product FOMA P906i is declared to conform with the essential requirements of European Union Directive 1999/5/EC Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 3.1(a), 3.1(b) and 3.2. The Declaration of Conformity can be found on http://panasonic.co.jp/pmc/
products/en/support/index.html. The European RTTE approval of this product is limited to the use of the P906i handset, Battery Pack and FOMA AC Adapter for Global use (100 to 240 V AC) only. Other accessories are not part of the approval. FCC Notice pThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. pChanges or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF Exposure Information THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE U.S. GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone contains a radio transmitter and receiver. Your phone is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/
kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the U.S. government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed on position and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.388 W/kg, and when worn on the body, is 0.453 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the U.S. government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after search on FCC ID UCE208006A. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory designated for this product or when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm from the body.
* In the United States, the SAR limit for wireless mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. SAR values may vary depending upon national reporting requirements and the network band. 539 i A p p e n d x E x t e r n a
l
i D e v c e s T r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Important Safety Information AIRCRAFT Switch off your wireless device when boarding an aircraft or whenever you are instructed to do so by airline staff. If your device offers a flight mode or similar feature consult airline staff as to whether it can be used on board. DRIVING Full attention should be given to driving at all times and local laws and regulations restricting the use of wireless devices while driving must be observed. HOSPITALS Mobile phones should be switched off wherever you are requested to do so in hospitals, clinics or health care facilities. These requests are designed to prevent possible interference with sensitive medical equipment. PETROL STATIONS Obey all posted signs with respect to the use of wireless devices or other radio equipment in locations with flammable material and chemicals. Switch off your wireless device whenever you are instructed to do so by authorized staff. INTERFERENCE Care must be taken when using the phone in close proximity to personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15 cm be maintained between a mobile phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. To achieve this use the phone on the opposite ear to your pacemaker and do not carry it in a breast pocket. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. For other Medical Devices:
Please consult your physician and the device manufacturer to determine if operation of your phone may interfere with the operation of your medical device. Export Administration Regulations This product and its accessories might be covered by the Japan Export Administration Regulations (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law and its related laws). To export this product and its accessories, take the required measures on your responsibility and at your expenses. For details on the procedures, contact the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. 540 l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T s e c v e D i
l
a n r e t x E x d n e p p A i Index/Quick Manual Index . 542 Quick Manual . 550 541 Index How to refer to Index pThe Index contains the terms and terminologies summarizing the descriptive contents by sorting in alphabetical order. If you cannot find the term or terminology you want to know, search for it using a different term or terminology.
<Example: To set the i-ppli Stand-by display using Software setting of i-ppli>
Software setting . 253 Change melody/image. 253 Horizontal open menu set . 253 Icon info . 253 Location usage. 254 Network set . 253 Program guide key. 254 See phonebook/history . 254 Stand-by net. 263 Stand-by set. 263 Stand-by display . 45 Stand-by set (i-ppli) . 263 Status icon . 125 ippli settings . 261 i-ppli stand-by display . 115, 263 i-ppli to function . 187 A Backlight . 261 AC adapter . 43 Accept dialup devices. 429 Accept registered
(Bluetooth function) . 429 Access authentication. 467 Access setting . 318 Accessories . 24 Action list . 74, 350 Activate TV with alarm . 305 Activate 1Seg . 295 Add desktop icon . 127 Add member (PushTalk). 84 Add to a phonebook entry . 96 Add to phonebook (Phone). 92, 96 Add to phonebook (UIM) . 92, 96 Additional service . 462 Additional guidance. 463 Address link function. 188 Alarm. 408 Alarm setting . 416 Answer setting . 66 Antenna. 27 Any key answer. 66 Power saver . 261 Area mail. 238 Area mail settings . 239 Arrival call act . 454 AT command. 469 Attach bookmarks . 211 Attach document files . 211 Attach i-motion movies . 210 Attach melodies . 210 Attach PDF files . 211 Attach phonebook entries . 211 Attach pictures . 210 Attach schedule events. 211 Attach SD other files . 211 Attach ToDo items. 211 Attach ToruCa files . 211 Attachment preference . 234 Attachments . 210, 216 Auto answer setting. 424 Auto answer setting (PushTalk) . 88 Auto assist setting . 61 Auto channel setting . 294 Auto color label . 234 Auto melody play. 234 Auto power on/off . 408 Auto reading . 274 Auto save set . 162 Auto start info . 262 Auto start setting . 262 Auto start time . 262 Auto timer . 164 Auto voice dial. 105 Auto volume (Video) . 309 Auto volume (1Seg) . 309 Auto-display . 236 Autofocus . 160 Auto-sort (Mail) . 231 Auto-sort (ToruCa) . 271 Auto-sort setting display . 231 AV output . 380 AV phone to function. 187 Vibrator . 261 B Back cover . 27 Backlight . 118 Bar code reader . 165 Bar code reader list . 167 Battery level . 44 Battery pack . 41 Attaching/removing . 41 Charging . 42 Charging time. 43 Usable time . 43 Bluetooth function . 425 Bluetooth info. 432 Bluetooth power off . 429 Bluetooth settings . 432 Book program . 304 Book program list. 304 Bookmark . 178 Bookmark (PDF) . 376 Add bookmark . 375 Bookmark folder list . 179 Bookmark list . 179 Brightness . 76, 139, 161, 298, 337 Broadcasting storage area . 292 C Cache . 173 Calculator . 421 Calendar . 115, 411 Calendar display . 412 Call acceptance . 143 Call barring . 479 Call/charging indicator . 27 Call data . 419 Call forwarding. 450, 480 Call rejection . 65, 143 Call setting without ID . 144 Call waiting . 448 Answer an incoming call during a call. 448 Continue the current call . 449 End a call to answer another call
. 449 End a call to answer the held call
. 449 542 l a u n a M k c u Q x e d n
i I
) C
A
x e d n I End a held call . 449 Hold a call to make a new call
. 449 Caller ID notification . 47 Caller ID request . 452, 480 Camera . 148 Number of storable still images
. 152 Recordable time . 153 Specifications for moving image shooting . 152 Specifications for still image shooting . 151 Camera menu . 155, 158 Caption (1Seg) . 309 Caption position in wide screen . 309 Capture screen. 376 Category list . 356 Certificate . 190 Certificate host . 192 Chaku-moji . 57 Chaku-motion. 108, 116 Chaku-uta full music list . 394 Change action . 74, 350 Change camera-mode . 160 Change character code . 176 Change IC owner . 268 Change i-mode password . 177 Change PIN1 code. 134 Change PIN2 code. 134 Change security code . 133, 139 Change size . 337 Change to videophone call. 53, 65 Change to voice call. 53, 65 Channel info . 297 Channel list . 195, 294 Channel list display . 294 Channel setting . 294 Chapter info . 389 Character entry . 436 Bar code reader . 165 Candidate display . 440 Candidate display size . 440 Change input mode. 440 Character set time. 440 Common phrases . 440 Copy . 442 Cut . 442 Full pitch . 439 Half pitch . 439 Help. 440 Input time . 440 JUMP . 441 Kuten code . 440 Learned words . 443 Own dictionary . 442 Paste. 442 Pictograph. 439 Predict. 439 Quote own data. 440 Quote phonebook . 440 Space . 440 Symbols . 439 Undo . 439 2/NIKO-touch guide . 440 Character entry display. 436 Character input method . 436 Mode1 (5-touch) . 436 Mode2 (2-touch) . 444 Mode3 (NIKO-touch). 444 Character size . 129 Character stamp . 336 Chara-den. 74, 349 Chara-den display . 349 Chara-den list . 349 Chara-den player . 349 Chara-den recording display . 350 Chara-den setup. 74 Charge sound . 111 Charging . 42 Charging terminal . 27 Chat group . 243 Chat group address confirmation display. 243 Chat group list. 243 Chat mail. 239 Chat mail display . 240, 241 Chat member . 239 Chat member list. 239 Chat setting. 242 Check box. 37, 174 Check IC owner . 268 Check microSD. 362 Check new message . 215 Check new messages. 446 Check new SMS . 246 Check same data . 274 Check settings (Full browser) . 318 Check settings (i-ppli) . 261 Check settings (i-mode) . 188 Check settings (Mail) . 234 Check TV settings. 310 Clear max cost icon . 420 Client authentication . 190 Clock display. 130 Color label. 226 Color mode set . 76, 161 Color theme setting. 119 Command navigation key . 29 Common phrase display . 441 Common phrase folder list . 441 Common phrase list . 441, 509 Common phrases . 441 Common replay mode . 162 Communication setup files . 469 Connect to Bluetooth device. 428 Connect to other devices . 468 Connector terminal . 27 Contents info. 324 Continuous mode . 162 Continuous scroll. 29 Continuous shooting . 155 Cookie . 319 Cookie setting . 319 Copy . 442 Copy from UIM . 422 Copy to microSD
. 271, 272, 357, 359 Copy to phone. 271, 272, 358, 360 Copy to UIM . 422 Copyrights . 22, 147 Correct characters. 438 Count characters. 438 Countdown train GPS . 256 Country code. 474 Country code setting . 61 Create learned word list . 443 Cushy mark . 162, 336 Cut. 442 D Data box . 328 Data broadcasting . 301 Data communication . 466 Data list . 356 Data security service. 145 Mail . 225 Phonebook . 105 Still image . 332 Data transfer
(OBEX communication) . 466 Data while editing . 96, 438 Day of week . 130 DC adapter . 44 DCMX . 260 Deco-mail . 202 Deco-mail pictogram . 328 Deco-mail template list . 208 Decome-anime . 206 Decome-anime creation display . 206 543 I i
n d e x Q u c k M a n u a l I n d e x
C
D
) Decome-anime template list . 209 Delete attached file. 212, 228 Delete cookies . 319 Delete data . 100 Delete from PushTalk phonebook . 87 Description . 429 Desktop holder . 43 Desktop icon. 125, 126 Desktop icon list . 127 Detailed channel list display . 294 Detailed chat group display . 243 Detailed data display . 356 Detailed deco-mail template display
. 208 Detailed dialed call display . 55 Detailed display . 156 Detailed kisekae tool display . 354 Detailed mail group display. 233 Detailed message R/F display . 236 Detailed phonebook display . 99 Detailed received call display . 55 Detailed received mail display
. 218, 220 Detailed redial display . 55 Detailed schedule display. 413 Detailed screen memo display . 181 Detailed sent mail display. 219, 222 Detailed sent message . 58 Detailed ToruCa file display
. 270, 272 Device list . 428 Dial from headset
(Bluetooth function) . 432 Dialed call list . 54 Dialed calls . 54 Dictionary info. 443 Direct selection . 37 Disconnection settings
(Bluetooth function) . 432 Display . 26, 30 544 Display call/receive number . 128 Display during dialing . 51 Display during videophone calls . 50 Display for incoming calls . 65 Display message R/F . 236 Display mode setting. 315 Display phonebook image. 117 Display setting. 115 Display size (Camera). 162 Display size (Chara-den) . 350 Display size (i-motion). 342 Display size (PC movie) . 325 Display size (Picture) . 334 Display SMS report . 228 Display software info. 251 Display while dialing/communicating
(PushTalk). 83 DoCoMo certificate . 190 DoCoMo keitai datalink . 470 Document display settings . 377 Document info. 374, 379 Document list . 378 Document viewer . 378 Download . 182 Download dictionary . 443 Download remain . 376 DPOF setting . 379 Draft . 219 Draft list. 219, 223 DTMF tone off . 76 Dual network . 452 E Earphone/microphone. 423 Earphone/microphone/AV output terminal . 27 Earpiece volume . 67 ECO mode . 310 Edit decome-anime display. 206 Edit imotion . 343 Edit imotion display . 343 Edit phonebook . 100 Edit picture . 335 Edit picture display . 335 End stand-by display. 263 End stand-by info . 264 English display . 45 English guidance. 453 Enter URL . 178, 316 Equalizer (i-motion) . 342 Equalizer (MUSIC player) . 400 Equalizer (Music&Video channel)
. 389 Equalizer (PC movie) . 325 Equalizer (Video). 310 Equalizer (1Seg) . 310 Error messages . 516 Export administration regulations
. 540 F Face data reading display . 138, 140 Face reader security . 139 Face reader setting . 138 FeelMail . 122 FeliCa . 266 FeliCa mark. 27, 267, 372 File info . 354, 362, 378 File property . 347, 349 File restriction . 164, 332 File size setting . 160 Finder display . 149, 155, 158 FirstPass center . 190 Fit in screen. 336 Flash . 174 Flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch . 423 Flicker correction. 161 Focus . 76, 161 Folder info . 264 Folder list (Document file) . 378 Folder list (i-motion). 338 Folder list (Melody) . 351 Folder list (PDF) . 374 Folder list (Picture) . 330 Folder list (SD other files) . 362 Folder list (Video) . 345 FOMA antenna . 27 FOMA communication environment check application . 261 FOMA PC setup software . 469 Font . 128 Forward ring tone
(Bluetooth function) . 432 Forward specified calls to specified destination . 451 Forward specified calls to voice mail center. 448 Forwarding guidance . 451 Forwarding image . 371 Frame . 316, 336 Full browser . 314 Full browser display. 314 Full browser settings . 317 Full-pitch character . 438 Fullsong ring tone . 398 Function list . 482 Function menu. 36 G G guide program list remote-controller
. 259 GPRS network. 472 GPS . 278 GPS button setting . 287 GPS compatible i-ppli . 279 GPS settings . 287 Group member list . 86 Group member selection display . 86 Group setting . 97 l a u n a M k c u Q x e d n
i I
) G
D
x e d n I GSM network . 472 Guide . 39 Gundam U.C.0079 . 255 H Half-pitch character . 438 Hands-free . 63 Hands-free with PushTalk . 88 Hands-free with videophone . 77 Header/signature . 235 Headset microphone setting . 423 Headset switch to call . 424 Headset usage setting . 112 Help . 139 History info . 324 Holding . 68 Holding (during a call) . 68 Home URL . 318 Hook for horizontal open style . 27 Horizontal open lever . 27 Horizontal open menu . 36, 122 Horizontal open style . 28 Host selection. 189, 290 I ippli . 279 i-ppli . 250 Automatic start . 262 Download . 250 Power saver . 254 Run . 251 Software info. 254 Start up . 251 Upgrade . 254 ippli(microSD) . 264 i-ppli banking . 258 i-ppli mail . 251 ippli settings . 261 i-ppli stand-by display. 115, 263 i-ppli to function . 187 IC card . 266 IC card content . 267 IC card lock. 275 IC lock (power-off) . 275 iC transfer service. 266 iC transmission . 372 Receive all data files . 373 Receive one data file . 372 Send all data files . 372 Send one data file . 372 i-Channel . 195 Icon (Camera). 163 Icon (i-motion). 339 Icon (PC movie) . 322 Icon (Picture) . 331 Icon (Video) . 310 Icon (1Seg) . 310 Icon color . 117 Icons . 32 iD setting application . 260 IDD prefix setting . 61 Illumination . 122, 123 Image . 330 Image quality . 119, 161 Image quality (Video) . 309 Image quality (1Seg) . 309 Image size . 160 Image stabilizer . 162 imenu . 172 imenu in English . 173 i-mode. 172 i-mode (Chaku-uta full) folder list
. 394 i-mode arrival act (PushTalk) . 89 i-mode FeliCa . 266 i-mode mail . 198 Compose. 198 Forward. 216 Receive . 213 Reply . 215 Reply with quote . 215 Save . 199 Send . 198 i-mode menu. 172 i-mode password . 132 i-mode settings . 188 i-mode trouble diagnosis site . 527 i-motion . 193 imotion auto-play . 194 imotion info . 340 i-motion player . 338 Inbox . 218 Inbox folder list . 218, 220 Inbox list . 218, 220 In-call ring tone . 64 In-car hands-free . 63 Info . 208 Info notice setting . 124 Infrared data exchange. 367 Receive all data files . 371 Receive one or multiple data files
. 370 Send all data files . 371 Send one or multiple data files
. 370 Infrared data port . 26 Infrared remote-controller . 371 Initial setting . 46 Initialize. 433 Inside camera . 27, 148 Intellectual property rights. 22 International call access code. 474 International calls . 60 International dial
(International roaming) . 476 International dial assist . 61 International prefix number for the universal number . 475 International roaming . 472 International videophone call . 60 Internet . 178 ISP connection communication. 189 J JAN code. 165 Japanese display . 45 J-E/J-C speech translation for P . 257 K Key guide . 76 Keypad dial lock . 140 Keypad sound . 111 Kisekae tool. 121, 354 Kisekae tool list . 354 L Last URL . 176 LCD AI. 119 Learned words . 443 Light sensor. 26, 118 Line feed . 438 Links with AV equipment. 514 List of characters assigned to keys
(NIKO-touch input method) . 503 List of characters assigned to keys
(2-touch input method) . 502 List of characters assigned to keys
(5-touch input method) . 501 List setting (Mail) . 226 Listening (i-motion) . 341 Listening (MUSIC player) . 400 Listening (Music&Video channel)
. 389 Listening (PC movie). 325 Listening (Video) . 310 Listening (1Seg) . 310 Listing (i-motion) . 341 Listing (Kisekae tool). 354 545 I i
n d e x Q u c k M a n u a l I n d e x
G
L
) Listing (PC movie) . 324 Listing (PDF). 375 Listing (Video). 347 Location history . 286 Location request menu . 288 Lock all . 134 Lock setting . 137 Low battery alarm . 44 M Mail . 198 Mail auto-receive . 213 Mail group. 233 Mail group address confirmation display . 233 Mail group list . 233 Mail list display . 233 Mail menu . 220 Mail/message ring time. 111 Mail security . 142, 224 Mail settings . 233 Mail ticker display . 310 Mail to function . 187 Main menu . 33, 34 i-mode group. 405 Mail group . 405 Setting group. 405 Tool group. 405 Main/sub sound (Video) . 348 Main/sub sound (1Seg) . 298 Maintenance services. 526 Making a call. 50 Making a call (International roaming)
. 475 Making a PushTalk call. 82 Making a videophone call . 50 Making a videophone call
(International roaming) . 475 Making/receiving a PushTalk group call . 83 546 Manner mode . 112, 113 Manner mode set . 113 Map application. 257, 279 Mark . 377 Add mark . 375 Marker stamp . 336 Media to function. 188 Melody call setting . 110 Melody effect. 109 Melody info . 352 Melody list . 351 Melody playback display . 351 Melody player . 351 Menu function . 34 Menu icon . 34 Menu icon setting . 120 Menu number selection. 35 Message composition display . 198 Message display . 234 Message display settings . 58 Message entry display . 198 Message R/F. 235 Message R/F list . 236 microSD card . 355 File name. 364 Folder configuration. 364 Inserting/removing. 355 Using with a personal computer
. 363 microSD card slot . 27 microSD file display . 356 microSD format . 362 microSD info . 363 microSD reader/writer . 363 Missed calls . 71 Mobile google map . 256 Mobile W-speed . 309 Motion tracking . 253 Movable contents . 361 Move to microSD . 361 Move to phone . 361 Movie memo . 419 Movie mode. 158 Movie type set . 162 Moving image . 338 Moving image list . 338 Moving image shoot . 158 Multi number . 455 Multiaccess . 404 Multiaccess combination patterns
. 510 Multitask . 405 Multitask combination patterns . 511 Multiwindow. 299, 300, 315 Music folder list . 394 Music info . 398 Music list . 393 Music list of a playlist . 401 MUSIC player . 392 MUSIC player playback display. 394 Music&Video channel . 384 Music&Video channel display
. 384, 386 Music&Video channel playback display . 386 My documents. 374 My menu . 177 My picture . 330 N Navigation displays . 29 NEGA/POSI mode . 169 Network search mode . 477 Network security code. 132 Network services. 445 Night mode . 76 Noise reduction . 63 Normal style . 28 Notice call cost . 420 Notification icon. 71, 125 Notify caller ID . 47 Notify of location . 285 Notify switchable mode . 78 No. of phonebook . 100 Nuisance call blocking . 451 Number of entered characters. 438 Number of protectable items . 537 Number of remaining characters
. 438 Number of savable items. 537 Number of storable items . 537 Numeric keys. 27 O Obtain i-motion movie . 193 Obtain ToruCa files . 269 Obtaining completion display
(Chaku-uta full) . 390 Obtaining completion display
(Chara-den) . 185 Obtaining completion display
(Download dictionary) . 185 Obtaining completion display
(i-motion) . 193 Obtaining completion display
(Kisekae tool). 184 Obtaining completion display
(Melody). 183 Obtaining completion display
(PC movie). 321 Obtaining completion display
(Template) . 184, 185 Obtaining completion display
(ToruCa) . 184 Off timer. 298 OFFICEED . 462 Omakase lock . 135 On hold . 68 One-push open . 28 One-push open button. 27 l a u n a M k c u Q x e d n
i I
) O
L
x e d n I Operation mode . 315 Operations during manner mode
. 113 Operator name display. 478 Options. 24, 514 Original. 114 Original animation . 338 Original animation list. 338 Osaifu-Keitai. 266 Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli . 267 Other ID list . 79 Outbox . 219 Outbox folder list . 219, 221 Outbox list . 219, 222 Out-of-service-area indication
. 30, 45 Outside camera . 27, 148 Own dictionary . 442 Own number. 48, 76, 417 Own number display . 48, 417 P Packet communication . 466 Page info . 317 Page info on/off . 376 Page layout . 376 Palette . 203 Passwords . 132 Paste . 442 Pause dial . 59 PC mode . 315 PC movie . 320 PC movie auto-play . 318 PC movie folder list . 322 PC movie list . 322 PC movie player. 322 PC movie type selection display
. 322 PDF . 374 PDF file list . 374 PDF viewer . 374 Perform remote monitoring. 80 Permission schedule . 288 Personal data lock . 136 Personal information. 417 Phone mode . 315 Phone to function . 187 Phonebook . 92 Phonebook image sending . 105 Phonebook list . 99 Photo auto display . 234 Photo mode . 155, 161 Photo-sending . 212 Pictograph list . 507 Picture . 333 Picture info . 331 Picture viewer . 330 PIM/IC security mode . 137 PIN1 code. 132 PIN1 code entry set . 133 PIN2 code. 132 Play background
. 297, 386, 390, 395, 536 Play/erase messages . 73 Play/erase videophone messages
. 73 Play mode setting (MUSIC player)
. 397 Play mode setting
(Music&Video channel). 388 Played history list . 324 Player menu display . 393 Playing back record messages. 73 Playlist (i-motion) . 343 Play back playlist . 343 Store playlist . 343 Playlist (Melody) . 351 Edit playlist . 366 Play back playlist . 351 Playlist (MUSIC player) . 400 Create playlist . 401 Play back playlist. 401 Playlist list (i-motion). 343 Playlist list (MUSIC player) . 401 PLMN setting . 478 Point ring tone. 398 Portrait rights . 22, 147 Position location . 278 Position memory (i-motion). 340 Position memory . 342 Position memory (PC movie) . 323 Position memory . 324, 325 Position memory (Video) . 346 Position memory . 348 Positioning . 332 Positioning mode . 287 Positioning tone/illumination . 287 Post view display . 155, 156, 158 Power on/off . 45 Power saver mode . 118 Prediction conversion at reply. 234 Prefer Chaku-moji. 58 Preferred device . 429 Preferred tone. 261 Prefix setting . 62 Preparation flow for data communication . 469 Preparation flow for data transfer
(OBEX communication). 468 Priority. 306 Priority order Alarm. 308, 410 Answer message. 72 Auto-sort . 231 Call receiving image . 116, 117 Illumination . 124 Nuisance call prevention . 146 Ring tone. 109 Substitute image . 74, 75 Vibrator . 110 Private menu . 416 Private menu list . 416 Private menu setting . 416 Private window . 27, 30, 32, 117 Professor Layton and the curious village . 256 Program folder list . 386 Program guide i-ppli . 300 Program info . 297, 388 Program list . 386 Protect (Bluetooth function). 429 Protect on (Mail) . 225 Protect on (MessageR/F) . 237 Protect on (Screen memo) . 181 Provide location. 284 Public mode (Drive mode). 69 Public mode (Power off) . 70 PUK (PIN unblock code) . 133 Pull down menu. 174 PushTalk . 82 PushTalk arrival act. 88 PushTalk group list . 86 PushTalk phonebook list . 85 PushTalkPlus . 82 Q QR code . 165 Quality alarm . 111 Quick manual . 550 Quick record message . 72 Quick silent . 66 Quotation marks . 235 R Radio button . 174 Radio waves reception level . 30 Rakuoku exhibition application 2
. 258 Read a map. 279 547 I i
n d e x Q u c k M a n u a l I n d e x
O
R
) Read aloud output . 407 Read aloud settings . 406 Read aloud speed . 407 Read aloud valid setting . 407 Read aloud volume. 407 Reading aloud . 406 Reason for no caller ID. 144 Receive mail/call at open . 118 Receive option . 214 Receive option setting . 214 Receive ToruCa . 274 Received address. 229 Received address list . 229 Received call list. 55 Received calls . 54 Receiving a call . 64 Receiving a call
(International roaming) . 476 Receiving a PushTalk call. 84 Receiving a videophone call. 64 Receiving a videophone call
(International roaming) . 476 Receiving display (Mail) . 234 Receiving display (ToruCa) . 274 Reception result display
. 213, 238, 245 Recharge battery display . 44 Recognition mode. 169 Recognition-failed image . 139 Recommend channel mail . 299 Reconnect signal . 62 Record Chara-den . 350 Record display set . 141 Record message list . 73 Record message setting. 71 Record program when call . 309 Record still images . 303 Record video . 303 Record voice memo . 418 Record when low battery . 309 548 Recorded file restriction . 350 Recording result . 309 Redial . 54 Redial list . 54 Referer . 319 Referer setting . 319 Register Bluetooth device . 427 Register LCS client . 287 Reject unknown . 145 Related equipment . 514 Releasing PIN lock . 134 Reload. 175, 316 Reload contents . 298, 348 Remaster (i-motion) . 341 Remaster (MUSIC player). 399 Remaster (Music&Video channel)
. 389 Remaster (PC movie) . 325 Remaster (Video) . 309 Remaster (1Seg). 309 Remote control . 455, 480 Remote control number . 295 Remote monitoring . 79 Reserve update. 532 Reset channel setting . 310 Reset last URL . 176, 318 Reset learned words . 443 Reset settings . 310, 433 Reset storage area . 311 Reset total cost&duration . 420 Reset TV settings . 311 Restrict dialing . 142 Restrictions . 142 Retouch. 337 Ring time. 144 Ring time setting (PushTalk). 88 Ring volume . 68 Roaming guidance . 480 Rotate . 337 S S icons . 68 SAR. 538 Save an i-motion movie. 194 Scanned code result display . 166 Scanned text confirmation display
. 168 Scanned text result display . 169 Scanning code display . 165 Scanning function . 534 Scanning result . 535 Scanning text display . 168 Schedule . 411 Schedule list . 412 Screen memo . 180 Screen memo folder list . 181 Screen memo list . 181 Script setting . 318 Scroll . 37, 188, 233, 317 Scroll selection . 33 SD-Audio. 392 SD other file list . 362 SD other files. 362 SD-PIM . 356 Search by i-mode . 186 Search phonebook . 98 Search phonebook display . 98 Secret code . 102 Secret data only . 141 Secret mail display . 142 Secret mode . 141 Security error. 253 Security scan function
(Scanning function) . 534 Security settings . 131, 146 Select area . 294 Select image . 77, 78 Select language . 45 Select ring tone . 108 Select storage . 271, 324, 366, 397 Selecting multiple items. 37 Self mode . 135 Send DTMF tone . 76 Send substitute images . 75 Sent address . 229 Sent address list . 229 Sent/received phonebook data list
. 105 Serial number of mobile phones/UIMs . 175 Service numbers . 453 Service selection display . 428 Service settings . 286 Services available overseas . 472 Services available with FOMA phones. 513 Session number setting
(Bluetooth function) . 432 Set as ring tone (Chaku-uta full)
. 398 Set as ring tone (Melody) . 352 Set as stand-by (Camera) . 159 Set authentications
(Bluetooth function) . 432 Set auto-update (Scanning function)
. 535 Set auto-update (Software update)
. 529 Set check new message . 234 Set connection timeout . 189 Set display . 157, 331 Set hold tone . 69 Set ippli to . 253 Set image display . 188, 318 Set imotion . 340 Set in-call arrival act . 454 Set roaming guidance . 479 Set scan. 534 Set time . 46 l a u n a M k c u Q x e d n
i I
) S
R
x e d n I Setting when closed . 67 Setting when opened . 66 Shoot with frame . 162 Shot interval . 162 Shot number. 162 Shutter sound. 161 Side keys guard . 141 Signature . 235 Simple menu . 38 Site display for the FirstPass center
. 191 Slideshow. 332 Smiley . 438, 509 SMS . 244 Compose . 244 Forward . 216 Receive. 245 Reply . 215 Save . 245 Send . 244 SMS center selection . 247 SMS composition display . 244 SMS input character. 247 SMS report request . 246 SMS settings . 246 SMS validity period . 246 Software for playing back moving images . 514 Software info . 254 Software list . 251 Software setting . 253 Change melody/image . 253 Horizontal open menu set. 253 Icon info . 253 Location usage . 254 Network set. 253 Program guide key . 254 See phonebook/history. 254 Stand-by net . 263 Stand-by set . 263 View ToruCa . 254 Software update . 528 Software update display . 531 Sound effect setting . 188, 310 Sound setting (PushTalk) . 88 Speakers . 27 Specific absorption rate . 538 Specifications . 536 SSL certificate . 190 Stand-by display . 45 Stand-by set (i-ppli) . 263 Status icon . 125 Status in the area . 478 Still image . 330 Still image list . 330 Still image shoot . 155 Store in . 162, 373 Store in PushTalk phonebook . 85 Styles . 28 Sub-address setting . 62 Substitute image. 74, 75 Substitute image answering . 64 Summer time . 47 Super silent. 114 Switch audio data . 298 Switch cameras . 75, 160 Switch display. 298, 348 Switch image display positions. 75 Switch TV/data BC . 298, 348 Switch 3G/GSM . 477 Symbol candidate list . 506 Symbol list . 504 T Template. 208 Deco-mail . 208 Decome-Anime . 209 Terminal security code . 132 Text box . 174 Text memo . 421 Text memo info . 421 Text reader . 168 Text reader list . 169 Time-out to search
(Bluetooth function). 432 Timer lock on at close. 137 Timer recording. 304 Timer recording list . 305 Title name . 333 ToDo . 415 ToruCa . 268 ToruCa file list. 270, 272 ToruCa folder list . 269 ToruCa from dataBC. 274 ToruCa settings . 274 ToruCa viewer . 269 Total calls . 419 Total calls duration . 419 Trace info . 253 Trademarks. 22 Trim away . 337 Trim for mail . 344 Trim for picture . 344 Trim imotion. 344 Troubleshooting . 515 Tune service . 299 TV sound while closed . 310 TVlink . 302 TVlink list . 302 Two-touch dial . 103 Type list . 393 U UIM (FOMA card) . 39 Insert/remove . 39 Types . 41 UIM operation . 422 UIM restrictions. 40 UIM setting . 133 Update (Pattern data) . 534 Update now . 532 Update ToruCa . 273 Upload. 186, 317 URL history . 178 URL history list . 178 USB mode setting . 363 Use phone information . 188 User authentication . 467 User certificate . 190 Request issue/download . 191 Request revocation . 192 User settings . 309 Uta-hodai. 390 V V icons . 110 Version . 535 Vibration setting (PushTalk) . 89 Vibrator . 110 Video . 345 Video list . 345 Video player . 345 Videophone record message list. 73 Videophone settings . 76 Videophone while packet . 78 View blind . 119 Viewer display . 295, 296 Visual preference . 77 Voice announce . 110 Voice call auto redial . 78 Voice clear setting. 63 Voice dial. 103 Voice dial setting . 103 Voice earphone dial . 105 Voice mail . 446, 480 Voice memo . 418 Voice memo during a call . 418 Voice recorder. 373 Voice recorder recording display. 373 549 I i
n d e x Q u c k M a n u a l I n d e x
S
V
) Voice recorder saving pre-check display . 373 Voice settings . 105 W Wake-up display . 116 Warranty . 526 Web mail. 247 Web to function. 187 White balance. 76, 161 Window open guard . 318 WMA file . 391 WMA list . 394 Work with style . 28 WORLD CALL . 60 World time watch . 47 WORLD WING . 472 Z Zoom . 76, 159, 318 Zoom in. 375, 378 Zoom out . 375, 378 Numerics 1Seg . 292 1Seg antenna . 27 184 . 48 186 . 48 2in1. 456 2in1 setting menu display . 456 3D sound . 109 3G network . 472 3GPP . 50 3G-324M. 50 64K data communication . 466 550 Quick Manual How to Use Quick Manual Cut out Quick Manual interleaved into this manual along the cutout line, and then fold it as shown below:
Take Quick Manual For Overseas Use with you for using an international roaming service (WORLD WING) overseas. How to cut Cut out Quick Manual along the cutout line. You can place a ruler on the cutout line and cut as illustrated below. pBe careful not to cut yourself when using scissors. Cutout line How to fold Fold Quick Manual along the dotted line so that the cover faces upwards as illustrated below. pTo use Quick Manual, put the first sheet on top of the second and third sheets in the order, and fold them together. Cover Cover Cover l a u n a M k c u Q x e d n
i I
) s c i r e m u N
V
x e d n I FOMA P906i Quick Manual General inquiries <DoCoMo Information Center>
(In English) 0120-005-250 (toll free) Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs.
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 151 (toll free) Can be called only from DoCoMo mobile phones. Repairs
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 113 (toll free) Can be called only from DoCoMo mobile phones.
(In Japanese only) 0120-800-000 (toll free) Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs. p Please confirm the phone number before you dial. p For various procedures, repairs, and maintenance, dial the phone numbers listed above, or visit the DoCoMo web page or i-mode site to find your nearest DoCoMo shop, and then inquire about them. DoCoMo web pagehttp://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/
i-mode siteMenu(Notice)(DoCoMo Shop)
(In Japanese only) Store from Redial, Dialed Calls, or Received Calls Adding Data to the FOMA phone Bring up the redial item, dialed call record, or received call recordiAdd to phonebook PhoneAddSelect a search method Search the Phonebook Select a destination Phonebook entryOo lYES Edit Phonebook Entries Bring up the detailed Phonebook display mSelect an item to be edited Edit the contentslYES 3
C u t o u t l i n e
Storing in Phonebook (FOMA Phone) Xo(for at least one second)Phone Enter a name. Edit a reading. GroupSelect a group. Phone numberEnter a phone number Select an icon. (up to four numbers) Mail addressEnter a mail address Select an icon. (up to three addresses) AddressEnter a zip code Enter a postal address. 1 Character Entry Character Entry Display Character Entry Mode abc. Alphabets 123 . Numerals
. Kanji/Hiragana
. Katakana 4 Location informationSelect an item. By position loc. Measures the current location and store the location information Check the location informationOo From loc. history
. Select a piece of location information from Location History and store it. Attach from image
. Store the location information from an image Select a folderSelect an image. BirthdayEnter a birthdayON or OFF MemoEnter a memo. ImageSelect an item. Select image . Store a still image in Data Box. Shoot image . Store a still image shot by the camera. Memory No. Enter a three-digit memory numberl 2 Selecting Character Input Method mSettingsOther settings Character input methodInput mode Put a check mark for Mode 1 (5-touch) Put a check mark for Mode 2 (2-touch) Put a check mark for Mode 3 (NIKO-touch) lSelect the mode you use with priority. Entering and Enter a characterPress a several times. Entering and Press s several times. Switching Alphabet (abc), Numerals (123), Kanji/Hiragana (), and Katakana () Press l several times. 5 Entering Pictographs iPictograph/symbolsPictograph Select a pictograph. Entering Symbols iPictograph/symbolsSymbols Select a symbol. Line Feed Press c. Entering a Space iPictograph/symbolsSpace Deleting Characters Use Mo to move the cursorr Switching to Uppercase/Lowercase Enter a characterd Enter in a Text Memo Bringing up the Character Entry (Edit) display mStationeryText memo Select <Not recorded>Press l a few times to switch to Kanji/Hiragana input mode. Entering Hiragana characters <Mode 1>
Press 4 once and Vo once. Press 4 once and a once. Press 5 five times. Press 2 once. Press 3 twice. Converting the Characters Use Co to move the cursor to Bo Use Mo to highlight and press Oo Fix the rest of characters in the same way. Camera Shooting a Still Image cOoOo Continuous Shooting cccOo Select a still image and press cOo This is the procedure to select and save one still image for continuous shooting. Shooting a Moving Image ccOoOoOo 6 7 8 1Seg Auto Channel Setting m1SegChannel setting Auto channel settingYESYES Enter a title. Select Area m1SegChannel settingSelect area Select an areaSelect a prefectureYES Channel List m1SegChannel listSelect a channel list. Watching a 1Seg Program c(for at least one second) Music Playback Playback by Music&Video Channel mMUSICMusic&Video Channel Select a program. or mData boxMusic&Video Channel Downloaded program or Saved program Select a program. Playback by MUSIC Player p(for at least one second)All tracks Select a music file. Making and Receiving a Videophone Call Making a Videophone Call Enter the other partys phone numberl Press h to end the call after talking. Receiving a Videophone Call The ring tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator flickersd, Oo or m Press h to end the call after talking. If you answer by pressing d or Oo, the camera image is sent to the other party. If you answer by pressing m, the substitute image is sent to the other party. Switching to Hands-free During a call, dialing, or connectingd
e n i l t u o t u C
9 10 11 Attach Files Picture/Melody/imotion/ToruCa/PDF/
Phonebook/Schedule/ToDo/Bookmark/
Document/Other Bring up the Message Composition display Select the attachment field Select a file type to be attached Select a folderSelect a file. Selecting methods differ depending on the file. Receive i-mode Mail
(white) blinks The Reception Result display appears Select Mail Select an i-mode mail message to be displayed. Check New Message l(for at least one second) i-mode Mail Compose and Send i-mode Mail Address field Subject field Attachment field Text field ll Select the address fieldSelect an entering methodEnter or select an address. Select the subject fieldEnter a subject. Select the text fieldEnter text. Send a mail by pressing l After sending, press Oo.
C u t o u t l i n e
12 13 Other Mail Functions Replying Select or bring up a mail message to be replied iReply/forward Rep. w/ i-mode mail, Rep. w/ Deco-Anime, or Reply with quoteSelect the text field Enter textlAfter sending, press Oo. Forwarding Select or bring up a mail message to be forwardediReply/forwardForward Select the address field Select an entering method Enter or select an addressl After sending, press Oo. Function List Menu Function name Inbox Outbox Draft Compose message Create new Decome-Anime Template Web mail Check new message Compose SMS Check new SMS Chat mail Receive option Mail settings SMS settings Area mail settings iMenu Bookmark Mail i-mode 14 Screen memo Last URL Go to location Message R/F i-Channel Check new message Operate certificate i-mode settings Full Browser Software list(phone) ippli(microSD) ippli info ippli settings Sound 13 50 30 64 51 68 Select ring tone Ring volume Keypad sound Melody effect Headset usage setting Mail/Msg. ring time i-mode i-ppli Settings 15 16 17 Settings Settings Display 56 70 86 57 52 63 93 66 15 36 Display setting Backlight View blind Color theme setting Menu icon setting Horizontal open menu Private menu setting Desktop icon Private window Font Character size Select language Recv.mail/call at open Image quality LCD AI Icons Illumination 89 All illum. setting Illumination Illumination in talk 18 Disp. PH-book image Disp. call/receive No. Ring time Info notice setting V-phone while packet Auto answer setting Volume Setting when closed Set hold tone Voice clear setting Noise reduction Quality alarm Reconnect signal 90 65 94 Talk 18 76 75 77 PushTalk Auto answer setting Ring time setting Hands-free w/ PushTalk PushTalk arrival act Sound setting Vibration setting 21 Miss/unread illum. Music&Video ch illum. Illum. when folded Hourly illumination MUSIC illumination Bluetooth illumination IC card illumination PushTalk illumination Side key illumination Check settings Settings Kisekae Lock/Security Self mode Lock all Personal data lock IC card lock Secret mode Secret data only Keypad dial lock Reject unknown Call setting w/o ID 19 40 41 10 Videophone Visual preference Select image Hands-free w/ V. phone Voice call auto redial Remote monitoring Notify switchable mode FeelMail Disp. /play new one Disp. /play in history Settings Network setting Prefix setting Intl roaming Intl dial assist Status in the area Melody Call setting Other settings Work with style Side keys guard Character input method Battery 35 22 29 Change security code UIM setting Scanning function Lock setting Call time/cost 61 60 Call data Reset total cost&dura. Notice call cost CLR max cost icon Settings Clock 31 Set time World time watch Summer time Auto power ON/OFF Alarm setting Incoming call 54 20 58 84 23 46 16 Vibrator Manner mode set Answer setting Setting when opened Record display set 20 Pause dial Sub-address setting Headset mic. setting Headset switch to call Voice settings USB mode setting Reset settings Initialize Software update My picture MUSIC Music&Video Channel imotion Melody My documents Kisekae Tool Chara-den PC Movie 1Seg Document viewer SD other files 23 Settings Data box
e n i l t u o t u C
LifeKit Service Osaifu-
Keitai
C u t o u t l i n e
79 55 17 Bar code reader Receive Ir data SD-PIM Camera Bluetooth GPS Text reader Rec. msg/voice memo Voice recorder Data Security Service Caller ID notification Voice mail Call waiting Call forwarding Nuis. call blocking Caller ID request 2in1 setting Multi number Arrival call act 24 IC card content DCMX ToruCa IC card lock set. Settings Check IC owner Change IC owner Search by i-mode Public Mode (Drive Mode) a(for at least one second) Manner Mode During standby/During a call s(for at least one second) Set in-call arrival act Remote control Dual network English guidance Set Roaming guidance Additional service Service numbers OFFICEED Chaku-moji Add to phonebook Search phonebook UIM operation PushTalk phonebook Dialed/recv. calls Own number Group setting Restrictions Phonebook settings No. of phonebook Service Phonebook 24 0 26 Stationery MUSIC 1Seg 44 45 95 42 85 38 Alarm Schedule ToDo Text memo Calculator Guide Common phrase/dic. MUSIC Player Music&Video Channel Activate 1Seg Program guide Book program list Timer recording list Recording result TVlink Channel list Channel setting User settings 25 26 Network Services Voice Mail Service Activating mServiceVoice mailActivateYES YESEnter a ring time (seconds). Deactivating mServiceVoice mailDeactivateYES Playing Back Messages mServiceVoice mailPlay messages YESOperate following the voice guidance. Call Waiting Service Activating mServiceCall waitingActivateYES Deactivating mServiceCall waitingDeactivateYES Answering an Incoming Call during a Call A call comes in during a calld Each time you press d, you can switch the parties you talk with. 27 28 29 Call Forwarding Service Activating mServiceCall forwardingActivate Register fwd numberEnter the phone number of the forwarding destination Set ring timeEnter a ring time (seconds) ActivateYES Deactivating mServiceCall forwardingDeactivate YES Services Available with FOMA Phone Phone number Major Icons Available service Directory assistance service
(Charges apply: guidance fee + call fee) Listed phone numbers only can be given. Telegrams (Telegram charges apply) Time check (Charges apply) Weather forecast (Charges apply) Emergency calls to police Emergency calls to fire station and ambulance Emergency calls for accidents at sea Disaster messaging service
(Charge apply) Collect calls
(Charges apply: guidance fee + call fee)
(No prefix) 104
(No prefix) 115
(No prefix) 117 City code of the desired area 177
(No prefix) 110
(No prefix) 119
(No prefix) 118
(No prefix) 171
(No prefix) 106
: Battery level (estimate)
: Radio waves reception level (estimate)
: During Self Mode
(pink): Unread i-mode mail or SMS messages exist.
(yellow): Unread Messages R/F exist 30 31 32
(pink): i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center.
: While Vibrator is set to other than OFF
(yellow): Messages R/F are held at the i-mode Center.
: i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center
(See page 20)
: While Ring Volume is set to Silent or Mail/Msg. Ring Time is set to OFF
(While Receive Option Setting is set to ON).
: During Manner Mode (See page 27)
: During Lock All
: During Personal Data Lock
: During Keypad Dial Lock
: During Secret Mode or Secret Data Only
: During IC Card Lock
: While Timer Lock ON At Close is set
: During Public Mode (Drive Mode)
(See page 27)
: While Side Keys Guard is set to ON
(See page 22)
<Emergency Contact Number for Loss Etc.>
Omakase Lock Omakase Lock is a pay service. However, you are not charged if you apply for this service at the same time as applying for the suspension of the use or during the suspension. Setting/Releasing Omakase Lock 0120-524-360 Business hours: 24 hours Other Emergency Calls Phone number Phone number Phone number p Please confirm the phone number before you dial. 33 34 35
e n i l t u o t u C
FOMA P906i Failures encountered overseas Quick Manual For Overseas Use Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas
<DoCoMo Information Center> (available 24 hours a day) pFrom a DoCoMo mobile phone International call access code for the country you stay (Table 1)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc.
-81-3-5366-3114*
(toll free) If you use P906i, you should dial the number +81-3-5366-3114
(to enter +, press and hold the 0 key for at least one second). pFrom a landline phone
<Universal number>
International prefix number for the universal number (Table 2)
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay.
-800-0120-0151*
See page 16 and page 20 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1) and international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2).
<Network Technical Operation Center> (available 24 hours a day) pFrom a DoCoMo mobile phone International call access code for the country you stay (Table 1)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc.
-81-3-6718-1414*
(toll free) If you use P906i, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414
(to enter +, press and hold the 0 key for at least one second). pFrom a landline phone
<Universal number>
International prefix number for the universal number (Table 2)
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay.
-800-5931-8600*
See page 16 and page 20 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1) and international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2). p If you lose your FOMA phone or have it stolen, immediately take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the FOMA phone. p If the FOMA phone you purchased malfunctions, bring your FOMA phone to a repair counter specified by DoCoMo after you return to Japan. Preparing for Overseas Use Setting of i-mode Setting in Japan iiMenuEnglish iMenuOptions International Settings i-mode services SettingsSelect Yes Enter your i-mode passwordSelect Setting Overseas iiMenuEnglish iMenuOptions International Settings i-mode services SettingsSelect Yes Enter your i-mode passwordSelect Remote Control Setting in Japan mServiceRemote controlActivate YES Setting Overseas mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Remote control (Int.)YES Operate following the voice guidance. Set Time mSettingsClockSet time Auto time adjust ON 1 2 Communication Systems and Available Services Communication Service Voice call Videophone call i-mode i-mode mail SMS i-Channel Packet communication by connecting with a personal computer
: Available : Not available p The GPS functions and 64K data communications are not GSM GPRS 3G Setting a Search Method of Carrier mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Network search modeSelect an item. Auto . Automatically re-connect to another carrier. The setting is completed. Manual. Connects manually to the listed carrier. Network re-search
. When set to Auto, automatically switches to an available carrier. The setting is completed. When set to Manual, displays the list of carriers. Select a carrier. available overseas. 3 4 5
C u t o u t l i n e
Selecting a Carrier to Preferentially Connect to mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming PLMN settingiPLMN list select Select a carrierOoSelect a network type lYES Displaying the Carrier on the Stand-by Display mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Operator name display Display ON or Display OFF Display The type of network you are using is displayed. Setting after Returning to Japan After you return to Japan, the FOMA network is automatically searched and connected. p When you have set to switch networks manually mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Network search modeManualDoCoMo Making/Receiving a Call Make a Call to Outside the Country You Stay (Including Japan) Making an International Call to Japan Using Phonebook Bring up the detailed Phonebook display d/OoDial Press l to make an international videophone call. Making an International Call Using +
0(for at least one second)Enter Country code - Area code (City code) - Destination phone numberd/Oo Press l to make an international videophone call. Enter 81 as a country code when you make an international call to Japan. When the area code (city code) begins with 0, enter it except for the 0. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy. 6 7 8 Make a Call to a Phone in the Country You Stay Enter a destination phone numberd/Oo Press l to make a videophone call. Making a Call Using Phonebook Bring up the detailed Phonebook display d/OoOriginal phone No. Make a Call to a Person Staying Overseas and Using WORLD WING When you make a call to a person who is internationally roaming, make the call in the same way as to make international calls to Japan even if he/she is in the country you stay. Receive a Call Press d/Oo when a call comes in.
(For videophone call, press d/Oo/m.) Using Network Services To use network services overseas, you need to set Remote control beforehand. Set Roaming Guidance p You need to set this function in Japan. mServiceSet Roaming guidance Call Barring p This setting might not be available depending on the overseas carrier. mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Call barring Voice Mail (International) mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Voice mail (Int.) Call Forwarding (International) mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Call forwarding (Int.) Roaming Guidance (International) mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Roaming guidance (Int.) Caller ID Request mSettingsNetwork settingIntl roaming Caller ID req. (Int.) 9 10 11
e n i l t u o t u C
Country Codes for Major Countries Use the following country codes when you make international calls or when you set Intl Dial Assist.
(As of March 2008) Country code 61 32 55 1 86 420 45 358 33 Service area Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Republic Denmark Finland France 12 Service area
C u t o u t l i n e
Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States of America Vietnam p For the code for the countries other than listed in Country code 90 971 44 1 84 the table, or for details, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page. Service area Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxembourg Macau Malaysia Monaco Netherlands Country code 49 30 852 36 91 62 353 39 352 853 60 377 31 13 International Call Access Codes for Major Countries (Table 1)
(As of March 2008) Service area Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Access code 0011 00 0041/0014 011 00 00 00 00 00 00 Service area New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand 14 Service area Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxembourg Macau Malaysia Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Country code 64 47 63 48 351 7 65 82 34 46 41 886 66 Access code 00 001 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 16 17 Service area Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey 18 Service area Finland France Germany Hong Kong Hungary Ireland Israel Italy Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands New Zealand Norway 21 Access code 00 00 00 00 810 001 001 00 00 00 002 001 00 International prefix number 990 00 00 001 00 00 014 00 00 00 00 00 00 Service area United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States of America Vietnam Access code 00 00 011 00 International Prefix Numbers for the Universal Number (Table 2) Service area Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada China Colombia Denmark
(As of March 2008) International prefix number 00 0011 00 00 0021 00 011 00 009 00 19 20 Service area Peru Philippines Portugal Singapore South Africa South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand United Kingdom United States of America 22 International prefix number 00 00 00 001 09 001 00 00 00 00 001 00 011 Inquiries For lost, stolen, and cost settlement, or malfunction of your FOMA phone overseas, refer to Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas on cover page of Quick Manual For Overseas Use, or Failures encountered overseas on page 1. p You need to add the code from International Call Access Code (Table 1) that is assigned to the country you stay or International Prefix Number for the Universal Number (Table 2) to the head of each phone number for inquiries. p Note that, in many cases, the universal number may not be used from a mobile phone, public phone, or hotel phone, etc. 23
e n i l t u o t u C
Access DoCoMo e-site for procedures to change your address or billing plan and for request of Information materials. From i-mode From PC Menu & (Charges & Applications/Setting)
[Application procedure (DoCoMo e-site)]
My DoCoMo (http://www.mydocomo.com/) (e) [Application procedure (DoCoMo e-site)]
Packet communication charges free
(e) You will need your network ID to access e-site from i-mode. No packet communication charges are incurred when accessing e-site from i-mode. Accessing from overseas will incur chages. You will need your DoCoMo ID/password to access e-site from PC. If you do not have or you have forgotten your network ID or DoCoMo ID/password, contact the DoCoMo Information Center listed on the back cover of this manual. DoCoMo e-site may not be available depending upon the content of your subscription. You may not be able to access some e-site services due to system maintenance, etc. Do not forget your FOMA phone ... or your manners!
In the following cases, be certain to turn off the power. Where use is prohibited Be sure to turn off the power to your FOMA phone in airplanes and in hospitals. Persons with electronic medical equipment are in places other than the actual wards. Make sure you have the power switched off even if you are in a lobby or waiting room. When in crowded places such as packed trains, where you could be near a person with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator The implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator operation can be affected by radio emissions from the FOMA phone. In the following cases, be certain to set Public Mode. While driving Using the mobile phone in your hand while driving is subject to punishment. If you answer a call out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you will call him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe, and then dial. When in theaters, movie theaters, museums, and similar venues If you use your FOMA phone where you are supposed to be quiet, you will disturb those around you. Adjust the volume of your voice and ring tone according to where you are. If you use the FOMA phone in quiet places such as restaurants and hotel lobbies, keep the volume of your voice and other sounds down. Do not block thoroughfares when using the FOMA phone. These functions help you keep your manners in public. Handy functions are available such as for setting the response to incoming calls and setting the tones to silent. Public Mode (Drive Mode/Power Off) (Page 69 and page 70) The guidance that you are currently driving or in a place where you should refrain from using a mobile phone or the guidance that you are in a place where you should turn off the power is played back to the caller. Then the call is disconnected. Record Message function (Page 71) Callers can record a message when you cannot come to the phone. Vibrator (Page 110) When the vibrator is set, it vibrates for incoming calls. Manner Mode/Super Silent/Original Manner (Page 112) In Manner Mode or Super Silent, the keypad sound, ring tone and other sounds from the FOMA phone are silenced. In Original Manner, you can set whether or not to activate the Record Message function, and can change the settings for the vibrator and ring tone. The shutter sound cannot be silenced. Optional services are also available, such as Voice Mail Service
(page 446) and Call Forwarding Service (page 450). Respect the privacy. Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. This manual was produced in such a way as to allow easy recycling. Please recycle this manual when it is no longer needed. General inquiries
<DoCoMo Information Center>
Repairs
(In English) 0120-005-250
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix)151
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix)113
(In Japanese only) 0120-800-000
(toll free) Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs. Please confirm the phone number before you dial. For various procedures, repairs, and maintenance, dial the phone numbers listed above, or visit the DoCoMo web page or i-mode site to find your nearest DoCoMo shop, and then
(toll free) Can be called only from DoCoMo mobile phones.
(toll free) Can be called only from DoCoMo mobile phones.
(toll free) Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs. inquire about them. DoCoMo web page http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/
i-mode site Menu (Notice) (DoCoMo Shop) (In Japanese only) Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas
<DoCoMo Information Center> (available 24 hours a day) Failures encounterd overseas
<Network Technical Operation Center> (available 24 hours a day) From a DoCoMo mobile phone International call access code for the country you stay (Table 1)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc. If you use P906i, you should dial the number +81-3-5366-3114
(to enter +, press and hold the 0 key for at least one second).
---5366-3114* (toll free) From a DoCoMo mobile phone International call access code for the country you stay (Table 1)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc. If you use P906i, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414
(to enter +, press and hold the 0 key for at least one second).
---6718-1414* (toll free) From a landline phone Universal number International prefix number for the universal number (Table 2)
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay. See page 474 and page 475 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1) and
--0120-0151*
international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2). From a landline phone Universal number International prefix number for the universal number (Table 2)
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay. See page 474 and page 475 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1) and
--5931-8600*
international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2). If you lose your FOMA phone or have it stolen, immediately take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the FOMA phone. If the FOMA phone you purchased malfunctions, bring your FOMA phone to a repair counter specified by DoCoMo after you return to Japan. Do not forget your mobile phone ... or your manners!
When using your mobile phone in a public place, do not forget to show common courtesy and consideration for others around you. Sales: NTT DoCoMo Group NTT DoCoMo Hokkaido, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Kansai, Inc. Manufacturer: Panasonic Mobile Communications Co., Ltd. NTT DoCoMo Tohoku, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Chugoku, Inc. NTT DoCoMo, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Shikoku, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Tokai, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Kyushu, Inc. NTT DoCoMo Hokuriku, Inc. To prevent damage to the environment, bring used battery packs to an NTT DoCoMo service counter, an NTT DoCoMo agent or a recycle center. This manual is printed using an ink based on soy bean oil. April 08 (Ver.1.0) 3TR100045AAA F0408F0 - A
1 2 3 | Label Detail | ID Label/Location Info | 77.19 KiB |
FCC ID Label and Location FCC ID: UCE208006A
- FCC ID label
- Label location Operator Name Model Name Color ID for JATE ID for TELEC Production Year & Month Bar Code of IMEI IMEI (Production Serial Number)
(Rear View) Battery Area :
Battery is placed in rear side of the phone. Label Area :
This outline drawing shows the label in position within the battery compartment. The label is visible to the user at the point of sale prior to fitting the USIM
(FOMA Card), battery pack and cover.
1 2 3 | Agency Form | Cover Letter(s) | 77.34 KiB |
Panasonic a Meapssarts Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Limited 0" March 2008 Telecommunication Certification Body RFI! Global Services Ltd. Pavilion A Ashwood Park Basingstoke Hampshire RG23 8BG United Kingdom To whom it may concern This is to certify that Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd
(PMCDE) authorises RFI Global Services Ltd. to act on our behalf for the application of the following model to RFI Global Services Ltd. Telecommunication Certification Body. Viode!l Number EB-4019 Marketing Name NTT DoCoMo P906i We certify that we are not subject to a denial of Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862 because of a conviction for possession or distribution of a controlled substance. See 47 CFR 1.2002(b) for the definition of a "party" for these purposes. Yours sincerel Mike Hargreaves Principal Engineer, Regulations and Approvals Panasonic Mobile Communications (PMCDE) Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Limited 2 Gables Way, Colthrop, Thatcham, Berkshire RG19 4ZB Tel: +44 (0) 1635 871466 Fax: +44 (0) 1635 871345 Danason VAi Reg No. GB/65338211 Registered in England No. 4188880
1 2 3 | Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 114.75 KiB |
Panasonic Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Limited 20th March 2008 Telecommunication Certification Body Radio Frequency Investigation Ltd. Ewhurst Park Ramsdell Basingstoke Hampshire RG26 5RQ England Subject: Certification Application FCC ID: UCE208006A It is requested that the following information is held Confidential on behalf of Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd., on the confidentiality basis outlined below:
1. Permanent Confidentiality (FCC Rules Part 0.459 refers). Exhibit Category Exhibit Filenames Schematic Diagrams Parts list (BOM) Block Diagrams Operational Descriptions **
EF80352C - Key FPC Schematic.pdf EF80353E - IrDA_Rec FPC Schematic.pdf EF80360B - Hinge FPC Schematic.pdf EG81120E - Upper PCB Schematic.pdf EG81128D - Main PCB Schematic.pdf EG81133D - Sub PCB Schematic.pdf EF80352C Key FPC BOM.pdf EF80353E IrDA_Rec FPC BOM.pdf EF80360B Hinge FPC BOM.pdf EG81120E UpperPCB BOM.pdf EG81128D Main PCB BOM.pdf EG81133D Sub PCB BOM.pdf P906i BT Block Diagram.pdf P906i W-CDMA_GSM RF Block Diagram.pdf P906i Block Diagram - RFID(FeliCa).pdf P906i Bluetooth Operational Description.pdf P906i GSM RF Product Spec.pdf P906i FeliCa (RF-ID) Operational Description.pdf Internal photographs *
Tune up Information Internal Photo.pdf RF Cal Spec.pdf Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Limited 2 Gables Way, Colthrop, Thatcham, Berkshire RG19 4ZB Tel: +44 (0) 1635 871466 Fax: +44 (0) 1635 871345 VAT Reg No. GB765338211 Web: www.panasonicmobile.com Registered in England No. 4188880
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-03-31 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | Original Equipment |
2 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||
3 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2008-03-31
|
||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Panasonic Mobile Communications Co. Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0015152606
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
600 Saedo-cho
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Yokohama City, 224 8539
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Yokohama City, N/A 224 8539
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
j******@rfi-global.com
|
||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
1 2 3 |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
UCE
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
208006A
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
H******** S****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Mr
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
+81 5********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
+81 5********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
s******@jp.panasonic.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Panasonic Mobile Communications Development Europe
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M******** H****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
2. Gables Way
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Thatcham
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Basingstoke, RG19 4ZB
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Thatcham, RG19 4ZB
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United Kingdom
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
44 16********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
44 16********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
m******@eu.panasonic.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 06/23/2008 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | |||||
1 2 3 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth and RFID | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S Territories. This filing is only applicable for 1900 MHz PCS operations. Power Output is EIRP. SAR compliance for body-worn operating conditions is limited to the specific configuration tested for this filing. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Head:0.388W/kg; Body-worn 0.453W/kg | ||||
1 2 3 | Power out is EIRP | |||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
RFI Global Services Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
A******** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
44-12********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
44-12********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
a******@rfi-global.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 24E | 1850.20000000 | 1909.80000000 | 0.6100000 | 60.0000000000 Hz | 245KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0009000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC